UPSC Current Affairs – May 2025 Monthly Compilation
infopmiasacademy
2 views
184 slides
Sep 24, 2025
Slide 1 of 209
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
About This Presentation
UPSC Current Affairs – May 2025 brings together the most relevant updates for aspirants, highlighting national policies, global developments, economic milestones, environmental concerns, and social issues from the month. This monthly roundup is tailored to support Prelims and Mains preparation wit...
Slide Content
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
1
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
1
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
2
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
S.NO. PARTICULARS PAGE NO.
GS 1
11
ART AND CULTURE
11
1. Pushkar Kumbh
11
2. 58th Jnanpith Award
11
3. Rajon ki Baoli
11
4. PM Modi to Launch Revamped Manuscripts Mission
12
5. Shirui Lily Festival
12
6. Significance of Buddhist Teachings in Modern World
13
7. Agamas
14
8. Gond and Madhubani Art
15
9. Saraswati Pushkaralu
15
HISTORY
16
1. 50 Years of End of the Vietnam War
16
2. Importance of Ahilyabai Holkar
17
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY
18
1. Early Onset of Indian Monsoon
18
2. Invisible Scars: Threat of Gully Erosion
19
3. Magnetic Flip-Flop
20
4. Birth Rates in Delhi, Kerala, and T.N. Declining at Twice the
Rate of National Average
21
5. Sagarmatha Sambaad
23
6. Suez Canal offers 15% Discount to Cargo Ships
24
7. Jarosite
25
8. Maths of How India’s Coastline Lengthened without
Gaining Land
25
2
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
S.NO. PARTICULARS PAGE NO.
GS 1
11
ART AND CULTURE
11
1. Pushkar Kumbh
11
2. 58th Jnanpith Award
11
3. Rajon ki Baoli
11
4. PM Modi to Launch Revamped Manuscripts Mission
12
5. Shirui Lily Festival
12
6. Significance of Buddhist Teachings in Modern World
13
7. Agamas
14
8. Gond and Madhubani Art
15
9. Saraswati Pushkaralu
15
HISTORY
16
1. 50 Years of End of the Vietnam War
16
2. Importance of Ahilyabai Holkar
17
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY
18
1. Early Onset of Indian Monsoon
18
2. Invisible Scars: Threat of Gully Erosion
19
3. Magnetic Flip-Flop
20
4. Birth Rates in Delhi, Kerala, and T.N. Declining at Twice the
Rate of National Average
21
5. Sagarmatha Sambaad
23
6. Suez Canal offers 15% Discount to Cargo Ships
24
7. Jarosite
25
8. Maths of How India’s Coastline Lengthened without
Gaining Land
25
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
3
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
9. Madden-Julian Oscillation Helped Trigger the Early Onset
of the Monsoon
26
PLACES
27
1. New Caledonia
27
SOCIETY
28
1. Disproportionate Burden on Women in Risk Society
28
GS 2
29
EDUCATION
29
1. Govt School Enrolment Drops in 23 States
29
2. Experiential Learning
30
GOVERNMENT POLICY AND INTERVENTION
31
1. Supreme Court Flags Concerns Over Free Ration
Distribution
31
2. Mismatch Between MGNREGS Coverage and Delivery
32
3. Financial Fraud Risk Indicator (FRI)
Syllabus: GS2/Government Policy and Intervention;
33
HEALTH
34
1. India’s latest MMR Shows a Declining Trend
34
2. Shingles Vaccine
36
3. WHO Adopts Pandemic AgreemenT
36
4. India Awarded with Certificate of Elimination of Trachoma
39
5. Sugar Boards in Schools
39
6. Cholera
40
7. Zoonotic Outbreaks
40
INDIAN POLITY & GOVERNANCE
40
3
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
9. Madden-Julian Oscillation Helped Trigger the Early Onset
of the Monsoon
26
PLACES
27
1. New Caledonia
27
SOCIETY
28
1. Disproportionate Burden on Women in Risk Society
28
GS 2
29
EDUCATION
29
1. Govt School Enrolment Drops in 23 States
29
2. Experiential Learning
30
GOVERNMENT POLICY AND INTERVENTION
31
1. Supreme Court Flags Concerns Over Free Ration
Distribution
31
2. Mismatch Between MGNREGS Coverage and Delivery
32
3. Financial Fraud Risk Indicator (FRI)
Syllabus: GS2/Government Policy and Intervention;
33
HEALTH
34
1. India’s latest MMR Shows a Declining Trend
34
2. Shingles Vaccine
36
3. WHO Adopts Pandemic AgreemenT
36
4. India Awarded with Certificate of Elimination of Trachoma
39
5. Sugar Boards in Schools
39
6. Cholera
40
7. Zoonotic Outbreaks
40
INDIAN POLITY & GOVERNANCE
40
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
4
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
1. Cabinet Approves Caste Enumeration in Upcoming Census
40
2. Right To Digital Access Part of Article 21
42
3. SC upholds courts’ power to modify arbitral awards under
limited circumstances
43
4. President Stresses On Mediation To Resolve Conflicts
43
5. Appointment to Central Bureau of Investigation (CBI)
45
6. Supreme Court Publishes Assets of 21 Judges
46
7. Bureaucracy in India
47
8. Sutlej-Yamuna Link (SYL) Canal
49
9. SC Rules Rohingya Refugees Subject to Foreigners Act
51
10. CJI Forwards ‘In-House’ Panel Probe Report To President
52
11. 10 Years of Three Jan Suraksha Schemes
53
12. Disqualification of MPs
54
13. Total Fertility Rate Remains Constant at 2.0 in 2021
56
14. B.R. Gavai Sworn in as Chief Justice of India
57
15. Presidential Reference to SC on Timeline to Act on State
Bills
58
16. Sikkim’s 50th Statehood Day
59
17. PM E-Drive
60
18. Cyberbullying & Legal Framework in India
61
19. SC Direction to Take Back Forest Land Illegally Allotted to
Private Entities
61
20. United States Birthright Citizenship
62
21. Follow OROP Principle for All Retired HC Judges: SC
63
22. SC Mandates 3-Year Practice for Judicial Services
Examinations
63
23. GeM Celebrates 8th Incorporation Day
66
24. K. Veeraswami vs Union of India Judgment
68
25. Jal Jeevan Scheme: MPs Flag ‘Irregularities’ 68
4
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
1. Cabinet Approves Caste Enumeration in Upcoming Census
40
2. Right To Digital Access Part of Article 21
42
3. SC upholds courts’ power to modify arbitral awards under
limited circumstances
43
4. President Stresses On Mediation To Resolve Conflicts
43
5. Appointment to Central Bureau of Investigation (CBI)
45
6. Supreme Court Publishes Assets of 21 Judges
46
7. Bureaucracy in India
47
8. Sutlej-Yamuna Link (SYL) Canal
49
9. SC Rules Rohingya Refugees Subject to Foreigners Act
51
10. CJI Forwards ‘In-House’ Panel Probe Report To President
52
11. 10 Years of Three Jan Suraksha Schemes
53
12. Disqualification of MPs
54
13. Total Fertility Rate Remains Constant at 2.0 in 2021
56
14. B.R. Gavai Sworn in as Chief Justice of India
57
15. Presidential Reference to SC on Timeline to Act on State
Bills
58
16. Sikkim’s 50th Statehood Day
59
17. PM E-Drive
60
18. Cyberbullying & Legal Framework in India
61
19. SC Direction to Take Back Forest Land Illegally Allotted to
Private Entities
61
20. United States Birthright Citizenship
62
21. Follow OROP Principle for All Retired HC Judges: SC
63
22. SC Mandates 3-Year Practice for Judicial Services
Examinations
63
23. GeM Celebrates 8th Incorporation Day
66
24. K. Veeraswami vs Union of India Judgment
68
25. Jal Jeevan Scheme: MPs Flag ‘Irregularities’ 68
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
5
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
26. Amrit Bharat Station Scheme
69
27. Cauvery Water Management Authority (CWMA)
69
28. Rising North East Investors Summit 2025
70
29. Supreme Court Needs to Change from Being a Chief Justice-
Centric Court
72
30. NITI Aayog’s Governing Council
73
31. Panchayat Advancement Index (PAI) Version 2.0
73
32. Government mulls 15-year Stay Requirement for Ladakh
Domicile Tag
74
33. Importance of the Deputy Speaker in Lok Sabha
75
34. Appraisal of CSSs and CSs Ahead of the 16th Finance
Commission Cycle
77
35. Swachh Survekshan Grameen (SSG) 2025
78
INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS
79
1. India’s Growing Engagement in Arctic Region
79
2. India–UK Free Trade Agreement (FTA) Negotiations
80
3. Free Trade Agreement (FTA) Signed Between UK-India 81
4. Pakistan-Türkiye Nexus & India Stands
82
5. IMF Loan to Pakistan
84
6. India rolls over $50 million worth Treasury Bill to help
Maldives
86
7. Colombia Joins Belt and Road Initiative
87
8. US Remittance Tax Plan Raises Concerns
88
9. Chabahar port & INSTC
89
10. India and the European Union (EU)
90
11. India’s Relationship with Türkiye and Azerbaijan
91
12. US Passes Take It Down Act
92
13. India & Russia Eye Collaboration on Nuclear Energy and
Advanced Technologies
93
5
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
26. Amrit Bharat Station Scheme
69
27. Cauvery Water Management Authority (CWMA)
69
28. Rising North East Investors Summit 2025
70
29. Supreme Court Needs to Change from Being a Chief Justice-
Centric Court
72
30. NITI Aayog’s Governing Council
73
31. Panchayat Advancement Index (PAI) Version 2.0
73
32. Government mulls 15-year Stay Requirement for Ladakh
Domicile Tag
74
33. Importance of the Deputy Speaker in Lok Sabha
75
34. Appraisal of CSSs and CSs Ahead of the 16th Finance
Commission Cycle
77
35. Swachh Survekshan Grameen (SSG) 2025
78
INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS
79
1. India’s Growing Engagement in Arctic Region
79
2. India–UK Free Trade Agreement (FTA) Negotiations
80
3. Free Trade Agreement (FTA) Signed Between UK-India 81
4. Pakistan-Türkiye Nexus & India Stands
82
5. IMF Loan to Pakistan
84
6. India rolls over $50 million worth Treasury Bill to help
Maldives
86
7. Colombia Joins Belt and Road Initiative
87
8. US Remittance Tax Plan Raises Concerns
88
9. Chabahar port & INSTC
89
10. India and the European Union (EU)
90
11. India’s Relationship with Türkiye and Azerbaijan
91
12. US Passes Take It Down Act
92
13. India & Russia Eye Collaboration on Nuclear Energy and
Advanced Technologies
93
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
6
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
14. Virtual Capacity Building Session on Digital Transformation
in BRICS
94
15. Financial Action Task Force (FATF)
95
16. India-Maldives 2nd High Level Core Group (HLCG) Meeting
96
17. Push for Russia-India-China Revival
98
18. India and New Zealand: Strengthening Defence and
Security Ties
99
GS 3
100
AGRICULTURE
100
1. Genome-Edited Seeds to Mark Beginning of Second Green
Revolution
100
2. Agriphotovoltaics: Integrating Solar Energy with
Agriculture
101
3. Why Farmers Prefer Growing Rice and Wheat
102
4. Why is the Agriculture Sector Missing from India’s FTAs?
104
5. Bananas Cultivation
105
6. Promotion of Organic Farming
106
7. Viksit Krishi Sankalp Abhiyan
107
DEFENCE
108
1. Psychological Warfare
108
2. Gallantry Awards
109
3. Theatre Commands: A New Era of Military Reforms in India
110
4. Government Notifies Inter-services Organisations
(Command, Control and Discipline) Rules, 2025
112
ENVIRONMENT
113
1. India Opposes Inclusion of Chlorpyrifos at Stockholm
Convention
113
6
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
14. Virtual Capacity Building Session on Digital Transformation
in BRICS
94
15. Financial Action Task Force (FATF)
95
16. India-Maldives 2nd High Level Core Group (HLCG) Meeting
96
17. Push for Russia-India-China Revival
98
18. India and New Zealand: Strengthening Defence and
Security Ties
99
GS 3
100
AGRICULTURE
100
1. Genome-Edited Seeds to Mark Beginning of Second Green
Revolution
100
2. Agriphotovoltaics: Integrating Solar Energy with
Agriculture
101
3. Why Farmers Prefer Growing Rice and Wheat
102
4. Why is the Agriculture Sector Missing from India’s FTAs?
104
5. Bananas Cultivation
105
6. Promotion of Organic Farming
106
7. Viksit Krishi Sankalp Abhiyan
107
DEFENCE
108
1. Psychological Warfare
108
2. Gallantry Awards
109
3. Theatre Commands: A New Era of Military Reforms in India
110
4. Government Notifies Inter-services Organisations
(Command, Control and Discipline) Rules, 2025
112
ENVIRONMENT
113
1. India Opposes Inclusion of Chlorpyrifos at Stockholm
Convention
113
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
7
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
2. New Rules for Access and Benefit Sharing of Biodiversity
114
3. Northeast’s First Geothermal Production in Arunachal
Pradesh
115
4. CAQM unveils 19-point plan to stamp out stubble burning
in Delhi-NCR
116
5. IEA’s Global Methane Tracker
117
6. Geotubing: A Breakthrough in Coastal Erosion Control
118
7. Centre Approves Additional FCI Rice for Ethanol
Production
120
8. Natural Farming Certification System
121
9. World’s First Commercial-scale e-methanol Plant Opens in
Denmark
122
10. How is the Shipping Industry Tackling Emissions?
123
11. India Launches First Cluster of CCU Testbeds For Cement
Industry
125
12. Plastic Waste in Himalayas
125
13. SC Bans Retrospective Environment Permits
126
14. Govt. to Allow Private Operators in Nuclear Energy Sector
127
15. International Day for Biodiversity 2025
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
128
16. Needs for Stable Urban Forests in India
129
17. Oil Spill off Kerala Coast
131
18. Global Temperature Likely to Breach 1.5°C in Next Five
Years: WMO
132
19. Only 24% Present-Day Glaciers Will Remain if World Gets
Warmer by 2.7°C
133
20. South Asia’s ‘largest’ Battery Energy Storage System (BESS)
Inaugurated
135
HISTORY AND CULTURE
135
1. Nalanda University
135
INDIAN ECONOMY AND ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT 136
7
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
2. New Rules for Access and Benefit Sharing of Biodiversity
114
3. Northeast’s First Geothermal Production in Arunachal
Pradesh
115
4. CAQM unveils 19-point plan to stamp out stubble burning
in Delhi-NCR
116
5. IEA’s Global Methane Tracker
117
6. Geotubing: A Breakthrough in Coastal Erosion Control
118
7. Centre Approves Additional FCI Rice for Ethanol
Production
120
8. Natural Farming Certification System
121
9. World’s First Commercial-scale e-methanol Plant Opens in
Denmark
122
10. How is the Shipping Industry Tackling Emissions?
123
11. India Launches First Cluster of CCU Testbeds For Cement
Industry
125
12. Plastic Waste in Himalayas
125
13. SC Bans Retrospective Environment Permits
126
14. Govt. to Allow Private Operators in Nuclear Energy Sector
127
15. International Day for Biodiversity 2025
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
128
16. Needs for Stable Urban Forests in India
129
17. Oil Spill off Kerala Coast
131
18. Global Temperature Likely to Breach 1.5°C in Next Five
Years: WMO
132
19. Only 24% Present-Day Glaciers Will Remain if World Gets
Warmer by 2.7°C
133
20. South Asia’s ‘largest’ Battery Energy Storage System (BESS)
Inaugurated
135
HISTORY AND CULTURE
135
1. Nalanda University
135
INDIAN ECONOMY AND ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT 136
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
8
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
1. World Audio Visual and Entertainment Summit (WAVES),
2025
136
2. UN Pushes for Reforms in Three Key Areas to meet SDGs
137
3. Strengthening Entrepreneurship Ecosystems in India
138
4. Port Economy to Drive India’s Growth
139
5. Report on “Enhancing Competitiveness of MSMEs in India 141
6. Report for Framework on Repairability Index (RI) in
Mobile and Electronic Sector
142
7. Revised SHAKTI (Scheme for Harnessing and Allocating
Koyala Transparently in India) Policy for Coal Allocation
144
8. CCI Notifies New Definitions to Curb Predatory Pricing
145
9. Supreme Court Flags Bitcoin Trading as a Way for Hawala
146
10. US & China have Agreed to Temporarily Slash Tariffs
Syllabus: GS3/Economy/Trade
147
11. India’s Rising E-Waste and the Need to Recast Its
Management
148
12. India’s Major Ports Achieve Historic Milestones in FY 2024-
25
150
13. Cabinet Approves Semiconductor Unit in Uttar Pradesh
151
14. Account Aggregators: Blueprint for Consent Managers
under India’s DPDP Act
153
15. Unemployment at 5.1%, Women Labour Force Rises: PLFS
Data
154
16. India’s Trade Deficit Widens to $8.65 Billion 155
17. RBI Surplus Transfer to the Government
156
18. India has Ambitious Expansion Plans in the Port Sector
Globally
156
19. The New Oil Conflict
158
20. Net FDI slumps 96% in FY25 to $353 mn 159
21. Revised Economic Capital Framework of the Reserve Bank
of India
160
22. India Becomes the World’s 4th Largest Economy
161
23. India’s Outward remittances Decreases under Liberalised
Remittance Scheme
163
8
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
1. World Audio Visual and Entertainment Summit (WAVES),
2025
136
2. UN Pushes for Reforms in Three Key Areas to meet SDGs
137
3. Strengthening Entrepreneurship Ecosystems in India
138
4. Port Economy to Drive India’s Growth
139
5. Report on “Enhancing Competitiveness of MSMEs in India 141
6. Report for Framework on Repairability Index (RI) in
Mobile and Electronic Sector
142
7. Revised SHAKTI (Scheme for Harnessing and Allocating
Koyala Transparently in India) Policy for Coal Allocation
144
8. CCI Notifies New Definitions to Curb Predatory Pricing
145
9. Supreme Court Flags Bitcoin Trading as a Way for Hawala
146
10. US & China have Agreed to Temporarily Slash Tariffs
Syllabus: GS3/Economy/Trade
147
11. India’s Rising E-Waste and the Need to Recast Its
Management
148
12. India’s Major Ports Achieve Historic Milestones in FY 2024-
25
150
13. Cabinet Approves Semiconductor Unit in Uttar Pradesh
151
14. Account Aggregators: Blueprint for Consent Managers
under India’s DPDP Act
153
15. Unemployment at 5.1%, Women Labour Force Rises: PLFS
Data
154
16. India’s Trade Deficit Widens to $8.65 Billion 155
17. RBI Surplus Transfer to the Government
156
18. India has Ambitious Expansion Plans in the Port Sector
Globally
156
19. The New Oil Conflict
158
20. Net FDI slumps 96% in FY25 to $353 mn 159
21. Revised Economic Capital Framework of the Reserve Bank
of India
160
22. India Becomes the World’s 4th Largest Economy
161
23. India’s Outward remittances Decreases under Liberalised
Remittance Scheme
163
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
9
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
24. India’s Farm Trade and Impact of FTAs with US, EU and UK
164
25. Microfinance Loan Delinquencies Jump 163% in FY2025
165
26. NITI Aayog Releases Report on “Designing a Policy for
Medium Enterprises”
167
27. India’s Cotton Area May Shrink Due to Low Yields
168
28. Honey Production In India
168
29. ED Listed CPM in Money Laundering Case
168
30. Poverty Fell Significantly Last Year
170
31. Karnataka’s Platform-Based Gig Workers (Social Security
and Welfare) Ordinance, 2025
172
32. Government Achieves Fiscal Deficit Target of 4.8% for FY25
173
INFRASTRUCTURE
174
1. Human Development Report 2025: UNDP
174
2. Strengthening Inland Water Transport in India
175
3. India’s Northeast – Kolkata Link via Myanmar
177
4. Aizawl Joins National Railway Network
179
SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
179
1. S8 Tension and Clumpiness of Universe
179
2. Sun’s Subsurface Weather Tied to Its 11-Year Activity Cycle
180
3. World’s Largest Fusion Project Reaches Milestone With
India’s Help
181
4. Brain-Computer Interface (BCI) to Enable Movement in
People with Paralysis
182
5. ‘One Day One Genome’ Initiative to Harness the Microbial
Potential
183
6. Hydrogen Versus Battery as Fuel Source
184
7. Cloud-Seeding Trials Across National Capital Region (NCR)
185
8. Air Defence Systems: India & World
9
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
24. India’s Farm Trade and Impact of FTAs with US, EU and UK
164
25. Microfinance Loan Delinquencies Jump 163% in FY2025
165
26. NITI Aayog Releases Report on “Designing a Policy for
Medium Enterprises”
167
27. India’s Cotton Area May Shrink Due to Low Yields
168
28. Honey Production In India
168
29. ED Listed CPM in Money Laundering Case
168
30. Poverty Fell Significantly Last Year
170
31. Karnataka’s Platform-Based Gig Workers (Social Security
and Welfare) Ordinance, 2025
172
32. Government Achieves Fiscal Deficit Target of 4.8% for FY25
173
INFRASTRUCTURE
174
1. Human Development Report 2025: UNDP
174
2. Strengthening Inland Water Transport in India
175
3. India’s Northeast – Kolkata Link via Myanmar
177
4. Aizawl Joins National Railway Network
179
SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
179
1. S8 Tension and Clumpiness of Universe
179
2. Sun’s Subsurface Weather Tied to Its 11-Year Activity Cycle
180
3. World’s Largest Fusion Project Reaches Milestone With
India’s Help
181
4. Brain-Computer Interface (BCI) to Enable Movement in
People with Paralysis
182
5. ‘One Day One Genome’ Initiative to Harness the Microbial
Potential
183
6. Hydrogen Versus Battery as Fuel Source
184
7. Cloud-Seeding Trials Across National Capital Region (NCR)
185
8. Air Defence Systems: India & World
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
10
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
9. National Technological Day
186
10. India & 6G Technology
187
11. Breakthrough in Making 2D Metals
189
12. Put Pakistan Nuclear Arsenal under Watch: India
191
13. Samudrayaan’: India’s First Manned Deep Ocean Mission
To Be Launched by 2026
193
14. Gene Editing Therapy Used to Cure a Rare Disease
194
15. 70 Applications Received for Scheme to Produce Electronic
Components
196
16. Fatigue of Li Metal Anode in Solid-State Batteries
196
17. Programme MR Srinivasan: A Key Architect of India’s
Nuclear
197
18. Coal Sector in India: A Strategic Engine for Sustainable
Growth and Global Leadership
198
19. Mendel’s Work with Laws of Inheritance
200
20. Biostimulants
202
SECURITY AGENCIES IN INDIA
203
1. Terror Financing
203
2. Hybrid & Proxy Warfare
205
3. Disinformation Concerns in India
206
SPACE 207
1. Lupex Mission
207
2. Tamil Nadu Adopted a Space Sector Policy
208
10
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
9. National Technological Day
186
10. India & 6G Technology
187
11. Breakthrough in Making 2D Metals
189
12. Put Pakistan Nuclear Arsenal under Watch: India
191
13. Samudrayaan’: India’s First Manned Deep Ocean Mission
To Be Launched by 2026
193
14. Gene Editing Therapy Used to Cure a Rare Disease
194
15. 70 Applications Received for Scheme to Produce Electronic
Components
196
16. Fatigue of Li Metal Anode in Solid-State Batteries
196
17. Programme MR Srinivasan: A Key Architect of India’s
Nuclear
197
18. Coal Sector in India: A Strategic Engine for Sustainable
Growth and Global Leadership
198
19. Mendel’s Work with Laws of Inheritance
200
20. Biostimulants
202
SECURITY AGENCIES IN INDIA
203
1. Terror Financing
203
2. Hybrid & Proxy Warfare
205
3. Disinformation Concerns in India
206
SPACE 207
1. Lupex Mission
207
2. Tamil Nadu Adopted a Space Sector Policy
208
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
11
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
GS 1
ART AND CULTURE
Pushkar Kumbh
Syllabus: GS1/ Art & Culture
In News
After a 12-year interval, Uttarakhand is
hosting the Pushkar Kumbh Mela at Keshav
Prayag in Mana village.
About Pushkar Kumbh
Pushkar Kumbh is a sacred Vaishnavite
pilgrimage held every 12 years at Keshav
Prayag, the confluence of the Alaknanda and
Saraswati rivers in Mana village,
Uttarakhand, when Jupiter enters Gemini.
It holds deep spiritual significance as the site
where Ved Vyas composed the
Mahabharata. Saints like Ramanujacharya
and Madhvacharya are believed to have
received divine knowledge from Goddess
Saraswati here.
Though smaller than traditional Kumbhs, it
attracts devotees, especially from South
India, and is seen as a bridge uniting India’s
diverse spiritual traditions.
58th Jnanpith Award
Syllabus: Syllabus: GS1/ Culture
Context
President Droupadi Murmu conferred
the 58th Jnanpith Award on Sanskrit
scholar Jagadguru Rambhadracharya and
Urdu poet and lyricist Gulzar.
About Jnanpith Award (also spelled Gyanpeeth
Award)
It is India’s highest literary honor, instituted in
1961 by the Bharatiya Jnanpith.
Bharatiya Jnanpith is a literary and research
organization founded by Sahu Shanti Prasad Jain and
Smt. Rama Jain.
It is awarded for the work in 22
languages recognized by the Constitution of
India and, from 2013, in the English
language.
o Once a language receives the award,
it becomes ineligible for the next 3
years.
It is awarded annually to an Indian author for
their outstanding contribution to literature.
The prize carries a cash award, a citation, and
a bronze replica of Vagdevi (Saraswati), the
goddess of learning.
The first recipient of the award was
the Malayalam writer G. Sankara Kurup who
received the award in 1965 for his collection
of poems, Odakkuzhal (The Bamboo Flute).
Rajon ki Baoli
Syllabus: Syllabus: GS1/Culture
Context
The Archaeological Survey of India restored
the 16th- century stepwell, Rajon ki Baoli.
About the Rajon ki Baoli
Built around 1506 by the Daulat Khan during
the Lodi dynasty (at the reign of the Ibrahim
Lodi), Rajon ki Baoli stands as a testament
to Lodhi-era architecture and traditional
water engineering.
o The name ‘Rajon Ki Baoli’ comes
from the masons (Raj Mistri) who
were living at the Baoli and using its
water.
11
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
GS 1
ART AND CULTURE
Pushkar Kumbh
Syllabus: GS1/ Art & Culture
In News
After a 12-year interval, Uttarakhand is
hosting the Pushkar Kumbh Mela at Keshav
Prayag in Mana village.
About Pushkar Kumbh
Pushkar Kumbh is a sacred Vaishnavite
pilgrimage held every 12 years at Keshav
Prayag, the confluence of the Alaknanda and
Saraswati rivers in Mana village,
Uttarakhand, when Jupiter enters Gemini.
It holds deep spiritual significance as the site
where Ved Vyas composed the
Mahabharata. Saints like Ramanujacharya
and Madhvacharya are believed to have
received divine knowledge from Goddess
Saraswati here.
Though smaller than traditional Kumbhs, it
attracts devotees, especially from South
India, and is seen as a bridge uniting India’s
diverse spiritual traditions.
58th Jnanpith Award
Syllabus: Syllabus: GS1/ Culture
Context
President Droupadi Murmu conferred
the 58th Jnanpith Award on Sanskrit
scholar Jagadguru Rambhadracharya and
Urdu poet and lyricist Gulzar.
About Jnanpith Award (also spelled Gyanpeeth
Award)
It is India’s highest literary honor, instituted in
1961 by the Bharatiya Jnanpith.
Bharatiya Jnanpith is a literary and research
organization founded by Sahu Shanti Prasad Jain and
Smt. Rama Jain.
It is awarded for the work in 22
languages recognized by the Constitution of
India and, from 2013, in the English
language.
o Once a language receives the award,
it becomes ineligible for the next 3
years.
It is awarded annually to an Indian author for
their outstanding contribution to literature.
The prize carries a cash award, a citation, and
a bronze replica of Vagdevi (Saraswati), the
goddess of learning.
The first recipient of the award was
the Malayalam writer G. Sankara Kurup who
received the award in 1965 for his collection
of poems, Odakkuzhal (The Bamboo Flute).
Rajon ki Baoli
Syllabus: Syllabus: GS1/Culture
Context
The Archaeological Survey of India restored
the 16th- century stepwell, Rajon ki Baoli.
About the Rajon ki Baoli
Built around 1506 by the Daulat Khan during
the Lodi dynasty (at the reign of the Ibrahim
Lodi), Rajon ki Baoli stands as a testament
to Lodhi-era architecture and traditional
water engineering.
o The name ‘Rajon Ki Baoli’ comes
from the masons (Raj Mistri) who
were living at the Baoli and using its
water.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
12
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
This four-tiered stepwell was thoughtfully
designed not only to store water but also to
offer shade and rest to travellers.
Its elegant arched colonnades, ornate stucco
medallions with floral and geometric
patterns, and finely carved stone elements
reflect the artistic sophistication of the time.
About Lodi Dynasty (1451–1526)
Ruled: Delhi Sultanate (1451–1526)
Dynasty Origin: Founded by Bahlul Lodi, the
first Afghan ruler of Delhi.
Significance: The last dynasty of the Delhi
Sultanate before the rise of the Mughals.
Territorial Reach: Dominated Punjab,
Jaunpur, Gwalior, and the Upper Ganga
Valley.
PM Modi to Launch Revamped Manuscripts Mission
Syllabus: GS1/Culture
Context
The Prime Minister will launch the
revamped National Manuscripts
Mission, which was announced in the Union
Budget this year.
About
National Mission for Manuscripts (NMM) is
aimed to preserve, document, and
disseminate India’s rich manuscript heritage.
The Mission has been restructured with the
nomenclature ‘Gyan Bharatam Mission’ as
a Central Sector Scheme for the period 2024-
31.
The key objectives of the Mission include:
Survey and Documentation: Conducting a
nationwide survey and registration of manuscripts
to maintain a comprehensive record.
Conservation and Preservation: Scientific
conservation and preventive preservation of
manuscripts across repositories in India.
Digitization: Large-scale digitization of manuscripts
to create a National Digital Manuscripts Library for
wider accessibility.
Publication and Research: Editing, translating, and
publishing rare and unpublished manuscripts to
promote scholarly research.
Capacity Building: Organizing training programs in
manuscriptology, paleography, and conservation to
build expertise.
Collaboration with Institutions: Engaging with
academic institutions in India and industry leaders
for manuscript research and preservation efforts.
Shirui Lily Festival
Syllabus: GS1/Culture
Context
The Shirui Lily festival returns to Manipur
after a two-year pause because of the long-
drawn conflict in the state.
About the Festival
Organised by Manipur Department of
Tourism, first held in 2017.
Named after the Shirui Lily (state flower of
Manipur), the festival coincides with the
flower’s blooming season (April to June).
Held annually in Ukhrul district, home to
the Tangkhul Naga community.
12
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
This four-tiered stepwell was thoughtfully
designed not only to store water but also to
offer shade and rest to travellers.
Its elegant arched colonnades, ornate stucco
medallions with floral and geometric
patterns, and finely carved stone elements
reflect the artistic sophistication of the time.
About Lodi Dynasty (1451–1526)
Ruled: Delhi Sultanate (1451–1526)
Dynasty Origin: Founded by Bahlul Lodi, the
first Afghan ruler of Delhi.
Significance: The last dynasty of the Delhi
Sultanate before the rise of the Mughals.
Territorial Reach: Dominated Punjab,
Jaunpur, Gwalior, and the Upper Ganga
Valley.
PM Modi to Launch Revamped Manuscripts Mission
Syllabus: GS1/Culture
Context
The Prime Minister will launch the
revamped National Manuscripts
Mission, which was announced in the Union
Budget this year.
About
National Mission for Manuscripts (NMM) is
aimed to preserve, document, and
disseminate India’s rich manuscript heritage.
The Mission has been restructured with the
nomenclature ‘Gyan Bharatam Mission’ as
a Central Sector Scheme for the period 2024-
31.
The key objectives of the Mission include:
Survey and Documentation: Conducting a
nationwide survey and registration of manuscripts
to maintain a comprehensive record.
Conservation and Preservation: Scientific
conservation and preventive preservation of
manuscripts across repositories in India.
Digitization: Large-scale digitization of manuscripts
to create a National Digital Manuscripts Library for
wider accessibility.
Publication and Research: Editing, translating, and
publishing rare and unpublished manuscripts to
promote scholarly research.
Capacity Building: Organizing training programs in
manuscriptology, paleography, and conservation to
build expertise.
Collaboration with Institutions: Engaging with
academic institutions in India and industry leaders
for manuscript research and preservation efforts.
Shirui Lily Festival
Syllabus: GS1/Culture
Context
The Shirui Lily festival returns to Manipur
after a two-year pause because of the long-
drawn conflict in the state.
About the Festival
Organised by Manipur Department of
Tourism, first held in 2017.
Named after the Shirui Lily (state flower of
Manipur), the festival coincides with the
flower’s blooming season (April to June).
Held annually in Ukhrul district, home to
the Tangkhul Naga community.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
13
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
This will promote eco-tourism, cultural
heritage, and awareness about the
endangered Shirui Lily.
Significance of Buddhist Teachings in Modern World
Syllabus: GS1/Culture
Context
The reference to Buddhist philosophy—
particularly the idea that the self is an
illusion—is both potent and relevant in the
modern world.
About
The world is increasingly focused on self-
promotion as a pathway to peace and
progress.
Social media, particularly selfie culture,
reinforces a curated, often artificial sense of
identity.
This external validation fosters anxiety, fear
of inadequacy, and a desire for more—
leading to widespread emotional distress.
The Buddha taught that the idea of a
permanent “self” is a false construct and the
root of suffering.
o Letting go of the self allows us to
understand the interdependent
causes that shape our existence.
Core Teachings of the Buddha
The Four Noble Truths
o Dukkha: Life is suffering or
unsatisfactory.
o Samudaya: Suffering is caused by
craving and attachment (tanhā).
o Nirodha: The cessation of suffering is
possible by letting go of craving.
o Magga: The path to the cessation of
suffering is the Eightfold Path.
The Noble Eightfold Path: Grouped into three
categories: wisdom, ethical conduct, and
mental discipline.
The Three Marks of Existence
o Anicca (Impermanence): All things
are in constant change.
o Dukkha (Suffering): Existence is
filled with dissatisfaction.
o Anattā (Non-self): There is no
permanent, unchanging self.
The Goal: Nirvana (Nibbāna)
o A state beyond suffering and rebirth.
o Achieved through wisdom, ethical
living, and mental discipline.
o Nirvana is the ultimate liberation
and peace.
Buddhism’s Role in Shaping Modern India:
Anti-caste foundation: Early Buddhism
rejected the rigid Brahmanical caste system,
promoting egalitarian values.
Appeal to the marginalized: Attracted
marginalized castes, women, and those
outside Vedic traditions.
Monastic communities (Sangha): Fostered
social equality by allowing people of various
backgrounds to live, learn, and teach
together.
Modern movements: Buddhism became a
symbol of social justice, especially in Dalit
movements led by B.R. Ambedkar in 20th-
century India.
Community integration: Buddhist practices
like dana (generosity) and communal rituals
promoted interdependence.
The Continuing Relevance of Buddhism
13
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
This will promote eco-tourism, cultural
heritage, and awareness about the
endangered Shirui Lily.
Significance of Buddhist Teachings in Modern World
Syllabus: GS1/Culture
Context
The reference to Buddhist philosophy—
particularly the idea that the self is an
illusion—is both potent and relevant in the
modern world.
About
The world is increasingly focused on self-
promotion as a pathway to peace and
progress.
Social media, particularly selfie culture,
reinforces a curated, often artificial sense of
identity.
This external validation fosters anxiety, fear
of inadequacy, and a desire for more—
leading to widespread emotional distress.
The Buddha taught that the idea of a
permanent “self” is a false construct and the
root of suffering.
o Letting go of the self allows us to
understand the interdependent
causes that shape our existence.
Core Teachings of the Buddha
The Four Noble Truths
o Dukkha: Life is suffering or
unsatisfactory.
o Samudaya: Suffering is caused by
craving and attachment (tanhā).
o Nirodha: The cessation of suffering is
possible by letting go of craving.
o Magga: The path to the cessation of
suffering is the Eightfold Path.
The Noble Eightfold Path: Grouped into three
categories: wisdom, ethical conduct, and
mental discipline.
The Three Marks of Existence
o Anicca (Impermanence): All things
are in constant change.
o Dukkha (Suffering): Existence is
filled with dissatisfaction.
o Anattā (Non-self): There is no
permanent, unchanging self.
The Goal: Nirvana (Nibbāna)
o A state beyond suffering and rebirth.
o Achieved through wisdom, ethical
living, and mental discipline.
o Nirvana is the ultimate liberation
and peace.
Buddhism’s Role in Shaping Modern India:
Anti-caste foundation: Early Buddhism
rejected the rigid Brahmanical caste system,
promoting egalitarian values.
Appeal to the marginalized: Attracted
marginalized castes, women, and those
outside Vedic traditions.
Monastic communities (Sangha): Fostered
social equality by allowing people of various
backgrounds to live, learn, and teach
together.
Modern movements: Buddhism became a
symbol of social justice, especially in Dalit
movements led by B.R. Ambedkar in 20th-
century India.
Community integration: Buddhist practices
like dana (generosity) and communal rituals
promoted interdependence.
The Continuing Relevance of Buddhism
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
14
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Mindfulness and meditation, central to
Buddhism, are widely used today to manage
stress, anxiety, and depression.
o Practices like Vipassana and Zen
meditation help individuals find
clarity and calm in fast-paced
lifestyles.
Modern society often promotes
consumerism, comparison, and self-
promotion, especially through social media.
o Buddhism teaches non-attachment,
humility, and selflessness, offering a
path away from dissatisfaction and
ego-driven living.
The Buddhist emphasis on compassion
(karuṇā) and loving-kindness
(mettā) encourages empathy and ethical
action.
o This is especially important in
today’s world marked by inequality,
conflict, and environmental crisis.
The principle of interdependence reminds us
that all life is connected.
o Buddhist teachings support non-
violence (ahiṃsā) and respect for
nature, promoting sustainable and
mindful living.
Buddhism has been a voice against caste
discrimination and inequality (e.g.,
Ambedkarite Buddhism).
o It advocates a classless and casteless
society, aligning with modern
democratic and human rights values.
Peaceful approach to coexistence: Its
universal values—compassion, moderation,
and wisdom—appeal across cultures and
belief systems.
The principle of moderation (the Middle
Way) encourages balance between
indulgence and austerity.
o This can be a guide for simplifying
life, reducing distractions, and
focusing on what truly matters.
Buddhism is not bound by dogma or
conversion, making it accessible to people
from all religious, cultural, or secular
backgrounds.
o Its flexible, inclusive philosophy
makes it especially relevant in
pluralistic societies.
Conclusion
In an age obsessed with image and identity,
the Buddha’s message—to let go of the self—
is more relevant than ever.
Buddhism offers not just spiritual insight but
a framework for societal transformation.
Rediscovering Buddhist thought could help
address contemporary crises of ego,
inequality, and disconnection
Agamas
Syllabus: GS1/ Culture
Context
The Supreme Court has allowed the Tamil
Nadu government to appoint ‘archakas’
(priests) to the state’s temples not governed
by Agama tradition.
Background
Tamil Nadu has witnessed debates
over caste-based priesthood, temple
autonomy, and ritual conformity.
Identifying Agamic temples ensures that
appointments (archakars/maniyams)
follow traditional procedures and
constitutional norms.
What are Agamas?
Agamas are a collection of scriptures that lay
down rituals, temple architecture, idol
worship methods, and daily worship
procedures in temples.
They are distinct from the Vedas and form
the scriptural foundation of temple-based
Hinduism, particularly in South India.
Agamas are central to the Shaiva, Vaishnava,
and Shakta traditions.
14
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Mindfulness and meditation, central to
Buddhism, are widely used today to manage
stress, anxiety, and depression.
o Practices like Vipassana and Zen
meditation help individuals find
clarity and calm in fast-paced
lifestyles.
Modern society often promotes
consumerism, comparison, and self-
promotion, especially through social media.
o Buddhism teaches non-attachment,
humility, and selflessness, offering a
path away from dissatisfaction and
ego-driven living.
The Buddhist emphasis on compassion
(karuṇā) and loving-kindness
(mettā) encourages empathy and ethical
action.
o This is especially important in
today’s world marked by inequality,
conflict, and environmental crisis.
The principle of interdependence reminds us
that all life is connected.
o Buddhist teachings support non-
violence (ahiṃsā) and respect for
nature, promoting sustainable and
mindful living.
Buddhism has been a voice against caste
discrimination and inequality (e.g.,
Ambedkarite Buddhism).
o It advocates a classless and casteless
society, aligning with modern
democratic and human rights values.
Peaceful approach to coexistence: Its
universal values—compassion, moderation,
and wisdom—appeal across cultures and
belief systems.
The principle of moderation (the Middle
Way) encourages balance between
indulgence and austerity.
o This can be a guide for simplifying
life, reducing distractions, and
focusing on what truly matters.
Buddhism is not bound by dogma or
conversion, making it accessible to people
from all religious, cultural, or secular
backgrounds.
o Its flexible, inclusive philosophy
makes it especially relevant in
pluralistic societies.
Conclusion
In an age obsessed with image and identity,
the Buddha’s message—to let go of the self—
is more relevant than ever.
Buddhism offers not just spiritual insight but
a framework for societal transformation.
Rediscovering Buddhist thought could help
address contemporary crises of ego,
inequality, and disconnection
Agamas
Syllabus: GS1/ Culture
Context
The Supreme Court has allowed the Tamil
Nadu government to appoint ‘archakas’
(priests) to the state’s temples not governed
by Agama tradition.
Background
Tamil Nadu has witnessed debates
over caste-based priesthood, temple
autonomy, and ritual conformity.
Identifying Agamic temples ensures that
appointments (archakars/maniyams)
follow traditional procedures and
constitutional norms.
What are Agamas?
Agamas are a collection of scriptures that lay
down rituals, temple architecture, idol
worship methods, and daily worship
procedures in temples.
They are distinct from the Vedas and form
the scriptural foundation of temple-based
Hinduism, particularly in South India.
Agamas are central to the Shaiva, Vaishnava,
and Shakta traditions.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
15
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Shaiva Agamas: Focused on the
worship of Lord Shiva; widely
followed in Tamil Shaiva temples.
o Vaishnava Agamas (Pancharatra and
Vaikhanasa): These deal with the
worship of Lord Vishnu and are
prevalent in many major South
Indian Vaishnava temples like
Tirupati.
o Shakta Agamas (Tantras): Worship of
Goddess Shakti.
Gond and Madhubani Art
Syllabus :GS 1/Art and Culture
In News
The artists of Gond art and Madhubani
art met President Droupadi Murmu at
Rashtrapati Bhavan as part of the Artists in
Residence programme- Kala Utsav.
Madhubani Paintings
They originated in the Madhubani district of
Bihar’s Mithila region.
They are known for their intricate line
drawings filled with bright, earthy colors
and tribal motifs.
They were traditionally created by women
on mud walls of bridal chambers.
They featured themes from Hindu
mythology and local beliefs, symbolizing
marriage and fertility.
The paintings show human beings, animals,
trees, flowers, birds, etc
Gond paintings
Gonds are one of the prominent tribes in
India. They are mainly settled in Madhya
Pradesh and Chhattisgarh
o The Akbar Nama, a history of
Akbar’s reign, mentions the Gond
kingdom of Garha Katanga that had
70,000 villages.
Gond tribals belong to the Dravida race, and
are very fond of dance, music and
storytelling.
Gond paintings, also called Thingna, often
feature geometrical designs and motifs like
horses, elephants, birds, and human figures,
painted using earth colours (white, red,
yellow, black).
o Homes are decorated with these
motifs, especially around doors,
windows, and courtyards, often with
relief work made from cow dung and
rice husk.
Saraswati Pushkaralu
Syllabus: GS1/ Culture
Context
The 11th day of the ongoing Saraswati
Pushkaralu witnessed a massive turnout of
pilgrims at Kaleshwaram.
Saraswati Pushkaralu
Saraswati Pushkaram or Pushkaralu is a
Hindu river festival that occurs once
every 12 years, aligned with the entry of
Jupiter (Brihaspati) into the Gemini
(Mithuna) zodiac sign.
15
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Shaiva Agamas: Focused on the
worship of Lord Shiva; widely
followed in Tamil Shaiva temples.
o Vaishnava Agamas (Pancharatra and
Vaikhanasa): These deal with the
worship of Lord Vishnu and are
prevalent in many major South
Indian Vaishnava temples like
Tirupati.
o Shakta Agamas (Tantras): Worship of
Goddess Shakti.
Gond and Madhubani Art
Syllabus :GS 1/Art and Culture
In News
The artists of Gond art and Madhubani
art met President Droupadi Murmu at
Rashtrapati Bhavan as part of the Artists in
Residence programme- Kala Utsav.
Madhubani Paintings
They originated in the Madhubani district of
Bihar’s Mithila region.
They are known for their intricate line
drawings filled with bright, earthy colors
and tribal motifs.
They were traditionally created by women
on mud walls of bridal chambers.
They featured themes from Hindu
mythology and local beliefs, symbolizing
marriage and fertility.
The paintings show human beings, animals,
trees, flowers, birds, etc
Gond paintings
Gonds are one of the prominent tribes in
India. They are mainly settled in Madhya
Pradesh and Chhattisgarh
o The Akbar Nama, a history of
Akbar’s reign, mentions the Gond
kingdom of Garha Katanga that had
70,000 villages.
Gond tribals belong to the Dravida race, and
are very fond of dance, music and
storytelling.
Gond paintings, also called Thingna, often
feature geometrical designs and motifs like
horses, elephants, birds, and human figures,
painted using earth colours (white, red,
yellow, black).
o Homes are decorated with these
motifs, especially around doors,
windows, and courtyards, often with
relief work made from cow dung and
rice husk.
Saraswati Pushkaralu
Syllabus: GS1/ Culture
Context
The 11th day of the ongoing Saraswati
Pushkaralu witnessed a massive turnout of
pilgrims at Kaleshwaram.
Saraswati Pushkaralu
Saraswati Pushkaram or Pushkaralu is a
Hindu river festival that occurs once
every 12 years, aligned with the entry of
Jupiter (Brihaspati) into the Gemini
(Mithuna) zodiac sign.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
16
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o It is observed for 12 days, starting
from the exact moment Jupiter
enters the Mithuna rasi.
The festival is dedicated to River
Saraswati, often referred to as Antarvahini—
the invisible river believed to flow beneath
the Triveni Sangam.
The Triveni Sangam at Kaleshwaram—
where Godavari, Pranahita, and the invisible
Saraswati are believed to meet—is a key
pilgrimage site during the festival.
HISTORY
50 Years of End of the Vietnam War
Syllabus: GS1/World History
Context
The Vietnamese celebrated the 50th
anniversary of the end of the Vietnam War.
Background
Vietnam had been a French colony since the
mid-19th century, part of French Indochina
(along with Laos and Cambodia).
During World War II, the Japanese occupied
Vietnam but allowed the French to maintain
some control.
After Japan’s defeat in 1945, Ho Chi
Minh, leader of the Viet Minh (League for
the Independence of Vietnam), declared
Vietnam’s independence in 1945.
The French, however, tried to reassert
colonial control, leading to the First
Indochina War.
The Vietnam War
The Vietnam War — also known as
the Second Indochina War — was a
prolonged conflict from 1955 to
1975 between North Vietnam
(Communist) and South Vietnam (anti-
Communist), with heavy U.S. involvement
on the side of the South.
North Vietnam: Led by Ho Chi Minh and the
Communist Party, supported by the Soviet
Union, China, and other communist allies.
South Vietnam: Initially led by Ngo Dinh
Diem, later by various leaders after multiple
coups.
o Supported by the United States,
South Korea, Australia, Thailand,
and others.
Reasons for the War
Division of Vietnam: After the First
Indochina War, the 1954 Geneva Accords
temporarily divided Vietnam at the 17th
parallel into North and South Vietnam.
Cold War tensions: The U.S. saw the spread
of communism in Asia as a threat (the
Domino Theory).
Internal conflict: The Communist-aligned
Viet Cong insurgency in the South sought to
reunify Vietnam under communist rule.
Key Phases
Advisory Phase (1955–1963): The U.S.
provided military advisers and aid to
support the South Vietnamese government.
o Ngo Dinh Diem’s regime became
increasingly unpopular and was
overthrown in a U.S.-backed coup in
1963.
Escalation (1964–1969):
o Gulf of Tonkin Incident
(1964): Alleged attacks on U.S. ships
led to congressional approval for
expanded U.S. involvement.
o U.S. troop levels peaked at over
500,000 by 1969.
o Major battles: Tet Offensive (1968),
Battle of Hue, Khe Sanh.
o Heavy use of napalm, Agent Orange,
and carpet bombing sparked
international outrage.
Withdrawal (1969–1973): Under President
Richard Nixon, the U.S. began
16
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o It is observed for 12 days, starting
from the exact moment Jupiter
enters the Mithuna rasi.
The festival is dedicated to River
Saraswati, often referred to as Antarvahini—
the invisible river believed to flow beneath
the Triveni Sangam.
The Triveni Sangam at Kaleshwaram—
where Godavari, Pranahita, and the invisible
Saraswati are believed to meet—is a key
pilgrimage site during the festival.
HISTORY
50 Years of End of the Vietnam War
Syllabus: GS1/World History
Context
The Vietnamese celebrated the 50th
anniversary of the end of the Vietnam War.
Background
Vietnam had been a French colony since the
mid-19th century, part of French Indochina
(along with Laos and Cambodia).
During World War II, the Japanese occupied
Vietnam but allowed the French to maintain
some control.
After Japan’s defeat in 1945, Ho Chi
Minh, leader of the Viet Minh (League for
the Independence of Vietnam), declared
Vietnam’s independence in 1945.
The French, however, tried to reassert
colonial control, leading to the First
Indochina War.
The Vietnam War
The Vietnam War — also known as
the Second Indochina War — was a
prolonged conflict from 1955 to
1975 between North Vietnam
(Communist) and South Vietnam (anti-
Communist), with heavy U.S. involvement
on the side of the South.
North Vietnam: Led by Ho Chi Minh and the
Communist Party, supported by the Soviet
Union, China, and other communist allies.
South Vietnam: Initially led by Ngo Dinh
Diem, later by various leaders after multiple
coups.
o Supported by the United States,
South Korea, Australia, Thailand,
and others.
Reasons for the War
Division of Vietnam: After the First
Indochina War, the 1954 Geneva Accords
temporarily divided Vietnam at the 17th
parallel into North and South Vietnam.
Cold War tensions: The U.S. saw the spread
of communism in Asia as a threat (the
Domino Theory).
Internal conflict: The Communist-aligned
Viet Cong insurgency in the South sought to
reunify Vietnam under communist rule.
Key Phases
Advisory Phase (1955–1963): The U.S.
provided military advisers and aid to
support the South Vietnamese government.
o Ngo Dinh Diem’s regime became
increasingly unpopular and was
overthrown in a U.S.-backed coup in
1963.
Escalation (1964–1969):
o Gulf of Tonkin Incident
(1964): Alleged attacks on U.S. ships
led to congressional approval for
expanded U.S. involvement.
o U.S. troop levels peaked at over
500,000 by 1969.
o Major battles: Tet Offensive (1968),
Battle of Hue, Khe Sanh.
o Heavy use of napalm, Agent Orange,
and carpet bombing sparked
international outrage.
Withdrawal (1969–1973): Under President
Richard Nixon, the U.S. began
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
17
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
“Vietnamization” — training South
Vietnamese forces to take over the war.
o U.S. forces gradually withdrew; the
Paris Peace Accords were signed in
1973.
Final Collapse (1973–1975): Fighting
continued after U.S. withdrawal.
o Fall of Saigon (April 30,
1975): North Vietnamese forces
captured the capital of South
Vietnam, ending the war.
Vietnam was reunified under communist
control as the Socialist Republic of Vietnam.
Agent Orange
– Agent Orange was a powerful herbicide used by
the United States military during the Vietnam War
as part of Operation Ranch Hand (1961–1971).
– It became one of the most controversial
aspects of the war due to its devastating health and
environmental effects.
1. The manufacturing process of 2,4,5-T created a
dangerous dioxin contaminant called TCDD, one of
the most toxic chemicals.
– The U.S. military used Agent Orange to:
1. Defoliate forests and jungles to reduce enemy
cover (especially for the Viet Cong).
2. Destroy crops used to feed North Vietnamese
forces.
– Over 20 million gallons of herbicides were
sprayed across South Vietnam, particularly in
dense jungles and rural farmlands.
– Aftermath:
1. Agent Orange remains a symbol of the war’s
human and moral cost.
2. Programs by the Vietnamese Red Cross, USAID,
and international NGOs are working to support
victims and clean up the environment.
3. Many advocate for continued support, justice,
and recognition of all those affected.
Importance of Ahilyabai Holkar
Syllabus :GS 1/History
In News
Madhya Pradesh is marking the 300th birth
anniversary of Maratha queen Devi
Ahilyabai Holkar with a major state-led
campaign.
Ahilyabai Holkar
Early Life: She was the Holkar Queen of the
Maratha-ruled Malwa kingdom in India.
o She was Born in Chaundi village,
Maharashtra, to Mankoji Rao
Shinde.
o She received an education from her
father despite the norms against
women’s education at the time.
Personal Tragedies: Ahilyabai Holkar’s
husband, Khanderao, died in the Battle of
Kumbher in 1754. Twelve years later, her
father-in-law, Malhar Rao Holkar, also
passed away.
o Her son Malerao, who was mentally
ill, died in 1767.
Role as a queen : In 1767, she became the
queen of the Malwa kingdom.
o She moved the capital to
Maheshwar south of Indore on the
Narmada River.
o She defended her kingdom from
invaders, led armies herself, and
appointed Tukojirao Holkar as Chief
of Army.
17
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
“Vietnamization” — training South
Vietnamese forces to take over the war.
o U.S. forces gradually withdrew; the
Paris Peace Accords were signed in
1973.
Final Collapse (1973–1975): Fighting
continued after U.S. withdrawal.
o Fall of Saigon (April 30,
1975): North Vietnamese forces
captured the capital of South
Vietnam, ending the war.
Vietnam was reunified under communist
control as the Socialist Republic of Vietnam.
Agent Orange
– Agent Orange was a powerful herbicide used by
the United States military during the Vietnam War
as part of Operation Ranch Hand (1961–1971).
– It became one of the most controversial
aspects of the war due to its devastating health and
environmental effects.
1. The manufacturing process of 2,4,5-T created a
dangerous dioxin contaminant called TCDD, one of
the most toxic chemicals.
– The U.S. military used Agent Orange to:
1. Defoliate forests and jungles to reduce enemy
cover (especially for the Viet Cong).
2. Destroy crops used to feed North Vietnamese
forces.
– Over 20 million gallons of herbicides were
sprayed across South Vietnam, particularly in
dense jungles and rural farmlands.
– Aftermath:
1. Agent Orange remains a symbol of the war’s
human and moral cost.
2. Programs by the Vietnamese Red Cross, USAID,
and international NGOs are working to support
victims and clean up the environment.
3. Many advocate for continued support, justice,
and recognition of all those affected.
Importance of Ahilyabai Holkar
Syllabus :GS 1/History
In News
Madhya Pradesh is marking the 300th birth
anniversary of Maratha queen Devi
Ahilyabai Holkar with a major state-led
campaign.
Ahilyabai Holkar
Early Life: She was the Holkar Queen of the
Maratha-ruled Malwa kingdom in India.
o She was Born in Chaundi village,
Maharashtra, to Mankoji Rao
Shinde.
o She received an education from her
father despite the norms against
women’s education at the time.
Personal Tragedies: Ahilyabai Holkar’s
husband, Khanderao, died in the Battle of
Kumbher in 1754. Twelve years later, her
father-in-law, Malhar Rao Holkar, also
passed away.
o Her son Malerao, who was mentally
ill, died in 1767.
Role as a queen : In 1767, she became the
queen of the Malwa kingdom.
o She moved the capital to
Maheshwar south of Indore on the
Narmada River.
o She defended her kingdom from
invaders, led armies herself, and
appointed Tukojirao Holkar as Chief
of Army.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
18
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o She broke another tradition when
she married her daughter to
Yashwantrao, a brave but poor man
after he succeeded in defeating the
dacoits.
Contributions : In the 18th century, she was
instrumental in spreading the message of
dharma and propagating industrialization.
She was a devout ruler known for her
charitable works.
o She built hundreds of Hindu temples
and rest houses (Dharmashalas)
across India.
o One of her most notable
contributions was the
renovation of the Kashi
Vishwanath Temple in 1780.
o She also established a textile
industry in Maheshwar, which today
is very famous for its Maheshwari
sarees.
o She held daily public audiences to
address people’s issues and engaged
in extensive philanthropic work,
including building temples, ghats,
wells, tanks, and rest-houses across
India.
Legacy: She was known as the ‘Philosopher
Queen,’ she passed away on 13 August 1795
at the age of 70.
o Her reign is remembered as a period
of peace, prosperity, and religious
tolerance.
o She was a capable and respected
ruler, and after her death, she was
revered as a saint by the people.
o Her legacy endures through the
many public works she
commissioned.
PHYSCIAL GEOGRAPHY
Early Onset of Indian Monsoon
Syllabus: GSI/ Indian Physical Geography
In Context
As per the IMD, there are chances of early
onset of the southwest monsoon. The
normal onset date of the monsoon over
Kerala is June 1 and it usually takes about
10 days for the system to reach Kerala from
the Nicobar islands.
Mechanism of the Indian Monsoon: The Driving
Forces
Differential Heating of Land and Sea: In
summer, India’s landmass heats faster than
the ocean, creating low pressure over land
and drawing in moisture-laden winds from
the sea.
Inter-Tropical Convergence Zone
(ITCZ): The ITCZ, where trade winds meet
near the equator, shifts north during
summer, intensifying low pressure over the
Indo-Gangetic plain and drawing in
monsoon winds.
Tibetan Plateau: Its high elevation heats up,
creating an upper-air low-pressure zone
that strengthens vertical circulation and
attracts monsoon winds.
Tropical Easterly Jet: Develops during
summer, strengthening monsoon trough
and rainfall.
ENSO:
o El Niño: Warms Pacific waters,
usually weakening Indian monsoon.
o La Niña: Cools Pacific, often
strengthening monsoon.
Indian Ocean Dipole (IOD):
o Positive IOD: Strengthens monsoon
with warm western Indian Ocean.
o Negative IOD: Weakens monsoon.
Onset and Advancement
Arabian Sea Branch: Hits Kerala around June
1, moves up the west coast, bringing heavy
rain to Western Ghats and inland states.
Bay of Bengal Branch: Reaches Northeast
India in early June, then moves westward
18
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o She broke another tradition when
she married her daughter to
Yashwantrao, a brave but poor man
after he succeeded in defeating the
dacoits.
Contributions : In the 18th century, she was
instrumental in spreading the message of
dharma and propagating industrialization.
She was a devout ruler known for her
charitable works.
o She built hundreds of Hindu temples
and rest houses (Dharmashalas)
across India.
o One of her most notable
contributions was the
renovation of the Kashi
Vishwanath Temple in 1780.
o She also established a textile
industry in Maheshwar, which today
is very famous for its Maheshwari
sarees.
o She held daily public audiences to
address people’s issues and engaged
in extensive philanthropic work,
including building temples, ghats,
wells, tanks, and rest-houses across
India.
Legacy: She was known as the ‘Philosopher
Queen,’ she passed away on 13 August 1795
at the age of 70.
o Her reign is remembered as a period
of peace, prosperity, and religious
tolerance.
o She was a capable and respected
ruler, and after her death, she was
revered as a saint by the people.
o Her legacy endures through the
many public works she
commissioned.
PHYSCIAL GEOGRAPHY
Early Onset of Indian Monsoon
Syllabus: GSI/ Indian Physical Geography
In Context
As per the IMD, there are chances of early
onset of the southwest monsoon. The
normal onset date of the monsoon over
Kerala is June 1 and it usually takes about
10 days for the system to reach Kerala from
the Nicobar islands.
Mechanism of the Indian Monsoon: The Driving
Forces
Differential Heating of Land and Sea: In
summer, India’s landmass heats faster than
the ocean, creating low pressure over land
and drawing in moisture-laden winds from
the sea.
Inter-Tropical Convergence Zone
(ITCZ): The ITCZ, where trade winds meet
near the equator, shifts north during
summer, intensifying low pressure over the
Indo-Gangetic plain and drawing in
monsoon winds.
Tibetan Plateau: Its high elevation heats up,
creating an upper-air low-pressure zone
that strengthens vertical circulation and
attracts monsoon winds.
Tropical Easterly Jet: Develops during
summer, strengthening monsoon trough
and rainfall.
ENSO:
o El Niño: Warms Pacific waters,
usually weakening Indian monsoon.
o La Niña: Cools Pacific, often
strengthening monsoon.
Indian Ocean Dipole (IOD):
o Positive IOD: Strengthens monsoon
with warm western Indian Ocean.
o Negative IOD: Weakens monsoon.
Onset and Advancement
Arabian Sea Branch: Hits Kerala around June
1, moves up the west coast, bringing heavy
rain to Western Ghats and inland states.
Bay of Bengal Branch: Reaches Northeast
India in early June, then moves westward
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
19
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
along the Indo-Gangetic plain. India is
usually fully covered by mid-July.
Retreat of the Monsoon: Retreat begins in
October from northwest India. Clear skies
and residual moisture cause hot, humid
conditions called “October heat.”
Reversal of wind direction brings rain to the
southeastern coast, notably Tamil Nadu and
Andhra Pradesh.
Impact of the Monsoon
Agriculture: Essential for Kharif crops
like rice and maize. A good monsoon
improves yields; a poor one leads to
drought.
Economy: Monsoon-linked agriculture
influences GDP, rural income, and food
prices.
Water Resources and Hydropower: Rains
recharge rivers and reservoirs, crucial for
drinking water, irrigation, and electricity.
Environment and Culture: Supports
biodiversity and cultural traditions like
festivals celebrating rain.
Disasters: Heavy rains can trigger floods,
landslides, and other disasters, especially in
vulnerable regions.
Recent Government Initiatives to Improve Monsoon
Forecasting
Monsoon Mission: Launched in 2012 by the
Ministry of Earth Sciences it was a major
initiative aimed at enhancing the accuracy
of monsoon forecasting.
National Supercomputing Mission: Aimed at
enhancing computational infrastructure
needed for running high-end dynamical
weather models.
ICAR & IMD Collab: The IMD, in
collaboration with the Indian Council of
Agricultural Research (ICAR), provides
Agromet Advisory Services.
Invisible Scars: Threat of Gully Erosion
Syllabus: GS1/ Geography, GS3/ Environment
Context
A Scientific Reports paper highlights that
gully erosion can derail progress on at
least nine of the 17 Sustainable Development
Goals (SDGs), especially zero hunger, clean
water and sanitation, and climate action.
What is Gully Erosion?
Gully erosion is a severe form of land
degradation, marked by the carving of deep
channels (gullies) into soil due to surface
and subsurface runoff.
It differs from other erosive forms due to its
deeply erosive nature, high specific soil
losses, and unpredictable behaviour.
Status of Gully Erosion:
o 51 global locations have reported
gully-related disasters; with Nigeria
alone hosting 15.
o In India, gully landforms are
observed in 19 states and
Delhi. Most affected regions are
Jharkhand, Chhattisgarh, Madhya
Pradesh, and Rajasthan.
Causes of Gully Erosion
Vegetation Loss: The absence of trees and
grasses weakens soil structure, making it
vulnerable to erosion during rain.
Irregular weather patterns—long dry spells
followed by heavy rain—reduce vegetation
and increase runoff, worsening gully
erosion.
Improper disposal of solid waste in drainage
channels blocks flow, creating turbulence
that deepens and widens gullies during
storms.
Weak Soils: Sandy or loosely packed soils
erode more easily under water pressure,
especially in regions like Jharkhand and
Chhattisgarh.
19
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
along the Indo-Gangetic plain. India is
usually fully covered by mid-July.
Retreat of the Monsoon: Retreat begins in
October from northwest India. Clear skies
and residual moisture cause hot, humid
conditions called “October heat.”
Reversal of wind direction brings rain to the
southeastern coast, notably Tamil Nadu and
Andhra Pradesh.
Impact of the Monsoon
Agriculture: Essential for Kharif crops
like rice and maize. A good monsoon
improves yields; a poor one leads to
drought.
Economy: Monsoon-linked agriculture
influences GDP, rural income, and food
prices.
Water Resources and Hydropower: Rains
recharge rivers and reservoirs, crucial for
drinking water, irrigation, and electricity.
Environment and Culture: Supports
biodiversity and cultural traditions like
festivals celebrating rain.
Disasters: Heavy rains can trigger floods,
landslides, and other disasters, especially in
vulnerable regions.
Recent Government Initiatives to Improve Monsoon
Forecasting
Monsoon Mission: Launched in 2012 by the
Ministry of Earth Sciences it was a major
initiative aimed at enhancing the accuracy
of monsoon forecasting.
National Supercomputing Mission: Aimed at
enhancing computational infrastructure
needed for running high-end dynamical
weather models.
ICAR & IMD Collab: The IMD, in
collaboration with the Indian Council of
Agricultural Research (ICAR), provides
Agromet Advisory Services.
Invisible Scars: Threat of Gully Erosion
Syllabus: GS1/ Geography, GS3/ Environment
Context
A Scientific Reports paper highlights that
gully erosion can derail progress on at
least nine of the 17 Sustainable Development
Goals (SDGs), especially zero hunger, clean
water and sanitation, and climate action.
What is Gully Erosion?
Gully erosion is a severe form of land
degradation, marked by the carving of deep
channels (gullies) into soil due to surface
and subsurface runoff.
It differs from other erosive forms due to its
deeply erosive nature, high specific soil
losses, and unpredictable behaviour.
Status of Gully Erosion:
o 51 global locations have reported
gully-related disasters; with Nigeria
alone hosting 15.
o In India, gully landforms are
observed in 19 states and
Delhi. Most affected regions are
Jharkhand, Chhattisgarh, Madhya
Pradesh, and Rajasthan.
Causes of Gully Erosion
Vegetation Loss: The absence of trees and
grasses weakens soil structure, making it
vulnerable to erosion during rain.
Irregular weather patterns—long dry spells
followed by heavy rain—reduce vegetation
and increase runoff, worsening gully
erosion.
Improper disposal of solid waste in drainage
channels blocks flow, creating turbulence
that deepens and widens gullies during
storms.
Weak Soils: Sandy or loosely packed soils
erode more easily under water pressure,
especially in regions like Jharkhand and
Chhattisgarh.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
20
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Impact of Gully Erosion
Loss of Topsoil: Gully erosion removes the
fertile topsoil layer, which is essential for
agriculture. Once lost, it takes decades or
centuries to regenerate.
o The removal of fertile land leads to
declining agricultural productivity,
threatening food security (SDG 2:
Zero Hunger) and farmer
livelihoods.
Water Scarcity: Gully erosion disrupts the
natural water-holding capacity of the land,
increasing surface runoff and reducing
groundwater recharge, leading to water
stress and droughts. (SDG 6: Clean Water
and Sanitation)
Ecosystem Degradation: Erosion leads
to habitat fragmentation and biodiversity
loss, impacting local flora and fauna.
Sediment Pollution: The displaced soil often
ends up in rivers and reservoirs, leading to
siltation, water pollution, and reduced
storage capacity.
Way Ahead
Reforestation: Planting native species in
degraded catchments restores ecological
balance and controls erosion over the long
term.
Land Use Planning: Adopting land use
practices appropriate to soil and
topography, such as terracing, agroforestry,
and contour farming, reduces erosion risk.
Check Dams: Small check dams made of
stones, logs, or concrete across gullies
reduce water speed, promote sediment
deposition, and help in gully bed
stabilisation.
Concluding remarks
Gully erosion is a silent yet devastating
form of land degradation that has been
overlooked in mainstream environmental
discourse.
As India has pledged to restore 26
million hectares of degraded land by 2030
under the UN Convention to Combat
Desertification, it is imperative that it
should adopt both preventive and remedial
strategies to manage gully erosion
effectively.
Magnetic Flip-Flop
Syllabus: GS1/ Geography, GS3/ Science and
technology
Context
Recent studies indicate that Earth’s
magnetic field is weakening and shifting,
raising concerns over possible magnetic
excursions or even a full-scale polarity
reversal.
Earth’s magnetic field
It is generated by the complex flow of
molten metallic material in the outer core of
the planet.
The flow of this material is affected both by
the rotation of Earth and the presence of a
solid iron core, which results in a dipolar
magnetic field where the axis roughly aligns
with the rotational axis of the planet.
Cause of magnetic field reversal
Short-term variations (milliseconds to days)
are caused by solar activity and interaction
with charged particles in space.
Long-term changes, such as reversals and
excursions, result from turbulent flows in
the outer core, driven by heat released from
the inner core and modulated by planetary
rotation.
20
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Impact of Gully Erosion
Loss of Topsoil: Gully erosion removes the
fertile topsoil layer, which is essential for
agriculture. Once lost, it takes decades or
centuries to regenerate.
o The removal of fertile land leads to
declining agricultural productivity,
threatening food security (SDG 2:
Zero Hunger) and farmer
livelihoods.
Water Scarcity: Gully erosion disrupts the
natural water-holding capacity of the land,
increasing surface runoff and reducing
groundwater recharge, leading to water
stress and droughts. (SDG 6: Clean Water
and Sanitation)
Ecosystem Degradation: Erosion leads
to habitat fragmentation and biodiversity
loss, impacting local flora and fauna.
Sediment Pollution: The displaced soil often
ends up in rivers and reservoirs, leading to
siltation, water pollution, and reduced
storage capacity.
Way Ahead
Reforestation: Planting native species in
degraded catchments restores ecological
balance and controls erosion over the long
term.
Land Use Planning: Adopting land use
practices appropriate to soil and
topography, such as terracing, agroforestry,
and contour farming, reduces erosion risk.
Check Dams: Small check dams made of
stones, logs, or concrete across gullies
reduce water speed, promote sediment
deposition, and help in gully bed
stabilisation.
Concluding remarks
Gully erosion is a silent yet devastating
form of land degradation that has been
overlooked in mainstream environmental
discourse.
As India has pledged to restore 26
million hectares of degraded land by 2030
under the UN Convention to Combat
Desertification, it is imperative that it
should adopt both preventive and remedial
strategies to manage gully erosion
effectively.
Magnetic Flip-Flop
Syllabus: GS1/ Geography, GS3/ Science and
technology
Context
Recent studies indicate that Earth’s
magnetic field is weakening and shifting,
raising concerns over possible magnetic
excursions or even a full-scale polarity
reversal.
Earth’s magnetic field
It is generated by the complex flow of
molten metallic material in the outer core of
the planet.
The flow of this material is affected both by
the rotation of Earth and the presence of a
solid iron core, which results in a dipolar
magnetic field where the axis roughly aligns
with the rotational axis of the planet.
Cause of magnetic field reversal
Short-term variations (milliseconds to days)
are caused by solar activity and interaction
with charged particles in space.
Long-term changes, such as reversals and
excursions, result from turbulent flows in
the outer core, driven by heat released from
the inner core and modulated by planetary
rotation.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
21
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
A reversal happens when the flow of molten
material in the core changes direction—for
instance, from clockwise to anticlockwise—
altering the magnetic field’s orientation.
Magnetic Reversals and Excursions
Magnetic reversal is a phenomenon where
the magnetic north and south poles swap
places. It occurred 183 times in the past 83
million years.
o The last major reversal was
the Brunhes-Matuyama
reversal, about 780,000 years ago.
o It can take thousands of years to
complete, estimated at 22,000 years.
Magnetic excursions are temporary and
incomplete shifts in the magnetic field
direction. It occurs 10 times more
frequently than full reversals. Theexamples
are as:
o Norwegian-Greenland Sea event
(64,500 years ago),
o Laschamps and Mono Lake (34,500
years ago),
o Bagwalipokar excursions (
Uttarakhand): researchers found
evidence of two excursions—
15,500–14,700 years ago and
8,000–2,850 years ago.
Concerns Arising from Field Instability
Atmospheric Vulnerability: During weak-
field phases, Earth’s atmosphere is more
exposed to harmful solar wind and cosmic
rays.
Technological Impacts: It could disrupt
power grids, satellite operations, and
communication systems.
Biological Impact: Many animals, such as
birds, sea turtles, and whales, rely on
Earth’s magnetic field for navigation. A flip
or fluctuation could disrupt migratory
patterns and breeding cycles.
Concluding Remarks
Though Earth’s magnetic field has reversed
and fluctuated many times in geological
history, the precise timing and triggers of
such events remain uncertain.
However, as human society grows
increasingly dependent on electromagnetic
infrastructure, understanding and
predicting the behavior of the magnetic
field becomes vital.
Birth Rates in Delhi, Kerala, and T.N. Declining at
Twice the Rate of National Average
Syllabus: GS1/Human Geography
Context
The annual crude birth rates for Tamil Nadu,
Delhi and Kerala are declining at twice the
rate of the national average.
About
The data from the Sample Registration
System (SRS) Statistical Report 2021, was
released by the Registrar General of India.
The SRS is the largest demographic
survey in the country, meant to
provide annual estimates on fertility and
mortality indicators such as birth rates,
death rates, etc.
The crude birth rate (CBR) is a demographic
measure that indicates the number of live
births per 1,000 people in a
population during a specific time period,
usually a year.
Major Findings
India’s Total Fertility Rate (TFR) has
remained constant at 2.0 in 2021, the same
as in 2020.
o The average number of children
born to a woman during her
childbearing years.
21
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
A reversal happens when the flow of molten
material in the core changes direction—for
instance, from clockwise to anticlockwise—
altering the magnetic field’s orientation.
Magnetic Reversals and Excursions
Magnetic reversal is a phenomenon where
the magnetic north and south poles swap
places. It occurred 183 times in the past 83
million years.
o The last major reversal was
the Brunhes-Matuyama
reversal, about 780,000 years ago.
o It can take thousands of years to
complete, estimated at 22,000 years.
Magnetic excursions are temporary and
incomplete shifts in the magnetic field
direction. It occurs 10 times more
frequently than full reversals. Theexamples
are as:
o Norwegian-Greenland Sea event
(64,500 years ago),
o Laschamps and Mono Lake (34,500
years ago),
o Bagwalipokar excursions (
Uttarakhand): researchers found
evidence of two excursions—
15,500–14,700 years ago and
8,000–2,850 years ago.
Concerns Arising from Field Instability
Atmospheric Vulnerability: During weak-
field phases, Earth’s atmosphere is more
exposed to harmful solar wind and cosmic
rays.
Technological Impacts: It could disrupt
power grids, satellite operations, and
communication systems.
Biological Impact: Many animals, such as
birds, sea turtles, and whales, rely on
Earth’s magnetic field for navigation. A flip
or fluctuation could disrupt migratory
patterns and breeding cycles.
Concluding Remarks
Though Earth’s magnetic field has reversed
and fluctuated many times in geological
history, the precise timing and triggers of
such events remain uncertain.
However, as human society grows
increasingly dependent on electromagnetic
infrastructure, understanding and
predicting the behavior of the magnetic
field becomes vital.
Birth Rates in Delhi, Kerala, and T.N. Declining at
Twice the Rate of National Average
Syllabus: GS1/Human Geography
Context
The annual crude birth rates for Tamil Nadu,
Delhi and Kerala are declining at twice the
rate of the national average.
About
The data from the Sample Registration
System (SRS) Statistical Report 2021, was
released by the Registrar General of India.
The SRS is the largest demographic
survey in the country, meant to
provide annual estimates on fertility and
mortality indicators such as birth rates,
death rates, etc.
The crude birth rate (CBR) is a demographic
measure that indicates the number of live
births per 1,000 people in a
population during a specific time period,
usually a year.
Major Findings
India’s Total Fertility Rate (TFR) has
remained constant at 2.0 in 2021, the same
as in 2020.
o The average number of children
born to a woman during her
childbearing years.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
22
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o A TFR of 2.1 is considered the
replacement level needed to
maintain a stable population.
All-India crude birth rate was 19.3 in 2021,
dropping at a rate of 1.12% every year from
2016 to 2021.
The birth rate for Tamil Nadu has
been declining at a rate of 2.35% every year,
Delhi’s has been declining at a rate of 2.23%
and Kerala’s is dropping at a rate of 2.05%.
Birth rates were seen declining faster than
the national average for Maharashtra
(1.57%), Gujarat (1.24%), Odisha (1.34%),
Himachal Pradesh (1.29%), Haryana
(1.21%), and Jammu and Kashmir
(1.47%).
The slowest rate of decline in birth rate was
seen in States such as Rajasthan (0.48%),
Bihar (0.86%), Chhattisgarh (0.98%),
Jharkhand (0.98%), Assam (1.05%),
Madhya Pradesh (1.05%), West Bengal
(1.08%), and Uttar Pradesh (1.09%).
Rise in the number of registered births were
seen in about 11 States and union
territories: Bihar, Rajasthan, Uttar Pradesh,
Uttarakhand, West Bengal, Jammu and
Kashmir, Ladakh, Lakshadweep, Arunachal
Pradesh, Mizoram and Nagaland.
Total fertility rate (TFR): States such as
Bihar, Uttar Pradesh, Rajasthan, Madhya
Pradesh had a TFR higher than the national
average.
o The TFR measures the average
number of children expected to be
born per woman during her entire
span of reproductive period.
Gross reproduction rate (GRR): The GRR for
India stood at 1, meaning that on an
average, each woman in India is having one
daughter who survives to reproductive age
and has children of her own.
o In Bihar, Rajasthan, Madhya
Pradesh, and Uttar Pradesh the GRR
was significantly higher than the
India average.
Concerns
Uneven Decline in Birth Rates Across
States: Some states (e.g., Bihar, UP, MP,
Rajasthan) show slow or minimal decline in
birth rates, contributing to regional
population imbalances.
o These high-birth-rate states may
continue to drive overall population
growth, putting pressure on
resources, infrastructure, and
services.
Demographic Divergence Between
Regions: Southern and western States are
moving toward or below replacement-level
fertility, while northern and eastern States
remain above it.
o This creates policy and planning
complexity — a “two-speed”
demographic transition in the
country.
Aging Population Risk in Low Fertility
States: States with low TFR (e.g., Kerala,
West Bengal) risk aging population
challenges shrinking labor force, increased
burden on healthcare and pensions, and
need for revised economic and social
policies.
Persistent High Fertility in Some
States: Despite national TFR at 2.0, states
like Bihar (TFR 3.0) and UP (TFR 2.7) still
report high fertility.
22
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o A TFR of 2.1 is considered the
replacement level needed to
maintain a stable population.
All-India crude birth rate was 19.3 in 2021,
dropping at a rate of 1.12% every year from
2016 to 2021.
The birth rate for Tamil Nadu has
been declining at a rate of 2.35% every year,
Delhi’s has been declining at a rate of 2.23%
and Kerala’s is dropping at a rate of 2.05%.
Birth rates were seen declining faster than
the national average for Maharashtra
(1.57%), Gujarat (1.24%), Odisha (1.34%),
Himachal Pradesh (1.29%), Haryana
(1.21%), and Jammu and Kashmir
(1.47%).
The slowest rate of decline in birth rate was
seen in States such as Rajasthan (0.48%),
Bihar (0.86%), Chhattisgarh (0.98%),
Jharkhand (0.98%), Assam (1.05%),
Madhya Pradesh (1.05%), West Bengal
(1.08%), and Uttar Pradesh (1.09%).
Rise in the number of registered births were
seen in about 11 States and union
territories: Bihar, Rajasthan, Uttar Pradesh,
Uttarakhand, West Bengal, Jammu and
Kashmir, Ladakh, Lakshadweep, Arunachal
Pradesh, Mizoram and Nagaland.
Total fertility rate (TFR): States such as
Bihar, Uttar Pradesh, Rajasthan, Madhya
Pradesh had a TFR higher than the national
average.
o The TFR measures the average
number of children expected to be
born per woman during her entire
span of reproductive period.
Gross reproduction rate (GRR): The GRR for
India stood at 1, meaning that on an
average, each woman in India is having one
daughter who survives to reproductive age
and has children of her own.
o In Bihar, Rajasthan, Madhya
Pradesh, and Uttar Pradesh the GRR
was significantly higher than the
India average.
Concerns
Uneven Decline in Birth Rates Across
States: Some states (e.g., Bihar, UP, MP,
Rajasthan) show slow or minimal decline in
birth rates, contributing to regional
population imbalances.
o These high-birth-rate states may
continue to drive overall population
growth, putting pressure on
resources, infrastructure, and
services.
Demographic Divergence Between
Regions: Southern and western States are
moving toward or below replacement-level
fertility, while northern and eastern States
remain above it.
o This creates policy and planning
complexity — a “two-speed”
demographic transition in the
country.
Aging Population Risk in Low Fertility
States: States with low TFR (e.g., Kerala,
West Bengal) risk aging population
challenges shrinking labor force, increased
burden on healthcare and pensions, and
need for revised economic and social
policies.
Persistent High Fertility in Some
States: Despite national TFR at 2.0, states
like Bihar (TFR 3.0) and UP (TFR 2.7) still
report high fertility.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
23
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Indicates gaps in education,
healthcare, and awareness,
particularly in rural and
underserved areas.
Way Ahead
Enhance Family Planning Services: Expand
access to contraception and reproductive
health, especially in high-fertility states.
Promote Female Education: Focus on girl
child education and awareness to delay
marriage and childbirth.
Improve Data Quality: Align and strengthen
SRS and CRS systems; expedite the delayed
Census for accurate planning.
Prepare for Aging Population: In low-
fertility states, build systems for elderly
care, healthcare, and pensions.
Address Regional Imbalances: Promote
development in high-growth regions
through jobs, education, and infrastructure.
Policy Coordination: Ensure Centre-State
collaboration and flexible funding for
population control programs.
Sagarmatha Sambaad
Syllabus: GS1/ Indian Geography, GS3/Environment
In News
Union Minister for Environment addressed
the 1st Sagarmatha Sambaad in Nepal,
presenting a five-point global action plan to
protect fragile mountain ecosystems, with a
focus on the Himalayas.
Key Highlights From the Address
“Sagarmatha”, meaning ‘Head of the Sky’,
symbolizes both the majesty and
responsibility of protecting mountain
ecosystems. Sambaad (dialogue) is named
after the world’s tallest
mountain Sagarmatha (Mt. Everst).
He emphasized the shared cultural and
ecological bonds between India and its
Himalayan neighbours.
South Asia houses 25% of the global
population, contributing only 4% to
historical CO₂ emissions. Yet, developing
countries like India bear disproportionate
impacts of climate change.
o And, developed countries are falling
short on climate finance, technology
transfer, and capacity building.
He called for transboundary cooperation
under the International Big Cats Alliance for
species like snow leopards, tigers, and
leopards & also reiterated India’s progress
under Project Snow Leopard.
Five-Point Global Action Plan Proposed by India
Enhanced Scientific
Cooperation: Strengthening research
collaboration, and monitoring cryospheric
changes, hydrological cycles, and
biodiversity.
Building Climate Resilience: Investing in
climate adaptation measures, early warning
systems for disasters like Glacial Lake
Outburst Floods (GLOFs), and climate-
resilient infrastructure in mountain areas.
Empowerering Mountain
Communities: Ensuring that the welfare,
needs and aspirations of local communities
are at the heart of policy-making and their
benefit from green livelihoods and
sustainable tourism. Their traditional
knowledge is an invaluable resource.
Providing Green Finance: Making available
adequate and predictable climate finance as
per the UNFCCC and its Paris Agreement for
mountain Nations to implement adaptation
and mitigation strategies effectively.
Recognizing Mountain
Perspectives: Ensuring that the unique
vulnerabilities and contributions of
mountain ecosystems are suitably featured
in global climate negotiations and
sustainable development agendas.
Importance of Himalayas
Climate Regulator: The Himalayas act as a
barrier against cold Central Asian winds
and influence the Indian monsoon, ensuring
rainfall across northern plains.
23
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Indicates gaps in education,
healthcare, and awareness,
particularly in rural and
underserved areas.
Way Ahead
Enhance Family Planning Services: Expand
access to contraception and reproductive
health, especially in high-fertility states.
Promote Female Education: Focus on girl
child education and awareness to delay
marriage and childbirth.
Improve Data Quality: Align and strengthen
SRS and CRS systems; expedite the delayed
Census for accurate planning.
Prepare for Aging Population: In low-
fertility states, build systems for elderly
care, healthcare, and pensions.
Address Regional Imbalances: Promote
development in high-growth regions
through jobs, education, and infrastructure.
Policy Coordination: Ensure Centre-State
collaboration and flexible funding for
population control programs.
Sagarmatha Sambaad
Syllabus: GS1/ Indian Geography, GS3/Environment
In News
Union Minister for Environment addressed
the 1st Sagarmatha Sambaad in Nepal,
presenting a five-point global action plan to
protect fragile mountain ecosystems, with a
focus on the Himalayas.
Key Highlights From the Address
“Sagarmatha”, meaning ‘Head of the Sky’,
symbolizes both the majesty and
responsibility of protecting mountain
ecosystems. Sambaad (dialogue) is named
after the world’s tallest
mountain Sagarmatha (Mt. Everst).
He emphasized the shared cultural and
ecological bonds between India and its
Himalayan neighbours.
South Asia houses 25% of the global
population, contributing only 4% to
historical CO₂ emissions. Yet, developing
countries like India bear disproportionate
impacts of climate change.
o And, developed countries are falling
short on climate finance, technology
transfer, and capacity building.
He called for transboundary cooperation
under the International Big Cats Alliance for
species like snow leopards, tigers, and
leopards & also reiterated India’s progress
under Project Snow Leopard.
Five-Point Global Action Plan Proposed by India
Enhanced Scientific
Cooperation: Strengthening research
collaboration, and monitoring cryospheric
changes, hydrological cycles, and
biodiversity.
Building Climate Resilience: Investing in
climate adaptation measures, early warning
systems for disasters like Glacial Lake
Outburst Floods (GLOFs), and climate-
resilient infrastructure in mountain areas.
Empowerering Mountain
Communities: Ensuring that the welfare,
needs and aspirations of local communities
are at the heart of policy-making and their
benefit from green livelihoods and
sustainable tourism. Their traditional
knowledge is an invaluable resource.
Providing Green Finance: Making available
adequate and predictable climate finance as
per the UNFCCC and its Paris Agreement for
mountain Nations to implement adaptation
and mitigation strategies effectively.
Recognizing Mountain
Perspectives: Ensuring that the unique
vulnerabilities and contributions of
mountain ecosystems are suitably featured
in global climate negotiations and
sustainable development agendas.
Importance of Himalayas
Climate Regulator: The Himalayas act as a
barrier against cold Central Asian winds
and influence the Indian monsoon, ensuring
rainfall across northern plains.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
24
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Water Source: They are the origin of major
rivers like the Ganga, Indus, and
Brahmaputra, supporting water and food
security for over a billion people.
Biodiversity Hotspot: Home to diverse flora
and fauna, including endangered species
like the snow leopard and red panda.
Cultural Significance: Sacred in Hinduism
and Buddhism, the region hosts many
pilgrimage sites like Amarnath, Badrinath,
and Kailash Mansarovar.
Strategic Importance: Serving as a natural
frontier with China, Nepal, and Bhutan, the
Himalayas are vital to India’s national
security.
Initiatives Taken to Protect Himalayas
National Mission on Sustaining Himalayan
Ecosystem (NMSHE): Part of India’s
National Action Plan on Climate Change
(NAPCC), it focuses on sustainable
development, glacier monitoring, and
biodiversity conservation in the Himalayan
region.
Secure Himalaya Project: Launched with
UNDP support, it promotes conservation of
high-altitude biodiversity and supports
sustainable livelihoods in Himachal
Pradesh, Uttarakhand, Sikkim, and Ladakh
Project Snow Leopard: Aims to protect snow
leopards and their habitat through
community-based conservation and
scientific research in five Himalayan states.
International Big Cats Alliance (IBCA): India-
led initiative to foster global cooperation in
protecting big cats like snow leopards and
tigers across transboundary Himalayan
regions.
Suez Canal offers 15% Discount to Cargo Ships
Syllabus: GS1/ Geography
Context
In response to the Red Sea security crisis
that severely disrupted maritime trade, the
Suez Canal Authority (SCA) has announced
a 15% discount on transit fees for large
container ships from May 15, 2025.
Security Crisis in the Red Sea
The crisis began in 2023 when Iran-backed
Houthi rebels in Yemen started targeting
commercial ships linked to Israel or its
allies, in retaliation to the conflict in Gaza.
In response, major shipping lines avoided
the Red Sea and rerouted ships via the Cape
of Good Hope, significantly increasing
Voyage duration by 10–14 days, Fuel
consumption and Freight rates.
About Suez Canal
The Suez Canal is a 193-km artificial
waterway that connects the Mediterranean
Sea to the Red Sea, making it the shortest
maritime route between Europe and Asia.
o It was officially opened to ships
in 1869.
The Canal does not have locks and it is
essentially a sea-level waterway.
o This characteristic allows for
a smoother, more efficient passage of
vessels, thus supporting a high
volume of maritime traffic.
It is one of the busiest waterways in the
world through which 12–15% of global
commerce passes.
Importance of Suez Canal
Reduced Transit Time: The Suez Canal
reduces the maritime distance between
Europe and Asia by approximately 7,000
kilometers.
World trade: It’s a major factor in the
world’s economy, with roughly 12% of
global trade, 7% of the world’s oil,
and 30% of daily container traffic passing
through it.
Revenue Generation: The Suez Canal is one
of Egypt’s primary sources of revenue.
Jarosite
24
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Water Source: They are the origin of major
rivers like the Ganga, Indus, and
Brahmaputra, supporting water and food
security for over a billion people.
Biodiversity Hotspot: Home to diverse flora
and fauna, including endangered species
like the snow leopard and red panda.
Cultural Significance: Sacred in Hinduism
and Buddhism, the region hosts many
pilgrimage sites like Amarnath, Badrinath,
and Kailash Mansarovar.
Strategic Importance: Serving as a natural
frontier with China, Nepal, and Bhutan, the
Himalayas are vital to India’s national
security.
Initiatives Taken to Protect Himalayas
National Mission on Sustaining Himalayan
Ecosystem (NMSHE): Part of India’s
National Action Plan on Climate Change
(NAPCC), it focuses on sustainable
development, glacier monitoring, and
biodiversity conservation in the Himalayan
region.
Secure Himalaya Project: Launched with
UNDP support, it promotes conservation of
high-altitude biodiversity and supports
sustainable livelihoods in Himachal
Pradesh, Uttarakhand, Sikkim, and Ladakh
Project Snow Leopard: Aims to protect snow
leopards and their habitat through
community-based conservation and
scientific research in five Himalayan states.
International Big Cats Alliance (IBCA): India-
led initiative to foster global cooperation in
protecting big cats like snow leopards and
tigers across transboundary Himalayan
regions.
Suez Canal offers 15% Discount to Cargo Ships
Syllabus: GS1/ Geography
Context
In response to the Red Sea security crisis
that severely disrupted maritime trade, the
Suez Canal Authority (SCA) has announced
a 15% discount on transit fees for large
container ships from May 15, 2025.
Security Crisis in the Red Sea
The crisis began in 2023 when Iran-backed
Houthi rebels in Yemen started targeting
commercial ships linked to Israel or its
allies, in retaliation to the conflict in Gaza.
In response, major shipping lines avoided
the Red Sea and rerouted ships via the Cape
of Good Hope, significantly increasing
Voyage duration by 10–14 days, Fuel
consumption and Freight rates.
About Suez Canal
The Suez Canal is a 193-km artificial
waterway that connects the Mediterranean
Sea to the Red Sea, making it the shortest
maritime route between Europe and Asia.
o It was officially opened to ships
in 1869.
The Canal does not have locks and it is
essentially a sea-level waterway.
o This characteristic allows for
a smoother, more efficient passage of
vessels, thus supporting a high
volume of maritime traffic.
It is one of the busiest waterways in the
world through which 12–15% of global
commerce passes.
Importance of Suez Canal
Reduced Transit Time: The Suez Canal
reduces the maritime distance between
Europe and Asia by approximately 7,000
kilometers.
World trade: It’s a major factor in the
world’s economy, with roughly 12% of
global trade, 7% of the world’s oil,
and 30% of daily container traffic passing
through it.
Revenue Generation: The Suez Canal is one
of Egypt’s primary sources of revenue.
Jarosite
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
25
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Syllabus :GS 1/Geography
In News
Jarosite has been found to potentially serve
as a natural geological clock on Mars.
Jarosite
It is a potassium-iron hydroxysulfate
mineral commonly found in acidic
environments, such as acid sulfate soils
(ASS) and acid mine drainage
environments.
It is a yellow-brown mineral that contains
potassium, iron, and sulphate.
It plays an important role as a scavenger of
trace and major elements in ASS, as well as
in other natural and engineered systems.
Recent Research
Researchers in India analyzed jarosite veins
from Gujarat, whose environment
resembles that of Mars.
By studying the mineral’s luminescence —
the light it emits due to stored radiation —
they discovered that jarosite could survive
heating from a rover’s drill without losing
its ability to luminesce.
Given Mars’ natural radiation rate, jarosite
can record events from the past 25,000
years.
Importance
As jarosite is common on Mars, durable, and
easily analyzed with small heaters and
LEDs, it could be used by future rovers to
date dust storms, flood deposits, and
volcanic ash.
Maths of How India’s Coastline Lengthened without
Gaining Land
Syllabus: GS1/ Geography
In Context
The Ministry of Home Affairs, in its 2023–
24 report, updated India’s coastline length
to 11,098.8 km, a significant increase from
the previously recorded 7,516.6 km.
o This change stems not from any
territorial acquisition or natural
geological expansion, but
from enhanced mapping precision,
underscoring the “coastline
paradox.”
Coastline Paradox
Definition: The coastline paradox states that
the length of a coastline depends on the
scale at which it is measured. The more
detailed the measurement (smaller ruler),
the longer the coastline appears.
Euclidean Geometry: Deals with ideal
shapes and straight lines/smooth curves,
where length is straightforward.
Fractal Geometry: Coastlines exhibit fractal-
like properties, meaning they display self-
similar patterns at different scales. This
concept was popularized by Benoît
Mandelbrot.
Hypothetical Infinity: Theoretically,
measuring a coastline down to the size of a
water molecule would result in its length
approaching infinity.
New Measurement Methodology and Technology
Agencies Involved: National Hydrographic
Office (NHO) and the Survey of India.
Finer Scale: Electronic navigation charts at a
much finer resolution of 1:250,000.
Technologies Used: Geographic Information
Systems (GIS), Satellite Altimetry, LIDAR-
GPS & Drone-based imaging.
Measurement Reference: Highwater lines
prepared by the NHO based on 2011 data
on electronic navigation charts. River
mouths and creeks were closed off at a fixed
inland threshold.
Inclusion of Islands: Islands exposed at low
tide were also included in the review.
Future Revisions: The coastline length will
be revised every 10 years from 2024-2025,
ensuring continuous accuracy.
Implications of the Revised Coastline Length
25
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Syllabus :GS 1/Geography
In News
Jarosite has been found to potentially serve
as a natural geological clock on Mars.
Jarosite
It is a potassium-iron hydroxysulfate
mineral commonly found in acidic
environments, such as acid sulfate soils
(ASS) and acid mine drainage
environments.
It is a yellow-brown mineral that contains
potassium, iron, and sulphate.
It plays an important role as a scavenger of
trace and major elements in ASS, as well as
in other natural and engineered systems.
Recent Research
Researchers in India analyzed jarosite veins
from Gujarat, whose environment
resembles that of Mars.
By studying the mineral’s luminescence —
the light it emits due to stored radiation —
they discovered that jarosite could survive
heating from a rover’s drill without losing
its ability to luminesce.
Given Mars’ natural radiation rate, jarosite
can record events from the past 25,000
years.
Importance
As jarosite is common on Mars, durable, and
easily analyzed with small heaters and
LEDs, it could be used by future rovers to
date dust storms, flood deposits, and
volcanic ash.
Maths of How India’s Coastline Lengthened without
Gaining Land
Syllabus: GS1/ Geography
In Context
The Ministry of Home Affairs, in its 2023–
24 report, updated India’s coastline length
to 11,098.8 km, a significant increase from
the previously recorded 7,516.6 km.
o This change stems not from any
territorial acquisition or natural
geological expansion, but
from enhanced mapping precision,
underscoring the “coastline
paradox.”
Coastline Paradox
Definition: The coastline paradox states that
the length of a coastline depends on the
scale at which it is measured. The more
detailed the measurement (smaller ruler),
the longer the coastline appears.
Euclidean Geometry: Deals with ideal
shapes and straight lines/smooth curves,
where length is straightforward.
Fractal Geometry: Coastlines exhibit fractal-
like properties, meaning they display self-
similar patterns at different scales. This
concept was popularized by Benoît
Mandelbrot.
Hypothetical Infinity: Theoretically,
measuring a coastline down to the size of a
water molecule would result in its length
approaching infinity.
New Measurement Methodology and Technology
Agencies Involved: National Hydrographic
Office (NHO) and the Survey of India.
Finer Scale: Electronic navigation charts at a
much finer resolution of 1:250,000.
Technologies Used: Geographic Information
Systems (GIS), Satellite Altimetry, LIDAR-
GPS & Drone-based imaging.
Measurement Reference: Highwater lines
prepared by the NHO based on 2011 data
on electronic navigation charts. River
mouths and creeks were closed off at a fixed
inland threshold.
Inclusion of Islands: Islands exposed at low
tide were also included in the review.
Future Revisions: The coastline length will
be revised every 10 years from 2024-2025,
ensuring continuous accuracy.
Implications of the Revised Coastline Length
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
26
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Disaster Management and Climate
Adaptation: India’s east coast is prone to
cyclones (e.g., Fani, Yaas) and tsunamis.
o Accurate coastline data improves
early warning systems, evacuation
route planning, CRZ (Coastal
Regulation Zone) zoning.
o Supports climate vulnerability
assessments and resilient coastal
infrastructure development.
Economic Zoning and Blue Economy
Expansion:
o Influences the computation of
India’s Exclusive Economic Zone
(EEZ).
o Extends reach over marine fisheries,
deep-sea mining, bioprospecting,
and offshore energy.
o Enhances viability of Sagarmala,
coastal industrial corridors, and
port-led growth models.
o Coastal Governance and Urban
Planning
Better data supports:
o Shoreline management plans
o Urban zoning laws
o Port placement and dredging
o Helps states like Tamil Nadu, Kerala,
Gujarat, and Odisha optimize coastal
investments.
Challenges and Way Forward
Dynamic Nature of Coastlines: Coastlines are
constantly changing due to tidal
fluctuations, sedimentation, erosion, and
sea-level rise. Regular revisions are crucial.
Inter-agency Coordination: Continued
collaboration between agencies like the
NHO, Survey of India, and other relevant
ministries (e.g., Ministry of Earth Sciences,
Ministry of Environment, Forest and
Climate Change) is vital.
Technological Upgradation: Continued
investment in advanced technologies for
mapping and monitoring is necessary.
Capacity Building: Training and capacity
building for personnel involved in coastal
management and security.
Madden-Julian Oscillation Helped Trigger the Early
Onset of the Monsoon
Syllabus: GS1/ Geography
Context
The early onset of the southwest monsoon
over Kerala this year has caught the
attention of meteorologists.
o According to the India
Meteorological Department (IMD),
the Madden-Julian Oscillation
(MJO) played a significant role in
this development.
What is Madden-Julian Oscillation (MJO)
The MJO is a moving system of winds,
clouds, and pressure that brings rain as it
circles around the equator.
It was discovered in 1971 by Roland
Madden and Paul Julian.
The system travels eastward at 4–8 m/s and
circles the globe typically every 30–60 days,
though it can take up to 90 days.
As it moves, strong MJO activity often splits
the planet into two parts — one in which the
MJO is in active phase and brings rainfall,
and the other in which it suppresses
rainfall.
Geographical Influence
The effect of the MJO is witnessed mainly in
the tropical region, in the band between 30
degrees North and 30 degrees South of the
equator, even though the mid-latitude
regions in both hemispheres also feel its
impact.
o It also includes India, making it a
crucial player in the South Asian
monsoon system.
26
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Disaster Management and Climate
Adaptation: India’s east coast is prone to
cyclones (e.g., Fani, Yaas) and tsunamis.
o Accurate coastline data improves
early warning systems, evacuation
route planning, CRZ (Coastal
Regulation Zone) zoning.
o Supports climate vulnerability
assessments and resilient coastal
infrastructure development.
Economic Zoning and Blue Economy
Expansion:
o Influences the computation of
India’s Exclusive Economic Zone
(EEZ).
o Extends reach over marine fisheries,
deep-sea mining, bioprospecting,
and offshore energy.
o Enhances viability of Sagarmala,
coastal industrial corridors, and
port-led growth models.
o Coastal Governance and Urban
Planning
Better data supports:
o Shoreline management plans
o Urban zoning laws
o Port placement and dredging
o Helps states like Tamil Nadu, Kerala,
Gujarat, and Odisha optimize coastal
investments.
Challenges and Way Forward
Dynamic Nature of Coastlines: Coastlines are
constantly changing due to tidal
fluctuations, sedimentation, erosion, and
sea-level rise. Regular revisions are crucial.
Inter-agency Coordination: Continued
collaboration between agencies like the
NHO, Survey of India, and other relevant
ministries (e.g., Ministry of Earth Sciences,
Ministry of Environment, Forest and
Climate Change) is vital.
Technological Upgradation: Continued
investment in advanced technologies for
mapping and monitoring is necessary.
Capacity Building: Training and capacity
building for personnel involved in coastal
management and security.
Madden-Julian Oscillation Helped Trigger the Early
Onset of the Monsoon
Syllabus: GS1/ Geography
Context
The early onset of the southwest monsoon
over Kerala this year has caught the
attention of meteorologists.
o According to the India
Meteorological Department (IMD),
the Madden-Julian Oscillation
(MJO) played a significant role in
this development.
What is Madden-Julian Oscillation (MJO)
The MJO is a moving system of winds,
clouds, and pressure that brings rain as it
circles around the equator.
It was discovered in 1971 by Roland
Madden and Paul Julian.
The system travels eastward at 4–8 m/s and
circles the globe typically every 30–60 days,
though it can take up to 90 days.
As it moves, strong MJO activity often splits
the planet into two parts — one in which the
MJO is in active phase and brings rainfall,
and the other in which it suppresses
rainfall.
Geographical Influence
The effect of the MJO is witnessed mainly in
the tropical region, in the band between 30
degrees North and 30 degrees South of the
equator, even though the mid-latitude
regions in both hemispheres also feel its
impact.
o It also includes India, making it a
crucial player in the South Asian
monsoon system.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
27
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
During an active MJO phase, regions within
its influence experience above-average
rainfall, often due to increased cloud
formation, convection, and cyclonic activity.
Contribution of MJO to the Early Monsoon
This year, the MJO was observed in Phase
4 with an amplitude greater than 1 around
May 22, originating in the Indian Ocean.
Phase 4 with strong amplitude is indicative
of intense rainfall and storm systems,
conducive for monsoon initiation.
This setup contributed to frequent cyclonic
activity and cloud build-up over the Bay of
Bengal, helping trigger the early arrival of
the monsoon over Kerala.
Other reasons for Early Monsoon
Transition to La Niña: In early 2025, global
climate models indicated El Niño weakening
and possible La Niña development — a
pattern historically associated with
stronger and earlier monsoon seasons in
India.
Stronger-than-usual cross-equatorial
winds: During May, winds from the
southern hemisphere begin to blow across
the equator and enter the Arabian Sea.
o When these winds are stronger and
more organised, they push
moisture-laden air toward the
Indian coast more quickly,
hastening the monsoon’s arrival.
Above-normal sea surface
temperatures: Warmer-than-usual waters
in the Arabian Sea and Bay of Bengal fuel
intense convection, which helps develop
cloud bands and low-pressure systems
needed for monsoon formation.
o In 2025, sea surface temperatures in
the region were higher than
average, aiding early cloud
development.
Concluding remarks
While the early onset of the monsoon offers
critical advantages for agriculture and
water resource management, it also
intensifies climate-related vulnerabilities.
As monsoon patterns become increasingly
erratic under climate change, strengthening
early warning systems and forecasting
models remains essential for safeguarding
lives, livelihoods, and ecosystems.
PLACES
New Caledonia
Syllabus: GS1/Places in News
In News
New Caledonia is facing deepened political
uncertainty ahead of the November 2025
provincial elections.
About
It is classified as a French overseas
collectivity, enjoying significant autonomy
under French sovereignty.
Colonised in 1853 by France as a penal
colony, its history is marked by resistance
from the Indigenous Kanak population.
The 1998 Nouméa Accord granted
autonomy and led to three referendums, all
rejecting independence, though the 2021
vote was boycotted by pro-independence
groups, casting doubt on its legitimacy.
The push for independence continues due to
unresolved historical grievances and
contested political status.
New Caledonia
27
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
During an active MJO phase, regions within
its influence experience above-average
rainfall, often due to increased cloud
formation, convection, and cyclonic activity.
Contribution of MJO to the Early Monsoon
This year, the MJO was observed in Phase
4 with an amplitude greater than 1 around
May 22, originating in the Indian Ocean.
Phase 4 with strong amplitude is indicative
of intense rainfall and storm systems,
conducive for monsoon initiation.
This setup contributed to frequent cyclonic
activity and cloud build-up over the Bay of
Bengal, helping trigger the early arrival of
the monsoon over Kerala.
Other reasons for Early Monsoon
Transition to La Niña: In early 2025, global
climate models indicated El Niño weakening
and possible La Niña development — a
pattern historically associated with
stronger and earlier monsoon seasons in
India.
Stronger-than-usual cross-equatorial
winds: During May, winds from the
southern hemisphere begin to blow across
the equator and enter the Arabian Sea.
o When these winds are stronger and
more organised, they push
moisture-laden air toward the
Indian coast more quickly,
hastening the monsoon’s arrival.
Above-normal sea surface
temperatures: Warmer-than-usual waters
in the Arabian Sea and Bay of Bengal fuel
intense convection, which helps develop
cloud bands and low-pressure systems
needed for monsoon formation.
o In 2025, sea surface temperatures in
the region were higher than
average, aiding early cloud
development.
Concluding remarks
While the early onset of the monsoon offers
critical advantages for agriculture and
water resource management, it also
intensifies climate-related vulnerabilities.
As monsoon patterns become increasingly
erratic under climate change, strengthening
early warning systems and forecasting
models remains essential for safeguarding
lives, livelihoods, and ecosystems.
PLACES
New Caledonia
Syllabus: GS1/Places in News
In News
New Caledonia is facing deepened political
uncertainty ahead of the November 2025
provincial elections.
About
It is classified as a French overseas
collectivity, enjoying significant autonomy
under French sovereignty.
Colonised in 1853 by France as a penal
colony, its history is marked by resistance
from the Indigenous Kanak population.
The 1998 Nouméa Accord granted
autonomy and led to three referendums, all
rejecting independence, though the 2021
vote was boycotted by pro-independence
groups, casting doubt on its legitimacy.
The push for independence continues due to
unresolved historical grievances and
contested political status.
New Caledonia
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
28
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
New Caledonia is located in the
Southwestern Pacific Ocean, approximately
1,500 km east of Australia.
It lies within a geopolitically sensitive area,
surrounded by Australia (west), Vanuatu
(north), and Fiji (northeast) — placing it
within the Indo-Pacific strategic sphere.
The Nouméa Accord (1998) granted New
Caledonia enhanced autonomy and set the
path for independence referendums.
Under the Noumea Accord signed in 1998,
the French State retains sovereignty for
defence, foreign affairs, law and order,
monetary policy, and tertiary education and
research.
SOCIETY
Disproportionate Burden on Women in Risk Society
Syllabus: GS1/ Society
Context
In a risk society shaped by modern crises,
women disproportionately bear the burden
due to existing gender inequalities and
caregiving roles.
What is Risk Society?
The term ‘risk society’ describes a shift from
an industrial society to one increasingly
shaped by uncertainty and hazards created
by technological and environmental
developments.
Industrial societies brought prosperity but
also created complex, global risks—like
climate change and pandemics—that stem
from human progress rather than natural
causes.
The term risk society was coined by German
sociologist Ulrich Beck in his 1986 book
Risk Society: Towards a New Modernity.
Gendered Impacts in the Risk Society
Environmental and Health Risks:
Water collection duties of women expose
them to contaminated sources, increasing
vulnerability to water borne diseases.
Use of solid fuels for cooking leads to
chronic respiratory diseases due to indoor
air pollution.
Gender norms such as eating last or less
nutritious food during scarcity worsen
health outcomes. As per NFHS-5 (2019–21),
57% of Indian women suffer from anaemia,
compared to 25% of men.
Economic Vulnerability:
Women are more likely to work in the
informal sector, with limited job security or
savings.
They also have limited ownership of land
and property, reducing post-disaster
recovery ability.
Lower access to credit and institutional
support, making them more dependent and
less resilient during crises.
Unpaid care work places additional physical
and emotional strain.
Political and Institutional
Exclusion: Women’s perspectives are often
underrepresented in decision-making on
disaster preparedness, climate policies, and
health systems. This results in:
Gender-blind policies or insufficiently
responsive to women’s needs.
Missed opportunities to harness women’s
local knowledge and community networks
for risk mitigation.
Way Ahead
Gender Mainstreaming: Risk mitigation
strategies, including climate resilience and
pandemic responses, must include a gender
perspective.
Economic Empowerment: Land rights,
access to finance, and social protection
schemes must prioritise women to
strengthen recovery capacity.
Investing in Care Infrastructure: Recognising
and supporting unpaid care work through
services like crèches, health insurance, and
community kitchens can reduce women’s
disproportionate burden.
28
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
New Caledonia is located in the
Southwestern Pacific Ocean, approximately
1,500 km east of Australia.
It lies within a geopolitically sensitive area,
surrounded by Australia (west), Vanuatu
(north), and Fiji (northeast) — placing it
within the Indo-Pacific strategic sphere.
The Nouméa Accord (1998) granted New
Caledonia enhanced autonomy and set the
path for independence referendums.
Under the Noumea Accord signed in 1998,
the French State retains sovereignty for
defence, foreign affairs, law and order,
monetary policy, and tertiary education and
research.
SOCIETY
Disproportionate Burden on Women in Risk Society
Syllabus: GS1/ Society
Context
In a risk society shaped by modern crises,
women disproportionately bear the burden
due to existing gender inequalities and
caregiving roles.
What is Risk Society?
The term ‘risk society’ describes a shift from
an industrial society to one increasingly
shaped by uncertainty and hazards created
by technological and environmental
developments.
Industrial societies brought prosperity but
also created complex, global risks—like
climate change and pandemics—that stem
from human progress rather than natural
causes.
The term risk society was coined by German
sociologist Ulrich Beck in his 1986 book
Risk Society: Towards a New Modernity.
Gendered Impacts in the Risk Society
Environmental and Health Risks:
Water collection duties of women expose
them to contaminated sources, increasing
vulnerability to water borne diseases.
Use of solid fuels for cooking leads to
chronic respiratory diseases due to indoor
air pollution.
Gender norms such as eating last or less
nutritious food during scarcity worsen
health outcomes. As per NFHS-5 (2019–21),
57% of Indian women suffer from anaemia,
compared to 25% of men.
Economic Vulnerability:
Women are more likely to work in the
informal sector, with limited job security or
savings.
They also have limited ownership of land
and property, reducing post-disaster
recovery ability.
Lower access to credit and institutional
support, making them more dependent and
less resilient during crises.
Unpaid care work places additional physical
and emotional strain.
Political and Institutional
Exclusion: Women’s perspectives are often
underrepresented in decision-making on
disaster preparedness, climate policies, and
health systems. This results in:
Gender-blind policies or insufficiently
responsive to women’s needs.
Missed opportunities to harness women’s
local knowledge and community networks
for risk mitigation.
Way Ahead
Gender Mainstreaming: Risk mitigation
strategies, including climate resilience and
pandemic responses, must include a gender
perspective.
Economic Empowerment: Land rights,
access to finance, and social protection
schemes must prioritise women to
strengthen recovery capacity.
Investing in Care Infrastructure: Recognising
and supporting unpaid care work through
services like crèches, health insurance, and
community kitchens can reduce women’s
disproportionate burden.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
29
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Participation in Governance: From disaster
management authorities to local planning
bodies, women’s representation must be
institutionalised.
GS 2
EDUCATION
Govt School Enrolment Drops in 23 States
Syllabus: GS2/Education/Governance
Context
Minutes of meetings held by the Ministry of
Education (MoE) with 33 States and UTs
show that student enrolment dipped in 23
states.
About
The drop first came to light late last year in
the UDISE+ report for 2023-24, which
pointed to a sharp fall of around 1.5 crore in
overall school enrolment (government and
private) compared to the 2018-19 to 2021-
22 average.
o PM-POSHAN minutes show
the trend continuing into 2024-
25, triggering fresh concern in the
government.
At least eight witnessed declines exceeding
100,000: led by Uttar Pradesh (21.83 lakh),
Bihar (6.14 lakh), Rajasthan (5.63 lakh) and
West Bengal (4.01 lakh).
Compared to 2023-24, Karnataka saw its
enrollment fall by around 2 lakh; Assam by
1.68 lakh, Tamil Nadu by 1.65 lakh and
Delhi by 1.05 lakh.
The PM-POSHAN meetings flagged low
scheme coverage: In Delhi, the number of
students availing midday meals fell by
97,000 in 2024-25 versus 2023-24.
o In Uttar Pradesh, meal coverage
dropped by 5.41 lakh students, by
3.27 lakh in Rajasthan and 8.04 lakh
in West Bengal.
o Some States reported students
bringing their own tiffin.
Possible Reasons for the Decline
The first is a change in data-collection
methodology—from school-wise reporting
(just total numbers) to student-wise
reporting, this ongoing “data cleansing” may
have removed “ghost” entries.
Several States have suggested enrolment
may be moving from government to private
schools in the post-Covid years, reversing
pandemic-era trends.
Implications
Nutritional Risk: Lower participation could
impact child health and learning outcomes.
Administrative Gaps: Transition to Aadhaar-
based data is essential but may cause
temporary disruption.
Policy Reflection: Need to re-evaluate
strategies to maintain enrolment and
ensure scheme utilization.
MoE’s Response
The ministry has expressed “deep
concern” and asked states to investigate
causes and submit reports by June 30.
It emphasized on improving the meal
coverage and quality assurance for concerns
of some students reportedly bringing their
own food.
PM-POSHAN
– PM-POSHAN — Pradhan Mantri Poshan Shakti
Nirman, formerly known as the midday-meal
scheme, is a centrally sponsored Scheme under the
Ministry of Education.
1. It operates on a 60:40 funding model between
the Centre and the states.
– Provides hot cooked meals to 11.20 crore
29
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Participation in Governance: From disaster
management authorities to local planning
bodies, women’s representation must be
institutionalised.
GS 2
EDUCATION
Govt School Enrolment Drops in 23 States
Syllabus: GS2/Education/Governance
Context
Minutes of meetings held by the Ministry of
Education (MoE) with 33 States and UTs
show that student enrolment dipped in 23
states.
About
The drop first came to light late last year in
the UDISE+ report for 2023-24, which
pointed to a sharp fall of around 1.5 crore in
overall school enrolment (government and
private) compared to the 2018-19 to 2021-
22 average.
o PM-POSHAN minutes show
the trend continuing into 2024-
25, triggering fresh concern in the
government.
At least eight witnessed declines exceeding
100,000: led by Uttar Pradesh (21.83 lakh),
Bihar (6.14 lakh), Rajasthan (5.63 lakh) and
West Bengal (4.01 lakh).
Compared to 2023-24, Karnataka saw its
enrollment fall by around 2 lakh; Assam by
1.68 lakh, Tamil Nadu by 1.65 lakh and
Delhi by 1.05 lakh.
The PM-POSHAN meetings flagged low
scheme coverage: In Delhi, the number of
students availing midday meals fell by
97,000 in 2024-25 versus 2023-24.
o In Uttar Pradesh, meal coverage
dropped by 5.41 lakh students, by
3.27 lakh in Rajasthan and 8.04 lakh
in West Bengal.
o Some States reported students
bringing their own tiffin.
Possible Reasons for the Decline
The first is a change in data-collection
methodology—from school-wise reporting
(just total numbers) to student-wise
reporting, this ongoing “data cleansing” may
have removed “ghost” entries.
Several States have suggested enrolment
may be moving from government to private
schools in the post-Covid years, reversing
pandemic-era trends.
Implications
Nutritional Risk: Lower participation could
impact child health and learning outcomes.
Administrative Gaps: Transition to Aadhaar-
based data is essential but may cause
temporary disruption.
Policy Reflection: Need to re-evaluate
strategies to maintain enrolment and
ensure scheme utilization.
MoE’s Response
The ministry has expressed “deep
concern” and asked states to investigate
causes and submit reports by June 30.
It emphasized on improving the meal
coverage and quality assurance for concerns
of some students reportedly bringing their
own food.
PM-POSHAN
– PM-POSHAN — Pradhan Mantri Poshan Shakti
Nirman, formerly known as the midday-meal
scheme, is a centrally sponsored Scheme under the
Ministry of Education.
1. It operates on a 60:40 funding model between
the Centre and the states.
– Provides hot cooked meals to 11.20 crore
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
30
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
students in Balvatika and classes 1 to 8.
– Covers 10.36 lakh govt. & govt.-aided schools.
– Under the scheme, material cost is provided for
procurement of ingredients such as pulses,
vegetables, oil, spices and condiments, and fuel
required for cooking the meals.
1. The Centre also supplies around 2.6 million
metric tonnes of food grains annually through the
Food Corporation of India (FCI), covering 100% of
the cost.
– Besides addressing child nutrition, a cooked meal
in school is known to boost attendance, learning
outcomes and attention spans.
Experiential Learning
Syllabus: GS2/Education
Context
The current education system needs
to integrate experiential learning.
About
The Nature of Learning and the Changing
Landscape: Humans are inherently learning
beings, and today’s digital world has
transformed access to information.
o With AI and bots capable of teaching
concepts, traditional schools are at
risk of becoming obsolete if their
role is limited to content delivery.
What is Experiential Learning?
Experiential learning is a method of learning
through direct experience, reflection, and
application.
David A. Kolb is widely credited with
developing and popularizing the theory of
experiential learning.
Instead of just reading about a concept or
listening to a lecture, learners actively
engage in activities that allow them
to “learn by doing.”
The focus is on the process of learning
rather than just the outcome.
Benefits of Experient Learning:
Improves critical thinking and problem-
solving.
Enhances engagement and motivation.
Encourages collaboration and
communication.
Builds transferable, real-world skills.
Challenges
Requires more time, planning, and
resources.
Difficult to implement uniformly in large
classrooms.
Not all students may be initially ready for
self-directed learning.
Need for the Reforms in India
Schools are affected by infrastructure gaps,
teacher shortages, and unequal access,
especially in rural and under-resourced
contexts.
Current systems are overly exam-centric
and reward memorisation, which limits
critical thinking and creativity.
Neuroplasticity supports the idea that
brains can adapt and learn through varied
experiences over time.
Best Models of Education System around the world
Finland: Known for its focus on student
well-being and a lack of academic pressure,
30
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
students in Balvatika and classes 1 to 8.
– Covers 10.36 lakh govt. & govt.-aided schools.
– Under the scheme, material cost is provided for
procurement of ingredients such as pulses,
vegetables, oil, spices and condiments, and fuel
required for cooking the meals.
1. The Centre also supplies around 2.6 million
metric tonnes of food grains annually through the
Food Corporation of India (FCI), covering 100% of
the cost.
– Besides addressing child nutrition, a cooked meal
in school is known to boost attendance, learning
outcomes and attention spans.
Experiential Learning
Syllabus: GS2/Education
Context
The current education system needs
to integrate experiential learning.
About
The Nature of Learning and the Changing
Landscape: Humans are inherently learning
beings, and today’s digital world has
transformed access to information.
o With AI and bots capable of teaching
concepts, traditional schools are at
risk of becoming obsolete if their
role is limited to content delivery.
What is Experiential Learning?
Experiential learning is a method of learning
through direct experience, reflection, and
application.
David A. Kolb is widely credited with
developing and popularizing the theory of
experiential learning.
Instead of just reading about a concept or
listening to a lecture, learners actively
engage in activities that allow them
to “learn by doing.”
The focus is on the process of learning
rather than just the outcome.
Benefits of Experient Learning:
Improves critical thinking and problem-
solving.
Enhances engagement and motivation.
Encourages collaboration and
communication.
Builds transferable, real-world skills.
Challenges
Requires more time, planning, and
resources.
Difficult to implement uniformly in large
classrooms.
Not all students may be initially ready for
self-directed learning.
Need for the Reforms in India
Schools are affected by infrastructure gaps,
teacher shortages, and unequal access,
especially in rural and under-resourced
contexts.
Current systems are overly exam-centric
and reward memorisation, which limits
critical thinking and creativity.
Neuroplasticity supports the idea that
brains can adapt and learn through varied
experiences over time.
Best Models of Education System around the world
Finland: Known for its focus on student
well-being and a lack of academic pressure,
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
31
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Finland’s system emphasizes play-based
learning in early years and focuses on
critical thinking and problem-solving.
Singapore: High Standards and Rigorous
Outcomes.
o World-leading performance in
Programme for International
Student Assessment
(PISA) rankings (math, reading,
science).
o Carefully structured curriculum.
o High investment in teacher
development.
Japan: Discipline and Consistency.
o Strong cultural value on education
and respect.
o Uniform national curriculum.
o Emphasis on character education
and responsibility (e.g., students
clean classrooms).
o Strong work ethic and moral
development.
Conclusion
The challenges facing the Indian education
system are deep-rooted but not invincible.
Addressing them requires a multi-pronged
approach involving government policy,
community participation, teacher
empowerment, and technological
innovation.
By investing in inclusive, adaptive, and
learner-centric reforms, India can build an
education system that equips its citizens for
the challenges and opportunities of a
rapidly evolving world.
GOVERNMENT POLICY AND INTERVENTION
Supreme Court Flags Concerns Over Free Ration
Distribution
Syllabus: GS2/Welfare Schemes; Government Policy
& Intervention
Context
Recently, the Supreme Court of India has
raised concerns over the free ration
distribution system, questioning its long-
term sustainability and impact on economic
policies.
Development Perspective: Economic Sustainability
Supreme Court’s Concerns: It observed that
while States procure food grains from the
Centre and distribute them for free,
the financial burdenultimately falls on
taxpayers.
o It questioned whether India, in
2025, is still grappling with
the same poverty levels as in 2011,
when the last Census was
conducted.
Need for Employment and Infrastructure
Development: The court stressed that free
ration distribution alone cannot be a long-
term solution to poverty.
o It urged policymakers to focus on
job creation and infrastructure
growth to ensure economic stability.
Concerns Over Welfare Dependency: The
court cautioned against excessive reliance
on freebies, arguing that such policies might
discourage people from seeking
employment.
o Justice B.R. Gavai remarked that free
benefits should not create a
‘parasitic existence’, where
individuals lose the motivation to
work.
Welfare Argument: Ensuring Food Security
Public Distribution System (PDS): NFSA
2013 entitles 75% of the rural population
and 50% of the urban population to to
receive highly subsidised foodgrains
under two categories of beneficiaries: –
the Antodaya Anna Yojana households, and
the priority Households.
31
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Finland’s system emphasizes play-based
learning in early years and focuses on
critical thinking and problem-solving.
Singapore: High Standards and Rigorous
Outcomes.
o World-leading performance in
Programme for International
Student Assessment
(PISA) rankings (math, reading,
science).
o Carefully structured curriculum.
o High investment in teacher
development.
Japan: Discipline and Consistency.
o Strong cultural value on education
and respect.
o Uniform national curriculum.
o Emphasis on character education
and responsibility (e.g., students
clean classrooms).
o Strong work ethic and moral
development.
Conclusion
The challenges facing the Indian education
system are deep-rooted but not invincible.
Addressing them requires a multi-pronged
approach involving government policy,
community participation, teacher
empowerment, and technological
innovation.
By investing in inclusive, adaptive, and
learner-centric reforms, India can build an
education system that equips its citizens for
the challenges and opportunities of a
rapidly evolving world.
GOVERNMENT POLICY AND INTERVENTION
Supreme Court Flags Concerns Over Free Ration
Distribution
Syllabus: GS2/Welfare Schemes; Government Policy
& Intervention
Context
Recently, the Supreme Court of India has
raised concerns over the free ration
distribution system, questioning its long-
term sustainability and impact on economic
policies.
Development Perspective: Economic Sustainability
Supreme Court’s Concerns: It observed that
while States procure food grains from the
Centre and distribute them for free,
the financial burdenultimately falls on
taxpayers.
o It questioned whether India, in
2025, is still grappling with
the same poverty levels as in 2011,
when the last Census was
conducted.
Need for Employment and Infrastructure
Development: The court stressed that free
ration distribution alone cannot be a long-
term solution to poverty.
o It urged policymakers to focus on
job creation and infrastructure
growth to ensure economic stability.
Concerns Over Welfare Dependency: The
court cautioned against excessive reliance
on freebies, arguing that such policies might
discourage people from seeking
employment.
o Justice B.R. Gavai remarked that free
benefits should not create a
‘parasitic existence’, where
individuals lose the motivation to
work.
Welfare Argument: Ensuring Food Security
Public Distribution System (PDS): NFSA
2013 entitles 75% of the rural population
and 50% of the urban population to to
receive highly subsidised foodgrains
under two categories of beneficiaries: –
the Antodaya Anna Yojana households, and
the priority Households.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
32
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o The Pradhan Mantri Garib Kalyan
Anna Yojana (PMGKAY) provides
free food grains to 81.35 crore
beneficiaries for five years, ensuring
basic nutrition and affordability.
Support to Vulnerable Section: Free ration
schemes protect low-income families from
food insecurity, especially during economic
downturns and crises.
o The One Nation One Ration Card
(ONORC) initiative allows migrants
to access food grains anywhere in
India, improving accessibility.
Balancing Welfare and Development
Targeted Welfare Programs: Instead of
universal free ration, policies should focus
on need-based distribution, ensuring that
only the most vulnerable receive assistance.
Diversification of Food Basket: Inclusion of
millets, pulses, and oils can improve
nutritional outcomes and support diverse
farming.
Strengthening Employment
Initiatives: Expanding skill development
programs and entrepreneurship support
can help beneficiaries transition from
welfare dependence to self-sufficiency.
o Encourage eligible and financially
able families to voluntarily opt out
of government subsidies, as was
done under the Pradhan Mantri
Ujjwala Yojana.
Fiscal Responsibility and Policy
Reforms: The government must ensure
efficient allocation of resources, balancing
food security with economic growth.
o Periodic review of welfare schemes
based on updated poverty data can
improve effectiveness.
Conclusion
Free ration distribution in India is both a
welfare imperative and a developmental
dilemma. While it is indispensable in times
of crisis and for vulnerable populations, its
unmoderated continuation risks creating
long-term inefficiencies.
The real challenge is to integrate welfare
into a developmental trajectory — where
safety nets evolve into springboards for
self-reliance.
Mismatch Between MGNREGS Coverage and
Delivery
Syllabus: GS2/Policy and Intervention;
GS3/Economy
Context
A recent report by LibTech India has raised
questions about the effectiveness
of Mahatma Gandhi National Rural
Employment Guarantee Scheme
(MGNREGS) for the financial year 2024–25.
Key Findings of the Report
Increase in Coverage: The number of
registered households under MGNREGS
rose by 8.6%, from 13.80 crore in FY 2023–
24 to 14.98 crore in FY 2024–25.
Decline in Employment Days: Despite higher
registration, persondays fell by 7.1%.
Average employment per household
dropped from 52.42 days to 50.18 days,
a 4.3% decrease.
o Only about 7% of households
received the full 100 days of
employment guaranteed under the
Act.
Regional Disparities: States like Odisha
(34.8%), Tamil Nadu (25.1%), and
Rajasthan (15.9%) saw a sharp decline in
employment days, while Maharashtra
(39.7%), Himachal Pradesh (14.8%), and
Bihar (13.3%) recorded increases.
Key Features of MGNREGA (2005)
– Employment Guarantee: Ensures 100 days of
wage employment to rural households.
– Funding Structure: 90:10 (Centre & State
Government)
1. Budget allocations vary based on demand.
– Legal Entitlement: Workers have a legal right to
employment under the Act.
– Compensation is provided if work is not assigned
32
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o The Pradhan Mantri Garib Kalyan
Anna Yojana (PMGKAY) provides
free food grains to 81.35 crore
beneficiaries for five years, ensuring
basic nutrition and affordability.
Support to Vulnerable Section: Free ration
schemes protect low-income families from
food insecurity, especially during economic
downturns and crises.
o The One Nation One Ration Card
(ONORC) initiative allows migrants
to access food grains anywhere in
India, improving accessibility.
Balancing Welfare and Development
Targeted Welfare Programs: Instead of
universal free ration, policies should focus
on need-based distribution, ensuring that
only the most vulnerable receive assistance.
Diversification of Food Basket: Inclusion of
millets, pulses, and oils can improve
nutritional outcomes and support diverse
farming.
Strengthening Employment
Initiatives: Expanding skill development
programs and entrepreneurship support
can help beneficiaries transition from
welfare dependence to self-sufficiency.
o Encourage eligible and financially
able families to voluntarily opt out
of government subsidies, as was
done under the Pradhan Mantri
Ujjwala Yojana.
Fiscal Responsibility and Policy
Reforms: The government must ensure
efficient allocation of resources, balancing
food security with economic growth.
o Periodic review of welfare schemes
based on updated poverty data can
improve effectiveness.
Conclusion
Free ration distribution in India is both a
welfare imperative and a developmental
dilemma. While it is indispensable in times
of crisis and for vulnerable populations, its
unmoderated continuation risks creating
long-term inefficiencies.
The real challenge is to integrate welfare
into a developmental trajectory — where
safety nets evolve into springboards for
self-reliance.
Mismatch Between MGNREGS Coverage and
Delivery
Syllabus: GS2/Policy and Intervention;
GS3/Economy
Context
A recent report by LibTech India has raised
questions about the effectiveness
of Mahatma Gandhi National Rural
Employment Guarantee Scheme
(MGNREGS) for the financial year 2024–25.
Key Findings of the Report
Increase in Coverage: The number of
registered households under MGNREGS
rose by 8.6%, from 13.80 crore in FY 2023–
24 to 14.98 crore in FY 2024–25.
Decline in Employment Days: Despite higher
registration, persondays fell by 7.1%.
Average employment per household
dropped from 52.42 days to 50.18 days,
a 4.3% decrease.
o Only about 7% of households
received the full 100 days of
employment guaranteed under the
Act.
Regional Disparities: States like Odisha
(34.8%), Tamil Nadu (25.1%), and
Rajasthan (15.9%) saw a sharp decline in
employment days, while Maharashtra
(39.7%), Himachal Pradesh (14.8%), and
Bihar (13.3%) recorded increases.
Key Features of MGNREGA (2005)
– Employment Guarantee: Ensures 100 days of
wage employment to rural households.
– Funding Structure: 90:10 (Centre & State
Government)
1. Budget allocations vary based on demand.
– Legal Entitlement: Workers have a legal right to
employment under the Act.
– Compensation is provided if work is not assigned
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
33
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
within 15 days of demand.
– Wage Payment and Worksite Facilities: Wages
must be paid within 15 days of work completion.
1. Worksites must provide basic facilities like
drinking water, shade, and first aid.
Key Objectives
– Asset Creation: Focuses on durable and
productive rural assets such as water conservation
structures, roads, and irrigation facilities.
– Social Inclusion: Prioritizes employment for
women, Scheduled Castes (SCs), and Scheduled
Tribes (STs).
– Decentralized Planning: Strengthens Panchayati
Raj Institutions (PRIs) by involving them in
planning and implementation.
Implementation and Impact
– Nationwide Coverage: Initially launched in 200
districts in 2006, it was later expanded to cover all
rural districts.
– Women’s Participation: Women’s involvement in
MGNREGA has risen from 48% in FY 2013-14 to
over 58% in FY 2024-25.
– Rural Asset Development: Over 8.07 crore rural
assets have been created under the scheme.
Challenges Affecting MGNREGS Delivery
Budget Constraints: The Union government
allocated only ₹86,000 crore for MGNREGS
in FY 2024-25, significantly lower than the
₹2.64 lakh crore recommended by People’s
Action for Employment Guarantee (PAEG).
Delayed Wage Payments: Persistent delays
in wage disbursement have discouraged
participation in the scheme.
High Deletion Rates: Between 2022 and
2024, 7.8 crore workers were removed
from the scheme, while only 1.92 crore
were added, leading to concerns about
accessibility.
Way Forward
Timely budget revisions to ensure adequate
funding.
Streamlining wage payments to improve
worker participation.
Better monitoring mechanisms to track
employment trends and prevent exclusion
Financial Fraud Risk Indicator (FRI)
Syllabus: GS2/Government Policy and Intervention;
GS3/Cyber Security
Context
Recently, the Department of
Telecommunications (DoT) has launched
the Financial Fraud Risk Indicator (FRI) as
part of the Digital Intelligence
Platform (DIP) to safeguard financial
systems and telecom infrastructure.
About Financial Fraud Risk Indicator (FRI)
FRI is a risk-based metric that classifies
mobile numbers into three categories—
Medium, High, or Very High risk—based on
their likelihood of being involved in
fraudulent activities.
This classification is derived from multiple
data sources, including the Indian
Cybercrime Coordination Centre’s National
Cybercrime Reporting Portal, the DoT’s
Chakshu platform, and information shared
by banks and financial institutions.
When a mobile number is flagged, it
undergoes a multi-dimensional analysis to
assess its risk level. The FRI assessment is
then shared with stakeholders in real-time.
Major UPI platforms like PhonePe, Paytm,
and Google Pay are now integrating FRI
alerts.
Cyber Fraud in India
It has become a growing concern in India,
with financial scams, identity theft, and
digital crimes increasing at an alarming rate.
o As digital transactions expand, so do
the risks associated with cyber
fraud.
It includes Hacking, Phishing, Identity Theft,
Cyber Espionage, and Cyberbullying etc.
33
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
within 15 days of demand.
– Wage Payment and Worksite Facilities: Wages
must be paid within 15 days of work completion.
1. Worksites must provide basic facilities like
drinking water, shade, and first aid.
Key Objectives
– Asset Creation: Focuses on durable and
productive rural assets such as water conservation
structures, roads, and irrigation facilities.
– Social Inclusion: Prioritizes employment for
women, Scheduled Castes (SCs), and Scheduled
Tribes (STs).
– Decentralized Planning: Strengthens Panchayati
Raj Institutions (PRIs) by involving them in
planning and implementation.
Implementation and Impact
– Nationwide Coverage: Initially launched in 200
districts in 2006, it was later expanded to cover all
rural districts.
– Women’s Participation: Women’s involvement in
MGNREGA has risen from 48% in FY 2013-14 to
over 58% in FY 2024-25.
– Rural Asset Development: Over 8.07 crore rural
assets have been created under the scheme.
Challenges Affecting MGNREGS Delivery
Budget Constraints: The Union government
allocated only ₹86,000 crore for MGNREGS
in FY 2024-25, significantly lower than the
₹2.64 lakh crore recommended by People’s
Action for Employment Guarantee (PAEG).
Delayed Wage Payments: Persistent delays
in wage disbursement have discouraged
participation in the scheme.
High Deletion Rates: Between 2022 and
2024, 7.8 crore workers were removed
from the scheme, while only 1.92 crore
were added, leading to concerns about
accessibility.
Way Forward
Timely budget revisions to ensure adequate
funding.
Streamlining wage payments to improve
worker participation.
Better monitoring mechanisms to track
employment trends and prevent exclusion
Financial Fraud Risk Indicator (FRI)
Syllabus: GS2/Government Policy and Intervention;
GS3/Cyber Security
Context
Recently, the Department of
Telecommunications (DoT) has launched
the Financial Fraud Risk Indicator (FRI) as
part of the Digital Intelligence
Platform (DIP) to safeguard financial
systems and telecom infrastructure.
About Financial Fraud Risk Indicator (FRI)
FRI is a risk-based metric that classifies
mobile numbers into three categories—
Medium, High, or Very High risk—based on
their likelihood of being involved in
fraudulent activities.
This classification is derived from multiple
data sources, including the Indian
Cybercrime Coordination Centre’s National
Cybercrime Reporting Portal, the DoT’s
Chakshu platform, and information shared
by banks and financial institutions.
When a mobile number is flagged, it
undergoes a multi-dimensional analysis to
assess its risk level. The FRI assessment is
then shared with stakeholders in real-time.
Major UPI platforms like PhonePe, Paytm,
and Google Pay are now integrating FRI
alerts.
Cyber Fraud in India
It has become a growing concern in India,
with financial scams, identity theft, and
digital crimes increasing at an alarming rate.
o As digital transactions expand, so do
the risks associated with cyber
fraud.
It includes Hacking, Phishing, Identity Theft,
Cyber Espionage, and Cyberbullying etc.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
34
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Data on Cyber Frauds in India
Government Initiatives Against Cyber Financial
Fraud
Key Legislative Measures: Cyber Crimes
cases are handled under the provisions of
the Information Technology Act, 2000, the
Bhartiya Nyaya Sanhita, 2023 and
Protection of Children from Sexual Offences
Act, 2012 (POCSO Act).
Chakshu Facility on the Sanchar Saathi
Platform: It allows citizens to report
suspicious calls and messages.
e-Zero FIR Initiative under I4C of MHA: It
allows victims to file FIRs online,
eliminating jurisdictional barriers and
expediting law enforcement responses.
o The Indian Cyber Crime
Coordination Centre (I4C) has been
established to tackle cybercrime,
and the National Cyber Crime
Reporting Portal allows citizens to
report incidents online.
RBI’s AI based tool ‘MuleHunter’: For
identification of money mules and advised
the banks and financial institutions for its
uses.
Citizen Financial Cyber Fraud Reporting and
Management System: This system has
helped recover over ₹1,200 crore from
fraudulent transactions.
Blocking Fraudulent SIM Cards: More than
3.2 lakh SIM cards and 49,000 IMEIs linked
to cyber fraud have been blocked.
Cyber Awareness Campaigns: The
government promotes cybersecurity
awareness through social media, radio
campaigns, and educational programs.
HEALTH
India’s latest MMR Shows a Declining Trend
Syllabus :GS 2/Health
In News
India’s latest Maternal Mortality Ratio
(MMR) data was released by the Registrar-
General of India.
Do you know?
– The Registrar-General arrives at estimates on
fertility and mortality using the Sample
Registration System, one of the largest
demographic sample surveys in the country.
Maternal death
It is the death of a woman while pregnant or
within 42 days of termination of pregnancy,
irrespective of the duration and site of the
pregnancy, from any cause related to or
aggravated by the pregnancy or its
34
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Data on Cyber Frauds in India
Government Initiatives Against Cyber Financial
Fraud
Key Legislative Measures: Cyber Crimes
cases are handled under the provisions of
the Information Technology Act, 2000, the
Bhartiya Nyaya Sanhita, 2023 and
Protection of Children from Sexual Offences
Act, 2012 (POCSO Act).
Chakshu Facility on the Sanchar Saathi
Platform: It allows citizens to report
suspicious calls and messages.
e-Zero FIR Initiative under I4C of MHA: It
allows victims to file FIRs online,
eliminating jurisdictional barriers and
expediting law enforcement responses.
o The Indian Cyber Crime
Coordination Centre (I4C) has been
established to tackle cybercrime,
and the National Cyber Crime
Reporting Portal allows citizens to
report incidents online.
RBI’s AI based tool ‘MuleHunter’: For
identification of money mules and advised
the banks and financial institutions for its
uses.
Citizen Financial Cyber Fraud Reporting and
Management System: This system has
helped recover over ₹1,200 crore from
fraudulent transactions.
Blocking Fraudulent SIM Cards: More than
3.2 lakh SIM cards and 49,000 IMEIs linked
to cyber fraud have been blocked.
Cyber Awareness Campaigns: The
government promotes cybersecurity
awareness through social media, radio
campaigns, and educational programs.
HEALTH
India’s latest MMR Shows a Declining Trend
Syllabus :GS 2/Health
In News
India’s latest Maternal Mortality Ratio
(MMR) data was released by the Registrar-
General of India.
Do you know?
– The Registrar-General arrives at estimates on
fertility and mortality using the Sample
Registration System, one of the largest
demographic sample surveys in the country.
Maternal death
It is the death of a woman while pregnant or
within 42 days of termination of pregnancy,
irrespective of the duration and site of the
pregnancy, from any cause related to or
aggravated by the pregnancy or its
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
35
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
management but not from accidental or
incidental causes.
o One of the key indicators of
maternal mortality is the Maternal
Mortality Ratio (MMR) which is
defined as the number of maternal
deaths during a given time period
per 100,000 live births during the
same time period.
The UN’s Sustainable Development Goals
(SDGs) aim at reducing global MMR to less
than 70 per 100,000 live births.
Recent Findings
Maternal Mortality Ratio in India dropped
to 93 per 100,000 live births in 2019–21,
down from 97 (2018–20) and 103 (2017–
19).
The highest MMR occurs in the 20-29 age
group, and the second highest in the 30-34
age group.
Several States, including Madhya Pradesh
(175), Assam (167), Uttar Pradesh (151),
Odisha (135), Chhattisgarh (132), West
Bengal (109), and Haryana (106), have high
MMRs.
Global Statistics (2023)
– Over 700 women die daily from preventable
pregnancy-related causes.
– Maternal deaths occurred every 2 minutes.
– More than 90% happened in low- and lower-
middle-income countries.
– Global MMR fell by about 40% from 2000 to
2023.
Issues and Concerns
Maternal mortality remains a critical public
health issue in India.
o It serves as a key indicator of
healthcare quality and accessibility,
reflecting the effectiveness of
maternal health services.
Most maternal deaths occur due to
complications from pregnancy, childbirth,
or abortion, not from accidental causes.
Government Initiatives to Reduce MMR
India has committed to the UN target for
Sustainable Development Goal (SDG) for
MMR at 70 per 1,00,000 live births by 2030
and NHP (National Health Policy) 2017
target for MMR less than 100 per 1,00,000
live births by 2020.
o India has accomplished the
National Health Policy (NHP) target
for MMR.
The Ministry of Health and Family Welfare
(MoHFW) supports all States/UTs in
implementation of Reproductive, Maternal,
New-born, Child, Adolescent health and
Nutrition (RMNCAH+N) strategy under
National Health Mission (NHM) based on
the Annual Programme Implementation
Plan (PIP) submitted by States/ UTs to
reduce MMR & Neonatal Mortality Rate.
Janani Suraksha Yojana (JSY): Launched in
2005, it promotes institutional deliveries
among poor and marginalized women
(SC/ST/BPL) to reduce maternal and
neonatal mortality.
Pradhan Mantri Matru Vandana Yojana
(PMMVY): A maternity benefit scheme
offering ₹5,000 for the first live birth to
eligible women. Under PMMVY 2.0 (from
April 2022), additional incentives are given
if the second child is a girl, to promote
positive behavioural change.
Janani Shishu Suraksha Karyakaram (JSSK):
Started in 2011, it eliminates out-of-pocket
costs for pregnant women and sick
newborns by providing free delivery,
transport, medicines, diagnostics, and diet
in public facilities.
Surakshit Matritva Aashwasan (SUMAN):
Launched in 2019, it ensures free,
respectful, and quality healthcare for all
pregnant women and newborns, aiming to
eliminate preventable deaths.
Pradhan Mantri Surakshit Matritva Abhiyan
(PMSMA): Initiated in 2016, it provides free
antenatal care on the 9th of every month.
o The e-PMSMA extension targets
high-risk pregnancies with
individual tracking and financial
35
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
management but not from accidental or
incidental causes.
o One of the key indicators of
maternal mortality is the Maternal
Mortality Ratio (MMR) which is
defined as the number of maternal
deaths during a given time period
per 100,000 live births during the
same time period.
The UN’s Sustainable Development Goals
(SDGs) aim at reducing global MMR to less
than 70 per 100,000 live births.
Recent Findings
Maternal Mortality Ratio in India dropped
to 93 per 100,000 live births in 2019–21,
down from 97 (2018–20) and 103 (2017–
19).
The highest MMR occurs in the 20-29 age
group, and the second highest in the 30-34
age group.
Several States, including Madhya Pradesh
(175), Assam (167), Uttar Pradesh (151),
Odisha (135), Chhattisgarh (132), West
Bengal (109), and Haryana (106), have high
MMRs.
Global Statistics (2023)
– Over 700 women die daily from preventable
pregnancy-related causes.
– Maternal deaths occurred every 2 minutes.
– More than 90% happened in low- and lower-
middle-income countries.
– Global MMR fell by about 40% from 2000 to
2023.
Issues and Concerns
Maternal mortality remains a critical public
health issue in India.
o It serves as a key indicator of
healthcare quality and accessibility,
reflecting the effectiveness of
maternal health services.
Most maternal deaths occur due to
complications from pregnancy, childbirth,
or abortion, not from accidental causes.
Government Initiatives to Reduce MMR
India has committed to the UN target for
Sustainable Development Goal (SDG) for
MMR at 70 per 1,00,000 live births by 2030
and NHP (National Health Policy) 2017
target for MMR less than 100 per 1,00,000
live births by 2020.
o India has accomplished the
National Health Policy (NHP) target
for MMR.
The Ministry of Health and Family Welfare
(MoHFW) supports all States/UTs in
implementation of Reproductive, Maternal,
New-born, Child, Adolescent health and
Nutrition (RMNCAH+N) strategy under
National Health Mission (NHM) based on
the Annual Programme Implementation
Plan (PIP) submitted by States/ UTs to
reduce MMR & Neonatal Mortality Rate.
Janani Suraksha Yojana (JSY): Launched in
2005, it promotes institutional deliveries
among poor and marginalized women
(SC/ST/BPL) to reduce maternal and
neonatal mortality.
Pradhan Mantri Matru Vandana Yojana
(PMMVY): A maternity benefit scheme
offering ₹5,000 for the first live birth to
eligible women. Under PMMVY 2.0 (from
April 2022), additional incentives are given
if the second child is a girl, to promote
positive behavioural change.
Janani Shishu Suraksha Karyakaram (JSSK):
Started in 2011, it eliminates out-of-pocket
costs for pregnant women and sick
newborns by providing free delivery,
transport, medicines, diagnostics, and diet
in public facilities.
Surakshit Matritva Aashwasan (SUMAN):
Launched in 2019, it ensures free,
respectful, and quality healthcare for all
pregnant women and newborns, aiming to
eliminate preventable deaths.
Pradhan Mantri Surakshit Matritva Abhiyan
(PMSMA): Initiated in 2016, it provides free
antenatal care on the 9th of every month.
o The e-PMSMA extension targets
high-risk pregnancies with
individual tracking and financial
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
36
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
incentives. Over 5.9 crore women
have benefited by March 2025.
Conclusion and Way Forward
India has made significant progress in
reducing maternal mortality, successfully
achieving the National Health Policy (NHP)
target of an MMR below 100 by 2020.
However, continued efforts are required to
reach the SDG target of MMR below 70 by
2030.
Strengthening healthcare infrastructure,
expanding maternal health programs, and
addressing socioeconomic barriers will be
critical in further reducing maternal
mortality in the country.
Shingles Vaccine
Syllabus: GS2/Health
Context
A recent study highlighted that shingles
vaccination can lower the development of
cardiovascular conditions by 23%.
About Shingles
It is a viral infection that causes painful
rashes and is caused by varicella-zoster
virus (VZV), the same virus that causes
chickenpox.
Once a person has chickenpox, the virus
stays in their body. The virus can reactivate
later in life and cause shingles.
Though, the people who never had
chickenpox or didn’t get chickenpox vaccine
can get infected with VZV from someone
who has shingles.
These people can get the virus through:
o Direct contact with the fluid from
shingles rash blisters.
o Breathing in virus particles that
come from the blisters.
Vaccination: The shingles vaccine, which
prevents the reactivation of the varicella-
zoster virus, is recommended primarily to
individuals over the age of 50 years.
WHO Adopts Pandemic AgreemenT
Syllabus :GS 2/Health
The World Health Organization (WHO) recently
adopted a landmark Pandemic Agreement, marking
a significant step towards a more coordinated and
equitable global response to future health crises.
This agreement, the second international legal
instrument under Article 19 of the WHO
Constitution (the first being the WHO Framework
Convention on Tobacco Control), aims to address
the systemic failures and inequities exposed by the
COVID-19 pandemic. For UPSC Mains,
understanding this agreement requires a
comprehensive analysis of its provisions,
significance, challenges, and implications for India.
I. Introduction: The Imperative for a Global
Pandemic Accord
The COVID-19 pandemic laid bare critical
vulnerabilities in global health preparedness and
coordination. It highlighted fragmented national
responses, severe inequities in access to life-saving
health products (vaccines, diagnostics,
therapeutics), and the devastating economic and
social costs of uncoordinated action. The WHO
Pandemic Agreement, after three years of intensive
negotiations, represents a collective commitment to
build a more resilient, fair, and coordinated global
health architecture, guided by principles of equity,
solidarity, transparency, and scientific evidence,
while respecting national sovereignty.
II. Key Provisions of the WHO Pandemic Agreement
The agreement encompasses a broad range of
measures designed to enhance pandemic
prevention, preparedness, and response:
Pandemic Prevention and Surveillance:
National Plans: Countries are obligated to develop
and implement comprehensive national pandemic
prevention and preparedness plans.
Early Detection: Emphasis on strengthening early
detection and control of infectious diseases,
including routine immunization, laboratory safety
protocols, antimicrobial resistance (AMR), and
zoonotic disease prevention (One Health
approach).
36
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
incentives. Over 5.9 crore women
have benefited by March 2025.
Conclusion and Way Forward
India has made significant progress in
reducing maternal mortality, successfully
achieving the National Health Policy (NHP)
target of an MMR below 100 by 2020.
However, continued efforts are required to
reach the SDG target of MMR below 70 by
2030.
Strengthening healthcare infrastructure,
expanding maternal health programs, and
addressing socioeconomic barriers will be
critical in further reducing maternal
mortality in the country.
Shingles Vaccine
Syllabus: GS2/Health
Context
A recent study highlighted that shingles
vaccination can lower the development of
cardiovascular conditions by 23%.
About Shingles
It is a viral infection that causes painful
rashes and is caused by varicella-zoster
virus (VZV), the same virus that causes
chickenpox.
Once a person has chickenpox, the virus
stays in their body. The virus can reactivate
later in life and cause shingles.
Though, the people who never had
chickenpox or didn’t get chickenpox vaccine
can get infected with VZV from someone
who has shingles.
These people can get the virus through:
o Direct contact with the fluid from
shingles rash blisters.
o Breathing in virus particles that
come from the blisters.
Vaccination: The shingles vaccine, which
prevents the reactivation of the varicella-
zoster virus, is recommended primarily to
individuals over the age of 50 years.
WHO Adopts Pandemic AgreemenT
Syllabus :GS 2/Health
The World Health Organization (WHO) recently
adopted a landmark Pandemic Agreement, marking
a significant step towards a more coordinated and
equitable global response to future health crises.
This agreement, the second international legal
instrument under Article 19 of the WHO
Constitution (the first being the WHO Framework
Convention on Tobacco Control), aims to address
the systemic failures and inequities exposed by the
COVID-19 pandemic. For UPSC Mains,
understanding this agreement requires a
comprehensive analysis of its provisions,
significance, challenges, and implications for India.
I. Introduction: The Imperative for a Global
Pandemic Accord
The COVID-19 pandemic laid bare critical
vulnerabilities in global health preparedness and
coordination. It highlighted fragmented national
responses, severe inequities in access to life-saving
health products (vaccines, diagnostics,
therapeutics), and the devastating economic and
social costs of uncoordinated action. The WHO
Pandemic Agreement, after three years of intensive
negotiations, represents a collective commitment to
build a more resilient, fair, and coordinated global
health architecture, guided by principles of equity,
solidarity, transparency, and scientific evidence,
while respecting national sovereignty.
II. Key Provisions of the WHO Pandemic Agreement
The agreement encompasses a broad range of
measures designed to enhance pandemic
prevention, preparedness, and response:
Pandemic Prevention and Surveillance:
National Plans: Countries are obligated to develop
and implement comprehensive national pandemic
prevention and preparedness plans.
Early Detection: Emphasis on strengthening early
detection and control of infectious diseases,
including routine immunization, laboratory safety
protocols, antimicrobial resistance (AMR), and
zoonotic disease prevention (One Health
approach).
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
37
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Equitable Access to Health Products:
Sustainable Local Production: Encourages nations to
build local and regional capacity for manufacturing
pandemic-related health products to reduce
dependence on a few global suppliers.
Technology Transfer: Promotes technology and
knowledge sharing, especially with low- and
middle-income countries, through voluntary
licensing, financing, and regulatory incentives. It
also supports the creation of regional and global
technology hubs coordinated by the WHO.
Pathogen Access and Benefit-Sharing System
(PABS): A crucial element still under negotiation (to
be finalized by May 2026). This system aims to
establish a framework for rapid sharing of
pathogen samples and genomic data by countries.
In return, manufacturers receiving such data are
expected to provide 20% of their real-time
production of pandemic-related health products to
WHO (10% as donations and 10% at affordable
prices).
Global Supply Chain and Logistics Network
(GSCL): Establishment of a WHO-coordinated
network to ensure equitable, timely, and need-
based distribution of medical supplies during
emergencies, overcoming supply chain disruptions.
Strengthening Health Systems:
Resilience: Directs participating countries to
develop, strengthen, and maintain resilient health
systems, promoting universal health coverage.
Health Workforce: Calls for the mobilization of a
global pool of trained and multidisciplinary health
professionals.
Financing Mechanism: A coordinated financial
mechanism for pandemic prevention,
preparedness, and response, especially for lower-
income countries, is to be established.
Combating Mis/Disinformation: Highlights the
importance of addressing the spread of false
information during public health emergencies.
Respect for National Sovereignty: Explicitly states
that the agreement does not grant WHO authority
to direct, order, or prescribe national laws or
policies, such as imposing lockdowns, vaccine
mandates, or travel restrictions. Countries retain
full autonomy over their public health measures.
III. Significance of the Agreement
Enhanced Global Solidarity and
Cooperation: The agreement is a testament
to multilateralism and a collective
recognition that health security is a shared
responsibility. It aims to build trust and
foster coordinated action.
Addressing Vaccine Inequity: Directly
confronts the glaring disparities in vaccine
access witnessed during COVID-19 by
mandating benefit-sharing and promoting
local production and technology transfer.
Improved Preparedness and
Response: Establishes a legally binding
framework for early detection, rapid
information sharing, and equitable
distribution of resources, thus
strengthening global pandemic readiness.
Protecting Developing Nations: Aims to
ensure developing countries have equitable
access to innovation, treatments, and the
capacity to produce them, bridging the
North-South divide in health.
One Health Approach: Integrates human,
animal, and environmental health,
promoting a holistic view of pandemic
prevention and early detection of zoonotic
diseases.
Economic Protection: By institutionalizing
preparedness mechanisms, it seeks to
mitigate the severe global health and
economic disruptions caused by future
pandemics.
IV. Challenges and Concerns
USA’s Absence: The United States,
historically a major WHO funder and key
player in global health, was absent from the
final adoption. Its non-participation casts a
shadow on the agreement’s universal
effectiveness and potential funding
mechanisms.
Enforcement Mechanisms and
Funding: While legally binding, the
37
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Equitable Access to Health Products:
Sustainable Local Production: Encourages nations to
build local and regional capacity for manufacturing
pandemic-related health products to reduce
dependence on a few global suppliers.
Technology Transfer: Promotes technology and
knowledge sharing, especially with low- and
middle-income countries, through voluntary
licensing, financing, and regulatory incentives. It
also supports the creation of regional and global
technology hubs coordinated by the WHO.
Pathogen Access and Benefit-Sharing System
(PABS): A crucial element still under negotiation (to
be finalized by May 2026). This system aims to
establish a framework for rapid sharing of
pathogen samples and genomic data by countries.
In return, manufacturers receiving such data are
expected to provide 20% of their real-time
production of pandemic-related health products to
WHO (10% as donations and 10% at affordable
prices).
Global Supply Chain and Logistics Network
(GSCL): Establishment of a WHO-coordinated
network to ensure equitable, timely, and need-
based distribution of medical supplies during
emergencies, overcoming supply chain disruptions.
Strengthening Health Systems:
Resilience: Directs participating countries to
develop, strengthen, and maintain resilient health
systems, promoting universal health coverage.
Health Workforce: Calls for the mobilization of a
global pool of trained and multidisciplinary health
professionals.
Financing Mechanism: A coordinated financial
mechanism for pandemic prevention,
preparedness, and response, especially for lower-
income countries, is to be established.
Combating Mis/Disinformation: Highlights the
importance of addressing the spread of false
information during public health emergencies.
Respect for National Sovereignty: Explicitly states
that the agreement does not grant WHO authority
to direct, order, or prescribe national laws or
policies, such as imposing lockdowns, vaccine
mandates, or travel restrictions. Countries retain
full autonomy over their public health measures.
III. Significance of the Agreement
Enhanced Global Solidarity and
Cooperation: The agreement is a testament
to multilateralism and a collective
recognition that health security is a shared
responsibility. It aims to build trust and
foster coordinated action.
Addressing Vaccine Inequity: Directly
confronts the glaring disparities in vaccine
access witnessed during COVID-19 by
mandating benefit-sharing and promoting
local production and technology transfer.
Improved Preparedness and
Response: Establishes a legally binding
framework for early detection, rapid
information sharing, and equitable
distribution of resources, thus
strengthening global pandemic readiness.
Protecting Developing Nations: Aims to
ensure developing countries have equitable
access to innovation, treatments, and the
capacity to produce them, bridging the
North-South divide in health.
One Health Approach: Integrates human,
animal, and environmental health,
promoting a holistic view of pandemic
prevention and early detection of zoonotic
diseases.
Economic Protection: By institutionalizing
preparedness mechanisms, it seeks to
mitigate the severe global health and
economic disruptions caused by future
pandemics.
IV. Challenges and Concerns
USA’s Absence: The United States,
historically a major WHO funder and key
player in global health, was absent from the
final adoption. Its non-participation casts a
shadow on the agreement’s universal
effectiveness and potential funding
mechanisms.
Enforcement Mechanisms and
Funding: While legally binding, the
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
38
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
agreement’s true impact will depend on the
political will of signatory nations to comply.
Concerns remain regarding the lack of
strong enforcement mechanisms and the
need for sustained and adequate funding
pathways.
Finalizing PABS: The Pathogen Access and
Benefit-Sharing system, a critical
component, is still under negotiation. Its
final structure and operational modalities
will be crucial for the agreement’s success.
Technology Transfer (Voluntary vs.
Mandatory): The agreement calls for
technology transfer on “mutually agreed
terms,” which was a contentious point.
Some argue that without mandatory
provisions, technology transfer may remain
limited.
National Ratification: The agreement will
only enter into force once ratified by at least
60 countries, a process that could take time
and face domestic political hurdles.
Geopolitical Landscape: The current
complex geopolitical environment could
pose challenges to collaborative efforts and
trust-building required for effective
implementation.
V. Implications for India (UPSC Mains Perspective)
India, having actively participated in the
negotiations and adopted the agreement, stands to
play a crucial role and stands to benefit in several
ways:
Strengthening India’s Role as a Global
Pharma Hub: The emphasis on sustainable
local production and technology transfer
provides India with an opportunity to
further enhance its position as a reliable
and affordable pharmaceutical and vaccine
manufacturing hub for the world,
particularly for the Global South.
Enhanced Voice in Global Health
Governance: The agreement strengthens
India’s voice in shaping global health
policies and promoting South-South
cooperation, aligning with its vision of
“Vasudhaiva Kutumbakam” (the world is
one family).
Improved Domestic Preparedness: The
obligation to strengthen national pandemic
prevention and preparedness plans will
push India to invest further in its health
infrastructure, surveillance systems, and
public health workforce.
Equitable Access: India, as a developing
nation, stands to benefit from the
provisions ensuring equitable access to
essential health products during future
pandemics, reducing dependence on
wealthier nations.
“One Health” Implementation: The
agreement’s focus on the One Health
approach aligns with India’s efforts to
address zoonotic diseases and
environmental health concerns, which are
critical given its diverse ecosystems.
Legal Framework Adjustments: India may
need to review and potentially amend
existing national laws, such as the Biological
Diversity Act, 2002, to align with the access
and benefit-sharing provisions, particularly
once the PABS system is finalized.
Investment in R&D: The agreement
encourages publicly funded R&D to include
equitable access obligations, which could
benefit Indian research institutions and
pharmaceutical companies.
VI. Conclusion
The WHO Pandemic Agreement is a historic
milestone in international public health diplomacy,
reflecting lessons learned from the devastating
impact of COVID-19. While significant challenges
remain, particularly regarding funding,
enforceability, and the finalization of key
mechanisms like PABS, its adoption signifies a
collective global commitment to preventing a
repeat of past inequities. For India, the agreement
presents both opportunities to solidify its
leadership in global health and responsibilities to
strengthen its domestic health security and
contribute to a more equitable world. Successful
implementation, driven by sustained political will
38
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
agreement’s true impact will depend on the
political will of signatory nations to comply.
Concerns remain regarding the lack of
strong enforcement mechanisms and the
need for sustained and adequate funding
pathways.
Finalizing PABS: The Pathogen Access and
Benefit-Sharing system, a critical
component, is still under negotiation. Its
final structure and operational modalities
will be crucial for the agreement’s success.
Technology Transfer (Voluntary vs.
Mandatory): The agreement calls for
technology transfer on “mutually agreed
terms,” which was a contentious point.
Some argue that without mandatory
provisions, technology transfer may remain
limited.
National Ratification: The agreement will
only enter into force once ratified by at least
60 countries, a process that could take time
and face domestic political hurdles.
Geopolitical Landscape: The current
complex geopolitical environment could
pose challenges to collaborative efforts and
trust-building required for effective
implementation.
V. Implications for India (UPSC Mains Perspective)
India, having actively participated in the
negotiations and adopted the agreement, stands to
play a crucial role and stands to benefit in several
ways:
Strengthening India’s Role as a Global
Pharma Hub: The emphasis on sustainable
local production and technology transfer
provides India with an opportunity to
further enhance its position as a reliable
and affordable pharmaceutical and vaccine
manufacturing hub for the world,
particularly for the Global South.
Enhanced Voice in Global Health
Governance: The agreement strengthens
India’s voice in shaping global health
policies and promoting South-South
cooperation, aligning with its vision of
“Vasudhaiva Kutumbakam” (the world is
one family).
Improved Domestic Preparedness: The
obligation to strengthen national pandemic
prevention and preparedness plans will
push India to invest further in its health
infrastructure, surveillance systems, and
public health workforce.
Equitable Access: India, as a developing
nation, stands to benefit from the
provisions ensuring equitable access to
essential health products during future
pandemics, reducing dependence on
wealthier nations.
“One Health” Implementation: The
agreement’s focus on the One Health
approach aligns with India’s efforts to
address zoonotic diseases and
environmental health concerns, which are
critical given its diverse ecosystems.
Legal Framework Adjustments: India may
need to review and potentially amend
existing national laws, such as the Biological
Diversity Act, 2002, to align with the access
and benefit-sharing provisions, particularly
once the PABS system is finalized.
Investment in R&D: The agreement
encourages publicly funded R&D to include
equitable access obligations, which could
benefit Indian research institutions and
pharmaceutical companies.
VI. Conclusion
The WHO Pandemic Agreement is a historic
milestone in international public health diplomacy,
reflecting lessons learned from the devastating
impact of COVID-19. While significant challenges
remain, particularly regarding funding,
enforceability, and the finalization of key
mechanisms like PABS, its adoption signifies a
collective global commitment to preventing a
repeat of past inequities. For India, the agreement
presents both opportunities to solidify its
leadership in global health and responsibilities to
strengthen its domestic health security and
contribute to a more equitable world. Successful
implementation, driven by sustained political will
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
39
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
and collaborative action, will be paramount in
translating this agreement into meaningful
protection for all.
India Awarded with Certificate of Elimination of
Trachoma
Syllabus: GS2/Health
Context
India has been awarded the Certificate of
Elimination of Trachoma as a Public Health
Problem by the World Health Organisation
(WHO) at the 78th World Health Assembly
in Geneva.
About
Last year, the WHO declared that the
Government of India had eliminated
Trachoma as a public health problem.
India also became the third country in the
Southeast Asia region to reach this public
health milestone.
The government has taken various steps
under the National Programme for Control
of Blindness and Visual Impairment
(NPCBVI) to eliminate Trachoma.
Trachoma
Trachoma is a disease of the eye caused
by infection with the bacterium Chlamydia
trachomatis.
It is a public health problem in 38
countries and is responsible for the
blindness or visual impairment of about 1.9
million people.
o Blindness from trachoma is
irreversible.
Infection spreads through personal contact
(via hands, clothes, bedding or hard
surfaces) and by flies that have been in
contact with discharge from the eyes or
nose of an infected person.
There isn’t a commercially available
trachoma vaccine, research is ongoing to
develop one.
Sugar Boards in Schools
Syllabus: GS 2/Health
In News
The CBSE has directed over 24,000
affiliated schools in India to set up ‘sugar
boards’ that display information educating
students about the health risks of excessive
sugar consumption.
o Studies show children consume far
more sugar than recommended,
with 13–15% of their daily calories
from sugar, compared to the advised
limit of 5%.
What are Sugar boards?
They are educational displays set up in
schools to visually show the amount of sugar
in popular drinks and foods, aiming to raise
awareness among students about the
dangers of excessive sugar consumption.
The National Commission for Protection of
Child Rights (NCPCR) has advocated for
their introduction in all schools, citing high
sugar intake from easily available snacks
and drinks as a major contributor.
These boards include information
on recommended sugar intake, health risks
of high sugar consumption, and healthier
alternatives.
Sugar boards are necessary due to the rising
incidence of Type 2 Diabetes among
children, a condition once mostly seen in
adults.
India’s Policy & Regulatory Framework
India’s regulatory stance on High Fat, Salt,
and Sugar (HFSS) content in foods,
particularly school meals, is still evolving.
Food Safety and Standards Authority of
India (FSSAI) is the apex regulatory body
for food safety. It has directed food
companies for mandatory nutrition
labelling for packaged foods, banning HFSS
food in schools & creating “Eat Right India”
Campaign for safe, healthy, and sustainable
diets.
39
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
and collaborative action, will be paramount in
translating this agreement into meaningful
protection for all.
India Awarded with Certificate of Elimination of
Trachoma
Syllabus: GS2/Health
Context
India has been awarded the Certificate of
Elimination of Trachoma as a Public Health
Problem by the World Health Organisation
(WHO) at the 78th World Health Assembly
in Geneva.
About
Last year, the WHO declared that the
Government of India had eliminated
Trachoma as a public health problem.
India also became the third country in the
Southeast Asia region to reach this public
health milestone.
The government has taken various steps
under the National Programme for Control
of Blindness and Visual Impairment
(NPCBVI) to eliminate Trachoma.
Trachoma
Trachoma is a disease of the eye caused
by infection with the bacterium Chlamydia
trachomatis.
It is a public health problem in 38
countries and is responsible for the
blindness or visual impairment of about 1.9
million people.
o Blindness from trachoma is
irreversible.
Infection spreads through personal contact
(via hands, clothes, bedding or hard
surfaces) and by flies that have been in
contact with discharge from the eyes or
nose of an infected person.
There isn’t a commercially available
trachoma vaccine, research is ongoing to
develop one.
Sugar Boards in Schools
Syllabus: GS 2/Health
In News
The CBSE has directed over 24,000
affiliated schools in India to set up ‘sugar
boards’ that display information educating
students about the health risks of excessive
sugar consumption.
o Studies show children consume far
more sugar than recommended,
with 13–15% of their daily calories
from sugar, compared to the advised
limit of 5%.
What are Sugar boards?
They are educational displays set up in
schools to visually show the amount of sugar
in popular drinks and foods, aiming to raise
awareness among students about the
dangers of excessive sugar consumption.
The National Commission for Protection of
Child Rights (NCPCR) has advocated for
their introduction in all schools, citing high
sugar intake from easily available snacks
and drinks as a major contributor.
These boards include information
on recommended sugar intake, health risks
of high sugar consumption, and healthier
alternatives.
Sugar boards are necessary due to the rising
incidence of Type 2 Diabetes among
children, a condition once mostly seen in
adults.
India’s Policy & Regulatory Framework
India’s regulatory stance on High Fat, Salt,
and Sugar (HFSS) content in foods,
particularly school meals, is still evolving.
Food Safety and Standards Authority of
India (FSSAI) is the apex regulatory body
for food safety. It has directed food
companies for mandatory nutrition
labelling for packaged foods, banning HFSS
food in schools & creating “Eat Right India”
Campaign for safe, healthy, and sustainable
diets.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
40
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Also, India imposes higher GST (18–28%)
on processed, sugary items like carbonated
drinks, packaged snacks, and chocolates.
Cholera
Syllabus :GS 2/Health
In News
A cholera outbreak has killed many people
in the war-torn Sudan.
Cholera
It is a serious diarrheal illness caused by
ingesting food or water contaminated with
the bacterium Vibrio cholerae.
It remains a significant global public health
concern, reflecting deep social and
economic inequalities.
Symptoms: Cholera typically causes sudden,
severe watery diarrhea that can lead to
death within hours if not treated.
Effect: A 2024 World Health Organisation
(WHO) report noted that cholera deaths
have shown an uptick in recent years and
attributed the cause to climate change and
poor sanitation.
Preventing cholera and other waterborne
diseases relies heavily on access to clean
water, adequate sanitation, and proper
hygiene.
o While most cholera cases involve
mild to moderate diarrhea and can
be treated effectively with oral
rehydration solution (ORS), the
illness can escalate quickly.
Zoonotic Outbreaks
Syllabus: GS2/ Health
In News
As per the Integrated Disease Surveillance
Program (IDSP), zoonotic outbreaks
significantly increased over the years,
particularly post-pandemic.
Key Findings of the Study
Prevalence of Zoonotic Outbreaks: Over 8%
(583 out of 6,948) of the reported
outbreaks were zoonotic (spread from
animals to humans).
Peak Seasonality: Zoonotic outbreaks
consistently peaked during the months of
June, July, and August.
Leading Zoonotic Diseases: Japanese
encephalitis accounted for the largest share
(29.5%) then Leptospirosis (18.7%) &
scrub typhus (13.9%).
Geographical Distribution: The Northeast
part of India contributed the highest
proportion (35.8%) of zoonotic disease
outbreaks followed by the southern region
(31.7%) & western region (15.4%).
Why is Zoonotic Surveillance Significant?
Due to climate change, deforestation, and
expanding urbanisation, human-wildlife
contact is increasing which can elevate the
chances of pathogen spillover from animals
to humans & threatens to strain India’s
already burdened public health
infrastructure.
Initiatives Taken to Combat Zoonotic Diseases
Integrated Disease Surveillance Programme
(IDSP) was launched in 2004 to track
epidemic-prone diseases.
The National One Health Mission envisioned
under the Department of Biotechnology
aims to integrate animal health, human
health, and environment monitoring.
National Centre for Disease Control (NCDC)
(Zoonosis Division) conducts outbreak
investigations and develops standard
treatment protocols for zoonotic diseases
like JE, leptospirosis, brucellosis, and rabies.
INDIAN POLITY AND GOVERNANCE
Cabinet Approves Caste Enumeration in Upcoming
Census
Syllabus: GS2/Governance
Context
40
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Also, India imposes higher GST (18–28%)
on processed, sugary items like carbonated
drinks, packaged snacks, and chocolates.
Cholera
Syllabus :GS 2/Health
In News
A cholera outbreak has killed many people
in the war-torn Sudan.
Cholera
It is a serious diarrheal illness caused by
ingesting food or water contaminated with
the bacterium Vibrio cholerae.
It remains a significant global public health
concern, reflecting deep social and
economic inequalities.
Symptoms: Cholera typically causes sudden,
severe watery diarrhea that can lead to
death within hours if not treated.
Effect: A 2024 World Health Organisation
(WHO) report noted that cholera deaths
have shown an uptick in recent years and
attributed the cause to climate change and
poor sanitation.
Preventing cholera and other waterborne
diseases relies heavily on access to clean
water, adequate sanitation, and proper
hygiene.
o While most cholera cases involve
mild to moderate diarrhea and can
be treated effectively with oral
rehydration solution (ORS), the
illness can escalate quickly.
Zoonotic Outbreaks
Syllabus: GS2/ Health
In News
As per the Integrated Disease Surveillance
Program (IDSP), zoonotic outbreaks
significantly increased over the years,
particularly post-pandemic.
Key Findings of the Study
Prevalence of Zoonotic Outbreaks: Over 8%
(583 out of 6,948) of the reported
outbreaks were zoonotic (spread from
animals to humans).
Peak Seasonality: Zoonotic outbreaks
consistently peaked during the months of
June, July, and August.
Leading Zoonotic Diseases: Japanese
encephalitis accounted for the largest share
(29.5%) then Leptospirosis (18.7%) &
scrub typhus (13.9%).
Geographical Distribution: The Northeast
part of India contributed the highest
proportion (35.8%) of zoonotic disease
outbreaks followed by the southern region
(31.7%) & western region (15.4%).
Why is Zoonotic Surveillance Significant?
Due to climate change, deforestation, and
expanding urbanisation, human-wildlife
contact is increasing which can elevate the
chances of pathogen spillover from animals
to humans & threatens to strain India’s
already burdened public health
infrastructure.
Initiatives Taken to Combat Zoonotic Diseases
Integrated Disease Surveillance Programme
(IDSP) was launched in 2004 to track
epidemic-prone diseases.
The National One Health Mission envisioned
under the Department of Biotechnology
aims to integrate animal health, human
health, and environment monitoring.
National Centre for Disease Control (NCDC)
(Zoonosis Division) conducts outbreak
investigations and develops standard
treatment protocols for zoonotic diseases
like JE, leptospirosis, brucellosis, and rabies.
INDIAN POLITY AND GOVERNANCE
Cabinet Approves Caste Enumeration in Upcoming
Census
Syllabus: GS2/Governance
Context
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
41
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Recently, the Cabinet Committee on Political
Affairs (CCPA), chaired by Prime Minister of
India, has decided to include caste
enumeration in the upcoming Census
exercise, marking a significant shift in India’s
approach to demographic data collection.
Caste Based Enumeration
Historical Perspective: The last caste-based
enumeration in India was carried out in 1931 under
British rule, recording 4,147 distinct castes.
Although caste details were gathered in 1941, they
were never published due to the outbreak of World
War II.
Post-Independence, only Scheduled Castes (SCs)
and Scheduled Tribes (STs) have been counted in
the decennial Census
In 1961 Directive, the Union Government
authorized states to conduct their own surveys to
identify OBCs (Other Backward Classes).
In 2011, Socio-Economic Caste Census was
conducted to obtain data about socio-economic
status of various communities.
Constitutional Basis for the Decision
Union Subject: As per Article 246 of the Constitution
of India, the Census is a Union subject, listed in
the Union List under the Seventh Schedule.
It ensures that caste enumeration, conducted as part
of the main Census, will have a uniform and
transparent framework across the country.
The Census Act, 1948 provides the legal framework
for conducting population censuses in India. It
outlines the procedures, duties, and penalties
associated with census operations.
Significance of Caste Enumeration
Digital Census: The next Census will be conducted
in digital mode, with respondents having the option
to fill the questionnaire via a mobile application.
A new column for caste enumeration will be added,
featuring a drop-down code directory for easy
selection.
Data-Driven Policy Making: Comprehensive
caste data will enable evidence-based
governance, ensuring fair representation in
education, employment, and welfare
programs.
o It will help refine reservation
policies.
o It will aid in the implementation of
the 33% reservation for women in
Parliament and State Assemblies.
Addressing Socio-Economic Disparities: The
data will provide insights into economic
inequalities among caste groups, aiding in
targeted development programs.
Judicial Demand: The Supreme Court’s
judgment in the Indra Sawhney
case established that a state’s conclusion
regarding the “backwardness” of a group
must be founded on proper assessment and
objective evaluation.
Concerns Related to Caste Enumeration
Potential for Political Exploitation: Critics
argue that caste enumeration could be used
as a political tool to influence electoral
strategies.
o There are concerns that state-level
caste surveys have lacked
transparency and were conducted
with political motivations.
Risk of Deepening Social Divisions: Some
fear that caste enumeration may reinforce
caste identities, leading to fragmentation
rather than inclusivity.
o The debate over caste-based
reservations could intensify,
creating social tensions.
Challenges in Implementation: Ensuring
accurate data collection without
manipulation or misrepresentation remains
a challenge.
41
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Recently, the Cabinet Committee on Political
Affairs (CCPA), chaired by Prime Minister of
India, has decided to include caste
enumeration in the upcoming Census
exercise, marking a significant shift in India’s
approach to demographic data collection.
Caste Based Enumeration
Historical Perspective: The last caste-based
enumeration in India was carried out in 1931 under
British rule, recording 4,147 distinct castes.
Although caste details were gathered in 1941, they
were never published due to the outbreak of World
War II.
Post-Independence, only Scheduled Castes (SCs)
and Scheduled Tribes (STs) have been counted in
the decennial Census
In 1961 Directive, the Union Government
authorized states to conduct their own surveys to
identify OBCs (Other Backward Classes).
In 2011, Socio-Economic Caste Census was
conducted to obtain data about socio-economic
status of various communities.
Constitutional Basis for the Decision
Union Subject: As per Article 246 of the Constitution
of India, the Census is a Union subject, listed in
the Union List under the Seventh Schedule.
It ensures that caste enumeration, conducted as part
of the main Census, will have a uniform and
transparent framework across the country.
The Census Act, 1948 provides the legal framework
for conducting population censuses in India. It
outlines the procedures, duties, and penalties
associated with census operations.
Significance of Caste Enumeration
Digital Census: The next Census will be conducted
in digital mode, with respondents having the option
to fill the questionnaire via a mobile application.
A new column for caste enumeration will be added,
featuring a drop-down code directory for easy
selection.
Data-Driven Policy Making: Comprehensive
caste data will enable evidence-based
governance, ensuring fair representation in
education, employment, and welfare
programs.
o It will help refine reservation
policies.
o It will aid in the implementation of
the 33% reservation for women in
Parliament and State Assemblies.
Addressing Socio-Economic Disparities: The
data will provide insights into economic
inequalities among caste groups, aiding in
targeted development programs.
Judicial Demand: The Supreme Court’s
judgment in the Indra Sawhney
case established that a state’s conclusion
regarding the “backwardness” of a group
must be founded on proper assessment and
objective evaluation.
Concerns Related to Caste Enumeration
Potential for Political Exploitation: Critics
argue that caste enumeration could be used
as a political tool to influence electoral
strategies.
o There are concerns that state-level
caste surveys have lacked
transparency and were conducted
with political motivations.
Risk of Deepening Social Divisions: Some
fear that caste enumeration may reinforce
caste identities, leading to fragmentation
rather than inclusivity.
o The debate over caste-based
reservations could intensify,
creating social tensions.
Challenges in Implementation: Ensuring
accurate data collection without
manipulation or misrepresentation remains
a challenge.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
42
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o The methodology for caste
classification must be transparent
and scientifically validated.
Conclusion
The inclusion of caste enumeration in the
next Census is a landmark decision that
promises to reshape India’s socio-political
landscape.
By providing detailed data on caste
demographics, the government aims to
address inequalities and foster inclusive
development.
As the Census unfolds, its impact on policy-
making and societal dynamics will be
closely watched.
Right To Digital Access Part of Article 21
Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance
Context
The Supreme court emphasized that digital
access is a crucial component of the Right to
Life under Article 21.
Background
The judgment was based on a petition filed
by a group of acid attack survivors.
They raised concerns about how disabled
people, including acid attack victims, find it
nearly impossible to successfully complete
the digital KYC processes, which include
visual tasks.
Supreme Court Ruling
The court said that the state has an
obligation to provide an inclusive digital
ecosystem to the marginalised,
underprivileged, vulnerable, disabled, and
historically-excluded sections of society.
Directive to Improve KYC Accessibility:
The Court mandated that alternative verification
mechanisms must be introduced for those unable to
blink or use facial recognition.
It also called for full compliance with Section 46 of
the Rights of Persons with Disabilities (RPwD) Act,
2016, which mandates accessibility in electronic
and print media.
Websites, mobile applications, and digital platforms
must be made compliant with universal
accessibility standards.
The state’s obligations under Article
21, with Articles 14, 15 and 38 of the Constitution,
must encompass the responsibility to ensure that
digital infrastructure, government portals, and
financial technologies are universally accessible.
Article 21 of the Indian Constitution
No person shall be deprived of his life or
personal liberty except according to
procedure established by law.
Article 21 is part of the Fundamental Rights,
Part III of the Constitution. It is guaranteed
to all persons, citizens and non-citizens
alike.
It places a restriction on the state from
arbitrarily interfering with a person’s life
and liberty.
o Over time, courts have interpreted it
to also impose positive
obligations on the state to ensure a
dignified life.
Rights Included Under Article 21 ( Judicial
Interpretation)
Right Landmark Case
Right to livelihood
Olga Tellis v. Bombay
Municipal Corporation
(1985)
Right to clean
environment
Subhash Kumar v. State of
Bihar (1991)
Right to education
(prior to Article 21A)
Mohini Jain v. State of
Karnataka (1992)
Right to privacy
Justice K.S. Puttaswamy v.
Union of India (2017)
Right to die with
dignity
Common Cause v. Union of
India (2018)
42
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o The methodology for caste
classification must be transparent
and scientifically validated.
Conclusion
The inclusion of caste enumeration in the
next Census is a landmark decision that
promises to reshape India’s socio-political
landscape.
By providing detailed data on caste
demographics, the government aims to
address inequalities and foster inclusive
development.
As the Census unfolds, its impact on policy-
making and societal dynamics will be
closely watched.
Right To Digital Access Part of Article 21
Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance
Context
The Supreme court emphasized that digital
access is a crucial component of the Right to
Life under Article 21.
Background
The judgment was based on a petition filed
by a group of acid attack survivors.
They raised concerns about how disabled
people, including acid attack victims, find it
nearly impossible to successfully complete
the digital KYC processes, which include
visual tasks.
Supreme Court Ruling
The court said that the state has an
obligation to provide an inclusive digital
ecosystem to the marginalised,
underprivileged, vulnerable, disabled, and
historically-excluded sections of society.
Directive to Improve KYC Accessibility:
The Court mandated that alternative verification
mechanisms must be introduced for those unable to
blink or use facial recognition.
It also called for full compliance with Section 46 of
the Rights of Persons with Disabilities (RPwD) Act,
2016, which mandates accessibility in electronic
and print media.
Websites, mobile applications, and digital platforms
must be made compliant with universal
accessibility standards.
The state’s obligations under Article
21, with Articles 14, 15 and 38 of the Constitution,
must encompass the responsibility to ensure that
digital infrastructure, government portals, and
financial technologies are universally accessible.
Article 21 of the Indian Constitution
No person shall be deprived of his life or
personal liberty except according to
procedure established by law.
Article 21 is part of the Fundamental Rights,
Part III of the Constitution. It is guaranteed
to all persons, citizens and non-citizens
alike.
It places a restriction on the state from
arbitrarily interfering with a person’s life
and liberty.
o Over time, courts have interpreted it
to also impose positive
obligations on the state to ensure a
dignified life.
Rights Included Under Article 21 ( Judicial
Interpretation)
Right Landmark Case
Right to livelihood
Olga Tellis v. Bombay
Municipal Corporation
(1985)
Right to clean
environment
Subhash Kumar v. State of
Bihar (1991)
Right to education
(prior to Article 21A)
Mohini Jain v. State of
Karnataka (1992)
Right to privacy
Justice K.S. Puttaswamy v.
Union of India (2017)
Right to die with
dignity
Common Cause v. Union of
India (2018)
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
43
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
SC upholds courts’ power to modify arbitral awards
under limited circumstances
Syllabus :GS2/Governance
In News
The Supreme Court of India, in a majority
4:1 judgment, ruled that courts have the
limited power to modify arbitral awards
under Section 34 of the Arbitration and
Conciliation Act, 1996.
Background
This decision responds to a legal question
referred by a three-judge bench in February
2024, seeking clarity on whether courts can
modify arbitral awards.
Arbitration
It is an alternate mode of dispute resolution
under the 1996 law and it minimises the
role of courts to interfere with the awards
by the tribunals.
Major Highlights of the Judgement
Courts can modify awards to remove invalid
portions or correct typographical,
computational, or clerical errors.
Courts can also adjust the interest post-
award if necessary.
Judicial intervention under Section 34 of
the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 is
confined to limited grounds, such as public
policy or fraud.
Courts cannot correct factual errors,
reconsider costs, or review the merits of the
award.
Article 142 Powers: The Supreme Court can
use its inherent powers under Article 142 to
ensure complete justice in cases
involving arbitral awards.
o However, this power must be
exercised cautiously and in line with
the principles of the 1996
Arbitration Act.
Do you know?
– Section 34 of the Arbitration and Conciliation
Act allows a court to set aside an arbitral award on
specific grounds such as violation of public policy,
fundamental legal principles, fraud, corruption, or
moral injustice.
1. Section 37 deals with the circumstances in which
an appeal would lie against the order in an arbitral
dispute
– However, the Supreme Court, in its majority
judgment, noted that it had occasionally modified
arbitral awards in the past to avoid prolonged
litigation and ensure justice, even though such
modification is not explicitly provided under
Section 34.
Dissent
Justice Viswanathan’s Argued
that arbitral awards cannot be modified
unless specifically permitted by the statute.
o Section 34 only allows for the
setting aside of awards, not
modifying them.
The dissent mirrored the Centre’s view,
which emphasized that the power to modify
should be statutorily conferred.
Lawyers argued that allowing courts to
modify arbitral awards could replace them
with court decrees, which could have
international implications.
Modifying arbitral awards could lead to
issues with enforcing them under
international conventions.
President Stresses On Mediation To Resolve
Conflicts
Syllabus: GS2/ Governance
In News
Speaking at the launch of the first national
mediation conference organised by the
Mediation Association of India (MIA), the
President stressed on mediation to resolve
disputes and lower the burden of courts
across the country.
What is Mediation?
Mediation is a voluntary, confidential, and
non-adversarial process where a neutral
43
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
SC upholds courts’ power to modify arbitral awards
under limited circumstances
Syllabus :GS2/Governance
In News
The Supreme Court of India, in a majority
4:1 judgment, ruled that courts have the
limited power to modify arbitral awards
under Section 34 of the Arbitration and
Conciliation Act, 1996.
Background
This decision responds to a legal question
referred by a three-judge bench in February
2024, seeking clarity on whether courts can
modify arbitral awards.
Arbitration
It is an alternate mode of dispute resolution
under the 1996 law and it minimises the
role of courts to interfere with the awards
by the tribunals.
Major Highlights of the Judgement
Courts can modify awards to remove invalid
portions or correct typographical,
computational, or clerical errors.
Courts can also adjust the interest post-
award if necessary.
Judicial intervention under Section 34 of
the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 is
confined to limited grounds, such as public
policy or fraud.
Courts cannot correct factual errors,
reconsider costs, or review the merits of the
award.
Article 142 Powers: The Supreme Court can
use its inherent powers under Article 142 to
ensure complete justice in cases
involving arbitral awards.
o However, this power must be
exercised cautiously and in line with
the principles of the 1996
Arbitration Act.
Do you know?
– Section 34 of the Arbitration and Conciliation
Act allows a court to set aside an arbitral award on
specific grounds such as violation of public policy,
fundamental legal principles, fraud, corruption, or
moral injustice.
1. Section 37 deals with the circumstances in which
an appeal would lie against the order in an arbitral
dispute
– However, the Supreme Court, in its majority
judgment, noted that it had occasionally modified
arbitral awards in the past to avoid prolonged
litigation and ensure justice, even though such
modification is not explicitly provided under
Section 34.
Dissent
Justice Viswanathan’s Argued
that arbitral awards cannot be modified
unless specifically permitted by the statute.
o Section 34 only allows for the
setting aside of awards, not
modifying them.
The dissent mirrored the Centre’s view,
which emphasized that the power to modify
should be statutorily conferred.
Lawyers argued that allowing courts to
modify arbitral awards could replace them
with court decrees, which could have
international implications.
Modifying arbitral awards could lead to
issues with enforcing them under
international conventions.
President Stresses On Mediation To Resolve
Conflicts
Syllabus: GS2/ Governance
In News
Speaking at the launch of the first national
mediation conference organised by the
Mediation Association of India (MIA), the
President stressed on mediation to resolve
disputes and lower the burden of courts
across the country.
What is Mediation?
Mediation is a voluntary, confidential, and
non-adversarial process where a neutral
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
44
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
third party helps disputing parties reach a
mutually acceptable solution.
It is one of the Alternative Dispute
Resolution (ADR) mechanisms alongside
arbitration, negotiation, and conciliation.
Judicial Backlog in India
India’s judiciary is overburdened with a
massive backlog of pending cases, causing
delays in justice and eroding public trust.
As of 2024, over 5.1 crore cases are pending
across Indian courts. This includes
approximately 71,000 cases in the Supreme
Court, around 60 lakh cases in the High
Courts, and nearly 4.5 crore cases in District
and Subordinate Courts.
Out of a sanctioned strength of nearly
25,000 judges, only about 20,000 are in
position, indicating a vacancy rate of around
20%.
India’s judge-to-population ratio stands at
just 21 judges per million population, which
is far below the Law Commission’s
recommended ratio of 50 judges per
million.
Importance of Mediation
Reduces pendency: Frees up court dockets
by resolving minor civil, matrimonial, and
commercial cases early.
Faster resolution: Most cases are settled
within a few sittings.
Cost-effective: Saves both court costs and
lawyer fees.
Preserves relationships: Especially useful in
family and business disputes.
Empowers parties: Solution is based on
mutual agreement, not judicial imposition.
Legal Provisions and Institutional Support
Legal Services Authorities Act,
1987: Establishes Lok Adalats which use
mediation-like processes. Statutory backing
for free legal aid and ADR.
Section 89 of CPC (Civil Procedure Code),
1908: Mandates courts to refer disputes for
ADR, including mediation.
Mediation Act, 2023: Aims to institutionalize
mediation in India.
o Key provisions: Mandatory pre-
litigation mediation for civil and
commercial cases.
o Establishment of a
Mediation Council of India to
institutionalize and regulate
mediation across the
country. A major function of
MCI will be to oversee
training, assessment, and
certification of mediators.
Current Commercial Dispute Resolution in India
Commercial Courts, set up under the 2015
Act, fast-track disputes above ₹3 lakh and
promote pre-litigation mediation to ease
court burden.
Arbitration, governed by the 1996 Act
(amended in 2015, 2019, 2021), offers
binding decisions by neutral arbitrators. It
can be ad hoc or institutional (e.g., Indian
Council of Arbitration, IIAC).
The Consumer Protection Act, 2019,
emphasizes mediation as a swift, cost-
effective, and amicable method for resolving
consumer disputes.
Internationally, India signed the Singapore
Convention on Mediation.
Challenges
Challenges Description
Lack of awareness
Many people and lawyers are
unaware of mediation’s benefits.
Resistance from
legal
professionals
Lawyers may prefer lengthy
trials for financial reasons.
Inadequate
training
Not enough trained mediators,
especially in rural areas.
44
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
third party helps disputing parties reach a
mutually acceptable solution.
It is one of the Alternative Dispute
Resolution (ADR) mechanisms alongside
arbitration, negotiation, and conciliation.
Judicial Backlog in India
India’s judiciary is overburdened with a
massive backlog of pending cases, causing
delays in justice and eroding public trust.
As of 2024, over 5.1 crore cases are pending
across Indian courts. This includes
approximately 71,000 cases in the Supreme
Court, around 60 lakh cases in the High
Courts, and nearly 4.5 crore cases in District
and Subordinate Courts.
Out of a sanctioned strength of nearly
25,000 judges, only about 20,000 are in
position, indicating a vacancy rate of around
20%.
India’s judge-to-population ratio stands at
just 21 judges per million population, which
is far below the Law Commission’s
recommended ratio of 50 judges per
million.
Importance of Mediation
Reduces pendency: Frees up court dockets
by resolving minor civil, matrimonial, and
commercial cases early.
Faster resolution: Most cases are settled
within a few sittings.
Cost-effective: Saves both court costs and
lawyer fees.
Preserves relationships: Especially useful in
family and business disputes.
Empowers parties: Solution is based on
mutual agreement, not judicial imposition.
Legal Provisions and Institutional Support
Legal Services Authorities Act,
1987: Establishes Lok Adalats which use
mediation-like processes. Statutory backing
for free legal aid and ADR.
Section 89 of CPC (Civil Procedure Code),
1908: Mandates courts to refer disputes for
ADR, including mediation.
Mediation Act, 2023: Aims to institutionalize
mediation in India.
o Key provisions: Mandatory pre-
litigation mediation for civil and
commercial cases.
o Establishment of a
Mediation Council of India to
institutionalize and regulate
mediation across the
country. A major function of
MCI will be to oversee
training, assessment, and
certification of mediators.
Current Commercial Dispute Resolution in India
Commercial Courts, set up under the 2015
Act, fast-track disputes above ₹3 lakh and
promote pre-litigation mediation to ease
court burden.
Arbitration, governed by the 1996 Act
(amended in 2015, 2019, 2021), offers
binding decisions by neutral arbitrators. It
can be ad hoc or institutional (e.g., Indian
Council of Arbitration, IIAC).
The Consumer Protection Act, 2019,
emphasizes mediation as a swift, cost-
effective, and amicable method for resolving
consumer disputes.
Internationally, India signed the Singapore
Convention on Mediation.
Challenges
Challenges Description
Lack of awareness
Many people and lawyers are
unaware of mediation’s benefits.
Resistance from
legal
professionals
Lawyers may prefer lengthy
trials for financial reasons.
Inadequate
training
Not enough trained mediators,
especially in rural areas.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
45
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Low public trust
Preference for court judgments
over negotiated settlements.
Global Best Practices
– Singapore and Italy: Pre-litigation mediation is
mandatory for many disputes.
– UK and Australia: Well-funded public mediation
centres with high success rates.
– USA: Over 90% of civil disputes settled through
ADR.
Recent Government and Judicial Initiatives
– e-Courts Mission Mode Project: Digitalization to
reduce pendency.
– Tele-law and Nyaya Bandhu schemes: Legal aid
using tech platforms.
– Supreme Court’s Mediation and Conciliation
Project Committee (MCPC): Promotes mediation in
all courts.
– Fast Track Courts and Gram
Nyayalayas: Additional dispute resolution
mechanisms.
Way Forward
Strengthen legal framework: Ensure
uniform implementation of the Mediation
Act, 2023.
Awareness campaigns: Promote mediation
literacy among citizens.
Capacity building: Train more mediators
and accredit them under a national body.
Judicial support: Encourage judges to refer
more cases to mediation.
Digital mediation platforms: Use of ODR
(Online Dispute Resolution) for faster
outcomes.
Monitoring outcomes: Create databases to
assess mediation success and backlog
impact.
Appointment to Central Bureau of Investigation
(CBI)
Syllabus: GS2/Polity & Governance
Context
Recently, the high-level committee, headed
by the Prime Minister of India, met to select
the next Director of the Central Bureau of
Investigation (CBI).
o Due to the lack of consensus on a
new appointment, incumbent CBI
Director is all set to get a one-year
extension.
About the Central Bureau of Investigation (CBI)
It is India’s specialized investigative agency,
responsible for tackling high-profile crimes,
corruption, and national security matters.
Origins & Evolution
The CBI traces its roots to the Special Police
Establishment (SPE), formed in 1941 to
investigate corruption in wartime
procurement.
It was officially established by an executive
order of the Government of India
in 1963, on the recommendation
of Santhanam Committee.
o It was not created by an Act of
Parliament, thus not a Statutory
Body.
Functioning
Under DoPT, Ministry of Personnel, Public
Grievances, and Pensions.
It derives its investigative powers from
the Delhi Special Police Establishment
(DSPE) Act, 1946.
It is exempted from the purview of the Right
to Information (RTI) Act.
Jurisdiction
The Central Government can authorize CBI
to investigate such a crime in a State but
only with the consent of the concerned State
Government.
The Supreme Court and High Courts can
order CBI to investigate such a crime
anywhere in the country without the
consent of the State.
CBI can suo-moto take up investigation of
offences only in the Union Territories.
Organizational Structure of CBI
Director of CBI: It is the head of the agency,
appointed by the Central Government.
45
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Low public trust
Preference for court judgments
over negotiated settlements.
Global Best Practices
– Singapore and Italy: Pre-litigation mediation is
mandatory for many disputes.
– UK and Australia: Well-funded public mediation
centres with high success rates.
– USA: Over 90% of civil disputes settled through
ADR.
Recent Government and Judicial Initiatives
– e-Courts Mission Mode Project: Digitalization to
reduce pendency.
– Tele-law and Nyaya Bandhu schemes: Legal aid
using tech platforms.
– Supreme Court’s Mediation and Conciliation
Project Committee (MCPC): Promotes mediation in
all courts.
– Fast Track Courts and Gram
Nyayalayas: Additional dispute resolution
mechanisms.
Way Forward
Strengthen legal framework: Ensure
uniform implementation of the Mediation
Act, 2023.
Awareness campaigns: Promote mediation
literacy among citizens.
Capacity building: Train more mediators
and accredit them under a national body.
Judicial support: Encourage judges to refer
more cases to mediation.
Digital mediation platforms: Use of ODR
(Online Dispute Resolution) for faster
outcomes.
Monitoring outcomes: Create databases to
assess mediation success and backlog
impact.
Appointment to Central Bureau of Investigation
(CBI)
Syllabus: GS2/Polity & Governance
Context
Recently, the high-level committee, headed
by the Prime Minister of India, met to select
the next Director of the Central Bureau of
Investigation (CBI).
o Due to the lack of consensus on a
new appointment, incumbent CBI
Director is all set to get a one-year
extension.
About the Central Bureau of Investigation (CBI)
It is India’s specialized investigative agency,
responsible for tackling high-profile crimes,
corruption, and national security matters.
Origins & Evolution
The CBI traces its roots to the Special Police
Establishment (SPE), formed in 1941 to
investigate corruption in wartime
procurement.
It was officially established by an executive
order of the Government of India
in 1963, on the recommendation
of Santhanam Committee.
o It was not created by an Act of
Parliament, thus not a Statutory
Body.
Functioning
Under DoPT, Ministry of Personnel, Public
Grievances, and Pensions.
It derives its investigative powers from
the Delhi Special Police Establishment
(DSPE) Act, 1946.
It is exempted from the purview of the Right
to Information (RTI) Act.
Jurisdiction
The Central Government can authorize CBI
to investigate such a crime in a State but
only with the consent of the concerned State
Government.
The Supreme Court and High Courts can
order CBI to investigate such a crime
anywhere in the country without the
consent of the State.
CBI can suo-moto take up investigation of
offences only in the Union Territories.
Organizational Structure of CBI
Director of CBI: It is the head of the agency,
appointed by the Central Government.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
46
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Oversees all investigative
operations and policy decisions.
Specialized Divisions: Anti-Corruption
Division; Economic Offenses Division;
Special Crimes Division; Directorate of
Prosecution; Policy & Coordination
Division; and Central Forensic Science
Laboratory.
Regional Offices: CBI has regional offices
across India, each headed by a Joint Director
or Additional Director.
International Coordination: CBI serves as
India’s nodal agency
for Interpol, handling cross-border
investigations.
Appointment of the Director of the CBI
– The Director of the CBI is appointed by
the Appointments Committee of the Cabinet based
on recommendations from a high-level selection
panel.
– The selection process follows provisions under
the Delhi Special Police Establishment (DSPE) Act,
1946.
– Selection Committee Composition:
1. Prime Minister of India (Chairperson)
2. Chief Justice of India (CJI)
3. Leader of the Opposition (LoP) in Lok Sabha
– Tenure:
1.The head of CBI can have a maximum tenure of
five years.
Key Concerns and Challenges
Jurisdiction and Consent Issues: The
CBI requires prior consent from state
governments to investigate cases within
their jurisdiction.
o Several states have
withdrawn general consent, limiting
the agency’s ability to probe cases
independently.
o It has led to legal disputes over the
agency’s authority.
Supervision and Accountability: The CBI
reports to the Central Vigilance Commission
(CVC) and the Ministry of Personnel.
o The Supreme Court has termed the
agency a ‘caged parrot’, highlighting
concerns over political interference.
Delays in Investigation and
Prosecution: High-profile cases often face
delays due to bureaucratic hurdles and legal
complexities.
o The agency’s conviction rate varies,
raising concerns about efficiency.
Manpower Shortages: Nearly 16% of the
agency’s sanctioned strength is vacant
leading to operational hurdles.
CBI Deputations Issue: The CBI faces
challenges in filling posts through
deputations, especially for ranks below
inspector, due to the state’s reluctance to
spare personnel for central deputation.
Way Forward: House Panel Recommendations
New Law to Define CBI’s Powers and
Functions: The panel noted that the DSPE
Act, 1946 has limitations, and
recommended enacting a new law to clearly
define the status, functions, and powers of
the agency.
Framework for Direct Recruitment: Panel
suggested that the CBI Director should
monitor recruitment progress quarterly to
ensure the agency remains sufficiently
staffed.
Law to Probe National Security: The panel
proposed a new legal provision allowing the
CBI to probe national security-related cases
without needing general consent from
states.
Improving Recruitment and Training: A
structured recruitment framework and
advanced forensic capabilities could boost
investigative efficiency.
Supreme Court Publishes Assets of 21 Judges
Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance
Context
Twenty-one Supreme Court judges,
including the Chief Justice of India, have
46
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Oversees all investigative
operations and policy decisions.
Specialized Divisions: Anti-Corruption
Division; Economic Offenses Division;
Special Crimes Division; Directorate of
Prosecution; Policy & Coordination
Division; and Central Forensic Science
Laboratory.
Regional Offices: CBI has regional offices
across India, each headed by a Joint Director
or Additional Director.
International Coordination: CBI serves as
India’s nodal agency
for Interpol, handling cross-border
investigations.
Appointment of the Director of the CBI
– The Director of the CBI is appointed by
the Appointments Committee of the Cabinet based
on recommendations from a high-level selection
panel.
– The selection process follows provisions under
the Delhi Special Police Establishment (DSPE) Act,
1946.
– Selection Committee Composition:
1. Prime Minister of India (Chairperson)
2. Chief Justice of India (CJI)
3. Leader of the Opposition (LoP) in Lok Sabha
– Tenure:
1.The head of CBI can have a maximum tenure of
five years.
Key Concerns and Challenges
Jurisdiction and Consent Issues: The
CBI requires prior consent from state
governments to investigate cases within
their jurisdiction.
o Several states have
withdrawn general consent, limiting
the agency’s ability to probe cases
independently.
o It has led to legal disputes over the
agency’s authority.
Supervision and Accountability: The CBI
reports to the Central Vigilance Commission
(CVC) and the Ministry of Personnel.
o The Supreme Court has termed the
agency a ‘caged parrot’, highlighting
concerns over political interference.
Delays in Investigation and
Prosecution: High-profile cases often face
delays due to bureaucratic hurdles and legal
complexities.
o The agency’s conviction rate varies,
raising concerns about efficiency.
Manpower Shortages: Nearly 16% of the
agency’s sanctioned strength is vacant
leading to operational hurdles.
CBI Deputations Issue: The CBI faces
challenges in filling posts through
deputations, especially for ranks below
inspector, due to the state’s reluctance to
spare personnel for central deputation.
Way Forward: House Panel Recommendations
New Law to Define CBI’s Powers and
Functions: The panel noted that the DSPE
Act, 1946 has limitations, and
recommended enacting a new law to clearly
define the status, functions, and powers of
the agency.
Framework for Direct Recruitment: Panel
suggested that the CBI Director should
monitor recruitment progress quarterly to
ensure the agency remains sufficiently
staffed.
Law to Probe National Security: The panel
proposed a new legal provision allowing the
CBI to probe national security-related cases
without needing general consent from
states.
Improving Recruitment and Training: A
structured recruitment framework and
advanced forensic capabilities could boost
investigative efficiency.
Supreme Court Publishes Assets of 21 Judges
Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance
Context
Twenty-one Supreme Court judges,
including the Chief Justice of India, have
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
47
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
disclosed their financial assets and
liabilities on the top court’s website.
Background
Judicial accountability has long been a
subject of debate in India, particularly in
terms of financial disclosures and ethical
standards.
Unlike elected representatives or civil
servants, judges are not legally mandated to
publicly declare their assets.
The current disclosure followed a resolution
of the Full Court, aimed at promoting public
trust in the judiciary.
Timeline of Key Developments
Year Event
1997
First Full Court Resolution under CJI J.S.
Verma recommends asset declaration by
judges to the Chief Justice.
2009
A Full Court resolved to allow voluntary
disclosure of judges’ assets on the SC website.
2009
Delhi High Court held that such declarations
are “information” under Section 2(f) of the
RTI Act, 2005.
2019
The Constitution Bench ruled that the CJI is a
“public authority” under the RTI Act and asset
disclosure serves public interest without
violating privacy.
2025
The Supreme Court begins publishing assets
of sitting judges, including familial ties,
proactively on its website.
Significance of the asset declaration by SC
Promotes Transparency: It reinforces the
judiciary’s commitment to openness and
ethical conduct.
Builds Public Trust: It helps counter
perceptions of judicial elitism or bias.
Constitutional Morality: It aligns with values
like integrity and responsibility enshrined
in the Preamble and Part IV – Directive
Principles of State Policy of Indian
Constitution.
Need for Trust and Integrity in the Judiciary
Judiciary as the Guardian of the
Constitution: The judiciary plays a crucial
role in upholding the Constitution,
protecting fundamental rights, and ensuring
checks and balances.
Ensuring Accountability: Lack of integrity in
judiciary can lead to judicial delays, or
misuse of power undermining justice and
promoting inequality. Public asset
disclosure is a step to ensure accountability.
Institutional Stability: In times of political
instability or social unrest, the judiciary acts
as a stabilising force. A trusted judiciary can
resolve constitutional crises and reinforce
national unity.
Concluding remarks
Trust and integrity in the judiciary are the
cornerstones of a just society. They ensure
not just legal justice, but social stability,
democratic strength, and the moral
authority of the state.
Transparency, ethical conduct, and
institutional reforms are essential to
nurture and sustain that trust.
Bureaucracy in India
Syllabus: GS2/Governance
Context
Civil services are crucial in maintaining and
strengthening democracy but there is a need
for lateral entrants and greater
transparency.
About
The concept of a merit based modern Civil
Service in India was introduced in 1854.
From 1922 onwards the Indian Civil Service
Examination began to be held in India.
After independence, the Union Public
Service Commission (UPSC) became
responsible for conducting the exams.
Civil Services Day is observed on 21st April
every year to commemorate the day in 1947
when Sardar Vallabhbhai Patel addressed
47
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
disclosed their financial assets and
liabilities on the top court’s website.
Background
Judicial accountability has long been a
subject of debate in India, particularly in
terms of financial disclosures and ethical
standards.
Unlike elected representatives or civil
servants, judges are not legally mandated to
publicly declare their assets.
The current disclosure followed a resolution
of the Full Court, aimed at promoting public
trust in the judiciary.
Timeline of Key Developments
Year Event
1997
First Full Court Resolution under CJI J.S.
Verma recommends asset declaration by
judges to the Chief Justice.
2009
A Full Court resolved to allow voluntary
disclosure of judges’ assets on the SC website.
2009
Delhi High Court held that such declarations
are “information” under Section 2(f) of the
RTI Act, 2005.
2019
The Constitution Bench ruled that the CJI is a
“public authority” under the RTI Act and asset
disclosure serves public interest without
violating privacy.
2025
The Supreme Court begins publishing assets
of sitting judges, including familial ties,
proactively on its website.
Significance of the asset declaration by SC
Promotes Transparency: It reinforces the
judiciary’s commitment to openness and
ethical conduct.
Builds Public Trust: It helps counter
perceptions of judicial elitism or bias.
Constitutional Morality: It aligns with values
like integrity and responsibility enshrined
in the Preamble and Part IV – Directive
Principles of State Policy of Indian
Constitution.
Need for Trust and Integrity in the Judiciary
Judiciary as the Guardian of the
Constitution: The judiciary plays a crucial
role in upholding the Constitution,
protecting fundamental rights, and ensuring
checks and balances.
Ensuring Accountability: Lack of integrity in
judiciary can lead to judicial delays, or
misuse of power undermining justice and
promoting inequality. Public asset
disclosure is a step to ensure accountability.
Institutional Stability: In times of political
instability or social unrest, the judiciary acts
as a stabilising force. A trusted judiciary can
resolve constitutional crises and reinforce
national unity.
Concluding remarks
Trust and integrity in the judiciary are the
cornerstones of a just society. They ensure
not just legal justice, but social stability,
democratic strength, and the moral
authority of the state.
Transparency, ethical conduct, and
institutional reforms are essential to
nurture and sustain that trust.
Bureaucracy in India
Syllabus: GS2/Governance
Context
Civil services are crucial in maintaining and
strengthening democracy but there is a need
for lateral entrants and greater
transparency.
About
The concept of a merit based modern Civil
Service in India was introduced in 1854.
From 1922 onwards the Indian Civil Service
Examination began to be held in India.
After independence, the Union Public
Service Commission (UPSC) became
responsible for conducting the exams.
Civil Services Day is observed on 21st April
every year to commemorate the day in 1947
when Sardar Vallabhbhai Patel addressed
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
48
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
the first batch of civil servants at the
Metcalfe House, New Delhi.
o He termed civil servants as
the “Steel frame of
India,” emphasizing their role in
maintaining unity and integrity.
History of Civil Services in India
– Lord Cornwallis is considered as ‘Father of Civil
Services in India’.
– Lord Wellesley founded the College of Fort
William in Calcutta in 1800 to educate young
recruits for the Civil Services.
1. But the directors of the Company, in 1806,
replaced it with their own East Indian College at
Haileybury in England.
– Before 1853 East India Company directors used
to appoint Civil Servants. Board of Control
members were allowed to make some nominations.
– The Charter Act of 1853 abolished the patronage
system and introduced open competitive
examinations.
– The first competitive exams for the Indian Civil
Services (ICS) were held in London in 1855.
– Satyendranath Tagore was the first Indian to clear
ICS in 1864.
Role of Civil Services in Governance
Service delivery: They are responsible for
administering welfare schemes and
ensuring that public services reach the
intended beneficiaries, particularly at the
last mile.
Maintaining law and order: Civil servants
ensure peace, justice, and security by
upholding the rule of law and coordinating
with law enforcement agencies.
Elections: They have been instrumental in
the conduct of free and fair elections, and
ensuring smooth transfer of power both at
the Centre and States.
Uninterrupted Administration: There have
been numerous instances when States have
been placed under President’s rule, with the
civil servants ensuring uninterrupted
administration during such times.
Policy Making: They provide advice to
governments in policy making and also
implement the policies made by the political
executive.
Challenges faced by civil services
Political Bias: Neutrality as a trait is fast
eroding among bureaucrats, resulting in
political bias in discharge of critical
functions.
o The cause and effect of this
phenomenon is the increasing
political interference in all aspects
of bureaucracy including postings
and transfers.
Lack of Expertise: Bureaucrats who are
generalists, may lack the expertise needed
to address technical challenges.
Corruption: There is also significant
corruption at all levels of the bureaucracy
that often goes unpunished.
Red-tapism: Excessive procedural
formalities often delay decision-making and
hinder timely service delivery.
Mental health issues: High-pressure
environments, and long working hours
impact the mental well-being of civil
servants.
Resistance to innovation: A rigid
administrative culture discourages
experimentation and adoption of new
practices.
Outdated rules and procedures: Many
service regulations are colonial-era legacies
that are not compatible with modern
governance needs.
Constitutional Provisions
– Article 309 empowers Parliament and State
Legislatures to regulate recruitment and conditions
of service.
– Article 310 of the Constitution states that civil
servants of the Union and the States hold office
during the pleasure of the President or the
Governor, respectively.
– Article 311 provides safeguards for civil servants
against arbitrary dismissal.
– Article 312 outlines the process for creating All
India Services, such as the Indian Administrative
48
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
the first batch of civil servants at the
Metcalfe House, New Delhi.
o He termed civil servants as
the “Steel frame of
India,” emphasizing their role in
maintaining unity and integrity.
History of Civil Services in India
– Lord Cornwallis is considered as ‘Father of Civil
Services in India’.
– Lord Wellesley founded the College of Fort
William in Calcutta in 1800 to educate young
recruits for the Civil Services.
1. But the directors of the Company, in 1806,
replaced it with their own East Indian College at
Haileybury in England.
– Before 1853 East India Company directors used
to appoint Civil Servants. Board of Control
members were allowed to make some nominations.
– The Charter Act of 1853 abolished the patronage
system and introduced open competitive
examinations.
– The first competitive exams for the Indian Civil
Services (ICS) were held in London in 1855.
– Satyendranath Tagore was the first Indian to clear
ICS in 1864.
Role of Civil Services in Governance
Service delivery: They are responsible for
administering welfare schemes and
ensuring that public services reach the
intended beneficiaries, particularly at the
last mile.
Maintaining law and order: Civil servants
ensure peace, justice, and security by
upholding the rule of law and coordinating
with law enforcement agencies.
Elections: They have been instrumental in
the conduct of free and fair elections, and
ensuring smooth transfer of power both at
the Centre and States.
Uninterrupted Administration: There have
been numerous instances when States have
been placed under President’s rule, with the
civil servants ensuring uninterrupted
administration during such times.
Policy Making: They provide advice to
governments in policy making and also
implement the policies made by the political
executive.
Challenges faced by civil services
Political Bias: Neutrality as a trait is fast
eroding among bureaucrats, resulting in
political bias in discharge of critical
functions.
o The cause and effect of this
phenomenon is the increasing
political interference in all aspects
of bureaucracy including postings
and transfers.
Lack of Expertise: Bureaucrats who are
generalists, may lack the expertise needed
to address technical challenges.
Corruption: There is also significant
corruption at all levels of the bureaucracy
that often goes unpunished.
Red-tapism: Excessive procedural
formalities often delay decision-making and
hinder timely service delivery.
Mental health issues: High-pressure
environments, and long working hours
impact the mental well-being of civil
servants.
Resistance to innovation: A rigid
administrative culture discourages
experimentation and adoption of new
practices.
Outdated rules and procedures: Many
service regulations are colonial-era legacies
that are not compatible with modern
governance needs.
Constitutional Provisions
– Article 309 empowers Parliament and State
Legislatures to regulate recruitment and conditions
of service.
– Article 310 of the Constitution states that civil
servants of the Union and the States hold office
during the pleasure of the President or the
Governor, respectively.
– Article 311 provides safeguards for civil servants
against arbitrary dismissal.
– Article 312 outlines the process for creating All
India Services, such as the Indian Administrative
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
49
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Service (IAS), the Indian Police Service (IPS), and
the Indian Forest Service (IFS).
– Articles 315 to 323 of the Indian Constitution
establish Public Service Commissions (PSCs) for
both the Union (UPSC) and each state (SPSC).
Governance reforms to enhance efficiency of
bureaucracy
Mission Karmayogi National Program: It is a
flagship programme of Government of
India launched in 2020 for training of civil
servants, which intends to transform the
Civil Services from ‘Rule Based’ to ‘Role
Based’ way of functioning and Citizen
Centric.
Lateral Entry into Civil Services to bring
domain expertise and promote
competitiveness in administration.
e-Governance Initiatives: Centralised Public
Grievance Redress and Monitoring System
(CPGRAMS) for grievance redressal,
SPARROW for performance appraisal, and
digitization of service records.
Conclusion
Civil servants play a pivotal role in shaping
the trajectory of India’s growth and
governance, often known as the architects of
Viksit Bharat.
The neutral bureaucracy needs to be
insulated from undue political interference
to uphold the rule of law and constitutional
values.
To maintain a harmonious balance between
the political and permanent executive, the
autonomy of career bureaucrats is essential.
o This includes reasonable
independence with respect to
postings, tenures and transfers.
Also, there needs to be a shift in the focus of
bureaucrats from ‘procedure’ to ‘outcomes.’
Sutlej-Yamuna Link (SYL) Canal
Syllabus: GS2/Governance
Context
The Supreme Court recently
termed Punjab’s de-notification of land
acquired for the construction of the Sutlej-
Yamuna Link (SYL) canal an act of “high-
handedness”.
About
The court reminded Punjab of its 2017
order to maintain status quo on canal-
related land and property.
The SYL canal was conceptualised for the
effective allocation of water from the Ravi
and Beas rivers.
o The project envisaged a 214-km
canal, of which 122 km was to be
constructed in Punjab and 92 km in
Haryana.
Background of the Dispute:
1981 Agreement: Between Punjab, Haryana,
and Rajasthan for sharing Ravi-Beas waters;
SYL canal was a key part.
1996 Suit: Haryana filed a case seeking
completion of the canal.
2002 Verdict: Supreme Court ruled in favor
of Haryana; Punjab was directed to
complete its share.
2004 Action: Punjab passed the Termination
of Agreements Act, halting construction
unilaterally.
2016 Ruling: A Constitution Bench struck
down Punjab’s 2004 Act as
unconstitutional.
Recent Court Directions:
The apex court appointed Union Home
Secretary, Punjab Chief Secretary, and DGP
Punjab as Receivers to oversee land-related
issues.
It urged Punjab, Haryana, and the Centre to
work towards a mutually agreeable
solution.
If unresolved, the matter will be listed again
on August 13.
Dispute Resolution Mechanism for Inter-State Water
Sharing in India
49
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Service (IAS), the Indian Police Service (IPS), and
the Indian Forest Service (IFS).
– Articles 315 to 323 of the Indian Constitution
establish Public Service Commissions (PSCs) for
both the Union (UPSC) and each state (SPSC).
Governance reforms to enhance efficiency of
bureaucracy
Mission Karmayogi National Program: It is a
flagship programme of Government of
India launched in 2020 for training of civil
servants, which intends to transform the
Civil Services from ‘Rule Based’ to ‘Role
Based’ way of functioning and Citizen
Centric.
Lateral Entry into Civil Services to bring
domain expertise and promote
competitiveness in administration.
e-Governance Initiatives: Centralised Public
Grievance Redress and Monitoring System
(CPGRAMS) for grievance redressal,
SPARROW for performance appraisal, and
digitization of service records.
Conclusion
Civil servants play a pivotal role in shaping
the trajectory of India’s growth and
governance, often known as the architects of
Viksit Bharat.
The neutral bureaucracy needs to be
insulated from undue political interference
to uphold the rule of law and constitutional
values.
To maintain a harmonious balance between
the political and permanent executive, the
autonomy of career bureaucrats is essential.
o This includes reasonable
independence with respect to
postings, tenures and transfers.
Also, there needs to be a shift in the focus of
bureaucrats from ‘procedure’ to ‘outcomes.’
Sutlej-Yamuna Link (SYL) Canal
Syllabus: GS2/Governance
Context
The Supreme Court recently
termed Punjab’s de-notification of land
acquired for the construction of the Sutlej-
Yamuna Link (SYL) canal an act of “high-
handedness”.
About
The court reminded Punjab of its 2017
order to maintain status quo on canal-
related land and property.
The SYL canal was conceptualised for the
effective allocation of water from the Ravi
and Beas rivers.
o The project envisaged a 214-km
canal, of which 122 km was to be
constructed in Punjab and 92 km in
Haryana.
Background of the Dispute:
1981 Agreement: Between Punjab, Haryana,
and Rajasthan for sharing Ravi-Beas waters;
SYL canal was a key part.
1996 Suit: Haryana filed a case seeking
completion of the canal.
2002 Verdict: Supreme Court ruled in favor
of Haryana; Punjab was directed to
complete its share.
2004 Action: Punjab passed the Termination
of Agreements Act, halting construction
unilaterally.
2016 Ruling: A Constitution Bench struck
down Punjab’s 2004 Act as
unconstitutional.
Recent Court Directions:
The apex court appointed Union Home
Secretary, Punjab Chief Secretary, and DGP
Punjab as Receivers to oversee land-related
issues.
It urged Punjab, Haryana, and the Centre to
work towards a mutually agreeable
solution.
If unresolved, the matter will be listed again
on August 13.
Dispute Resolution Mechanism for Inter-State Water
Sharing in India
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
50
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Constitutional Provisions: Article 262 of the
Indian Constitution empowers Parliament to
legislate for adjudication of inter-state river
water disputes.
o Bars the jurisdiction of the Supreme
Court or any other court in such
matters if a law is made under this
provision.
Parliament enacted the below-mentioned
Acts according to Article 262 of the Indian
Constitution:
o River Board Act, 1956: The Act
empowered the Central Government
to establish boards for Interstate
Rivers and river valleys in
consultation with State
Governments. However, no board
has been created to date.
o Inter-State Water Dispute Act,
1956: If the State Government(s)
approach the Central Government
for the constitution of the Tribunal,
the Centre may form a Tribunal
after trying to resolve the dispute
through consultations.
o The Supreme Court shall not
question the Award or
formula given by the
Tribunal but it can question
the working of the Tribuna
The Inter-State River Water Disputes Act, 1956 was
amended in 2002, to include the major
recommendations of the Sarkaria Commission.
The Tribunal has to be constituted within a
year of getting the request.
The tribunal must give the award within the
maximum period of 5 years.
The Tribunal award is not immediately
implemented and the concerned
parties may seek clarification within 3
months of the award.
Tribunal Awards will have the same force as
the order or decree of the Supreme
Court. The award is final and beyond the
jurisdiction of the Supreme Court.
Issues with Inter-State River Disputes Tribunals
Prolonged Proceedings and Delays: Tribunal
decisions often take decades, defeating the
objective of timely resolution.
o The Cauvery Water Disputes
Tribunal took nearly 17 years
(1990–2007) to deliver its final
award.
o Even after a decision,
implementation lags due to lack of
enforcement mechanisms.
Judicial Review: Although the Inter-State
River Water Disputes Act declares tribunal
decisions as final, States or affected parties
approach the Supreme Court under Article
136 (Special Leave Petition) and Article 32,
by invoking Article 21 (Right to Life).
Tribunal Composition Lacks
Multidisciplinarity: Tribunals are typically
headed by retired or sitting judges.
o It leads to overreliance on judicial
reasoning instead of technical-
scientific evaluation.
Inadequate and Non-Transparent Water
Data: No centralized or publicly accessible
repository of authoritative water flow and
usage data.
o States often withhold or manipulate
data to suit their legal arguments.
Complex Federal Structure and Procedural
Hurdles: Overlapping roles of state and
central agencies lead to bureaucratic red
tape.
Recent and Proposed Reforms:
Inter-State River Water Disputes
(Amendment) Bill, 2019 (Pending in
Parliament):
o Proposes permanent tribunal with
time-bound adjudication.
50
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Constitutional Provisions: Article 262 of the
Indian Constitution empowers Parliament to
legislate for adjudication of inter-state river
water disputes.
o Bars the jurisdiction of the Supreme
Court or any other court in such
matters if a law is made under this
provision.
Parliament enacted the below-mentioned
Acts according to Article 262 of the Indian
Constitution:
o River Board Act, 1956: The Act
empowered the Central Government
to establish boards for Interstate
Rivers and river valleys in
consultation with State
Governments. However, no board
has been created to date.
o Inter-State Water Dispute Act,
1956: If the State Government(s)
approach the Central Government
for the constitution of the Tribunal,
the Centre may form a Tribunal
after trying to resolve the dispute
through consultations.
o The Supreme Court shall not
question the Award or
formula given by the
Tribunal but it can question
the working of the Tribuna
The Inter-State River Water Disputes Act, 1956 was
amended in 2002, to include the major
recommendations of the Sarkaria Commission.
The Tribunal has to be constituted within a
year of getting the request.
The tribunal must give the award within the
maximum period of 5 years.
The Tribunal award is not immediately
implemented and the concerned
parties may seek clarification within 3
months of the award.
Tribunal Awards will have the same force as
the order or decree of the Supreme
Court. The award is final and beyond the
jurisdiction of the Supreme Court.
Issues with Inter-State River Disputes Tribunals
Prolonged Proceedings and Delays: Tribunal
decisions often take decades, defeating the
objective of timely resolution.
o The Cauvery Water Disputes
Tribunal took nearly 17 years
(1990–2007) to deliver its final
award.
o Even after a decision,
implementation lags due to lack of
enforcement mechanisms.
Judicial Review: Although the Inter-State
River Water Disputes Act declares tribunal
decisions as final, States or affected parties
approach the Supreme Court under Article
136 (Special Leave Petition) and Article 32,
by invoking Article 21 (Right to Life).
Tribunal Composition Lacks
Multidisciplinarity: Tribunals are typically
headed by retired or sitting judges.
o It leads to overreliance on judicial
reasoning instead of technical-
scientific evaluation.
Inadequate and Non-Transparent Water
Data: No centralized or publicly accessible
repository of authoritative water flow and
usage data.
o States often withhold or manipulate
data to suit their legal arguments.
Complex Federal Structure and Procedural
Hurdles: Overlapping roles of state and
central agencies lead to bureaucratic red
tape.
Recent and Proposed Reforms:
Inter-State River Water Disputes
(Amendment) Bill, 2019 (Pending in
Parliament):
o Proposes permanent tribunal with
time-bound adjudication.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
51
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Creates a Dispute Resolution
Committee (DRC) for pre-tribunal
negotiation.
The tribunal must Include technical
experts (engineers, hydrologists, ecologists)
as permanent members.
An independent water data authority can be
established under the Central Water
Commission (CWC).
Alternative Dispute Resolution
(ADR): Negotiations and Mediation by
neutral parties or the Centre can resolve
disputes effectively.
SC Rules Rohingya Refugees Subject to Foreigners
Act
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
The Supreme Court observed that
if Rohingya refugees are found to
be ‘foreigners’ under the Foreigners
Act, they will be dealt with as per the law.
About
Petitioners’ Arguments:
The Rohingya are recognized as refugees by the
United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees
(UNHCR), and thus deserve protection under the
principle of non-refoulement (not returning
refugees to a place where they face serious threats).
Deportation to Myanmar, where they are stateless
and allegedly face torture and death, violates Article
21 (Right to Life) and Article 14 (Right to Equality).
Government’s and Court’s Position:
India is not a signatory to the 1951 Refugee
Convention, and the Foreigners Act gives the
government broad powers to regulate the entry and
exit of foreigners
Article 19(1)(e) (Right to reside/settle) applies only
to Indian citizens, not to foreigners, per the
Supreme Court’s interpretation.
The SC acknowledged basic constitutional
protections (like Articles 14 and 21) extend to all
persons in India, but not a right to stay or settle in
India.
The bench reiterated that the matter of whether the
refugees can stay is subject to legal procedure under
Indian law.
Who are the Rohingya refugees?
The Rohingya are a Muslim minority ethnic
group with their roots in the Arakan
kingdom in Myanmar.
The Rohingya are culturally and religiously
distinct from the majority Buddhist
population in Myanmar.
The Rohingya claim to have lived in
Myanmar’s Rakhine State for generations,
but successive governments in the country
have disputed their ties, labelling
them illegal immigrants from Bangladesh.
Myanmar has denied them citizenship since
1982, thus making them the world’s largest
stateless population.
Their largest exodus began in 2017 driving
more than 7.5 lakh people to seek refuge in
Bangladesh to escape the brutality of
security forces.
India’s Policy on Refugees
India has welcomed refugees in the past,
with nearly 300,000 people categorised as
refugees.
o This includes the Tibetans, Chakmas
from Bangladesh, and refugees from
Afghanistan, Sri Lanka, etc.
But India is not a signatory to the 1951 UN
Refugee Convention or the 1967 Protocol
relating to the Status of Refugee. Nor does
India have a refugee policy or a refugee law.
All foreign undocumented nationals are
governed as per the provisions of
The Foreigners Act, 1946, The Registration
of Foreigners Act, 1939, The Passport (Entry
into India) Act, 1920 and The Citizenship
Act, 1955.
51
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Creates a Dispute Resolution
Committee (DRC) for pre-tribunal
negotiation.
The tribunal must Include technical
experts (engineers, hydrologists, ecologists)
as permanent members.
An independent water data authority can be
established under the Central Water
Commission (CWC).
Alternative Dispute Resolution
(ADR): Negotiations and Mediation by
neutral parties or the Centre can resolve
disputes effectively.
SC Rules Rohingya Refugees Subject to Foreigners
Act
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
The Supreme Court observed that
if Rohingya refugees are found to
be ‘foreigners’ under the Foreigners
Act, they will be dealt with as per the law.
About
Petitioners’ Arguments:
The Rohingya are recognized as refugees by the
United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees
(UNHCR), and thus deserve protection under the
principle of non-refoulement (not returning
refugees to a place where they face serious threats).
Deportation to Myanmar, where they are stateless
and allegedly face torture and death, violates Article
21 (Right to Life) and Article 14 (Right to Equality).
Government’s and Court’s Position:
India is not a signatory to the 1951 Refugee
Convention, and the Foreigners Act gives the
government broad powers to regulate the entry and
exit of foreigners
Article 19(1)(e) (Right to reside/settle) applies only
to Indian citizens, not to foreigners, per the
Supreme Court’s interpretation.
The SC acknowledged basic constitutional
protections (like Articles 14 and 21) extend to all
persons in India, but not a right to stay or settle in
India.
The bench reiterated that the matter of whether the
refugees can stay is subject to legal procedure under
Indian law.
Who are the Rohingya refugees?
The Rohingya are a Muslim minority ethnic
group with their roots in the Arakan
kingdom in Myanmar.
The Rohingya are culturally and religiously
distinct from the majority Buddhist
population in Myanmar.
The Rohingya claim to have lived in
Myanmar’s Rakhine State for generations,
but successive governments in the country
have disputed their ties, labelling
them illegal immigrants from Bangladesh.
Myanmar has denied them citizenship since
1982, thus making them the world’s largest
stateless population.
Their largest exodus began in 2017 driving
more than 7.5 lakh people to seek refuge in
Bangladesh to escape the brutality of
security forces.
India’s Policy on Refugees
India has welcomed refugees in the past,
with nearly 300,000 people categorised as
refugees.
o This includes the Tibetans, Chakmas
from Bangladesh, and refugees from
Afghanistan, Sri Lanka, etc.
But India is not a signatory to the 1951 UN
Refugee Convention or the 1967 Protocol
relating to the Status of Refugee. Nor does
India have a refugee policy or a refugee law.
All foreign undocumented nationals are
governed as per the provisions of
The Foreigners Act, 1946, The Registration
of Foreigners Act, 1939, The Passport (Entry
into India) Act, 1920 and The Citizenship
Act, 1955.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
52
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
As per the MHA foreign nationals who enter
into the country without valid travel
documents are treated as illegal immigrants.
Reasons for India’s Policy on Refugees
Resource Strain: Hosting refugees puts
pressure on resources, especially in areas
where infrastructure is already stretched
thin.
Social Cohesion: Large numbers of refugees
can strain social cohesion, potentially
leading to tensions with host communities.
Security Concerns: Refugee influxes can
raise security concerns, including the
potential infiltration of extremist elements
and difficulties in monitoring movements
across porous borders.
Diplomatic Relations: Hosting refugees
strain diplomatic relations with neighboring
countries or countries of origin.
Economic Impact: Refugees compete for low-skilled
jobs, affecting the local job market, while their
potential contributions to the economy through
entrepreneurship or labor may not be fully realized.
Way Ahead
India’s approach to refugees is shaped by
a tradition of humanitarianism, regional
geopolitics, and national security concerns.
Though India is not a signatory to the 1951
UN Refugee Convention or its 1967
Protocol, it has historically provided refuge
to various displaced communities.
As global displacement continues to rise,
there is an increasing need for India to
establish a clear and consistent national
refugee policy that balances humanitarian
obligations with security and demographic
concerns.
CJI Forwards ‘In-House’ Panel Probe Report To
President
Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance
Context
Chief Justice of India (CJI) Sanjiv Khanna
has forwarded to the President and the
Prime Minister the report of an in-house
committee that investigated allegations
against the Delhi High Court judge.
In-House Procedure for Investigation
To address judicial misconduct outside the
formal impeachment process, the Supreme
Court in 1999 adopted an “in-house
procedure” for conducting investigations;
o Filing Complaints: Complaints can be
made to the CJI, High Court Chief
Justice, or the President.
o Preliminary Inquiry: The Chief
Justice of the High Court seeks a
response from the accused judge
and forwards the findings to the CJI.
o Fact-Finding Committee: If serious
allegations arise, the CJI appoints a
committee comprising two Chief
Justices of other High Courts and
one High Court judge to investigate.
o Recommendations and Action: If the
committee finds sufficient grounds
for removal, the CJI may advise the
judge to resign. If the judge refuses,
the report is forwarded to the
President and the Prime Minister for
further action, paving the way for
impeachment.
Judicial Precedents
K Veeraswami v. Union of India (1991): No
criminal case can be registered against a
judge of a high court or the Supreme Court
without the prior permission of the Chief
Justice of India.
The Additional District and Sessions Judge
versus Registrar General, High Court Of
Madhya Pradesh judgment, 2014: If a judge
refuses to resign despite adverse findings
by an in-house panel, the report must be
forwarded to constitutional authorities for
further action.
Mechanism for Removal of Judges
The Constitution of India provides for the
removal of judges of the Supreme Court and
High Courts under Article 124(4) and Article
52
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
As per the MHA foreign nationals who enter
into the country without valid travel
documents are treated as illegal immigrants.
Reasons for India’s Policy on Refugees
Resource Strain: Hosting refugees puts
pressure on resources, especially in areas
where infrastructure is already stretched
thin.
Social Cohesion: Large numbers of refugees
can strain social cohesion, potentially
leading to tensions with host communities.
Security Concerns: Refugee influxes can
raise security concerns, including the
potential infiltration of extremist elements
and difficulties in monitoring movements
across porous borders.
Diplomatic Relations: Hosting refugees
strain diplomatic relations with neighboring
countries or countries of origin.
Economic Impact: Refugees compete for low-skilled
jobs, affecting the local job market, while their
potential contributions to the economy through
entrepreneurship or labor may not be fully realized.
Way Ahead
India’s approach to refugees is shaped by
a tradition of humanitarianism, regional
geopolitics, and national security concerns.
Though India is not a signatory to the 1951
UN Refugee Convention or its 1967
Protocol, it has historically provided refuge
to various displaced communities.
As global displacement continues to rise,
there is an increasing need for India to
establish a clear and consistent national
refugee policy that balances humanitarian
obligations with security and demographic
concerns.
CJI Forwards ‘In-House’ Panel Probe Report To
President
Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance
Context
Chief Justice of India (CJI) Sanjiv Khanna
has forwarded to the President and the
Prime Minister the report of an in-house
committee that investigated allegations
against the Delhi High Court judge.
In-House Procedure for Investigation
To address judicial misconduct outside the
formal impeachment process, the Supreme
Court in 1999 adopted an “in-house
procedure” for conducting investigations;
o Filing Complaints: Complaints can be
made to the CJI, High Court Chief
Justice, or the President.
o Preliminary Inquiry: The Chief
Justice of the High Court seeks a
response from the accused judge
and forwards the findings to the CJI.
o Fact-Finding Committee: If serious
allegations arise, the CJI appoints a
committee comprising two Chief
Justices of other High Courts and
one High Court judge to investigate.
o Recommendations and Action: If the
committee finds sufficient grounds
for removal, the CJI may advise the
judge to resign. If the judge refuses,
the report is forwarded to the
President and the Prime Minister for
further action, paving the way for
impeachment.
Judicial Precedents
K Veeraswami v. Union of India (1991): No
criminal case can be registered against a
judge of a high court or the Supreme Court
without the prior permission of the Chief
Justice of India.
The Additional District and Sessions Judge
versus Registrar General, High Court Of
Madhya Pradesh judgment, 2014: If a judge
refuses to resign despite adverse findings
by an in-house panel, the report must be
forwarded to constitutional authorities for
further action.
Mechanism for Removal of Judges
The Constitution of India provides for the
removal of judges of the Supreme Court and
High Courts under Article 124(4) and Article
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
53
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
217 on grounds of “proved misbehavior or
incapacity.”
The process involves;
o Initiation of Impeachment: A motion
for removal must be introduced in
either House of Parliament,
supported by a special
majority (⅓rd of the total
membership and ⅓rd of members
present and voting).
o Presidential Approval: After the
motion is passed, the President of
India issues an order for the
removal of the judge.
Concluding remarks
The existing in-house procedure and
constitutional safeguards are designed to
ensure that such matters are examined
fairly, without undermining judicial
independence.
As the process moves forward, it reflects the
strength of India’s legal framework in
addressing concerns while maintaining
institutional dignity.
10 Years of Three Jan Suraksha Schemes
Syllabus: GS2/ Governance
Context
India is celebrating the 10th anniversary of
the three social security (Jan Suraksha)
schemes — Pradhan Mantri Jeevan Jyoti
Bima Yojana (PMJJBY), Pradhan Mantri
Suraksha Bima Yojana (PMSBY) and Atal
Pension Yojana (APY).
o PMJJBY, PMSBY and APY were
launched by PM Modi on 9th May,
2015.
Pradhan Mantri Jeevan Jyoti Bima Yojana (PMJJBY)
Scheme: PMJJBY is a one-year life insurance
scheme renewable from year to year
offering coverage for death due to any
reason.
Eligibility: Persons in the age group of 18-
50 years having an individual bank or a post
office account are entitled to enroll under
the scheme.
o People who join the scheme before
completing 50 years of age can
continue to have the risk of life
covered up to age of 55 years upon
payment of regular premium.
Benefits: Life cover of Rs. 2 Lakh in case of
death due to any reason against a premium
of Rs. 436/- per annum.
Pradhan Mantri Suraksha Bima Yojana (PMSBY)
Scheme: PMSBY is a one-year accidental
insurance scheme renewable from year to
year offering coverage for death or
disability due to accident.
Eligibility: Persons in the age group of 18-70
years having an individual bank or a post
office account are entitled to enroll under
the scheme.
Benefits: Accidental death cum disability
cover of Rs.2 lakh (Rs.1 lakh in case of
partial disability) for death or disability due
to an accident against a premium of Rs.20/-
per annum.
Atal Pension Yojana (APY)
Background: It is an initiative of the
Government to provide financial security
and cover future exigencies for the people
in the unorganised sector.
o APY is administered by Pension
Fund Regulatory and Development
Authority (PFRDA) under the overall
administrative and institutional
architecture of the National Pension
System (NPS).
Eligibility: Open to all bank account holders
aged 18 to 40 years.
o Applicants must not be income tax
payers.
o Contribution amount varies based
on the chosen pension slab and age
of joining.
Benefits: Subscribers would receive the
guaranteed minimum monthly pension
53
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
217 on grounds of “proved misbehavior or
incapacity.”
The process involves;
o Initiation of Impeachment: A motion
for removal must be introduced in
either House of Parliament,
supported by a special
majority (⅓rd of the total
membership and ⅓rd of members
present and voting).
o Presidential Approval: After the
motion is passed, the President of
India issues an order for the
removal of the judge.
Concluding remarks
The existing in-house procedure and
constitutional safeguards are designed to
ensure that such matters are examined
fairly, without undermining judicial
independence.
As the process moves forward, it reflects the
strength of India’s legal framework in
addressing concerns while maintaining
institutional dignity.
10 Years of Three Jan Suraksha Schemes
Syllabus: GS2/ Governance
Context
India is celebrating the 10th anniversary of
the three social security (Jan Suraksha)
schemes — Pradhan Mantri Jeevan Jyoti
Bima Yojana (PMJJBY), Pradhan Mantri
Suraksha Bima Yojana (PMSBY) and Atal
Pension Yojana (APY).
o PMJJBY, PMSBY and APY were
launched by PM Modi on 9th May,
2015.
Pradhan Mantri Jeevan Jyoti Bima Yojana (PMJJBY)
Scheme: PMJJBY is a one-year life insurance
scheme renewable from year to year
offering coverage for death due to any
reason.
Eligibility: Persons in the age group of 18-
50 years having an individual bank or a post
office account are entitled to enroll under
the scheme.
o People who join the scheme before
completing 50 years of age can
continue to have the risk of life
covered up to age of 55 years upon
payment of regular premium.
Benefits: Life cover of Rs. 2 Lakh in case of
death due to any reason against a premium
of Rs. 436/- per annum.
Pradhan Mantri Suraksha Bima Yojana (PMSBY)
Scheme: PMSBY is a one-year accidental
insurance scheme renewable from year to
year offering coverage for death or
disability due to accident.
Eligibility: Persons in the age group of 18-70
years having an individual bank or a post
office account are entitled to enroll under
the scheme.
Benefits: Accidental death cum disability
cover of Rs.2 lakh (Rs.1 lakh in case of
partial disability) for death or disability due
to an accident against a premium of Rs.20/-
per annum.
Atal Pension Yojana (APY)
Background: It is an initiative of the
Government to provide financial security
and cover future exigencies for the people
in the unorganised sector.
o APY is administered by Pension
Fund Regulatory and Development
Authority (PFRDA) under the overall
administrative and institutional
architecture of the National Pension
System (NPS).
Eligibility: Open to all bank account holders
aged 18 to 40 years.
o Applicants must not be income tax
payers.
o Contribution amount varies based
on the chosen pension slab and age
of joining.
Benefits: Subscribers would receive the
guaranteed minimum monthly pension
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
54
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
of Rs. 1000 or Rs. 2000 or Rs. 3000 or Rs.
4000 or Rs. 5000 after the age of 60
years, based on the contributions.
Disbursement of the Scheme
Benefits: Pension is first paid to the
subscriber.
o After the subscriber’s death, the
spouse receives the pension.
o Upon the demise of both subscriber
and spouse, the accumulated
pension corpus is given to the
nominee.
o In Case of Premature Death (Before
Age 60): The spouse can continue
the contributions until the
subscriber would have turned 60,
maintaining pension eligibility.
Significance of the schemes
Low-Cost Coverage: The schemes offer
insurance and pension at extremely
affordable premiums, ideal for economically
vulnerable groups.
Financial Inclusion: Enhanced the utility of
Jan Dhan accounts by linking them with
protective insurance.
Women Empowerment: A significant
proportion of subscribers under APY are
women.
Insurance Penetration: Broadened access to
formal insurance and pension systems in
rural and semi-urban India.
Conclusion
The Jan Suraksha schemes represent a
transformative step in building an inclusive
social security net for India’s vast
unorganised sector.
As the nation celebrates a decade of these
initiatives, there is a need to consolidate
gains, plug operational gaps, and deepen
coverage, ensuring that every citizen has a
basic shield against life’s uncertainties.
Disqualification of MPs
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
Karnataka MLA has been disqualified from
the State Legislative Assembly following his
conviction by the Principal Special Judge for
CBI cases in Hyderabad.
Disqualification of MPs & MLAs
The disqualification of a Member of the
Legislative Assembly (MLA) in India is
primarily governed by Article 191 of the
Constitution, the Representation of the
People Act, 1951, and the Tenth Schedule
(anti-defection law).
The disqualification of a Member of
Parliament (MP) in India is governed
primarily by Article 102 of the Constitution,
Representation of the People Act, 1951,
along with the Tenth Schedule (anti-
defection law).
Disqualification Under Article 102
o Holds any office of profit under the
Government of India or State, unless
Parliament exempts the office by
law.
o Declared by a competent court to be
of unsound mind.
o Legally declared insolvent and not
yet discharged.
o Not a citizen of India, or has
voluntarily acquired citizenship of a
foreign State, or shows allegiance to
a foreign State.
Disqualification by Law: The Representation
of the People Act, 1951 provides that a
person will be disqualified if convicted and
sentenced to imprisonment for two years or
more.
o Such a person is disqualified for
the period of imprisonment and a
further six years.
Defection under the Tenth Schedule:
o If the MP voluntarily gives up
membership of their party.
54
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
of Rs. 1000 or Rs. 2000 or Rs. 3000 or Rs.
4000 or Rs. 5000 after the age of 60
years, based on the contributions.
Disbursement of the Scheme
Benefits: Pension is first paid to the
subscriber.
o After the subscriber’s death, the
spouse receives the pension.
o Upon the demise of both subscriber
and spouse, the accumulated
pension corpus is given to the
nominee.
o In Case of Premature Death (Before
Age 60): The spouse can continue
the contributions until the
subscriber would have turned 60,
maintaining pension eligibility.
Significance of the schemes
Low-Cost Coverage: The schemes offer
insurance and pension at extremely
affordable premiums, ideal for economically
vulnerable groups.
Financial Inclusion: Enhanced the utility of
Jan Dhan accounts by linking them with
protective insurance.
Women Empowerment: A significant
proportion of subscribers under APY are
women.
Insurance Penetration: Broadened access to
formal insurance and pension systems in
rural and semi-urban India.
Conclusion
The Jan Suraksha schemes represent a
transformative step in building an inclusive
social security net for India’s vast
unorganised sector.
As the nation celebrates a decade of these
initiatives, there is a need to consolidate
gains, plug operational gaps, and deepen
coverage, ensuring that every citizen has a
basic shield against life’s uncertainties.
Disqualification of MPs
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
Karnataka MLA has been disqualified from
the State Legislative Assembly following his
conviction by the Principal Special Judge for
CBI cases in Hyderabad.
Disqualification of MPs & MLAs
The disqualification of a Member of the
Legislative Assembly (MLA) in India is
primarily governed by Article 191 of the
Constitution, the Representation of the
People Act, 1951, and the Tenth Schedule
(anti-defection law).
The disqualification of a Member of
Parliament (MP) in India is governed
primarily by Article 102 of the Constitution,
Representation of the People Act, 1951,
along with the Tenth Schedule (anti-
defection law).
Disqualification Under Article 102
o Holds any office of profit under the
Government of India or State, unless
Parliament exempts the office by
law.
o Declared by a competent court to be
of unsound mind.
o Legally declared insolvent and not
yet discharged.
o Not a citizen of India, or has
voluntarily acquired citizenship of a
foreign State, or shows allegiance to
a foreign State.
Disqualification by Law: The Representation
of the People Act, 1951 provides that a
person will be disqualified if convicted and
sentenced to imprisonment for two years or
more.
o Such a person is disqualified for
the period of imprisonment and a
further six years.
Defection under the Tenth Schedule:
o If the MP voluntarily gives up
membership of their party.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
55
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o If the MP votes/abstains contrary to
party directions without
permission.
o If any independently elected
member joins any political party;
and
o If any nominated member joins any
political party after the expiry of six
months.
Authority to Decide Disqualification
MPs: President of India decides
disqualification under Article 103, after
consulting the Election Commission.
o For defection (Tenth Schedule), the
Speaker (Lok Sabha) or Chairman
(Rajya Sabha) decides.
MLAs: The Governor decides
disqualification under Article 192, after
obtaining the opinion of the Election
Commission of India.
o For defection cases under the Tenth
Schedule, the Speaker of the
Legislative Assembly makes the
decision.
Challenges
Delayed Decisions by Presiding
Officers: Disqualification cases under the
Tenth Schedule (anti-defection) are decided
by the Speaker (MLA) or Chairman (MP).
o There are no time limits specified in
the Constitution, leading to
indefinite delays.
Political Bias and Conflict of Interest: The
presiding officer (Speaker/Chairman)
usually belongs to a political party, leading
to allegations of partiality.
Judicial Delays: Though courts can review
decisions under Articles 103 (MPs) and 192
(MLAs), the process is often slow.
o Interim reliefs and long-pending
appeals delay finality, allowing
disqualified members to continue
holding office.
Representation of the People Act
Limitations: Certain criminal cases lead to
automatic disqualification only after
conviction.
o As trials are often delayed, accused
persons can continue to contest and
hold office for years.
Ambiguity in Office of Profit Cases: Lack of a
clear definition of what constitutes an
“office of profit” has led to legal ambiguity.
Public Perception and Accountability: Even
when legally disqualified, politicians can
contest elections again after short bans.
o This undermines public trust in the
system and dilutes accountability.
Related Verdicts of Supreme Court
Union of India vs Association for Democratic
Reforms (2002): Voters’ right to know
criminal records of candidates was
established. However, the apex court did
not extend this to lifetime bans.
The CEC vs Jan Chaukidar case (2013): It
upheld that persons who are under trial
prisoners cease to be ‘electors’ and hence
not qualified to contest elections.
o However, the Parliament amended
the act in 2013 to overturn this
judgment allowing under trial
prisoners to contest elections.
Lily Thomas (2013)Case: The court struck
down section 8(4) of the RP Act, 1951, that
allowed a sitting legislator to continue as a
member even after being convicted if they
filed an appeal, as unconstitutional and
against political justice.
o After this judgment, a sitting
legislator is disqualified
immediately after the sentencing for
a conviction.
Public Interest Foundation vs Union of India
(2018): Candidates facing serious criminal
charges must publicly disclose their
criminal records in election affidavits. The
apex court left the lifetime ban decision to
Parliament.
55
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o If the MP votes/abstains contrary to
party directions without
permission.
o If any independently elected
member joins any political party;
and
o If any nominated member joins any
political party after the expiry of six
months.
Authority to Decide Disqualification
MPs: President of India decides
disqualification under Article 103, after
consulting the Election Commission.
o For defection (Tenth Schedule), the
Speaker (Lok Sabha) or Chairman
(Rajya Sabha) decides.
MLAs: The Governor decides
disqualification under Article 192, after
obtaining the opinion of the Election
Commission of India.
o For defection cases under the Tenth
Schedule, the Speaker of the
Legislative Assembly makes the
decision.
Challenges
Delayed Decisions by Presiding
Officers: Disqualification cases under the
Tenth Schedule (anti-defection) are decided
by the Speaker (MLA) or Chairman (MP).
o There are no time limits specified in
the Constitution, leading to
indefinite delays.
Political Bias and Conflict of Interest: The
presiding officer (Speaker/Chairman)
usually belongs to a political party, leading
to allegations of partiality.
Judicial Delays: Though courts can review
decisions under Articles 103 (MPs) and 192
(MLAs), the process is often slow.
o Interim reliefs and long-pending
appeals delay finality, allowing
disqualified members to continue
holding office.
Representation of the People Act
Limitations: Certain criminal cases lead to
automatic disqualification only after
conviction.
o As trials are often delayed, accused
persons can continue to contest and
hold office for years.
Ambiguity in Office of Profit Cases: Lack of a
clear definition of what constitutes an
“office of profit” has led to legal ambiguity.
Public Perception and Accountability: Even
when legally disqualified, politicians can
contest elections again after short bans.
o This undermines public trust in the
system and dilutes accountability.
Related Verdicts of Supreme Court
Union of India vs Association for Democratic
Reforms (2002): Voters’ right to know
criminal records of candidates was
established. However, the apex court did
not extend this to lifetime bans.
The CEC vs Jan Chaukidar case (2013): It
upheld that persons who are under trial
prisoners cease to be ‘electors’ and hence
not qualified to contest elections.
o However, the Parliament amended
the act in 2013 to overturn this
judgment allowing under trial
prisoners to contest elections.
Lily Thomas (2013)Case: The court struck
down section 8(4) of the RP Act, 1951, that
allowed a sitting legislator to continue as a
member even after being convicted if they
filed an appeal, as unconstitutional and
against political justice.
o After this judgment, a sitting
legislator is disqualified
immediately after the sentencing for
a conviction.
Public Interest Foundation vs Union of India
(2018): Candidates facing serious criminal
charges must publicly disclose their
criminal records in election affidavits. The
apex court left the lifetime ban decision to
Parliament.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
56
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Reforms
Strengthening the Anti-Defection Law: The Tenth
Schedule, introduced in 1985, disqualifies MPs who
voluntarily give up party membership or vote
against party directives.
The 52nd Constitutional Amendment (1985) aimed
to curb political instability by preventing frequent
party-switching
The 91st Constitutional Amendment
(2003) removed the provision allowing one-third of
legislators to split from a party, making defections
more difficult.
Addressing Loopholes in Disqualification
Process: The Speaker or Chairman of the House
decides on disqualification, but concerns over bias
and delays have led to calls for judicial oversight.
Expert committees have recommended that
disqualification decisions be made by the President
(for MPs) or Governor (for MLAs) on the advice of
the Election Commission of India, ensuring greater
impartiality.
Private Member’s Bills for Reform: Some MPs have
proposed Private Member’s Bills to introduce
stricter timelines for disqualification decisions and
reduce political interference.
There is growing demand for automatic
disqualification in cases of party defection, rather
than relying on Speaker discretion.
Conclusion
The disqualification of Members of Parliament in
India is governed by a robust legal and
constitutional framework aimed at upholding the
integrity of the legislature.
Landmark judicial interventions have strengthened
this framework by promoting immediate
accountability.
However, persistent challenges like political bias in
disqualification decisions and the criminalization of
politics underline the need for further reforms.
Strengthening these provisions is essential to
maintain public trust in democratic institutions and
ensure a clean and accountable political system.
Total Fertility Rate Remains Constant at 2.0 in 2021
Syllabus: GS2/Governance
Context
The Sample Registration System (SRS)
Statistical Report 2021, released by the
Registrar General of India (RGI), highlights
that India’s Total Fertility Rate (TFR) has
remained constant at 2.0 in 2021, the same
as in 2020.
o The survey was conducted in 8,842
sample units across all States,
covering about 84 lakh sample
population.
Sample Registration System (SRS)
The Sample Registration System (SRS) is a
large-scale demographic survey in India
used to collect data on births and deaths,
providing annual estimates of vital rates
like birth rate, death rate, and infant
mortality rate.
Key features of SRS:
o Dual Record System: The system
uses two sources of information:
continuous enumeration by part-
time enumerators and six-monthly
retrospective surveys by
supervisors.
o Sample-Based: SRS operates on a
sample of villages and urban blocks,
making it cost-effective and
efficient.
Total Fertility Rate (TFR)
– The average number of children born to a woman
during her childbearing years.
– A TFR of 2.1 is considered the replacement level
needed to maintain a stable population.
Key findings of the report
56
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Reforms
Strengthening the Anti-Defection Law: The Tenth
Schedule, introduced in 1985, disqualifies MPs who
voluntarily give up party membership or vote
against party directives.
The 52nd Constitutional Amendment (1985) aimed
to curb political instability by preventing frequent
party-switching
The 91st Constitutional Amendment
(2003) removed the provision allowing one-third of
legislators to split from a party, making defections
more difficult.
Addressing Loopholes in Disqualification
Process: The Speaker or Chairman of the House
decides on disqualification, but concerns over bias
and delays have led to calls for judicial oversight.
Expert committees have recommended that
disqualification decisions be made by the President
(for MPs) or Governor (for MLAs) on the advice of
the Election Commission of India, ensuring greater
impartiality.
Private Member’s Bills for Reform: Some MPs have
proposed Private Member’s Bills to introduce
stricter timelines for disqualification decisions and
reduce political interference.
There is growing demand for automatic
disqualification in cases of party defection, rather
than relying on Speaker discretion.
Conclusion
The disqualification of Members of Parliament in
India is governed by a robust legal and
constitutional framework aimed at upholding the
integrity of the legislature.
Landmark judicial interventions have strengthened
this framework by promoting immediate
accountability.
However, persistent challenges like political bias in
disqualification decisions and the criminalization of
politics underline the need for further reforms.
Strengthening these provisions is essential to
maintain public trust in democratic institutions and
ensure a clean and accountable political system.
Total Fertility Rate Remains Constant at 2.0 in 2021
Syllabus: GS2/Governance
Context
The Sample Registration System (SRS)
Statistical Report 2021, released by the
Registrar General of India (RGI), highlights
that India’s Total Fertility Rate (TFR) has
remained constant at 2.0 in 2021, the same
as in 2020.
o The survey was conducted in 8,842
sample units across all States,
covering about 84 lakh sample
population.
Sample Registration System (SRS)
The Sample Registration System (SRS) is a
large-scale demographic survey in India
used to collect data on births and deaths,
providing annual estimates of vital rates
like birth rate, death rate, and infant
mortality rate.
Key features of SRS:
o Dual Record System: The system
uses two sources of information:
continuous enumeration by part-
time enumerators and six-monthly
retrospective surveys by
supervisors.
o Sample-Based: SRS operates on a
sample of villages and urban blocks,
making it cost-effective and
efficient.
Total Fertility Rate (TFR)
– The average number of children born to a woman
during her childbearing years.
– A TFR of 2.1 is considered the replacement level
needed to maintain a stable population.
Key findings of the report
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
57
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Bihar has reported the highest TFR at 3.0,
while Delhi and West Bengal reported the lowest
TFR of 1.4.
Demographic Shifts (1971–2021):
0–14 age group: Declined from 41.2% to 24.8%,
indicating a falling young population.
15–59 age group (working age): Increased from
53.4% to 66.2%, representing a demographic
dividend window.
The elderly population has gone up from 5.3% to
5.9% for the 65+ age group and 6% to 9% for
the 60+ age group during the same
period. Kerala reported the highest elderly
population at 14.4%.
The mean age at effective marriage for females has
increased from 19.3 years in 1990 to 22.5
years in 2021.
Significance of the Findings
Population Stabilization: A TFR of 2.0
indicates India is approaching population
stabilization, which can ease pressure on
natural resources, public services, and the
environment.
Demographic Dividend: A larger working-
age population provides an opportunity for
increased productivity, and economic
growth.
Improved Maternal health: Fewer
childbirths per woman, coupled with
delayed age of marriage, lead to reduced
maternal mortality, better child care, and
healthier families.
Women Empowerment: Lower fertility rates
reflect higher education levels, workforce
participation, and greater autonomy among
women, leading to better social and
economic outcomes.
Negative Impacts of Declining TFR
Ageing Population: A rise in the elderly
population will increase the dependency on
the working population, demanding
increased focus on pension, healthcare, and
social welfare systems.
Potential for Skewed Sex Ratios: In certain
areas, fertility reduction without tackling
gender bias can exacerbate sex-selective
practices, leading to imbalanced sex ratios.
Demographic Imbalance: States with vast
fertility differences, potentially leading to
interstate migration, cultural shifts, and
resource strain in low-TFR states.
Concluding Remarks
The stabilization of India’s Total Fertility
Rate reflects a significant demographic shift,
signaling that the country is moving closer
to achieving replacement-level fertility.
However, the associated challenges must
not be overlooked.
A balanced approach that promotes
equitable development, strengthens social
security, and anticipates future
demographic needs is essential to ensure
that this transition supports a resilient and
prosperous India.
B.R. Gavai Sworn in as Chief Justice of India
Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance
Context
Justice Bhushan Ramkrishna Gavai was
sworn in by President Droupadi Murmu as
the 52nd Chief Justice of India.
Constitutional Provisions
The Constitution of India does not mention
any procedure for appointing the CJI.
o Article 124 (1) of the Constitution
merely says, “There shall be a
57
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Bihar has reported the highest TFR at 3.0,
while Delhi and West Bengal reported the lowest
TFR of 1.4.
Demographic Shifts (1971–2021):
0–14 age group: Declined from 41.2% to 24.8%,
indicating a falling young population.
15–59 age group (working age): Increased from
53.4% to 66.2%, representing a demographic
dividend window.
The elderly population has gone up from 5.3% to
5.9% for the 65+ age group and 6% to 9% for
the 60+ age group during the same
period. Kerala reported the highest elderly
population at 14.4%.
The mean age at effective marriage for females has
increased from 19.3 years in 1990 to 22.5
years in 2021.
Significance of the Findings
Population Stabilization: A TFR of 2.0
indicates India is approaching population
stabilization, which can ease pressure on
natural resources, public services, and the
environment.
Demographic Dividend: A larger working-
age population provides an opportunity for
increased productivity, and economic
growth.
Improved Maternal health: Fewer
childbirths per woman, coupled with
delayed age of marriage, lead to reduced
maternal mortality, better child care, and
healthier families.
Women Empowerment: Lower fertility rates
reflect higher education levels, workforce
participation, and greater autonomy among
women, leading to better social and
economic outcomes.
Negative Impacts of Declining TFR
Ageing Population: A rise in the elderly
population will increase the dependency on
the working population, demanding
increased focus on pension, healthcare, and
social welfare systems.
Potential for Skewed Sex Ratios: In certain
areas, fertility reduction without tackling
gender bias can exacerbate sex-selective
practices, leading to imbalanced sex ratios.
Demographic Imbalance: States with vast
fertility differences, potentially leading to
interstate migration, cultural shifts, and
resource strain in low-TFR states.
Concluding Remarks
The stabilization of India’s Total Fertility
Rate reflects a significant demographic shift,
signaling that the country is moving closer
to achieving replacement-level fertility.
However, the associated challenges must
not be overlooked.
A balanced approach that promotes
equitable development, strengthens social
security, and anticipates future
demographic needs is essential to ensure
that this transition supports a resilient and
prosperous India.
B.R. Gavai Sworn in as Chief Justice of India
Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance
Context
Justice Bhushan Ramkrishna Gavai was
sworn in by President Droupadi Murmu as
the 52nd Chief Justice of India.
Constitutional Provisions
The Constitution of India does not mention
any procedure for appointing the CJI.
o Article 124 (1) of the Constitution
merely says, “There shall be a
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
58
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Supreme Court of India consisting of
a Chief Justice of India.”
Clause (2) of Article 124 of the Constitution
says that every Judge of the Supreme Court
shall be appointed by the President.
o Thus, in the absence of a
constitutional provision, the
procedure to appoint CJI relies on
convention.
What is the Convention?
The outgoing CJI recommends his
successor a practice, which is strictly based
on seniority.
Seniority, however, is not defined by age,
but by the number of years a judge has been
serving in the top court of the country.
Eligibility
Apart from being an Indian citizen, the
person must;
o Have been for at least five years a
Judge of a High Court or of two or
more such Courts in succession or,
o Have been for at least ten years an
advocate of a High Court or of two or
more such Courts in succession, or
o Be, in the opinion of the President,
a distinguished jurist.
Tenure and Retirement
The Constitution does not fix a tenure for
the Chief Justice.
The retirement age for Supreme Court
judges, including the CJI, is 65 years.
Removal of CJI
The constitution provides that a judge can
be removed only by an order of the
president, based on a motion passed by both
houses of parliament.
The procedure for removal of judges is
elaborated in the Judges Inquiry Act,
1968. The Act sets out the following steps
for removal from office:
Presidential Reference to SC on Timeline to Act on
State Bills
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
President Droupadi Murmu sought the
Supreme Court’s advisory opinion under
Article 143 on whether the President and
governors need to follow timelines to decide
on state bills.
Background
Recently, the Supreme Court verdict laid
down a timeline for the President and
governors to decide on state bills.
Though, the Governor is not bound by any
time limit to act on a Bill.
o This creates a situation where the
Governor can simply not act on a
Bill indefinitely this is referred to as
a “Pocket Veto”, although the term is
not officially used in the
Constitution.
The Supreme Court ruled that Governors
cannot delay or withhold assent to Bills
indefinitely once they are passed or re-
passed by the state Assembly.
The ruling set a timeline for the Governor to
act on Bills:
o One month for re-passed Bills.
o Three months if the Bill is withheld
contrary to Cabinet advice.
58
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Supreme Court of India consisting of
a Chief Justice of India.”
Clause (2) of Article 124 of the Constitution
says that every Judge of the Supreme Court
shall be appointed by the President.
o Thus, in the absence of a
constitutional provision, the
procedure to appoint CJI relies on
convention.
What is the Convention?
The outgoing CJI recommends his
successor a practice, which is strictly based
on seniority.
Seniority, however, is not defined by age,
but by the number of years a judge has been
serving in the top court of the country.
Eligibility
Apart from being an Indian citizen, the
person must;
o Have been for at least five years a
Judge of a High Court or of two or
more such Courts in succession or,
o Have been for at least ten years an
advocate of a High Court or of two or
more such Courts in succession, or
o Be, in the opinion of the President,
a distinguished jurist.
Tenure and Retirement
The Constitution does not fix a tenure for
the Chief Justice.
The retirement age for Supreme Court
judges, including the CJI, is 65 years.
Removal of CJI
The constitution provides that a judge can
be removed only by an order of the
president, based on a motion passed by both
houses of parliament.
The procedure for removal of judges is
elaborated in the Judges Inquiry Act,
1968. The Act sets out the following steps
for removal from office:
Presidential Reference to SC on Timeline to Act on
State Bills
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
President Droupadi Murmu sought the
Supreme Court’s advisory opinion under
Article 143 on whether the President and
governors need to follow timelines to decide
on state bills.
Background
Recently, the Supreme Court verdict laid
down a timeline for the President and
governors to decide on state bills.
Though, the Governor is not bound by any
time limit to act on a Bill.
o This creates a situation where the
Governor can simply not act on a
Bill indefinitely this is referred to as
a “Pocket Veto”, although the term is
not officially used in the
Constitution.
The Supreme Court ruled that Governors
cannot delay or withhold assent to Bills
indefinitely once they are passed or re-
passed by the state Assembly.
The ruling set a timeline for the Governor to
act on Bills:
o One month for re-passed Bills.
o Three months if the Bill is withheld
contrary to Cabinet advice.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
59
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
It raises questions about the scope of
judicial authority under Article 142, and
whether the courts can enforce
accountability on constitutional
functionaries like Governors and the
President.
What is Article 142?
Article 142 of the Indian constitution is a
provision that empowers the Supreme
Court to pass any decree or order necessary
for doing complete justice in any case or
matter pending before it.
o It also makes such decree or
order enforceable throughout the
territory of India.
The importance of Article 142 lies in the
following aspects:
o It enables the Supreme Court
to exercise executive and legislative
functions in certain situations, such
as issuing guidelines, directions, or
orders to the government or other
authorities.
o It allows the Supreme Court
to intervene in matters of public
interest, human rights, constitutional
values, or fundamental rights, and to
protect them from any violation or
infringement.
o It enhances the Supreme Court’s
role as the guardian of the
constitution and the final arbiter of
the law.
Criticism: It may encroach upon
the principle of separation of powers and the
domain of the executive and the legislature,
and may invite criticism of judicial
overreach or activism.
Article 143 – Power of President to consult Supreme
Court
Article 143(1): The President can refer any
question of law or fact that is of public
importance to the Supreme Court for its
advisory opinion.
o The Court may choose to answer or
decline.
o The opinion is not binding, but is
highly respected.
A similar power to make references was
granted to the Federal Court of India under
Section 213 of the Government of India Act,
1935.
Article 145(3) requires any such reference
to be heard by five judges, after which the
SC returns the reference to the President
with the majority opinion.
Need for the Article: Under the Constitution,
the President acts on the aid and advice of
the Cabinet.
o The advisory jurisdiction allows her
the means to seek independent
advice to act on certain
constitutional matters.
o It is a power that the President has
invoked on at least 15 occasions
since 1950.
Conclusion
In essence, this development is not merely a
legal inquiry but a crucial test of India’s
federal structure, with implications for
the balance of power between the Centre
and the States, judicial oversight, and
constitutional morality.
The outcome could redefine how delays in
Bill assent are addressed and reaffirm the
judiciary’s role in safeguarding democratic
processes.
Sikkim’s 50th Statehood Day
Syllabus: GS2/Polity
Context
Prime Minister Narendra Modi extended his
wishes on the occasion of the 50th
anniversary of Sikkim’s statehood.
About
Sikkim became the 22nd state of
India on May 16, 1975, under the leadership
59
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
It raises questions about the scope of
judicial authority under Article 142, and
whether the courts can enforce
accountability on constitutional
functionaries like Governors and the
President.
What is Article 142?
Article 142 of the Indian constitution is a
provision that empowers the Supreme
Court to pass any decree or order necessary
for doing complete justice in any case or
matter pending before it.
o It also makes such decree or
order enforceable throughout the
territory of India.
The importance of Article 142 lies in the
following aspects:
o It enables the Supreme Court
to exercise executive and legislative
functions in certain situations, such
as issuing guidelines, directions, or
orders to the government or other
authorities.
o It allows the Supreme Court
to intervene in matters of public
interest, human rights, constitutional
values, or fundamental rights, and to
protect them from any violation or
infringement.
o It enhances the Supreme Court’s
role as the guardian of the
constitution and the final arbiter of
the law.
Criticism: It may encroach upon
the principle of separation of powers and the
domain of the executive and the legislature,
and may invite criticism of judicial
overreach or activism.
Article 143 – Power of President to consult Supreme
Court
Article 143(1): The President can refer any
question of law or fact that is of public
importance to the Supreme Court for its
advisory opinion.
o The Court may choose to answer or
decline.
o The opinion is not binding, but is
highly respected.
A similar power to make references was
granted to the Federal Court of India under
Section 213 of the Government of India Act,
1935.
Article 145(3) requires any such reference
to be heard by five judges, after which the
SC returns the reference to the President
with the majority opinion.
Need for the Article: Under the Constitution,
the President acts on the aid and advice of
the Cabinet.
o The advisory jurisdiction allows her
the means to seek independent
advice to act on certain
constitutional matters.
o It is a power that the President has
invoked on at least 15 occasions
since 1950.
Conclusion
In essence, this development is not merely a
legal inquiry but a crucial test of India’s
federal structure, with implications for
the balance of power between the Centre
and the States, judicial oversight, and
constitutional morality.
The outcome could redefine how delays in
Bill assent are addressed and reaffirm the
judiciary’s role in safeguarding democratic
processes.
Sikkim’s 50th Statehood Day
Syllabus: GS2/Polity
Context
Prime Minister Narendra Modi extended his
wishes on the occasion of the 50th
anniversary of Sikkim’s statehood.
About
Sikkim became the 22nd state of
India on May 16, 1975, under the leadership
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
60
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
of Lhendup Dorjee Khangsarpa, the state’s
first Chief Minister.
o Sikkim was earlier referred to as
the Chogyal Kingdom, ruled by
Chogyals.
Location: Sikkim is located in
the northeastern part of the country, in the
eastern Himalayas.
o It is bordered by the Tibet
Autonomous Region of China to the
north and northeast, by Bhutan to
the southeast, by the Indian state of
West Bengal to the south, and by
Nepal to the west.
Kangchenjunga, the highest peak of India is
situated in Sikkim.
The People of Sikkim consist of three ethnic
groups, that is, Lepcha, Bhutia and Nepali.
The official languages of the state are
English, Nepali, Sikkimese (Bhutia) and
Lepcha.
State Animal: Red Panda
Appointment of UPSC Chairman
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
President Droupadi Murmu has
appointed Dr. Ajay Kumar as the Chairman
of the Union Public Service Commission
under Article 316 (1) of the Constitution.
About
The post of UPSC chairman fell vacant after
the completion of Preeti Sudan’s tenure.
The UPSC conducts civil services
examinations to select officers for the
Indian Administrative Service , Indian
Foreign Service and the Indian Police
Service , among others.
Members: Besides the chairman, it can have
a maximum of 10 members.
o A UPSC chairman is appointed for
a term of six years or until
attaining 65 years of age, all
members have the same term.
Reappointment: The UPSC Chairman is not
eligible for reappointment after completing
their term.
Removal (317): Removal by President:
o Can only be done on the ground of
misbehaviour.
o Requires a Supreme Court inquiry
and report confirming the
misbehaviour.
o Reference to the Supreme Court is
made by the President.
o Can remove without Supreme Court
inquiry if the person: Is adjudged
insolvent, engages in paid
employment outside office duties, is
unfit due to mental or physical
infirmity.
PM E-Drive
Syllabus: GS2/ Governance
In News
The Karnataka government has formally
requested the allocation of electric buses
under the PM E-Drive initiative.
About PM E-Drive
Launch: 2024
Ministry: Ministry of Heavy Industries.
Aim: To accelerate the adoption of electric
vehicles (EVs) in India by providing
60
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
of Lhendup Dorjee Khangsarpa, the state’s
first Chief Minister.
o Sikkim was earlier referred to as
the Chogyal Kingdom, ruled by
Chogyals.
Location: Sikkim is located in
the northeastern part of the country, in the
eastern Himalayas.
o It is bordered by the Tibet
Autonomous Region of China to the
north and northeast, by Bhutan to
the southeast, by the Indian state of
West Bengal to the south, and by
Nepal to the west.
Kangchenjunga, the highest peak of India is
situated in Sikkim.
The People of Sikkim consist of three ethnic
groups, that is, Lepcha, Bhutia and Nepali.
The official languages of the state are
English, Nepali, Sikkimese (Bhutia) and
Lepcha.
State Animal: Red Panda
Appointment of UPSC Chairman
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
President Droupadi Murmu has
appointed Dr. Ajay Kumar as the Chairman
of the Union Public Service Commission
under Article 316 (1) of the Constitution.
About
The post of UPSC chairman fell vacant after
the completion of Preeti Sudan’s tenure.
The UPSC conducts civil services
examinations to select officers for the
Indian Administrative Service , Indian
Foreign Service and the Indian Police
Service , among others.
Members: Besides the chairman, it can have
a maximum of 10 members.
o A UPSC chairman is appointed for
a term of six years or until
attaining 65 years of age, all
members have the same term.
Reappointment: The UPSC Chairman is not
eligible for reappointment after completing
their term.
Removal (317): Removal by President:
o Can only be done on the ground of
misbehaviour.
o Requires a Supreme Court inquiry
and report confirming the
misbehaviour.
o Reference to the Supreme Court is
made by the President.
o Can remove without Supreme Court
inquiry if the person: Is adjudged
insolvent, engages in paid
employment outside office duties, is
unfit due to mental or physical
infirmity.
PM E-Drive
Syllabus: GS2/ Governance
In News
The Karnataka government has formally
requested the allocation of electric buses
under the PM E-Drive initiative.
About PM E-Drive
Launch: 2024
Ministry: Ministry of Heavy Industries.
Aim: To accelerate the adoption of electric
vehicles (EVs) in India by providing
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
61
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
demand incentives, supporting the
establishment of charging infrastructure,
and fostering the growth of the EV
manufacturing ecosystem.
Duration: 2 years (2024 to 2026).
Components:
o Subsidies (Demand
Incentives): Financial support for
buyers of e-2Ws (electric two-
wheelers), e-3Ws (electric three-
wheelers including e-rickshaws and
e-carts), e-ambulances, e-trucks,
and other emerging EV categories.
These incentives are provided to
reduce the upfront purchase price.
o Grants for creation of capital
assets: Financial assistance for the
deployment of e-buses, the
establishment of a network of public
EV charging stations for various
vehicle categories, and the
upgradation of vehicle testing
agencies under the Ministry of
Heavy Industries.
The PM E-DRIVE scheme subsumes
the Electric Mobility Promotion Scheme
(EMPS) 2024.
Cyberbullying & Legal Framework in India
Syllabus: GS2/ Governance
Context
Despite the growing prevalence of
cyberbullying in India, existing laws remain
inadequate in curbing the menace.
What is Cyberbullying?
Cyberbullying involves the use of digital
platforms to harass, threaten, humiliate, or
target individuals. It can take many forms
such as:
o Trolling: Repeated online
harassment, often by anonymous
users.
o Doxxing: Malicious publication of
personal information (e.g., phone
numbers, addresses).
o Online Stalking and Hate
Speech: Persistent surveillance and
abusive speech targeted at
individuals or communities.
Legal Framework for Addressing Cyberbullying in
India
India lacks a dedicated law specifically
aimed at tackling online hate speech and
trolling.
A limited number of provisions under
the Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita (BNS),
2003, and the Information Technology (IT)
Act, 2000, cover certain aspects of
cyberbullying.
Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita (BNS), 2023:
o Section 74: Assault or criminal force
with intent to outrage modesty.
o Section 75: Sexual harassment.
o Section 196: Promoting enmity
between groups.
o Section 351: Criminal intimidation.
o Section 356: Defamation.
Information Technology (IT) Act, 2000:
o Section 66C: Identity theft.
o Section 66D: Impersonation using
computer resources.
o Section 67: Publishing or
transmitting obscene material.
o Section 69A: Blocking public access
to online information on specified
grounds.
o Section 79: Safe harbour provision
for intermediaries.
SC Direction to Take Back Forest Land Illegally
Allotted to Private Entities
Syllabus: GS2/ Governance, GS3/ Environment
Context
61
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
demand incentives, supporting the
establishment of charging infrastructure,
and fostering the growth of the EV
manufacturing ecosystem.
Duration: 2 years (2024 to 2026).
Components:
o Subsidies (Demand
Incentives): Financial support for
buyers of e-2Ws (electric two-
wheelers), e-3Ws (electric three-
wheelers including e-rickshaws and
e-carts), e-ambulances, e-trucks,
and other emerging EV categories.
These incentives are provided to
reduce the upfront purchase price.
o Grants for creation of capital
assets: Financial assistance for the
deployment of e-buses, the
establishment of a network of public
EV charging stations for various
vehicle categories, and the
upgradation of vehicle testing
agencies under the Ministry of
Heavy Industries.
The PM E-DRIVE scheme subsumes
the Electric Mobility Promotion Scheme
(EMPS) 2024.
Cyberbullying & Legal Framework in India
Syllabus: GS2/ Governance
Context
Despite the growing prevalence of
cyberbullying in India, existing laws remain
inadequate in curbing the menace.
What is Cyberbullying?
Cyberbullying involves the use of digital
platforms to harass, threaten, humiliate, or
target individuals. It can take many forms
such as:
o Trolling: Repeated online
harassment, often by anonymous
users.
o Doxxing: Malicious publication of
personal information (e.g., phone
numbers, addresses).
o Online Stalking and Hate
Speech: Persistent surveillance and
abusive speech targeted at
individuals or communities.
Legal Framework for Addressing Cyberbullying in
India
India lacks a dedicated law specifically
aimed at tackling online hate speech and
trolling.
A limited number of provisions under
the Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita (BNS),
2003, and the Information Technology (IT)
Act, 2000, cover certain aspects of
cyberbullying.
Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita (BNS), 2023:
o Section 74: Assault or criminal force
with intent to outrage modesty.
o Section 75: Sexual harassment.
o Section 196: Promoting enmity
between groups.
o Section 351: Criminal intimidation.
o Section 356: Defamation.
Information Technology (IT) Act, 2000:
o Section 66C: Identity theft.
o Section 66D: Impersonation using
computer resources.
o Section 67: Publishing or
transmitting obscene material.
o Section 69A: Blocking public access
to online information on specified
grounds.
o Section 79: Safe harbour provision
for intermediaries.
SC Direction to Take Back Forest Land Illegally
Allotted to Private Entities
Syllabus: GS2/ Governance, GS3/ Environment
Context
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
62
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
The Supreme Court of India has directed all
States and Union Territories to investigate
and reclaim forest lands that were illegally
allotted for non-forest purposes, citing
severe legal and ecological violations.
Background
The directions came while declaring illegal
the allotment of 11.89 hectares of reserved
forest land in Kondhwa Budruk, Pune
(Maharashtra), Originally allotted for
agriculture in 1998.
o It was sold to a private builder in
1999.
The Chief Justice of India called this a classic
example of political- bureaucratic-builder
nexus leading to misuse of valuable forest
resources.
Supreme Court ruling
Formation of Special Investigation Teams
(SITs) by Chief Secretaries/ Administrators
to examine forest lands under revenue
departments’ control.
Recovery of forest lands from private
individuals/entities and transfer to
respective forest departments.
o If reclaiming land is not feasible due
to public interest, then cost recovery
from beneficiaries, with the amount
to be used for forest development.
The entire exercise must be completed
within one year.
Legal & Environmental Issues Highlighted
Violation of the 1996 Supreme Court
Order: The SC had directed in T.N.
Godavarman Thirumulpad vs. Union of India
(1996) that all non-forest activities on
forest land must stop unless approved by
the Central Government.
Loss of Green Cover: The continued
possession of forest lands by revenue
departments has led to non-forestry usage,
reducing India’s forest cover and
biodiversity.
Constitutional Safeguards
– Directive Principles of State Policy (DPSP): Article
48A of the Constitution directs the State to protect
and improve the environment and to safeguard the
forests and wildlife of the country.
– Fundamental Duties: Article 51A(g) enjoins
citizens to “protect and improve the natural
environment including forests, lakes, rivers, and
wildlife, and to have compassion for living
creatures.”
Way Ahead
Forest Mapping: Leverage GIS and remote
sensing to clearly demarcate forest
boundaries and monitor illegal use.
Create State-level Forest Land Governance
Cells with representatives from forest,
revenue, and legal departments.
Community Involvement: Involve Joint
Forest Management Committees (JFMCs)
and tribal communities to report misuse or
illegal occupation.
Strengthen Environmental Impact
Assessment (EIA) norms and ensure public
participation in forest land diversion cases.
United States Birthright Citizenship
Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance
Context
The US Supreme Court heard arguments in
a case concerning an executive order issued
by the US President, denying birthright
citizenship to children born in the US to
parents who are in the country illegally or
temporarily.
What is Birthright Citizenship?
Birthright citizenship is the legal principle
that a person acquires citizenship
automatically at birth, based on the place of
birth or the nationality of parents.
o Jus soli (right of the soil): Citizenship
is granted to anyone born within the
territory of the country, regardless
of parental citizenship. It is followed
by the United States.
62
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
The Supreme Court of India has directed all
States and Union Territories to investigate
and reclaim forest lands that were illegally
allotted for non-forest purposes, citing
severe legal and ecological violations.
Background
The directions came while declaring illegal
the allotment of 11.89 hectares of reserved
forest land in Kondhwa Budruk, Pune
(Maharashtra), Originally allotted for
agriculture in 1998.
o It was sold to a private builder in
1999.
The Chief Justice of India called this a classic
example of political- bureaucratic-builder
nexus leading to misuse of valuable forest
resources.
Supreme Court ruling
Formation of Special Investigation Teams
(SITs) by Chief Secretaries/ Administrators
to examine forest lands under revenue
departments’ control.
Recovery of forest lands from private
individuals/entities and transfer to
respective forest departments.
o If reclaiming land is not feasible due
to public interest, then cost recovery
from beneficiaries, with the amount
to be used for forest development.
The entire exercise must be completed
within one year.
Legal & Environmental Issues Highlighted
Violation of the 1996 Supreme Court
Order: The SC had directed in T.N.
Godavarman Thirumulpad vs. Union of India
(1996) that all non-forest activities on
forest land must stop unless approved by
the Central Government.
Loss of Green Cover: The continued
possession of forest lands by revenue
departments has led to non-forestry usage,
reducing India’s forest cover and
biodiversity.
Constitutional Safeguards
– Directive Principles of State Policy (DPSP): Article
48A of the Constitution directs the State to protect
and improve the environment and to safeguard the
forests and wildlife of the country.
– Fundamental Duties: Article 51A(g) enjoins
citizens to “protect and improve the natural
environment including forests, lakes, rivers, and
wildlife, and to have compassion for living
creatures.”
Way Ahead
Forest Mapping: Leverage GIS and remote
sensing to clearly demarcate forest
boundaries and monitor illegal use.
Create State-level Forest Land Governance
Cells with representatives from forest,
revenue, and legal departments.
Community Involvement: Involve Joint
Forest Management Committees (JFMCs)
and tribal communities to report misuse or
illegal occupation.
Strengthen Environmental Impact
Assessment (EIA) norms and ensure public
participation in forest land diversion cases.
United States Birthright Citizenship
Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance
Context
The US Supreme Court heard arguments in
a case concerning an executive order issued
by the US President, denying birthright
citizenship to children born in the US to
parents who are in the country illegally or
temporarily.
What is Birthright Citizenship?
Birthright citizenship is the legal principle
that a person acquires citizenship
automatically at birth, based on the place of
birth or the nationality of parents.
o Jus soli (right of the soil): Citizenship
is granted to anyone born within the
territory of the country, regardless
of parental citizenship. It is followed
by the United States.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
63
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Jus sanguinis (right of
blood): Citizenship is granted based
on parental nationality, not place of
birth. It is followed by India.
14th Amendment of the US Constitution
The 14th Amendment to the US
Constitution was ratified in 1868.
The Citizenship Clause says, All persons
born or naturalized in the United States, and
subject to the jurisdiction thereof, are
citizens of the United States.
This has been interpreted to guarantee
citizenship to anyone born on US soil,
irrespective of parental immigration status.
Follow OROP Principle for All Retired HC Judges: SC
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
The Supreme Court held that retired high
court judges will be entitled to uniform
pension and other terminal benefits.
About
It establishes a long-overdue parity in
judicial service benefits.
o Flat pension of ₹13.5 lakh per
annum for all retired High Court
judges and ₹15 lakh per annum for
retired Chief Justices.
o The court has removed
inconsistencies rooted in entry
points, tenure duration, and service
breaks.
Reiterating the One Rank One Pension
(OROP) principle, the court emphasized that
all judges, regardless of whether they came
from the district judiciary or the bar, are
entitled to equal post-retirement benefits —
a position grounded firmly in
the constitutional guarantee of
equality (Article 14).
This decision ends decades of ambiguity and
discrimination in judicial pensions and
reinforces the dignity and uniformity of the
judiciary — not just in office, but in
retirement too.
SC Mandates 3-Year Practice for Judicial Services
Examinations
Context: Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance
The Supreme Court of India recently reinstated the
mandatory requirement of a minimum of three
years of practice as an advocate for candidates
applying to entry-level judicial service
examinations (Civil Judge/Junior Division). This
ruling by a bench led by CJI B.R. Gavai effectively
reverses the 2002 Supreme Court decision which
had scrapped this requirement, aiming to attract
“best talent” by allowing fresh law graduates to
appear for these exams. The decision has significant
implications for judicial recruitment, legal
education, and the diversity of the Indian judiciary.
Background and Historical Evolution of the Rule:
14th Law Commission Report
(1958): Proposed 3-5 years of experience
for lower subordinate judges. For a
proposed All India Judicial Services (AIJS),
no practical experience was required,
emphasizing robust training.
All India Judges’ Association vs. Union of
India (1992): Supported allowing fresh
graduates in a centralized recruitment
system like AIJS.
1993 Review: The SC reversed its stance,
emphasizing the need for 3 years of
experience for the lower judiciary, given the
significant responsibilities involved in
matters of “life, liberty, and property.”
Justice Shetty Commission (1996): Found
that the 3-year rule deterred bright talent
and increased the age of recruitment.
All India Judges’ Association vs. Union of
India (2002): The Supreme Court scrapped
the 3-year rule, observing that legal practice
was not attracting the best minds to the
judiciary and suggested that robust training
could compensate for lack of experience.
Current Ruling (2025): The Supreme Court,
after reviewing affidavits from various High
Courts indicating “negative outcomes” of
63
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Jus sanguinis (right of
blood): Citizenship is granted based
on parental nationality, not place of
birth. It is followed by India.
14th Amendment of the US Constitution
The 14th Amendment to the US
Constitution was ratified in 1868.
The Citizenship Clause says, All persons
born or naturalized in the United States, and
subject to the jurisdiction thereof, are
citizens of the United States.
This has been interpreted to guarantee
citizenship to anyone born on US soil,
irrespective of parental immigration status.
Follow OROP Principle for All Retired HC Judges: SC
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
The Supreme Court held that retired high
court judges will be entitled to uniform
pension and other terminal benefits.
About
It establishes a long-overdue parity in
judicial service benefits.
o Flat pension of ₹13.5 lakh per
annum for all retired High Court
judges and ₹15 lakh per annum for
retired Chief Justices.
o The court has removed
inconsistencies rooted in entry
points, tenure duration, and service
breaks.
Reiterating the One Rank One Pension
(OROP) principle, the court emphasized that
all judges, regardless of whether they came
from the district judiciary or the bar, are
entitled to equal post-retirement benefits —
a position grounded firmly in
the constitutional guarantee of
equality (Article 14).
This decision ends decades of ambiguity and
discrimination in judicial pensions and
reinforces the dignity and uniformity of the
judiciary — not just in office, but in
retirement too.
SC Mandates 3-Year Practice for Judicial Services
Examinations
Context: Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance
The Supreme Court of India recently reinstated the
mandatory requirement of a minimum of three
years of practice as an advocate for candidates
applying to entry-level judicial service
examinations (Civil Judge/Junior Division). This
ruling by a bench led by CJI B.R. Gavai effectively
reverses the 2002 Supreme Court decision which
had scrapped this requirement, aiming to attract
“best talent” by allowing fresh law graduates to
appear for these exams. The decision has significant
implications for judicial recruitment, legal
education, and the diversity of the Indian judiciary.
Background and Historical Evolution of the Rule:
14th Law Commission Report
(1958): Proposed 3-5 years of experience
for lower subordinate judges. For a
proposed All India Judicial Services (AIJS),
no practical experience was required,
emphasizing robust training.
All India Judges’ Association vs. Union of
India (1992): Supported allowing fresh
graduates in a centralized recruitment
system like AIJS.
1993 Review: The SC reversed its stance,
emphasizing the need for 3 years of
experience for the lower judiciary, given the
significant responsibilities involved in
matters of “life, liberty, and property.”
Justice Shetty Commission (1996): Found
that the 3-year rule deterred bright talent
and increased the age of recruitment.
All India Judges’ Association vs. Union of
India (2002): The Supreme Court scrapped
the 3-year rule, observing that legal practice
was not attracting the best minds to the
judiciary and suggested that robust training
could compensate for lack of experience.
Current Ruling (2025): The Supreme Court,
after reviewing affidavits from various High
Courts indicating “negative outcomes” of
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
64
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
appointing inexperienced candidates, and
noting concerns about the lack of practical
exposure and procedural understanding
among fresh graduates, has restored the 3-
year practice requirement.
Rationale Behind the Supreme Court’s Decision
(Arguments in Favour):
Bridging the Theory-Practice Gap: Most law
colleges focus heavily on theoretical
knowledge, leaving graduates ill-equipped
for the practical realities of courtroom
proceedings, evidence handling, and client
interactions. Three years of practice is
believed to provide essential hands-on
experience.
Improved Judgment Quality: Experience
fosters better reasoning, empathy, and a
nuanced understanding of litigants’
challenges. This is expected to lead to
higher-quality verdicts, fewer procedural
errors, and a more robust administration of
justice.
Procedural Knowledge and Courtroom
Etiquette: Direct exposure to courts equips
candidates with crucial procedural
knowledge, how to handle evidence, and an
understanding of courtroom decorum.
Safeguard Against External Pressures: Prior
experience can build resilience and ethical
grounding, which is crucial for judges,
especially in lower courts, where they might
be more susceptible to influence and
pressure.
Professional Maturity: Dealing with real-
world cases helps in developing the
maturity needed to appreciate nuanced
legal arguments and the human
complexities inherent in judicial roles.
Feedback from High Courts: Several High
Courts submitted affidavits indicating that
the direct recruitment of fresh graduates
had not been a successful experience.
Arguments Against the Rule (Concerns and
Criticisms):
Impact on Attracting Talent: The best law
students from premier National Law
Universities (NLUs) are increasingly drawn
to lucrative corporate jobs. Adding a three-
year experience requirement, on top of a
five-year law degree, could further deter
them from considering judicial careers,
pushing them beyond age limits or making
the profession less attractive financially
during the initial years.
Economic Barrier and Social
Implications: Junior lawyers often earn very
low stipends (e.g., ₹15,000-20,000 per
month). This makes it challenging for
candidates from economically
disadvantaged backgrounds, and especially
first-generation lawyers, to sustain
themselves for three years, creating an
elitist barrier to entry. They may need to
start earning earlier.
Gender Implications: The rule could
disproportionately affect women aspirants,
who may face difficulties in meeting the
requirement due to maternity breaks or
prevailing social constraints and biases
within the legal profession, which can limit
their access to meaningful practice
opportunities.
Irregular Examination Schedules: Judicial
service exams are not conducted annually in
many states. This irregular scheduling,
combined with the three-year practice rule,
can lead to significant delays and
uncertainty for aspirants.
No Guarantee of Quality: Simply having
three years of enrollment with the Bar
Council does not guarantee meaningful
courtroom exposure or genuine practical
learning. Many junior lawyers may not get
substantial opportunities to engage in
litigation.
Arbitrary Barrier: Critics argue that the rule
creates an arbitrary barrier, potentially
limiting the talent pool and delaying career
growth unnecessarily, especially for those
who are academically brilliant but lack
immediate access to robust practice.
Judicial Diversity: The rule might further
reduce diversity in the judiciary by
disfavoring candidates from diverse socio-
64
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
appointing inexperienced candidates, and
noting concerns about the lack of practical
exposure and procedural understanding
among fresh graduates, has restored the 3-
year practice requirement.
Rationale Behind the Supreme Court’s Decision
(Arguments in Favour):
Bridging the Theory-Practice Gap: Most law
colleges focus heavily on theoretical
knowledge, leaving graduates ill-equipped
for the practical realities of courtroom
proceedings, evidence handling, and client
interactions. Three years of practice is
believed to provide essential hands-on
experience.
Improved Judgment Quality: Experience
fosters better reasoning, empathy, and a
nuanced understanding of litigants’
challenges. This is expected to lead to
higher-quality verdicts, fewer procedural
errors, and a more robust administration of
justice.
Procedural Knowledge and Courtroom
Etiquette: Direct exposure to courts equips
candidates with crucial procedural
knowledge, how to handle evidence, and an
understanding of courtroom decorum.
Safeguard Against External Pressures: Prior
experience can build resilience and ethical
grounding, which is crucial for judges,
especially in lower courts, where they might
be more susceptible to influence and
pressure.
Professional Maturity: Dealing with real-
world cases helps in developing the
maturity needed to appreciate nuanced
legal arguments and the human
complexities inherent in judicial roles.
Feedback from High Courts: Several High
Courts submitted affidavits indicating that
the direct recruitment of fresh graduates
had not been a successful experience.
Arguments Against the Rule (Concerns and
Criticisms):
Impact on Attracting Talent: The best law
students from premier National Law
Universities (NLUs) are increasingly drawn
to lucrative corporate jobs. Adding a three-
year experience requirement, on top of a
five-year law degree, could further deter
them from considering judicial careers,
pushing them beyond age limits or making
the profession less attractive financially
during the initial years.
Economic Barrier and Social
Implications: Junior lawyers often earn very
low stipends (e.g., ₹15,000-20,000 per
month). This makes it challenging for
candidates from economically
disadvantaged backgrounds, and especially
first-generation lawyers, to sustain
themselves for three years, creating an
elitist barrier to entry. They may need to
start earning earlier.
Gender Implications: The rule could
disproportionately affect women aspirants,
who may face difficulties in meeting the
requirement due to maternity breaks or
prevailing social constraints and biases
within the legal profession, which can limit
their access to meaningful practice
opportunities.
Irregular Examination Schedules: Judicial
service exams are not conducted annually in
many states. This irregular scheduling,
combined with the three-year practice rule,
can lead to significant delays and
uncertainty for aspirants.
No Guarantee of Quality: Simply having
three years of enrollment with the Bar
Council does not guarantee meaningful
courtroom exposure or genuine practical
learning. Many junior lawyers may not get
substantial opportunities to engage in
litigation.
Arbitrary Barrier: Critics argue that the rule
creates an arbitrary barrier, potentially
limiting the talent pool and delaying career
growth unnecessarily, especially for those
who are academically brilliant but lack
immediate access to robust practice.
Judicial Diversity: The rule might further
reduce diversity in the judiciary by
disfavoring candidates from diverse socio-
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
65
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
economic backgrounds, thereby affecting
the representative character of the
judiciary.
Key Directions and Way Forward:
The Supreme Court’s ruling includes several key
directives:
Mandatory Three Years Practice: Candidates
must have a minimum of three years of
practice as an advocate.
Certification: This experience must be
certified by a lawyer with at least 10 years
of standing at the Bar, endorsed by a judicial
officer from the relevant jurisdiction (or a
designated court officer in case of High
Court/Supreme Court practice).
Counting of Experience: The three-year
period will be counted from the date of
provisional enrollment with the Bar
Council, not from the date of clearing the All
India Bar Examination (AIBE).
Law Clerk Experience: Experience as a law
clerk to a judge or judicial officer will also
count towards the three-year requirement.
Prospective Application: The rule will apply
prospectively to future recruitment cycles
and will not affect ongoing selection
processes already notified by High Courts.
Mandatory Training: All successful
candidates must undergo one year of
mandatory training after clearing the
selection process and before assuming
judicial duties.
Amendment of Rules: All High Courts and
State Governments are directed to amend
their service rules to reflect this new
eligibility criterion.
Alternative Proposals & Recommendations for
Reform (UPSC Mains Aspect):
To address the concerns while upholding the
objective of a competent judiciary, a balanced
approach is crucial:
1. Extended and Structured Training: Instead
of mandatory prior practice, recruit young
law graduates and subject them to a
rigorous and extended (e.g., two-year)
training program. This program could
combine:
Academic Instruction: Advanced
legal theory, ethics, and judicial
conduct.
Courtroom Exposure: Structured
attachments with senior judges,
observations of court proceedings,
and participation in mock trials.
Practical Skills
Development: Intensive training in
judgment writing, legal research,
case management, and procedural
aspects.
Apprenticeships: A year-long
apprenticeship under seasoned
judges could provide practical
experience with financial stability.
2. Reform in Examination Pattern: Shift focus
from rote memorization to assessing
practical legal skills, analytical abilities, and
judgment. This could involve:
Scenario-Based Questions: To test
practical application of law.
Evidence Appreciation: Questions
requiring analysis of evidence.
Judgment Writing: Compulsory
paper on drafting judgments.
Case Studies: To evaluate problem-
solving and critical thinking.
3. Incentivizing Judicial Careers:
Better Stipends: During the initial
training/practice period, provide
better stipends or financial support
to make the career path more
attractive, especially for those from
economically weaker sections.
Improved Career Progression: Clear
and attractive career progression
pathways for judicial officers to
retain talent.
Regular Examination
Schedule: Ensure that judicial
65
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
economic backgrounds, thereby affecting
the representative character of the
judiciary.
Key Directions and Way Forward:
The Supreme Court’s ruling includes several key
directives:
Mandatory Three Years Practice: Candidates
must have a minimum of three years of
practice as an advocate.
Certification: This experience must be
certified by a lawyer with at least 10 years
of standing at the Bar, endorsed by a judicial
officer from the relevant jurisdiction (or a
designated court officer in case of High
Court/Supreme Court practice).
Counting of Experience: The three-year
period will be counted from the date of
provisional enrollment with the Bar
Council, not from the date of clearing the All
India Bar Examination (AIBE).
Law Clerk Experience: Experience as a law
clerk to a judge or judicial officer will also
count towards the three-year requirement.
Prospective Application: The rule will apply
prospectively to future recruitment cycles
and will not affect ongoing selection
processes already notified by High Courts.
Mandatory Training: All successful
candidates must undergo one year of
mandatory training after clearing the
selection process and before assuming
judicial duties.
Amendment of Rules: All High Courts and
State Governments are directed to amend
their service rules to reflect this new
eligibility criterion.
Alternative Proposals & Recommendations for
Reform (UPSC Mains Aspect):
To address the concerns while upholding the
objective of a competent judiciary, a balanced
approach is crucial:
1. Extended and Structured Training: Instead
of mandatory prior practice, recruit young
law graduates and subject them to a
rigorous and extended (e.g., two-year)
training program. This program could
combine:
Academic Instruction: Advanced
legal theory, ethics, and judicial
conduct.
Courtroom Exposure: Structured
attachments with senior judges,
observations of court proceedings,
and participation in mock trials.
Practical Skills
Development: Intensive training in
judgment writing, legal research,
case management, and procedural
aspects.
Apprenticeships: A year-long
apprenticeship under seasoned
judges could provide practical
experience with financial stability.
2. Reform in Examination Pattern: Shift focus
from rote memorization to assessing
practical legal skills, analytical abilities, and
judgment. This could involve:
Scenario-Based Questions: To test
practical application of law.
Evidence Appreciation: Questions
requiring analysis of evidence.
Judgment Writing: Compulsory
paper on drafting judgments.
Case Studies: To evaluate problem-
solving and critical thinking.
3. Incentivizing Judicial Careers:
Better Stipends: During the initial
training/practice period, provide
better stipends or financial support
to make the career path more
attractive, especially for those from
economically weaker sections.
Improved Career Progression: Clear
and attractive career progression
pathways for judicial officers to
retain talent.
Regular Examination
Schedule: Ensure that judicial
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
66
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
service examinations are conducted
regularly and predictably across all
states to reduce uncertainty and
delay.
4. Strengthening Legal Education:
Practical Orientation in Law
Schools: Integrate more practical
training, moot courts, legal aid
clinics, and internships into the law
school curriculum itself.
Accreditation and Quality
Control: Enhance accreditation
processes for law colleges and
enforce minimum standards to
ensure graduates are adequately
prepared.
5. Addressing Diversity Concerns:
Inclusive Mentorship
Programs: Establish formal
mentorship programs for young
lawyers, especially women and
those from marginalized
backgrounds, to ensure they gain
meaningful practice experience.
Gender-Sensitive
Infrastructure: Ensure courts have
adequate and gender-sensitive
infrastructure (e.g., restrooms,
crèche facilities) to support women
in the profession.
Anti-Harassment
Mechanisms: Implement stringent
anti-harassment mechanisms in
courts to create a safer and more
inclusive working environment for
women advocates.
GeM Celebrates 8th Incorporation Day
Syllabus: GS2/Governance
Context
Government e Marketplace (GeM), India’s
national public procurement portal, marked
its 8th Incorporation Day.
Government e-Marketplace
GeM is a one stop portal to facilitate online
procurement of common use Goods &
Services required by various Government
Departments / Organizations / PSUs.
It was launched in 2016, and is operated by
the GeM SPV (Special Purpose Vehicle), a
100% government-owned company under
the Ministry of Commerce and Industry.
Aim: To enhance transparency, efficiency
and speed in public procurement.
The purchases through GeM by Government
users have been authorized and
made mandatory by the Ministry of
Finance in 2017.
Core Principles of GeM
GeM: Transforming Public Procurement in India
GeM’s user base has seen a threefold
increase in recent years, with over 1.64 lakh
primary buyers and 4.2 lakh active sellers
now onboard.
o The platform offers more
than 10,000 product categories and
over 330 services.
o Over 10 lakh Micro and Small
Enterprises (MSEs), 1.3 lakh
artisans and weavers, 1.84 lakh
women entrepreneurs, and 31,000
startups are now part of the GeM
ecosystem.
Expansion of Role: GeM’s role in advancing
national priorities was underscored by key
transactions, including ₹5,000 crore worth
of equipment for the Akash Missile System
and ₹5,085 crore in vaccine procurement.
o The platform is also enabling
complex services such as drone-as-
a-service for AIIMS, GIS and
66
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
service examinations are conducted
regularly and predictably across all
states to reduce uncertainty and
delay.
4. Strengthening Legal Education:
Practical Orientation in Law
Schools: Integrate more practical
training, moot courts, legal aid
clinics, and internships into the law
school curriculum itself.
Accreditation and Quality
Control: Enhance accreditation
processes for law colleges and
enforce minimum standards to
ensure graduates are adequately
prepared.
5. Addressing Diversity Concerns:
Inclusive Mentorship
Programs: Establish formal
mentorship programs for young
lawyers, especially women and
those from marginalized
backgrounds, to ensure they gain
meaningful practice experience.
Gender-Sensitive
Infrastructure: Ensure courts have
adequate and gender-sensitive
infrastructure (e.g., restrooms,
crèche facilities) to support women
in the profession.
Anti-Harassment
Mechanisms: Implement stringent
anti-harassment mechanisms in
courts to create a safer and more
inclusive working environment for
women advocates.
GeM Celebrates 8th Incorporation Day
Syllabus: GS2/Governance
Context
Government e Marketplace (GeM), India’s
national public procurement portal, marked
its 8th Incorporation Day.
Government e-Marketplace
GeM is a one stop portal to facilitate online
procurement of common use Goods &
Services required by various Government
Departments / Organizations / PSUs.
It was launched in 2016, and is operated by
the GeM SPV (Special Purpose Vehicle), a
100% government-owned company under
the Ministry of Commerce and Industry.
Aim: To enhance transparency, efficiency
and speed in public procurement.
The purchases through GeM by Government
users have been authorized and
made mandatory by the Ministry of
Finance in 2017.
Core Principles of GeM
GeM: Transforming Public Procurement in India
GeM’s user base has seen a threefold
increase in recent years, with over 1.64 lakh
primary buyers and 4.2 lakh active sellers
now onboard.
o The platform offers more
than 10,000 product categories and
over 330 services.
o Over 10 lakh Micro and Small
Enterprises (MSEs), 1.3 lakh
artisans and weavers, 1.84 lakh
women entrepreneurs, and 31,000
startups are now part of the GeM
ecosystem.
Expansion of Role: GeM’s role in advancing
national priorities was underscored by key
transactions, including ₹5,000 crore worth
of equipment for the Akash Missile System
and ₹5,085 crore in vaccine procurement.
o The platform is also enabling
complex services such as drone-as-
a-service for AIIMS, GIS and
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
67
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
insurance for over 1.3 crore lives,
and wet leasing of chartered flights
and CT scanners.
Nationwide Adoption: GeM has now been
adopted across all 36 States and Union
Territories, with Uttar Pradesh leading the
way.
o Eight states—including
Maharashtra, Manipur, Gujarat,
Himachal Pradesh, Assam,
Uttarakhand, and Chhattisgarh—
have mandated GeM usage.
Significance
Transparent and Efficient Procurement: GeM
aims to reduce human intervention in
government purchases, ensuring
transparency, efficiency, and speed. It
minimizes corruption and delays in
procurement.
Cost Savings: Competitive pricing has
resulted in lower procurement costs for the
government.
Boost to MSMEs & Startups: Significant
amount of the orders on GeM are from
MSMEs, promoting small businesses.
Digital Process: The entire process, from
vendor registration to payment, is done
online.
Security and Audit Trails: Built-in
mechanisms for data security, digital
signatures, and audit trails to ensure
accountability.
Challenges
Limited Awareness and Adoption: Many
government officials and potential vendors,
especially in rural areas and among MSMEs,
are unaware or lack training on how to use
the platform effectively.
o There is a resistance to change from
traditional procurement methods.
Quality Control and
Standardization: Ensuring consistent quality
of products and services is difficult,
especially when a large number of vendors
are involved.
o Lack of standardized specifications
for some products and services.
Delays in Payments: Although the platform
supports timely payments, in practice,
delays by government departments in
processing payments discourage sellers.
Logistics and Delivery Challenges: Vendors
often face logistical difficulties in delivering
goods across vast geographies.
Technical Issues and Platform
Stability: Users sometimes face issues such
as system crashes, slow interface, or bugs,
especially during high-traffic periods.
Regulatory and Policy
Bottlenecks: Inconsistent application of
procurement rules across departments
leads to inefficiency.
Government Initiatives to Improve GeM
SWAYATT (Startups, Women & Youth
Advantage Through e-Transactions): The
portal committed to enhance ease of doing
business and establish direct market
linkages to annual public procurement for
startups, women entrepreneurs, Micro &
Small Enterprises (MSEs), Self Help Groups
(SHGs) and youth.
Startup Runway 2.0: It is an opportunity for
Startups to showcase their innovative
products and services to Government
buyers and engage in public procurement.
o GeM has created a dedicated
marketplace category for all
Startups to list their products and
services, irrespective of their DPIIT-
certification.
Womaniya initiative: To showcase products
made by women entrepreneurs and women
self-help groups [WSHGs].
GeM is collaborating with various
stakeholders from the Micro, Small and
Medium Enterprises [MSME] ecosystem
with special focus on entrepreneurs from
67
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
insurance for over 1.3 crore lives,
and wet leasing of chartered flights
and CT scanners.
Nationwide Adoption: GeM has now been
adopted across all 36 States and Union
Territories, with Uttar Pradesh leading the
way.
o Eight states—including
Maharashtra, Manipur, Gujarat,
Himachal Pradesh, Assam,
Uttarakhand, and Chhattisgarh—
have mandated GeM usage.
Significance
Transparent and Efficient Procurement: GeM
aims to reduce human intervention in
government purchases, ensuring
transparency, efficiency, and speed. It
minimizes corruption and delays in
procurement.
Cost Savings: Competitive pricing has
resulted in lower procurement costs for the
government.
Boost to MSMEs & Startups: Significant
amount of the orders on GeM are from
MSMEs, promoting small businesses.
Digital Process: The entire process, from
vendor registration to payment, is done
online.
Security and Audit Trails: Built-in
mechanisms for data security, digital
signatures, and audit trails to ensure
accountability.
Challenges
Limited Awareness and Adoption: Many
government officials and potential vendors,
especially in rural areas and among MSMEs,
are unaware or lack training on how to use
the platform effectively.
o There is a resistance to change from
traditional procurement methods.
Quality Control and
Standardization: Ensuring consistent quality
of products and services is difficult,
especially when a large number of vendors
are involved.
o Lack of standardized specifications
for some products and services.
Delays in Payments: Although the platform
supports timely payments, in practice,
delays by government departments in
processing payments discourage sellers.
Logistics and Delivery Challenges: Vendors
often face logistical difficulties in delivering
goods across vast geographies.
Technical Issues and Platform
Stability: Users sometimes face issues such
as system crashes, slow interface, or bugs,
especially during high-traffic periods.
Regulatory and Policy
Bottlenecks: Inconsistent application of
procurement rules across departments
leads to inefficiency.
Government Initiatives to Improve GeM
SWAYATT (Startups, Women & Youth
Advantage Through e-Transactions): The
portal committed to enhance ease of doing
business and establish direct market
linkages to annual public procurement for
startups, women entrepreneurs, Micro &
Small Enterprises (MSEs), Self Help Groups
(SHGs) and youth.
Startup Runway 2.0: It is an opportunity for
Startups to showcase their innovative
products and services to Government
buyers and engage in public procurement.
o GeM has created a dedicated
marketplace category for all
Startups to list their products and
services, irrespective of their DPIIT-
certification.
Womaniya initiative: To showcase products
made by women entrepreneurs and women
self-help groups [WSHGs].
GeM is collaborating with various
stakeholders from the Micro, Small and
Medium Enterprises [MSME] ecosystem
with special focus on entrepreneurs from
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
68
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
the Scheduled Caste/ Schedule Tribes [SC/
ST].
The SARAS Collection: It is a pristine
handcrafted collection of handicrafts,
handloom textiles, office décor, furnishings,
accessories, event souvenirs, personal
hygiene and care products from top of the
line SHGs in India.
Conclusion
The platform’s strategic initiatives have
significantly contributed to the ease of doing
business and enhanced participation in
government procurement.
As GeM continues to evolve, it remains
committed to its vision of creating a
sustainable, open, and competitive
marketplace, driving India’s progress
towards inclusive and transparent public
procurement practices.
K. Veeraswami vs Union of India Judgment
Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance
Context
The Vice-President of India, has stated that
it is time to revisit the K Veeraswamy
judgement of 1991.
Background
The case arose when K. Veeraswami, a
former Chief Justice of the Madras High
Court, was charged under the Prevention of
Corruption Act, 1947.
Issue: Whether judges of the High Courts
and Supreme Court can be investigated and
prosecuted under anti-corruption laws, and
if so, what safeguards must be observed to
maintain judicial independence.
Supreme court ruling
The Supreme Court held that judges of the
higher judiciary are indeed ‘public servants’
under the Prevention of Corruption Act.
Mandatory Prior Sanction: No FIR or
investigation can be initiated against a
sitting judge of the High Court or Supreme
Court without the prior sanction of the CJI.
o If allegations are made against the
Chief Justice of India, the mandatory
consultation must be conducted
with other senior judges of the
Supreme Court.
Jal Jeevan Scheme: MPs Flag ‘Irregularities’
Syllabus: GS2/Governance
In News
Several MPs have called for an investigation
into alleged irregularities in the
implementation of the Jal Jeevan Mission,
particularly concerning inflated contracts
and cost overruns.
The Jal Jeevan Mission (JJM)
About: It is a centrally sponsored scheme
that was launched by Prime Minister
Narendra Modi on August 15, 2019, with
the ambitious goal of providing tap water
supply to every rural household.
o In the Union Budget 2025-26,
Finance Minister Nirmala
Sitharaman announced an increased
allocation of ₹67,000 crore for the
Jal Jeevan Mission, which is now
extended until 2028.
Objectives: It aims to provide Functional
Household Tap Connections (FHTCs) to
every rural household, with a focus on
priority areas such as drought-prone
regions, quality-affected zones, deserts, and
Sansad Adarsh Gram Yojana (SAGY)
villages.
o It also ensures tap water access in
schools, Anganwadi centers, health
facilities, and community buildings,
while actively monitoring the
functionality of these connections.
Achievement: As of February 1, 2025, the Jal
Jeevan Mission has provided tap water
connections to 12.20 crore additional rural
households, increasing total coverage to
over 15.44 crore households—79.74% of
India’s rural households.
o WHO estimates JJM will save 5.5
crore hours daily, mostly for women,
68
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
the Scheduled Caste/ Schedule Tribes [SC/
ST].
The SARAS Collection: It is a pristine
handcrafted collection of handicrafts,
handloom textiles, office décor, furnishings,
accessories, event souvenirs, personal
hygiene and care products from top of the
line SHGs in India.
Conclusion
The platform’s strategic initiatives have
significantly contributed to the ease of doing
business and enhanced participation in
government procurement.
As GeM continues to evolve, it remains
committed to its vision of creating a
sustainable, open, and competitive
marketplace, driving India’s progress
towards inclusive and transparent public
procurement practices.
K. Veeraswami vs Union of India Judgment
Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance
Context
The Vice-President of India, has stated that
it is time to revisit the K Veeraswamy
judgement of 1991.
Background
The case arose when K. Veeraswami, a
former Chief Justice of the Madras High
Court, was charged under the Prevention of
Corruption Act, 1947.
Issue: Whether judges of the High Courts
and Supreme Court can be investigated and
prosecuted under anti-corruption laws, and
if so, what safeguards must be observed to
maintain judicial independence.
Supreme court ruling
The Supreme Court held that judges of the
higher judiciary are indeed ‘public servants’
under the Prevention of Corruption Act.
Mandatory Prior Sanction: No FIR or
investigation can be initiated against a
sitting judge of the High Court or Supreme
Court without the prior sanction of the CJI.
o If allegations are made against the
Chief Justice of India, the mandatory
consultation must be conducted
with other senior judges of the
Supreme Court.
Jal Jeevan Scheme: MPs Flag ‘Irregularities’
Syllabus: GS2/Governance
In News
Several MPs have called for an investigation
into alleged irregularities in the
implementation of the Jal Jeevan Mission,
particularly concerning inflated contracts
and cost overruns.
The Jal Jeevan Mission (JJM)
About: It is a centrally sponsored scheme
that was launched by Prime Minister
Narendra Modi on August 15, 2019, with
the ambitious goal of providing tap water
supply to every rural household.
o In the Union Budget 2025-26,
Finance Minister Nirmala
Sitharaman announced an increased
allocation of ₹67,000 crore for the
Jal Jeevan Mission, which is now
extended until 2028.
Objectives: It aims to provide Functional
Household Tap Connections (FHTCs) to
every rural household, with a focus on
priority areas such as drought-prone
regions, quality-affected zones, deserts, and
Sansad Adarsh Gram Yojana (SAGY)
villages.
o It also ensures tap water access in
schools, Anganwadi centers, health
facilities, and community buildings,
while actively monitoring the
functionality of these connections.
Achievement: As of February 1, 2025, the Jal
Jeevan Mission has provided tap water
connections to 12.20 crore additional rural
households, increasing total coverage to
over 15.44 crore households—79.74% of
India’s rural households.
o WHO estimates JJM will save 5.5
crore hours daily, mostly for women,
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
69
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
and could prevent 400,000
diarrheal deaths and save 14 million
Disability Adjusted Life Years
(DALYs).
o Nobel laureate Prof. Michael
Kremer’s research suggests that safe
water coverage could reduce
mortality among children under five
by nearly 30%, potentially saving
136,000 lives annually.
o The Indian Institute of Management
Bangalore, in partnership with the
International Labour Organization
(ILO), estimates that JJM
will generate 59.9 lakh person-years
of direct and 2.2 crore person-
years of indirect employment during
its capital expenditure phase.
Challenges
The mission faces several challenges, such
as a lack of dependable water sources in
certain areas, groundwater contamination,
uneven geographical terrain, scattered rural
habitations, and delays in obtaining
statutory clearances etc.
Issues have been raised for long-standing
water shortages and mismanagement.
It faces scrutiny for possible financial
mismanagement and lack of transparency.
Amrit Bharat Station Scheme
Syllabus: GS2/Governance
Context
Prime Minister Narendra Modi
inaugurated 103 redeveloped railway
stations under the Amrit Bharat Station
Scheme.
About
The 103 stations are spread across 86
districts in 18 states and union territories
and were developed at a cost of over Rs
1,100 crore.
Amrit Bharat Station Scheme
The scheme can be traced back to 2021,
when Gandhinagar became the first Railway
station to undergo modernization.
A total of 1,300 stations have been identified
for redevelopment under the scheme.
o Out of these, 157 are in Uttar
Pradesh, followed by 132 in
Maharashtra and 101 in West
Bengal.
The goal of the scheme is to make stations
cleaner, more comfortable, and easier to
use.
Local products will be sold at kiosks under
the ‘One Station One Product’ scheme, and
efforts will be made to make stations
look greener and more attractive.
One Station One Product
– ‘One Station One Product’ concept aims
to encourage indigenous and specialised
products and crafts of India through providing
display and sale outlets on railway stations across
the country.
– The products would be specific to the location,
including artefacts made by indigenous tribes,
handlooms by local weavers and products
indigenously grown in the area.
Cauvery Water Management Authority (CWMA)
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
The Cauvery Water Management Authority
(CWMA) reviewed the storage position of
all the reservoirs in the Cauvery river basin.
About
69
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
and could prevent 400,000
diarrheal deaths and save 14 million
Disability Adjusted Life Years
(DALYs).
o Nobel laureate Prof. Michael
Kremer’s research suggests that safe
water coverage could reduce
mortality among children under five
by nearly 30%, potentially saving
136,000 lives annually.
o The Indian Institute of Management
Bangalore, in partnership with the
International Labour Organization
(ILO), estimates that JJM
will generate 59.9 lakh person-years
of direct and 2.2 crore person-
years of indirect employment during
its capital expenditure phase.
Challenges
The mission faces several challenges, such
as a lack of dependable water sources in
certain areas, groundwater contamination,
uneven geographical terrain, scattered rural
habitations, and delays in obtaining
statutory clearances etc.
Issues have been raised for long-standing
water shortages and mismanagement.
It faces scrutiny for possible financial
mismanagement and lack of transparency.
Amrit Bharat Station Scheme
Syllabus: GS2/Governance
Context
Prime Minister Narendra Modi
inaugurated 103 redeveloped railway
stations under the Amrit Bharat Station
Scheme.
About
The 103 stations are spread across 86
districts in 18 states and union territories
and were developed at a cost of over Rs
1,100 crore.
Amrit Bharat Station Scheme
The scheme can be traced back to 2021,
when Gandhinagar became the first Railway
station to undergo modernization.
A total of 1,300 stations have been identified
for redevelopment under the scheme.
o Out of these, 157 are in Uttar
Pradesh, followed by 132 in
Maharashtra and 101 in West
Bengal.
The goal of the scheme is to make stations
cleaner, more comfortable, and easier to
use.
Local products will be sold at kiosks under
the ‘One Station One Product’ scheme, and
efforts will be made to make stations
look greener and more attractive.
One Station One Product
– ‘One Station One Product’ concept aims
to encourage indigenous and specialised
products and crafts of India through providing
display and sale outlets on railway stations across
the country.
– The products would be specific to the location,
including artefacts made by indigenous tribes,
handlooms by local weavers and products
indigenously grown in the area.
Cauvery Water Management Authority (CWMA)
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
The Cauvery Water Management Authority
(CWMA) reviewed the storage position of
all the reservoirs in the Cauvery river basin.
About
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
70
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
The Cauvery Water Management Authority
(CWMA) was constituted in 2018, under
Section 6A of the Inter-State River Water
Disputes Act, 1956, following the Supreme
Court judgment on the Cauvery Water
Dispute 2018.
Purpose: The distribution of Cauvery waters
among the states of Karnataka, Tamil Nadu,
Kerala, and the Union Territory of
Puducherry.
Parent Ministry: Ministry of Jal Shakti.
Functions of CWMA include:
o Ensuring implementation of the
Tribunal’s and Supreme Court’s
award.
o Monitoring storage, release, and
inflow data of major reservoirs on
the Cauvery.
o Supervising reservoir operations
and regulating water releases as per
schedules.
o Adjudicating or managing disputes
related to water releases among the
basin states.
Rising North East Investors Summit 2025
Syllabus: GS2/Governance/GS3/Infrastructure
Context
The Prime Minister inaugurated the Rising
North East Investors Summit 2025.
Summit Overview
Objective: Position the North East Region
(NER) as a land of opportunities for both
domestic and global investors.
Key Focus Sectors: Tourism & Hospitality,
Agro-Food Processing, Textiles, Handloom
& Handicrafts, Healthcare, Education &
Skills, IT & ITES, Infrastructure & Logistics,
Energy, Entertainment & Sports.
Vision for North East: Emphasized the
region’s crucial role in achieving a
Developed India.
o Highlighted that the North East is
transitioning from a frontier to a
front-runner of growth.
“EAST” Acronym: Empower, Act, Strengthen
and Transform.
Sectoral Opportunities: Urged investors to
explore opportunities in Energy,
Semiconductors, Eco-tourism, Bamboo and
bio-economy.
o Tea, petroleum, sports, and skill
development.
Tourism Potential: The region is a complete
tourism package, suitable for global
conferences, destination weddings, and
concerts.
Infrastructure Development: Investment of
thousands of crores in connectivity and
infrastructure.
Notable projects:
o Sela Tunnel (Arunachal Pradesh).
o Bhupen Hazarika Bridge (Assam).
o 11,000 km of new highways.
o Expansion of railways and airports.
o Waterways on Brahmaputra and
Barak rivers.
o 1,600 km Northeast Gas Grid.
o Installation of hundreds of mobile
towers.
North Eastern Region (NER)
The NER comprises eight States
viz. Arunachal Pradesh, Assam, Manipur,
Meghalaya, Mizoram, Nagaland, Sikkim and
Tripura.
This region is culturally and ethnically
diverse having more than 200 ethnic
groups which have distinct languages,
dialects and socio-cultural identities.
The Region covers 7.97% of the country’s
geographical area and 3.78% of its
population.
70
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
The Cauvery Water Management Authority
(CWMA) was constituted in 2018, under
Section 6A of the Inter-State River Water
Disputes Act, 1956, following the Supreme
Court judgment on the Cauvery Water
Dispute 2018.
Purpose: The distribution of Cauvery waters
among the states of Karnataka, Tamil Nadu,
Kerala, and the Union Territory of
Puducherry.
Parent Ministry: Ministry of Jal Shakti.
Functions of CWMA include:
o Ensuring implementation of the
Tribunal’s and Supreme Court’s
award.
o Monitoring storage, release, and
inflow data of major reservoirs on
the Cauvery.
o Supervising reservoir operations
and regulating water releases as per
schedules.
o Adjudicating or managing disputes
related to water releases among the
basin states.
Rising North East Investors Summit 2025
Syllabus: GS2/Governance/GS3/Infrastructure
Context
The Prime Minister inaugurated the Rising
North East Investors Summit 2025.
Summit Overview
Objective: Position the North East Region
(NER) as a land of opportunities for both
domestic and global investors.
Key Focus Sectors: Tourism & Hospitality,
Agro-Food Processing, Textiles, Handloom
& Handicrafts, Healthcare, Education &
Skills, IT & ITES, Infrastructure & Logistics,
Energy, Entertainment & Sports.
Vision for North East: Emphasized the
region’s crucial role in achieving a
Developed India.
o Highlighted that the North East is
transitioning from a frontier to a
front-runner of growth.
“EAST” Acronym: Empower, Act, Strengthen
and Transform.
Sectoral Opportunities: Urged investors to
explore opportunities in Energy,
Semiconductors, Eco-tourism, Bamboo and
bio-economy.
o Tea, petroleum, sports, and skill
development.
Tourism Potential: The region is a complete
tourism package, suitable for global
conferences, destination weddings, and
concerts.
Infrastructure Development: Investment of
thousands of crores in connectivity and
infrastructure.
Notable projects:
o Sela Tunnel (Arunachal Pradesh).
o Bhupen Hazarika Bridge (Assam).
o 11,000 km of new highways.
o Expansion of railways and airports.
o Waterways on Brahmaputra and
Barak rivers.
o 1,600 km Northeast Gas Grid.
o Installation of hundreds of mobile
towers.
North Eastern Region (NER)
The NER comprises eight States
viz. Arunachal Pradesh, Assam, Manipur,
Meghalaya, Mizoram, Nagaland, Sikkim and
Tripura.
This region is culturally and ethnically
diverse having more than 200 ethnic
groups which have distinct languages,
dialects and socio-cultural identities.
The Region covers 7.97% of the country’s
geographical area and 3.78% of its
population.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
71
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
It has 5,484 km of international border viz.
Bangladesh (1,880 km), Myanmar (1,643
km), China (1,346 km), Bhutan (516 km)
and Nepal (99 km).
Significance of the North East Region
Geostrategic Significance:
o International Borders: The NER
shares borders with five countries—
China, Bhutan, Myanmar,
Bangladesh, and Nepal which make
it strategically important.
o Gateway to ASEAN: It is a critical
link in India’s Act East Policy,
serving as a bridge to Southeast
Asia.
o Current India–ASEAN trade:
~$125 billion, projected to
exceed $200 billion.
o Strategic Military Importance: Due to
proximity to China, the region holds
significant defense value for
national security.
Economic and Trade Potential:
o Cross-Border Trade: Projects like
the Kaladan Multimodal Transit and
India-Myanmar-Thailand Trilateral
Highway boost trade with Southeast
Asia.
o Untapped markets and natural
resources make it ideal for early
investors in sectors like energy,
agriculture, tourism, and logistics.
Health, Wellness & Tourism: Offers clean
air, organic food, serene landscapes, and
rich tribal cultures.
o Ideal for wellness tourism, eco-
tourism, and adventure tourism.
o Rich cultural diversity (dance,
music, festivals) promotes cultural
diplomacy and soft power.
Challenges Faced by the Region
Poor connectivity: Difficult terrain and
underdeveloped road, rail, and air
networks.
Limited digital infrastructure: Though
improving, internet and telecom
connectivity are weaker compared to other
parts of India.
Insurgency and Internal Security
Issues: Presence of militant groups and
separatist movements in some areas.
o Cross-border infiltration and arms
smuggling due to porous borders
with Myanmar and Bangladesh.
o Although security has improved,
periodic unrest still affects peace
and progress.
Geographic and Environmental
Constraints: Hilly and forested terrain
makes development of infrastructure and
industries difficult and costly.
Ethnic Tensions and Migration Issues : Inter-
community tensions and demands for
autonomy or separate states lead to
uncertainty in the region.
o Illegal immigration from
neighboring countries has altered
demographics in some areas,
creating social unrest.
Way Ahead
Historically neglected, the northeast has
gained prominence in recent decades.
Its strategic value has increased due
to India’s ‘Act East’ Policy and evolving Indo-
Pacific geopolitical dynamics.
71
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
It has 5,484 km of international border viz.
Bangladesh (1,880 km), Myanmar (1,643
km), China (1,346 km), Bhutan (516 km)
and Nepal (99 km).
Significance of the North East Region
Geostrategic Significance:
o International Borders: The NER
shares borders with five countries—
China, Bhutan, Myanmar,
Bangladesh, and Nepal which make
it strategically important.
o Gateway to ASEAN: It is a critical
link in India’s Act East Policy,
serving as a bridge to Southeast
Asia.
o Current India–ASEAN trade:
~$125 billion, projected to
exceed $200 billion.
o Strategic Military Importance: Due to
proximity to China, the region holds
significant defense value for
national security.
Economic and Trade Potential:
o Cross-Border Trade: Projects like
the Kaladan Multimodal Transit and
India-Myanmar-Thailand Trilateral
Highway boost trade with Southeast
Asia.
o Untapped markets and natural
resources make it ideal for early
investors in sectors like energy,
agriculture, tourism, and logistics.
Health, Wellness & Tourism: Offers clean
air, organic food, serene landscapes, and
rich tribal cultures.
o Ideal for wellness tourism, eco-
tourism, and adventure tourism.
o Rich cultural diversity (dance,
music, festivals) promotes cultural
diplomacy and soft power.
Challenges Faced by the Region
Poor connectivity: Difficult terrain and
underdeveloped road, rail, and air
networks.
Limited digital infrastructure: Though
improving, internet and telecom
connectivity are weaker compared to other
parts of India.
Insurgency and Internal Security
Issues: Presence of militant groups and
separatist movements in some areas.
o Cross-border infiltration and arms
smuggling due to porous borders
with Myanmar and Bangladesh.
o Although security has improved,
periodic unrest still affects peace
and progress.
Geographic and Environmental
Constraints: Hilly and forested terrain
makes development of infrastructure and
industries difficult and costly.
Ethnic Tensions and Migration Issues : Inter-
community tensions and demands for
autonomy or separate states lead to
uncertainty in the region.
o Illegal immigration from
neighboring countries has altered
demographics in some areas,
creating social unrest.
Way Ahead
Historically neglected, the northeast has
gained prominence in recent decades.
Its strategic value has increased due
to India’s ‘Act East’ Policy and evolving Indo-
Pacific geopolitical dynamics.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
72
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
The region is now seen as a vital gateway for
India’s regional connectivity initiatives.
Ongoing connectivity efforts
require capacity-building for rail and road
projects and improved border
infrastructure.
The overarching goal is to maximise the
multi-dimensional potential of the northeast
and cement its role as a regional connectivity
hub.
Supreme Court Needs to Change from Being a Chief
Justice-Centric Court
Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance
Context
Former Supreme Court Judge, Justice A.S.
Oka, emphasized in a more democratic and
institutionalised manner rather than being
heavily centered around the Chief Justice of
India (CJI).
The Need for Reform
Master of the Roster Doctrine: As reaffirmed
in Shanti Bhushan vs. Supreme Court of India
(2018), the CJI alone decides;
o Which bench hears which case,
o Which judges are assigned to
benches,
o When the case is listed for hearing.
Constitution Bench Control: Although
Constitution Bench cases must consist of at
least five judges, it is often the CJI who;
o Decides when such benches are
constituted, and
o Frequently presides over them.
Control Over Court
Administration: According to State of
Rajasthan v. Prakash Chand (1998), while
the Chief Justice is ‘first among equals’ in
judicial matters, in administrative functions
he occupies a unique, dominant role. This
includes;
o Control over court registry,
o Determination of work allocation,
and
o Implementation of administrative
decisions without formal
consultation.
Strengthening the Lower Judiciary: Justice
Oka also emphasised the need to empower
the district judiciary, often termed the
“backbone” of India’s justice delivery
system.
Challenges emerging from this structure
Lack of Transparency: Litigants and even
fellow judges remain unaware of how cases
are allocated or delayed.
Delay in Justice: Cases of constitutional or
national importance have faced inordinate
delays due to the discretionary power of the
CJI in constituting benches.
Weakened Collegiality: The current
structure undermines judicial equality and
collective responsibility within the apex
court.
Steps taken for Increased Transparency
In 2018, a public roster system was
introduced by the Chief Justice of the
Supreme Court, to improve transparency in
the allocation of sensitive cases to judges.
CJI’s Office Under RTI (2019): In Subhash
Chandra Agarwal v. Supreme Court, a
Constitution Bench held that the office of
the CJI falls under the purview of the Right
to Information Act — a landmark step for
judicial transparency.
The Supreme Court uploaded details of
the appointment process for judges to High
Courts and the apex court, enhancing public
understanding of judicial selections.
Reforms Needed
Committee-Based Decision-
Making: Establishing internal committees
for Bench composition, Case listing, and
Administrative matters can decentralise
power and bring in broader institutional
input.
72
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
The region is now seen as a vital gateway for
India’s regional connectivity initiatives.
Ongoing connectivity efforts
require capacity-building for rail and road
projects and improved border
infrastructure.
The overarching goal is to maximise the
multi-dimensional potential of the northeast
and cement its role as a regional connectivity
hub.
Supreme Court Needs to Change from Being a Chief
Justice-Centric Court
Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance
Context
Former Supreme Court Judge, Justice A.S.
Oka, emphasized in a more democratic and
institutionalised manner rather than being
heavily centered around the Chief Justice of
India (CJI).
The Need for Reform
Master of the Roster Doctrine: As reaffirmed
in Shanti Bhushan vs. Supreme Court of India
(2018), the CJI alone decides;
o Which bench hears which case,
o Which judges are assigned to
benches,
o When the case is listed for hearing.
Constitution Bench Control: Although
Constitution Bench cases must consist of at
least five judges, it is often the CJI who;
o Decides when such benches are
constituted, and
o Frequently presides over them.
Control Over Court
Administration: According to State of
Rajasthan v. Prakash Chand (1998), while
the Chief Justice is ‘first among equals’ in
judicial matters, in administrative functions
he occupies a unique, dominant role. This
includes;
o Control over court registry,
o Determination of work allocation,
and
o Implementation of administrative
decisions without formal
consultation.
Strengthening the Lower Judiciary: Justice
Oka also emphasised the need to empower
the district judiciary, often termed the
“backbone” of India’s justice delivery
system.
Challenges emerging from this structure
Lack of Transparency: Litigants and even
fellow judges remain unaware of how cases
are allocated or delayed.
Delay in Justice: Cases of constitutional or
national importance have faced inordinate
delays due to the discretionary power of the
CJI in constituting benches.
Weakened Collegiality: The current
structure undermines judicial equality and
collective responsibility within the apex
court.
Steps taken for Increased Transparency
In 2018, a public roster system was
introduced by the Chief Justice of the
Supreme Court, to improve transparency in
the allocation of sensitive cases to judges.
CJI’s Office Under RTI (2019): In Subhash
Chandra Agarwal v. Supreme Court, a
Constitution Bench held that the office of
the CJI falls under the purview of the Right
to Information Act — a landmark step for
judicial transparency.
The Supreme Court uploaded details of
the appointment process for judges to High
Courts and the apex court, enhancing public
understanding of judicial selections.
Reforms Needed
Committee-Based Decision-
Making: Establishing internal committees
for Bench composition, Case listing, and
Administrative matters can decentralise
power and bring in broader institutional
input.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
73
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Transparent Listing Mechanism: Technology
must be used to automate the listing of
cases through an algorithm-based system
with minimal human discretion.
Collegiality in Constitution Bench
Assignments: A panel of senior judges could
collectively decide on the composition of
Constitution Benches and the timing of their
hearings, rather than relying on the sole
discretion of the CJI.
Concluding remarks
As the ultimate guardian of constitutional
rights, the Supreme Court must ensure that
it remains not only independent but also
institutionally robust, inclusive, and
transparent.
Moving away from a CJI-centric model
towards a more committee-based,
democratic structure would strengthen
judicial credibility, promote equal
responsibility among judges, and reinforce
the principle of justice for all.
NITI Aayog’s Governing Council
Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance
Context
PM Modi chaired the 10th meeting of the
NITI Aayog Governing Council held on the
theme of ‘Viksit Rajya for Viksit
Bharat@2047’.
Governing Council of NITI Aayog
The Governing Council embodies the
objectives of cooperative federalism and
presents a platform to discuss inter-
sectoral, inter-departmental and federal
issues to accelerate the implementation of
the national development agenda.
It comprises;
o The Prime Minister of India,
o Chief Ministers of all the States and
Union Territories with Legislature;
o The Lieutenant Governors of Union
Territories, except Delhi and
Puducherry,
o The Vice Chairman of NITI Aayog,
o Full-time members of NITI Aayog.
NITI Aayog
– Established: NITI Aayog (National Institution for
Transforming India) is a government think tank
established in 2015.
– Aim: It replaced the Planning Commission, aiming
to focus on more contemporary challenges like
sustainable development, policy innovation, and
governance reforms.
– Composition: It is led by the Prime Minister as the
Chairperson, with the Vice-Chairperson and CEO
leading the executive functions.
Panchayat Advancement Index (PAI) Version 2.0
Syllabus: GS2/Governance
Context
The Ministry of Panchayati Raj rolled out
Panchayat Advancement Index (PAI)
Version 2.0.
About
PAI is a multidimensional assessment
framework developed by the Ministry of
Panchayati Raj to enable
performance tracking of over 2.5 lakh Gram
Panchayats across nine themes aligned with
the Localization of Sustainable Development
Goals (LSDGs).
The nine LSDG-aligned themes
include: Poverty-free and Enhanced
Livelihoods, Healthy, Child-Friendly
Panchayat, Water-Sufficient Panchayat,
Clean and Green Panchayat, Panchayat with
Self-Sufficient Infrastructure, Socially Just
and Socially Secured, Panchayat with Good
Governance, and Women-Friendly.
The transition from PAI 1.0 to 2.0 reflects a
focused refinement of the framework, with
a sharper and more practical set of
indicators and data points.
Significance: It provides public
representatives, policy makers, government
agencies, and local authorities with valuable
73
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Transparent Listing Mechanism: Technology
must be used to automate the listing of
cases through an algorithm-based system
with minimal human discretion.
Collegiality in Constitution Bench
Assignments: A panel of senior judges could
collectively decide on the composition of
Constitution Benches and the timing of their
hearings, rather than relying on the sole
discretion of the CJI.
Concluding remarks
As the ultimate guardian of constitutional
rights, the Supreme Court must ensure that
it remains not only independent but also
institutionally robust, inclusive, and
transparent.
Moving away from a CJI-centric model
towards a more committee-based,
democratic structure would strengthen
judicial credibility, promote equal
responsibility among judges, and reinforce
the principle of justice for all.
NITI Aayog’s Governing Council
Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance
Context
PM Modi chaired the 10th meeting of the
NITI Aayog Governing Council held on the
theme of ‘Viksit Rajya for Viksit
Bharat@2047’.
Governing Council of NITI Aayog
The Governing Council embodies the
objectives of cooperative federalism and
presents a platform to discuss inter-
sectoral, inter-departmental and federal
issues to accelerate the implementation of
the national development agenda.
It comprises;
o The Prime Minister of India,
o Chief Ministers of all the States and
Union Territories with Legislature;
o The Lieutenant Governors of Union
Territories, except Delhi and
Puducherry,
o The Vice Chairman of NITI Aayog,
o Full-time members of NITI Aayog.
NITI Aayog
– Established: NITI Aayog (National Institution for
Transforming India) is a government think tank
established in 2015.
– Aim: It replaced the Planning Commission, aiming
to focus on more contemporary challenges like
sustainable development, policy innovation, and
governance reforms.
– Composition: It is led by the Prime Minister as the
Chairperson, with the Vice-Chairperson and CEO
leading the executive functions.
Panchayat Advancement Index (PAI) Version 2.0
Syllabus: GS2/Governance
Context
The Ministry of Panchayati Raj rolled out
Panchayat Advancement Index (PAI)
Version 2.0.
About
PAI is a multidimensional assessment
framework developed by the Ministry of
Panchayati Raj to enable
performance tracking of over 2.5 lakh Gram
Panchayats across nine themes aligned with
the Localization of Sustainable Development
Goals (LSDGs).
The nine LSDG-aligned themes
include: Poverty-free and Enhanced
Livelihoods, Healthy, Child-Friendly
Panchayat, Water-Sufficient Panchayat,
Clean and Green Panchayat, Panchayat with
Self-Sufficient Infrastructure, Socially Just
and Socially Secured, Panchayat with Good
Governance, and Women-Friendly.
The transition from PAI 1.0 to 2.0 reflects a
focused refinement of the framework, with
a sharper and more practical set of
indicators and data points.
Significance: It provides public
representatives, policy makers, government
agencies, and local authorities with valuable
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
74
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
insights into the areas that require
attention.
Government mulls 15-year Stay Requirement for
Ladakh Domicile Tag
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
The Union Government is considering a new
policy for Ladakh under which citizens who
have had a continuous 15-year stay in the
region, beginning 2019, will be considered
domiciles.
About
The consensus was reached at a high-
powered committee meeting between civil
society leaders and the Ministry of Home
Affairs (MHA).
o The HPC led by Minister of State for
Home Nityanand Rai was first
constituted in 2023 to address the
concerns of people in Ladakh.
Any ‘outsider’ who settled in Ladakh after
its special status along with that of Jammu
and Kashmir (J&K) was struck down in
2019 will be considered a domicile only
after 2034.
o The definition is important to
decide eligibility to apply for 5%
gazetted government vacancies as
many citizens feared that people
from other parts of the country
would take away the jobs of the
locals.
If Proposal is approved then, at least 80%
vacancies would be reserved for Scheduled
Tribes (ST), 4% for people living along the
Line of Actual Control/Line of Control, 1%
for Scheduled Castes and 10% for
Economically Weaker Sections (EWS).
Background
Ladakh became a Union Territory
in 2019 without a Legislative Assembly
after Article 370 of the Constitution was
read down by the Parliament.
A year later, the region comprising
Buddhist-dominated Leh and Muslim-
dominated Kargil district, erupted in
protests pressing forth constitutional
safeguards such as Statehood for Ladakh,
inclusion of Ladakh in the Sixth Schedule of
the Constitution thus giving it a tribal status,
job reservation for locals and a
parliamentary seat each for Leh and Kargil.
Since it became a UT, recruitment for
gazetted government posts is yet to begin in
Ladakh.
J&K Domicile Policy 2020
– It removed the concept of permanent residents
and introduced new policy which states:
1. that anyone “who has resided for a period of 15
years in the UT of J&K
2. or has studied for a period of seven years and
appeared in Class 10th /12th examination in an
educational institution located in the UT of J&K
3. or who is registered as a migrant by the Relief
and Rehabilitation Commissioner (Migrants)” will
be considered a domicile.
4. Children of Central government officials who
have served in J&K for a “total period of 10 years”
will also be domiciles.
5. It will allow West Pakistan refugees and children
of women who married non-locals to apply for jobs
in J&K.
Major Concerns of People of Ladakh
Lack of Political Autonomy: As a Union
Territory without an assembly, all major
decisions are taken by the Lieutenant
Governor and central ministries, which
limits local involvement.
Demographic Changes: There is fear of a
demographic imbalance due to migration,
which could threaten the cultural and ethnic
composition of the region.
Environmental Degradation: Rapid
infrastructure development and mass
tourism have led to depletion of water
sources, waste problems, and ecological
stress.
Youth Discontent: High unemployment and
lack of educational and professional
74
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
insights into the areas that require
attention.
Government mulls 15-year Stay Requirement for
Ladakh Domicile Tag
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
The Union Government is considering a new
policy for Ladakh under which citizens who
have had a continuous 15-year stay in the
region, beginning 2019, will be considered
domiciles.
About
The consensus was reached at a high-
powered committee meeting between civil
society leaders and the Ministry of Home
Affairs (MHA).
o The HPC led by Minister of State for
Home Nityanand Rai was first
constituted in 2023 to address the
concerns of people in Ladakh.
Any ‘outsider’ who settled in Ladakh after
its special status along with that of Jammu
and Kashmir (J&K) was struck down in
2019 will be considered a domicile only
after 2034.
o The definition is important to
decide eligibility to apply for 5%
gazetted government vacancies as
many citizens feared that people
from other parts of the country
would take away the jobs of the
locals.
If Proposal is approved then, at least 80%
vacancies would be reserved for Scheduled
Tribes (ST), 4% for people living along the
Line of Actual Control/Line of Control, 1%
for Scheduled Castes and 10% for
Economically Weaker Sections (EWS).
Background
Ladakh became a Union Territory
in 2019 without a Legislative Assembly
after Article 370 of the Constitution was
read down by the Parliament.
A year later, the region comprising
Buddhist-dominated Leh and Muslim-
dominated Kargil district, erupted in
protests pressing forth constitutional
safeguards such as Statehood for Ladakh,
inclusion of Ladakh in the Sixth Schedule of
the Constitution thus giving it a tribal status,
job reservation for locals and a
parliamentary seat each for Leh and Kargil.
Since it became a UT, recruitment for
gazetted government posts is yet to begin in
Ladakh.
J&K Domicile Policy 2020
– It removed the concept of permanent residents
and introduced new policy which states:
1. that anyone “who has resided for a period of 15
years in the UT of J&K
2. or has studied for a period of seven years and
appeared in Class 10th /12th examination in an
educational institution located in the UT of J&K
3. or who is registered as a migrant by the Relief
and Rehabilitation Commissioner (Migrants)” will
be considered a domicile.
4. Children of Central government officials who
have served in J&K for a “total period of 10 years”
will also be domiciles.
5. It will allow West Pakistan refugees and children
of women who married non-locals to apply for jobs
in J&K.
Major Concerns of People of Ladakh
Lack of Political Autonomy: As a Union
Territory without an assembly, all major
decisions are taken by the Lieutenant
Governor and central ministries, which
limits local involvement.
Demographic Changes: There is fear of a
demographic imbalance due to migration,
which could threaten the cultural and ethnic
composition of the region.
Environmental Degradation: Rapid
infrastructure development and mass
tourism have led to depletion of water
sources, waste problems, and ecological
stress.
Youth Discontent: High unemployment and
lack of educational and professional
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
75
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
opportunities are fueling frustration among
youth.
Key Demands
Constitutional Safeguards (Sixth
Schedule): Ladakhis seek inclusion under
the Sixth Schedule of the Indian
Constitution, which provides autonomy and
land protection for tribal areas.
Full-fledged Statehood or Legislative
Assembly: Currently, Ladakh is a Union
Territory without a legislative assembly.
o There is a demand for greater
political representation and
democratic governance through
either full statehood or a legislature
for better local decision-making.
Job Reservation and Local Employment
Opportunities: Locals demand reservation
in government jobs and priority in private
sector employment for Ladakhis.
o Concerns about outsiders occupying
government and private posts have
led to calls for exclusive job quotas.
Environmental Protection Laws: Given
Ladakh’s fragile ecosystem, there is a
demand for strict environmental
regulations to curb unplanned tourism and
infrastructure projects.
Protection of Cultural and Religious
Heritage: The Buddhist population,
particularly in Leh, seeks protection of
Tibetan-Buddhist heritage and monastic
traditions.
o There is concern about the erosion
of cultural identity due to external
influences and rapid modernization.
Economic Development with Local
Participation: There are demands for
inclusive development that benefits local
communities, especially in sectors like
tourism, solar energy, and agriculture.
Sixth Schedule of the Constitution
– The Sixth Schedule was adopted under Article
244 of the Constitution with provisions for
formation of autonomous administrative divisions
within a state.
1. The Sixth Schedule is applicable to what are
officially called as ‘tribal areas’ in the States
of Assam, Meghalaya, Mizoram and Tripura. There
are 10 such ‘tribal areas’ at present in these four
States.
2. These divisions, in the form of Autonomous
District Councils (ADCs), were granted
certain legislative, judicial and administrative
autonomy within the state.
– Composition: According to the Sixth Schedule, the
ADCs administering a region within a state have 30
members with a term of five years.
1. The Bodoland Territorial Council in Assam is an
exception to this with more than 40 members and
rights to make laws on 39 issues.
– Jurisdiction: ADCs can make laws, rules and
regulations with regard to land, forest, water,
agriculture, village councils, health, sanitation,
village and town level policing, inheritance of
property, marriage and divorce, social customs,
and mining, among other issues.
1. ADCs also have powers to form courts to hear
cases where both parties are members of
Scheduled Tribes and the maximum sentence is
less than 5 years in prison
Way Ahead
A sustainable and peaceful future for
Ladakh requires a careful balancing of
national interests with local aspirations.
Recognizing the unique cultural,
geographical, and demographic
characteristics of the region — and
embedding these into governance
structures — will be key to ensuring long-
term stability and satisfaction among
Ladakh’s people.
Importance of the Deputy Speaker in Lok Sabha
Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance
Context
The position of the Deputy Speaker has
been lying vacant for the last six years
raising questions on constitutional
adherence and democratic resilience.
Deputy Speaker of Lok Sabha
75
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
opportunities are fueling frustration among
youth.
Key Demands
Constitutional Safeguards (Sixth
Schedule): Ladakhis seek inclusion under
the Sixth Schedule of the Indian
Constitution, which provides autonomy and
land protection for tribal areas.
Full-fledged Statehood or Legislative
Assembly: Currently, Ladakh is a Union
Territory without a legislative assembly.
o There is a demand for greater
political representation and
democratic governance through
either full statehood or a legislature
for better local decision-making.
Job Reservation and Local Employment
Opportunities: Locals demand reservation
in government jobs and priority in private
sector employment for Ladakhis.
o Concerns about outsiders occupying
government and private posts have
led to calls for exclusive job quotas.
Environmental Protection Laws: Given
Ladakh’s fragile ecosystem, there is a
demand for strict environmental
regulations to curb unplanned tourism and
infrastructure projects.
Protection of Cultural and Religious
Heritage: The Buddhist population,
particularly in Leh, seeks protection of
Tibetan-Buddhist heritage and monastic
traditions.
o There is concern about the erosion
of cultural identity due to external
influences and rapid modernization.
Economic Development with Local
Participation: There are demands for
inclusive development that benefits local
communities, especially in sectors like
tourism, solar energy, and agriculture.
Sixth Schedule of the Constitution
– The Sixth Schedule was adopted under Article
244 of the Constitution with provisions for
formation of autonomous administrative divisions
within a state.
1. The Sixth Schedule is applicable to what are
officially called as ‘tribal areas’ in the States
of Assam, Meghalaya, Mizoram and Tripura. There
are 10 such ‘tribal areas’ at present in these four
States.
2. These divisions, in the form of Autonomous
District Councils (ADCs), were granted
certain legislative, judicial and administrative
autonomy within the state.
– Composition: According to the Sixth Schedule, the
ADCs administering a region within a state have 30
members with a term of five years.
1. The Bodoland Territorial Council in Assam is an
exception to this with more than 40 members and
rights to make laws on 39 issues.
– Jurisdiction: ADCs can make laws, rules and
regulations with regard to land, forest, water,
agriculture, village councils, health, sanitation,
village and town level policing, inheritance of
property, marriage and divorce, social customs,
and mining, among other issues.
1. ADCs also have powers to form courts to hear
cases where both parties are members of
Scheduled Tribes and the maximum sentence is
less than 5 years in prison
Way Ahead
A sustainable and peaceful future for
Ladakh requires a careful balancing of
national interests with local aspirations.
Recognizing the unique cultural,
geographical, and demographic
characteristics of the region — and
embedding these into governance
structures — will be key to ensuring long-
term stability and satisfaction among
Ladakh’s people.
Importance of the Deputy Speaker in Lok Sabha
Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance
Context
The position of the Deputy Speaker has
been lying vacant for the last six years
raising questions on constitutional
adherence and democratic resilience.
Deputy Speaker of Lok Sabha
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
76
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
The Deputy Speaker serves as the Second-
in-Command Presiding Officer of the Lower
House of Parliament of India – the Lok
Sabha.
According to Article 95(1), the Deputy
Speaker performs the duties of the Speaker
if the post is vacant.
The Deputy Speaker acts as the Speaker
when the latter is absent from the sitting of
the House.
The Deputy Speaker presides over joint
sittings of both Houses of Parliament in case
the Speaker is absent from such a sitting.
Election of Deputy Speaker
The Deputy Speaker of Lok Sabha is elected
by the Lok Sabha itself from amongst its
members.
Article 93 states that “The House of the
People shall, as soon as may be, choose two
members of the House to be respectively
Speaker and Deputy Speaker”.
The election of Deputy Speaker is governed
by Rule 8 of the Rules of Procedure and
Conduct of Business in Lok Sabha. According
to Rule 8, the election “shall be held on such
date as the Speaker may fix”.
Usually, the Speaker is chosen from the
ruling party or ruling alliance, while
the Deputy Speaker is selected from the
opposition party or opposition alliance.
o However, there have been
exceptions to this convention.
o The first four Deputy Speakers, from
1952 to 1969, were from the ruling
party.
o There was no Deputy Speaker for
the entire duration of the 17th Lok
Sabha (2019-24).
Powers and Privileges
While performing the duties of or acting as
the Speaker of Lok Sabha (i.e. while
presiding over the sitting of Lok Sabha or a
Joint Sitting of both the Houses), he/she
assumes all the powers of the Speaker of
Lok Sabha.
o Thus, in such times, the Deputy
Speaker cannot vote in the first
instance, rather he/she can
only exercise a Casting Vote in case
of a tie.
When the Speaker presides over the House,
the Deputy Speaker is like any other
Ordinary Member of the House.
o Thus, in such times, the Deputy
Speaker can speak in the House,
participate in its proceedings, and
vote in the first instance on any
question before the House.
He/she has one special privilege -Whenever
the Deputy Speaker of Lok Sabha is
appointed as a member of a Parliamentary
Committee, he/she automatically becomes
its chairman.
Removal of Deputy Speaker of Lok Sabha
The Deputy Speaker of Lok Sabha can be
removed by a resolution passed by the Lok
Sabha by an Effective Majority (i.e. a
majority of the total membership of the
House excluding the vacant seats).
A motion of removal of the Deputy Speaker
of Lok Sabha can be moved only after
giving 14 days’ advance notice to the
Speaker.
When a resolution for removal of the
Deputy Speaker is under
consideration, he/she cannot preside at the
sitting of the house, though he may be
present.
Concerns Over Prolonged Vacancy
The absence of the Deputy
Speaker contradicts the intent of
constitutional norms and undermines the
concept of an inclusive and pluralist
parliamentary democracy.
It dilutes the representational
balance between government and
Opposition.
76
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
The Deputy Speaker serves as the Second-
in-Command Presiding Officer of the Lower
House of Parliament of India – the Lok
Sabha.
According to Article 95(1), the Deputy
Speaker performs the duties of the Speaker
if the post is vacant.
The Deputy Speaker acts as the Speaker
when the latter is absent from the sitting of
the House.
The Deputy Speaker presides over joint
sittings of both Houses of Parliament in case
the Speaker is absent from such a sitting.
Election of Deputy Speaker
The Deputy Speaker of Lok Sabha is elected
by the Lok Sabha itself from amongst its
members.
Article 93 states that “The House of the
People shall, as soon as may be, choose two
members of the House to be respectively
Speaker and Deputy Speaker”.
The election of Deputy Speaker is governed
by Rule 8 of the Rules of Procedure and
Conduct of Business in Lok Sabha. According
to Rule 8, the election “shall be held on such
date as the Speaker may fix”.
Usually, the Speaker is chosen from the
ruling party or ruling alliance, while
the Deputy Speaker is selected from the
opposition party or opposition alliance.
o However, there have been
exceptions to this convention.
o The first four Deputy Speakers, from
1952 to 1969, were from the ruling
party.
o There was no Deputy Speaker for
the entire duration of the 17th Lok
Sabha (2019-24).
Powers and Privileges
While performing the duties of or acting as
the Speaker of Lok Sabha (i.e. while
presiding over the sitting of Lok Sabha or a
Joint Sitting of both the Houses), he/she
assumes all the powers of the Speaker of
Lok Sabha.
o Thus, in such times, the Deputy
Speaker cannot vote in the first
instance, rather he/she can
only exercise a Casting Vote in case
of a tie.
When the Speaker presides over the House,
the Deputy Speaker is like any other
Ordinary Member of the House.
o Thus, in such times, the Deputy
Speaker can speak in the House,
participate in its proceedings, and
vote in the first instance on any
question before the House.
He/she has one special privilege -Whenever
the Deputy Speaker of Lok Sabha is
appointed as a member of a Parliamentary
Committee, he/she automatically becomes
its chairman.
Removal of Deputy Speaker of Lok Sabha
The Deputy Speaker of Lok Sabha can be
removed by a resolution passed by the Lok
Sabha by an Effective Majority (i.e. a
majority of the total membership of the
House excluding the vacant seats).
A motion of removal of the Deputy Speaker
of Lok Sabha can be moved only after
giving 14 days’ advance notice to the
Speaker.
When a resolution for removal of the
Deputy Speaker is under
consideration, he/she cannot preside at the
sitting of the house, though he may be
present.
Concerns Over Prolonged Vacancy
The absence of the Deputy
Speaker contradicts the intent of
constitutional norms and undermines the
concept of an inclusive and pluralist
parliamentary democracy.
It dilutes the representational
balance between government and
Opposition.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
77
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
In the event of the Speaker’s resignation or
incapacity, legislative functioning may stall,
leading to institutional paralysis.
Concluding remarks
The office of the Deputy Speaker is a
constitutional necessity, not a political
choice. Its prolonged vacancy violates the
spirit of the Constitution and undermines
democratic norms.
The issue calls for urgent correction to
restore institutional balance and ensure the
proper functioning of the Lok Sabha in
accordance with constitutional values.
Appraisal of CSSs and CSs Ahead of the 16th Finance
Commission Cycle
Syllabus: GS2/ Governance
In News
The Department of Expenditure, Ministry of
Finance has initiated a comprehensive
exercise to appraise and approve Centrally
Sponsored Schemes (CSSs) and Central
Sector Schemes (CSs) for continuation post
March 2026.
o This aligns with the 16th Finance
Commission cycle starting 1st April
2026.
About
The foundation of this appraisal exercise
lies in the 2016 Union Budget, which
formally introduced the policy of assigning
a sunset clause and outcome-based
evaluation for every centrally funded
scheme.
The goal was to ensure that no scheme
continues indefinitely without proven
effectiveness and relevance.
For Centrally Sponsored Schemes (CSSs), the
Development Monitoring and Evaluation
Organisation (DMEO) under NITI Aayog is
responsible for conducting evaluations.
For Central Sector Schemes (CSs), the
concerned ministries select third-party
agencies to assess outcomes and
performance.
Significance of the Reappraisal Exercise
Outcome-Driven Governance: Aligning
schemes with measurable outcomes
through third-party evaluations ensures
evidence-based policymaking.
o It eliminates continuation of
underperforming or redundant
schemes.
Fiscal Consolidation and Optimal Resource
Use: Helps contain revenue expenditure and
create fiscal space for capital-intensive
projects.
o Example: Capital expenditure for FY
2025–26 (BE) stands at ₹11.21 lakh
crore, enabled by similar
rationalisation in the past.
Scheme Convergence and
Efficiency: Integration of overlapping
schemes reduces duplication,
administrative costs, and enhances
synergies (e.g., health + nutrition + WASH).
Digital Targeting and DBT
Integration: Linking schemes with universal
Aadhaar-based DBT enhances transparency,
reduces leakages, and ensures last-mile
delivery.
India @100 Vision Alignment: Facilitates
policy alignment with long-term
developmental goals such as infrastructure,
health, education, and innovation.
Challenges in Recalibrating Schemes
Political and Federal Sensitivities: States
may resist merger or closure of schemes
due to regional priorities or electoral
concerns.
o CSSs often involve shared
finances—creating friction over
cost-sharing ratios.
Institutional Inertia and Bureaucratic
Resistance: Ministries may be reluctant to
let go of legacy schemes due to vested
interests or fear of budget cuts.
77
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
In the event of the Speaker’s resignation or
incapacity, legislative functioning may stall,
leading to institutional paralysis.
Concluding remarks
The office of the Deputy Speaker is a
constitutional necessity, not a political
choice. Its prolonged vacancy violates the
spirit of the Constitution and undermines
democratic norms.
The issue calls for urgent correction to
restore institutional balance and ensure the
proper functioning of the Lok Sabha in
accordance with constitutional values.
Appraisal of CSSs and CSs Ahead of the 16th Finance
Commission Cycle
Syllabus: GS2/ Governance
In News
The Department of Expenditure, Ministry of
Finance has initiated a comprehensive
exercise to appraise and approve Centrally
Sponsored Schemes (CSSs) and Central
Sector Schemes (CSs) for continuation post
March 2026.
o This aligns with the 16th Finance
Commission cycle starting 1st April
2026.
About
The foundation of this appraisal exercise
lies in the 2016 Union Budget, which
formally introduced the policy of assigning
a sunset clause and outcome-based
evaluation for every centrally funded
scheme.
The goal was to ensure that no scheme
continues indefinitely without proven
effectiveness and relevance.
For Centrally Sponsored Schemes (CSSs), the
Development Monitoring and Evaluation
Organisation (DMEO) under NITI Aayog is
responsible for conducting evaluations.
For Central Sector Schemes (CSs), the
concerned ministries select third-party
agencies to assess outcomes and
performance.
Significance of the Reappraisal Exercise
Outcome-Driven Governance: Aligning
schemes with measurable outcomes
through third-party evaluations ensures
evidence-based policymaking.
o It eliminates continuation of
underperforming or redundant
schemes.
Fiscal Consolidation and Optimal Resource
Use: Helps contain revenue expenditure and
create fiscal space for capital-intensive
projects.
o Example: Capital expenditure for FY
2025–26 (BE) stands at ₹11.21 lakh
crore, enabled by similar
rationalisation in the past.
Scheme Convergence and
Efficiency: Integration of overlapping
schemes reduces duplication,
administrative costs, and enhances
synergies (e.g., health + nutrition + WASH).
Digital Targeting and DBT
Integration: Linking schemes with universal
Aadhaar-based DBT enhances transparency,
reduces leakages, and ensures last-mile
delivery.
India @100 Vision Alignment: Facilitates
policy alignment with long-term
developmental goals such as infrastructure,
health, education, and innovation.
Challenges in Recalibrating Schemes
Political and Federal Sensitivities: States
may resist merger or closure of schemes
due to regional priorities or electoral
concerns.
o CSSs often involve shared
finances—creating friction over
cost-sharing ratios.
Institutional Inertia and Bureaucratic
Resistance: Ministries may be reluctant to
let go of legacy schemes due to vested
interests or fear of budget cuts.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
78
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Evaluation Limitations: Quality and
neutrality of third-party evaluations vary;
some schemes lack robust data for review.
Implementation Gaps: Even well-designed
schemes fail due to weak implementation
capacity, especially at district and local
levels.
Transition Risks: Phasing out schemes
without adequate transition planning may
disrupt service delivery.
Way Forward
Strengthen Evaluation Frameworks: DMEO-
NITI Aayog and Ministry-appointed
agencies must adopt uniform standards,
real-time MIS integration, and participatory
evaluation.
Swachh Survekshan Grameen (SSG) 2025
Syllabus: GS2/Governance
In News
Union Minister of Jal Shakti Shri C R Patil
launched Swachh Survekshan Grameen
(SSG) 2025.
Swachh Survekshan Grameen (SSG) 2025
It is a nationwide rural sanitation survey by
the Department of Drinking Water and
Sanitation (DDWS), Ministry of Jal Shakti.
It is India’s largest sanitation survey and
The first Swachh Survekshan was
conducted in 2016, in which 73 cities were
evaluated and Mysuru was ranked first in
the country.
Features
It will conduct a comprehensive assessment
of rural sanitation, with a strong focus on
sustaining the achievements of the Open
Defecation Free (ODF) Plus Model under the
Swachh Bharat Mission-Gramin (SBM-G).
The survey will involve sampling village
evaluations and detailed surveys of
households and public spaces to measure
cleanliness across various parameters.
Key areas of assessment include the
operational status of Plastic Waste
Management Units (PWMUs), Faecal Sludge
Management (FSM) plants, and GOBARdhan
plants, along with citizen feedback and the
evaluation of Swachhata Green Leaf Rating
(SGLR) sites.
Importance
Swachh Survekshan Grameen 2025
represents a crucial milestone in advancing
India’s vision of clean, healthy, and
sustainable rural communities.
It emphasizes the collaborative efforts of
Panchayats, local leaders, frontline workers,
and citizens in strengthening rural
sanitation.
This initiative will play a key role in shaping
the future of rural hygiene and bringing the
nation closer to realizing the goal of a
Swachh Bharat.
The Swachh Bharat Mission (Grameen) [SBM(G)]
– It was launched on 2nd October 2014 to
eliminate open defecation in rural India by
providing toilet access to all rural households.
1. By 2nd October 2019, the mission had achieved
100% sanitation coverage, constructing over 10
crore Individual Household Latrines (IHHLs) and
declaring all villages Open Defecation Free (ODF).
– Phase-II of SBM(G) was initiated on 1st April
2020, focusing on sustaining ODF status and
implementing Solid and Liquid Waste Management
(SLWM) to transition villages to ODF Plus (Model)
status by 2025-26.
2. The ODF Plus progress is tracked through three
categories: Aspiring, Rising, and Model.
Foster Centre-State
Coordination: Transparent dialogue and
incentive-based funding to secure state buy-
in for scheme redesign.
Digital Infrastructure for Scheme
Monitoring: Expand platforms like PFMS
and JanSamarth to track disbursements,
outputs, and impact.
78
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Evaluation Limitations: Quality and
neutrality of third-party evaluations vary;
some schemes lack robust data for review.
Implementation Gaps: Even well-designed
schemes fail due to weak implementation
capacity, especially at district and local
levels.
Transition Risks: Phasing out schemes
without adequate transition planning may
disrupt service delivery.
Way Forward
Strengthen Evaluation Frameworks: DMEO-
NITI Aayog and Ministry-appointed
agencies must adopt uniform standards,
real-time MIS integration, and participatory
evaluation.
Swachh Survekshan Grameen (SSG) 2025
Syllabus: GS2/Governance
In News
Union Minister of Jal Shakti Shri C R Patil
launched Swachh Survekshan Grameen
(SSG) 2025.
Swachh Survekshan Grameen (SSG) 2025
It is a nationwide rural sanitation survey by
the Department of Drinking Water and
Sanitation (DDWS), Ministry of Jal Shakti.
It is India’s largest sanitation survey and
The first Swachh Survekshan was
conducted in 2016, in which 73 cities were
evaluated and Mysuru was ranked first in
the country.
Features
It will conduct a comprehensive assessment
of rural sanitation, with a strong focus on
sustaining the achievements of the Open
Defecation Free (ODF) Plus Model under the
Swachh Bharat Mission-Gramin (SBM-G).
The survey will involve sampling village
evaluations and detailed surveys of
households and public spaces to measure
cleanliness across various parameters.
Key areas of assessment include the
operational status of Plastic Waste
Management Units (PWMUs), Faecal Sludge
Management (FSM) plants, and GOBARdhan
plants, along with citizen feedback and the
evaluation of Swachhata Green Leaf Rating
(SGLR) sites.
Importance
Swachh Survekshan Grameen 2025
represents a crucial milestone in advancing
India’s vision of clean, healthy, and
sustainable rural communities.
It emphasizes the collaborative efforts of
Panchayats, local leaders, frontline workers,
and citizens in strengthening rural
sanitation.
This initiative will play a key role in shaping
the future of rural hygiene and bringing the
nation closer to realizing the goal of a
Swachh Bharat.
The Swachh Bharat Mission (Grameen) [SBM(G)]
– It was launched on 2nd October 2014 to
eliminate open defecation in rural India by
providing toilet access to all rural households.
1. By 2nd October 2019, the mission had achieved
100% sanitation coverage, constructing over 10
crore Individual Household Latrines (IHHLs) and
declaring all villages Open Defecation Free (ODF).
– Phase-II of SBM(G) was initiated on 1st April
2020, focusing on sustaining ODF status and
implementing Solid and Liquid Waste Management
(SLWM) to transition villages to ODF Plus (Model)
status by 2025-26.
2. The ODF Plus progress is tracked through three
categories: Aspiring, Rising, and Model.
Foster Centre-State
Coordination: Transparent dialogue and
incentive-based funding to secure state buy-
in for scheme redesign.
Digital Infrastructure for Scheme
Monitoring: Expand platforms like PFMS
and JanSamarth to track disbursements,
outputs, and impact.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
79
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Aspect
Centrally
Sponsored
Schemes
(CSSs)
Central Sector
Schemes (CSs)
Funding
Pattern
Shared
between
Centre and
State
Government
s. [60:40
(General
States),
90:10 (NE
and
Himalayan
States)]
Fully funded by the
Central Government
(100%)
Implementatio
n
Implemente
d by State
Government
s
Implemented directly
by Central
Ministries/Departmen
ts
Constitutional
Jurisdiction
Focuses on
State List
and
Concurrent
List subjects
Focuses on Union List
subjects
Control
Joint control
– Centre
provides
guidelines;
States
execute
Central control –
planned, executed,
and monitored by
Centre
Objective
To ensure
national
developmen
t with state
involvement
To implement
strategic or priority
initiatives of national
interest
Examples
MGNREGA,
ICDS, PMAY-
G, NHM,
Samagra
Shiksha
BharatNet, PM-
KUSUM, INSPIRE,
DRDO R&D schemes
INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS
India’s Growing Engagement in Arctic Region
Syllabus :GS 2/IR
In News
At the Arctic Circle India Forum 2025,
External Affairs Minister Dr. S. Jaishankar
emphasized the global significance of the
Arctic and India’s growing involvement in
the region.
Arctic Region
It is a vast, diverse region spanning 24 time
zones, eight countries, and three continents,
with varying climatic conditions,
development levels, and cultural
landscapes.
It includes both ice-free areas, like parts of
Norway and Northwest Russia, and ice-
covered regions, such as Alaska and
Canada.
It was once a zone of scientific cooperation
and environmental protection, and is
becoming a site of military and geopolitical
competition due to growing global interest.
India’s Arctic strategy
It began with a scientific focus, and has
evolved since the early 2020s to
incorporate broader geopolitical
considerations.
India has maintained a presence in
the Arctic since 2008, with the
establishment of the Himadri research
station in Svalbard.
In 2022, it formalized its ambitions through
the release of an Arctic Policy.
o This shift was driven by changes in
the global security environment,
including deteriorating relations
between Russia and the West and
China’s growing Arctic cooperation
with Russia.
o India’s 2022 Arctic Policy focuses on
climate science, environmental
protection, and sustainable
development, emphasizing the
79
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Aspect
Centrally
Sponsored
Schemes
(CSSs)
Central Sector
Schemes (CSs)
Funding
Pattern
Shared
between
Centre and
State
Government
s. [60:40
(General
States),
90:10 (NE
and
Himalayan
States)]
Fully funded by the
Central Government
(100%)
Implementatio
n
Implemente
d by State
Government
s
Implemented directly
by Central
Ministries/Departmen
ts
Constitutional
Jurisdiction
Focuses on
State List
and
Concurrent
List subjects
Focuses on Union List
subjects
Control
Joint control
– Centre
provides
guidelines;
States
execute
Central control –
planned, executed,
and monitored by
Centre
Objective
To ensure
national
developmen
t with state
involvement
To implement
strategic or priority
initiatives of national
interest
Examples
MGNREGA,
ICDS, PMAY-
G, NHM,
Samagra
Shiksha
BharatNet, PM-
KUSUM, INSPIRE,
DRDO R&D schemes
INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS
India’s Growing Engagement in Arctic Region
Syllabus :GS 2/IR
In News
At the Arctic Circle India Forum 2025,
External Affairs Minister Dr. S. Jaishankar
emphasized the global significance of the
Arctic and India’s growing involvement in
the region.
Arctic Region
It is a vast, diverse region spanning 24 time
zones, eight countries, and three continents,
with varying climatic conditions,
development levels, and cultural
landscapes.
It includes both ice-free areas, like parts of
Norway and Northwest Russia, and ice-
covered regions, such as Alaska and
Canada.
It was once a zone of scientific cooperation
and environmental protection, and is
becoming a site of military and geopolitical
competition due to growing global interest.
India’s Arctic strategy
It began with a scientific focus, and has
evolved since the early 2020s to
incorporate broader geopolitical
considerations.
India has maintained a presence in
the Arctic since 2008, with the
establishment of the Himadri research
station in Svalbard.
In 2022, it formalized its ambitions through
the release of an Arctic Policy.
o This shift was driven by changes in
the global security environment,
including deteriorating relations
between Russia and the West and
China’s growing Arctic cooperation
with Russia.
o India’s 2022 Arctic Policy focuses on
climate science, environmental
protection, and sustainable
development, emphasizing the
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
80
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Arctic’s influence on South Asia’s
water security and monsoon cycles.
Why is India interested in the Arctic?
India’s interests in the Arctic include
supporting infrastructure development
along the Northern Sea Route (NSR) to gain
access to Arctic resources, such as gas and
critical minerals, which are crucial for its
growing economy.
India also seeks to secure Russia’s
commitment to the International North-
South Transport Corridor (INSTC), which
could connect India with Russia and the
Nordic-Baltic region, enhancing trade and
providing an alternative to China’s Belt and
Road Initiative (BRI).
Suggestions and Way Forward
India’s role in the Arctic is evolving as it
navigates complex geopolitical dynamics.
India’s involvement can strengthen its
global positioning and improve relations
with Nordic countries.
India should balance its Arctic interests
with its position on Russia’s ongoing war
efforts in Europe.
o India should strengthen ties with
Europe, especially Nordic states,
focusing on joint initiatives in
infrastructure, digitalization, and
environmental protection.
India should adopt a more strategic Arctic
approach, focusing on engagement beyond
science, strengthening ties with like-minded
Arctic states, and seeking a role in emerging
Arctic governance forums.
India–UK Free Trade Agreement (FTA) Negotiations
Syllabus: GS2/ International Relations, GS3/
Economy
Context
The India–UK Free Trade Agreement (FTA)
negotiations have hit fresh hurdles,
primarily due to the UK’s proposed Carbon
Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM) or
carbon tax.
Background
The India–UK FTA negotiations were
formally launched in 2022, as part of efforts
to deepen economic cooperation and boost
bilateral trade.
As per data from FY 2023–24, the trade
volume between the two countries
reached $21.34 billion, an increase
from $20.36 billion in the previous fiscal
year.
Presently, goods exported from India to the
UK face an average import duty of 4.2%.
The two sides are now aiming to
conclude an FTA, a Bilateral Investment
Treaty (BIT) and a social security
agreement termed as the Double
Contribution Convention Agreement
(DCAA).
Key Demands of India
India has been pushing for greater market
access for its products, particularly in
labour-intensive sectors such as textiles,
garments, gems, and jewellery.
India has called for liberalisation of the UK’s
visa regime to allow movement of skilled
professionals from Information Technology
(IT), IT-enabled services (ITeS), and
healthcare sectors.
India has also demanded special provisions
for Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises
(MSMEs) and requested flexibility regarding
carbon emission standards.
Key Demands of UK
The United Kingdom is keen on reducing
tariffs imposed by India on high-value items
such as Scotch whisky, electric vehicles,
chocolates, and lamb meat.
o It is also seeking market access in
telecom, legal, insurance, financial
services.
The UK is pressing for a sunset clause in the
proposed Bilateral Investment Treaty and
greater flexibility on issues like data
80
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Arctic’s influence on South Asia’s
water security and monsoon cycles.
Why is India interested in the Arctic?
India’s interests in the Arctic include
supporting infrastructure development
along the Northern Sea Route (NSR) to gain
access to Arctic resources, such as gas and
critical minerals, which are crucial for its
growing economy.
India also seeks to secure Russia’s
commitment to the International North-
South Transport Corridor (INSTC), which
could connect India with Russia and the
Nordic-Baltic region, enhancing trade and
providing an alternative to China’s Belt and
Road Initiative (BRI).
Suggestions and Way Forward
India’s role in the Arctic is evolving as it
navigates complex geopolitical dynamics.
India’s involvement can strengthen its
global positioning and improve relations
with Nordic countries.
India should balance its Arctic interests
with its position on Russia’s ongoing war
efforts in Europe.
o India should strengthen ties with
Europe, especially Nordic states,
focusing on joint initiatives in
infrastructure, digitalization, and
environmental protection.
India should adopt a more strategic Arctic
approach, focusing on engagement beyond
science, strengthening ties with like-minded
Arctic states, and seeking a role in emerging
Arctic governance forums.
India–UK Free Trade Agreement (FTA) Negotiations
Syllabus: GS2/ International Relations, GS3/
Economy
Context
The India–UK Free Trade Agreement (FTA)
negotiations have hit fresh hurdles,
primarily due to the UK’s proposed Carbon
Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM) or
carbon tax.
Background
The India–UK FTA negotiations were
formally launched in 2022, as part of efforts
to deepen economic cooperation and boost
bilateral trade.
As per data from FY 2023–24, the trade
volume between the two countries
reached $21.34 billion, an increase
from $20.36 billion in the previous fiscal
year.
Presently, goods exported from India to the
UK face an average import duty of 4.2%.
The two sides are now aiming to
conclude an FTA, a Bilateral Investment
Treaty (BIT) and a social security
agreement termed as the Double
Contribution Convention Agreement
(DCAA).
Key Demands of India
India has been pushing for greater market
access for its products, particularly in
labour-intensive sectors such as textiles,
garments, gems, and jewellery.
India has called for liberalisation of the UK’s
visa regime to allow movement of skilled
professionals from Information Technology
(IT), IT-enabled services (ITeS), and
healthcare sectors.
India has also demanded special provisions
for Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises
(MSMEs) and requested flexibility regarding
carbon emission standards.
Key Demands of UK
The United Kingdom is keen on reducing
tariffs imposed by India on high-value items
such as Scotch whisky, electric vehicles,
chocolates, and lamb meat.
o It is also seeking market access in
telecom, legal, insurance, financial
services.
The UK is pressing for a sunset clause in the
proposed Bilateral Investment Treaty and
greater flexibility on issues like data
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
81
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
localisation and the recognition of its new
carbon tax regulations.
Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM)
– It is a proposed environmental tax that aims to
put a carbon price on certain goods imported into
the United Kingdom, based on the carbon
emissions generated during their production.
– It is designed to level the playing field between
domestic producers (who must comply with the
UK’s strict climate regulations) and foreign
exporters from countries with weaker or no carbon
pricing mechanisms.
CBAM and India’s Concerns
The UK’s draft CBAM legislation,
effective January 1, 2027, imposes levies on
high-emission imports like cement, steel,
aluminium, fertilisers, hydrogen.
The emission calculation will follow the
UK’s domestic Emissions Trading Scheme.
Indian concern: CBAM undermines the
principle of Common But Differentiated
Responsibilities (CBDR) in climate
negotiations.
India’s Response to CBAM
India has proposed a “Rebalancing
Mechanism,” which would require the UK to
compensate Indian industries for losses
incurred due to the carbon tax.
India has emphasised that its Carbon Credit
Trading Scheme (CCTS), which is based on
emission intensity rather than absolute
emission levels, is more suitable for a
developing economy.
Way Ahead
To ensure that the FTA benefits are not
undermined by non-tariff barriers like
CBAM, India must negotiate firmly and
strategically.
India must continue to advocate for the
CBDR principle and push for differential
treatment in climate-related trade
measures.
Institutional mechanisms like the proposed
rebalancing clause and effective dispute
resolution frameworks must be built into
the final agreement to protect the interests
of both the parties.
Free Trade Agreement (FTA) Signed Between UK-
India
Syllabus: GS2/International Relations, GS3/
Economy
Context
India and the United Kingdom have signed a
landmark Free Trade Agreement (FTA)
after nearly three years of negotiations.
What is a Free Trade Agreement or FTA?
FTAs are arrangements between two or
more countries or trading blocs that
primarily agree to reduce or eliminate
customs tariff and non tariff barriers on
substantial trade between them.
o They can cover both goods and
services.
FTAs also address issues such as
investment, mobility of professionals, and
regulatory cooperation.
The India–UK FTA negotiations were
formally launched in 2022, as part of efforts
to deepen economic cooperation and boost
bilateral trade.
Key highlights of FTA
Tariff Elimination: Nearly 99% of Indian
exports to the UK will now be tariff-free.
o Key sectors to benefit include:
textiles, marine products, leather,
footwear, sports goods, toys, gems
and jewellery, engineering goods,
auto components, and organic
chemicals.
Services Sector Gains: UK has offered its
most ambitious market access
commitments for Indian service providers.
Indian professionals in the UK will be
exempt from paying UK social security
contributions for up to three years, reducing
employment costs and increasing
competitiveness.
81
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
localisation and the recognition of its new
carbon tax regulations.
Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM)
– It is a proposed environmental tax that aims to
put a carbon price on certain goods imported into
the United Kingdom, based on the carbon
emissions generated during their production.
– It is designed to level the playing field between
domestic producers (who must comply with the
UK’s strict climate regulations) and foreign
exporters from countries with weaker or no carbon
pricing mechanisms.
CBAM and India’s Concerns
The UK’s draft CBAM legislation,
effective January 1, 2027, imposes levies on
high-emission imports like cement, steel,
aluminium, fertilisers, hydrogen.
The emission calculation will follow the
UK’s domestic Emissions Trading Scheme.
Indian concern: CBAM undermines the
principle of Common But Differentiated
Responsibilities (CBDR) in climate
negotiations.
India’s Response to CBAM
India has proposed a “Rebalancing
Mechanism,” which would require the UK to
compensate Indian industries for losses
incurred due to the carbon tax.
India has emphasised that its Carbon Credit
Trading Scheme (CCTS), which is based on
emission intensity rather than absolute
emission levels, is more suitable for a
developing economy.
Way Ahead
To ensure that the FTA benefits are not
undermined by non-tariff barriers like
CBAM, India must negotiate firmly and
strategically.
India must continue to advocate for the
CBDR principle and push for differential
treatment in climate-related trade
measures.
Institutional mechanisms like the proposed
rebalancing clause and effective dispute
resolution frameworks must be built into
the final agreement to protect the interests
of both the parties.
Free Trade Agreement (FTA) Signed Between UK-
India
Syllabus: GS2/International Relations, GS3/
Economy
Context
India and the United Kingdom have signed a
landmark Free Trade Agreement (FTA)
after nearly three years of negotiations.
What is a Free Trade Agreement or FTA?
FTAs are arrangements between two or
more countries or trading blocs that
primarily agree to reduce or eliminate
customs tariff and non tariff barriers on
substantial trade between them.
o They can cover both goods and
services.
FTAs also address issues such as
investment, mobility of professionals, and
regulatory cooperation.
The India–UK FTA negotiations were
formally launched in 2022, as part of efforts
to deepen economic cooperation and boost
bilateral trade.
Key highlights of FTA
Tariff Elimination: Nearly 99% of Indian
exports to the UK will now be tariff-free.
o Key sectors to benefit include:
textiles, marine products, leather,
footwear, sports goods, toys, gems
and jewellery, engineering goods,
auto components, and organic
chemicals.
Services Sector Gains: UK has offered its
most ambitious market access
commitments for Indian service providers.
Indian professionals in the UK will be
exempt from paying UK social security
contributions for up to three years, reducing
employment costs and increasing
competitiveness.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
82
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Enhanced Mobility:
o Simplified visa and mobility norms
for Indian professionals and intra-
corporate transferees.
o Special quotas for Indian workers in
select UK sectors.
Benefits for the UK
Whisky and Gin: Tariffs to be halved
from 150% to 75% immediately, and
further reduced to 40% in 10 years.
Automobile Exports: India to reduce import
duty on cars to 10% under a quota system.
Other sectors benefitting:
o Cosmetics, medical devices,
aerospace
o Electrical machinery, chocolate, soft
drinks, lamb.
Trade and Economic Impact
India was Britain’s 11th largest trade
partner in 2024 and accounted for 2.4% of
total UK trade.
India’s exports to the UK were worth $34
billion (£25.5 billion) in 2024, and UK
exports to India amounted to $22.8
billion (£17.1 billion) in 2024.
Why was the FTA needed?
Post-Brexit Strategy: The UK needed new
trade partnerships after losing access to the
EU market and India’s large and growing
economy offers a viable alternative.
China-Plus-One Policy: Western nations are
reducing dependence on Chinese supply
chains, seeking diversified trade ties.
India’s Global Trade Realignment: The India-
UK FTA is part of India’s broader strategy to
diversify trade partners and reduce
dependence on China and multilateral blocs
like RCEP, which India opted out of in 2019
over concerns of trade imbalances and
inadequate safeguards.
Global Trade Uncertainties: With US tariffs
and geopolitical instability, the FTA
provides a more stable and predictable
trade relationship.
Concerns
Limited Additional Benefits: The Global
Trade Research Initiative (GTRI) suggests
that the FTA might yield only marginal
gains, as many Indian goods already faced
low or zero tariffs.
Environmental Tariffs: The UK’s carbon
border tax proposal on imports like metals
posed a potential barrier for Indian
exporters which needed further negotiation.
Concluding remarks
The India-UK FTA is a significant stride in
India’s evolving trade architecture.
While its immediate economic impact may
be modest, strategically it enhances India’s
global trade integration, supports domestic
reforms, and lays the groundwork for
deeper economic engagement with
developed nations.
Successful implementation and follow-up
negotiations in sensitive sectors will be key
to realizing its full potential.
Pakistan-Türkiye Nexus & India Stands
Syllabus: GS2/International Relations; GS3/Security
Context
Türkiye’s support for Pakistan on Kashmir,
along with defense collaborations, has
raised concerns for India.
Türkiye’s Strategic Interests in Pakistan
Cold War Alliances: Türkiye and Pakistan
were part of the Central Treaty Organization
(CENTO) and Regional Cooperation for
Development (RCD), aligning their policies
with Western-led security frameworks.
o Pakistan supported Türkiye’s stance
in Cyprus, even offering military
assistance during the 1964 and
1971 crises.
o In 1983, Pakistan declared that it
would be the first country to
recognize Turkish Cyprus if it
82
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Enhanced Mobility:
o Simplified visa and mobility norms
for Indian professionals and intra-
corporate transferees.
o Special quotas for Indian workers in
select UK sectors.
Benefits for the UK
Whisky and Gin: Tariffs to be halved
from 150% to 75% immediately, and
further reduced to 40% in 10 years.
Automobile Exports: India to reduce import
duty on cars to 10% under a quota system.
Other sectors benefitting:
o Cosmetics, medical devices,
aerospace
o Electrical machinery, chocolate, soft
drinks, lamb.
Trade and Economic Impact
India was Britain’s 11th largest trade
partner in 2024 and accounted for 2.4% of
total UK trade.
India’s exports to the UK were worth $34
billion (£25.5 billion) in 2024, and UK
exports to India amounted to $22.8
billion (£17.1 billion) in 2024.
Why was the FTA needed?
Post-Brexit Strategy: The UK needed new
trade partnerships after losing access to the
EU market and India’s large and growing
economy offers a viable alternative.
China-Plus-One Policy: Western nations are
reducing dependence on Chinese supply
chains, seeking diversified trade ties.
India’s Global Trade Realignment: The India-
UK FTA is part of India’s broader strategy to
diversify trade partners and reduce
dependence on China and multilateral blocs
like RCEP, which India opted out of in 2019
over concerns of trade imbalances and
inadequate safeguards.
Global Trade Uncertainties: With US tariffs
and geopolitical instability, the FTA
provides a more stable and predictable
trade relationship.
Concerns
Limited Additional Benefits: The Global
Trade Research Initiative (GTRI) suggests
that the FTA might yield only marginal
gains, as many Indian goods already faced
low or zero tariffs.
Environmental Tariffs: The UK’s carbon
border tax proposal on imports like metals
posed a potential barrier for Indian
exporters which needed further negotiation.
Concluding remarks
The India-UK FTA is a significant stride in
India’s evolving trade architecture.
While its immediate economic impact may
be modest, strategically it enhances India’s
global trade integration, supports domestic
reforms, and lays the groundwork for
deeper economic engagement with
developed nations.
Successful implementation and follow-up
negotiations in sensitive sectors will be key
to realizing its full potential.
Pakistan-Türkiye Nexus & India Stands
Syllabus: GS2/International Relations; GS3/Security
Context
Türkiye’s support for Pakistan on Kashmir,
along with defense collaborations, has
raised concerns for India.
Türkiye’s Strategic Interests in Pakistan
Cold War Alliances: Türkiye and Pakistan
were part of the Central Treaty Organization
(CENTO) and Regional Cooperation for
Development (RCD), aligning their policies
with Western-led security frameworks.
o Pakistan supported Türkiye’s stance
in Cyprus, even offering military
assistance during the 1964 and
1971 crises.
o In 1983, Pakistan declared that it
would be the first country to
recognize Turkish Cyprus if it
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
83
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
declared independence, and it
further strengthened the ideological
bond between both countries.
Countering Saudi-Emirati Influence: Türkiye,
along with Qatar, has sought to challenge
Saudi Arabia and the UAE’s dominance in
the Muslim world.
o The Kuala Lumpur Summit
(2019), involving Pakistan, Türkiye,
Malaysia, and Indonesia, was
perceived as an alternative bloc to
Riyadh’s leadership.
Türkiye’s Focus on the Indian Ocean Region
(IOR): Türkiye is expanding its presence in
the Indian Ocean, establishing its largest
overseas base in Somalia (2017).
o In 2024, Türkiye sold Baykar TB2
drones to the Maldives, signaling
growing influence in South Asia’s
maritime domain.
o The Turkish Navy has frequently
conducted joint exercises with the
Pakistan Navy, with limited
engagements with the Indian Navy.
Türkiye-Pakistan Nexus
Türkiye’s Support for Pakistan on
Kashmir: Türkiye has regularly expressed
solidarity with Pakistan on Kashmir, calling
for international attention to the issue.
o Pakistan has acknowledged Türkiye,
China, and Azerbaijan as its key
diplomatic allies during geopolitical
crises.
Türkiye’s Emergence as a Major Arms
Supplier: According to SIPRI data, Turkish
arms exports surged by 103% between
2015-2019 and 2020-2024.
o By 2020, Türkiye had become
Pakistan’s second-largest arms
supplier (after China), providing
advanced military equipment.
Pakistan’s Acquisitions from Türkiye: Under
the Military Consultative Group framework
(established in 1988), Pakistan has secured
multiple defense agreements with Türkiye.
o The Ada-class anti-submarine
corvette, and drone
technology transfers highlight
Türkiye’s commitment to Pakistan’s
military modernization.
Economic and Strategic
Agreements: Pakistan and Türkiye have
signed multiple agreements covering trade,
defense, and intelligence cooperation.
o The Pakistan-Türkiye High-Level
Strategic Cooperation Council
(HLSCC) facilitates joint initiatives
in energy, finance, and security.
Türkiye-Pakistan Nexus and Its Impact on India
Strengthening Ties with Greece and
Cyprus: India has consistently engaged and
supported the Greece-backed Republic of
Cyprus, countering Türkiye and Pakistan’s
endorsement of the Turkish Republic of
Northern Cyprus.
o Greece, in turn, has backed India’s
stance on Kashmir, reinforcing
diplomatic solidarity.
Military Cooperation with Armenia: India
has emerged as one of the strongest military
supporters of Armenia, particularly in its
territorial dispute with Türkiye-backed
Azerbaijan.
o By late 2024, India surpassed Russia
as Armenia’s largest arms supplier, a
remarkable development in global
arms trade.
Pakistan’s Alignment with
Azerbaijan: Pakistan has continued to reject
the recognition of the Armenian genocide,
aligning with Türkiye-supported
Azerbaijan.
o In 2024, Pakistan signed a $1.6
billion defense deal to supply
Azerbaijan with JF-17 Thunder
Block III fighter jets, further
strengthening its trilateral alliance
with Türkiye and Azerbaijan.
India-Türkiye Relations
– Formal Diplomatic Ties: 1948
83
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
declared independence, and it
further strengthened the ideological
bond between both countries.
Countering Saudi-Emirati Influence: Türkiye,
along with Qatar, has sought to challenge
Saudi Arabia and the UAE’s dominance in
the Muslim world.
o The Kuala Lumpur Summit
(2019), involving Pakistan, Türkiye,
Malaysia, and Indonesia, was
perceived as an alternative bloc to
Riyadh’s leadership.
Türkiye’s Focus on the Indian Ocean Region
(IOR): Türkiye is expanding its presence in
the Indian Ocean, establishing its largest
overseas base in Somalia (2017).
o In 2024, Türkiye sold Baykar TB2
drones to the Maldives, signaling
growing influence in South Asia’s
maritime domain.
o The Turkish Navy has frequently
conducted joint exercises with the
Pakistan Navy, with limited
engagements with the Indian Navy.
Türkiye-Pakistan Nexus
Türkiye’s Support for Pakistan on
Kashmir: Türkiye has regularly expressed
solidarity with Pakistan on Kashmir, calling
for international attention to the issue.
o Pakistan has acknowledged Türkiye,
China, and Azerbaijan as its key
diplomatic allies during geopolitical
crises.
Türkiye’s Emergence as a Major Arms
Supplier: According to SIPRI data, Turkish
arms exports surged by 103% between
2015-2019 and 2020-2024.
o By 2020, Türkiye had become
Pakistan’s second-largest arms
supplier (after China), providing
advanced military equipment.
Pakistan’s Acquisitions from Türkiye: Under
the Military Consultative Group framework
(established in 1988), Pakistan has secured
multiple defense agreements with Türkiye.
o The Ada-class anti-submarine
corvette, and drone
technology transfers highlight
Türkiye’s commitment to Pakistan’s
military modernization.
Economic and Strategic
Agreements: Pakistan and Türkiye have
signed multiple agreements covering trade,
defense, and intelligence cooperation.
o The Pakistan-Türkiye High-Level
Strategic Cooperation Council
(HLSCC) facilitates joint initiatives
in energy, finance, and security.
Türkiye-Pakistan Nexus and Its Impact on India
Strengthening Ties with Greece and
Cyprus: India has consistently engaged and
supported the Greece-backed Republic of
Cyprus, countering Türkiye and Pakistan’s
endorsement of the Turkish Republic of
Northern Cyprus.
o Greece, in turn, has backed India’s
stance on Kashmir, reinforcing
diplomatic solidarity.
Military Cooperation with Armenia: India
has emerged as one of the strongest military
supporters of Armenia, particularly in its
territorial dispute with Türkiye-backed
Azerbaijan.
o By late 2024, India surpassed Russia
as Armenia’s largest arms supplier, a
remarkable development in global
arms trade.
Pakistan’s Alignment with
Azerbaijan: Pakistan has continued to reject
the recognition of the Armenian genocide,
aligning with Türkiye-supported
Azerbaijan.
o In 2024, Pakistan signed a $1.6
billion defense deal to supply
Azerbaijan with JF-17 Thunder
Block III fighter jets, further
strengthening its trilateral alliance
with Türkiye and Azerbaijan.
India-Türkiye Relations
– Formal Diplomatic Ties: 1948
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
84
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
– Political and Diplomatic Engagements:
1. Turkish President Recep Tayyip Erdoğan visited
India for the G20 Summit in New Delhi, meeting the
Prime Minister of India to discuss trade, defense,
and security cooperation.
2. The External Affairs Minister (EAM) of India held
bilateral meetings with the Turkish Foreign
Minister during the ASEAN Foreign Ministers
Meeting (July 2024).
3. India and Türkiye have engaged in multilateral
forums, including the UN, G20, and SCO Summits.
– Economic and Trade Relations:
1. Trade Volume: India-Türkiye trade reached
$10.7 billion in 2023, with India exporting
automobiles, pharmaceuticals, and textiles, while
Türkiye supplies machinery, chemicals, and metals.
2. Investment and Business Cooperation: Indian
companies have invested in Türkiye’s
infrastructure, energy, and technology sectors,
while Turkish firms explore construction and
manufacturing opportunities in India.
– Defense and Security Cooperation: Türkiye has
expressed interest in defense collaboration,
including joint military exercises and technology
exchange.
Geopolitical Shifts Benefiting India
U.S. Indo-Pacific Strategy (2022): It omitted
any reference to Pakistan, and, in
contrast, India was mentioned five times.
India-Middle East-Europe Economic
Corridor (IMEC) Bypasses Türkiye: It
challenges Türkiye’s role as the bridge
between Asia and Europe.
o Türkiye openly criticized IMEC,
pushing to pursue its own Asia-
Europe corridor—the Iraq
Development Road.
India’s Response and Strategic Positioning
Strengthening Regional Alliances: India has
deepened ties with Saudi Arabia, UAE, and
other Gulf nations, countering Türkiye’s
influence.
o The India-Greece defense
partnership has emerged as a
counterbalance to Türkiye’s
regional ambitions.
Diplomatic Engagements: India has
reiterated that Kashmir remains a bilateral
issue, rejecting Türkiye’s interventionist
stance.
o India continues to engage global
partners to reinforce its sovereignty
and territorial integrity.
Military Preparedness: India has enhanced
its air defense systems and naval
capabilities, ensuring readiness against
regional security threats.
o The S-400 missile system and
indigenous defense projects
strengthen India’s strategic
deterrence.
Conclusion
The Pakistan-Türkiye nexus presents
geopolitical challenges for India,
particularly in defense and diplomatic
spheres.
By reinforcing regional partnerships,
military capabilities, and diplomatic
outreach, India can effectively counter
emerging threats while maintaining
strategic stability.
IMF Loan to Pakistan
Syllabus: GS2/ International Institutions
In News
The Executive Board of the International
Monetary Fund (IMF) decided to allow for
“an immediate disbursement” of $1 billion
(around Rs 8,500 crore) to Pakistan.
o This disbursal was done as part
of IMF’s Extended Fund Facility
(EFF) to Pakistan.
What is the Extended Fund Facility (EFF)?
The Extended Fund Facility is a loan-based
support mechanism provided by the IMF to
countries that suffer from medium-term
balance of payments problems, particularly
due to structural deficiencies in their
economies.
84
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
– Political and Diplomatic Engagements:
1. Turkish President Recep Tayyip Erdoğan visited
India for the G20 Summit in New Delhi, meeting the
Prime Minister of India to discuss trade, defense,
and security cooperation.
2. The External Affairs Minister (EAM) of India held
bilateral meetings with the Turkish Foreign
Minister during the ASEAN Foreign Ministers
Meeting (July 2024).
3. India and Türkiye have engaged in multilateral
forums, including the UN, G20, and SCO Summits.
– Economic and Trade Relations:
1. Trade Volume: India-Türkiye trade reached
$10.7 billion in 2023, with India exporting
automobiles, pharmaceuticals, and textiles, while
Türkiye supplies machinery, chemicals, and metals.
2. Investment and Business Cooperation: Indian
companies have invested in Türkiye’s
infrastructure, energy, and technology sectors,
while Turkish firms explore construction and
manufacturing opportunities in India.
– Defense and Security Cooperation: Türkiye has
expressed interest in defense collaboration,
including joint military exercises and technology
exchange.
Geopolitical Shifts Benefiting India
U.S. Indo-Pacific Strategy (2022): It omitted
any reference to Pakistan, and, in
contrast, India was mentioned five times.
India-Middle East-Europe Economic
Corridor (IMEC) Bypasses Türkiye: It
challenges Türkiye’s role as the bridge
between Asia and Europe.
o Türkiye openly criticized IMEC,
pushing to pursue its own Asia-
Europe corridor—the Iraq
Development Road.
India’s Response and Strategic Positioning
Strengthening Regional Alliances: India has
deepened ties with Saudi Arabia, UAE, and
other Gulf nations, countering Türkiye’s
influence.
o The India-Greece defense
partnership has emerged as a
counterbalance to Türkiye’s
regional ambitions.
Diplomatic Engagements: India has
reiterated that Kashmir remains a bilateral
issue, rejecting Türkiye’s interventionist
stance.
o India continues to engage global
partners to reinforce its sovereignty
and territorial integrity.
Military Preparedness: India has enhanced
its air defense systems and naval
capabilities, ensuring readiness against
regional security threats.
o The S-400 missile system and
indigenous defense projects
strengthen India’s strategic
deterrence.
Conclusion
The Pakistan-Türkiye nexus presents
geopolitical challenges for India,
particularly in defense and diplomatic
spheres.
By reinforcing regional partnerships,
military capabilities, and diplomatic
outreach, India can effectively counter
emerging threats while maintaining
strategic stability.
IMF Loan to Pakistan
Syllabus: GS2/ International Institutions
In News
The Executive Board of the International
Monetary Fund (IMF) decided to allow for
“an immediate disbursement” of $1 billion
(around Rs 8,500 crore) to Pakistan.
o This disbursal was done as part
of IMF’s Extended Fund Facility
(EFF) to Pakistan.
What is the Extended Fund Facility (EFF)?
The Extended Fund Facility is a loan-based
support mechanism provided by the IMF to
countries that suffer from medium-term
balance of payments problems, particularly
due to structural deficiencies in their
economies.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
85
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Unlike short-term bailouts, the EFF is
designed to assist countries in
implementing structural reforms that take
time to yield results.
According to the IMF, EFF loans:
o Offer longer repayment periods
o Support reforms in fiscal
governance, banking, taxation, etc.
o Target countries with long-standing
issues such as poor infrastructure,
financial instability, or chronic
budget deficits
It is not financial aid or a grant—countries
are expected to repay these funds along
with agreed interest.
Resilience and Sustainability Facility (RSF)
It provides affordable, long-term financing
to support low- and vulnerable middle-
income countries in implementing macro-
critical reforms to address balance of
payments risks, particularly those related to
climate change and pandemic
preparedness.
It aims to strengthen macroeconomic
resilience by supporting policy reforms that
reduce these risks and enhance financial
buffers.
Why does the IMF consider Pakistan for EFF
Assistance?
Despite its strategic ambitions, Pakistan’s
economic fundamentals have steadily
deteriorated over the past two decades.
o Stagnant GDP: Pakistan’s GDP in
2023 stood at $338 billion, lower
than in 2017.
o Rising Inflation: Double-digit
inflation for five consecutive
years—culminating in 23.4% in
2024.
o Debt Dependence: Pakistan has
availed 28 IMF loans in 35 years and
borrowed from China, UAE, Saudi
Arabia, Paris Club, Islamic
Development Bank, and others.
o Weak Fundamentals: Low savings
and investment, poor infrastructure,
limited female workforce
participation, and consistent fiscal
mismanagement.
According to the IMF, Pakistan’s recent
efforts under the EFF have shown signs of
progress:
o Inflation dropped significantly to
0.3% in April 2025
o Increase in foreign exchange
reserves
o Structural reforms like the
Agricultural Income Tax and
improved fiscal controls.
India’s Dissent: Strategic and Security Concerns
India formally conveyed its strong
objections to the IMF Board regarding the
disbursement, highlighting two major
concerns:
o Track Record of Misuse: India
pointed to Pakistan’s poor
utilization of previous IMF loans,
often failing to implement promised
reforms or misallocating funds.
o National Security Threats: Citing
state-sponsored cross-border
terrorism, India warned that the
debt financing might be indirectly
used to fund military or terror
activities against India.
While the IMF Executive Board does not
allow member countries to vote
“against” such proposals, India abstained
from the decision as a diplomatic
expression of protest.
About International Monetary Fund (IMF)
– Introduction:
1. The IMF is a specialised agency of the United
Nations, founded in 1944 at the Bretton Woods
Conference.
2. It was created to ensure global monetary
stability after the disruptions caused by the Great
Depression and World War II.
85
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Unlike short-term bailouts, the EFF is
designed to assist countries in
implementing structural reforms that take
time to yield results.
According to the IMF, EFF loans:
o Offer longer repayment periods
o Support reforms in fiscal
governance, banking, taxation, etc.
o Target countries with long-standing
issues such as poor infrastructure,
financial instability, or chronic
budget deficits
It is not financial aid or a grant—countries
are expected to repay these funds along
with agreed interest.
Resilience and Sustainability Facility (RSF)
It provides affordable, long-term financing
to support low- and vulnerable middle-
income countries in implementing macro-
critical reforms to address balance of
payments risks, particularly those related to
climate change and pandemic
preparedness.
It aims to strengthen macroeconomic
resilience by supporting policy reforms that
reduce these risks and enhance financial
buffers.
Why does the IMF consider Pakistan for EFF
Assistance?
Despite its strategic ambitions, Pakistan’s
economic fundamentals have steadily
deteriorated over the past two decades.
o Stagnant GDP: Pakistan’s GDP in
2023 stood at $338 billion, lower
than in 2017.
o Rising Inflation: Double-digit
inflation for five consecutive
years—culminating in 23.4% in
2024.
o Debt Dependence: Pakistan has
availed 28 IMF loans in 35 years and
borrowed from China, UAE, Saudi
Arabia, Paris Club, Islamic
Development Bank, and others.
o Weak Fundamentals: Low savings
and investment, poor infrastructure,
limited female workforce
participation, and consistent fiscal
mismanagement.
According to the IMF, Pakistan’s recent
efforts under the EFF have shown signs of
progress:
o Inflation dropped significantly to
0.3% in April 2025
o Increase in foreign exchange
reserves
o Structural reforms like the
Agricultural Income Tax and
improved fiscal controls.
India’s Dissent: Strategic and Security Concerns
India formally conveyed its strong
objections to the IMF Board regarding the
disbursement, highlighting two major
concerns:
o Track Record of Misuse: India
pointed to Pakistan’s poor
utilization of previous IMF loans,
often failing to implement promised
reforms or misallocating funds.
o National Security Threats: Citing
state-sponsored cross-border
terrorism, India warned that the
debt financing might be indirectly
used to fund military or terror
activities against India.
While the IMF Executive Board does not
allow member countries to vote
“against” such proposals, India abstained
from the decision as a diplomatic
expression of protest.
About International Monetary Fund (IMF)
– Introduction:
1. The IMF is a specialised agency of the United
Nations, founded in 1944 at the Bretton Woods
Conference.
2. It was created to ensure global monetary
stability after the disruptions caused by the Great
Depression and World War II.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
86
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
– Objectives:
1. Promote international monetary cooperation.
2. Ensure exchange rate stability and orderly
currency arrangements.
3. Facilitate balanced growth of international trade.
– Functions:
1. Economic Surveillance: Monitors global and
country-specific economic trends and provides
policy advice.
2. Financial Assistance: Offers loans to countries
with balance of payments problems.
3. Technical Assistance and Capacity
Development: Provides training and expertise in
public finance, monetary policy, statistics, etc.
4. Conditionality: Loans are tied to economic
reform programmes to ensure fiscal discipline and
long-term stability.
– Membership and Voting Power:
1. It comprises 190 member countries. Each
member contributes a quota (based on GDP and
economic indicators), which determines:
(a). Voting power (formula: 1 vote per 100,000
SDRs + basic votes). (US has the highest share)
(b). Access to financial resources.
2. SDRs (Special Drawing Rights): An international
reserve asset created by the IMF. Not a currency
but can be exchanged for freely usable currencies
like USD, EUR, JPY, GBP, and CNY.
– Organisational Structure:
1. Board of Governors: Highest decision-making
body; usually finance ministers or central bank
governors of member countries.
2. Executive Board: 24-member board handling
day-to-day operations.
India rolls over $50 million worth Treasury Bill to
help Maldives
Syllabus: GS2/IR
Context
India has rolled over a $50 million-treasury
bill to support Maldives.
o Treasury bills are short-term debt
instruments issued by a government
to meet immediate funding needs.
About
The rollover of the $50 million treasury bill
helps provide temporary relief to the
Maldives, which is grappling with significant
debt and economic strain.
Despite the economic challenges and
tensions in bilateral relations, this extension
of financial assistance underscores India’s
strategic interest in maintaining stable ties
with the Maldives, a key partner in the
Indian Ocean region.
The transaction was carried out by the State
Bank of India, reflecting India’s active
involvement in supporting the Maldives’
financial stability.
Brief on India – Maldives
India considers the Maldives as a key
maritime neighbour and an important
partner in its ‘Neighbourhood First’ policy
and Vision ‘MAHASAGAR’ i.e. Mutual and
Holistic Advancement for Security and
Growth Across Regions.
Participation in Multiple Forums: Both
nations are founding members of the South
Asian Association for Regional Cooperation
(SAARC), the South Asian Economic Union
and signatories to the South Asia Free Trade
Agreement.
Economic partnership: India and Maldives
signed a trade agreement in 1981, which
provides for export of essential
commodities.
o India-Maldives bilateral trade
crossed the USD300 million mark
for the first time in 2021 which
further crossed the USD 500 million
mark in 2022. The trade in 2023
stood at $ 548 mn.
o India is one of the biggest investors
and tourism markets for the
Maldives, with significant trade and
infrastructure projects underway.
Defense and Security Cooperation: Since
1988, defence and security has been a major
area of cooperation between India and
Maldives.
86
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
– Objectives:
1. Promote international monetary cooperation.
2. Ensure exchange rate stability and orderly
currency arrangements.
3. Facilitate balanced growth of international trade.
– Functions:
1. Economic Surveillance: Monitors global and
country-specific economic trends and provides
policy advice.
2. Financial Assistance: Offers loans to countries
with balance of payments problems.
3. Technical Assistance and Capacity
Development: Provides training and expertise in
public finance, monetary policy, statistics, etc.
4. Conditionality: Loans are tied to economic
reform programmes to ensure fiscal discipline and
long-term stability.
– Membership and Voting Power:
1. It comprises 190 member countries. Each
member contributes a quota (based on GDP and
economic indicators), which determines:
(a). Voting power (formula: 1 vote per 100,000
SDRs + basic votes). (US has the highest share)
(b). Access to financial resources.
2. SDRs (Special Drawing Rights): An international
reserve asset created by the IMF. Not a currency
but can be exchanged for freely usable currencies
like USD, EUR, JPY, GBP, and CNY.
– Organisational Structure:
1. Board of Governors: Highest decision-making
body; usually finance ministers or central bank
governors of member countries.
2. Executive Board: 24-member board handling
day-to-day operations.
India rolls over $50 million worth Treasury Bill to
help Maldives
Syllabus: GS2/IR
Context
India has rolled over a $50 million-treasury
bill to support Maldives.
o Treasury bills are short-term debt
instruments issued by a government
to meet immediate funding needs.
About
The rollover of the $50 million treasury bill
helps provide temporary relief to the
Maldives, which is grappling with significant
debt and economic strain.
Despite the economic challenges and
tensions in bilateral relations, this extension
of financial assistance underscores India’s
strategic interest in maintaining stable ties
with the Maldives, a key partner in the
Indian Ocean region.
The transaction was carried out by the State
Bank of India, reflecting India’s active
involvement in supporting the Maldives’
financial stability.
Brief on India – Maldives
India considers the Maldives as a key
maritime neighbour and an important
partner in its ‘Neighbourhood First’ policy
and Vision ‘MAHASAGAR’ i.e. Mutual and
Holistic Advancement for Security and
Growth Across Regions.
Participation in Multiple Forums: Both
nations are founding members of the South
Asian Association for Regional Cooperation
(SAARC), the South Asian Economic Union
and signatories to the South Asia Free Trade
Agreement.
Economic partnership: India and Maldives
signed a trade agreement in 1981, which
provides for export of essential
commodities.
o India-Maldives bilateral trade
crossed the USD300 million mark
for the first time in 2021 which
further crossed the USD 500 million
mark in 2022. The trade in 2023
stood at $ 548 mn.
o India is one of the biggest investors
and tourism markets for the
Maldives, with significant trade and
infrastructure projects underway.
Defense and Security Cooperation: Since
1988, defence and security has been a major
area of cooperation between India and
Maldives.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
87
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Tourism: In 2023, India was the leading
source market for Maldives with a 11.8%
market share.
o In March 2022, India & Maldives
agreed for an open skies
arrangement which will further
improve connectivity between two
countries.
Connectivity: The Male to Thilafushi Link
project, popularly known as the Greater
Male Connectivity Project (GMCP),
Significance of Maldives for India
Strategic Importance: The Maldives is
strategically located in the Indian Ocean,
and its stability and security are of interest
to India.
Trade Route: Situated along crucial maritime
trade routes between the Gulf of Aden and
the Strait of Malacca, the Maldives acts as a
“toll gate” for nearly half of India’s external
trade and 80% of its energy imports.
Counterbalancing China: Maldives presents
an opportunity for India to counterbalance
China’s growing influence in the Indian
Ocean, fostering regional balance of power.
Diplomatic Leverage: Strong bilateral
relations with the Maldives enhance India’s
leadership role in the Indian Ocean Region
(IOR) and in forums like the Indian Ocean
Rim Association (IORA).
Challenges in Relations
Change in Power: Changes in government
create uncertainty and complicate long-
term cooperation projects.
Chinese Influence: China’s growing
economic presence in the Maldives,
evidenced by investments in infrastructure
projects and debt-trap diplomacy, is
perceived as a challenge to India’s strategic
interests in the region.
Non-traditional threats: Piracy, terrorism,
and drug trafficking remain concerns in the
region, requiring continuous collaboration
and intelligence sharing between India and
the Maldives.
Extremism and radicalization: The Maldives’
vulnerability to religious extremism and
radicalization poses a security threat that
necessitates joint efforts in countering such
ideologies.
Trade imbalance: The significant trade
imbalance between India and the Maldives
leads to resentment and calls for
diversifying trade partnerships in Maldives.
Way Ahead
The evolution of India-Maldives relations
reflects a combination of geopolitical
dynamics, changes in leadership, and
shared regional interests.
India is steadfast in its commitments
towards Maldives and has always walked
the extra mile towards building relations.
By acknowledging and addressing the
challenges, India and the Maldives can
navigate the complexities of their
relationship and build a stronger, more
resilient, and mutually beneficial
partnership for the future.
Colombia Joins Belt and Road Initiative
Syllabus: GS2/ International Relation
In News
Colombia formally agreed to join China’s
Belt and Road infrastructure initiative.
About Belt and Road Initiative
Genesis: Launched in 2013 by Chinese
President Xi Jinping under the initial name
One Belt One Road (OBOR).
Aim: To enhance regional integration, boost
trade, and stimulate economic growth by
developing infrastructure and connectivity
across Asia, Africa, and Europe.
Key Components:
o Silk Road Economic Belt: Overland
routes connecting China to Central
Asia, Europe, and the Middle East.
o 21st Century Maritime Silk Road: Sea
routes connecting China’s eastern
87
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Tourism: In 2023, India was the leading
source market for Maldives with a 11.8%
market share.
o In March 2022, India & Maldives
agreed for an open skies
arrangement which will further
improve connectivity between two
countries.
Connectivity: The Male to Thilafushi Link
project, popularly known as the Greater
Male Connectivity Project (GMCP),
Significance of Maldives for India
Strategic Importance: The Maldives is
strategically located in the Indian Ocean,
and its stability and security are of interest
to India.
Trade Route: Situated along crucial maritime
trade routes between the Gulf of Aden and
the Strait of Malacca, the Maldives acts as a
“toll gate” for nearly half of India’s external
trade and 80% of its energy imports.
Counterbalancing China: Maldives presents
an opportunity for India to counterbalance
China’s growing influence in the Indian
Ocean, fostering regional balance of power.
Diplomatic Leverage: Strong bilateral
relations with the Maldives enhance India’s
leadership role in the Indian Ocean Region
(IOR) and in forums like the Indian Ocean
Rim Association (IORA).
Challenges in Relations
Change in Power: Changes in government
create uncertainty and complicate long-
term cooperation projects.
Chinese Influence: China’s growing
economic presence in the Maldives,
evidenced by investments in infrastructure
projects and debt-trap diplomacy, is
perceived as a challenge to India’s strategic
interests in the region.
Non-traditional threats: Piracy, terrorism,
and drug trafficking remain concerns in the
region, requiring continuous collaboration
and intelligence sharing between India and
the Maldives.
Extremism and radicalization: The Maldives’
vulnerability to religious extremism and
radicalization poses a security threat that
necessitates joint efforts in countering such
ideologies.
Trade imbalance: The significant trade
imbalance between India and the Maldives
leads to resentment and calls for
diversifying trade partnerships in Maldives.
Way Ahead
The evolution of India-Maldives relations
reflects a combination of geopolitical
dynamics, changes in leadership, and
shared regional interests.
India is steadfast in its commitments
towards Maldives and has always walked
the extra mile towards building relations.
By acknowledging and addressing the
challenges, India and the Maldives can
navigate the complexities of their
relationship and build a stronger, more
resilient, and mutually beneficial
partnership for the future.
Colombia Joins Belt and Road Initiative
Syllabus: GS2/ International Relation
In News
Colombia formally agreed to join China’s
Belt and Road infrastructure initiative.
About Belt and Road Initiative
Genesis: Launched in 2013 by Chinese
President Xi Jinping under the initial name
One Belt One Road (OBOR).
Aim: To enhance regional integration, boost
trade, and stimulate economic growth by
developing infrastructure and connectivity
across Asia, Africa, and Europe.
Key Components:
o Silk Road Economic Belt: Overland
routes connecting China to Central
Asia, Europe, and the Middle East.
o 21st Century Maritime Silk Road: Sea
routes connecting China’s eastern
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
88
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
coast to Southeast Asia, South Asia,
Africa, and Europe.
China’s Economic Influence & US Concerns
China is now the largest trading partner
of several Latin American countries (Brazil,
Chile, Peru).
China is expanding its footprint through
the Belt and Road Initiative (BRI), while the
U.S. views Chinese presence near strategic
locations like the Panama Canal as a national
security threat.
The U.S. accuses China of trapping countries
in unsustainable debt for geopolitical
leverage.
India’s Concerns with BRI
Sovereignty Concerns: A major point of
contention for India is the China-Pakistan
Economic Corridor (CPEC), a flagship
project under the BRI, which passes
through Pakistan-occupied Kashmir (PoK),
a territory India claims as its own.
Security Threats: Like Nepal formally joined
the BRI in 2017 and China’s increasing
infrastructure projects in Nepal, particularly
those close to the border (like the Chinese-
funded airport in Pokhara), are seen as
potentially compromising India’s security
Erosion of Regional Influence: BRI projects
in Nepal and other South Asian nations (Sri
Lanka, Maldives, Bangladesh) reflect China’s
growing political-economic footprint,
diluting India’s traditional sphere of
influence.
o Part of the broader “String of Pearls”
strategy — perceived Chinese effort
to encircle India with pro-China
regimes or strategic assets.
Debt Trap Diplomacy: India is wary that
China might use its economic leverage
through the BRI to ensnare smaller
neighboring countries like Nepal in debt
traps.
US Remittance Tax Plan Raises Concerns
Syllabus: GS2/IR/GS3/Economy
Context
A U.S. bill proposes a 5% excise tax on any
remittances that originate in the US to any
other country.
Proposed Bill
Tax Scope:The Bill proposes the levy on all
cross-border remittances made by non-
citizens, including H-1B, L-1, and F-1 visa
holders, as well as green card holders. US
citizens and nationals are exempt from this.
o No minimum limit has been set in
the proposed bill, this means even
small transactions will be taxed.
o For non-resident Indians in the
US, the proposed tax will apply to
any income they earn in the US from
investments or stock options as
well.
Tax Collection: The provision requires that
the tax be collected by remittance-transfer
providers, who are responsible for
depositing it every quarter with the
treasury secretary.
What are Remittances?
Remittances are a way to electronically send
funds to people, often family, in another
country.
o Usually sent by individuals working
in foreign countries, especially those
employed in blue-collar or skilled
jobs.
Impact: Remittances are a significant source
of income for many countries, contributing
to their economic stability, supporting local
economies, and sometimes helping to
finance national trade deficits.
Modes of Transfer: Remittances can be sent
through banks, money transfer operators,
or digital platforms.
Overseas Indians in US
Nearly 54 lakh overseas Indians in the US,
most of these individuals are in the US on
temporary work visas like H-1B and L-1, or
88
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
coast to Southeast Asia, South Asia,
Africa, and Europe.
China’s Economic Influence & US Concerns
China is now the largest trading partner
of several Latin American countries (Brazil,
Chile, Peru).
China is expanding its footprint through
the Belt and Road Initiative (BRI), while the
U.S. views Chinese presence near strategic
locations like the Panama Canal as a national
security threat.
The U.S. accuses China of trapping countries
in unsustainable debt for geopolitical
leverage.
India’s Concerns with BRI
Sovereignty Concerns: A major point of
contention for India is the China-Pakistan
Economic Corridor (CPEC), a flagship
project under the BRI, which passes
through Pakistan-occupied Kashmir (PoK),
a territory India claims as its own.
Security Threats: Like Nepal formally joined
the BRI in 2017 and China’s increasing
infrastructure projects in Nepal, particularly
those close to the border (like the Chinese-
funded airport in Pokhara), are seen as
potentially compromising India’s security
Erosion of Regional Influence: BRI projects
in Nepal and other South Asian nations (Sri
Lanka, Maldives, Bangladesh) reflect China’s
growing political-economic footprint,
diluting India’s traditional sphere of
influence.
o Part of the broader “String of Pearls”
strategy — perceived Chinese effort
to encircle India with pro-China
regimes or strategic assets.
Debt Trap Diplomacy: India is wary that
China might use its economic leverage
through the BRI to ensnare smaller
neighboring countries like Nepal in debt
traps.
US Remittance Tax Plan Raises Concerns
Syllabus: GS2/IR/GS3/Economy
Context
A U.S. bill proposes a 5% excise tax on any
remittances that originate in the US to any
other country.
Proposed Bill
Tax Scope:The Bill proposes the levy on all
cross-border remittances made by non-
citizens, including H-1B, L-1, and F-1 visa
holders, as well as green card holders. US
citizens and nationals are exempt from this.
o No minimum limit has been set in
the proposed bill, this means even
small transactions will be taxed.
o For non-resident Indians in the
US, the proposed tax will apply to
any income they earn in the US from
investments or stock options as
well.
Tax Collection: The provision requires that
the tax be collected by remittance-transfer
providers, who are responsible for
depositing it every quarter with the
treasury secretary.
What are Remittances?
Remittances are a way to electronically send
funds to people, often family, in another
country.
o Usually sent by individuals working
in foreign countries, especially those
employed in blue-collar or skilled
jobs.
Impact: Remittances are a significant source
of income for many countries, contributing
to their economic stability, supporting local
economies, and sometimes helping to
finance national trade deficits.
Modes of Transfer: Remittances can be sent
through banks, money transfer operators,
or digital platforms.
Overseas Indians in US
Nearly 54 lakh overseas Indians in the US,
most of these individuals are in the US on
temporary work visas like H-1B and L-1, or
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
89
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
are green card holders who have not yet
acquired citizenship.
o India is the largest recipient of
remittances from the US, receiving
$32.9 billion in 2023-24 with a 27.7
per cent share in the country’s
inward remittances (RBI).
As per the World Bank, India has been
the top recipient of remittances since
2008, with its share in world remittances
rising from around 11 per cent in 2001 to
about 14 percent in 2024.
Potential Impacts
Remittances have long been a critical source
of income for low- and middle-income
countries, and have continued to exceed
foreign direct investment (FDI) flows and
ODA combined.
o If the proposal gets approved,
the cost for Indians in the US sending
money back home will rise.
Could discourage remittances to families in
home countries.
Transfer providers may face
new administrative and compliance
responsibilities.
Might affect decisions on where to invest or
hold assets, especially for those on
temporary visas.
Critics argue the tax constitutes double
taxation, as immigrants already pay U.S.
taxes on their income.
India’s Remittances: Key Facts
India’s remittances have more than
doubled from $55.6 billion in 2010-11 to
$118.7 billion in 2023-24.
Remittances from the U.S. and U.K. nearly
doubled to 40% of total inward remittances
in FY24, up from 26% in FY17.
The U.S. became the top source of
remittances in FY21, contributing 23.4%
followed by the UAE contributing 19.2%.
Half of the remittances went to
Maharashtra, Kerala, and Tamil Nadu. Other
states like Haryana, Gujarat, and Punjab had
smaller shares (below 5%).
Chabahar port & INSTC
Syllabus: GS2/ International Relations
In News
National Security Advisor Ajit Doval, in
conversation with his Iranian counterpart
expressed India’s interest in further
expanding cooperation in the development
of Chabahar port and the International
North-South Transport Corridor (INSTC).
About Chabahar Port
Meaning: Chabahar is made of Persian
words Chahar meaning four; and bahar
meaning spring.
o Chabahar city is also home to Iran’s
only deep-seaport with direct access
to the ocean.
Location: Off the Gulf of Oman in Iran’s
southeastern province of Sistan-Baluchistan
& is the only Iranian port with direct access
to the ocean.
o Only about 170 kilometers west of
the Pakistani port of Gwadar.
Consist of two ports: Chabahar Port consists
of two separate ports called Shahid
Kalantari and Shahid Beheshti.
Significance: Chabahar is important for its
fishery sector and will act as an important
trade center connecting South Asia, Central
Asia, and the Middle East.
o The port gives access to the energy-
rich Persian Gulf nations’ southern
coast & Central Asia and India can
bypass Pakistan.
o Chabahar Port is also quite near
the Gwadar Port of
Pakistan being developed by China.
Help countering CPEC;
strengthening maritime power.
89
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
are green card holders who have not yet
acquired citizenship.
o India is the largest recipient of
remittances from the US, receiving
$32.9 billion in 2023-24 with a 27.7
per cent share in the country’s
inward remittances (RBI).
As per the World Bank, India has been
the top recipient of remittances since
2008, with its share in world remittances
rising from around 11 per cent in 2001 to
about 14 percent in 2024.
Potential Impacts
Remittances have long been a critical source
of income for low- and middle-income
countries, and have continued to exceed
foreign direct investment (FDI) flows and
ODA combined.
o If the proposal gets approved,
the cost for Indians in the US sending
money back home will rise.
Could discourage remittances to families in
home countries.
Transfer providers may face
new administrative and compliance
responsibilities.
Might affect decisions on where to invest or
hold assets, especially for those on
temporary visas.
Critics argue the tax constitutes double
taxation, as immigrants already pay U.S.
taxes on their income.
India’s Remittances: Key Facts
India’s remittances have more than
doubled from $55.6 billion in 2010-11 to
$118.7 billion in 2023-24.
Remittances from the U.S. and U.K. nearly
doubled to 40% of total inward remittances
in FY24, up from 26% in FY17.
The U.S. became the top source of
remittances in FY21, contributing 23.4%
followed by the UAE contributing 19.2%.
Half of the remittances went to
Maharashtra, Kerala, and Tamil Nadu. Other
states like Haryana, Gujarat, and Punjab had
smaller shares (below 5%).
Chabahar port & INSTC
Syllabus: GS2/ International Relations
In News
National Security Advisor Ajit Doval, in
conversation with his Iranian counterpart
expressed India’s interest in further
expanding cooperation in the development
of Chabahar port and the International
North-South Transport Corridor (INSTC).
About Chabahar Port
Meaning: Chabahar is made of Persian
words Chahar meaning four; and bahar
meaning spring.
o Chabahar city is also home to Iran’s
only deep-seaport with direct access
to the ocean.
Location: Off the Gulf of Oman in Iran’s
southeastern province of Sistan-Baluchistan
& is the only Iranian port with direct access
to the ocean.
o Only about 170 kilometers west of
the Pakistani port of Gwadar.
Consist of two ports: Chabahar Port consists
of two separate ports called Shahid
Kalantari and Shahid Beheshti.
Significance: Chabahar is important for its
fishery sector and will act as an important
trade center connecting South Asia, Central
Asia, and the Middle East.
o The port gives access to the energy-
rich Persian Gulf nations’ southern
coast & Central Asia and India can
bypass Pakistan.
o Chabahar Port is also quite near
the Gwadar Port of
Pakistan being developed by China.
Help countering CPEC;
strengthening maritime power.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
90
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
About International North-South Transport Corridor
(INSTC)
It is a 7,200-km-long multi-modal
transportation network involving sea, rail,
and road routes.
INSTC was established in the year 2000,
with the founding agreement signed in St.
Petersburg by India, Iran, and Russia.
It aims to link the Indian Ocean and Persian
Gulf with the Caspian Sea via Iran, and then
further onward to Northern Europe via
Russia’s St. Petersburg.
The corridor significantly shortens trade
routes between India and Europe, offering a
faster and cheaper alternative to the Suez
Canal route.
Currently, there are 13 member
countries: India, Iran, Russia, Azerbaijan,
Armenia, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan,
Tajikistan, Turkey, Ukraine, Belarus, Oman,
and Syria. Additionally, Bulgaria has joined
as an Observer State.
India plays a pivotal role in the INSTC, with
the Chabahar Port in Iran serving as a key
node, facilitating access to Afghanistan and
Central Asia while bypassing Pakistan.
India and the European Union (EU)
Syllabus: GS2/International Relations
Context
India and the European Union (EU) chief
negotiators have concluded another round
of talks on the proposed free trade
agreement (FTA) and agreed to reach a deal
in two phases.
India-EU Free Trade Agreement (FTA) Negotiations
Overview
Negotiation Resumption: Talks resumed in
June 2022 after an 8-year hiatus (stalled in
2013 due to market access disagreements).
Objective: To finalize a comprehensive trade
agreement covering goods, services,
investments, and geographical indications.
Negotiation Structure: The agreement will
be concluded in two phases, following
India’s phased approach used in previous
FTAs (e.g., with Australia).
o This is partly due to the volatile
global trade environment, including
US tariff actions.
Prime Minister Narendra Modi and the
European Commission President agreed to
seal the deal by the end of this year.
Key Focus Areas
Market Access: Duty cuts demanded by the
EU in automobiles, medical devices, wines,
spirits, meat, and poultry.
Services and Investments: The talks focused
on areas like market access offers in goods,
services, and investment.
Regulatory Aspects: Stronger Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) framework.
o Agreements on sanitary and
phytosanitary measures, technical
barriers to trade, customs,
government procurement, and
sustainability.
Potential Benefits
Increased competitiveness for Indian
exports like ready-made garments,
pharmaceuticals, steel, petroleum products,
and electrical machinery.
Stronger investment protection and clearer
dispute settlement mechanisms.
Enhanced bilateral cooperation in
innovation and sustainable development.
India-EU relations
Political cooperation: India-EU relations
date to the early 1960s, and a cooperation
agreement signed in 1994 took the bilateral
relationship beyond trade and economic
cooperation.
o The first India-EU Summit, in 2000,
marked a watershed in the
evolution of the relationship.
90
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
About International North-South Transport Corridor
(INSTC)
It is a 7,200-km-long multi-modal
transportation network involving sea, rail,
and road routes.
INSTC was established in the year 2000,
with the founding agreement signed in St.
Petersburg by India, Iran, and Russia.
It aims to link the Indian Ocean and Persian
Gulf with the Caspian Sea via Iran, and then
further onward to Northern Europe via
Russia’s St. Petersburg.
The corridor significantly shortens trade
routes between India and Europe, offering a
faster and cheaper alternative to the Suez
Canal route.
Currently, there are 13 member
countries: India, Iran, Russia, Azerbaijan,
Armenia, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan,
Tajikistan, Turkey, Ukraine, Belarus, Oman,
and Syria. Additionally, Bulgaria has joined
as an Observer State.
India plays a pivotal role in the INSTC, with
the Chabahar Port in Iran serving as a key
node, facilitating access to Afghanistan and
Central Asia while bypassing Pakistan.
India and the European Union (EU)
Syllabus: GS2/International Relations
Context
India and the European Union (EU) chief
negotiators have concluded another round
of talks on the proposed free trade
agreement (FTA) and agreed to reach a deal
in two phases.
India-EU Free Trade Agreement (FTA) Negotiations
Overview
Negotiation Resumption: Talks resumed in
June 2022 after an 8-year hiatus (stalled in
2013 due to market access disagreements).
Objective: To finalize a comprehensive trade
agreement covering goods, services,
investments, and geographical indications.
Negotiation Structure: The agreement will
be concluded in two phases, following
India’s phased approach used in previous
FTAs (e.g., with Australia).
o This is partly due to the volatile
global trade environment, including
US tariff actions.
Prime Minister Narendra Modi and the
European Commission President agreed to
seal the deal by the end of this year.
Key Focus Areas
Market Access: Duty cuts demanded by the
EU in automobiles, medical devices, wines,
spirits, meat, and poultry.
Services and Investments: The talks focused
on areas like market access offers in goods,
services, and investment.
Regulatory Aspects: Stronger Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) framework.
o Agreements on sanitary and
phytosanitary measures, technical
barriers to trade, customs,
government procurement, and
sustainability.
Potential Benefits
Increased competitiveness for Indian
exports like ready-made garments,
pharmaceuticals, steel, petroleum products,
and electrical machinery.
Stronger investment protection and clearer
dispute settlement mechanisms.
Enhanced bilateral cooperation in
innovation and sustainable development.
India-EU relations
Political cooperation: India-EU relations
date to the early 1960s, and a cooperation
agreement signed in 1994 took the bilateral
relationship beyond trade and economic
cooperation.
o The first India-EU Summit, in 2000,
marked a watershed in the
evolution of the relationship.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
91
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o At the 5th India-EU Summit at The
Hague in 2004, the relationship was
upgraded to a ‘Strategic
Partnership’.
Economic cooperation : India’s bilateral
trade in goods with the EU was USD 137.41
billion in 2023-24, making it the largest
trading partner of India for goods.
o EU is India’s largest trading
partner for goods, 17% of India’s
exports go to the EU and 9% of EU
exports come to India.
Other areas of cooperation:
o The India-EU Water Partnership
(IEWP), established in 2016, aims to
enhance technological, scientific,
and policy frameworks in water
management.
o In 2020, there was an agreement for
research and development
cooperation in the peaceful uses of
nuclear energy between
the European Atomic Energy
Community and the Government of
India.
o India and the EU established
the Trade and Technology Council
(TTC) in 2023. The TTC is a forum
for the two parties to collaborate on
trade, technology, and security. The
TTC’s goals.
European Union
– The European Union (EU) is a political and
economic alliance of 27 countries.
– Background: The EU traces its roots to the
European Coal and Steel Community, which was
founded in 1950 and had just six members:
Belgium, France, Germany, Italy, Luxembourg, and
the Netherlands.
1. It became the European Economic Community in
1957 under the Treaty of Rome and subsequently
was renamed the European Community (EC).
2. European Union (EU), Organization of European
countries, formed in 1993 to oversee their
economic and political integration.
3. It was created by the Maastricht Treaty and
ratified by all members of the European
Community (EC), out of which the EU developed.
– It promotes democratic values in its member
nations and is one of the world’s most powerful
trade blocs.
– 20 of the countries share the euro as their official
currency.
India’s Relationship with Türkiye and Azerbaijan
Syllabus :GS 2/IR
In News
India’s trade relations with Türkiye and
Azerbaijan are expected to come under
strain due to Ankara and Baku backing
Islamabad and condemning India’s recent
strikes on terror camps in Pakistan.
Background
India launched Operation Sindoor on May 7
to destroy nine terror infrastructures in
Pakistan and Pakistan-occupied-Kashmir in
retaliation for the Kashmir’s Pahalgam
terror attack on April 22.
o All subsequent retaliations for
Pakistani offensives were carried
out under ‘Operation Sindoor’.
o During the conflict, Pakistan used
Turkish drones in its failed attempt
to target Indian military
installations.
India and Pakistan announced reaching an
understanding to stop all firings and
military actions on land, air and sea.
India’s Trade relationship with Türkiye and
Azerbaijan
A bilateral trade agreement was signed in
1973, followed by a pact on setting up an
India, Turkiye Joint Commission on
Economic and Technical Cooperation in
1983.
India’s exports to Türkiye stood at USD 5.2
billion during Apr-Feb 2024-25 as against
USD 6.65 billion in 2023-24.
o It accounts for only about 1.5 per
cent of India’s total exports of USD
437 billion.
91
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o At the 5th India-EU Summit at The
Hague in 2004, the relationship was
upgraded to a ‘Strategic
Partnership’.
Economic cooperation : India’s bilateral
trade in goods with the EU was USD 137.41
billion in 2023-24, making it the largest
trading partner of India for goods.
o EU is India’s largest trading
partner for goods, 17% of India’s
exports go to the EU and 9% of EU
exports come to India.
Other areas of cooperation:
o The India-EU Water Partnership
(IEWP), established in 2016, aims to
enhance technological, scientific,
and policy frameworks in water
management.
o In 2020, there was an agreement for
research and development
cooperation in the peaceful uses of
nuclear energy between
the European Atomic Energy
Community and the Government of
India.
o India and the EU established
the Trade and Technology Council
(TTC) in 2023. The TTC is a forum
for the two parties to collaborate on
trade, technology, and security. The
TTC’s goals.
European Union
– The European Union (EU) is a political and
economic alliance of 27 countries.
– Background: The EU traces its roots to the
European Coal and Steel Community, which was
founded in 1950 and had just six members:
Belgium, France, Germany, Italy, Luxembourg, and
the Netherlands.
1. It became the European Economic Community in
1957 under the Treaty of Rome and subsequently
was renamed the European Community (EC).
2. European Union (EU), Organization of European
countries, formed in 1993 to oversee their
economic and political integration.
3. It was created by the Maastricht Treaty and
ratified by all members of the European
Community (EC), out of which the EU developed.
– It promotes democratic values in its member
nations and is one of the world’s most powerful
trade blocs.
– 20 of the countries share the euro as their official
currency.
India’s Relationship with Türkiye and Azerbaijan
Syllabus :GS 2/IR
In News
India’s trade relations with Türkiye and
Azerbaijan are expected to come under
strain due to Ankara and Baku backing
Islamabad and condemning India’s recent
strikes on terror camps in Pakistan.
Background
India launched Operation Sindoor on May 7
to destroy nine terror infrastructures in
Pakistan and Pakistan-occupied-Kashmir in
retaliation for the Kashmir’s Pahalgam
terror attack on April 22.
o All subsequent retaliations for
Pakistani offensives were carried
out under ‘Operation Sindoor’.
o During the conflict, Pakistan used
Turkish drones in its failed attempt
to target Indian military
installations.
India and Pakistan announced reaching an
understanding to stop all firings and
military actions on land, air and sea.
India’s Trade relationship with Türkiye and
Azerbaijan
A bilateral trade agreement was signed in
1973, followed by a pact on setting up an
India, Turkiye Joint Commission on
Economic and Technical Cooperation in
1983.
India’s exports to Türkiye stood at USD 5.2
billion during Apr-Feb 2024-25 as against
USD 6.65 billion in 2023-24.
o It accounts for only about 1.5 per
cent of India’s total exports of USD
437 billion.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
92
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o India’s imports from Türkiye was
USD 2.84 billion during Apr-Feb
2024-25 as against USD 3.78 billion
in 2023-24. It accounts for only
about 0.5 per cent of India’s total
imports of USD 720 billion.
India’s exports to Azerbaijan stood at only
USD 86.07 million during Apr-Feb 2024-25
as against USD 89.67 million in 2023-24. It
accounts for a meagre 0.02 per cent of
India’s total outbound shipments.
o Imports from Azerbaijan were USD
1.93 million during Apr-Feb 2024-
25 as against USD 0.74 million in
2023-24.
o It accounts for a meagre
0.0002 per cent of India’s
total inbound shipments.
India has a trade surplus with both nations.
Major products traded between these countries
India’s exports to Türkiye include: Mineral
fuels and oil (USD 960 million in 2023-24);
electrical machinery and equipment; auto
and its parts; organic chemicals; pharma
products; tanning and dyeing items; plastic,
rubber; cotton; man-made fibres and
filaments, iron and steel.
o Imports: Different types of marbles
(blocks and slabs); fresh apples
(about USD 10 million), gold,
vegetables, lime and cement;
mineral oil (USD 1.81 billion in
2023-24); chemicals; natural or
cultured pearls; iron and steel.
India’s exports to Azerbaijan : Tobacco and
its products (USD 28.67 million in 2023-
24); tea, coffee; cereals; chemicals; plastic;
rubber; paper and paper board; and
ceramic products.
o Imports include: Animal fodder;
organic chemicals; essential oils and
perfumery; and raw hides and skins
and leather (USD 1.52 million
during Apr-Feb 2024-25). In 2023,
India was the third-largest
destination for Azerbaijan’s crude
oil.
People-to-people ties
There are currently around 3,000 estimated
Indian nationals in Türkiye, including 200
students.
Similarly, the Indian community in
Azerbaijan comprises more than 1,500
people.
As per estimates, about 3 lakh Indian
tourists visited Türkiye in 2023 and over 2
lakh to Azerbaijan.
Emerging Issues
Türkiye and Azerbaijan may come under
strain because the two countries have
criticised India’s strike on terror
infrastructures in Pakistan and Pakistan-
occupied-Kashmir.
o Islamabad has also used Turkish
drones in the conflict.
India witnessed a surge in calls to boycott
both countries.
o This led to mass cancellations of
travel bookings, withdrawal of tour
promotions by Indian operators,
and the suspension of academic
MoUs by institutions like IIT
Bombay and JNU.
In fact, Indian traders too have started
boycotting Turkish products such as apples
and marble.
US Passes Take It Down Act
Syllabus: GS2/ International Relations
In News
The U.S. President Donald Trump signed the
Take It Down Act, criminalizing the non-
consensual sharing of intimate images
including AI-generated deepfakes.
o An online boom in non-consensual
deepfakes is currently outpacing
efforts to regulate the technology
around the world due to a
proliferation of AI tools.
92
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o India’s imports from Türkiye was
USD 2.84 billion during Apr-Feb
2024-25 as against USD 3.78 billion
in 2023-24. It accounts for only
about 0.5 per cent of India’s total
imports of USD 720 billion.
India’s exports to Azerbaijan stood at only
USD 86.07 million during Apr-Feb 2024-25
as against USD 89.67 million in 2023-24. It
accounts for a meagre 0.02 per cent of
India’s total outbound shipments.
o Imports from Azerbaijan were USD
1.93 million during Apr-Feb 2024-
25 as against USD 0.74 million in
2023-24.
o It accounts for a meagre
0.0002 per cent of India’s
total inbound shipments.
India has a trade surplus with both nations.
Major products traded between these countries
India’s exports to Türkiye include: Mineral
fuels and oil (USD 960 million in 2023-24);
electrical machinery and equipment; auto
and its parts; organic chemicals; pharma
products; tanning and dyeing items; plastic,
rubber; cotton; man-made fibres and
filaments, iron and steel.
o Imports: Different types of marbles
(blocks and slabs); fresh apples
(about USD 10 million), gold,
vegetables, lime and cement;
mineral oil (USD 1.81 billion in
2023-24); chemicals; natural or
cultured pearls; iron and steel.
India’s exports to Azerbaijan : Tobacco and
its products (USD 28.67 million in 2023-
24); tea, coffee; cereals; chemicals; plastic;
rubber; paper and paper board; and
ceramic products.
o Imports include: Animal fodder;
organic chemicals; essential oils and
perfumery; and raw hides and skins
and leather (USD 1.52 million
during Apr-Feb 2024-25). In 2023,
India was the third-largest
destination for Azerbaijan’s crude
oil.
People-to-people ties
There are currently around 3,000 estimated
Indian nationals in Türkiye, including 200
students.
Similarly, the Indian community in
Azerbaijan comprises more than 1,500
people.
As per estimates, about 3 lakh Indian
tourists visited Türkiye in 2023 and over 2
lakh to Azerbaijan.
Emerging Issues
Türkiye and Azerbaijan may come under
strain because the two countries have
criticised India’s strike on terror
infrastructures in Pakistan and Pakistan-
occupied-Kashmir.
o Islamabad has also used Turkish
drones in the conflict.
India witnessed a surge in calls to boycott
both countries.
o This led to mass cancellations of
travel bookings, withdrawal of tour
promotions by Indian operators,
and the suspension of academic
MoUs by institutions like IIT
Bombay and JNU.
In fact, Indian traders too have started
boycotting Turkish products such as apples
and marble.
US Passes Take It Down Act
Syllabus: GS2/ International Relations
In News
The U.S. President Donald Trump signed the
Take It Down Act, criminalizing the non-
consensual sharing of intimate images
including AI-generated deepfakes.
o An online boom in non-consensual
deepfakes is currently outpacing
efforts to regulate the technology
around the world due to a
proliferation of AI tools.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
93
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
What is the Take It Down Act?
The Act makes it illegal to “knowingly
publish” or threaten to publish intimate
images without a person’s consent,
including AI-created “deepfakes.”
It also requires websites and social media
companies to remove such material within
48 hours of notice from a victim.
The platforms must also take steps to delete
duplicate content.
About Deepfakes
Deepfakes are synthetic media generated
using Artificial Intelligence (AI), particularly
through machine learning techniques like
GANs (Generative Adversarial Networks).
These tools can fabricate hyper-realistic
images, videos, or audio, making it appear
as if someone said or did something they
never actually did.
Impacts of Deepfakes
Deepfakes can be used to create fake news,
propaganda, or doctored statements from
public figures, influencing public opinion,
eroding trust in media, and potentially
disrupting elections or inciting social
unrest.
Unethical use of deepfake technology is
creating pornographic content by
superimposing individuals’ victimising
women.
The unauthorized use of a person’s likeness
or voice in deepfakes raises serious privacy
concerns.
Legal Provisions in India
Information Technology Act, 2000 (IT
Act): Sections 66E and 67 penalize the
violation of privacy and the transmission of
obscene material electronically.
Indian Penal Code (IPC), 1860 (now largely
replaced by the Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita –
BNS, 2023): Section 356 of the BNS deals
with defamation, organized crime (Section
111), theft in digital form (Section 316), and
cheating (Section 318).
Digital Personal Data Protection Act,
2023: Focusing on the unauthorized
processing of personal data
Indecent Representation of Women
(Prohibition) Act, 1986: Prohibits depiction
of women in indecent manner.
Legal Gaps & Need for New Deepfake Laws in India
No specific deepfake law: Existing laws
cover aspects of deepfake crimes but do not
define or directly regulate deepfakes.
Limited penalties: Current punishments
may not be strong enough to deter large-
scale AI-based crimes.
India & Russia Eye Collaboration on Nuclear Energy
and Advanced Technologies
Syllabus: GS2/ International Relations
Context
India and Russia are enhancing strategic
cooperation in nuclear energy, cyber
defence, and advanced technologies amid
shifting global geopolitics and domestic
policy changes.
Developments in Indo-Russian Cooperation
Nuclear Energy Expansion: India is
amending its Nuclear liability laws to
encourage greater foreign investment and
collaboration.
o Russian state-owned nuclear firm
Rosatom, builder of the Kudankulam
Nuclear Power Plant (NPP), signed
an MoU with Maharashtra for
thorium-based Small Modular
Reactors (SMRs).
What are Small Modular Reactors (SMRs)?
– Small modular reactors (SMRs) are advanced
nuclear reactors with a power capacity of up to 300
MW(e) per unit, roughly one-third the generating
capacity of traditional nuclear power plants.
1. Small – physically a fraction of the size of a
conventional nuclear power reactor.
2. Modular – making it possible for systems and
components to be factory-assembled and
transported as a unit to a location for installation.
3. Reactors – harnessing nuclear fission to generate
93
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
What is the Take It Down Act?
The Act makes it illegal to “knowingly
publish” or threaten to publish intimate
images without a person’s consent,
including AI-created “deepfakes.”
It also requires websites and social media
companies to remove such material within
48 hours of notice from a victim.
The platforms must also take steps to delete
duplicate content.
About Deepfakes
Deepfakes are synthetic media generated
using Artificial Intelligence (AI), particularly
through machine learning techniques like
GANs (Generative Adversarial Networks).
These tools can fabricate hyper-realistic
images, videos, or audio, making it appear
as if someone said or did something they
never actually did.
Impacts of Deepfakes
Deepfakes can be used to create fake news,
propaganda, or doctored statements from
public figures, influencing public opinion,
eroding trust in media, and potentially
disrupting elections or inciting social
unrest.
Unethical use of deepfake technology is
creating pornographic content by
superimposing individuals’ victimising
women.
The unauthorized use of a person’s likeness
or voice in deepfakes raises serious privacy
concerns.
Legal Provisions in India
Information Technology Act, 2000 (IT
Act): Sections 66E and 67 penalize the
violation of privacy and the transmission of
obscene material electronically.
Indian Penal Code (IPC), 1860 (now largely
replaced by the Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita –
BNS, 2023): Section 356 of the BNS deals
with defamation, organized crime (Section
111), theft in digital form (Section 316), and
cheating (Section 318).
Digital Personal Data Protection Act,
2023: Focusing on the unauthorized
processing of personal data
Indecent Representation of Women
(Prohibition) Act, 1986: Prohibits depiction
of women in indecent manner.
Legal Gaps & Need for New Deepfake Laws in India
No specific deepfake law: Existing laws
cover aspects of deepfake crimes but do not
define or directly regulate deepfakes.
Limited penalties: Current punishments
may not be strong enough to deter large-
scale AI-based crimes.
India & Russia Eye Collaboration on Nuclear Energy
and Advanced Technologies
Syllabus: GS2/ International Relations
Context
India and Russia are enhancing strategic
cooperation in nuclear energy, cyber
defence, and advanced technologies amid
shifting global geopolitics and domestic
policy changes.
Developments in Indo-Russian Cooperation
Nuclear Energy Expansion: India is
amending its Nuclear liability laws to
encourage greater foreign investment and
collaboration.
o Russian state-owned nuclear firm
Rosatom, builder of the Kudankulam
Nuclear Power Plant (NPP), signed
an MoU with Maharashtra for
thorium-based Small Modular
Reactors (SMRs).
What are Small Modular Reactors (SMRs)?
– Small modular reactors (SMRs) are advanced
nuclear reactors with a power capacity of up to 300
MW(e) per unit, roughly one-third the generating
capacity of traditional nuclear power plants.
1. Small – physically a fraction of the size of a
conventional nuclear power reactor.
2. Modular – making it possible for systems and
components to be factory-assembled and
transported as a unit to a location for installation.
3. Reactors – harnessing nuclear fission to generate
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
94
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
heat to produce energy.
– There are four four main types of SMR i.e., light
water, high temperature gas, liquid metal, and
molten salt.
Cybersecurity and Digital
Infrastructure: India and Russia are
exploring co-development of cyber defence
mechanisms, sector-specific firewalls, and
cybersecurity products for the global
market.
o Russia-based foundation
Cyberus has identified India’s
growth in fintech, e-governance, and
smart cities as a strong case for
deeper cyber cooperation.
Science and Technology Cooperation:
Innopraktika, a Moscow-based NGO, plans
to set up an Indo-Russian Technology
Association and Engineering Centre with
bases in both countries.
o Agreements have been signed
between University of Delhi and
Russia’s Higher School of Economics
to create a “mirror laboratory” for
research in data storage, processing,
and space systems.
Other Key Areas Identified for
Collaboration: Semiconductors, Artificial
Intelligence, Space Technology, Critical
Minerals and BrahMos-like co-development
models for knowledge-based innovation
and joint product development.
Strategic Significance
Energy Security: SMRs offer a safer, more
flexible, and scalable nuclear option, crucial
for India’s low-carbon energy transition.
Technological Sovereignty: Joint ventures in
AI, semiconductors, and cyber defence will
reduce dependency on Western
technologies.
Geopolitical Realignment: Strengthening ties
with Russia offers India a hedge amid
evolving tensions in Asia and disruptions in
the multilateral order.
Economic Diversification: In November
2024, a Russian Business Center was
inaugurated in New Delhi to boost trade
and high-tech cooperation between India
and Russia.
Concluding remarks
India-Russia collaboration is deepening
beyond traditional defence ties into
futuristic domains like nuclear SMRs, cyber
defence, and digital innovation.
With timely policy reforms and structured
engagement, this partnership can not only
enhance strategic autonomy for both
nations but also contribute to shaping a
multipolar technological order.
Virtual Capacity Building Session on Digital
Transformation in BRICS
Syllabus :GS 2/IR
In News
India hosted a Virtual Capacity Building
Session on Digital Transformation in BRICS.
Digital Transformation in BRICS
BRICS countries have significantly advanced
their digital economies by adopting new
technologies, fostering digital services, and
enacting supportive policies.
They now account for 40% of global internet
users and contribute substantially to global
ICT goods (30%) and digitally deliverable
services (11%).
The expansion of BRICS has increased its
global share of exports and internet users.
o The group now represents 45.2% of
the world’s population, 36.7% of
global GDP, and 23.3% of global
merchandise trade.
o As a result, digital
cooperation has become a
key part of the BRICS
agenda.
India’s Role
India showcased its flagship Sanchar Saathi
initiative aimed at protecting mobile users
94
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
heat to produce energy.
– There are four four main types of SMR i.e., light
water, high temperature gas, liquid metal, and
molten salt.
Cybersecurity and Digital
Infrastructure: India and Russia are
exploring co-development of cyber defence
mechanisms, sector-specific firewalls, and
cybersecurity products for the global
market.
o Russia-based foundation
Cyberus has identified India’s
growth in fintech, e-governance, and
smart cities as a strong case for
deeper cyber cooperation.
Science and Technology Cooperation:
Innopraktika, a Moscow-based NGO, plans
to set up an Indo-Russian Technology
Association and Engineering Centre with
bases in both countries.
o Agreements have been signed
between University of Delhi and
Russia’s Higher School of Economics
to create a “mirror laboratory” for
research in data storage, processing,
and space systems.
Other Key Areas Identified for
Collaboration: Semiconductors, Artificial
Intelligence, Space Technology, Critical
Minerals and BrahMos-like co-development
models for knowledge-based innovation
and joint product development.
Strategic Significance
Energy Security: SMRs offer a safer, more
flexible, and scalable nuclear option, crucial
for India’s low-carbon energy transition.
Technological Sovereignty: Joint ventures in
AI, semiconductors, and cyber defence will
reduce dependency on Western
technologies.
Geopolitical Realignment: Strengthening ties
with Russia offers India a hedge amid
evolving tensions in Asia and disruptions in
the multilateral order.
Economic Diversification: In November
2024, a Russian Business Center was
inaugurated in New Delhi to boost trade
and high-tech cooperation between India
and Russia.
Concluding remarks
India-Russia collaboration is deepening
beyond traditional defence ties into
futuristic domains like nuclear SMRs, cyber
defence, and digital innovation.
With timely policy reforms and structured
engagement, this partnership can not only
enhance strategic autonomy for both
nations but also contribute to shaping a
multipolar technological order.
Virtual Capacity Building Session on Digital
Transformation in BRICS
Syllabus :GS 2/IR
In News
India hosted a Virtual Capacity Building
Session on Digital Transformation in BRICS.
Digital Transformation in BRICS
BRICS countries have significantly advanced
their digital economies by adopting new
technologies, fostering digital services, and
enacting supportive policies.
They now account for 40% of global internet
users and contribute substantially to global
ICT goods (30%) and digitally deliverable
services (11%).
The expansion of BRICS has increased its
global share of exports and internet users.
o The group now represents 45.2% of
the world’s population, 36.7% of
global GDP, and 23.3% of global
merchandise trade.
o As a result, digital
cooperation has become a
key part of the BRICS
agenda.
India’s Role
India showcased its flagship Sanchar Saathi
initiative aimed at protecting mobile users
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
95
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
from fraud, enhancing transparency, and
ensuring equitable access to mobile
services.
India and Brazil led presentations on their
national approaches to cyber resilience.
India presented AADHAAR as a foundational
Digital Public Infrastructure (DPI) that has
revolutionized public service delivery
through identity-based digital inclusion.
o China also shared insights on its
digital infrastructure journey.
India introduced its ambitious Sangam
Digital Twin initiative, aimed at using AI-
native, federated platforms to enable
scenario-based infrastructure planning and
real-time governance solutions.
China also shared its experiences with
Digital Twin technology.
Importance
BRICS has made the integrated
implementation of the 2030 Agenda for
Sustainable Development a key priority,
focusing on its economic, social, and
environmental dimensions.
Digital technologies are seen as essential
tools to promote inclusive growth and
achieve the SDGs.
BRICS recognises the role of the internet
and ICTs in advancing e-governance,
financial inclusion, service delivery, and
global partnerships.
Technologies such as AI and big data are
especially valued for their development
potential.
Agritech and digital agriculture are key
focus areas.
o It acknowledges digital solutions’
role in boosting agricultural
productivity and farmer incomes.
Challenges
BRICS recognises the challenges of rapid
digitalisation, including the digital divide,
cybersecurity threats, privacy concerns, and
the misuse of technologies.
o Rotating leadership and differing
priorities
o Overcoming to internal
disagreements
Know About BRICS
– BRICS is an acronym for five major emerging
economies — Brazil, Russia, India, China, and South
Africa — that came together to promote
multilateralism, & inclusive global governance.
– The grouping originally began as BRIC, coined by
the economist Jim O’Neill in 2001, and was
formalised through the first BRIC summit in
2009 at Yekaterinburg, Russia.
– Brazil, Russia, India, China (these are founding
members); South Africa joined in 2010; Iran, UAE,
Egypt, Ethiopia, Saudi Arabia joined in 2024.
Argentina was initially expected to join in 2024 but
later opted out.
– BRICS represents over 41% of the world’s
population, about 32% of global GDP (PPP), and
nearly 18% of global trade.
– A major institutional achievement of BRICS is
the establishment of the New Development Bank
(NDB) in 2015, headquartered in Shanghai. The
NDB aims to finance infrastructure and sustainable
development projects in BRICS and other
developing countries.
Financial Action Task Force (FATF)
Syllabus: GS2/International Bodies
Context
India will submit a dossier to the Financial
Action Task Force (FATF) which will make a
case for putting Pakistan back in the “grey
list”.
About
India will specifically point to the non-
compliance of certain provisions that
Pakistan had promised to adhere to when it
was taken off the FATF grey list in 2022.
Pakistan had been in the grey list for four
years, between 2018 and 2022.
95
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
from fraud, enhancing transparency, and
ensuring equitable access to mobile
services.
India and Brazil led presentations on their
national approaches to cyber resilience.
India presented AADHAAR as a foundational
Digital Public Infrastructure (DPI) that has
revolutionized public service delivery
through identity-based digital inclusion.
o China also shared insights on its
digital infrastructure journey.
India introduced its ambitious Sangam
Digital Twin initiative, aimed at using AI-
native, federated platforms to enable
scenario-based infrastructure planning and
real-time governance solutions.
China also shared its experiences with
Digital Twin technology.
Importance
BRICS has made the integrated
implementation of the 2030 Agenda for
Sustainable Development a key priority,
focusing on its economic, social, and
environmental dimensions.
Digital technologies are seen as essential
tools to promote inclusive growth and
achieve the SDGs.
BRICS recognises the role of the internet
and ICTs in advancing e-governance,
financial inclusion, service delivery, and
global partnerships.
Technologies such as AI and big data are
especially valued for their development
potential.
Agritech and digital agriculture are key
focus areas.
o It acknowledges digital solutions’
role in boosting agricultural
productivity and farmer incomes.
Challenges
BRICS recognises the challenges of rapid
digitalisation, including the digital divide,
cybersecurity threats, privacy concerns, and
the misuse of technologies.
o Rotating leadership and differing
priorities
o Overcoming to internal
disagreements
Know About BRICS
– BRICS is an acronym for five major emerging
economies — Brazil, Russia, India, China, and South
Africa — that came together to promote
multilateralism, & inclusive global governance.
– The grouping originally began as BRIC, coined by
the economist Jim O’Neill in 2001, and was
formalised through the first BRIC summit in
2009 at Yekaterinburg, Russia.
– Brazil, Russia, India, China (these are founding
members); South Africa joined in 2010; Iran, UAE,
Egypt, Ethiopia, Saudi Arabia joined in 2024.
Argentina was initially expected to join in 2024 but
later opted out.
– BRICS represents over 41% of the world’s
population, about 32% of global GDP (PPP), and
nearly 18% of global trade.
– A major institutional achievement of BRICS is
the establishment of the New Development Bank
(NDB) in 2015, headquartered in Shanghai. The
NDB aims to finance infrastructure and sustainable
development projects in BRICS and other
developing countries.
Financial Action Task Force (FATF)
Syllabus: GS2/International Bodies
Context
India will submit a dossier to the Financial
Action Task Force (FATF) which will make a
case for putting Pakistan back in the “grey
list”.
About
India will specifically point to the non-
compliance of certain provisions that
Pakistan had promised to adhere to when it
was taken off the FATF grey list in 2022.
Pakistan had been in the grey list for four
years, between 2018 and 2022.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
96
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Financial Action Task Force (FATF)
The FATF is the global money-laundering
and terror financing watchdog.
It is an inter-governmental organisation
with 40 members, India became a member
in 2010.
The body researches how money is
laundered and terrorism is
funded, promotes global standards to
mitigate the risks, and assesses whether
countries are taking effective action.
What FATF’s grey/black lists entail?
The FATF identifies jurisdictions with weak
measures to combat money laundering and
terrorist financing (AML/CFT regimes) in
two public documents that are issued three
times a year — in February, June and
October.
The grey list, officially “Jurisdictions under
Increased Monitoring”, comprises countries
that have significant deficiencies in their
AML/CFT regimes but are actively
working with the FATF to address
these within agreed timeframes.
o Countries in the grey list are subject
to increased monitoring by the
FATF. Currently, there are 25
countries in this list (as of feb 2025).
o It carries adverse economic and
reputational impacts, which affect
the inflow of foreign investment and
international aid.
o Pakistan being on the grey list from
2018 to 2022 had helped curtail
illicit fund flows into India.
The black list, officially “High-Risk
Jurisdictions subject to a Call for
Action”, comprises countries with “serious
strategic deficiencies” in their AML/CFT
regimes.
o The FATF urges all other
jurisdictions to apply enhanced due
diligence while dealing with such
countries and also apply counter-
measures to protect the
international financial system from
the risks emanating from the
country.
o Three countries are in the black list
at the moment — North Korea,
Myanmar, and Iran.
India-Maldives 2nd High Level Core Group (HLCG)
Meeting
Syllabus: GS2/IR
Context
Maldivian Foreign Minister has arrived in
New Delhi to lead the Maldivian delegation
at the 2nd High Level Core Group (HLCG)
meeting.
About
Both foreign ministers will review
the progress of the India–Maldives
comprehensive economic and maritime
security partnership.
The India-Maldives vision document on
a comprehensive economic and maritime
security partnership was adopted by Prime
Minister Narendra Modi and Maldivian
President last year.
Key Highlights of the Vision Document
Bilateral Commitment and Financial
Support: India reaffirmed its commitment
under ‘Neighbourhood First’ and Vision
SAGAR.
o India extended emergency financial
assistance (rollover of $100 million
in T-bills and currency swap worth
$400 million + ₹30 billion).
Framework for a Comprehensive
Partnership: A new strategic framework is
established for a Comprehensive Economic
and Maritime Security Partnership,
intended to be people-centric and future-
oriented.
o Serve as a stabilizing force in the
Indian Ocean Region.
96
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Financial Action Task Force (FATF)
The FATF is the global money-laundering
and terror financing watchdog.
It is an inter-governmental organisation
with 40 members, India became a member
in 2010.
The body researches how money is
laundered and terrorism is
funded, promotes global standards to
mitigate the risks, and assesses whether
countries are taking effective action.
What FATF’s grey/black lists entail?
The FATF identifies jurisdictions with weak
measures to combat money laundering and
terrorist financing (AML/CFT regimes) in
two public documents that are issued three
times a year — in February, June and
October.
The grey list, officially “Jurisdictions under
Increased Monitoring”, comprises countries
that have significant deficiencies in their
AML/CFT regimes but are actively
working with the FATF to address
these within agreed timeframes.
o Countries in the grey list are subject
to increased monitoring by the
FATF. Currently, there are 25
countries in this list (as of feb 2025).
o It carries adverse economic and
reputational impacts, which affect
the inflow of foreign investment and
international aid.
o Pakistan being on the grey list from
2018 to 2022 had helped curtail
illicit fund flows into India.
The black list, officially “High-Risk
Jurisdictions subject to a Call for
Action”, comprises countries with “serious
strategic deficiencies” in their AML/CFT
regimes.
o The FATF urges all other
jurisdictions to apply enhanced due
diligence while dealing with such
countries and also apply counter-
measures to protect the
international financial system from
the risks emanating from the
country.
o Three countries are in the black list
at the moment — North Korea,
Myanmar, and Iran.
India-Maldives 2nd High Level Core Group (HLCG)
Meeting
Syllabus: GS2/IR
Context
Maldivian Foreign Minister has arrived in
New Delhi to lead the Maldivian delegation
at the 2nd High Level Core Group (HLCG)
meeting.
About
Both foreign ministers will review
the progress of the India–Maldives
comprehensive economic and maritime
security partnership.
The India-Maldives vision document on
a comprehensive economic and maritime
security partnership was adopted by Prime
Minister Narendra Modi and Maldivian
President last year.
Key Highlights of the Vision Document
Bilateral Commitment and Financial
Support: India reaffirmed its commitment
under ‘Neighbourhood First’ and Vision
SAGAR.
o India extended emergency financial
assistance (rollover of $100 million
in T-bills and currency swap worth
$400 million + ₹30 billion).
Framework for a Comprehensive
Partnership: A new strategic framework is
established for a Comprehensive Economic
and Maritime Security Partnership,
intended to be people-centric and future-
oriented.
o Serve as a stabilizing force in the
Indian Ocean Region.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
97
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Development Cooperation: Enhanced
infrastructure projects such as ports,
airports, housing, schools, roads, hospitals.
Trade and Economic Cooperation: Explore a
Bilateral Free Trade Agreement (FTA).
o Enable local currency trade
settlement to reduce dollar
dependence.
o Boost investments and ease of doing
business.
o Support Maldivian economic
diversification (blue economy,
fisheries, oceanography).
Collaboration on Digital Public
Infrastructure: UPI, Digital ID, Gati Shakti.
o Expansion of RuPay and digital
payment infrastructure.
o Shared expertise in fintech and
digital governance.
Energy Cooperation: Focus on renewables
(solar power), energy efficiency.
o Participation in One Sun One World
One Grid initiative.
o Institutional cooperation through
joint research, training, and
investment.
Health Cooperation: Access to affordable
Indian healthcare and generic medicines
(Jan Aushadhi Kendras).
o Recognition of Indian
Pharmacopoeia in Maldives.
Regional and Multilateral Cooperation: Work
together in the Colombo Security Conclave
(CSC) and other multilateral fora.
o Emphasis on maritime safety,
regional peace, and mutual
representation.
Implementation Mechanism: A High-Level
Core Group (HLCG) has been formed to
monitor and oversee the implementation of
all cooperation initiatives.
o The group will include senior
representatives from both
governments.
Significance
Regional Stability: This partnership is
crucial for stability in the Indian Ocean
amidst growing Chinese presence in the
region.
Diplomatic Maturity: Shows both sides’
willingness to move past tensions and focus
on long-term shared interests.
People-Centric Focus: Heavy emphasis on
health, education, housing, and livelihood is
notable.
Economic Sovereignty for Maldives: Local
currency trade and support for
diversification give Maldives more
economic autonomy.
Security Balance: India remains a key
security partner, but through cooperation
tailored to Maldivian preferences.
Highlights of India – Maldives Relations
– Participation in Multiple Forums: Both nations are
founding members of the South Asian Association
for Regional Cooperation (SAARC), the South Asian
Economic Union and signatories to the South Asia
Free Trade Agreement.
– Economic partnership: India emerged as
Maldives’ largest trade partner in 2023.
1. India is one of the biggest investors and tourism
markets for the Maldives, with significant trade
and infrastructure projects underway.
– Defense and Security Cooperation: Since
1988, defence and security has been a major area
of cooperation between India and Maldives.
1. A comprehensive Action Plan for Defence was
also signed in 2016 to consolidate defence
partnership.
2. Estimates suggest that almost 70% of Maldives’
defence training is done by India.
– Tourism: In 2023, India is the leading source
market for Maldives with a 11.8% market share.
1. In March 2022, India & Maldives agreed for an
open skies arrangement which will further
improve connectivity between two countries.
– Connectivity: The Male to Thilafushi Link project,
popularly known as the Greater Male Connectivity
97
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Development Cooperation: Enhanced
infrastructure projects such as ports,
airports, housing, schools, roads, hospitals.
Trade and Economic Cooperation: Explore a
Bilateral Free Trade Agreement (FTA).
o Enable local currency trade
settlement to reduce dollar
dependence.
o Boost investments and ease of doing
business.
o Support Maldivian economic
diversification (blue economy,
fisheries, oceanography).
Collaboration on Digital Public
Infrastructure: UPI, Digital ID, Gati Shakti.
o Expansion of RuPay and digital
payment infrastructure.
o Shared expertise in fintech and
digital governance.
Energy Cooperation: Focus on renewables
(solar power), energy efficiency.
o Participation in One Sun One World
One Grid initiative.
o Institutional cooperation through
joint research, training, and
investment.
Health Cooperation: Access to affordable
Indian healthcare and generic medicines
(Jan Aushadhi Kendras).
o Recognition of Indian
Pharmacopoeia in Maldives.
Regional and Multilateral Cooperation: Work
together in the Colombo Security Conclave
(CSC) and other multilateral fora.
o Emphasis on maritime safety,
regional peace, and mutual
representation.
Implementation Mechanism: A High-Level
Core Group (HLCG) has been formed to
monitor and oversee the implementation of
all cooperation initiatives.
o The group will include senior
representatives from both
governments.
Significance
Regional Stability: This partnership is
crucial for stability in the Indian Ocean
amidst growing Chinese presence in the
region.
Diplomatic Maturity: Shows both sides’
willingness to move past tensions and focus
on long-term shared interests.
People-Centric Focus: Heavy emphasis on
health, education, housing, and livelihood is
notable.
Economic Sovereignty for Maldives: Local
currency trade and support for
diversification give Maldives more
economic autonomy.
Security Balance: India remains a key
security partner, but through cooperation
tailored to Maldivian preferences.
Highlights of India – Maldives Relations
– Participation in Multiple Forums: Both nations are
founding members of the South Asian Association
for Regional Cooperation (SAARC), the South Asian
Economic Union and signatories to the South Asia
Free Trade Agreement.
– Economic partnership: India emerged as
Maldives’ largest trade partner in 2023.
1. India is one of the biggest investors and tourism
markets for the Maldives, with significant trade
and infrastructure projects underway.
– Defense and Security Cooperation: Since
1988, defence and security has been a major area
of cooperation between India and Maldives.
1. A comprehensive Action Plan for Defence was
also signed in 2016 to consolidate defence
partnership.
2. Estimates suggest that almost 70% of Maldives’
defence training is done by India.
– Tourism: In 2023, India is the leading source
market for Maldives with a 11.8% market share.
1. In March 2022, India & Maldives agreed for an
open skies arrangement which will further
improve connectivity between two countries.
– Connectivity: The Male to Thilafushi Link project,
popularly known as the Greater Male Connectivity
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
98
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Project (GMCP), is a USD 530 million infrastructure
project.
1. The project aims to connect Male to Villingili,
Gulhifalhu and Thilafushi islands through a series
of bridges, causeways and roads.
2. The project is crucial for the proposed Gulhifalhu
Port, and will be a major catalyst for the Maldivian
economy.
Way Ahead
Maldives is India’s key maritime
neighbour and an important partner in
India’s ‘Neighbourhood First’ policy and
vision MAHASAGAR which is Mutual and
Holistic Advancement for Security and
Growth Across Regions.
By acknowledging and addressing the
challenges, India and the Maldives
can navigate the complexities of their
relationship and build a stronger, more
resilient, and mutually beneficial
partnership for the future.
Push for Russia-India-China Revival
Syllabus: GS2/ IR
In News
Russia is actively pushing for the revival of
the Russia-India-China (RIC) trilateral
format, a strategic dialogue that has been
largely dormant for nearly five years.
What is the RIC format?
Initiated in the late 1990s by former
Russian Prime Minister Yevgeny Primakov,
the RIC format was conceived as a strategic
counterweight to Western dominance.
It facilitated over 20 ministerial-level
meetings, promoting cooperation in foreign
policy, economics, and security.
The format lost momentum following the
2020 Galwan Valley incident, which
significantly strained India-China relations.
Reasons for Russia’s Push to Revive RIC
Easing India-China Tensions: Russian
Foreign Minister Sergey Lavrov has
explicitly stated that the time is ripe for
RIC’s revival due to signs of de-escalation in
India-China border tensions.
Countering Western Influence: Russia views
the increasing influence of Western
alliances like NATO and the Quad (US,
Japan, Australia, India) as a threat to
regional stability.
Strengthening Eurasian Security
Architecture: Russia aims to promote a
“single and equitable system of security and
cooperation in Eurasia” through the revived
RIC. This aligns with Moscow’s broader
objective of establishing a multipolar world
order and reducing reliance on Western-
centric institutions.
Importance of Russia-India-China (RIC) Trilateral
Format
Geographic and Economic Scale:
o The RIC countries collectively
occupy over 19% of the global
landmass & contribute to over 33%
of global GDP.
o All three nations are members of
crucial international groupings such
as BRICS, G20, and the Shanghai
Cooperation Organization (SCO).
Promotion of Multilateralism and a
Multipolar World Order:
o RIC offers a significant non-Western
voice on global issues.
o Russia and China are permanent
members of the UN Security Council,
giving the RIC considerable
diplomatic and strategic leverage on
the international stage.
Eurasian Integration and Connectivity:
o The RIC format can complement and
potentially accelerate major
regional integration projects like
International North-South
Transport Corridor (INSTC) &
Eurasian Economic Union (EAEU),
led by Russia.
98
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Project (GMCP), is a USD 530 million infrastructure
project.
1. The project aims to connect Male to Villingili,
Gulhifalhu and Thilafushi islands through a series
of bridges, causeways and roads.
2. The project is crucial for the proposed Gulhifalhu
Port, and will be a major catalyst for the Maldivian
economy.
Way Ahead
Maldives is India’s key maritime
neighbour and an important partner in
India’s ‘Neighbourhood First’ policy and
vision MAHASAGAR which is Mutual and
Holistic Advancement for Security and
Growth Across Regions.
By acknowledging and addressing the
challenges, India and the Maldives
can navigate the complexities of their
relationship and build a stronger, more
resilient, and mutually beneficial
partnership for the future.
Push for Russia-India-China Revival
Syllabus: GS2/ IR
In News
Russia is actively pushing for the revival of
the Russia-India-China (RIC) trilateral
format, a strategic dialogue that has been
largely dormant for nearly five years.
What is the RIC format?
Initiated in the late 1990s by former
Russian Prime Minister Yevgeny Primakov,
the RIC format was conceived as a strategic
counterweight to Western dominance.
It facilitated over 20 ministerial-level
meetings, promoting cooperation in foreign
policy, economics, and security.
The format lost momentum following the
2020 Galwan Valley incident, which
significantly strained India-China relations.
Reasons for Russia’s Push to Revive RIC
Easing India-China Tensions: Russian
Foreign Minister Sergey Lavrov has
explicitly stated that the time is ripe for
RIC’s revival due to signs of de-escalation in
India-China border tensions.
Countering Western Influence: Russia views
the increasing influence of Western
alliances like NATO and the Quad (US,
Japan, Australia, India) as a threat to
regional stability.
Strengthening Eurasian Security
Architecture: Russia aims to promote a
“single and equitable system of security and
cooperation in Eurasia” through the revived
RIC. This aligns with Moscow’s broader
objective of establishing a multipolar world
order and reducing reliance on Western-
centric institutions.
Importance of Russia-India-China (RIC) Trilateral
Format
Geographic and Economic Scale:
o The RIC countries collectively
occupy over 19% of the global
landmass & contribute to over 33%
of global GDP.
o All three nations are members of
crucial international groupings such
as BRICS, G20, and the Shanghai
Cooperation Organization (SCO).
Promotion of Multilateralism and a
Multipolar World Order:
o RIC offers a significant non-Western
voice on global issues.
o Russia and China are permanent
members of the UN Security Council,
giving the RIC considerable
diplomatic and strategic leverage on
the international stage.
Eurasian Integration and Connectivity:
o The RIC format can complement and
potentially accelerate major
regional integration projects like
International North-South
Transport Corridor (INSTC) &
Eurasian Economic Union (EAEU),
led by Russia.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
99
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o It will enhance regional stability
across Eurasia.
Challenges to the RIC Revival
Lingering India-China Border
Disputes: Despite recent diplomatic
engagements, unresolved border issues
between India and China remain a
significant hurdle. A persistent trust deficit
could impede the effectiveness of the RIC.
India’s Strategic Alignments: India’s active
participation in the Quad and its deepening
ties with Western nations demonstrate its
strategic balancing act. Navigating close
alignment with both RIC and Western
alliances could pose diplomatic
complexities for India.
Russia-China Dynamics: Russia’s growing
closeness with China, especially in the wake
of the Ukraine conflict, might raise concerns
in India about the impartiality of the RIC
platform and its potential to become unduly
influenced by Beijing.
India and New Zealand: Strengthening Defence and
Security Ties
Syllabus: GS2/International Relations
Context
Recently, New Zealand’s Deputy Prime
Minister and Minister of Foreign Affairs
visited India and emphasized India’s role as
a ‘geopolitical giant’ and an ‘indispensable
security actor’.
About India-New Zealand Relations
India and New Zealand established
their diplomatic relations in 1952. Both
countries are members of the
Commonwealth, sharing democratic values
and governance principles.
They collaborate on regional and global
security issues, particularly in the Indo-
Pacific. They emphasize freedom
of navigation, maritime security, and
counterterrorism efforts.
New Zealand identified India as a priority
country in its ‘Opening Doors to
India’ policy notified in October 2011, which
was reiterated in 2015.
Strategic and Defence Cooperation
In March 2025, both nations signed a
Defence MoU to enhance military
cooperation, including staff college
exchanges and naval port calls.
New Zealand’s participation in ‘Combined
Task Force 150’ highlights its commitment
to maritime security in the Indian Ocean.
o Combined Task Force 150 is based in
Bahrain and focuses on maritime
security in the Middle East and
piracy in the Indian Ocean and Gulf
of Aden.
INSV Tarini, an Indian Naval Sailing Vessel
(INSV), a circumnavigation mission
under ‘Navika Sagar Parikrama-II’ made
a port call at Port Lyttelton recently.
o Earlier, two Indian Naval Ships, INS
Sahyadri and INS Kolkata, made port
calls in New Zealand in 2023, with
one ship visiting Wellington and the
other Auckland.
Economic and Trade Relations
Bilateral Trade (2023-24): $1.75 Billion
o NZ exported US$ 0.84 Billion &
imported US$ 0.91 Billion of total
goods and services.
o India primarily imports wool, iron &
steel, fruits & nuts, and aluminum,
while exporting pharmaceuticals,
mechanical machinery, and textiles
to New Zealand.
Comprehensive Free Trade Agreement
(CFTA): It was announced by both nations,
aiming to enhance market access and
strengthen supply chain integration in
March 2025.
It is expected to grow with New Zealand’s
participation in India’s Indo-Pacific Oceans
Initiative (IPOI).
Education and Cultural Exchange
99
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o It will enhance regional stability
across Eurasia.
Challenges to the RIC Revival
Lingering India-China Border
Disputes: Despite recent diplomatic
engagements, unresolved border issues
between India and China remain a
significant hurdle. A persistent trust deficit
could impede the effectiveness of the RIC.
India’s Strategic Alignments: India’s active
participation in the Quad and its deepening
ties with Western nations demonstrate its
strategic balancing act. Navigating close
alignment with both RIC and Western
alliances could pose diplomatic
complexities for India.
Russia-China Dynamics: Russia’s growing
closeness with China, especially in the wake
of the Ukraine conflict, might raise concerns
in India about the impartiality of the RIC
platform and its potential to become unduly
influenced by Beijing.
India and New Zealand: Strengthening Defence and
Security Ties
Syllabus: GS2/International Relations
Context
Recently, New Zealand’s Deputy Prime
Minister and Minister of Foreign Affairs
visited India and emphasized India’s role as
a ‘geopolitical giant’ and an ‘indispensable
security actor’.
About India-New Zealand Relations
India and New Zealand established
their diplomatic relations in 1952. Both
countries are members of the
Commonwealth, sharing democratic values
and governance principles.
They collaborate on regional and global
security issues, particularly in the Indo-
Pacific. They emphasize freedom
of navigation, maritime security, and
counterterrorism efforts.
New Zealand identified India as a priority
country in its ‘Opening Doors to
India’ policy notified in October 2011, which
was reiterated in 2015.
Strategic and Defence Cooperation
In March 2025, both nations signed a
Defence MoU to enhance military
cooperation, including staff college
exchanges and naval port calls.
New Zealand’s participation in ‘Combined
Task Force 150’ highlights its commitment
to maritime security in the Indian Ocean.
o Combined Task Force 150 is based in
Bahrain and focuses on maritime
security in the Middle East and
piracy in the Indian Ocean and Gulf
of Aden.
INSV Tarini, an Indian Naval Sailing Vessel
(INSV), a circumnavigation mission
under ‘Navika Sagar Parikrama-II’ made
a port call at Port Lyttelton recently.
o Earlier, two Indian Naval Ships, INS
Sahyadri and INS Kolkata, made port
calls in New Zealand in 2023, with
one ship visiting Wellington and the
other Auckland.
Economic and Trade Relations
Bilateral Trade (2023-24): $1.75 Billion
o NZ exported US$ 0.84 Billion &
imported US$ 0.91 Billion of total
goods and services.
o India primarily imports wool, iron &
steel, fruits & nuts, and aluminum,
while exporting pharmaceuticals,
mechanical machinery, and textiles
to New Zealand.
Comprehensive Free Trade Agreement
(CFTA): It was announced by both nations,
aiming to enhance market access and
strengthen supply chain integration in
March 2025.
It is expected to grow with New Zealand’s
participation in India’s Indo-Pacific Oceans
Initiative (IPOI).
Education and Cultural Exchange
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
100
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
New Zealand hosts approximately 300,000
persons of Indian origin, contributing to its
diverse cultural landscape.
Additionally, around 8,000 Indian students
pursue higher education in fields such as
information technology, hospitality, science,
engineering, and architecture.
Tourism and sports, particularly cricket,
hockey, and mountaineering, have played a
significant role in fostering goodwill
between the two nations.
Key Concerns in Bilateral Relations
Trade Barriers: India’s exit from
the Regional Comprehensive Economic
Partnership (RCEP) due to concerns over
agricultural imports has impacted trade
negotiations.
Geopolitical Challenges: New Zealand’s
strong trade ties with China ($24 billion)
raise strategic concerns for India.
Political Sensitivities: India has expressed
concerns over anti-India activities in New
Zealand, including protests by certain
groups.
o While New Zealand upholds free
expression, such issues require
careful diplomatic handling.
Conclusion
New Zealand’s renewed focus on India
reflects a broader shift in its foreign policy,
emphasizing realism, diplomacy, and the
significance of small states in global affairs.
As both nations continue to collaborate on
defence, security, and trade, their
partnership is set to play a vital role in
shaping the Indo-Pacific’s future.
GS 3
AGRICULTURE
Genome-Edited Seeds to Mark Beginning of Second
Green Revolution
Syllabus: GS3/ Agriculture, Science and Technology
Context
The Union Agriculture Minister announced
the development of two genome-edited rice
varieties and said the technological
advancement would lead to a second green
revolution in the country.
What is Genome Editing?
Genome editing refers to a group of
technologies that enable scientists
to precisely modify the DNA of an organism.
One of the most advanced tools is CRISPR-
Cas9 (Clustered Regularly Interspaced Short
Palindromic Repeats-associated protein 9),
which acts like molecular scissors to cut
specific sections of DNA.
o It allows for precise corrections or
modifications without introducing
foreign DNA, which distinguishes it
from traditional genetically modified
organisms (GMOs).
In India, Site-directed nuclease (SDN)-1 and
SDN-2 genome-editing techniques are
permitted under biosafety regulations for
general crops.
ICAR’s Genome-Edited Rice
ICAR has developed India’s first genome-
edited rice varieties – DRR Rice 100 (Kamla)
and Pusa DST Rice 1.
In 2018, ICAR initiated genome-editing
research to improve two major rice
varieties – Samba Mahsuri and MTU 1010 –
under the National Agricultural Science
Fund.
These new varieties were developed using
genome-editing technology based
on CRISPR-Cas.
The outcome of this research is the two
advanced varieties that offer the following
benefits:
o A 19% increase in yield,
o A 20% reduction in greenhouse gas
emissions,
100
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
New Zealand hosts approximately 300,000
persons of Indian origin, contributing to its
diverse cultural landscape.
Additionally, around 8,000 Indian students
pursue higher education in fields such as
information technology, hospitality, science,
engineering, and architecture.
Tourism and sports, particularly cricket,
hockey, and mountaineering, have played a
significant role in fostering goodwill
between the two nations.
Key Concerns in Bilateral Relations
Trade Barriers: India’s exit from
the Regional Comprehensive Economic
Partnership (RCEP) due to concerns over
agricultural imports has impacted trade
negotiations.
Geopolitical Challenges: New Zealand’s
strong trade ties with China ($24 billion)
raise strategic concerns for India.
Political Sensitivities: India has expressed
concerns over anti-India activities in New
Zealand, including protests by certain
groups.
o While New Zealand upholds free
expression, such issues require
careful diplomatic handling.
Conclusion
New Zealand’s renewed focus on India
reflects a broader shift in its foreign policy,
emphasizing realism, diplomacy, and the
significance of small states in global affairs.
As both nations continue to collaborate on
defence, security, and trade, their
partnership is set to play a vital role in
shaping the Indo-Pacific’s future.
GS 3
AGRICULTURE
Genome-Edited Seeds to Mark Beginning of Second
Green Revolution
Syllabus: GS3/ Agriculture, Science and Technology
Context
The Union Agriculture Minister announced
the development of two genome-edited rice
varieties and said the technological
advancement would lead to a second green
revolution in the country.
What is Genome Editing?
Genome editing refers to a group of
technologies that enable scientists
to precisely modify the DNA of an organism.
One of the most advanced tools is CRISPR-
Cas9 (Clustered Regularly Interspaced Short
Palindromic Repeats-associated protein 9),
which acts like molecular scissors to cut
specific sections of DNA.
o It allows for precise corrections or
modifications without introducing
foreign DNA, which distinguishes it
from traditional genetically modified
organisms (GMOs).
In India, Site-directed nuclease (SDN)-1 and
SDN-2 genome-editing techniques are
permitted under biosafety regulations for
general crops.
ICAR’s Genome-Edited Rice
ICAR has developed India’s first genome-
edited rice varieties – DRR Rice 100 (Kamla)
and Pusa DST Rice 1.
In 2018, ICAR initiated genome-editing
research to improve two major rice
varieties – Samba Mahsuri and MTU 1010 –
under the National Agricultural Science
Fund.
These new varieties were developed using
genome-editing technology based
on CRISPR-Cas.
The outcome of this research is the two
advanced varieties that offer the following
benefits:
o A 19% increase in yield,
o A 20% reduction in greenhouse gas
emissions,
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
101
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o A saving of 7,500 million cubic
meters of irrigation water,
o Improved tolerance to drought,
salinity, and climate stresses.
What are CRISPR-based technologies?
– The CRISPR-Cas system is a tool to cut, delete, or
add DNA sequences at precise locations, opening
different windows to treat genetic disorders,
develop drought-resistant plants, and modify food
crops.
– CRISPR occurs naturally in some bacteria, as a
part of their immune system that limits infections
by recognising and destroying viral DNA.
Path towards Second Green Revolution
Higher Yields: Genome-edited varieties offer
higher yields, similar to how high-yielding
varieties boosted food production during
the first Green Revolution.
Stronger Climate Resilience: Unlike earlier
Green Revolution crops, these varieties are
tolerant to drought, salinity, and heat. This
makes them more suitable for present and
future climate conditions.
Efficient Use of Resources: These new crops
use less water and cut greenhouse gas
emissions, correcting the overuse of water
and chemicals seen during the first Green
Revolution.
Lower Chemical Dependency: By being more
resistant to pests and diseases, genome-
edited crops reduce the need for pesticides
and fertilizers, lowering costs and
environmental harm.
Concerns
Global Regulatory Consensus: Although
genome editing using SDN-1 and SDN-2
techniques is allowed in India, many
countries have not yet finalized their stance
on such technologies.
o This limits the export potential of
genome-edited agricultural
products.
Corporate Control: If private companies
hold patents or exclusive rights to genome-
editing tools and the seeds developed
through them, farmers may become
dependent on expensive, proprietary
technologies.
Threat to Genetic Biodiversity: Overreliance
on a few high-performing genome-edited
varieties might reduce the diversity of crops
cultivated across regions.
Way Ahead
The development of the varieties is a
significant step toward India’s goal of
becoming a developed nation and
promoting sustainable agriculture.
In the 2023-24 budget, the Government of
India allocated ₹500 crores for genome
editing in agricultural crops.
ICAR has also initiated genome-editing
research for several crops, including
oilseeds and pulses.
The government is focusing on promoting
public-private partnerships, streamlining
regulations, and building capacity among
scientists and farmers to ensure responsible
use of the technology.
Agriphotovoltaics: Integrating Solar Energy with
Agriculture
Syllabus: GS3/Renewable Energy
Context
World Solar Day, as observed on 3rd
May, highlighted the transformative
potential of solar energy, particularly in
agriculture.
About the Agriphotovoltaics
Agriphotovoltaics (APVs) offer a dual
solution for food and energy
production by integrating solar panels with
farming.
It maximizes land-use efficiency, allowing
crops to grow beneath elevated solar panels
while generating electricity.
Origins of Agriphotovoltaics:
o It was first proposed by German
scientists Adolf Goetzberger and
Armin Zastrow in 1981.
101
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o A saving of 7,500 million cubic
meters of irrigation water,
o Improved tolerance to drought,
salinity, and climate stresses.
What are CRISPR-based technologies?
– The CRISPR-Cas system is a tool to cut, delete, or
add DNA sequences at precise locations, opening
different windows to treat genetic disorders,
develop drought-resistant plants, and modify food
crops.
– CRISPR occurs naturally in some bacteria, as a
part of their immune system that limits infections
by recognising and destroying viral DNA.
Path towards Second Green Revolution
Higher Yields: Genome-edited varieties offer
higher yields, similar to how high-yielding
varieties boosted food production during
the first Green Revolution.
Stronger Climate Resilience: Unlike earlier
Green Revolution crops, these varieties are
tolerant to drought, salinity, and heat. This
makes them more suitable for present and
future climate conditions.
Efficient Use of Resources: These new crops
use less water and cut greenhouse gas
emissions, correcting the overuse of water
and chemicals seen during the first Green
Revolution.
Lower Chemical Dependency: By being more
resistant to pests and diseases, genome-
edited crops reduce the need for pesticides
and fertilizers, lowering costs and
environmental harm.
Concerns
Global Regulatory Consensus: Although
genome editing using SDN-1 and SDN-2
techniques is allowed in India, many
countries have not yet finalized their stance
on such technologies.
o This limits the export potential of
genome-edited agricultural
products.
Corporate Control: If private companies
hold patents or exclusive rights to genome-
editing tools and the seeds developed
through them, farmers may become
dependent on expensive, proprietary
technologies.
Threat to Genetic Biodiversity: Overreliance
on a few high-performing genome-edited
varieties might reduce the diversity of crops
cultivated across regions.
Way Ahead
The development of the varieties is a
significant step toward India’s goal of
becoming a developed nation and
promoting sustainable agriculture.
In the 2023-24 budget, the Government of
India allocated ₹500 crores for genome
editing in agricultural crops.
ICAR has also initiated genome-editing
research for several crops, including
oilseeds and pulses.
The government is focusing on promoting
public-private partnerships, streamlining
regulations, and building capacity among
scientists and farmers to ensure responsible
use of the technology.
Agriphotovoltaics: Integrating Solar Energy with
Agriculture
Syllabus: GS3/Renewable Energy
Context
World Solar Day, as observed on 3rd
May, highlighted the transformative
potential of solar energy, particularly in
agriculture.
About the Agriphotovoltaics
Agriphotovoltaics (APVs) offer a dual
solution for food and energy
production by integrating solar panels with
farming.
It maximizes land-use efficiency, allowing
crops to grow beneath elevated solar panels
while generating electricity.
Origins of Agriphotovoltaics:
o It was first proposed by German
scientists Adolf Goetzberger and
Armin Zastrow in 1981.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
102
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o The concept involves elevating solar
modules to allow sunlight to reach
crops while harnessing solar power.
Solar Energy in India: Key Achievements
– 100 GW Solar Capacity Milestone: India’s solar
sector has grown 3450% over the past decade,
rising from 2.82 GW in 2014 to 100.33 GW on
January 31, 2025.
– Record-Breaking Solar Installations: In 2024,
India added 24.5 GW of solar capacity, more than
double the installations of 2023.
1. Utility-scale solar capacity saw a 2.8x increase,
with 18.5 GW installed in 2024.
Benefits for Farmers
APVs create microclimatic conditions that
reduce water evaporation and protect crops
from extreme heat, improving agricultural
resilience.
Farmers can sell excess solar power back to
the grid at a predetermined feed-in tariff,
ensuring stable revenue streams.
APV Success Stories in India
Najafgarh, Delhi Pilot Project: A farmer
leased his land to a solar company for ₹1
lakh per acre annually, securing stable
income.
o If farmers cultivate shade-loving
crops like potatoes, tomatoes, and
turmeric, their income could rise to
₹1.5 lakh per acre, a sixfold increase
over traditional farming.
Scaling Agriphotovoltaics Through Policy Support
Incorporating APVs in PM-KUSUM: India
currently lacks a designated agrivoltaics
policy, but revising the PM-
KUSUM agricultural solarisation program to
include APVs could accelerate adoption.
o Grid-connected solar power plants
under PM-KUSUM should
implement dual-use
models, allowing simultaneous crop
cultivation and solar generation.
Financial Incentives for Farmers: Expanding
credit guarantees and subsidies for APV
installations will help smallholder
farmers (own less than 2 hectares of
land) adopt solar farming.
o Increasing feed-in tariffs (FiTs) for
solar power generated on
agricultural land could improve
investment viability.
Capacity-Building and Technical
Training: Government-backed programs
should train farmers in APV management,
helping them integrate solar energy into
traditional farming practices.
Challenges and Future Prospects
Limited To Pilot Projects: APVs are limited
to pilot projects by research institutes and
private developers.
o Expanding APVs requires policy
support, financial incentives, and
awareness campaigns to encourage
adoption.
Infrastructure and Investment
Needs: Farmers need access to financing for
APV installations.
o Government subsidies and public-
private partnerships could
accelerate adoption.
Policy Support for APVs: India’s solar energy
policies should integrate APVs into national
agricultural strategies.
o Expanding research and pilot
programs will help refine APV
models for different climates and
crops.
Why Farmers Prefer Growing Rice and Wheat
Syllabus: GS3/Agriculture
Context
Indian farmers continue to choose rice and
wheat as their primary crops despite
growing discourse around crop
diversification, and complex interplay of
historical legacy, economic security, policy
incentives, and agro-ecological conditions.
Rice and Wheat Production in India (2024-25)
102
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o The concept involves elevating solar
modules to allow sunlight to reach
crops while harnessing solar power.
Solar Energy in India: Key Achievements
– 100 GW Solar Capacity Milestone: India’s solar
sector has grown 3450% over the past decade,
rising from 2.82 GW in 2014 to 100.33 GW on
January 31, 2025.
– Record-Breaking Solar Installations: In 2024,
India added 24.5 GW of solar capacity, more than
double the installations of 2023.
1. Utility-scale solar capacity saw a 2.8x increase,
with 18.5 GW installed in 2024.
Benefits for Farmers
APVs create microclimatic conditions that
reduce water evaporation and protect crops
from extreme heat, improving agricultural
resilience.
Farmers can sell excess solar power back to
the grid at a predetermined feed-in tariff,
ensuring stable revenue streams.
APV Success Stories in India
Najafgarh, Delhi Pilot Project: A farmer
leased his land to a solar company for ₹1
lakh per acre annually, securing stable
income.
o If farmers cultivate shade-loving
crops like potatoes, tomatoes, and
turmeric, their income could rise to
₹1.5 lakh per acre, a sixfold increase
over traditional farming.
Scaling Agriphotovoltaics Through Policy Support
Incorporating APVs in PM-KUSUM: India
currently lacks a designated agrivoltaics
policy, but revising the PM-
KUSUM agricultural solarisation program to
include APVs could accelerate adoption.
o Grid-connected solar power plants
under PM-KUSUM should
implement dual-use
models, allowing simultaneous crop
cultivation and solar generation.
Financial Incentives for Farmers: Expanding
credit guarantees and subsidies for APV
installations will help smallholder
farmers (own less than 2 hectares of
land) adopt solar farming.
o Increasing feed-in tariffs (FiTs) for
solar power generated on
agricultural land could improve
investment viability.
Capacity-Building and Technical
Training: Government-backed programs
should train farmers in APV management,
helping them integrate solar energy into
traditional farming practices.
Challenges and Future Prospects
Limited To Pilot Projects: APVs are limited
to pilot projects by research institutes and
private developers.
o Expanding APVs requires policy
support, financial incentives, and
awareness campaigns to encourage
adoption.
Infrastructure and Investment
Needs: Farmers need access to financing for
APV installations.
o Government subsidies and public-
private partnerships could
accelerate adoption.
Policy Support for APVs: India’s solar energy
policies should integrate APVs into national
agricultural strategies.
o Expanding research and pilot
programs will help refine APV
models for different climates and
crops.
Why Farmers Prefer Growing Rice and Wheat
Syllabus: GS3/Agriculture
Context
Indian farmers continue to choose rice and
wheat as their primary crops despite
growing discourse around crop
diversification, and complex interplay of
historical legacy, economic security, policy
incentives, and agro-ecological conditions.
Rice and Wheat Production in India (2024-25)
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
103
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Wheat Production: It is estimated at
122.724 million tonnes, covering 330.8 lakh
hectares.
o Major wheat-growing states include
Uttar Pradesh, Madhya Pradesh,
Rajasthan, Punjab, Haryana, Bihar,
Gujarat, and Maharashtra.
Rice Production: India produces over 120
million tonnes of rice annually, with Kharif
and Rabi seasons contributing to total
output.
o Rice cultivation is concentrated in
West Bengal, Uttar Pradesh, Punjab,
Andhra Pradesh, and Tamil Nadu.
Reasons for the Continuance of Rice and Wheat
Cultivation in India
Assured Procurement and Price
Stability: The government’s near-
guaranteed Minimum Support Price
(MSP) purchases for rice and wheat provide
financial security to farmers.
o Rice and wheat enjoy consistent
demand through public distribution
systems, unlike other crops, which
face market price fluctuations.
Green Revolution Impact: The introduction
of semi-dwarf wheat varieties during the
Green Revolution significantly boosted
yields and reduced lodging risks.
o These varieties responded well to
fertilizer and water application,
making wheat a preferred choice for
farmers.
Yield Stability and Irrigation Support: Rice
and wheat are less risky compared to other
crops, as they are primarily grown under
irrigated conditions.
o Steady yield improvements due to
public breeding and research
support have made these crops
more resilient.
Food Security and Policy Prioritization: Rice
and wheat are essential for India’s food
security, leading to continued policy
support.
o Government schemes like PM Garib
Kalyan Anna Yojana
(PMGKAY) ensure steady demand
for these grains.
Technological Advancements in Rice
Production: India has developed two
genome-edited rice varieties, enhancing
yield, drought resistance, and nitrogen
efficiency.
o These varieties aim to reduce water
consumption and lower greenhouse
gas emissions, making rice
cultivation more sustainable.
Challenges in Rice and Wheat Cultivation
Climate Change and Weather
Variability: Rising temperatures and erratic
rainfall patterns affect crop yields and
quality.
o Heat-induced stress during grain
filling stages can lead to lower
productivity.
Water Scarcity and Resource
Management: Rice is highly water-intensive,
leading to groundwater depletion in states
like Punjab and Haryana.
o Sustainable irrigation practices are
needed to reduce water
consumption.
Shifting Consumption Patterns: Despite high
production, household cereal consumption
has remained stagnant at 150 million
tonnes annually, raising concerns about
surplus management.
o Increased cereal exports have
helped balance domestic supply and
demand.
Why Growing Alternative Grains Matter?
Economic Viability: Governments should
provide economic support to farmers
willing to transition away from rice.
o Farmers’ sowing decisions are
highly sensitive to price
fluctuations, indicating a need for
103
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Wheat Production: It is estimated at
122.724 million tonnes, covering 330.8 lakh
hectares.
o Major wheat-growing states include
Uttar Pradesh, Madhya Pradesh,
Rajasthan, Punjab, Haryana, Bihar,
Gujarat, and Maharashtra.
Rice Production: India produces over 120
million tonnes of rice annually, with Kharif
and Rabi seasons contributing to total
output.
o Rice cultivation is concentrated in
West Bengal, Uttar Pradesh, Punjab,
Andhra Pradesh, and Tamil Nadu.
Reasons for the Continuance of Rice and Wheat
Cultivation in India
Assured Procurement and Price
Stability: The government’s near-
guaranteed Minimum Support Price
(MSP) purchases for rice and wheat provide
financial security to farmers.
o Rice and wheat enjoy consistent
demand through public distribution
systems, unlike other crops, which
face market price fluctuations.
Green Revolution Impact: The introduction
of semi-dwarf wheat varieties during the
Green Revolution significantly boosted
yields and reduced lodging risks.
o These varieties responded well to
fertilizer and water application,
making wheat a preferred choice for
farmers.
Yield Stability and Irrigation Support: Rice
and wheat are less risky compared to other
crops, as they are primarily grown under
irrigated conditions.
o Steady yield improvements due to
public breeding and research
support have made these crops
more resilient.
Food Security and Policy Prioritization: Rice
and wheat are essential for India’s food
security, leading to continued policy
support.
o Government schemes like PM Garib
Kalyan Anna Yojana
(PMGKAY) ensure steady demand
for these grains.
Technological Advancements in Rice
Production: India has developed two
genome-edited rice varieties, enhancing
yield, drought resistance, and nitrogen
efficiency.
o These varieties aim to reduce water
consumption and lower greenhouse
gas emissions, making rice
cultivation more sustainable.
Challenges in Rice and Wheat Cultivation
Climate Change and Weather
Variability: Rising temperatures and erratic
rainfall patterns affect crop yields and
quality.
o Heat-induced stress during grain
filling stages can lead to lower
productivity.
Water Scarcity and Resource
Management: Rice is highly water-intensive,
leading to groundwater depletion in states
like Punjab and Haryana.
o Sustainable irrigation practices are
needed to reduce water
consumption.
Shifting Consumption Patterns: Despite high
production, household cereal consumption
has remained stagnant at 150 million
tonnes annually, raising concerns about
surplus management.
o Increased cereal exports have
helped balance domestic supply and
demand.
Why Growing Alternative Grains Matter?
Economic Viability: Governments should
provide economic support to farmers
willing to transition away from rice.
o Farmers’ sowing decisions are
highly sensitive to price
fluctuations, indicating a need for
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
104
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
economic incentives to encourage
the transition.
Climate Resilience: Millets, maize, and
sorghum are less affected by climate
variability compared to rice.
o Rice cultivation is water-
intensive and contributes
to methane emissions, whereas
alternative grains require less water
and have a lower carbon footprint.
o Optimal allocation of rice area to
alternative grains could reduce
climate-induced production losses
by up to 11%.
o Encouraging farmers to grow
pulses, millets, and oilseeds could
improve soil health and
sustainability.
Market Development: Strengthening supply
chains for alternative grains can ensure
stable demand and pricing.
Why is the Agriculture Sector Missing from India’s
FTAs?
Syllabus: GS/ Economy, Agriculture
Context
Despite India’s active negotiations of Free
Trade Agreements with global partners, the
agriculture sector, vital to its economy and
employment, remains largely excluded.
Why Agriculture is Missing from India’s FTAs?
Fear of Import Surge: Entry into FTAs like
RCEP was abandoned over concerns that
cheap agri imports, especially dairy from
New Zealand and Australia, would hurt
Indian farmers.
Agriculture is a State subject, whereas trade
is in the Union list. This leads to
inconsistent policies — bans, export quotas,
or quarantine rules — harming exporter
confidence.
Infrastructural Deficiencies: Absence of cold
chains, agro-processing hubs, and efficient
port logistics, especially in landlocked states
limits agricultural trade potential.
Indian agricultural exports suffer from
quality issues like pesticide residues,
aflatoxins, and weak compliance with
global SPS (Sanitary and
Phytosanitary) norms.
Efforts taken by other countries
Thailand: Thailand’s agri-export success is
driven by its focus on industrial crops like
rubber, strong agro-processing linkages,
and over 18 FTAs that enhance market
access and boost value-added exports.
Brazil: It leveraged mechanised farming,
logistics corridors, and value addition in
soy, coffee, and meat to reach $166 bn agri
exports.
India’s Existing Strengths
Basmati Rice: India’s agricultural strength
lies in its globally recognized products such
as Basmati rice, which alone contributes to
around 21% of the country’s agricultural
exports.
GI-Tagged Products: Gaining visibility under
schemes like One District One Product
(ODOP).
Agricultural and Processed Food Products
Export Development Authority
(APEDA) works towards quality promotion
and certification, though more integration
with smallholder farmers is needed.
How to make Indian Agriculture FTA-Ready?
Shift from Commodities to Branding & Value
Addition and develop agro-processing
clusters near APMCs.
o Promote branded products and
niche categories like organic, GI-
tagged, or processed food.
Institutional Reforms: Create a National
Agricultural Trade Council with Centre-
State-industry coordination.
o Ensure single-window clearances
and digital export compliance.
Infrastructure and Logistics: Invest in inland
container depots, cold storage, and rural
logistics in landlocked states.
104
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
economic incentives to encourage
the transition.
Climate Resilience: Millets, maize, and
sorghum are less affected by climate
variability compared to rice.
o Rice cultivation is water-
intensive and contributes
to methane emissions, whereas
alternative grains require less water
and have a lower carbon footprint.
o Optimal allocation of rice area to
alternative grains could reduce
climate-induced production losses
by up to 11%.
o Encouraging farmers to grow
pulses, millets, and oilseeds could
improve soil health and
sustainability.
Market Development: Strengthening supply
chains for alternative grains can ensure
stable demand and pricing.
Why is the Agriculture Sector Missing from India’s
FTAs?
Syllabus: GS/ Economy, Agriculture
Context
Despite India’s active negotiations of Free
Trade Agreements with global partners, the
agriculture sector, vital to its economy and
employment, remains largely excluded.
Why Agriculture is Missing from India’s FTAs?
Fear of Import Surge: Entry into FTAs like
RCEP was abandoned over concerns that
cheap agri imports, especially dairy from
New Zealand and Australia, would hurt
Indian farmers.
Agriculture is a State subject, whereas trade
is in the Union list. This leads to
inconsistent policies — bans, export quotas,
or quarantine rules — harming exporter
confidence.
Infrastructural Deficiencies: Absence of cold
chains, agro-processing hubs, and efficient
port logistics, especially in landlocked states
limits agricultural trade potential.
Indian agricultural exports suffer from
quality issues like pesticide residues,
aflatoxins, and weak compliance with
global SPS (Sanitary and
Phytosanitary) norms.
Efforts taken by other countries
Thailand: Thailand’s agri-export success is
driven by its focus on industrial crops like
rubber, strong agro-processing linkages,
and over 18 FTAs that enhance market
access and boost value-added exports.
Brazil: It leveraged mechanised farming,
logistics corridors, and value addition in
soy, coffee, and meat to reach $166 bn agri
exports.
India’s Existing Strengths
Basmati Rice: India’s agricultural strength
lies in its globally recognized products such
as Basmati rice, which alone contributes to
around 21% of the country’s agricultural
exports.
GI-Tagged Products: Gaining visibility under
schemes like One District One Product
(ODOP).
Agricultural and Processed Food Products
Export Development Authority
(APEDA) works towards quality promotion
and certification, though more integration
with smallholder farmers is needed.
How to make Indian Agriculture FTA-Ready?
Shift from Commodities to Branding & Value
Addition and develop agro-processing
clusters near APMCs.
o Promote branded products and
niche categories like organic, GI-
tagged, or processed food.
Institutional Reforms: Create a National
Agricultural Trade Council with Centre-
State-industry coordination.
o Ensure single-window clearances
and digital export compliance.
Infrastructure and Logistics: Invest in inland
container depots, cold storage, and rural
logistics in landlocked states.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
105
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Agri-Investment Strategy: Move from input
subsidies to Direct Benefit Transfers (DBT)
to incentivise diversification and
innovation.
Efforts taken by India
The Agri Export Policy of 2018 is a
comprehensive initiative by the Indian
government to boost agricultural exports
and integrate Indian farmers into global
value chains.
The Agricultural and Processed Food
Products Export Development
Authority facilitates certification, market
intelligence, export promotion, and
capacity-building programs for
stakeholders.
Initiatives like the Paramparagat Krishi
Vikas Yojana (PKVY) and National
Programme for Organic Production
(NPOP) aim to tap into growing global
demand for chemical-free, sustainable
produce.
Negotiation of Market Access: India
continues to engage in bilateral and
multilateral negotiations to reduce tariff
and non-tariff barriers for its agricultural
goods and secure preferential market
access.
Concluding remarks
India’s cautious approach to agriculture in
FTAs safeguards farmer interests but also
restricts the sector’s export potential.
Moving forward, a balanced strategy with
targeted reforms can help integrate Indian
agriculture into global markets more
effectively.
Bananas Cultivation
Syllabus: GS3/Agriculture
Context
A recent report by UK NGO Christian Aid
has warned that 60% of the best banana
growing areas are in danger from climate
change-driven rising temperatures.
About
The report showed that extreme weather,
rising temperatures and climate related
pests pose a threat to banana producing
regions, sparking calls for faster emission
cuts and more support for farmers.
The report indicates that India is expected
to see declining banana yields due to climate
change by 2050.
Banana Production
Bananas are the fourth most important food
crop globally, following wheat, rice and
maize.
The top banana producing
countries are India followed by China.
Bananas thrive in temperatures ranging
from 15 to 35 degrees Celsius and require
ample water to grow effectively.
Currently, Latin America and the Caribbean
account for 80% of global banana exports.
Despite being the world’s largest banana
producer, India’s export share is currently
just one percent in the global market, even
though the country accounts for 26.45
percent of the world’s banana production at
35.36 Million Metric Ton.
Andhra Pradesh is the largest banana-
producing state, followed by Maharashtra,
Karnataka, Tamil Nadu, and Uttar Pradesh.
o These five states collectively
contribute around 67 percent to
India’s banana production in the
fiscal year 2022-23.
Promotion of Organic Farming
Syllabus: GS3/ Agriculture
Context
Indian Overseas Bank (IOB), Amul, and Rich
Plus have signed a tripartite Memorandum
of Understanding (MoU) to promote organic
farming in India.
More About the News
Launch of Organic Farming Card: A co-
branded Organic Farming Card has been
105
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Agri-Investment Strategy: Move from input
subsidies to Direct Benefit Transfers (DBT)
to incentivise diversification and
innovation.
Efforts taken by India
The Agri Export Policy of 2018 is a
comprehensive initiative by the Indian
government to boost agricultural exports
and integrate Indian farmers into global
value chains.
The Agricultural and Processed Food
Products Export Development
Authority facilitates certification, market
intelligence, export promotion, and
capacity-building programs for
stakeholders.
Initiatives like the Paramparagat Krishi
Vikas Yojana (PKVY) and National
Programme for Organic Production
(NPOP) aim to tap into growing global
demand for chemical-free, sustainable
produce.
Negotiation of Market Access: India
continues to engage in bilateral and
multilateral negotiations to reduce tariff
and non-tariff barriers for its agricultural
goods and secure preferential market
access.
Concluding remarks
India’s cautious approach to agriculture in
FTAs safeguards farmer interests but also
restricts the sector’s export potential.
Moving forward, a balanced strategy with
targeted reforms can help integrate Indian
agriculture into global markets more
effectively.
Bananas Cultivation
Syllabus: GS3/Agriculture
Context
A recent report by UK NGO Christian Aid
has warned that 60% of the best banana
growing areas are in danger from climate
change-driven rising temperatures.
About
The report showed that extreme weather,
rising temperatures and climate related
pests pose a threat to banana producing
regions, sparking calls for faster emission
cuts and more support for farmers.
The report indicates that India is expected
to see declining banana yields due to climate
change by 2050.
Banana Production
Bananas are the fourth most important food
crop globally, following wheat, rice and
maize.
The top banana producing
countries are India followed by China.
Bananas thrive in temperatures ranging
from 15 to 35 degrees Celsius and require
ample water to grow effectively.
Currently, Latin America and the Caribbean
account for 80% of global banana exports.
Despite being the world’s largest banana
producer, India’s export share is currently
just one percent in the global market, even
though the country accounts for 26.45
percent of the world’s banana production at
35.36 Million Metric Ton.
Andhra Pradesh is the largest banana-
producing state, followed by Maharashtra,
Karnataka, Tamil Nadu, and Uttar Pradesh.
o These five states collectively
contribute around 67 percent to
India’s banana production in the
fiscal year 2022-23.
Promotion of Organic Farming
Syllabus: GS3/ Agriculture
Context
Indian Overseas Bank (IOB), Amul, and Rich
Plus have signed a tripartite Memorandum
of Understanding (MoU) to promote organic
farming in India.
More About the News
Launch of Organic Farming Card: A co-
branded Organic Farming Card has been
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
106
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
introduced for account holders of IOB who
are engaged in organic farming.
o This card will enable farmers to
access discounted organic
agricultural inputs through Amul’s
certified retail outlets.
IOB has announced a dedicated credit
scheme named “Harit Kranti”, specifically
designed to address the financial needs of
organic farmers.
Richplus will play a key role in
offering technical expertise and training to
farmers on organic farming practices.
What is Organic farming?
Organic farming is a sustainable agriculture
system that excludes synthetic inputs like
chemical fertilizers and pesticides.
It relies on natural resources like crop
residues, farmyard manure, and compost to
maintain soil health and manage pests and
diseases.
Organic farming in India
India ranks at 4th place in terms of certified
area globally as per the report published by
International Federation of Organic
Agriculture Movements (IFOAM) Statistics
2022.
Madhya Pradesh has the largest area under
organic certification followed by
Maharashtra, Rajasthan, Gujarat and
Karnataka.
o Sikkim is India’s first fully organic
state, with implementing organic
practices on around 75,000 hectares
of agricultural land.
India ranks first globally in terms of number
of farmers practicing organic farming.
The exports of India’s organic
products stood at $708 million in 2022-23
and considering the global market size of
around $138 billion, there is a tremendous
scope to increase the organic exports in the
near future.
Advantages of Organic farming
Healthier Food Products: Organic farming
results in food products that are free from
harmful chemical residues with higher
levels of essential nutrients.
Enhanced Soil Health: Organic farming
methods focus on building and maintaining
soil health by increasing organic matter
content, microbial activity, and nutrient
cycling.
Economic Opportunities: Organic farming
provides economic benefits to farmers
through premium prices for organic
products, access to niche markets, and
reduced input costs over the long term.
Climate Change Mitigation: Organic farming
practices such as composting and organic
soil management contribute to carbon
sequestration in the soil, helping to mitigate
climate change by reducing greenhouse gas
emissions.
Biodiversity Conservation: Organic farming
practices support biodiversity by creating
habitats for beneficial insects, birds, and
other wildlife.
Organic certifications systems in India
National Programme for Organic Production
(NPOP): It is under the Ministry of
Commerce and Industry for development of
the export market.
o It is a third party certification
programme where the production
and handling of activities at all
stages such as production,
processing, trading and export
requirements for organic products
is covered.
Participatory Guarantee System (PGS-
India): PGS-India under Ministry of
Agriculture and farmers Welfare involves
stakeholders (including farmers/
producers) in decision making about the
operation of the PGS-India certification by
assessing, inspecting and verifying the
production practices of each other.
Food Safety Regulation has made it
mandatory for organic products to be
106
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
introduced for account holders of IOB who
are engaged in organic farming.
o This card will enable farmers to
access discounted organic
agricultural inputs through Amul’s
certified retail outlets.
IOB has announced a dedicated credit
scheme named “Harit Kranti”, specifically
designed to address the financial needs of
organic farmers.
Richplus will play a key role in
offering technical expertise and training to
farmers on organic farming practices.
What is Organic farming?
Organic farming is a sustainable agriculture
system that excludes synthetic inputs like
chemical fertilizers and pesticides.
It relies on natural resources like crop
residues, farmyard manure, and compost to
maintain soil health and manage pests and
diseases.
Organic farming in India
India ranks at 4th place in terms of certified
area globally as per the report published by
International Federation of Organic
Agriculture Movements (IFOAM) Statistics
2022.
Madhya Pradesh has the largest area under
organic certification followed by
Maharashtra, Rajasthan, Gujarat and
Karnataka.
o Sikkim is India’s first fully organic
state, with implementing organic
practices on around 75,000 hectares
of agricultural land.
India ranks first globally in terms of number
of farmers practicing organic farming.
The exports of India’s organic
products stood at $708 million in 2022-23
and considering the global market size of
around $138 billion, there is a tremendous
scope to increase the organic exports in the
near future.
Advantages of Organic farming
Healthier Food Products: Organic farming
results in food products that are free from
harmful chemical residues with higher
levels of essential nutrients.
Enhanced Soil Health: Organic farming
methods focus on building and maintaining
soil health by increasing organic matter
content, microbial activity, and nutrient
cycling.
Economic Opportunities: Organic farming
provides economic benefits to farmers
through premium prices for organic
products, access to niche markets, and
reduced input costs over the long term.
Climate Change Mitigation: Organic farming
practices such as composting and organic
soil management contribute to carbon
sequestration in the soil, helping to mitigate
climate change by reducing greenhouse gas
emissions.
Biodiversity Conservation: Organic farming
practices support biodiversity by creating
habitats for beneficial insects, birds, and
other wildlife.
Organic certifications systems in India
National Programme for Organic Production
(NPOP): It is under the Ministry of
Commerce and Industry for development of
the export market.
o It is a third party certification
programme where the production
and handling of activities at all
stages such as production,
processing, trading and export
requirements for organic products
is covered.
Participatory Guarantee System (PGS-
India): PGS-India under Ministry of
Agriculture and farmers Welfare involves
stakeholders (including farmers/
producers) in decision making about the
operation of the PGS-India certification by
assessing, inspecting and verifying the
production practices of each other.
Food Safety Regulation has made it
mandatory for organic products to be
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
107
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
certified under NPOP or PGS for being sold
in the domestic market under the Jaivik
Bharat logo.
Agricultural and Processed Food Products Export
Development Authority (APEDA)
– It was set up in 1986 through an Act of
Parliament under the Ministry of Commerce and
Industry, Government of India.
– Headquarters: New Delhi
– APEDA is mandated with the responsibility of
export promotion and development of the products
like Fruits, Vegetables, Meat, Poultry and their
Products,etc.
– APEDA functions as the Secretariat to the
National Accreditation Board (NAB) for
implementation of accreditation of the Certification
Bodies under National Programme for Organic
Production (NPOP) for organic exports.
Government Initiatives for Organic Farming
Paramparagat Krishi Vikas Yojana
(PKVY): The schemes stress on end-to-end
support to farmers engaged in organic
farming i.e. from production to processing,
certification and marketing and post-
harvest management.
o Training and Capacity Building are
integral parts of the scheme.
Mission Organic Value Chain Development
for North Eastern Region (MOVCDNER): The
scheme is being implemented exclusively in
the NE States to support farmers engaged in
organic farming.
Jaivik Kheti portal is a one stop solution for
facilitating organic farmers to sell their
organic produce and promoting organic
farming and its benefits. This portal caters
various stakeholders like local groups,
individual farmers, buyers and input
suppliers.
Way Ahead
Enhance Market Access: Expand
procurement, branding, and retailing of
organic produce through platforms like
Amul and Jaivik Kheti.
Promote Awareness and Training: Ensure
that farmers receive technical guidance and
training to meet certification norms and
market expectations.
Expand Certification Infrastructure: Simplify
certification processes and increase
availability of local certification bodies.
Viksit Krishi Sankalp Abhiyan
Syllabus: GS3/ Agriculture
Context
The Union Agriculture Minister launched
the Viksit Krishi Sankalp Abhiyan (VKSA-
2025) at Central Institute of Freshwater
Aquaculture, Bhubaneswar, aiming to
empower more than 1.5 crore farmers
across the country.
What is the Viksit Krishi Sankalp Abhiyan?
It is a nationwide agricultural outreach
campaign to promote sustainable
agricultural development by integrating
scientific knowledge, modern technology,
and farmer feedback.
The campaign aims to bridge the gap
between “lab and land”, empowering
farmers through direct interaction with
over 16,000 agricultural scientists, Krishi
Vigyan Kendras (KVKs), and government
officials.
Key Features of the Campaign
Nationwide Reach: Over 2,000 teams will
visit 2,170 locations across 700+ districts,
covering nearly 1.5 crore farmers over a 15-
day period.
Two-Way Communication Model: Scientists
will provide customized advice on seed
varieties, fertilizers, crop choice, and soil
health.
o In return, they will collect data on
farmer challenges for guiding future
research and policy.
Promotion of Diversified Income
Sources: Encouragement for adoption of
solar farming, beekeeping (Sweet
Revolution), nutri-cereals (Shri Anna),
Gobardhan Yojana, and agricultural waste-
to-energy initiatives.
107
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
certified under NPOP or PGS for being sold
in the domestic market under the Jaivik
Bharat logo.
Agricultural and Processed Food Products Export
Development Authority (APEDA)
– It was set up in 1986 through an Act of
Parliament under the Ministry of Commerce and
Industry, Government of India.
– Headquarters: New Delhi
– APEDA is mandated with the responsibility of
export promotion and development of the products
like Fruits, Vegetables, Meat, Poultry and their
Products,etc.
– APEDA functions as the Secretariat to the
National Accreditation Board (NAB) for
implementation of accreditation of the Certification
Bodies under National Programme for Organic
Production (NPOP) for organic exports.
Government Initiatives for Organic Farming
Paramparagat Krishi Vikas Yojana
(PKVY): The schemes stress on end-to-end
support to farmers engaged in organic
farming i.e. from production to processing,
certification and marketing and post-
harvest management.
o Training and Capacity Building are
integral parts of the scheme.
Mission Organic Value Chain Development
for North Eastern Region (MOVCDNER): The
scheme is being implemented exclusively in
the NE States to support farmers engaged in
organic farming.
Jaivik Kheti portal is a one stop solution for
facilitating organic farmers to sell their
organic produce and promoting organic
farming and its benefits. This portal caters
various stakeholders like local groups,
individual farmers, buyers and input
suppliers.
Way Ahead
Enhance Market Access: Expand
procurement, branding, and retailing of
organic produce through platforms like
Amul and Jaivik Kheti.
Promote Awareness and Training: Ensure
that farmers receive technical guidance and
training to meet certification norms and
market expectations.
Expand Certification Infrastructure: Simplify
certification processes and increase
availability of local certification bodies.
Viksit Krishi Sankalp Abhiyan
Syllabus: GS3/ Agriculture
Context
The Union Agriculture Minister launched
the Viksit Krishi Sankalp Abhiyan (VKSA-
2025) at Central Institute of Freshwater
Aquaculture, Bhubaneswar, aiming to
empower more than 1.5 crore farmers
across the country.
What is the Viksit Krishi Sankalp Abhiyan?
It is a nationwide agricultural outreach
campaign to promote sustainable
agricultural development by integrating
scientific knowledge, modern technology,
and farmer feedback.
The campaign aims to bridge the gap
between “lab and land”, empowering
farmers through direct interaction with
over 16,000 agricultural scientists, Krishi
Vigyan Kendras (KVKs), and government
officials.
Key Features of the Campaign
Nationwide Reach: Over 2,000 teams will
visit 2,170 locations across 700+ districts,
covering nearly 1.5 crore farmers over a 15-
day period.
Two-Way Communication Model: Scientists
will provide customized advice on seed
varieties, fertilizers, crop choice, and soil
health.
o In return, they will collect data on
farmer challenges for guiding future
research and policy.
Promotion of Diversified Income
Sources: Encouragement for adoption of
solar farming, beekeeping (Sweet
Revolution), nutri-cereals (Shri Anna),
Gobardhan Yojana, and agricultural waste-
to-energy initiatives.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
108
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
DEFENCE
Psychological Warfare
Syllabus: GS3/Defence
Context
Pakistan is indulging in psychological warfare with
the spread of misinformation across social media
platforms aimed at misrepresenting India’s military
actions and preparedness.
And, the PIB fact-check unit reviewed widely
circulated fake videos and claims, allegedly
originating from Pakistani social media handles.
Psychological Warfare
Psychological warfare involves the planned
use of propaganda and other psychological
operations to influence the opinions,
emotions, attitudes, and behavior of
opposition groups.
Propaganda: Spreading biased or
misleading information to shape public
opinion or sow confusion.
o Often used to glorify one side and
demonize the enemy.
Fear and Intimidation: Threats, displays of
overwhelming force, or rumors to instill
fear and undermine morale.
Misinformation and Deception: Providing
false information to mislead opponents
about intentions, strength, or location.
Disruption of Decision-
Making: Psychological operations (PSYOPs)
that confuse leadership or disrupt the chain
of command.
Tactics and Tools
Leaflets and Broadcasts: Used to spread
propaganda in enemy territory.
Cyber PSYOPs: Social media manipulation,
fake news, or hacking to cause panic or
division.
Rumors and Whispers: Undermining trust
through subtle, hard-to-trace
disinformation.
False Flag Operations: Conducting actions
meant to appear as though they were
carried out by another group.
Historical Examples
World War II: The Allies dropped leaflets
over Germany to lower troop morale.
Cold War: The U.S. and USSR used extensive
propaganda campaigns to influence global
perception.
Modern Applications Beyond the Battlefield
Business: Aggressive marketing or
corporate misinformation to undermine
competitors.
Politics: Discrediting opponents,
manipulation of public opinion through
media.
Interpersonal: Gaslighting or emotional
manipulation in toxic relationships.
Way Ahead
The Press Information Bureau’s fact-
checking team, PIB Fact Check, has stepped
in to identify and verify misleading
content being circulated across social and
mainstream platforms.
The government has advised the public to
rely only on official notices, helpline
numbers, and confirmed relief updates.
People have also been asked not to forward
unverified posts as false claims continue to
flood social media.
Gallantry Awards
Syllabus :GS3/Defence
In News
President Droupadi Murmu conferred Kirti
Chakras and Shaurya Chakras to the
personnel of the Armed Forces, Central
Armed Police Forces and State/Union
Territory Police during Phase-I of the
108
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
DEFENCE
Psychological Warfare
Syllabus: GS3/Defence
Context
Pakistan is indulging in psychological warfare with
the spread of misinformation across social media
platforms aimed at misrepresenting India’s military
actions and preparedness.
And, the PIB fact-check unit reviewed widely
circulated fake videos and claims, allegedly
originating from Pakistani social media handles.
Psychological Warfare
Psychological warfare involves the planned
use of propaganda and other psychological
operations to influence the opinions,
emotions, attitudes, and behavior of
opposition groups.
Propaganda: Spreading biased or
misleading information to shape public
opinion or sow confusion.
o Often used to glorify one side and
demonize the enemy.
Fear and Intimidation: Threats, displays of
overwhelming force, or rumors to instill
fear and undermine morale.
Misinformation and Deception: Providing
false information to mislead opponents
about intentions, strength, or location.
Disruption of Decision-
Making: Psychological operations (PSYOPs)
that confuse leadership or disrupt the chain
of command.
Tactics and Tools
Leaflets and Broadcasts: Used to spread
propaganda in enemy territory.
Cyber PSYOPs: Social media manipulation,
fake news, or hacking to cause panic or
division.
Rumors and Whispers: Undermining trust
through subtle, hard-to-trace
disinformation.
False Flag Operations: Conducting actions
meant to appear as though they were
carried out by another group.
Historical Examples
World War II: The Allies dropped leaflets
over Germany to lower troop morale.
Cold War: The U.S. and USSR used extensive
propaganda campaigns to influence global
perception.
Modern Applications Beyond the Battlefield
Business: Aggressive marketing or
corporate misinformation to undermine
competitors.
Politics: Discrediting opponents,
manipulation of public opinion through
media.
Interpersonal: Gaslighting or emotional
manipulation in toxic relationships.
Way Ahead
The Press Information Bureau’s fact-
checking team, PIB Fact Check, has stepped
in to identify and verify misleading
content being circulated across social and
mainstream platforms.
The government has advised the public to
rely only on official notices, helpline
numbers, and confirmed relief updates.
People have also been asked not to forward
unverified posts as false claims continue to
flood social media.
Gallantry Awards
Syllabus :GS3/Defence
In News
President Droupadi Murmu conferred Kirti
Chakras and Shaurya Chakras to the
personnel of the Armed Forces, Central
Armed Police Forces and State/Union
Territory Police during Phase-I of the
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
109
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Defence Investiture Ceremony at
Rashtrapati Bhawan.
Gallantry awards
The Ministry of Defence invites
recommendations twice in a year from the
Armed Forces and Union Ministry of Home
Affairs for gallantry awards.
They were given to the personnel for
displaying raw courage, unparalleled
bravery and total disregard to personal
safety in the line of duty.
The awardees showed exceptional courage
during various operations, including
counter-terrorism and counter-insurgency
operations in J&K and the North-East, anti-
piracy operations, and fire-fighting
operations.
Param Vir Chakra
It was instituted on January 26, 1950
and is India’s highest military
decoration awarded for the highest degree
of valour or self-sacrifice in the presence of
the enemy, whether on land, at sea, or in the
air.
o Eligible recipients include all ranks
of the Army, Navy, Air Force,
Reserve Forces, Nursing Services,
and civilians serving under the
armed forces.
o The award can be given
posthumously.
Recipients receive a monetary allowance of
Rs. 3,000, with the same amount for each
additional bar awarded for further acts of
bravery.
Mahavir Chakra
It was instituted on January 26, 1950 and is
the second highest military decoration in
India and is awarded for acts of conspicuous
gallantry in the presence of the
enemy, whether on land, at sea or in the air.
o Literally Maha Veer means
extraordinarily brave
Eligible recipients include all ranks of the
armed forces, nursing staff, and civilians
serving under military orders.
The award can be given posthumously.
Recipients receive a monthly monetary
allowance of Rs. 2,400, with the same
amount for each additional bar awarded for
further acts of bravery.
Vir Chakra
It was established on January 26, 1950
(effective from August 15, 1947), is the
third-highest wartime gallantry award
comes after the Param Vir Chakra and Maha
Vir Chakra.
It is given for acts of bravery in the presence
of the enemy on land, sea, or air. It can be
awarded posthumously.
Eligible recipients include all ranks of the
armed forces and reserve units.
o The award carries a monthly
allowance of Rs. 1,700, with the
same amount for each additional
bar.
Ashoka Chakra
It was instituted in 1952 and renamed in
1967 and It is awarded for valor,
courageous action or self-sacrifice away
from the battlefield.
o It is the peace time equivalent of
the Param Vir Chakra, and is
awarded for the “most conspicuous
bravery or some daring or pre-
eminent valour or self-sacrifice”
other than in the face of the enemy.
Eligible recipients include armed forces
personnel, nursing staff, civilians, police,
and paramilitary forces.
The award can be given posthumously.
o Recipients receive a monthly
allowance of Rs. 2,800, with the
same amount for each additional
bar awarded for further acts of
bravery.
109
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Defence Investiture Ceremony at
Rashtrapati Bhawan.
Gallantry awards
The Ministry of Defence invites
recommendations twice in a year from the
Armed Forces and Union Ministry of Home
Affairs for gallantry awards.
They were given to the personnel for
displaying raw courage, unparalleled
bravery and total disregard to personal
safety in the line of duty.
The awardees showed exceptional courage
during various operations, including
counter-terrorism and counter-insurgency
operations in J&K and the North-East, anti-
piracy operations, and fire-fighting
operations.
Param Vir Chakra
It was instituted on January 26, 1950
and is India’s highest military
decoration awarded for the highest degree
of valour or self-sacrifice in the presence of
the enemy, whether on land, at sea, or in the
air.
o Eligible recipients include all ranks
of the Army, Navy, Air Force,
Reserve Forces, Nursing Services,
and civilians serving under the
armed forces.
o The award can be given
posthumously.
Recipients receive a monetary allowance of
Rs. 3,000, with the same amount for each
additional bar awarded for further acts of
bravery.
Mahavir Chakra
It was instituted on January 26, 1950 and is
the second highest military decoration in
India and is awarded for acts of conspicuous
gallantry in the presence of the
enemy, whether on land, at sea or in the air.
o Literally Maha Veer means
extraordinarily brave
Eligible recipients include all ranks of the
armed forces, nursing staff, and civilians
serving under military orders.
The award can be given posthumously.
Recipients receive a monthly monetary
allowance of Rs. 2,400, with the same
amount for each additional bar awarded for
further acts of bravery.
Vir Chakra
It was established on January 26, 1950
(effective from August 15, 1947), is the
third-highest wartime gallantry award
comes after the Param Vir Chakra and Maha
Vir Chakra.
It is given for acts of bravery in the presence
of the enemy on land, sea, or air. It can be
awarded posthumously.
Eligible recipients include all ranks of the
armed forces and reserve units.
o The award carries a monthly
allowance of Rs. 1,700, with the
same amount for each additional
bar.
Ashoka Chakra
It was instituted in 1952 and renamed in
1967 and It is awarded for valor,
courageous action or self-sacrifice away
from the battlefield.
o It is the peace time equivalent of
the Param Vir Chakra, and is
awarded for the “most conspicuous
bravery or some daring or pre-
eminent valour or self-sacrifice”
other than in the face of the enemy.
Eligible recipients include armed forces
personnel, nursing staff, civilians, police,
and paramilitary forces.
The award can be given posthumously.
o Recipients receive a monthly
allowance of Rs. 2,800, with the
same amount for each additional
bar awarded for further acts of
bravery.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
110
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Kirti Chakra
It was instituted in 1952 as Ashoka Chakra
Class-II and renamed in 1967.
It is awarded for valour, courageous action
or selfsacrifice away from the field of battle.
o It may be awarded to civilians as
well as military personnel, including
posthumous awards.
o It is the peacetime equivalent of the
Maha Vir Chakra. It is second in
order of precedence of peacetime
gallantry awards.
o Recipients receive a monthly
allowance of Rs. 2,100, with the
same amount for each additional
bar awarded.
Shaurya Chakra
It is a gallantry award presented for acts of
valor not involving direct combat with the
enemy, making it the peacetime equivalent
of the Vir Chakra.
It was initially established as the Ashoka
Chakra, Class III on 4 January 1952,
effective from 15 August 1947, and
renamed on 27 January 1967.
The award can be given posthumously and
is open to personnel from all branches of
the Armed Forces, including the Reserves,
Territorial Army, and other legally
constituted forces.
o Recipients receive a monthly
stipend of Rs. 1500, with an
additional Rs. 1500 per bar
awarded.
Theatre Commands: A New Era of Military Reforms
in India
Syllabus: GS3/Defence & Security
Context
Recently, the Chief of Defence Staff
(CDS) emphasized the creation of Integrated
Theatre Commands (ITC) marking a
transformational shift in India’s military
structure.
About the Integrated Theatre Commands (ITC)
These are a modern military
strategy adopted by several nations to
enhance joint operations and resource
optimization across their armed forces.
The concept involves unifying the Army,
Navy, and Air Force under a single command
structure to improve efficiency,
coordination, and rapid response to
security threats.
India’s ITC aims to strengthen India’s
defense preparedness, particularly in border
regions with China and Pakistan, and
enhance maritime security in the Indo-
Pacific.
In 2016, Shekatkar Committee suggested 3
Theatre Commands (North, West, South). In
2024, Mumbai hosts India’s first tri-service
logistics base.
Current Structure of Indian Armed Forces
India currently operates through 17 single-
service commands:
o Army: 7 (Northern, Eastern,
Southern, Western, Central, South-
Western, ARTRAC)
o Air Force: 7 (Western, Eastern,
Southern, South-Western, Central,
Maintenance, Training)
o Navy: 3 (Western, Eastern,
Southern)
Each command is headed by a 4-star officer
of the respective service, leading to
duplication of resources, coordination
delays, and operational fragmentation.
The ITC framework is designed to replace
India’s 17 single-service commands with a
smaller number of integrated commands,
ensuring unified control over military
operations.
Existing Existing Tri-Service Commands
Strategic Forces Command
(SFC): Overseeing India’s nuclear deterrent.
110
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Kirti Chakra
It was instituted in 1952 as Ashoka Chakra
Class-II and renamed in 1967.
It is awarded for valour, courageous action
or selfsacrifice away from the field of battle.
o It may be awarded to civilians as
well as military personnel, including
posthumous awards.
o It is the peacetime equivalent of the
Maha Vir Chakra. It is second in
order of precedence of peacetime
gallantry awards.
o Recipients receive a monthly
allowance of Rs. 2,100, with the
same amount for each additional
bar awarded.
Shaurya Chakra
It is a gallantry award presented for acts of
valor not involving direct combat with the
enemy, making it the peacetime equivalent
of the Vir Chakra.
It was initially established as the Ashoka
Chakra, Class III on 4 January 1952,
effective from 15 August 1947, and
renamed on 27 January 1967.
The award can be given posthumously and
is open to personnel from all branches of
the Armed Forces, including the Reserves,
Territorial Army, and other legally
constituted forces.
o Recipients receive a monthly
stipend of Rs. 1500, with an
additional Rs. 1500 per bar
awarded.
Theatre Commands: A New Era of Military Reforms
in India
Syllabus: GS3/Defence & Security
Context
Recently, the Chief of Defence Staff
(CDS) emphasized the creation of Integrated
Theatre Commands (ITC) marking a
transformational shift in India’s military
structure.
About the Integrated Theatre Commands (ITC)
These are a modern military
strategy adopted by several nations to
enhance joint operations and resource
optimization across their armed forces.
The concept involves unifying the Army,
Navy, and Air Force under a single command
structure to improve efficiency,
coordination, and rapid response to
security threats.
India’s ITC aims to strengthen India’s
defense preparedness, particularly in border
regions with China and Pakistan, and
enhance maritime security in the Indo-
Pacific.
In 2016, Shekatkar Committee suggested 3
Theatre Commands (North, West, South). In
2024, Mumbai hosts India’s first tri-service
logistics base.
Current Structure of Indian Armed Forces
India currently operates through 17 single-
service commands:
o Army: 7 (Northern, Eastern,
Southern, Western, Central, South-
Western, ARTRAC)
o Air Force: 7 (Western, Eastern,
Southern, South-Western, Central,
Maintenance, Training)
o Navy: 3 (Western, Eastern,
Southern)
Each command is headed by a 4-star officer
of the respective service, leading to
duplication of resources, coordination
delays, and operational fragmentation.
The ITC framework is designed to replace
India’s 17 single-service commands with a
smaller number of integrated commands,
ensuring unified control over military
operations.
Existing Existing Tri-Service Commands
Strategic Forces Command
(SFC): Overseeing India’s nuclear deterrent.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
111
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Andaman and Nicobar Command
(ANC): Oversees Bay of Bengal & Southeast
Asia
Proposed Theatre Commands
Northern Theatre (Lucknow): China border:
Ladakh, Sikkim, Arunachal
Western Theatre (Jaipur): Pakistan front:
J&K, Punjab, Rajasthan
Maritime Theatre
(Thiruvananthapuram): Indian Ocean
Region, Andaman Sea
Why Does India Need Theatre Commands?
Combat Efficiency: Single commander =
faster, coordinated battlefield decisions
Resource Optimisation: No duplication of
logistics, infrastructure, or personnel
Interoperability: Seamless communication
and operation across services
Readiness for Modern Warfare: Integrates
space, cyber, electronic, and special forces
Post-Kargil Realisation: Kargil Review
Committee flagged lack of coordination as a
key weakness
Key Issues & Concerns
Inter-Service Coordination Challenges: The
Army and Navy need to align their
operational doctrines with Indian Air Force
(IAF) to ensure seamless integration.
Structural & Command Hierarchy
Issues: The proposed four-star theatre
commanders may create hierarchical
conflicts with existing service chiefs.
o The transition from single-service
commands to joint commands
requires extensive restructuring.
Resource Allocation & Logistics: Limited air
assets could be stretched thin across
multiple theatre commands, reducing
operational effectiveness.
o Infrastructure development for new
command headquarters is still in
progress.
Geopolitical & Strategic
Concerns: The China-centric Northern
Theatre Command must effectively
counter PLA’s Western Theatre
Command, operational since 2016.
o The Western Theatre
Command must address Pakistan-
related security challenges,
including cross-border terrorism.
Policy & Implementation Delays: The
government approval process has slowed
down implementation, with final decisions
still pending.
o The Standing Committee on
Defence has emphasized the need
for further deliberations before
rollout.
Countries with Established Theatre Commands
United States: It operates under Unified
Combatant Commands, dividing global
operations into geographical and functional
commands.
o Examples: INDOPACOM (Indo-
Pacific Command), CENTCOM
(Central Command), and EUCOM
(European Command).
o Each command integrates
Army, Navy, Air Force,
Marine Corps, and Space
Force assets for strategic
operations.
China: It reorganized its military into five
theatre commands in 2016,
including Western (focused on India border
security), Eastern (Taiwan and Pacific
operations), Southern (South China
Sea), Northern (Russia and Korea),
and Central (domestic security).
Russia: It integrates land, air, and naval
forces under these commands for strategic
defense. It operates four military districts,
functioning as theatre commands, as
Western, Southern, Central and Eastern
Military District.
111
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Andaman and Nicobar Command
(ANC): Oversees Bay of Bengal & Southeast
Asia
Proposed Theatre Commands
Northern Theatre (Lucknow): China border:
Ladakh, Sikkim, Arunachal
Western Theatre (Jaipur): Pakistan front:
J&K, Punjab, Rajasthan
Maritime Theatre
(Thiruvananthapuram): Indian Ocean
Region, Andaman Sea
Why Does India Need Theatre Commands?
Combat Efficiency: Single commander =
faster, coordinated battlefield decisions
Resource Optimisation: No duplication of
logistics, infrastructure, or personnel
Interoperability: Seamless communication
and operation across services
Readiness for Modern Warfare: Integrates
space, cyber, electronic, and special forces
Post-Kargil Realisation: Kargil Review
Committee flagged lack of coordination as a
key weakness
Key Issues & Concerns
Inter-Service Coordination Challenges: The
Army and Navy need to align their
operational doctrines with Indian Air Force
(IAF) to ensure seamless integration.
Structural & Command Hierarchy
Issues: The proposed four-star theatre
commanders may create hierarchical
conflicts with existing service chiefs.
o The transition from single-service
commands to joint commands
requires extensive restructuring.
Resource Allocation & Logistics: Limited air
assets could be stretched thin across
multiple theatre commands, reducing
operational effectiveness.
o Infrastructure development for new
command headquarters is still in
progress.
Geopolitical & Strategic
Concerns: The China-centric Northern
Theatre Command must effectively
counter PLA’s Western Theatre
Command, operational since 2016.
o The Western Theatre
Command must address Pakistan-
related security challenges,
including cross-border terrorism.
Policy & Implementation Delays: The
government approval process has slowed
down implementation, with final decisions
still pending.
o The Standing Committee on
Defence has emphasized the need
for further deliberations before
rollout.
Countries with Established Theatre Commands
United States: It operates under Unified
Combatant Commands, dividing global
operations into geographical and functional
commands.
o Examples: INDOPACOM (Indo-
Pacific Command), CENTCOM
(Central Command), and EUCOM
(European Command).
o Each command integrates
Army, Navy, Air Force,
Marine Corps, and Space
Force assets for strategic
operations.
China: It reorganized its military into five
theatre commands in 2016,
including Western (focused on India border
security), Eastern (Taiwan and Pacific
operations), Southern (South China
Sea), Northern (Russia and Korea),
and Central (domestic security).
Russia: It integrates land, air, and naval
forces under these commands for strategic
defense. It operates four military districts,
functioning as theatre commands, as
Western, Southern, Central and Eastern
Military District.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
112
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
United Kingdom & France: They have joint
operational commands for overseas
deployments.
o The UK’s Joint Forces
Command oversees cyber,
intelligence, and logistics.
o France’s Commandement des
Opérations Spéciales integrates
special forces across services.
Conclusion
The creation of Integrated Theatre
Commands is not just a structural change—
it is a paradigm shift in India’s military
doctrine.
By fostering jointness, efficiency, and
strategic clarity, this reform will modernize
India’s defense forces, ensuring they remain
ready, relevant, and resurgent in the face of
evolving global threats.
Government Notifies Inter-services Organisations
(Command, Control and Discipline) Rules, 2025
Syllabus: GS3/ Defence
In News
The Ministry of Defence recently notified
the Inter-Services Organisations (Command,
Control & Discipline) Rules, 2025, under
the Inter-Services Organisations (ISO) Act,
2023.
Background
The ISO Act, 2023 was enacted to enable
smoother functioning of joint defence
structures like Joint Commands and Inter-
Service Establishments.
The newly notified rules, effective from May
27, 2025, operationalise the Act by
specifying how command and disciplinary
powers will be exercised within Inter-
Service Organisations.
Objectives of the Rules
Enhance Unified Command: Ensure smooth
command and control within Joint Services
Commands.
Faster Disciplinary Action: Enable quick
disposal of cases and avoid procedural
duplication.
Strengthen Jointness: Build interoperability
between the Army, Navy, and Air Force
through legal and administrative cohesion.
ISO Act, 2023 – Structural Provisions
Constitution of ISOs: The Central
Government is empowered to create ISOs
like Joint Commands, composed of
personnel from at least two services.
Superintendence: Overall authority remains
with the Central Government, which can
issue directions in national security or
public interest.
Commanding Officer (CO): The Act provides
for a CO to lead any unit, ship, or
establishment within an ISO framework.
Key Provisions of the ISO Rules, 2025
Empowerment of Commanders: The
Commander-in-Chief (CiC) of a Joint
Services Command (JSC), the Officer-in-
Command (OiC) of Inter-Service
Establishments, and the Commanding
Officer (CO) of Inter-Services Units will
have full disciplinary and administrative
powers over all personnel posted or
attached, regardless of their parent service.
Retention of Service Acts: While authority is
delegated, the original service rules (Army
Act, Navy Act, Air Force Act) still apply to
individuals, maintaining service-specific
identities.
Residuary Powers: Any matter not explicitly
covered under these rules or the Act will be
escalated to the Central Government for
resolution.
Chain of Command: If the CiC, OiC, or CO is
absent or on leave, a replacement will be
notified officially. In emergencies, higher
formations can appoint interim officers
until formal notification.
112
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
United Kingdom & France: They have joint
operational commands for overseas
deployments.
o The UK’s Joint Forces
Command oversees cyber,
intelligence, and logistics.
o France’s Commandement des
Opérations Spéciales integrates
special forces across services.
Conclusion
The creation of Integrated Theatre
Commands is not just a structural change—
it is a paradigm shift in India’s military
doctrine.
By fostering jointness, efficiency, and
strategic clarity, this reform will modernize
India’s defense forces, ensuring they remain
ready, relevant, and resurgent in the face of
evolving global threats.
Government Notifies Inter-services Organisations
(Command, Control and Discipline) Rules, 2025
Syllabus: GS3/ Defence
In News
The Ministry of Defence recently notified
the Inter-Services Organisations (Command,
Control & Discipline) Rules, 2025, under
the Inter-Services Organisations (ISO) Act,
2023.
Background
The ISO Act, 2023 was enacted to enable
smoother functioning of joint defence
structures like Joint Commands and Inter-
Service Establishments.
The newly notified rules, effective from May
27, 2025, operationalise the Act by
specifying how command and disciplinary
powers will be exercised within Inter-
Service Organisations.
Objectives of the Rules
Enhance Unified Command: Ensure smooth
command and control within Joint Services
Commands.
Faster Disciplinary Action: Enable quick
disposal of cases and avoid procedural
duplication.
Strengthen Jointness: Build interoperability
between the Army, Navy, and Air Force
through legal and administrative cohesion.
ISO Act, 2023 – Structural Provisions
Constitution of ISOs: The Central
Government is empowered to create ISOs
like Joint Commands, composed of
personnel from at least two services.
Superintendence: Overall authority remains
with the Central Government, which can
issue directions in national security or
public interest.
Commanding Officer (CO): The Act provides
for a CO to lead any unit, ship, or
establishment within an ISO framework.
Key Provisions of the ISO Rules, 2025
Empowerment of Commanders: The
Commander-in-Chief (CiC) of a Joint
Services Command (JSC), the Officer-in-
Command (OiC) of Inter-Service
Establishments, and the Commanding
Officer (CO) of Inter-Services Units will
have full disciplinary and administrative
powers over all personnel posted or
attached, regardless of their parent service.
Retention of Service Acts: While authority is
delegated, the original service rules (Army
Act, Navy Act, Air Force Act) still apply to
individuals, maintaining service-specific
identities.
Residuary Powers: Any matter not explicitly
covered under these rules or the Act will be
escalated to the Central Government for
resolution.
Chain of Command: If the CiC, OiC, or CO is
absent or on leave, a replacement will be
notified officially. In emergencies, higher
formations can appoint interim officers
until formal notification.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
113
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Challenges in Implementation
Service Culture Clashes: Integrating
command cultures of the three forces may
face resistance from within.
Ambiguity in Dual Jurisdiction: Possibility of
friction between ISO authority and parent
service chain of command.
Legal Interpretation Conflicts: Different Acts
governing service personnel may
complicate disciplinary matters unless
harmonised.
ENVIRONMENT
India Opposes Inclusion of Chlorpyrifos at
Stockholm Convention
Syllabus :GS 3/Environment
In News
At meetings of the conferences of the Parties to
the Basel, Rotterdam and Stockholm (BRS)
conventions in Switzerland, India has opposed the
inclusion of the insecticide Chlorpyrifos under the
Stockholm Convention on Persistent Organic
Pollutants (POPs), citing concerns over food
security due to the lack of alternatives.
Over 40 countries have banned Chlorpyrifos.
Chlorpyrifos
– It is an insecticide which is a chemical linked to
adverse effects on neurodevelopment, reduced
birth size, lung and prostate cancer upon chronic
exposure.
– The World Health Organization (WHO) has
classified chlorpyrifos as a moderately hazardous
pesticide. The chemical inhibits an enzyme called
acetyl cholinesterase, which results in adverse
nervous system effects.
Stockholm Convention on Persistent Organic
Pollutants (POPs)
It was adopted in May 2001 in Stockholm,
Sweden, and entered into force on 17 May
2004, following the submission of the
fiftieth ratification or accession.
It aims to protect human health and the
environment from harmful chemicals
known as persistent organic pollutants.
o It also mandates the Conference of
the Parties to establish arbitration
and conciliation procedures for
resolving disputes between member
countries.
The Stockholm Convention lists chemicals
in three annexes.
o While Annex A lists chemicals to be
eliminated, Annex B and C lists
chemicals to be restricted, and
minimising unintentional
production and release of listed
chemicals.
Steps to Phase out of Chlorpyrifos
Chlorpyrifos was nominated for global
phase-out in 2021 by the European Union.
In 2024, the Persistent Organic Pollutants
Review Committee (POPRC)
recommended Chlorpyrifos’ inclusion in
Annex A of the Convention (elimination),
with exemptions for specific uses such as
plant protection, cattle tick control, and
wood preservation.
At the Basel, Rotterdam and Stockholm
(BRS) conventions, countries debated
exemptions for Chlorpyrifos in agricultural
uses and pest control, with India and other
nations calling for certain exceptions.
India’s Stance
113
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Challenges in Implementation
Service Culture Clashes: Integrating
command cultures of the three forces may
face resistance from within.
Ambiguity in Dual Jurisdiction: Possibility of
friction between ISO authority and parent
service chain of command.
Legal Interpretation Conflicts: Different Acts
governing service personnel may
complicate disciplinary matters unless
harmonised.
ENVIRONMENT
India Opposes Inclusion of Chlorpyrifos at
Stockholm Convention
Syllabus :GS 3/Environment
In News
At meetings of the conferences of the Parties to
the Basel, Rotterdam and Stockholm (BRS)
conventions in Switzerland, India has opposed the
inclusion of the insecticide Chlorpyrifos under the
Stockholm Convention on Persistent Organic
Pollutants (POPs), citing concerns over food
security due to the lack of alternatives.
Over 40 countries have banned Chlorpyrifos.
Chlorpyrifos
– It is an insecticide which is a chemical linked to
adverse effects on neurodevelopment, reduced
birth size, lung and prostate cancer upon chronic
exposure.
– The World Health Organization (WHO) has
classified chlorpyrifos as a moderately hazardous
pesticide. The chemical inhibits an enzyme called
acetyl cholinesterase, which results in adverse
nervous system effects.
Stockholm Convention on Persistent Organic
Pollutants (POPs)
It was adopted in May 2001 in Stockholm,
Sweden, and entered into force on 17 May
2004, following the submission of the
fiftieth ratification or accession.
It aims to protect human health and the
environment from harmful chemicals
known as persistent organic pollutants.
o It also mandates the Conference of
the Parties to establish arbitration
and conciliation procedures for
resolving disputes between member
countries.
The Stockholm Convention lists chemicals
in three annexes.
o While Annex A lists chemicals to be
eliminated, Annex B and C lists
chemicals to be restricted, and
minimising unintentional
production and release of listed
chemicals.
Steps to Phase out of Chlorpyrifos
Chlorpyrifos was nominated for global
phase-out in 2021 by the European Union.
In 2024, the Persistent Organic Pollutants
Review Committee (POPRC)
recommended Chlorpyrifos’ inclusion in
Annex A of the Convention (elimination),
with exemptions for specific uses such as
plant protection, cattle tick control, and
wood preservation.
At the Basel, Rotterdam and Stockholm
(BRS) conventions, countries debated
exemptions for Chlorpyrifos in agricultural
uses and pest control, with India and other
nations calling for certain exceptions.
India’s Stance
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
114
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Chlorpyrifos has been registered in India
since 1977 and was the most used
insecticide in the country in 2016-17.
India argued that Chlorpyrifos is crucial for
agriculture and pest control, particularly for
urban pests and vector-borne diseases, and
remains a commonly used pesticide in
India.
o It is considered important in India
for controlling urban pests like
cockroaches and termites and for
vector-borne disease control.
Chlorpyrifos residues have been found in
food products in India, with a 2024 study
detecting the chemical in 33% of the
samples tested.
The Anupam Verma Committee, constituted
in 2013 to review 66 pesticides that had
been banned, restricted, or withdrawn in
other countries, but still in use in India,
submitted its report in 2015. It recognised
that chlorpyrifos is toxic to fish and bees.
Future Plans
The Indian government has been promoting
a national mission on natural farming (a
Centrally Sponsored Scheme under the
Ministry of Agriculture & Farmers’ Welfare
Other chemicals like Medium-chain
chlorinated paraffins and long-chain
perfluorocarboxylic acids (LC-PFCAs) are
also being discussed at the BRS Convention.
New Rules for Access and Benefit Sharing of
Biodiversity
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment and Ecology
Context
The National Biodiversity Authority (NBA)
has notified the Biological Diversity (Access
to Biological Resources and Knowledge
Associated thereto and Fair and Equitable
Sharing of Benefits) Regulation, 2025.
The rules are notified to streamline and
regulate benefit sharing from the use of
biological resources and associated
knowledge.
What is Access and Benefit Sharing (ABS)?
ABS refers to the framework through which
benefits arising from the use of biological
resources and associated traditional
knowledge are shared fairly and equitably
with the communities that have conserved
these resources.
It is a principle under the Convention on
Biological Diversity (CBD).
India operationalizes ABS through
the Biological Diversity Act, 2002, and its
recent amendment the Biological Diversity
(Amendment) Act, 2023.
Key Features of the 2025 Regulation
Turnover-Based Benefit Sharing:
o Below ₹5 crore: Exempt from benefit
sharing.
o ₹5 crore–₹50 crore: 0.2% of annual
gross ex-factory sale price
(excluding taxes).
o ₹50 crore–₹250 crore: 0.4% of
annual turnover.
o Above ₹250 crore: 0.6% of annual
turnover.
o Entities with turnover above ₹1
crore must file annual statements on
resource usage.
Inclusion of Digital Sequence Information
(DSI): DSI now considered part of genetic
resources, closing earlier loopholes where
only physical materials were covered.
o It aligns with the outcomes
from COP16 of the Convention on
Biological Diversity in Cali, Colombia.
Cultivated medicinal plants are exempted,
provided they are notified by the Ministry of
Environment in consultation with the
AYUSH Ministry.
High-Value Resources: For resources of high
conservation/economic value (red sanders,
sandalwood, agarwood and threatened
species), minimum 5% of proceeds from
auction/sale must be shared.
114
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Chlorpyrifos has been registered in India
since 1977 and was the most used
insecticide in the country in 2016-17.
India argued that Chlorpyrifos is crucial for
agriculture and pest control, particularly for
urban pests and vector-borne diseases, and
remains a commonly used pesticide in
India.
o It is considered important in India
for controlling urban pests like
cockroaches and termites and for
vector-borne disease control.
Chlorpyrifos residues have been found in
food products in India, with a 2024 study
detecting the chemical in 33% of the
samples tested.
The Anupam Verma Committee, constituted
in 2013 to review 66 pesticides that had
been banned, restricted, or withdrawn in
other countries, but still in use in India,
submitted its report in 2015. It recognised
that chlorpyrifos is toxic to fish and bees.
Future Plans
The Indian government has been promoting
a national mission on natural farming (a
Centrally Sponsored Scheme under the
Ministry of Agriculture & Farmers’ Welfare
Other chemicals like Medium-chain
chlorinated paraffins and long-chain
perfluorocarboxylic acids (LC-PFCAs) are
also being discussed at the BRS Convention.
New Rules for Access and Benefit Sharing of
Biodiversity
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment and Ecology
Context
The National Biodiversity Authority (NBA)
has notified the Biological Diversity (Access
to Biological Resources and Knowledge
Associated thereto and Fair and Equitable
Sharing of Benefits) Regulation, 2025.
The rules are notified to streamline and
regulate benefit sharing from the use of
biological resources and associated
knowledge.
What is Access and Benefit Sharing (ABS)?
ABS refers to the framework through which
benefits arising from the use of biological
resources and associated traditional
knowledge are shared fairly and equitably
with the communities that have conserved
these resources.
It is a principle under the Convention on
Biological Diversity (CBD).
India operationalizes ABS through
the Biological Diversity Act, 2002, and its
recent amendment the Biological Diversity
(Amendment) Act, 2023.
Key Features of the 2025 Regulation
Turnover-Based Benefit Sharing:
o Below ₹5 crore: Exempt from benefit
sharing.
o ₹5 crore–₹50 crore: 0.2% of annual
gross ex-factory sale price
(excluding taxes).
o ₹50 crore–₹250 crore: 0.4% of
annual turnover.
o Above ₹250 crore: 0.6% of annual
turnover.
o Entities with turnover above ₹1
crore must file annual statements on
resource usage.
Inclusion of Digital Sequence Information
(DSI): DSI now considered part of genetic
resources, closing earlier loopholes where
only physical materials were covered.
o It aligns with the outcomes
from COP16 of the Convention on
Biological Diversity in Cali, Colombia.
Cultivated medicinal plants are exempted,
provided they are notified by the Ministry of
Environment in consultation with the
AYUSH Ministry.
High-Value Resources: For resources of high
conservation/economic value (red sanders,
sandalwood, agarwood and threatened
species), minimum 5% of proceeds from
auction/sale must be shared.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
115
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o This can go up to 20% in case of
commercial exploitation.
Intellectual Property Rights
(IPR): Applicants for IPR involving
biodiversity must disclose the use of
biological resources and share benefits
accordingly.
Distribution of Benefits: 10–15% retained
by the National Biodiversity Authority.
o Remaining benefits directed to local
communities and claimants through
Biodiversity Management
Committees (BMCs).
Significance of the New Regulation
Addresses regulatory gaps: It includes DSI
which was previously excluded under the
2014 guidelines.
Transparency: Clear slabs promote
predictability for industries like
pharmaceuticals, cosmetics, and
biotechnology.
Supports cultivation: Encourages cultivation
of medicinal plants over extraction from
wild sources.
Nagoya Protocol
– The Nagoya Protocol on Access to Genetic
Resources and the Fair and Equitable Sharing of
Benefits Arising from their Utilization (ABS) is a
supplementary agreement to the Convention on
Biological Diversity (CBD).
– It provides a transparent legal framework for the
effective implementation of one of the three
objectives of the CBD: the fair and equitable sharing
of benefits arising out of the utilization of genetic
resources.
– It was adopted in 2010 in Nagoya, Japan and
entered into force in 2014.
Northeast’s First Geothermal Production in
Arunachal Pradesh
Syllabus :GS 3/Environment
In News
The Centre for Earth Sciences and
Himalayan Studies (CESHS) has successfully
drilled Northeast India’s first geothermal
production well at Dirang in Arunachal
Pradesh’s West Kameng district.
About the project
The Dirang area is a medium-to-high
enthalpy geothermal zone (~115°C), with
geological features supporting efficient and
low-impact drilling.
The project involves CESHS, Norwegian
Geotechnical Institute (NGI), Icelandic firm
Geotropy ehf, and Guwahati Boring Service
(GBS).
It is supported by the Arunachal Pradesh
government and India’s Ministry of Earth
Sciences.
This marks a major step toward clean, eco-
friendly energy solutions in the high-
altitude region.
What is Geothermal energy?
Geothermal energy is heat energy from the
earth—geo (earth) + thermal (heat).
o Geothermal resources are
reservoirs of hot water that exist or
are human-made at varying
temperatures and depths below the
earth’s surface.
It taps into the Earth’s subsurface heat for
direct heating or electricity generation,
requiring medium- to high-temperature
resources typically found near tectonic
activity.
Its key advantages are low cost, reliable
year-round operation, and the ability to
provide steady, dispatchable power—
making it increasingly valuable alongside
intermittent sources like solar and wind.
Do you know?
– Geothermal energy is a reliable, 24/7 renewable
source derived from heat in the Earth’s crust,
visible as hot springs and geysers.
– It offers high capacity utilization throughout the
year.
– Globally, the USA, Indonesia, Philippines, Turkey,
and New Zealand lead in its use.
115
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o This can go up to 20% in case of
commercial exploitation.
Intellectual Property Rights
(IPR): Applicants for IPR involving
biodiversity must disclose the use of
biological resources and share benefits
accordingly.
Distribution of Benefits: 10–15% retained
by the National Biodiversity Authority.
o Remaining benefits directed to local
communities and claimants through
Biodiversity Management
Committees (BMCs).
Significance of the New Regulation
Addresses regulatory gaps: It includes DSI
which was previously excluded under the
2014 guidelines.
Transparency: Clear slabs promote
predictability for industries like
pharmaceuticals, cosmetics, and
biotechnology.
Supports cultivation: Encourages cultivation
of medicinal plants over extraction from
wild sources.
Nagoya Protocol
– The Nagoya Protocol on Access to Genetic
Resources and the Fair and Equitable Sharing of
Benefits Arising from their Utilization (ABS) is a
supplementary agreement to the Convention on
Biological Diversity (CBD).
– It provides a transparent legal framework for the
effective implementation of one of the three
objectives of the CBD: the fair and equitable sharing
of benefits arising out of the utilization of genetic
resources.
– It was adopted in 2010 in Nagoya, Japan and
entered into force in 2014.
Northeast’s First Geothermal Production in
Arunachal Pradesh
Syllabus :GS 3/Environment
In News
The Centre for Earth Sciences and
Himalayan Studies (CESHS) has successfully
drilled Northeast India’s first geothermal
production well at Dirang in Arunachal
Pradesh’s West Kameng district.
About the project
The Dirang area is a medium-to-high
enthalpy geothermal zone (~115°C), with
geological features supporting efficient and
low-impact drilling.
The project involves CESHS, Norwegian
Geotechnical Institute (NGI), Icelandic firm
Geotropy ehf, and Guwahati Boring Service
(GBS).
It is supported by the Arunachal Pradesh
government and India’s Ministry of Earth
Sciences.
This marks a major step toward clean, eco-
friendly energy solutions in the high-
altitude region.
What is Geothermal energy?
Geothermal energy is heat energy from the
earth—geo (earth) + thermal (heat).
o Geothermal resources are
reservoirs of hot water that exist or
are human-made at varying
temperatures and depths below the
earth’s surface.
It taps into the Earth’s subsurface heat for
direct heating or electricity generation,
requiring medium- to high-temperature
resources typically found near tectonic
activity.
Its key advantages are low cost, reliable
year-round operation, and the ability to
provide steady, dispatchable power—
making it increasingly valuable alongside
intermittent sources like solar and wind.
Do you know?
– Geothermal energy is a reliable, 24/7 renewable
source derived from heat in the Earth’s crust,
visible as hot springs and geysers.
– It offers high capacity utilization throughout the
year.
– Globally, the USA, Indonesia, Philippines, Turkey,
and New Zealand lead in its use.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
116
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
1. In India, the Geological Survey of India estimates
a potential of 10 GW.
Applications of Geothermal Energy
Geothermal energy serves multiple
purposes, including heating and cooling
buildings with heat pumps, generating
electricity with power plants, and
directly heating structures through direct-
use applications.
Geothermal energy can be used for fruit,
nut, and meat drying, space heating, and
controlled-atmosphere storage—key to
improving agriculture and living conditions
in high-altitude areas.
Concerns
Geothermal energy can cause minor
earthquakes in seismically active areas due
to high-pressure water injection
Drilling and resource exploration require
significant investment, making the cost a
barrier.
Viable geothermal sites are
often concentrated in specific regions with
active tectonic activity.
It can pose risks such as land subsidence,
water use conflicts, and the release of trace
gases if not properly managed.
Suggestions and Way Ahead
The successful drilling in Northeast marks a
major milestone in India’s quest for
sustainable energy.
Geothermal energy can play a vital role in a
low-carbon, resilient energy future.
But it needs continued research,
technological innovation, and supportive
policies to unlock its full potential
o Public and private sector
collaboration will be essential in
lowering costs, improving drilling
techniques, and integrating
geothermal more broadly into
energy systems.
CAQM unveils 19-point plan to stamp out stubble
burning in Delhi-NCR
Syllabus: GS3/Environment
Context
The Commission for Air Quality Management
(CAQM) in the National Capital Region and
adjoining areas announced a 19-step
directive for state governments to eliminate
stubble burning.
About
The comprehensive plan outlined here
represents one of the most robust multi-
tiered efforts to curb stubble burning and its
associated air pollution across Punjab,
Haryana, and NCR Uttar Pradesh.
The approach integrates administrative
accountability, technological innovation,
farmer engagement, and legal enforcement.
Key Measures in the CAQM Plan
Farm-Level Mapping & Nodal Officers: Every
farm will be mapped to track stubble
management strategies.
o One nodal officer will oversee every
50 farmers to ensure localized
monitoring.
Stubble Management Options:
o In-situ: Mulching, use of bio-
decomposers.
o Ex-situ: Baling, storage, and
transportation to power plants,
packaging industries, brick kilns.
o Crop diversification: Reducing
reliance on paddy to lower residue
generation.
Infrastructure & Logistics: Conduct gap
analysis of Crop Residue Management
(CRM) machinery.
o Plan storage for baled straw to
prevent fire loss.
o Create district-level supply chains
for straw transport and utilization.
116
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
1. In India, the Geological Survey of India estimates
a potential of 10 GW.
Applications of Geothermal Energy
Geothermal energy serves multiple
purposes, including heating and cooling
buildings with heat pumps, generating
electricity with power plants, and
directly heating structures through direct-
use applications.
Geothermal energy can be used for fruit,
nut, and meat drying, space heating, and
controlled-atmosphere storage—key to
improving agriculture and living conditions
in high-altitude areas.
Concerns
Geothermal energy can cause minor
earthquakes in seismically active areas due
to high-pressure water injection
Drilling and resource exploration require
significant investment, making the cost a
barrier.
Viable geothermal sites are
often concentrated in specific regions with
active tectonic activity.
It can pose risks such as land subsidence,
water use conflicts, and the release of trace
gases if not properly managed.
Suggestions and Way Ahead
The successful drilling in Northeast marks a
major milestone in India’s quest for
sustainable energy.
Geothermal energy can play a vital role in a
low-carbon, resilient energy future.
But it needs continued research,
technological innovation, and supportive
policies to unlock its full potential
o Public and private sector
collaboration will be essential in
lowering costs, improving drilling
techniques, and integrating
geothermal more broadly into
energy systems.
CAQM unveils 19-point plan to stamp out stubble
burning in Delhi-NCR
Syllabus: GS3/Environment
Context
The Commission for Air Quality Management
(CAQM) in the National Capital Region and
adjoining areas announced a 19-step
directive for state governments to eliminate
stubble burning.
About
The comprehensive plan outlined here
represents one of the most robust multi-
tiered efforts to curb stubble burning and its
associated air pollution across Punjab,
Haryana, and NCR Uttar Pradesh.
The approach integrates administrative
accountability, technological innovation,
farmer engagement, and legal enforcement.
Key Measures in the CAQM Plan
Farm-Level Mapping & Nodal Officers: Every
farm will be mapped to track stubble
management strategies.
o One nodal officer will oversee every
50 farmers to ensure localized
monitoring.
Stubble Management Options:
o In-situ: Mulching, use of bio-
decomposers.
o Ex-situ: Baling, storage, and
transportation to power plants,
packaging industries, brick kilns.
o Crop diversification: Reducing
reliance on paddy to lower residue
generation.
Infrastructure & Logistics: Conduct gap
analysis of Crop Residue Management
(CRM) machinery.
o Plan storage for baled straw to
prevent fire loss.
o Create district-level supply chains
for straw transport and utilization.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
117
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Enforcement & Monitoring: Supreme Court-
directed formation of state-level
committees headed by Chief Secretaries.
o Monthly compliance reports starting
June 1, 2025.
o Launch of an online real-time
reporting platform for crop residue
data.
Pilot Project: A common boiler run on paddy
straw will be tested in an industrial estate
to supply steam—an ex-situ utilization
model.
Enforcement Force: A Parali Protection
Force at district and block levels.
o Involvement of police, agriculture,
and administrative officers.
o Enhanced evening patrols and
citizen-reporting mechanisms.
Penalties for Non-Compliance: Ensure red
entries and impose fines on violating
farmers.
The Commission for Air Quality Management
(CAQM)
– Formalized through the Commission for Air
Quality Management in National Capital Region and
Adjoining Areas Act, 2021.
– Jurisdiction: Covers Delhi, Punjab, Haryana,
Rajasthan, and Uttar Pradesh — especially areas
contributing to air pollution in the NCR.
– CAQM is meant to provide an integrated and
permanent mechanism for:
1. Coordinated response to air pollution.
2. Ensuring synergy across different ministries and
states.
3. Replacing the fragmented approach that
involved multiple agencies with overlapping
responsibilities.
Conclusion
The CAQM’s plan is a comprehensive,
enforcement-backed strategy to curb
stubble burning by mapping farms,
promoting in-situ and ex-situ solutions,
strengthening supply chains, and
introducing strict monitoring through nodal
officers and a dedicated enforcement force.
With real-time tracking, monthly reporting,
and legal oversight, it aims to provide a
lasting solution to the recurring air pollution
crisis in Delhi-NCR.
IEA’s Global Methane Tracker
Syllabus :GS 3/Environment
In News
The International Energy Agency (IEA)
released Global Methane Tracker 2025.
The IEA’s Global Methane Tracker
It is a vital tool for reducing methane
emissions in the energy sector.
It offers updated estimates of emissions
using the latest satellite and ground-based
data, alongside information on the costs and
opportunities for reduction.
The 2025 update will include new features
such as country-level data on historical
emissions, projections for 2030 and 2035,
an interactive tool for exploring global
methane initiatives, and estimates for
emissions from abandoned fossil fuel
facilities.
Additionally, it provides an open-access
model for exploring methane reduction
options in oil and gas operations.
Key Points
Methane is a greenhouse gas responsible for
around 30 per cent of the rise in global
temperatures since the Industrial
Revolution.
o Its levels in the atmosphere are
growing faster than other
greenhouse gases, with its
concentration being two-and-a-half
times higher than the preindustrial
era.
The three main sources of methane include
agriculture, energy and waste sectors.
o The energy sector — including oil,
natural gas, coal and bioenergy —
accounts for more than 35 per cent
117
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Enforcement & Monitoring: Supreme Court-
directed formation of state-level
committees headed by Chief Secretaries.
o Monthly compliance reports starting
June 1, 2025.
o Launch of an online real-time
reporting platform for crop residue
data.
Pilot Project: A common boiler run on paddy
straw will be tested in an industrial estate
to supply steam—an ex-situ utilization
model.
Enforcement Force: A Parali Protection
Force at district and block levels.
o Involvement of police, agriculture,
and administrative officers.
o Enhanced evening patrols and
citizen-reporting mechanisms.
Penalties for Non-Compliance: Ensure red
entries and impose fines on violating
farmers.
The Commission for Air Quality Management
(CAQM)
– Formalized through the Commission for Air
Quality Management in National Capital Region and
Adjoining Areas Act, 2021.
– Jurisdiction: Covers Delhi, Punjab, Haryana,
Rajasthan, and Uttar Pradesh — especially areas
contributing to air pollution in the NCR.
– CAQM is meant to provide an integrated and
permanent mechanism for:
1. Coordinated response to air pollution.
2. Ensuring synergy across different ministries and
states.
3. Replacing the fragmented approach that
involved multiple agencies with overlapping
responsibilities.
Conclusion
The CAQM’s plan is a comprehensive,
enforcement-backed strategy to curb
stubble burning by mapping farms,
promoting in-situ and ex-situ solutions,
strengthening supply chains, and
introducing strict monitoring through nodal
officers and a dedicated enforcement force.
With real-time tracking, monthly reporting,
and legal oversight, it aims to provide a
lasting solution to the recurring air pollution
crisis in Delhi-NCR.
IEA’s Global Methane Tracker
Syllabus :GS 3/Environment
In News
The International Energy Agency (IEA)
released Global Methane Tracker 2025.
The IEA’s Global Methane Tracker
It is a vital tool for reducing methane
emissions in the energy sector.
It offers updated estimates of emissions
using the latest satellite and ground-based
data, alongside information on the costs and
opportunities for reduction.
The 2025 update will include new features
such as country-level data on historical
emissions, projections for 2030 and 2035,
an interactive tool for exploring global
methane initiatives, and estimates for
emissions from abandoned fossil fuel
facilities.
Additionally, it provides an open-access
model for exploring methane reduction
options in oil and gas operations.
Key Points
Methane is a greenhouse gas responsible for
around 30 per cent of the rise in global
temperatures since the Industrial
Revolution.
o Its levels in the atmosphere are
growing faster than other
greenhouse gases, with its
concentration being two-and-a-half
times higher than the preindustrial
era.
The three main sources of methane include
agriculture, energy and waste sectors.
o The energy sector — including oil,
natural gas, coal and bioenergy —
accounts for more than 35 per cent
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
118
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
of methane emissions from human
activity.
o The energy sector emitted
about 145 million tonnes
(Mt) of methane in 2024,
with oil and gas facilities
contributing over 80 Mt.
Top methane-emitting countries from fossil
fuels include: China, the United States,
Russia, Iran, Turkmenistan, India,
Venezuela, and Indonesia.
Challenges
The IEA also points out a major
underreporting issue—actual methane
emissions are 80% higher than reported to
the UN.
Only about 30 countries included methane
reduction in their climate action plans
(NDCs) for 2024, and just nine had
measurable targets.
o A new round of NDCs is due in 2025,
with a few nations like Brazil,
Canada, UAE, and the UK already
incorporating methane measures.
Few countries and companies have shown
verified reductions since initiatives like
the Global Methane Pledge (GMP) and the
Oil and Gas Decarbonization Charter began.
o Key emitters like China, India, and
Russia, responsible for 45% of
methane emissions, have not joined
GMP.
Suggestions
The International Energy Agency (IEA)
highlights key actions to reduce methane
emissions, including sealing abandoned coal
mines, plugging and monitoring closed
wells, and capturing methane for energy or
flaring when recovery isn’t viable.
Bioenergy emissions can be reduced by
promoting clean cooking, modern heating,
and careful handling of biogas and
biomethane to prevent leaks.
The report reiterated that with current
technologies, around 70 per cent of
methane emissions from the fossil sector
can be reduced.
o For oil and gas sectors specifically,
around 75 per cent of emissions can
be reduced through well-known
measures like upgrading leaky and
high-emitting equipment or
plugging leaky wells.
Geotubing: A Breakthrough in Coastal Erosion
Control
Syllabus: GS3/Environment; Climate Change
Context
A recent study has found that geotubing
technology deployed at Poonthura,
Kerala, has been highly effective in
controlling coastal erosion.
Geo-Tubing Technology for Coastal Erosion
Geotubes are large fabric containers filled
with sand or slurry, placed strategically
along the coast.
They act as wave barriers, diminishing the
force of incoming waves and preventing
shoreline erosion.
The multi-layered geotube system ensures
long-term stability, even under intense sea
motion.
Coastal Erosion in India
India’s coastline is facing severe erosion,
with 33.6% of its shoreline classified as
vulnerable.
118
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
of methane emissions from human
activity.
o The energy sector emitted
about 145 million tonnes
(Mt) of methane in 2024,
with oil and gas facilities
contributing over 80 Mt.
Top methane-emitting countries from fossil
fuels include: China, the United States,
Russia, Iran, Turkmenistan, India,
Venezuela, and Indonesia.
Challenges
The IEA also points out a major
underreporting issue—actual methane
emissions are 80% higher than reported to
the UN.
Only about 30 countries included methane
reduction in their climate action plans
(NDCs) for 2024, and just nine had
measurable targets.
o A new round of NDCs is due in 2025,
with a few nations like Brazil,
Canada, UAE, and the UK already
incorporating methane measures.
Few countries and companies have shown
verified reductions since initiatives like
the Global Methane Pledge (GMP) and the
Oil and Gas Decarbonization Charter began.
o Key emitters like China, India, and
Russia, responsible for 45% of
methane emissions, have not joined
GMP.
Suggestions
The International Energy Agency (IEA)
highlights key actions to reduce methane
emissions, including sealing abandoned coal
mines, plugging and monitoring closed
wells, and capturing methane for energy or
flaring when recovery isn’t viable.
Bioenergy emissions can be reduced by
promoting clean cooking, modern heating,
and careful handling of biogas and
biomethane to prevent leaks.
The report reiterated that with current
technologies, around 70 per cent of
methane emissions from the fossil sector
can be reduced.
o For oil and gas sectors specifically,
around 75 per cent of emissions can
be reduced through well-known
measures like upgrading leaky and
high-emitting equipment or
plugging leaky wells.
Geotubing: A Breakthrough in Coastal Erosion
Control
Syllabus: GS3/Environment; Climate Change
Context
A recent study has found that geotubing
technology deployed at Poonthura,
Kerala, has been highly effective in
controlling coastal erosion.
Geo-Tubing Technology for Coastal Erosion
Geotubes are large fabric containers filled
with sand or slurry, placed strategically
along the coast.
They act as wave barriers, diminishing the
force of incoming waves and preventing
shoreline erosion.
The multi-layered geotube system ensures
long-term stability, even under intense sea
motion.
Coastal Erosion in India
India’s coastline is facing severe erosion,
with 33.6% of its shoreline classified as
vulnerable.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
119
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Do You Know?
– India’s coastline length has been revised to
11,098.81 km following a new methodology for
measurement.
1. Previously, the official coastline length was
7,516.60 kms.
The Indian mainland coast includes 9
coastal states and 2 Union Territories
(UTs) having 66 coastal districts.
Morphology of the Coast:
o It consists of 43% sandy beach, 11%
rocky coast, 36% of muddy flats,
10% of marshy coast, 97 major
estuaries and 34 lagoons.
The National Centre for Coastal Research
(NCCR)(an attached office of the Ministry of
Earth Sciences) has been monitoring
shoreline changes since 1990, using remote
sensing and GIS mapping techniques.
According to the NCCR:
o 33.6% of India’s coastline is eroding,
impacting coastal communities and
infrastructure.
o 26.9% of the coastline is
experiencing accretion,
meaning land is expanding due to
sediment deposition.
o 39.6% of the coastline remains
stable, showing minimal changes in
shoreline position.
o West Bengal (60.5%),
Kerala (46.4%), and Tamil
Nadu (42.7%) are among the most
affected Indian states.
Causes of Coastal Erosion
Climate Change and Rising Sea
Levels: Melting glaciers and thermal
expansion contribute to higher sea levels,
intensifying coastal erosion.
Extreme Weather Events: Cyclones, storm
surges, and monsoonal variations accelerate
shoreline retreat.
Human Activities: Unregulated coastal
development, sand mining, and port
construction disrupt natural sediment flow.
Loss of Natural Barriers: Mangrove
deforestation and coral reef degradation
reduce coastal resilience against erosion.
Government Initiatives and Mitigation Measures
Integrated Coastal Zone Management Project
(ICZMP): It is a World Bank-assisted
project aimed to protect and conserve
coastal and marine environments through
sustainable practices, implemented
in Gujarat, Odisha, and West Bengal.
Coastal Regulation Zone (CRZ) Notification
(2019): It aims to conserve and protect
coastal stretches, ensuring livelihood
security for fisher and local communities
while permitting erosion control measures.
o It provides for No Development
Zones (NDZ) along various
119
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Do You Know?
– India’s coastline length has been revised to
11,098.81 km following a new methodology for
measurement.
1. Previously, the official coastline length was
7,516.60 kms.
The Indian mainland coast includes 9
coastal states and 2 Union Territories
(UTs) having 66 coastal districts.
Morphology of the Coast:
o It consists of 43% sandy beach, 11%
rocky coast, 36% of muddy flats,
10% of marshy coast, 97 major
estuaries and 34 lagoons.
The National Centre for Coastal Research
(NCCR)(an attached office of the Ministry of
Earth Sciences) has been monitoring
shoreline changes since 1990, using remote
sensing and GIS mapping techniques.
According to the NCCR:
o 33.6% of India’s coastline is eroding,
impacting coastal communities and
infrastructure.
o 26.9% of the coastline is
experiencing accretion,
meaning land is expanding due to
sediment deposition.
o 39.6% of the coastline remains
stable, showing minimal changes in
shoreline position.
o West Bengal (60.5%),
Kerala (46.4%), and Tamil
Nadu (42.7%) are among the most
affected Indian states.
Causes of Coastal Erosion
Climate Change and Rising Sea
Levels: Melting glaciers and thermal
expansion contribute to higher sea levels,
intensifying coastal erosion.
Extreme Weather Events: Cyclones, storm
surges, and monsoonal variations accelerate
shoreline retreat.
Human Activities: Unregulated coastal
development, sand mining, and port
construction disrupt natural sediment flow.
Loss of Natural Barriers: Mangrove
deforestation and coral reef degradation
reduce coastal resilience against erosion.
Government Initiatives and Mitigation Measures
Integrated Coastal Zone Management Project
(ICZMP): It is a World Bank-assisted
project aimed to protect and conserve
coastal and marine environments through
sustainable practices, implemented
in Gujarat, Odisha, and West Bengal.
Coastal Regulation Zone (CRZ) Notification
(2019): It aims to conserve and protect
coastal stretches, ensuring livelihood
security for fisher and local communities
while permitting erosion control measures.
o It provides for No Development
Zones (NDZ) along various
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
120
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
categories of coastal areas to protect
India’s coastline from encroachment
and erosion.
o It includes the Shoreline
Management Plan and Coastal Zone
Management Plan.
Coastal Vulnerability Index (CVI): The Indian
National Centre for Ocean Information
Services (INCOIS) has developed the CVI to
assess and map the vulnerability of
different coastal regions based on various
parameters.
Shoreline Protection Measures: The National
Assessment of Shoreline Changes provides
erosion control guidelines.
15th Finance Commission Allocation: ₹2,500
crore earmarked for resettlement of
displaced communities and erosion
mitigation measures.
Innovative Engineering Solutions
Geo-Tube Installation: In areas like Pentha
Village in Odisha, and recently in Poonthura,
Kerala, geo-tubes have been installed to
create artificial barriers that protect the
coast from erosion.
Artificial Reefs: Constructing artificial reefs
can dissipate wave energy and protect the
shoreline.
Eco-friendly Breakwaters: Using materials
that blend with the natural environment
can provide effective protection without
harming marine ecosystems.
Mangrove and Shelterbelt
Plantations: Planting mangroves and other
vegetation along the coast helps stabilize
the shoreline and reduce the impact of
waves and storm surges.
Centre Approves Additional FCI Rice for Ethanol
Production
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
In Context
The Union Government approved an
additional 2.8 million tonnes of rice from
the Food Corporation of India (FCI) stock for
ethanol production, raising the total
allocation for the Ethanol Supply Year (ESY)
2024–25 to 5.2 million tonnes.
About
The decision, under the Ethanol Blended
Petrol (EBP) Programme, aims to accelerate
biofuel use, but has reignited concerns over
the diversion of food grains from food
security to fuel needs.
What is Ethanol and the EBP Programme?
Ethanol is an alcohol-based biofuel made
through the fermentation of sugar, starch, or
cellulose derived from crops like sugarcane,
maize, and rice. When blended with petrol,
it helps reduce vehicular emissions and
dependence on fossil fuels.
The Ethanol Blended Petrol (EBP)
Programme was launched in 2003 and
accelerated since 2014. It mandates the
blending of ethanol with petrol.
India has achieved its E20 target — 20%
ethanol blending in petrol by 2025 — and
now aims to reach 30% blending by 2030.
Significance of the Move
Energy Security: Helps reduce India’s
import dependence on crude oil and
promotes energy self-reliance.
Climate Benefits: Ethanol is a cleaner fuel
that emits fewer greenhouse gases
compared to pure petrol.
Rural Economy Boost: Creates demand for
surplus agricultural produce, potentially
benefiting farmers through better prices.
Policy Push for Green Energy: Aligns with
India’s commitment under the Paris
Agreement and targets for renewable
energy use.
Concerns Regarding the Move
Food Security Risk: Diverting 5.2 million
tonnes of rice from central buffer stocks
could strain the Public Distribution System
(PDS), especially during drought years or
inflationary periods.
120
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
categories of coastal areas to protect
India’s coastline from encroachment
and erosion.
o It includes the Shoreline
Management Plan and Coastal Zone
Management Plan.
Coastal Vulnerability Index (CVI): The Indian
National Centre for Ocean Information
Services (INCOIS) has developed the CVI to
assess and map the vulnerability of
different coastal regions based on various
parameters.
Shoreline Protection Measures: The National
Assessment of Shoreline Changes provides
erosion control guidelines.
15th Finance Commission Allocation: ₹2,500
crore earmarked for resettlement of
displaced communities and erosion
mitigation measures.
Innovative Engineering Solutions
Geo-Tube Installation: In areas like Pentha
Village in Odisha, and recently in Poonthura,
Kerala, geo-tubes have been installed to
create artificial barriers that protect the
coast from erosion.
Artificial Reefs: Constructing artificial reefs
can dissipate wave energy and protect the
shoreline.
Eco-friendly Breakwaters: Using materials
that blend with the natural environment
can provide effective protection without
harming marine ecosystems.
Mangrove and Shelterbelt
Plantations: Planting mangroves and other
vegetation along the coast helps stabilize
the shoreline and reduce the impact of
waves and storm surges.
Centre Approves Additional FCI Rice for Ethanol
Production
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
In Context
The Union Government approved an
additional 2.8 million tonnes of rice from
the Food Corporation of India (FCI) stock for
ethanol production, raising the total
allocation for the Ethanol Supply Year (ESY)
2024–25 to 5.2 million tonnes.
About
The decision, under the Ethanol Blended
Petrol (EBP) Programme, aims to accelerate
biofuel use, but has reignited concerns over
the diversion of food grains from food
security to fuel needs.
What is Ethanol and the EBP Programme?
Ethanol is an alcohol-based biofuel made
through the fermentation of sugar, starch, or
cellulose derived from crops like sugarcane,
maize, and rice. When blended with petrol,
it helps reduce vehicular emissions and
dependence on fossil fuels.
The Ethanol Blended Petrol (EBP)
Programme was launched in 2003 and
accelerated since 2014. It mandates the
blending of ethanol with petrol.
India has achieved its E20 target — 20%
ethanol blending in petrol by 2025 — and
now aims to reach 30% blending by 2030.
Significance of the Move
Energy Security: Helps reduce India’s
import dependence on crude oil and
promotes energy self-reliance.
Climate Benefits: Ethanol is a cleaner fuel
that emits fewer greenhouse gases
compared to pure petrol.
Rural Economy Boost: Creates demand for
surplus agricultural produce, potentially
benefiting farmers through better prices.
Policy Push for Green Energy: Aligns with
India’s commitment under the Paris
Agreement and targets for renewable
energy use.
Concerns Regarding the Move
Food Security Risk: Diverting 5.2 million
tonnes of rice from central buffer stocks
could strain the Public Distribution System
(PDS), especially during drought years or
inflationary periods.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
121
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Price Distortion: Cheap supply of FCI rice
(₹22.50/kg) to distilleries may affect open
market prices and hurt the poor.
Ecological Unsustainability: Rice is a water-
intensive crop, and its use for ethanol raises
concerns in water-stressed regions.
Inefficient Use of Resources: Critics argue
that ethanol from food grains is not the
most efficient or ethical route, especially
when alternatives like second-generation
(2G) ethanol from waste biomass exist.
Distortion of Agricultural Priorities: Over-
reliance on a few ethanol feedstocks (rice,
sugarcane, maize) may affect crop
diversification and soil health.
Way Forward
Focus should shift towards 2G ethanol
(from agricultural waste and non-food
biomass).
Establish clear guidelines balancing food
security with biofuel goals.
Improve ethanol production efficiency from
non-edible sources.
Ensure transparent audits on the use of
diverted grains and their impact on PDS
stocks.
Natural Farming Certification System
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
Context
In a bid to boost consumer trust and farmer
incomes, the central government is likely to
introduce a nationwide Natural Farming
Certification System (NFCS).
What is Natural Farming?
Natural Farming is a chemical-free farming
system rooted in Indian tradition enriched
with modern understanding of ecology,
resource recycling and on-farm resource
optimization.
Key Features of Natural Farming
Zero Budget Natural Farming (ZBNF): A
popular model promoted by Subhash
Palekar, aimed at drastically reducing input
costs.
Core practices:
o Beejamrit: Natural seed treatment.
o Jeevamrit: Soil inoculation using
fermented cow dung and urine.
o Mulching and Waaphasa: Moisture
retention and aeration of soil.
Low input, high sustainability: Reduces
dependence on market-bought inputs.
Benefits of Natural Farming
Lower Input Costs: Natural farming requires
fewer external inputs like chemical
fertilizers and pesticides, which can reduce
overall production costs for farmers.
Ensures Better Health: As Natural Farming
does not use any synthetic chemicals, health
risks and hazards are eliminated.
o The food has higher nutrition
density and therefore offers better
health benefits.
Environment Conservation: Natural Farming
ensures better soil biology, improved agro-
biodiversity and a more judicious usage of
water with much smaller carbon and
nitrogen footprints.
Sustainable Farming Practices: By avoiding
the overuse of chemical fertilizers and
pesticides, natural farming promotes a
121
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Price Distortion: Cheap supply of FCI rice
(₹22.50/kg) to distilleries may affect open
market prices and hurt the poor.
Ecological Unsustainability: Rice is a water-
intensive crop, and its use for ethanol raises
concerns in water-stressed regions.
Inefficient Use of Resources: Critics argue
that ethanol from food grains is not the
most efficient or ethical route, especially
when alternatives like second-generation
(2G) ethanol from waste biomass exist.
Distortion of Agricultural Priorities: Over-
reliance on a few ethanol feedstocks (rice,
sugarcane, maize) may affect crop
diversification and soil health.
Way Forward
Focus should shift towards 2G ethanol
(from agricultural waste and non-food
biomass).
Establish clear guidelines balancing food
security with biofuel goals.
Improve ethanol production efficiency from
non-edible sources.
Ensure transparent audits on the use of
diverted grains and their impact on PDS
stocks.
Natural Farming Certification System
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
Context
In a bid to boost consumer trust and farmer
incomes, the central government is likely to
introduce a nationwide Natural Farming
Certification System (NFCS).
What is Natural Farming?
Natural Farming is a chemical-free farming
system rooted in Indian tradition enriched
with modern understanding of ecology,
resource recycling and on-farm resource
optimization.
Key Features of Natural Farming
Zero Budget Natural Farming (ZBNF): A
popular model promoted by Subhash
Palekar, aimed at drastically reducing input
costs.
Core practices:
o Beejamrit: Natural seed treatment.
o Jeevamrit: Soil inoculation using
fermented cow dung and urine.
o Mulching and Waaphasa: Moisture
retention and aeration of soil.
Low input, high sustainability: Reduces
dependence on market-bought inputs.
Benefits of Natural Farming
Lower Input Costs: Natural farming requires
fewer external inputs like chemical
fertilizers and pesticides, which can reduce
overall production costs for farmers.
Ensures Better Health: As Natural Farming
does not use any synthetic chemicals, health
risks and hazards are eliminated.
o The food has higher nutrition
density and therefore offers better
health benefits.
Environment Conservation: Natural Farming
ensures better soil biology, improved agro-
biodiversity and a more judicious usage of
water with much smaller carbon and
nitrogen footprints.
Sustainable Farming Practices: By avoiding
the overuse of chemical fertilizers and
pesticides, natural farming promotes a
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
122
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
more sustainable and regenerative
approach to agriculture.
Why is Certification Needed?
Trust Building: It helps consumers
distinguish genuine natural farm produce.
Market Access: It enables farmers to fetch
premium prices and enter niche markets
(domestic and international).
Standardisation: It brings uniformity to
natural farming practices.
Monitoring and Accountability: It ensures
traceability and quality control.
Challenges in Scaling Natural Farming
Initial Yield Reduction: During the transition
from conventional to natural farming, many
farmers reported a temporary decline in
crop yields.
Limited Scientific Backing: Although natural
farming is promoted as environmentally
sustainable, there is limited large-scale,
long-term scientific research validating its
productivity, resilience, and scalability
across diverse agro-climatic zones.
Inadequate Institutional
Support: Coordination between agriculture
departments, research bodies, and rural
institutions is limited.
National Mission on Natural Farming
– Aim: To promote natural farming among one-
crore farmers across the country.
– Cluster-Based Approach: Targeting 15,000
clusters in Gram Panchayats allows for focused
implementation and better resource allocation.
– Bio-Input Resource Centers (BRCs): Establishing
10,000 BRCs will ensure easy access to essential
bio-inputs, making it convenient for farmers to
adopt natural farming practices.
– Model Demonstration Farms: 2000 NF Model
Demonstration Farms shall be established at Krishi
Vigyan Kendras (KVKs), Agricultural Universities
(AUs) and farmers’ fields.
1. They shall be supported by experienced and
trained Farmer Master Trainers.
– Certification and Market Access: A simplified
certification system and dedicated branding will
facilitate market access for natural farming
products.
World’s First Commercial-scale e-methanol Plant
Opens in Denmark
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
In News
Denmark has launched the world’s first
commercial-scale e-methanol plant in
Kasso.
o Developed by European Energy
(Denmark) and Mitsui (Japan), the
plant will produce 42,000 metric
tonnes of e-methanol annually.
What is Methanol?
About: Methanol (CH₃OH) is a light, volatile,
and flammable liquid alcohol.
Conventionally produced from natural gas
and coal, it is used in chemicals, fuels, and
plastics.
122
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
more sustainable and regenerative
approach to agriculture.
Why is Certification Needed?
Trust Building: It helps consumers
distinguish genuine natural farm produce.
Market Access: It enables farmers to fetch
premium prices and enter niche markets
(domestic and international).
Standardisation: It brings uniformity to
natural farming practices.
Monitoring and Accountability: It ensures
traceability and quality control.
Challenges in Scaling Natural Farming
Initial Yield Reduction: During the transition
from conventional to natural farming, many
farmers reported a temporary decline in
crop yields.
Limited Scientific Backing: Although natural
farming is promoted as environmentally
sustainable, there is limited large-scale,
long-term scientific research validating its
productivity, resilience, and scalability
across diverse agro-climatic zones.
Inadequate Institutional
Support: Coordination between agriculture
departments, research bodies, and rural
institutions is limited.
National Mission on Natural Farming
– Aim: To promote natural farming among one-
crore farmers across the country.
– Cluster-Based Approach: Targeting 15,000
clusters in Gram Panchayats allows for focused
implementation and better resource allocation.
– Bio-Input Resource Centers (BRCs): Establishing
10,000 BRCs will ensure easy access to essential
bio-inputs, making it convenient for farmers to
adopt natural farming practices.
– Model Demonstration Farms: 2000 NF Model
Demonstration Farms shall be established at Krishi
Vigyan Kendras (KVKs), Agricultural Universities
(AUs) and farmers’ fields.
1. They shall be supported by experienced and
trained Farmer Master Trainers.
– Certification and Market Access: A simplified
certification system and dedicated branding will
facilitate market access for natural farming
products.
World’s First Commercial-scale e-methanol Plant
Opens in Denmark
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
In News
Denmark has launched the world’s first
commercial-scale e-methanol plant in
Kasso.
o Developed by European Energy
(Denmark) and Mitsui (Japan), the
plant will produce 42,000 metric
tonnes of e-methanol annually.
What is Methanol?
About: Methanol (CH₃OH) is a light, volatile,
and flammable liquid alcohol.
Conventionally produced from natural gas
and coal, it is used in chemicals, fuels, and
plastics.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
123
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Applications: Used in shipping fuel, plastic
production, manufacturing fuel cells etc.
Challenges in e-Methanol Adoption
High Cost: Not yet price-competitive with
fossil fuels; price parity expected around
2035.
Scale of Production: Infrastructure for large-
scale green methanol is nascent.
CO₂ Sourcing: Sustainable and reliable CO₂
capture remains a technological challenge.
Storage and Distribution: Needs new or
adapted logistics infrastructure.
India’s Methanol Economy Programme
About: Launched by NITI Aayog, the
Methanol Economy Programme aims to
reduce oil import bills, curb pollution and
promote cleaner alternatives of fuel.
Key Pillars: Production of methanol from
coal, biomass, and municipal waste can be
used in LPG blend, power generation, and
transportation which eventually helps in
reducing India’s oil import bill &
greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions.
o The program targets a 10%
reduction in crude oil imports by
2030 by substituting it with
methanol.
Government Initiatives and Progress: The
Department of Science and Technology
(DST) has initiated the Methanol Economy
Research Programme (MERP) to support
research and development in methanol
production and utilization.
o Blending of 15% methanol in
gasoline (M15) has been notified,
and test standards are being
developed.
o National Policy on Biofuels
2018 recognizes methanol and DME
(dimethyl ether) as alternative fuels.
How is the Shipping Industry Tackling Emissions?
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy, GS3/ Environment
Context
At the 83rd session of the Marine
Environment Protection Committee (MEPC-
83) of the International Maritime
Organization (IMO), a landmark vote was
held to adopt a Market-Based Measure
(MBM) for decarbonising international
shipping.
What is Green Shipping?
Green shipping refers to environmentally
sustainable practices and technologies used
in the maritime industry to reduce the
environmental impact of shipping activities.
It includes cutting greenhouse gas (GHG)
emissions, improving energy efficiency, and
minimizing marine pollution.
Need for Green Shipping
Global Emissions: The shipping industry
emits around 1 billion tonnes of GHG
annually, accounting for about 2.8% of
global emissions
Future Projections: Emissions may increase
by 50–250% by 2050 if unchecked.
Measures Already Enforced:
o Energy Efficiency Design Index
(EEDI): Sets efficiency standards for
new ships.
o Energy Efficiency Management Plan
(SEEMP): Operational plans to cut
emissions.
o Mandatory fuel oil consumption
reporting: Improves accountability
and transparency.
MEPC-83 Proposals for emissions levy mechanisms
The International Chamber of
Shipping advocated for a fixed levy per
every tonne of CO₂ emitted.
China proposed a market-driven approach
where ships could trade compliance units
and invest in alternative fuels.
The European Union suggested a fixed
Greenhouse Gas (GHG) levy, managed by an
IMO-administered fund.
123
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Applications: Used in shipping fuel, plastic
production, manufacturing fuel cells etc.
Challenges in e-Methanol Adoption
High Cost: Not yet price-competitive with
fossil fuels; price parity expected around
2035.
Scale of Production: Infrastructure for large-
scale green methanol is nascent.
CO₂ Sourcing: Sustainable and reliable CO₂
capture remains a technological challenge.
Storage and Distribution: Needs new or
adapted logistics infrastructure.
India’s Methanol Economy Programme
About: Launched by NITI Aayog, the
Methanol Economy Programme aims to
reduce oil import bills, curb pollution and
promote cleaner alternatives of fuel.
Key Pillars: Production of methanol from
coal, biomass, and municipal waste can be
used in LPG blend, power generation, and
transportation which eventually helps in
reducing India’s oil import bill &
greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions.
o The program targets a 10%
reduction in crude oil imports by
2030 by substituting it with
methanol.
Government Initiatives and Progress: The
Department of Science and Technology
(DST) has initiated the Methanol Economy
Research Programme (MERP) to support
research and development in methanol
production and utilization.
o Blending of 15% methanol in
gasoline (M15) has been notified,
and test standards are being
developed.
o National Policy on Biofuels
2018 recognizes methanol and DME
(dimethyl ether) as alternative fuels.
How is the Shipping Industry Tackling Emissions?
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy, GS3/ Environment
Context
At the 83rd session of the Marine
Environment Protection Committee (MEPC-
83) of the International Maritime
Organization (IMO), a landmark vote was
held to adopt a Market-Based Measure
(MBM) for decarbonising international
shipping.
What is Green Shipping?
Green shipping refers to environmentally
sustainable practices and technologies used
in the maritime industry to reduce the
environmental impact of shipping activities.
It includes cutting greenhouse gas (GHG)
emissions, improving energy efficiency, and
minimizing marine pollution.
Need for Green Shipping
Global Emissions: The shipping industry
emits around 1 billion tonnes of GHG
annually, accounting for about 2.8% of
global emissions
Future Projections: Emissions may increase
by 50–250% by 2050 if unchecked.
Measures Already Enforced:
o Energy Efficiency Design Index
(EEDI): Sets efficiency standards for
new ships.
o Energy Efficiency Management Plan
(SEEMP): Operational plans to cut
emissions.
o Mandatory fuel oil consumption
reporting: Improves accountability
and transparency.
MEPC-83 Proposals for emissions levy mechanisms
The International Chamber of
Shipping advocated for a fixed levy per
every tonne of CO₂ emitted.
China proposed a market-driven approach
where ships could trade compliance units
and invest in alternative fuels.
The European Union suggested a fixed
Greenhouse Gas (GHG) levy, managed by an
IMO-administered fund.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
124
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
India proposed a ‘bridging
mechanism’, which would target only
under-compliant ships to bear the financial
burden, while rewarding those using Zero
or Near-Zero (ZNZ) fuels.
Singapore proposed a hybrid model based
on India’s proposal, including a GHG Fuel
Standard (GFS) and a tiered system
rewarding surplus emission units and
requiring the purchase of remedial units for
underperformance.
What was decided?
IMO adopted Singapore’s hybrid model,
influenced significantly by India’s proposal,
as its Net Zero Framework.
This marks the first time a global industry
has adopted a mandatory emissions levy.
However, the decision of the MEPC-83 is not
final yet.
Roadblocks in implementations
The MEPC-83’s decision, having approved
the Net Zero Framework, needs to
amend Annex VI of the MARPOL convention,
which governs air pollution from ships.
o The amendment will undergo a six-
month circulation period among all
contracting parties to MARPOL.
For final adoption, it requires a two-thirds
majority of votes from members present
and voting; this means that if all 101 parties
participate, at least 67 must support the
measure.
There should be no formal objection by one-
third of the parties accounting for 50% of
global shipping tonnage.
What are the Concerns?
Oil-exporting countries, led by Saudi
Arabia, opposed any significant transition to
green fuels, prioritising the protection of
their fossil fuel markets.
o China and large shipping
nations favoured low levies to
maintain trade competitiveness.
o Scandinavian countries demanded
credit for early green efforts.
The original ‘Common But Differentiated
Responsibilities and Respective Capabilities’
(CBDR-RC) principle is eroding.
o Developed countries are pushing for
uniform rules, disregarding
historical emissions and economic
capacities of developing nations.
Impact on India
Short-Term Impact: India’s international
fleet ( around 135 ships) would incur an
additional $108 million/year in fuel costs by
2030 — manageable given the scale.
Long-Term Opportunities:
o India is investing heavily via the
National Hydrogen Mission.
o Indian ports are developing green
hydrogen bunkering capabilities.
o Indian hydrogen already meets the
IMO’s fuel reward thresholds, aiding
its export potential.
Concluding remarks
The MEPC-83’s approval of a market-based
emissions framework represents a
significant milestone in global efforts to
decarbonise the shipping industry.
If successful, this could serve as a model for
other sectors in achieving a low-carbon
global economy.
India Launches First Cluster of CCU Testbeds For
Cement Industry
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
In News
India launched its first cluster of Carbon
Capture and Utilisation (CCU) testbeds for
the cement sector.
About Carbon Capture and Utilisation (CCU)
Definition: Carbon Capture and Utilisation
(CCU) refers to a set of technologies that
124
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
India proposed a ‘bridging
mechanism’, which would target only
under-compliant ships to bear the financial
burden, while rewarding those using Zero
or Near-Zero (ZNZ) fuels.
Singapore proposed a hybrid model based
on India’s proposal, including a GHG Fuel
Standard (GFS) and a tiered system
rewarding surplus emission units and
requiring the purchase of remedial units for
underperformance.
What was decided?
IMO adopted Singapore’s hybrid model,
influenced significantly by India’s proposal,
as its Net Zero Framework.
This marks the first time a global industry
has adopted a mandatory emissions levy.
However, the decision of the MEPC-83 is not
final yet.
Roadblocks in implementations
The MEPC-83’s decision, having approved
the Net Zero Framework, needs to
amend Annex VI of the MARPOL convention,
which governs air pollution from ships.
o The amendment will undergo a six-
month circulation period among all
contracting parties to MARPOL.
For final adoption, it requires a two-thirds
majority of votes from members present
and voting; this means that if all 101 parties
participate, at least 67 must support the
measure.
There should be no formal objection by one-
third of the parties accounting for 50% of
global shipping tonnage.
What are the Concerns?
Oil-exporting countries, led by Saudi
Arabia, opposed any significant transition to
green fuels, prioritising the protection of
their fossil fuel markets.
o China and large shipping
nations favoured low levies to
maintain trade competitiveness.
o Scandinavian countries demanded
credit for early green efforts.
The original ‘Common But Differentiated
Responsibilities and Respective Capabilities’
(CBDR-RC) principle is eroding.
o Developed countries are pushing for
uniform rules, disregarding
historical emissions and economic
capacities of developing nations.
Impact on India
Short-Term Impact: India’s international
fleet ( around 135 ships) would incur an
additional $108 million/year in fuel costs by
2030 — manageable given the scale.
Long-Term Opportunities:
o India is investing heavily via the
National Hydrogen Mission.
o Indian ports are developing green
hydrogen bunkering capabilities.
o Indian hydrogen already meets the
IMO’s fuel reward thresholds, aiding
its export potential.
Concluding remarks
The MEPC-83’s approval of a market-based
emissions framework represents a
significant milestone in global efforts to
decarbonise the shipping industry.
If successful, this could serve as a model for
other sectors in achieving a low-carbon
global economy.
India Launches First Cluster of CCU Testbeds For
Cement Industry
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
In News
India launched its first cluster of Carbon
Capture and Utilisation (CCU) testbeds for
the cement sector.
About Carbon Capture and Utilisation (CCU)
Definition: Carbon Capture and Utilisation
(CCU) refers to a set of technologies that
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
125
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
involve capturing carbon dioxide (CO2)
emissions from sources like power plants
and industrial facilities and then converting
them into useful products.
Process: The first step involves separating
CO2 from other gases emitted by industrial
processes or even directly from the
atmosphere (Direct Air Capture – DAC).
Various technologies like solvent
absorption, membrane separation, and
adsorption are used for this purpose.
Examples of CO2 Utilisation: Injecting CO2
into oil reservoirs to increase oil extraction,
CO2 can be combined with hydrogen to
create synthetic fuels like methanol, ethanol
or captured CO2 can be used to produce
concrete, cement alternatives, and other
construction materials.
Significance of the Initiative
Decarbonising Hard-to-Abate
Sectors: Cement, steel, power, oil & gas, and
fertilizer industries contribute significantly
to India’s industrial CO₂ emissions. CCU
offers a scalable pathway to reduce
emissions while maintaining economic
growth.
Fulfilling Climate Commitments: The
initiative supports India’s Nationally
Determined Contributions (NDCs) under
the Paris Agreement and aligns with long-
term Low Emission Development Strategies
(LEDS).
Public-Private-Academia Synergy: A unique
PPP model brings together academia,
industry, and government to deploy
translational R&D.
Green Cement Production: Focused
innovation may reduce the cost of green
cement, enabling wider market adoption
and decarbonisation of construction.
Circular Economy: CCU promotes a circular
approach by turning a waste product (CO2)
into a valuable resource, reducing reliance
on fossil-based feedstocks.
Plastic Waste in Himalayas
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
Context
According to a report more than 84% of the
plastic waste collected in Himalayan region
is posing serious environmental and
systemic challenges.
About
According to data gathered from
the Himalayan Cleanup (THC) 2024,
conducted across nine Himalayan states,
over 1.2 lakh pieces of waste were
audited—88% of which were plastic.
Within plastic waste, 84.2% was attributed
to food and beverage packaging, and 71% of
this was non-recyclable.
Sikkim and Darjeeling (West
Bengal) emerged as the top contributors in
terms of volume, followed by Ladakh,
Nagaland, and Uttarakhand.
Impact of plastic waste
Impact on Tourism: The worst plastic
accumulation was found around tourist
destinations, rivers, and protected areas,
indicating the role of unregulated tourism
and poor infrastructure.
Climate and Biodiversity Linkages: Plastic
waste in the Himalayas contributes to soil
and water contamination, affecting
biodiversity and local food systems.
Health Hazards: Accumulated plastic waste
near human settlements leads to vector-
borne diseases, water pollution, and
respiratory problems due to open burning.
Challenges in Waste Governance in the Himalayas
Lack of Localised Waste Infrastructure: Most
mountain towns and villages lack basic
waste collection, segregation, and treatment
facilities.
Plastic Ban Policies: Although several
Himalayan states have banned certain
plastic products, enforcement is weak, due
to inconsistent monitoring, and a lack of
viable alternatives for local communities
and vendors.
125
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
involve capturing carbon dioxide (CO2)
emissions from sources like power plants
and industrial facilities and then converting
them into useful products.
Process: The first step involves separating
CO2 from other gases emitted by industrial
processes or even directly from the
atmosphere (Direct Air Capture – DAC).
Various technologies like solvent
absorption, membrane separation, and
adsorption are used for this purpose.
Examples of CO2 Utilisation: Injecting CO2
into oil reservoirs to increase oil extraction,
CO2 can be combined with hydrogen to
create synthetic fuels like methanol, ethanol
or captured CO2 can be used to produce
concrete, cement alternatives, and other
construction materials.
Significance of the Initiative
Decarbonising Hard-to-Abate
Sectors: Cement, steel, power, oil & gas, and
fertilizer industries contribute significantly
to India’s industrial CO₂ emissions. CCU
offers a scalable pathway to reduce
emissions while maintaining economic
growth.
Fulfilling Climate Commitments: The
initiative supports India’s Nationally
Determined Contributions (NDCs) under
the Paris Agreement and aligns with long-
term Low Emission Development Strategies
(LEDS).
Public-Private-Academia Synergy: A unique
PPP model brings together academia,
industry, and government to deploy
translational R&D.
Green Cement Production: Focused
innovation may reduce the cost of green
cement, enabling wider market adoption
and decarbonisation of construction.
Circular Economy: CCU promotes a circular
approach by turning a waste product (CO2)
into a valuable resource, reducing reliance
on fossil-based feedstocks.
Plastic Waste in Himalayas
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
Context
According to a report more than 84% of the
plastic waste collected in Himalayan region
is posing serious environmental and
systemic challenges.
About
According to data gathered from
the Himalayan Cleanup (THC) 2024,
conducted across nine Himalayan states,
over 1.2 lakh pieces of waste were
audited—88% of which were plastic.
Within plastic waste, 84.2% was attributed
to food and beverage packaging, and 71% of
this was non-recyclable.
Sikkim and Darjeeling (West
Bengal) emerged as the top contributors in
terms of volume, followed by Ladakh,
Nagaland, and Uttarakhand.
Impact of plastic waste
Impact on Tourism: The worst plastic
accumulation was found around tourist
destinations, rivers, and protected areas,
indicating the role of unregulated tourism
and poor infrastructure.
Climate and Biodiversity Linkages: Plastic
waste in the Himalayas contributes to soil
and water contamination, affecting
biodiversity and local food systems.
Health Hazards: Accumulated plastic waste
near human settlements leads to vector-
borne diseases, water pollution, and
respiratory problems due to open burning.
Challenges in Waste Governance in the Himalayas
Lack of Localised Waste Infrastructure: Most
mountain towns and villages lack basic
waste collection, segregation, and treatment
facilities.
Plastic Ban Policies: Although several
Himalayan states have banned certain
plastic products, enforcement is weak, due
to inconsistent monitoring, and a lack of
viable alternatives for local communities
and vendors.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
126
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Low Awareness: There is insufficient
awareness among producers about their
responsibilities under Extended Producer
Responsibility (EPR).
o Also tourists often lack both
education and sensitivity towards
sustainable practices.
Dispersed Settlements: The rugged
topography, scattered population, and
seasonal weather conditions make it
logistically challenging to establish and
maintain effective waste management
systems across the Himalayan belt.
India’s Efforts in Tackling Plastic Waste
Extended Producer Responsibility
(EPR): The Indian government has
implemented EPR, making plastic
manufacturers responsible for managing
and disposing of the waste generated by
their products.
Plastic Waste Management (Amendment)
Rules, 2022: It prohibits manufacture,
import, stocking, distribution, sale and use
of plastic carry bags having thickness less
than 120 microns.
Swachh Bharat Abhiyan: It is a national
cleanliness campaign, which includes the
collection and disposal of plastic waste.
Plastic Parks: India has set up Plastic Parks,
which are specialized industrial zones for
recycling and processing plastic waste.
Way Ahead
Mountain-Sensitive Waste Policies: Waste
management policies that consider
geographic remoteness, traditional
practices, and ecological sensitivity are
essential.
Decentralised Waste Systems: Focus should
be on community-based, low-impact waste
solutions rooted in traditional knowledge
and local governance.
Sustainable Tourism Practices: Establish
mandatory waste audits and management
protocols at tourist sites, especially around
water bodies and pilgrimage circuits.
SC Bans Retrospective Environment Permits
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
Context
The Supreme Court
invalidated retrospective environmental
clearances, emphasizing that development
cannot compromise environmental
protection.
Retrospective environmental clearances
These are approvals granted to industrial or
infrastructure projects after the
commencement of operations or
construction, bypassing the legal
requirement of prior environmental
assessment.
The Environment Impact Assessment (EIA)
Notification of 2006, under the Environment
(Protection) Act, 1986, mandates prior EC
before commencing any project that may
affect the environment.
Supreme Court Ruling
The Court invalidated the 2017 notification
and 2021 Office Memorandum that
permitted such clearances, calling them
illegal and contrary to constitutional
mandates.
The ruling cited Article 21 of the
Constitution, which guarantees the right to
live in a pollution-free environment.
Highlighting Article 48A and 51A(g) of the
Constitution, the judgment reaffirmed both
state and citizen obligations to protect the
environment.
Constitutional Safeguards
– Directive Principles of State Policy (DPSP): Article
48A of the Constitution directs the State to protect
and improve the environment and to safeguard the
forests and wildlife of the country.
– Fundamental Duties: Article 51A(g) enjoins
citizens to “protect and improve the natural
environment including forests, lakes, rivers, and
wildlife, and to have compassion for living
creatures.”
Significance of Supreme court ruling
126
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Low Awareness: There is insufficient
awareness among producers about their
responsibilities under Extended Producer
Responsibility (EPR).
o Also tourists often lack both
education and sensitivity towards
sustainable practices.
Dispersed Settlements: The rugged
topography, scattered population, and
seasonal weather conditions make it
logistically challenging to establish and
maintain effective waste management
systems across the Himalayan belt.
India’s Efforts in Tackling Plastic Waste
Extended Producer Responsibility
(EPR): The Indian government has
implemented EPR, making plastic
manufacturers responsible for managing
and disposing of the waste generated by
their products.
Plastic Waste Management (Amendment)
Rules, 2022: It prohibits manufacture,
import, stocking, distribution, sale and use
of plastic carry bags having thickness less
than 120 microns.
Swachh Bharat Abhiyan: It is a national
cleanliness campaign, which includes the
collection and disposal of plastic waste.
Plastic Parks: India has set up Plastic Parks,
which are specialized industrial zones for
recycling and processing plastic waste.
Way Ahead
Mountain-Sensitive Waste Policies: Waste
management policies that consider
geographic remoteness, traditional
practices, and ecological sensitivity are
essential.
Decentralised Waste Systems: Focus should
be on community-based, low-impact waste
solutions rooted in traditional knowledge
and local governance.
Sustainable Tourism Practices: Establish
mandatory waste audits and management
protocols at tourist sites, especially around
water bodies and pilgrimage circuits.
SC Bans Retrospective Environment Permits
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
Context
The Supreme Court
invalidated retrospective environmental
clearances, emphasizing that development
cannot compromise environmental
protection.
Retrospective environmental clearances
These are approvals granted to industrial or
infrastructure projects after the
commencement of operations or
construction, bypassing the legal
requirement of prior environmental
assessment.
The Environment Impact Assessment (EIA)
Notification of 2006, under the Environment
(Protection) Act, 1986, mandates prior EC
before commencing any project that may
affect the environment.
Supreme Court Ruling
The Court invalidated the 2017 notification
and 2021 Office Memorandum that
permitted such clearances, calling them
illegal and contrary to constitutional
mandates.
The ruling cited Article 21 of the
Constitution, which guarantees the right to
live in a pollution-free environment.
Highlighting Article 48A and 51A(g) of the
Constitution, the judgment reaffirmed both
state and citizen obligations to protect the
environment.
Constitutional Safeguards
– Directive Principles of State Policy (DPSP): Article
48A of the Constitution directs the State to protect
and improve the environment and to safeguard the
forests and wildlife of the country.
– Fundamental Duties: Article 51A(g) enjoins
citizens to “protect and improve the natural
environment including forests, lakes, rivers, and
wildlife, and to have compassion for living
creatures.”
Significance of Supreme court ruling
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
127
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Custodians of environmental rights: The SC’s
decision is a classic example of judicial
activism to uphold environmental justice.
Role of Polluter Pays Principle: The ruling
implicitly upholds the Polluter Pays
Principle, as those who pollute without
clearance cannot be legally protected.
o It calls for environmental
compensation mechanisms and
project-specific reparations.
International Commitments: India is a
signatory to the Paris Agreement and the
2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development
(SDGs).
o Allowing ex post facto clearances
goes against SDG 13 (Climate
Action) and SDG 15 (Life on Land).
Govt. to Allow Private Operators in Nuclear Energy
Sector
Syllabus: GS3/Energy
Context
The government is likely to move two
crucial amendments in the laws governing
the country’s atomic energy sector in the
upcoming monsoon session of Parliament.
Legal Reforms Underway
Easing Nuclear Liability Law (Civil Liability
for Nuclear Damage Act, 2010): Its objective
is to limit the liability of equipment vendors
in case of a nuclear accident. Key Proposed
Changes:
o Monetary Cap: Liability may be
capped to the original contract
value.
o Time Limit: Introduce a statute of
limitations for how long liability
applies.
Amendment to the Atomic Energy Act,
1962: Its objective is to allow private and
foreign players to enter nuclear power
generation.
o Current Restriction: Only state-
owned entities like NPCIL and NTPC
Ltd can operate nuclear plants.
o Proposed Change: Permit minority
equity participation by
foreign/private entities in upcoming
projects.
Need for the Changes
NPCIL: India’s nuclear sector is governed by
the Atomic Energy Act, 1962, under
which only government-owned entities such
as NPCIL can generate and supply nuclear
energy.
o There has been no private sector
involvement in India’s nuclear
power sector so far.
Foreign companies like GE-Hitachi,
Westinghouse, and Framatome have
avoided India due to open-ended liability
concerns.
o Amending this is crucial to attract
foreign investment and technology.
These moves aim to unlock the potential of
the Indo-US Civil Nuclear Agreement, signed
nearly two decades ago.
o India intends to package these
reforms as part of a wider trade and
investment framework with the U.S.,
potentially leading to a trade pact.
Recent U.S. Regulatory Breakthrough
Recently, the U.S. Department of Energy
granted Holtec International a specific
authorisation (SA IN2023-001) under
10CFR810.
Implication: Holtec can now
transfer unclassified SMR technology to
Indian partners like Tata Consulting
Engineers and L&T.
o This clears the path for design and
manufacturing of small modular
reactors (SMRs) in India.
Significance: Positions India to co-develop
and manufacture nuclear components
domestically.
127
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Custodians of environmental rights: The SC’s
decision is a classic example of judicial
activism to uphold environmental justice.
Role of Polluter Pays Principle: The ruling
implicitly upholds the Polluter Pays
Principle, as those who pollute without
clearance cannot be legally protected.
o It calls for environmental
compensation mechanisms and
project-specific reparations.
International Commitments: India is a
signatory to the Paris Agreement and the
2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development
(SDGs).
o Allowing ex post facto clearances
goes against SDG 13 (Climate
Action) and SDG 15 (Life on Land).
Govt. to Allow Private Operators in Nuclear Energy
Sector
Syllabus: GS3/Energy
Context
The government is likely to move two
crucial amendments in the laws governing
the country’s atomic energy sector in the
upcoming monsoon session of Parliament.
Legal Reforms Underway
Easing Nuclear Liability Law (Civil Liability
for Nuclear Damage Act, 2010): Its objective
is to limit the liability of equipment vendors
in case of a nuclear accident. Key Proposed
Changes:
o Monetary Cap: Liability may be
capped to the original contract
value.
o Time Limit: Introduce a statute of
limitations for how long liability
applies.
Amendment to the Atomic Energy Act,
1962: Its objective is to allow private and
foreign players to enter nuclear power
generation.
o Current Restriction: Only state-
owned entities like NPCIL and NTPC
Ltd can operate nuclear plants.
o Proposed Change: Permit minority
equity participation by
foreign/private entities in upcoming
projects.
Need for the Changes
NPCIL: India’s nuclear sector is governed by
the Atomic Energy Act, 1962, under
which only government-owned entities such
as NPCIL can generate and supply nuclear
energy.
o There has been no private sector
involvement in India’s nuclear
power sector so far.
Foreign companies like GE-Hitachi,
Westinghouse, and Framatome have
avoided India due to open-ended liability
concerns.
o Amending this is crucial to attract
foreign investment and technology.
These moves aim to unlock the potential of
the Indo-US Civil Nuclear Agreement, signed
nearly two decades ago.
o India intends to package these
reforms as part of a wider trade and
investment framework with the U.S.,
potentially leading to a trade pact.
Recent U.S. Regulatory Breakthrough
Recently, the U.S. Department of Energy
granted Holtec International a specific
authorisation (SA IN2023-001) under
10CFR810.
Implication: Holtec can now
transfer unclassified SMR technology to
Indian partners like Tata Consulting
Engineers and L&T.
o This clears the path for design and
manufacturing of small modular
reactors (SMRs) in India.
Significance: Positions India to co-develop
and manufacture nuclear components
domestically.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
128
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
India’s Need to Increase its Nuclear Capacity:
Nuclear Capacity: India’s plans to increase
its nuclear power capacity from the current
8,180 MW to 22,480 MW by 2031-32 and
eventually 100 GW by 2047.
Energy Demand Growth: India’s electricity
demand is expected to increase 4-5 times by
2047, and nuclear power will help meet
base-load demand alongside renewables.
India’s Targets: To reduce the emission
intensity of its GDP by 44% by 2030 from
the 2005 level.
o To achieve 50% cumulative electric
power installed capacity from non-
fossil fuel-based energy resources
by 2030.
Roadmap for 100 GW: A roadmap is being
developed with stakeholders, and while
challenges remain, achieving the 100 GW
target is seen as both ambitious and
achievable
Conclusion
These developments reflect a historic shift
in India’s nuclear policy. By addressing legal
and regulatory obstacles, India is poised to:
o Unlock foreign investment and
advanced technology.
o Expand its clean energy portfolio
through nuclear power.
o Reinforce strategic alignment with
the U.S. under the civil nuclear
framework.
International Day for Biodiversity 2025
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
Context
The International Day for Biological
Diversity is celebrated every year on 22
May.
Background
The IDB commemorates the adoption of
the Convention on Biological Diversity
(CBD) on 22 May 1992 during the Rio Earth
Summit.
The day creates awareness among the
citizens and stakeholders on the importance
and need for the conservation of biological
diversity.
The 2025 theme is “Harmony with Nature
and Sustainable Development.”
Convention on Biological Diversity
Origin: The Convention was opened for
signature in 1992 at the United Nations
Conference on Environment and
Development (Rio Earth Summit).
o The Convention on Biological
Diversity (CBD) entered into force
on 29 December 1993.
The first session of the COP was scheduled
in 1994 in the Bahamas.
Secretariat: Montreal, Canada.
Ratification: The CBD has been ratified
by 196 nations, making it one of the most
widely adopted international treaties.
o The United States is the only UN
member state that has not
ratified the convention.
It has 3 main objectives;
o The conservation of biological
diversity
o The sustainable use of the
components of biological diversity
o The fair and equitable sharing of the
benefits arising out of the utilization
of genetic resources.
The governing body is the Conference of the
Parties (COP), which meets every
two years.
Kunming-Montreal Global Biodiversity Framework
– The Kunming-Montreal Global Biodiversity
Framework was concluded at COP15 of the
Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD), held
in Montreal, Canada, in 2022.
– This framework is a landmark agreement aimed
128
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
India’s Need to Increase its Nuclear Capacity:
Nuclear Capacity: India’s plans to increase
its nuclear power capacity from the current
8,180 MW to 22,480 MW by 2031-32 and
eventually 100 GW by 2047.
Energy Demand Growth: India’s electricity
demand is expected to increase 4-5 times by
2047, and nuclear power will help meet
base-load demand alongside renewables.
India’s Targets: To reduce the emission
intensity of its GDP by 44% by 2030 from
the 2005 level.
o To achieve 50% cumulative electric
power installed capacity from non-
fossil fuel-based energy resources
by 2030.
Roadmap for 100 GW: A roadmap is being
developed with stakeholders, and while
challenges remain, achieving the 100 GW
target is seen as both ambitious and
achievable
Conclusion
These developments reflect a historic shift
in India’s nuclear policy. By addressing legal
and regulatory obstacles, India is poised to:
o Unlock foreign investment and
advanced technology.
o Expand its clean energy portfolio
through nuclear power.
o Reinforce strategic alignment with
the U.S. under the civil nuclear
framework.
International Day for Biodiversity 2025
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
Context
The International Day for Biological
Diversity is celebrated every year on 22
May.
Background
The IDB commemorates the adoption of
the Convention on Biological Diversity
(CBD) on 22 May 1992 during the Rio Earth
Summit.
The day creates awareness among the
citizens and stakeholders on the importance
and need for the conservation of biological
diversity.
The 2025 theme is “Harmony with Nature
and Sustainable Development.”
Convention on Biological Diversity
Origin: The Convention was opened for
signature in 1992 at the United Nations
Conference on Environment and
Development (Rio Earth Summit).
o The Convention on Biological
Diversity (CBD) entered into force
on 29 December 1993.
The first session of the COP was scheduled
in 1994 in the Bahamas.
Secretariat: Montreal, Canada.
Ratification: The CBD has been ratified
by 196 nations, making it one of the most
widely adopted international treaties.
o The United States is the only UN
member state that has not
ratified the convention.
It has 3 main objectives;
o The conservation of biological
diversity
o The sustainable use of the
components of biological diversity
o The fair and equitable sharing of the
benefits arising out of the utilization
of genetic resources.
The governing body is the Conference of the
Parties (COP), which meets every
two years.
Kunming-Montreal Global Biodiversity Framework
– The Kunming-Montreal Global Biodiversity
Framework was concluded at COP15 of the
Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD), held
in Montreal, Canada, in 2022.
– This framework is a landmark agreement aimed
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
129
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
at addressing the global biodiversity crisis.
– It features 23 targets to be met by 2030 and four
global goals for 2050 to preserve biodiversity for
current and future generations.
– The agreement is not binding on members.
India’s Role and Biodiversity Profile
India is one of the 17 mega-diverse
countries in the world covering an area
of 329 million hectares and is
the ninth largest country.
India is known for its rich biological
diversity and accounts for more
than 1,00,000 species of animals and 55,000
species of plants in ten bio-geographic
regions.
India’s Conservation Efforts
The National Biodiversity Action Plan
(NBAP), launched in 2008 and updated
in 2014, is India’s primary strategy to meet
its obligations under the Convention on
Biological Diversity (CBD).
o It’s a comprehensive plan for
conserving biodiversity, promoting
sustainable use of resources, and
ensuring equitable access to genetic
resources.
Biological Diversity Act, 2002: It established
the National Biodiversity Authority (NBA) at
the central level, State Biodiversity Boards
(SBBs) at the state level, and Biodiversity
Management Committees (BMCs) at the
local level.
o Regulates access to biological
resources and associated traditional
knowledge, particularly for
commercial or research purposes.
People’s Biodiversity Registers (PBRs) are
community-maintained records of local
biological resources, traditional ecological
knowledge, and conservation practices.
As of 2025, India has designated 89 Ramsar
sites, covering over 1.35 million hectares.
Additionally, 49 Biodiversity Heritage Sites
(BHS) have been notified under Section 37
of the Biological Diversity Act, 2002.
Concluding remarks
The International Day for Biological
Diversity is a reminder of the intricate link
between nature and human survival.
As biodiversity continues to decline, urgent
collective action is essential to foster
harmony with nature and meet the
sustainable development targets.
India’s rich biodiversity and traditional
wisdom place it in a unique position to lead
by example in global conservation efforts.
Needs for Stable Urban Forests in India
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
Context
One of Hyderabad’s last remaining urban
forests, Kancha Gachibowli, faced the threat
of extinction when the Telangana
government decided to give away 400 acres
of its land for industrial development.
Importance of Urban Forests
Climate Change Mitigation: Urban
trees absorb CO₂ and sequester
carbon, reducing urban greenhouse gas
emissions.
Pollution Control: A hectare of trees can
remove nearly one ton of pollutants
annually, helping mitigate harmful PM 2.5
and PM 10 levels.
Temperature Regulation: Urban forests
reduce the Urban Heat Island effect,
promoting cooler and livable cities.
Stormwater Management: They help control
flooding and erosion, ensuring better water
infiltration and urban resilience.
Biodiversity Conservation: Serve as urban
wildlife refuges, supporting endangered
birds and animal species.
Social Well-being: Offer spaces for
recreation, relaxation, and cultural
activities, counterbalancing the high-speed
urban lifestyle.
Judicial Interventions to protect Urban forests
129
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
at addressing the global biodiversity crisis.
– It features 23 targets to be met by 2030 and four
global goals for 2050 to preserve biodiversity for
current and future generations.
– The agreement is not binding on members.
India’s Role and Biodiversity Profile
India is one of the 17 mega-diverse
countries in the world covering an area
of 329 million hectares and is
the ninth largest country.
India is known for its rich biological
diversity and accounts for more
than 1,00,000 species of animals and 55,000
species of plants in ten bio-geographic
regions.
India’s Conservation Efforts
The National Biodiversity Action Plan
(NBAP), launched in 2008 and updated
in 2014, is India’s primary strategy to meet
its obligations under the Convention on
Biological Diversity (CBD).
o It’s a comprehensive plan for
conserving biodiversity, promoting
sustainable use of resources, and
ensuring equitable access to genetic
resources.
Biological Diversity Act, 2002: It established
the National Biodiversity Authority (NBA) at
the central level, State Biodiversity Boards
(SBBs) at the state level, and Biodiversity
Management Committees (BMCs) at the
local level.
o Regulates access to biological
resources and associated traditional
knowledge, particularly for
commercial or research purposes.
People’s Biodiversity Registers (PBRs) are
community-maintained records of local
biological resources, traditional ecological
knowledge, and conservation practices.
As of 2025, India has designated 89 Ramsar
sites, covering over 1.35 million hectares.
Additionally, 49 Biodiversity Heritage Sites
(BHS) have been notified under Section 37
of the Biological Diversity Act, 2002.
Concluding remarks
The International Day for Biological
Diversity is a reminder of the intricate link
between nature and human survival.
As biodiversity continues to decline, urgent
collective action is essential to foster
harmony with nature and meet the
sustainable development targets.
India’s rich biodiversity and traditional
wisdom place it in a unique position to lead
by example in global conservation efforts.
Needs for Stable Urban Forests in India
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
Context
One of Hyderabad’s last remaining urban
forests, Kancha Gachibowli, faced the threat
of extinction when the Telangana
government decided to give away 400 acres
of its land for industrial development.
Importance of Urban Forests
Climate Change Mitigation: Urban
trees absorb CO₂ and sequester
carbon, reducing urban greenhouse gas
emissions.
Pollution Control: A hectare of trees can
remove nearly one ton of pollutants
annually, helping mitigate harmful PM 2.5
and PM 10 levels.
Temperature Regulation: Urban forests
reduce the Urban Heat Island effect,
promoting cooler and livable cities.
Stormwater Management: They help control
flooding and erosion, ensuring better water
infiltration and urban resilience.
Biodiversity Conservation: Serve as urban
wildlife refuges, supporting endangered
birds and animal species.
Social Well-being: Offer spaces for
recreation, relaxation, and cultural
activities, counterbalancing the high-speed
urban lifestyle.
Judicial Interventions to protect Urban forests
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
130
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
T.N. Godavarman v. Union of India Case
(1996): In this case, the Supreme Court
interpreted Section 2 of the Forest
(Conservation) Act, 1980. The court ruled
that ‘forest land’ includes;
o Areas considered as ‘forest’ in the
dictionary sense.
o Any area recorded as forest in
government records, irrespective of
ownership.
Samatha v. State of Andhra Pradesh
(1997): The Supreme Court held that
government-owned forest land in
Scheduled Areas cannot be leased to non-
tribals or private companies for mining.
Government Initiatives
Nagar Van Yojana: The scheme was
launched in 2020 by the Ministry of
Environment, Forest and Climate Change
and aims to create 1000 Urban Forests by
2027.
o According to the India State of
Forest Report 2023, the scheme
added 1445.81 sq. km of tree/forest
cover.
National Forest Policy (1988) and National
Mission for Green India (2014) aim to
expand forest cover through afforestation.
Smart Cities Mission and AMRUT (Atal
Mission for Rejuvenation and Urban
Transformation) promote integrated
ecological design in urban spaces.
Miyawaki method
– It is a reforestation technique developed
by Japanese botanist Akira Miyawaki, designed to
create dense, biodiverse forests in urban areas by
planting native species densely together.
– It accelerates forest growth and biodiversity
compared to traditional methods, requiring
minimal maintenance after the initial three years.
Way Ahead
Enforce Green Norms in Urban
Planning: Integrate urban forestry into city
master plans and zoning regulations.
Expand Legal Protection: Strengthen forest
protection laws and penal provisions for
illegal deforestation.
Citizen Participation: Encourage
community-led forest protection
movements and awareness campaigns.
Data-Driven Governance: Maintain accurate
digital inventories and satellite-based
monitoring of urban forests.
Public-Private Partnerships (PPPs): Involve
corporations in urban afforestation as part
of Corporate Social Responsibilities (CSR)
activities.
Concluding remarks
Urban forests like Aarey (Mumbai),
Turahalli (Bengaluru), Ridge (Delhi), and Dol
Ka Baadh (Jaipur) are crucial for ecological
and public health.
The judicial, policy, and civic actions must
align to prevent the extinction of green
spaces amidst expanding grey
infrastructure.
Only a collective commitment can ensure
that India’s cities remain breathable,
biodiverse, and livable for future
generations.
Oil Spill off Kerala Coast
Syllabus: GS3/Environment
Context
A Liberian-flagged cargo ship, MSC ELSA 3,
sank 14 nautical miles off the Kerala coast
in the Arabian Sea, resulting in a significant
oil leak, raising environmental concerns.
o The Indian Coast Guard ship
Saksham and a Dornier aircraft have
been deployed for oil spill response.
What is an Oil Spill?
An oil spill is the release of a liquid
petroleum hydrocarbon from tankers,
offshore platforms, drilling rigs or wells into
the environment, especially marine areas.
Spilled substances: It may be refined
petroleum products, such as gasoline and
130
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
T.N. Godavarman v. Union of India Case
(1996): In this case, the Supreme Court
interpreted Section 2 of the Forest
(Conservation) Act, 1980. The court ruled
that ‘forest land’ includes;
o Areas considered as ‘forest’ in the
dictionary sense.
o Any area recorded as forest in
government records, irrespective of
ownership.
Samatha v. State of Andhra Pradesh
(1997): The Supreme Court held that
government-owned forest land in
Scheduled Areas cannot be leased to non-
tribals or private companies for mining.
Government Initiatives
Nagar Van Yojana: The scheme was
launched in 2020 by the Ministry of
Environment, Forest and Climate Change
and aims to create 1000 Urban Forests by
2027.
o According to the India State of
Forest Report 2023, the scheme
added 1445.81 sq. km of tree/forest
cover.
National Forest Policy (1988) and National
Mission for Green India (2014) aim to
expand forest cover through afforestation.
Smart Cities Mission and AMRUT (Atal
Mission for Rejuvenation and Urban
Transformation) promote integrated
ecological design in urban spaces.
Miyawaki method
– It is a reforestation technique developed
by Japanese botanist Akira Miyawaki, designed to
create dense, biodiverse forests in urban areas by
planting native species densely together.
– It accelerates forest growth and biodiversity
compared to traditional methods, requiring
minimal maintenance after the initial three years.
Way Ahead
Enforce Green Norms in Urban
Planning: Integrate urban forestry into city
master plans and zoning regulations.
Expand Legal Protection: Strengthen forest
protection laws and penal provisions for
illegal deforestation.
Citizen Participation: Encourage
community-led forest protection
movements and awareness campaigns.
Data-Driven Governance: Maintain accurate
digital inventories and satellite-based
monitoring of urban forests.
Public-Private Partnerships (PPPs): Involve
corporations in urban afforestation as part
of Corporate Social Responsibilities (CSR)
activities.
Concluding remarks
Urban forests like Aarey (Mumbai),
Turahalli (Bengaluru), Ridge (Delhi), and Dol
Ka Baadh (Jaipur) are crucial for ecological
and public health.
The judicial, policy, and civic actions must
align to prevent the extinction of green
spaces amidst expanding grey
infrastructure.
Only a collective commitment can ensure
that India’s cities remain breathable,
biodiverse, and livable for future
generations.
Oil Spill off Kerala Coast
Syllabus: GS3/Environment
Context
A Liberian-flagged cargo ship, MSC ELSA 3,
sank 14 nautical miles off the Kerala coast
in the Arabian Sea, resulting in a significant
oil leak, raising environmental concerns.
o The Indian Coast Guard ship
Saksham and a Dornier aircraft have
been deployed for oil spill response.
What is an Oil Spill?
An oil spill is the release of a liquid
petroleum hydrocarbon from tankers,
offshore platforms, drilling rigs or wells into
the environment, especially marine areas.
Spilled substances: It may be refined
petroleum products, such as gasoline and
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
131
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
diesel fuel, as well as their by-products —
heavier fuels used by large ships such as
bunker fuel or oily refuse of any kind.
Past incidences
International Incidence:
o Venezuela: In 2020 oil leakage from
the El Palito refinery in Venezuela.
o Japanese ship MV Wakashio carrying
fuel oil split into two parts near Blue
Bay Marine Park in south-east
Mauritius.
o Russia: Arctic (Norilsk diesel fuel
spill) Oil Spill.
o Deepwater Horizon oil spill: Gulf of
Mexico, 2010
Indian incidents:
o Chennai 2017: Two ships collided off
Kamarajar Port Limited’s (KPL)
harbor and resulted in a major oil
spill disaster.
o Sundarban 2014: Oil spill in Sela
River, Bangladesh created an
environmental concern for India
too.
o ONGC Uran Plant leaked oil in the
Arabian Sea in 2013.
o Mumbai coast: In 2010 two ships
collided causing the 800 tonnes of
the oil spill.
Damage caused by oil spill
Environmental Impact: Oil spills harm
various species of fish, birds, mammals, and
other marine life. The oil can coat and
damage the fur or feathers of animals,
making it difficult for them to swim or fly.
Habitat Destruction: Oil can contaminate
coastal habitats, including beaches,
marshes, and mangroves, leading to long-
term damage.
Fisheries and Aquaculture: Contaminated
waters reduce fish populations and damage
to fishing gear, affecting the livelihoods of
communities dependent on these activities.
Tourism: Coastal areas affected by oil spills
experience a decline in tourism due to the
negative perception of polluted beaches and
waters, resulting in economic losses.
Exposure to Toxic Substances: The
chemicals present in oil, such as polycyclic
aromatic hydrocarbons (PAHs), pose health
risks to humans. Inhalation of fumes,
ingestion of contaminated seafood, or direct
skin contact with oil can lead to respiratory
problems, skin irritation, and long-term
health effects.
Global Efforts In Tackling
International Convention for the Prevention
of Pollution from Ships (MARPOL): It was
rolled out by the International Maritime
Organisation (IMO) in 1973 and recognised
the need for international coherent efforts
for curbing oil spill.
o India is a signatory to the MARPOL
Convention.
International Convention on Oil Pollution
Preparedness, Response and Cooperation
1990: It is the international instrument that
provides a framework designed to facilitate
international cooperation and mutual
assistance in preparing for and responding
to major oil pollution incidents.
Indian Efforts for dealing with Oil Spill
National Oil Spill Disaster Contingency Plan
(NOS-DCP): The Indian Coast Guard (ICG) is
responsible for maintaining and
implementing the Plan. It was promulgated
in 1996 and revised in 2015. Its Objectives
are:
o Effective reporting of spillage,
o Prompt response to prevent, control
and combat oil pollution,
o Adequate protection to Public
Health and Welfare along with
Marine Environment,
o Use of Science and Technology for
preventing and managing oil spills
and pollution and residuals.
131
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
diesel fuel, as well as their by-products —
heavier fuels used by large ships such as
bunker fuel or oily refuse of any kind.
Past incidences
International Incidence:
o Venezuela: In 2020 oil leakage from
the El Palito refinery in Venezuela.
o Japanese ship MV Wakashio carrying
fuel oil split into two parts near Blue
Bay Marine Park in south-east
Mauritius.
o Russia: Arctic (Norilsk diesel fuel
spill) Oil Spill.
o Deepwater Horizon oil spill: Gulf of
Mexico, 2010
Indian incidents:
o Chennai 2017: Two ships collided off
Kamarajar Port Limited’s (KPL)
harbor and resulted in a major oil
spill disaster.
o Sundarban 2014: Oil spill in Sela
River, Bangladesh created an
environmental concern for India
too.
o ONGC Uran Plant leaked oil in the
Arabian Sea in 2013.
o Mumbai coast: In 2010 two ships
collided causing the 800 tonnes of
the oil spill.
Damage caused by oil spill
Environmental Impact: Oil spills harm
various species of fish, birds, mammals, and
other marine life. The oil can coat and
damage the fur or feathers of animals,
making it difficult for them to swim or fly.
Habitat Destruction: Oil can contaminate
coastal habitats, including beaches,
marshes, and mangroves, leading to long-
term damage.
Fisheries and Aquaculture: Contaminated
waters reduce fish populations and damage
to fishing gear, affecting the livelihoods of
communities dependent on these activities.
Tourism: Coastal areas affected by oil spills
experience a decline in tourism due to the
negative perception of polluted beaches and
waters, resulting in economic losses.
Exposure to Toxic Substances: The
chemicals present in oil, such as polycyclic
aromatic hydrocarbons (PAHs), pose health
risks to humans. Inhalation of fumes,
ingestion of contaminated seafood, or direct
skin contact with oil can lead to respiratory
problems, skin irritation, and long-term
health effects.
Global Efforts In Tackling
International Convention for the Prevention
of Pollution from Ships (MARPOL): It was
rolled out by the International Maritime
Organisation (IMO) in 1973 and recognised
the need for international coherent efforts
for curbing oil spill.
o India is a signatory to the MARPOL
Convention.
International Convention on Oil Pollution
Preparedness, Response and Cooperation
1990: It is the international instrument that
provides a framework designed to facilitate
international cooperation and mutual
assistance in preparing for and responding
to major oil pollution incidents.
Indian Efforts for dealing with Oil Spill
National Oil Spill Disaster Contingency Plan
(NOS-DCP): The Indian Coast Guard (ICG) is
responsible for maintaining and
implementing the Plan. It was promulgated
in 1996 and revised in 2015. Its Objectives
are:
o Effective reporting of spillage,
o Prompt response to prevent, control
and combat oil pollution,
o Adequate protection to Public
Health and Welfare along with
Marine Environment,
o Use of Science and Technology for
preventing and managing oil spills
and pollution and residuals.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
132
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Merchant shipping Act, 1958: The Act,
describes the power to give a notice to the
owner, when the central government is
satisfied the ship is not as per the
prescribed rules.
o After notice, if the person fails to
comply, the government can convict
the person of an offense.
Control measures for Oil Spills
Bioremediation: It refers to the use of
specific microorganisms to remove any
toxic or harmful substances
o TERI has developed Oil Zapper
Bacteria which can degrade the oil
quickly.
Oil Booms: They are temporary floating
barriers used to contain marine spills,
protect the environment, and assist in
recovery.
Using Dispersants: Dispersal agents are
chemicals that are sprayed upon the spill
with the help of aircraft and boats, which
aid the natural breakdown of oil
components.
In Situ Burning for controlled burning of
concentrated oil patches to reduce volume.
Skimming: It is the physical removal of oil
from the surface using specialized
equipment before it reaches coastlines.
Indian Coast Guard (ICG)
– ICG is a maritime law enforcement and search
and rescue agency of India with jurisdiction over
its territorial waters including its contiguous zone
and exclusive economic zone.
– Established in 1977 by the Coast Guard Act, 1978
of the Parliament of India.
– Parent Agency: Ministry of Defence
– Headquarters: New Delhi
Global Temperature Likely to Breach 1.5°C in Next
Five Years: WMO
Syllabus: GS3/Environment and Ecology
Context
The World Meteorological Organisation
(WMO) has released the ‘Global Annual to
Decadal Climate Update (2025-2029)’.
Key Temperature Projections:
2024: The year 2024 was not only
the hottest year on record but also the first
year to breach 1.5°C above the 1850–1900
baseline.
2025–2029: There is a 70% chance that
the average global temperature for the
2025-2029 period will exceed pre-industrial
levels by more than 1.5°C.
o 80% chance of at least one of the
next 5 years surpassing 2024
temperature.
o 86% chance that at least one
year will cross the 1.5°C threshold.
o Avg. global temperature predicted to
be between 1.2°C and 1.9°C
higher than avg. for 1850-1900.
o Predicted precipitation patterns
for May-Sep 2025-2029 to be wetter
than average.
o 1% chance of at least one
year exceeding 2°C of warming in
the next five years .
Regional Climate Outlook
South Asia: Expected to continue
with wetter-than-usual years (except 2023),
and this trend is expected to continue
between 2025 and 2029, although some
seasons might still be dry.
Arctic: Projected warming of ~2.4°C over
winters—3.5x faster than global average
over the next five winters (November to
March).
o Sea ice is likely to shrink even more
between 2025 and 2029 in parts of
the Arctic like the Barents Sea,
Bering Sea and Sea of Okhotsk.
Regional anomalies (2025–2029):
o Wetter: Sahel, Northern Europe,
Alaska, Northern Siberia.
132
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Merchant shipping Act, 1958: The Act,
describes the power to give a notice to the
owner, when the central government is
satisfied the ship is not as per the
prescribed rules.
o After notice, if the person fails to
comply, the government can convict
the person of an offense.
Control measures for Oil Spills
Bioremediation: It refers to the use of
specific microorganisms to remove any
toxic or harmful substances
o TERI has developed Oil Zapper
Bacteria which can degrade the oil
quickly.
Oil Booms: They are temporary floating
barriers used to contain marine spills,
protect the environment, and assist in
recovery.
Using Dispersants: Dispersal agents are
chemicals that are sprayed upon the spill
with the help of aircraft and boats, which
aid the natural breakdown of oil
components.
In Situ Burning for controlled burning of
concentrated oil patches to reduce volume.
Skimming: It is the physical removal of oil
from the surface using specialized
equipment before it reaches coastlines.
Indian Coast Guard (ICG)
– ICG is a maritime law enforcement and search
and rescue agency of India with jurisdiction over
its territorial waters including its contiguous zone
and exclusive economic zone.
– Established in 1977 by the Coast Guard Act, 1978
of the Parliament of India.
– Parent Agency: Ministry of Defence
– Headquarters: New Delhi
Global Temperature Likely to Breach 1.5°C in Next
Five Years: WMO
Syllabus: GS3/Environment and Ecology
Context
The World Meteorological Organisation
(WMO) has released the ‘Global Annual to
Decadal Climate Update (2025-2029)’.
Key Temperature Projections:
2024: The year 2024 was not only
the hottest year on record but also the first
year to breach 1.5°C above the 1850–1900
baseline.
2025–2029: There is a 70% chance that
the average global temperature for the
2025-2029 period will exceed pre-industrial
levels by more than 1.5°C.
o 80% chance of at least one of the
next 5 years surpassing 2024
temperature.
o 86% chance that at least one
year will cross the 1.5°C threshold.
o Avg. global temperature predicted to
be between 1.2°C and 1.9°C
higher than avg. for 1850-1900.
o Predicted precipitation patterns
for May-Sep 2025-2029 to be wetter
than average.
o 1% chance of at least one
year exceeding 2°C of warming in
the next five years .
Regional Climate Outlook
South Asia: Expected to continue
with wetter-than-usual years (except 2023),
and this trend is expected to continue
between 2025 and 2029, although some
seasons might still be dry.
Arctic: Projected warming of ~2.4°C over
winters—3.5x faster than global average
over the next five winters (November to
March).
o Sea ice is likely to shrink even more
between 2025 and 2029 in parts of
the Arctic like the Barents Sea,
Bering Sea and Sea of Okhotsk.
Regional anomalies (2025–2029):
o Wetter: Sahel, Northern Europe,
Alaska, Northern Siberia.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
133
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Drier: Amazon region.
India: India received above-normal rainfall
during the monsoon season in four of the
past five years.
o IMD predicts above-normal
monsoon rainfall in 2025.
Paris Agreement
– It is a legally binding international treaty on
climate change, adopted in 2015, at the COP21 to
the United Nations Framework Convention on
Climate Change (UNFCCC).
– It aims to limit global warming to below 2 degrees
Celsius above pre-industrial levels, with efforts
to limit the increase to 1.5 degrees Celsius.
– The 1.5°C limit is a goal, not a legal boundary.
1. A permanent breach implies long-term warming
over 20–30 years, not a single year.
– The Paris Agreement emphasizes nationally
determined contributions (NDCs) and encourages
all countries to take climate action.
1. Countries must review and update their NDCs
every five years to enhance their efforts and
increase ambition over time.
2. 180 of the 195 UNFCCC countries are yet to
submit their next round of NDCs for 2031-35
before the 30th Conference of the Parties (COP30).
World Metrological Organisation
– It is an intergovernmental organization with a
membership of 193 Member States and Territories
established in 1950.
– It is the specialised agency of the United
Nations for meteorology (weather and climate),
operational hydrology and related geophysical
sciences.
– It is headquartered in Geneva.
– Its supreme body is the World Meteorological
Congress.
Only 24% Present-Day Glaciers Will Remain if World
Gets Warmer by 2.7°C
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
Context
According to a new study published in the
journal Science, If the world gets warmer by
2.7°C due to the current trajectory of
climate policies, only 24% of the world’s
present-day glaciers will remain.
What are glaciers?
They are essentially large and thick masses
of ice that are formed on land due to the
accumulation of snow over centuries.
They hold 70 per cent of the Earth’s
freshwater, currently encompassing
around 10 percent of the planet’s land area.
Key findings of the study
Massive Glacier Loss: The study cautioned
that even if temperatures stopped rising
today, the world’s glaciers would still
lose 39% of their mass, compared to 2020
levels, and that would lead to a sea level rise
of 113 mm.
Disproportionate Impact on Some
Regions: Glaciers in Scandinavia, the
Rockies in Western Canada and the US, and
the European Alps are particularly
vulnerable.
o A recent glacier collapse in Blatten,
Switzerland, which buried parts of a
village, highlights this vulnerability.
High Sensitivity to Incremental
Warming: For every 0.1°C increase in global
temperature between 1.5°C and 3°C, there
is a 2% global glacier loss, with steeper
regional impacts.
Hindu Kush Himalaya Under Threat: The
study estimates that only 25% of ice will
remain in the Hindu Kush Himalayan region
at 2°C warming. This region feeds key river
systems– Ganga, Indus and Brahmaputra –
vital to South Asia.
133
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Drier: Amazon region.
India: India received above-normal rainfall
during the monsoon season in four of the
past five years.
o IMD predicts above-normal
monsoon rainfall in 2025.
Paris Agreement
– It is a legally binding international treaty on
climate change, adopted in 2015, at the COP21 to
the United Nations Framework Convention on
Climate Change (UNFCCC).
– It aims to limit global warming to below 2 degrees
Celsius above pre-industrial levels, with efforts
to limit the increase to 1.5 degrees Celsius.
– The 1.5°C limit is a goal, not a legal boundary.
1. A permanent breach implies long-term warming
over 20–30 years, not a single year.
– The Paris Agreement emphasizes nationally
determined contributions (NDCs) and encourages
all countries to take climate action.
1. Countries must review and update their NDCs
every five years to enhance their efforts and
increase ambition over time.
2. 180 of the 195 UNFCCC countries are yet to
submit their next round of NDCs for 2031-35
before the 30th Conference of the Parties (COP30).
World Metrological Organisation
– It is an intergovernmental organization with a
membership of 193 Member States and Territories
established in 1950.
– It is the specialised agency of the United
Nations for meteorology (weather and climate),
operational hydrology and related geophysical
sciences.
– It is headquartered in Geneva.
– Its supreme body is the World Meteorological
Congress.
Only 24% Present-Day Glaciers Will Remain if World
Gets Warmer by 2.7°C
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
Context
According to a new study published in the
journal Science, If the world gets warmer by
2.7°C due to the current trajectory of
climate policies, only 24% of the world’s
present-day glaciers will remain.
What are glaciers?
They are essentially large and thick masses
of ice that are formed on land due to the
accumulation of snow over centuries.
They hold 70 per cent of the Earth’s
freshwater, currently encompassing
around 10 percent of the planet’s land area.
Key findings of the study
Massive Glacier Loss: The study cautioned
that even if temperatures stopped rising
today, the world’s glaciers would still
lose 39% of their mass, compared to 2020
levels, and that would lead to a sea level rise
of 113 mm.
Disproportionate Impact on Some
Regions: Glaciers in Scandinavia, the
Rockies in Western Canada and the US, and
the European Alps are particularly
vulnerable.
o A recent glacier collapse in Blatten,
Switzerland, which buried parts of a
village, highlights this vulnerability.
High Sensitivity to Incremental
Warming: For every 0.1°C increase in global
temperature between 1.5°C and 3°C, there
is a 2% global glacier loss, with steeper
regional impacts.
Hindu Kush Himalaya Under Threat: The
study estimates that only 25% of ice will
remain in the Hindu Kush Himalayan region
at 2°C warming. This region feeds key river
systems– Ganga, Indus and Brahmaputra –
vital to South Asia.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
134
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Impacts of Glaciers loss
Water Security in South Asia: Himalayan
glaciers serve as perennial sources for
India’s major rivers.
o Their depletion threatens
agricultural output, drinking water
supplies, and hydroelectric
generation, particularly during the
dry season.
Sea-Level Rise and Coastal Risk: The glacier
melt contributes to global sea-level rise,
endangering coastal populations,
particularly in low-lying nations like the
Maldives and coastal Indian cities.
Ecosystem Disruption: Glacial melt impacts
mountain biodiversity, alpine ecosystems,
and can lead to glacial lake outburst floods
(GLOFs).
Socioeconomic Consequences: Loss of water
sources may lead to climate-induced
migration, conflict over resources, and
increased poverty in already vulnerable
regions.
Global Initiatives to conserve glaciers
Paris Agreement 2015, aims to limit global
warming to well below 2°C, preferably to
1.5°C, above pre-industrial levels.
High Mountain Summit (WMO): Recognizes
mountains and glaciers as climate sentinels
and promotes early warning systems and
enhanced data sharing.
International Cryosphere Climate Initiative
(ICCI): Established in 2009 as a result of
the COP-15, it is a network of senior policy
experts and researchers that works with
governments and organizations.
o It creates and implements initiatives
designed to preserve the Earth’s
cryosphere.
National Mission for Sustaining the
Himalayan Ecosystem (NMSHE) is a
government initiative aimed at addressing
climate change and its impacts on the
Himalayan region.
o It focuses on developing sustainable
strategies, and addressing issues
like glacial melt, natural hazards,
and biodiversity loss.
The Arctic Council: It is a forum for Arctic
countries to collaborate on environmental
protection, sustainable development, and
climate change mitigation in the Arctic
region.
Global Ice Monitoring Initiatives like the
World Meteorological Organization’s Global
Cryosphere Watch (GCW) and the European
Space Agency’s CryoSat mission use
satellite-based remote sensing to monitor
changes in glaciers and ice sheets.
Concluding remarks
The accelerating loss of glaciers due to
rising global temperatures is a stark
reminder of the urgent need for
coordinated climate action.
While global initiatives such as the Paris
Agreement and IPCC reports provide a
strategic framework, their success hinges
on timely implementation and increased
ambition by all nations.
South Asia’s ‘largest’ Battery Energy Storage System
(BESS) Inaugurated
Syllabus :GS3/Economy/Environment
In News
134
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Impacts of Glaciers loss
Water Security in South Asia: Himalayan
glaciers serve as perennial sources for
India’s major rivers.
o Their depletion threatens
agricultural output, drinking water
supplies, and hydroelectric
generation, particularly during the
dry season.
Sea-Level Rise and Coastal Risk: The glacier
melt contributes to global sea-level rise,
endangering coastal populations,
particularly in low-lying nations like the
Maldives and coastal Indian cities.
Ecosystem Disruption: Glacial melt impacts
mountain biodiversity, alpine ecosystems,
and can lead to glacial lake outburst floods
(GLOFs).
Socioeconomic Consequences: Loss of water
sources may lead to climate-induced
migration, conflict over resources, and
increased poverty in already vulnerable
regions.
Global Initiatives to conserve glaciers
Paris Agreement 2015, aims to limit global
warming to well below 2°C, preferably to
1.5°C, above pre-industrial levels.
High Mountain Summit (WMO): Recognizes
mountains and glaciers as climate sentinels
and promotes early warning systems and
enhanced data sharing.
International Cryosphere Climate Initiative
(ICCI): Established in 2009 as a result of
the COP-15, it is a network of senior policy
experts and researchers that works with
governments and organizations.
o It creates and implements initiatives
designed to preserve the Earth’s
cryosphere.
National Mission for Sustaining the
Himalayan Ecosystem (NMSHE) is a
government initiative aimed at addressing
climate change and its impacts on the
Himalayan region.
o It focuses on developing sustainable
strategies, and addressing issues
like glacial melt, natural hazards,
and biodiversity loss.
The Arctic Council: It is a forum for Arctic
countries to collaborate on environmental
protection, sustainable development, and
climate change mitigation in the Arctic
region.
Global Ice Monitoring Initiatives like the
World Meteorological Organization’s Global
Cryosphere Watch (GCW) and the European
Space Agency’s CryoSat mission use
satellite-based remote sensing to monitor
changes in glaciers and ice sheets.
Concluding remarks
The accelerating loss of glaciers due to
rising global temperatures is a stark
reminder of the urgent need for
coordinated climate action.
While global initiatives such as the Paris
Agreement and IPCC reports provide a
strategic framework, their success hinges
on timely implementation and increased
ambition by all nations.
South Asia’s ‘largest’ Battery Energy Storage System
(BESS) Inaugurated
Syllabus :GS3/Economy/Environment
In News
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
135
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
The Delhi Power Minister inaugurated a
20-MW Battery Energy Storage System
(BESS) at Kilokari, South Delhi .
Battery Energy Storage Systems (BESS)
Battery Energy Storage Systems (BESS)
are large-scale batteries used to store energy
from renewable sources like solar and wind
for later use.
They vary in size, design, and technology,
and play a crucial role in making green
energy more reliable and flexible.
They can also feed excess power back to the
main grid.
There are three main types: Pre-packaged
battery modules (just batteries), pre-
packaged systems (batteries plus
components like chargers or inverters), and
custom-made battery banks (individual
batteries assembled with additional
components).
BESS in Delhi
It is the largest utility-scale system in South
Asia and India’s first commercially
approved energy storage system.
The 40 MWh system enhances grid stability,
reduces peak load stress, integrates
renewable energy, and optimizes power
purchase costs.
It uses Lithium Iron Phosphate (LFP)
technology, known for safety and thermal
stability, and operates efficiently under
Delhi’s varied weather conditions.
Need for Battery Energy Storage Systems (BESS) in
India
Integrating Renewable Energy into the
Grid: India has ambitious goals of 500 GW of
non-fossil capacity by 2030 and net zero by
2070. BESS stores surplus energy during
peak generation (e.g., daytime solar) and
releases it during demand spikes (e.g., night
or cloudy days).
Reducing Grid Congestion and
Curtailment: BESS can decongest the grid,
prevent curtailment, and increase
utilization of RE infrastructure.
Supporting Round-the-Clock (RTC)
Renewable Power: India is pushing for RTC
green power tenders, where RE + storage
competes with coal in reliability.
Enabling Electric Mobility and Charging
Infrastructure: BESS can power fast-
charging stations, reduce grid stress from
EV loads, and enable vehicle-to-grid (V2G)
integration.
Economic Opportunity and Innovation: India
has launched a Production-Linked Incentive
(PLI) scheme for Advanced Chemistry Cell
(ACC) batteries worth ₹18,100 crore that
can help in domestic manufacturing &
create green jobs.
HISTORY AND CULTURE
Nalanda University
Syllabus: GS1/ History and Culture
Context
Eminent economist Sachin Chaturvedi, took
charge as the Vice-Chancellor of Nalanda
University in Bihar.
About
The Parliament of India established the
Nalanda University through the Nalanda
University Act, 2010.
It started functioning in 2014 from a
makeshift location with 14 students, and
construction work started in 2017.
The new campus of Nalanda University is
close to the site of the ancient ruins of
Nalanda in Rajgir, Bihar.
Ancient Nalanda University
The ancient Nalanda University was
established in the 5th century by the Gupta
ruler Kumaragupta I.
It includes stupas, shrines,
viharas (residential and educational
135
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
The Delhi Power Minister inaugurated a
20-MW Battery Energy Storage System
(BESS) at Kilokari, South Delhi .
Battery Energy Storage Systems (BESS)
Battery Energy Storage Systems (BESS)
are large-scale batteries used to store energy
from renewable sources like solar and wind
for later use.
They vary in size, design, and technology,
and play a crucial role in making green
energy more reliable and flexible.
They can also feed excess power back to the
main grid.
There are three main types: Pre-packaged
battery modules (just batteries), pre-
packaged systems (batteries plus
components like chargers or inverters), and
custom-made battery banks (individual
batteries assembled with additional
components).
BESS in Delhi
It is the largest utility-scale system in South
Asia and India’s first commercially
approved energy storage system.
The 40 MWh system enhances grid stability,
reduces peak load stress, integrates
renewable energy, and optimizes power
purchase costs.
It uses Lithium Iron Phosphate (LFP)
technology, known for safety and thermal
stability, and operates efficiently under
Delhi’s varied weather conditions.
Need for Battery Energy Storage Systems (BESS) in
India
Integrating Renewable Energy into the
Grid: India has ambitious goals of 500 GW of
non-fossil capacity by 2030 and net zero by
2070. BESS stores surplus energy during
peak generation (e.g., daytime solar) and
releases it during demand spikes (e.g., night
or cloudy days).
Reducing Grid Congestion and
Curtailment: BESS can decongest the grid,
prevent curtailment, and increase
utilization of RE infrastructure.
Supporting Round-the-Clock (RTC)
Renewable Power: India is pushing for RTC
green power tenders, where RE + storage
competes with coal in reliability.
Enabling Electric Mobility and Charging
Infrastructure: BESS can power fast-
charging stations, reduce grid stress from
EV loads, and enable vehicle-to-grid (V2G)
integration.
Economic Opportunity and Innovation: India
has launched a Production-Linked Incentive
(PLI) scheme for Advanced Chemistry Cell
(ACC) batteries worth ₹18,100 crore that
can help in domestic manufacturing &
create green jobs.
HISTORY AND CULTURE
Nalanda University
Syllabus: GS1/ History and Culture
Context
Eminent economist Sachin Chaturvedi, took
charge as the Vice-Chancellor of Nalanda
University in Bihar.
About
The Parliament of India established the
Nalanda University through the Nalanda
University Act, 2010.
It started functioning in 2014 from a
makeshift location with 14 students, and
construction work started in 2017.
The new campus of Nalanda University is
close to the site of the ancient ruins of
Nalanda in Rajgir, Bihar.
Ancient Nalanda University
The ancient Nalanda University was
established in the 5th century by the Gupta
ruler Kumaragupta I.
It includes stupas, shrines,
viharas (residential and educational
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
136
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
buildings) and important art works in
stucco, stone and metal.
It was patronized by various rulers
including King Harshavardhana of
Kannauj (7th century CE) and the Pala
rulers (8th – 12th century CE).
It flourished for 800 years before it was
burnt down by Bakhtiar Khilji in the 12th
century.
The site after its decline was first
discovered by Sir Francis Buchanan and was
systematically excavated and consolidated
by the Archaeological Survey of India.
Significance
Chinese scholar Xuanzang (Hsüan-
tsang) visited Nalanda in 637 and 642 CE,
and studied under the guidance
of Shilabhadra.
It attracted students from all over the world
and stands out as the most ancient
university of the Indian Subcontinent.
In 2016 it was inscribed as a World Heritage
Site by UNESCO.
INDIAN ECONOMY AND ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT
World Audio Visual and Entertainment Summit
(WAVES), 2025
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
In News
At the inaugural WAVES Summit 2025 held
in Mumbai, the Prime Minister underscored
the creative economy as a critical lever for
India’s future GDP growth, innovation, and
inclusive development.
More About the News
The Prime Minister announced the launch
of the Indian Institute of Creative
Technology (IICT), a National Centre of
Excellence aimed at upskilling youth and
fostering innovation in media, animation,
gaming, and content creation.
The IICT is being established by the Ministry
of Information & Broadcasting in
partnership with industry bodies FICCI and
CII.
The WAVES aims to unlock a $50 billion
market by 2029, expanding India’s footprint
in the global entertainment economy.
About Creative Economy (also called Orange
Economy)
The Creative Economy encompasses
industries that rely on individual creativity,
skill, and intellectual property (IP) to
generate economic value. These include:
o Cultural industries: Music, film,
theatre, dance, crafts, literature
o Creative industries: Advertising,
fashion, design, architecture
o Digital creative sectors: Animation,
VFX, gaming, XR (Extended Reality),
OTT platforms, YouTube/podcasts,
influencer content
John Howkins is credited for popularising
the term “creative economy.” The
term “Orange Economy” was coined by
former Colombian President Iván Duque
and Minister Felipe Buitrago.
Current Status of India’s Creative Economy
Economic Contribution: As of 2025, India’s
creative economy contributes
approximately $30 billion to the national
GDP, employing about 8% of the workforce.
Export Potential: Creative exports have
surpassed $11 billion annually,
encompassing sectors like film, music,
design, and digital content.
Global Standing: India ranks among the top
countries in fintech adoption, mobile
manufacturing, and startup ecosystems,
providing a robust foundation for creative
industries to flourish.
India’s Potential in the Creative Economy
Demographic Dividend: Over 65% of India’s
population is below the age of 35 which are
the main driver for content creation,
136
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
buildings) and important art works in
stucco, stone and metal.
It was patronized by various rulers
including King Harshavardhana of
Kannauj (7th century CE) and the Pala
rulers (8th – 12th century CE).
It flourished for 800 years before it was
burnt down by Bakhtiar Khilji in the 12th
century.
The site after its decline was first
discovered by Sir Francis Buchanan and was
systematically excavated and consolidated
by the Archaeological Survey of India.
Significance
Chinese scholar Xuanzang (Hsüan-
tsang) visited Nalanda in 637 and 642 CE,
and studied under the guidance
of Shilabhadra.
It attracted students from all over the world
and stands out as the most ancient
university of the Indian Subcontinent.
In 2016 it was inscribed as a World Heritage
Site by UNESCO.
INDIAN ECONOMY AND ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT
World Audio Visual and Entertainment Summit
(WAVES), 2025
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
In News
At the inaugural WAVES Summit 2025 held
in Mumbai, the Prime Minister underscored
the creative economy as a critical lever for
India’s future GDP growth, innovation, and
inclusive development.
More About the News
The Prime Minister announced the launch
of the Indian Institute of Creative
Technology (IICT), a National Centre of
Excellence aimed at upskilling youth and
fostering innovation in media, animation,
gaming, and content creation.
The IICT is being established by the Ministry
of Information & Broadcasting in
partnership with industry bodies FICCI and
CII.
The WAVES aims to unlock a $50 billion
market by 2029, expanding India’s footprint
in the global entertainment economy.
About Creative Economy (also called Orange
Economy)
The Creative Economy encompasses
industries that rely on individual creativity,
skill, and intellectual property (IP) to
generate economic value. These include:
o Cultural industries: Music, film,
theatre, dance, crafts, literature
o Creative industries: Advertising,
fashion, design, architecture
o Digital creative sectors: Animation,
VFX, gaming, XR (Extended Reality),
OTT platforms, YouTube/podcasts,
influencer content
John Howkins is credited for popularising
the term “creative economy.” The
term “Orange Economy” was coined by
former Colombian President Iván Duque
and Minister Felipe Buitrago.
Current Status of India’s Creative Economy
Economic Contribution: As of 2025, India’s
creative economy contributes
approximately $30 billion to the national
GDP, employing about 8% of the workforce.
Export Potential: Creative exports have
surpassed $11 billion annually,
encompassing sectors like film, music,
design, and digital content.
Global Standing: India ranks among the top
countries in fintech adoption, mobile
manufacturing, and startup ecosystems,
providing a robust foundation for creative
industries to flourish.
India’s Potential in the Creative Economy
Demographic Dividend: Over 65% of India’s
population is below the age of 35 which are
the main driver for content creation,
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
137
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
gaming, design, and short-format
storytelling.
Digital Infrastructure: India has the second-
largest internet user base globally.
Initiatives like Digital India, BharatNet, and
5G rollout are enabling digital
entrepreneurship in rural and urban areas
alike.
Cultural Heritage: India’s diverse traditions,
languages, art forms, and mythology
provide rich content for global storytelling.
Cultural exports like Bollywood, Indian
cuisine, and yoga have created strong brand
recall internationally.
Challenges
Lack of IP awareness: Weak enforcement of
copyrights, design patents, and royalties.
Fragmented industry: Dominated by
informal, unorganized sectors without
formal recognition.
Skill gaps: Training programs often lag
behind fast-evolving digital tools and
formats.
Funding barriers: Lack of easy access to
credit and grants for artists and creative
startups.
Limited rural participation: Urban-centric
growth excludes rural talent and
craftspeople.
India’s Initiatives for Promoting Creative Economy
– National Creators Award: Established in 2024 to
recognize excellence in digital content creation
across various platforms.
– $1 Billion Creator Economy Fund: Announced to
support content creators in improving skills and
expanding to global markets.
– National Handicrafts Development Programme
(NHDP): Implemented by the Ministry of Textiles
to develop and promote handicrafts.
–Scheme of Financial Assistance for Promotion of
Art and Culture: Provides financial support to
cultural organizations and artists for preserving
and promoting India’s rich cultural heritage.
UN Pushes for Reforms in Three Key Areas to meet
SDGs
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
The United Nations Secretary-General
Antonio Guterres called for urgent action in
three key areas to help finance the
achievement of the UN-mandated
Sustainable Development Goals (SDG) by
2030.
Background
With the world facing compounding crises
such as economic instability, conflicts, and
trade disruptions, progress on the SDGs is
lagging.
Developing nations are spending over $1.4
trillion annually on debt servicing, limiting
their ability to invest in development.
Hence the UN has outlined three core
areas needing urgent action: debt reforms,
international financial institutions, and
diversification of finance sources.
Key Areas of Reform
Debt Reforms:
G20’s Common Framework for Debt
Treatments must be accelerated and expanded to
include middle-income countries in distress.
Credit rating agencies need to revise ratings
methodologies that drive up borrowing costs for
developing countries.
The IMF and World Bank must reform debt
sustainability assessments to account for SDG-
linked investments and climate vulnerabilities.
Strengthening International Financial Institutions:
Multilateral Development Banks
(MDBs) need recapitalization and should stretch
their balance sheets to increase lending capacity.
MDBs must focus on mobilizing private finance at
affordable rates for developing countries
Diversifying Finance Sources:
137
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
gaming, design, and short-format
storytelling.
Digital Infrastructure: India has the second-
largest internet user base globally.
Initiatives like Digital India, BharatNet, and
5G rollout are enabling digital
entrepreneurship in rural and urban areas
alike.
Cultural Heritage: India’s diverse traditions,
languages, art forms, and mythology
provide rich content for global storytelling.
Cultural exports like Bollywood, Indian
cuisine, and yoga have created strong brand
recall internationally.
Challenges
Lack of IP awareness: Weak enforcement of
copyrights, design patents, and royalties.
Fragmented industry: Dominated by
informal, unorganized sectors without
formal recognition.
Skill gaps: Training programs often lag
behind fast-evolving digital tools and
formats.
Funding barriers: Lack of easy access to
credit and grants for artists and creative
startups.
Limited rural participation: Urban-centric
growth excludes rural talent and
craftspeople.
India’s Initiatives for Promoting Creative Economy
– National Creators Award: Established in 2024 to
recognize excellence in digital content creation
across various platforms.
– $1 Billion Creator Economy Fund: Announced to
support content creators in improving skills and
expanding to global markets.
– National Handicrafts Development Programme
(NHDP): Implemented by the Ministry of Textiles
to develop and promote handicrafts.
–Scheme of Financial Assistance for Promotion of
Art and Culture: Provides financial support to
cultural organizations and artists for preserving
and promoting India’s rich cultural heritage.
UN Pushes for Reforms in Three Key Areas to meet
SDGs
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
The United Nations Secretary-General
Antonio Guterres called for urgent action in
three key areas to help finance the
achievement of the UN-mandated
Sustainable Development Goals (SDG) by
2030.
Background
With the world facing compounding crises
such as economic instability, conflicts, and
trade disruptions, progress on the SDGs is
lagging.
Developing nations are spending over $1.4
trillion annually on debt servicing, limiting
their ability to invest in development.
Hence the UN has outlined three core
areas needing urgent action: debt reforms,
international financial institutions, and
diversification of finance sources.
Key Areas of Reform
Debt Reforms:
G20’s Common Framework for Debt
Treatments must be accelerated and expanded to
include middle-income countries in distress.
Credit rating agencies need to revise ratings
methodologies that drive up borrowing costs for
developing countries.
The IMF and World Bank must reform debt
sustainability assessments to account for SDG-
linked investments and climate vulnerabilities.
Strengthening International Financial Institutions:
Multilateral Development Banks
(MDBs) need recapitalization and should stretch
their balance sheets to increase lending capacity.
MDBs must focus on mobilizing private finance at
affordable rates for developing countries
Diversifying Finance Sources:
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
138
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Countries should mobilise domestic resources to
strengthen the health, education and infrastructure
sectors.
They should also try to increase blended finance
options in collaboration with the private sector.
Governments must also find ways to
effectively fight corruption to prevent
misappropriation of critical funds.
Way Ahead
There is a need to Push for an inclusive
global tax system to ensure fair application
of international tax norms.
Also developed countries must honour
their Official Development
Assistance commitments.
Global platforms, like the COP30 Climate
Conference in Brazil, will explore innovative
climate finance solutions with a target to
mobilize $1.3 trillion annually by 2035.
Sustainable Development Goals (SDG)
– SDGs are a set of 17 global goals adopted by
the United Nations in 2015 as part of the 2030
Agenda for Sustainable Development.
– They recognize that ending poverty and other
deprivations must go hand-in-hand with strategies
that improve health and education, reduce
inequality, and spur economic growth – all while
tackling climate change and working to preserve
our oceans and forests.
Strengthening Entrepreneurship Ecosystems in
India
Syllabus: GS3/Economy; Employment; Growth &
Development
Context
The Global Alliance for Mass
Entrepreneurship (GAME) and NITI
Aayog have announced a strategic
partnership aimed at fostering vibrant
entrepreneurship ecosystems across
multiple states in India.
About Mass Entrepreneurship
It refers to the widespread creation of small
and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) that
generate jobs, economic growth, and social
impact.
It emphasizes inclusive business creation,
enabling millions of individuals to become
job creators rather than job seekers, unlike
traditional entrepreneurship, which often
focuses on high-growth startups.
Key Principles of Mass Entrepreneurship
Encouraging Local Business
Growth: Supports small-scale entrepreneurs
in diverse sectors, including manufacturing,
retail, and services.
o Focuses on regional economic
development by fostering
community-driven enterprises.
Job Creation and Economic Inclusion: Aims
to generate employment at scale,
particularly in rural and underserved areas.
Empowers women, youth, and marginalized
communities to participate in the economy.
Policy and Ecosystem Support: Requires
government policies, financial access, and
mentorship programs to thrive.
Encourages collaboration between businesses,
educational institutions, and policymakers.
Objectives of the Partnership Between GAME & NITI
Aayog
Empowering Local Entrepreneurs: The
initiative aims to bring together
government agencies, corporates,
educational institutions, financial bodies,
and community organizations to support
entrepreneurs.
GAME and NITI Aayog aim to transform
entrepreneurship into a movement that drives
economic growth and job creation, by creating
localized solutions tailored to regional challenges.
Implementing Proven Methodologies: The
pilot sites (Nagpur, Visakhapatnam, and
138
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Countries should mobilise domestic resources to
strengthen the health, education and infrastructure
sectors.
They should also try to increase blended finance
options in collaboration with the private sector.
Governments must also find ways to
effectively fight corruption to prevent
misappropriation of critical funds.
Way Ahead
There is a need to Push for an inclusive
global tax system to ensure fair application
of international tax norms.
Also developed countries must honour
their Official Development
Assistance commitments.
Global platforms, like the COP30 Climate
Conference in Brazil, will explore innovative
climate finance solutions with a target to
mobilize $1.3 trillion annually by 2035.
Sustainable Development Goals (SDG)
– SDGs are a set of 17 global goals adopted by
the United Nations in 2015 as part of the 2030
Agenda for Sustainable Development.
– They recognize that ending poverty and other
deprivations must go hand-in-hand with strategies
that improve health and education, reduce
inequality, and spur economic growth – all while
tackling climate change and working to preserve
our oceans and forests.
Strengthening Entrepreneurship Ecosystems in
India
Syllabus: GS3/Economy; Employment; Growth &
Development
Context
The Global Alliance for Mass
Entrepreneurship (GAME) and NITI
Aayog have announced a strategic
partnership aimed at fostering vibrant
entrepreneurship ecosystems across
multiple states in India.
About Mass Entrepreneurship
It refers to the widespread creation of small
and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) that
generate jobs, economic growth, and social
impact.
It emphasizes inclusive business creation,
enabling millions of individuals to become
job creators rather than job seekers, unlike
traditional entrepreneurship, which often
focuses on high-growth startups.
Key Principles of Mass Entrepreneurship
Encouraging Local Business
Growth: Supports small-scale entrepreneurs
in diverse sectors, including manufacturing,
retail, and services.
o Focuses on regional economic
development by fostering
community-driven enterprises.
Job Creation and Economic Inclusion: Aims
to generate employment at scale,
particularly in rural and underserved areas.
Empowers women, youth, and marginalized
communities to participate in the economy.
Policy and Ecosystem Support: Requires
government policies, financial access, and
mentorship programs to thrive.
Encourages collaboration between businesses,
educational institutions, and policymakers.
Objectives of the Partnership Between GAME & NITI
Aayog
Empowering Local Entrepreneurs: The
initiative aims to bring together
government agencies, corporates,
educational institutions, financial bodies,
and community organizations to support
entrepreneurs.
GAME and NITI Aayog aim to transform
entrepreneurship into a movement that drives
economic growth and job creation, by creating
localized solutions tailored to regional challenges.
Implementing Proven Methodologies: The
pilot sites (Nagpur, Visakhapatnam, and
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
139
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Uttar Pradesh) aim to adopt GAME’s
established frameworks, focusing on:
o Access to finance for startups and
small businesses.
o Capacity-building programs to
enhance entrepreneurial skills.
o Policy advocacy to create a
favorable business environment.
o Community-driven initiatives to
foster collaboration among
entrepreneurs.
Creating Self-Sustaining Ecosystems: The
ultimate goal is to develop entrepreneurial
hubs that generate widespread employment
opportunities and contribute to India’s
economic resilience.
GAME has assisted 300,000+
entrepreneurs through various
interventions enabling access to credit,
access to market and place-based
interventions, since its inception.
Other Key Government Initiatives Supporting
Entrepreneurship
Startup India Initiative (2016): It aims to
simplify regulations, provide funding
support, and promote innovation.
o Over 17.28 lakh jobs have been
created by startups under this
initiative.
Atal Innovation Mission (AIM): It focuses on
building innovation infrastructure,
supporting Atal Tinkering Labs
(ATL) and Atal Incubation Centers (AIC).
o AIM 2.0, approved in 2024, aims to
expand India’s innovation
ecosystem with a budget of ₹2,750
crore.
Startup India Seed Fund Scheme
(SISFS): Provides early-stage funding to
startups, supporting proof of concept,
prototype development, and market entry.
o As of December 2024, 2,622
startups have benefited from
₹467.75 crore in funding.
Fund of Funds for Startups (FFS) Scheme
(2016): It aims to boost access to domestic
capital for startups with a corpus of ₹10,000
crore.
Challenges in Strengthening Entrepreneurship
Ecosystems
Access to Finance: Despite government
support, many startups struggle with
funding gaps, particularly in Tier II and III
cities.
Regulatory Complexity: Entrepreneurs face
challenges in compliance, taxation, and
licensing, which can slow down business
growth.
Limited Market Access: Startups need
stronger industry linkages and global
market exposure to scale effectively.
Recommendations for Strengthening the Ecosystem
Expanding Financial Support: Increasing
venture capital funding and credit access for
startups in emerging sectors.
Simplifying Regulations: Streamlining
compliance processes and reducing
bureaucratic hurdles for entrepreneurs.
Enhancing Market Linkages: Strengthening
public-private partnerships to help startups
access domestic and international markets.
Port Economy to Drive India’s Growth
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
PM Modi said that Coastal States and port
cities will become key growth centres for a
developed India, during the commissioning
of the Vizhinjam International Seaport in
Kerala.
What is the Port Economy?
The port economy refers to the economic
activities and value generated through the
functioning and development of ports, which
serve as vital nodes in global trade and
logistics networks.
139
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Uttar Pradesh) aim to adopt GAME’s
established frameworks, focusing on:
o Access to finance for startups and
small businesses.
o Capacity-building programs to
enhance entrepreneurial skills.
o Policy advocacy to create a
favorable business environment.
o Community-driven initiatives to
foster collaboration among
entrepreneurs.
Creating Self-Sustaining Ecosystems: The
ultimate goal is to develop entrepreneurial
hubs that generate widespread employment
opportunities and contribute to India’s
economic resilience.
GAME has assisted 300,000+
entrepreneurs through various
interventions enabling access to credit,
access to market and place-based
interventions, since its inception.
Other Key Government Initiatives Supporting
Entrepreneurship
Startup India Initiative (2016): It aims to
simplify regulations, provide funding
support, and promote innovation.
o Over 17.28 lakh jobs have been
created by startups under this
initiative.
Atal Innovation Mission (AIM): It focuses on
building innovation infrastructure,
supporting Atal Tinkering Labs
(ATL) and Atal Incubation Centers (AIC).
o AIM 2.0, approved in 2024, aims to
expand India’s innovation
ecosystem with a budget of ₹2,750
crore.
Startup India Seed Fund Scheme
(SISFS): Provides early-stage funding to
startups, supporting proof of concept,
prototype development, and market entry.
o As of December 2024, 2,622
startups have benefited from
₹467.75 crore in funding.
Fund of Funds for Startups (FFS) Scheme
(2016): It aims to boost access to domestic
capital for startups with a corpus of ₹10,000
crore.
Challenges in Strengthening Entrepreneurship
Ecosystems
Access to Finance: Despite government
support, many startups struggle with
funding gaps, particularly in Tier II and III
cities.
Regulatory Complexity: Entrepreneurs face
challenges in compliance, taxation, and
licensing, which can slow down business
growth.
Limited Market Access: Startups need
stronger industry linkages and global
market exposure to scale effectively.
Recommendations for Strengthening the Ecosystem
Expanding Financial Support: Increasing
venture capital funding and credit access for
startups in emerging sectors.
Simplifying Regulations: Streamlining
compliance processes and reducing
bureaucratic hurdles for entrepreneurs.
Enhancing Market Linkages: Strengthening
public-private partnerships to help startups
access domestic and international markets.
Port Economy to Drive India’s Growth
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
PM Modi said that Coastal States and port
cities will become key growth centres for a
developed India, during the commissioning
of the Vizhinjam International Seaport in
Kerala.
What is the Port Economy?
The port economy refers to the economic
activities and value generated through the
functioning and development of ports, which
serve as vital nodes in global trade and
logistics networks.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
140
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Ports facilitate the movement of goods and
people, enable export-import operations,
and support shipbuilding and repair.
History of India’s Port Economy
In ancient India, ports like Lothal (Gujarat),
Muziris (Kerala), and Arikamedu (Tamil
Nadu) served as vibrant centers of Indo-
Roman, Indo-Greek, and Southeast Asian
trade.
During the medieval period, ports like Surat,
Calicut, and Masulipatnam emerged as key
hubs for trade with Arabs, Persians,
Chinese, and Europeans.
However, with the advent of colonialism the
focus turned toward resource extraction,
rather than national development.
Status of port development in India
India has a vast coastline with 13 major
ports and over 200 non-major
ports. Together, they handle around 95% of
India’s foreign trade by volume and 70% by
value.
As of 2024–25, India ranks among the
top 20 countries in global shipbuilding.
Two Indian ports, Jawaharlal Nehru Port
Authority (JNPA) and Mundra Port, are
among the top 30 globally.
As per the World Bank’s Logistics
Performance Index (LPI), 2023 India moved
up to 22nd Rank in the Global Ranking in
International Shipments category and the
overall 38th Rank in Logistics Performance
Index score.
The Vizhinjam Seaport is India’s first
dedicated transshipment port, aimed at
reducing dependence on foreign ports
as 75% of India’s transshipment occurs
abroad currently.
A shipbuilding and repair cluster is being
developed in Kochi under the Sagarmala
initiative.
Benefits of a Robust Port Economy
Geostrategic Value: Ports enhance India’s
maritime influence and support initiatives
like SAGAR (Security and Growth for All in
the Region) and Project Mausam.
Regional Development: Port-led industrial
zones catalyze infrastructure growth and
attract private investment in hinterland
regions.
Environmental Efficiency: Well-managed
ports reduce carbon emissions by
improving turnaround times and facilitating
modal shift to railways/inland waterways.
o Turnaround time is the time a ship
spends at port from arrival to
departure.
o Inland Water Transport
(IWT) emits 50% less CO₂ per tonne-
km than road transport.
Employment Generation: Ports directly and
indirectly support millions of jobs in
logistics, warehousing, and ancillary
sectors.
Challenges
High Logistics Costs: India’s logistics cost is
about 13-14% of GDP, compared to 8-9% in
developed economies.
Dependency on Foreign Ports: Major
transshipment activities rely on Colombo,
Singapore, and Port Klang due to lack of
domestic deepwater capacity.
140
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Ports facilitate the movement of goods and
people, enable export-import operations,
and support shipbuilding and repair.
History of India’s Port Economy
In ancient India, ports like Lothal (Gujarat),
Muziris (Kerala), and Arikamedu (Tamil
Nadu) served as vibrant centers of Indo-
Roman, Indo-Greek, and Southeast Asian
trade.
During the medieval period, ports like Surat,
Calicut, and Masulipatnam emerged as key
hubs for trade with Arabs, Persians,
Chinese, and Europeans.
However, with the advent of colonialism the
focus turned toward resource extraction,
rather than national development.
Status of port development in India
India has a vast coastline with 13 major
ports and over 200 non-major
ports. Together, they handle around 95% of
India’s foreign trade by volume and 70% by
value.
As of 2024–25, India ranks among the
top 20 countries in global shipbuilding.
Two Indian ports, Jawaharlal Nehru Port
Authority (JNPA) and Mundra Port, are
among the top 30 globally.
As per the World Bank’s Logistics
Performance Index (LPI), 2023 India moved
up to 22nd Rank in the Global Ranking in
International Shipments category and the
overall 38th Rank in Logistics Performance
Index score.
The Vizhinjam Seaport is India’s first
dedicated transshipment port, aimed at
reducing dependence on foreign ports
as 75% of India’s transshipment occurs
abroad currently.
A shipbuilding and repair cluster is being
developed in Kochi under the Sagarmala
initiative.
Benefits of a Robust Port Economy
Geostrategic Value: Ports enhance India’s
maritime influence and support initiatives
like SAGAR (Security and Growth for All in
the Region) and Project Mausam.
Regional Development: Port-led industrial
zones catalyze infrastructure growth and
attract private investment in hinterland
regions.
Environmental Efficiency: Well-managed
ports reduce carbon emissions by
improving turnaround times and facilitating
modal shift to railways/inland waterways.
o Turnaround time is the time a ship
spends at port from arrival to
departure.
o Inland Water Transport
(IWT) emits 50% less CO₂ per tonne-
km than road transport.
Employment Generation: Ports directly and
indirectly support millions of jobs in
logistics, warehousing, and ancillary
sectors.
Challenges
High Logistics Costs: India’s logistics cost is
about 13-14% of GDP, compared to 8-9% in
developed economies.
Dependency on Foreign Ports: Major
transshipment activities rely on Colombo,
Singapore, and Port Klang due to lack of
domestic deepwater capacity.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
141
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Port Congestion, procedural inefficiencies
and lack of digitization lead to delays,
reducing global competitiveness.
Environmental Concerns: Port construction
and dredging damage coastal ecosystems
and marine biodiversity.
Government Initiatives
Sagarmala Programme: It aims to reduce
logistics costs by port modernization, port-
led industrialization, and improved
hinterland connectivity.
The Maritime India Vision 2030 aims to
enhance India’s maritime capabilities with a
targeted investment of ₹3 lakh crore, aiming
to boost cargo handling capacity to
over 2,500 million metric tonnes.
National Logistics Portal (Marine) is being
developed as a one stop digital platform
where all maritime stakeholders are being
integrated for easier and speedier services.
Establishment of the ₹25,000 crore Maritime
Development Fund (MDF): The fund aims to
support long-term investments in the
sector, with the government contributing
49% and the remaining 51% mobilised
from ports and private sector investments.
PM Gati Shakti Plan integrates
infrastructure planning across sectors to
improve multi-modal logistics efficiency.
Way Ahead
Develop Green Ports: Invest in shore power,
LNG bunkering, and sustainable dredging to
minimize environmental impact.
Private Sector Participation: Public-Private
Partnerships (PPP) can expedite
infrastructure upgrades and improve
service quality.
Leverage Strategic Geography: India should
maximize its location near major global
trade routes to become a global
transshipment and logistics hub.
Report on “Enhancing Competitiveness of MSMEs in
India”
Syllabus :GS 3/Economy
In News
NITI Aayog released a report on improving
Micro, Small, and Medium Enterprises
(MSMEs) competitiveness in India.
About the Report
– It was prepared by NITI Aayog in collaboration
with the Institute for Competitiveness (IFC).
– The aim is to unlock the potential of India’s
MSMEs through systemic reforms in financing,
skilling, innovation, and market access.
– It highlights challenges in financing, skilling,
innovation, and market access across key sectors
like textiles, chemicals, automotive, and food
processing.
India’s MSME sector
It is a key driver of India’s industrial
economy, with 5.93 crore registered
enterprises employing over 25 crore people.
In 2023-24, MSME-related products
contributed 45.73% to India’s total exports.
o In recent years, the MSME sector
has displayed remarkable resilience,
with its share in the country’s Gross
Value Added (GVA) increasing
from 27.3% in 2020-21 to 29.6% in
2021-22 and 30.1% in 2022-23,
highlighting its growing role in
national economic output.
The Union Budget 2025-26 includes
measures to strengthen the MSME sector,
such as enhanced credit access, support for
first-time entrepreneurs, and promotion of
labour-intensive industries.
The classification criteria for MSMEs have
been revised, increasing investment and
141
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Port Congestion, procedural inefficiencies
and lack of digitization lead to delays,
reducing global competitiveness.
Environmental Concerns: Port construction
and dredging damage coastal ecosystems
and marine biodiversity.
Government Initiatives
Sagarmala Programme: It aims to reduce
logistics costs by port modernization, port-
led industrialization, and improved
hinterland connectivity.
The Maritime India Vision 2030 aims to
enhance India’s maritime capabilities with a
targeted investment of ₹3 lakh crore, aiming
to boost cargo handling capacity to
over 2,500 million metric tonnes.
National Logistics Portal (Marine) is being
developed as a one stop digital platform
where all maritime stakeholders are being
integrated for easier and speedier services.
Establishment of the ₹25,000 crore Maritime
Development Fund (MDF): The fund aims to
support long-term investments in the
sector, with the government contributing
49% and the remaining 51% mobilised
from ports and private sector investments.
PM Gati Shakti Plan integrates
infrastructure planning across sectors to
improve multi-modal logistics efficiency.
Way Ahead
Develop Green Ports: Invest in shore power,
LNG bunkering, and sustainable dredging to
minimize environmental impact.
Private Sector Participation: Public-Private
Partnerships (PPP) can expedite
infrastructure upgrades and improve
service quality.
Leverage Strategic Geography: India should
maximize its location near major global
trade routes to become a global
transshipment and logistics hub.
Report on “Enhancing Competitiveness of MSMEs in
India”
Syllabus :GS 3/Economy
In News
NITI Aayog released a report on improving
Micro, Small, and Medium Enterprises
(MSMEs) competitiveness in India.
About the Report
– It was prepared by NITI Aayog in collaboration
with the Institute for Competitiveness (IFC).
– The aim is to unlock the potential of India’s
MSMEs through systemic reforms in financing,
skilling, innovation, and market access.
– It highlights challenges in financing, skilling,
innovation, and market access across key sectors
like textiles, chemicals, automotive, and food
processing.
India’s MSME sector
It is a key driver of India’s industrial
economy, with 5.93 crore registered
enterprises employing over 25 crore people.
In 2023-24, MSME-related products
contributed 45.73% to India’s total exports.
o In recent years, the MSME sector
has displayed remarkable resilience,
with its share in the country’s Gross
Value Added (GVA) increasing
from 27.3% in 2020-21 to 29.6% in
2021-22 and 30.1% in 2022-23,
highlighting its growing role in
national economic output.
The Union Budget 2025-26 includes
measures to strengthen the MSME sector,
such as enhanced credit access, support for
first-time entrepreneurs, and promotion of
labour-intensive industries.
The classification criteria for MSMEs have
been revised, increasing investment and
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
142
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
turnover limits by 2.5 times and 2 times,
respectively. This is expected to boost
efficiency, technological adoption, and
employment generation.
Challenges Highlighted in recent report
Although, between 2020 and 2024, MSME
access to formal credit improved (micro
and small enterprises from 14% to 20%,
medium enterprises from 4% to 9%),
however, 81% of MSME credit demand
remains unmet, with an estimated ₹80 lakh
crore gap.
Credit Guarantee Fund (CGTMSE) has
expanded but still faces limitations.
Many MSME workers lack formal
vocational or technical training, hindering
productivity and scalability.
A significant portion of MSMEs
also underinvests in research and
development, quality improvement, and
innovation.
MSMEs face challenges in adopting modern
technologies due to unreliable electricity,
weak internet connectivity, and high
implementation costs.
State government schemes supporting
technological advancements are
often inaccessible due to low awareness.
Despite several MSME support policies,
their effectiveness is limited by low
awareness and poor implementation.
Suggestions and Way Forward
India’s MSMEs can become a key driver of
sustainable economic growth by focusing on
targeted interventions, building stronger
institutional collaborations and enhancing
global competitiveness.
The report calls for enhanced support for
MSMEs through digital marketing training,
partnerships with logistics providers and
creating platforms for direct market
linkages, especially in regions with high
growth potential, such as India’s
northeastern and eastern belts.
It calls for a robust, adaptive and cluster-
based policy framework at the state level
that fosters innovation, enhances
competitiveness and enables MSMEs to
drive inclusive economic transformation.
Report for Framework on Repairability Index (RI) in
Mobile and Electronic Sector
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
The Committee constituted for the
Framework on Repairability Index (RI) in
Mobile and Electronic Sector has submitted
its Report to the Department of Consumer
Affairs (DoCA), Government of India.
Background
India ranks as the third-largest producer of
electronic waste globally, following China
and the United States.
o The surge in electronic
consumption, coupled with limited
repair options, has contributed
significantly to this issue.
Between 2022 and 2025, consumer
complaints related to mobile phones and
tablets increased from 19,057 to
22,864, underscoring the need for improved
repair accessibility and transparency in
post-sale services.
In September 2024, the DoCA established a
committee under the chairmanship
of Bharat Khera to develop a framework for
the Repairability Index.
Key Recommendations of the Committee
142
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
turnover limits by 2.5 times and 2 times,
respectively. This is expected to boost
efficiency, technological adoption, and
employment generation.
Challenges Highlighted in recent report
Although, between 2020 and 2024, MSME
access to formal credit improved (micro
and small enterprises from 14% to 20%,
medium enterprises from 4% to 9%),
however, 81% of MSME credit demand
remains unmet, with an estimated ₹80 lakh
crore gap.
Credit Guarantee Fund (CGTMSE) has
expanded but still faces limitations.
Many MSME workers lack formal
vocational or technical training, hindering
productivity and scalability.
A significant portion of MSMEs
also underinvests in research and
development, quality improvement, and
innovation.
MSMEs face challenges in adopting modern
technologies due to unreliable electricity,
weak internet connectivity, and high
implementation costs.
State government schemes supporting
technological advancements are
often inaccessible due to low awareness.
Despite several MSME support policies,
their effectiveness is limited by low
awareness and poor implementation.
Suggestions and Way Forward
India’s MSMEs can become a key driver of
sustainable economic growth by focusing on
targeted interventions, building stronger
institutional collaborations and enhancing
global competitiveness.
The report calls for enhanced support for
MSMEs through digital marketing training,
partnerships with logistics providers and
creating platforms for direct market
linkages, especially in regions with high
growth potential, such as India’s
northeastern and eastern belts.
It calls for a robust, adaptive and cluster-
based policy framework at the state level
that fosters innovation, enhances
competitiveness and enables MSMEs to
drive inclusive economic transformation.
Report for Framework on Repairability Index (RI) in
Mobile and Electronic Sector
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
The Committee constituted for the
Framework on Repairability Index (RI) in
Mobile and Electronic Sector has submitted
its Report to the Department of Consumer
Affairs (DoCA), Government of India.
Background
India ranks as the third-largest producer of
electronic waste globally, following China
and the United States.
o The surge in electronic
consumption, coupled with limited
repair options, has contributed
significantly to this issue.
Between 2022 and 2025, consumer
complaints related to mobile phones and
tablets increased from 19,057 to
22,864, underscoring the need for improved
repair accessibility and transparency in
post-sale services.
In September 2024, the DoCA established a
committee under the chairmanship
of Bharat Khera to develop a framework for
the Repairability Index.
Key Recommendations of the Committee
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
143
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Self-Declared Repairability Scores: Original
Equipment Manufacturers (OEMs) should
self-assess and declare the repairability of
their products based on standardized
criteria, minimizing additional compliance
burdens.
Display of RI: The Repairability Index
should be prominently displayed at points
of sale, on e-commerce platforms, and via
QR codes on product packaging to enable
consumers to make informed choices.
Scoring Parameters: Repairability is
assessed on six core parameters.
Priority Components: The framework
should focus on components prone to
frequent failures and critical to device
functionality, including batteries, display
assemblies, microphones, and speakers.
Stakeholder Engagement: The committee
engaged with a wide array of stakeholders,
including manufacturers, industry
associations, consumer advocacy groups,
and government representatives, to ensure
a comprehensive and inclusive framework.
Significance of the Repairability Index
Reduction in Electronic Waste: Enhancing
repair options will extend product lifespans,
thereby reducing the volume of e-waste
generated.
Circular Economy: The RI supports the
principles of a circular economy by
encouraging the reuse and repair of
products, reducing the need for new
resource extraction.
Local Repair Industries: Improved access to
repair information and parts will bolster
local repair businesses, contributing to
economic growth and job creation.
Global Scenario in Right to Repair
United Kingdom: Right to Repair
Regulations 2021, covers home appliances
(e.g., fridges, washers, TVs).
o Manufacturers must supply spare
parts for up to 10 years.
France: Introduced a mandatory
Repairability Index on five categories:
smartphones, laptops, washing machines,
TVs, and lawnmowers.
Right to Repair Portal India
– Launched in 2022, the Right to Repair Portal
serves as a centralized platform providing
consumers with information on repair services
across four sectors:
1. Farming Equipment
2. Mobiles and Electronics
3. Consumer Durables
4. Automobile Equipment
Challenges
Technical Complexity: Modern electronic
devices often feature compact and intricate
designs, making repairs more challenging
and necessitating specialized tools.
Manufacturer Resistance: Some OEMs
express concerns over intellectual property
rights and the potential impact on product
security and performance.
Concluding remarks
The introduction of the Repairability Index
in India’s mobile and electronics sector
marks a significant step towards
sustainable consumption and consumer
empowerment.
By promoting transparency and facilitating
repairs, the initiative has the potential to
reduce electronic waste, stimulate local
143
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Self-Declared Repairability Scores: Original
Equipment Manufacturers (OEMs) should
self-assess and declare the repairability of
their products based on standardized
criteria, minimizing additional compliance
burdens.
Display of RI: The Repairability Index
should be prominently displayed at points
of sale, on e-commerce platforms, and via
QR codes on product packaging to enable
consumers to make informed choices.
Scoring Parameters: Repairability is
assessed on six core parameters.
Priority Components: The framework
should focus on components prone to
frequent failures and critical to device
functionality, including batteries, display
assemblies, microphones, and speakers.
Stakeholder Engagement: The committee
engaged with a wide array of stakeholders,
including manufacturers, industry
associations, consumer advocacy groups,
and government representatives, to ensure
a comprehensive and inclusive framework.
Significance of the Repairability Index
Reduction in Electronic Waste: Enhancing
repair options will extend product lifespans,
thereby reducing the volume of e-waste
generated.
Circular Economy: The RI supports the
principles of a circular economy by
encouraging the reuse and repair of
products, reducing the need for new
resource extraction.
Local Repair Industries: Improved access to
repair information and parts will bolster
local repair businesses, contributing to
economic growth and job creation.
Global Scenario in Right to Repair
United Kingdom: Right to Repair
Regulations 2021, covers home appliances
(e.g., fridges, washers, TVs).
o Manufacturers must supply spare
parts for up to 10 years.
France: Introduced a mandatory
Repairability Index on five categories:
smartphones, laptops, washing machines,
TVs, and lawnmowers.
Right to Repair Portal India
– Launched in 2022, the Right to Repair Portal
serves as a centralized platform providing
consumers with information on repair services
across four sectors:
1. Farming Equipment
2. Mobiles and Electronics
3. Consumer Durables
4. Automobile Equipment
Challenges
Technical Complexity: Modern electronic
devices often feature compact and intricate
designs, making repairs more challenging
and necessitating specialized tools.
Manufacturer Resistance: Some OEMs
express concerns over intellectual property
rights and the potential impact on product
security and performance.
Concluding remarks
The introduction of the Repairability Index
in India’s mobile and electronics sector
marks a significant step towards
sustainable consumption and consumer
empowerment.
By promoting transparency and facilitating
repairs, the initiative has the potential to
reduce electronic waste, stimulate local
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
144
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
economies, and align with global
sustainability goals.
Revised SHAKTI (Scheme for Harnessing and
Allocating Koyala Transparently in India) Policy for
Coal Allocation
Syllabus: GS3/Economy
Context
The Cabinet Committee on Economic Affairs
(CCEA) has accorded its approval for
the Revised SHAKTI (Scheme for Harnessing
and Allocating Koyala Transparently in
India) Policy for Coal Allocation to Power
Sector.
SHAKTI Policy
It was introduced in 2017 and there was a
paradigm shift of the coal allocation
mechanism from a nomination-based
regime to a more transparent way of
allocation of coal linkages through auction /
tariff-based bidding.
The current revision with innovative
features will further enhance the scope and
impact of the SHAKTI policy and support
the power sector through:
o Greater flexibility
o Wider eligibility and
o Better accessibility to coal.
It will ensure coal linkage to all power
producers leading to generation of more
power, cheaper tariffs and an overall
positive impact on the economy.
Coal Sector of India
Production: India surpassed one billion
tonnes of coal production in FY 2024-25,
with a 4.99% growth in output compared to
the previous year.
o India is the second largest coal
producing country globally.
Import: Imports decreased by 8.4%, leading
to substantial foreign exchange savings and
a reduction in import dependency.
Importance in Energy Mix: With the fifth-
largest coal reserves and as the second-
largest consumer, coal remains
crucial, contributing 55% to the national
energy mix and fuelling over 74% of total
power generation.
Coal Fields: The major coal fields in India
are located in the eastern states of
Jharkhand, Odisha, and West Bengal, as well
as in central states like Chhattisgarh and
Madhya Pradesh.
Key contributions:
Railways & revenue: Coal stands as the
single largest contributor to railway freight,
with an average share of nearly 49% of total
freight income.
Government earnings: The coal sector
contributes over Rs. 70,000 Crore annually
to the central and state governments
through royalties, GST, and other levies.
Employment: The sector provides jobs to
over 239,000 workers in Coal India Ltd and
thousands more in contractual and
transport roles.
Challenges Faced by the Coal Sector of India
Environmental Impact: The coal sector faces
significant environmental challenges,
including air pollution, greenhouse gas
emissions, and the impact of coal mining on
local ecosystems and communities.
Dependence on Coal Imports: Despite being
the world’s 5th largest coal reserve holder,
India still imports significant quantities of
coal (especially coking coal for steel and
high-GCV thermal coal).
o Import dependency increases
foreign exchange outflow and
vulnerability to global price
volatility.
Slow Environmental Clearances & Land
Acquisition: Delays in forest/environmental
clearances and land acquisition hinder
timely development of coal blocks.
Underutilization of Mining Capacity: Coal
India and other miners often operate below
144
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
economies, and align with global
sustainability goals.
Revised SHAKTI (Scheme for Harnessing and
Allocating Koyala Transparently in India) Policy for
Coal Allocation
Syllabus: GS3/Economy
Context
The Cabinet Committee on Economic Affairs
(CCEA) has accorded its approval for
the Revised SHAKTI (Scheme for Harnessing
and Allocating Koyala Transparently in
India) Policy for Coal Allocation to Power
Sector.
SHAKTI Policy
It was introduced in 2017 and there was a
paradigm shift of the coal allocation
mechanism from a nomination-based
regime to a more transparent way of
allocation of coal linkages through auction /
tariff-based bidding.
The current revision with innovative
features will further enhance the scope and
impact of the SHAKTI policy and support
the power sector through:
o Greater flexibility
o Wider eligibility and
o Better accessibility to coal.
It will ensure coal linkage to all power
producers leading to generation of more
power, cheaper tariffs and an overall
positive impact on the economy.
Coal Sector of India
Production: India surpassed one billion
tonnes of coal production in FY 2024-25,
with a 4.99% growth in output compared to
the previous year.
o India is the second largest coal
producing country globally.
Import: Imports decreased by 8.4%, leading
to substantial foreign exchange savings and
a reduction in import dependency.
Importance in Energy Mix: With the fifth-
largest coal reserves and as the second-
largest consumer, coal remains
crucial, contributing 55% to the national
energy mix and fuelling over 74% of total
power generation.
Coal Fields: The major coal fields in India
are located in the eastern states of
Jharkhand, Odisha, and West Bengal, as well
as in central states like Chhattisgarh and
Madhya Pradesh.
Key contributions:
Railways & revenue: Coal stands as the
single largest contributor to railway freight,
with an average share of nearly 49% of total
freight income.
Government earnings: The coal sector
contributes over Rs. 70,000 Crore annually
to the central and state governments
through royalties, GST, and other levies.
Employment: The sector provides jobs to
over 239,000 workers in Coal India Ltd and
thousands more in contractual and
transport roles.
Challenges Faced by the Coal Sector of India
Environmental Impact: The coal sector faces
significant environmental challenges,
including air pollution, greenhouse gas
emissions, and the impact of coal mining on
local ecosystems and communities.
Dependence on Coal Imports: Despite being
the world’s 5th largest coal reserve holder,
India still imports significant quantities of
coal (especially coking coal for steel and
high-GCV thermal coal).
o Import dependency increases
foreign exchange outflow and
vulnerability to global price
volatility.
Slow Environmental Clearances & Land
Acquisition: Delays in forest/environmental
clearances and land acquisition hinder
timely development of coal blocks.
Underutilization of Mining Capacity: Coal
India and other miners often operate below
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
145
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
capacity due to demand uncertainties,
regulatory hurdles, and infrastructure
delays.
India’s Green Commitments: Coal is the most
carbon-intensive fossil fuel. India’s
commitment to global climate goals (e.g.,
Paris Agreement, Net Zero by 2070) puts
pressure to reduce coal dependency.
Low Private Sector Participation: Despite
reforms, coal mining remains dominated by
PSUs (Coal India Ltd. and SCCL), limiting
competition and innovation.
Government Initiatives for Coal Sector in India
Commercial Coal Mining: Launched in 2020,
allowing private companies to mine coal for
commercial sale without any end-use
restrictions.
o Encourages competition, improves
supply efficiency, and aims to
reduce import dependency.
Single Window Clearance Portal: Launched
in 2021 to provide a centralized platform
for obtaining all approvals and clearances
(e.g., land, forest, environmental) for coal
mining projects.
o Aims to streamline project
execution and reduce delays.
Auction of Coal Blocks for Non-Regulated
Sectors: Coal blocks are regularly auctioned
for use in sectors like steel, cement, and
aluminum, promoting diversified usage.
Coal Gasification and Liquefaction
Promotion: The government aims to gasify
100 million tonnes of coal by 2030.
o Promotes cleaner usage of coal and
aligns with India’s energy transition
goals.
Technology & Automation Push: Use of
drone surveillance, GPS tracking, online coal
sale portals, and automated loading systems
in mines.
o Enhances transparency, safety, and
production tracking.
Coal Logistics Reforms: Development of coal
corridors, dedicated freight corridors, and
first-mile connectivity projects to improve
coal evacuation.
Coal Allocation to Small
Consumers: Through e-auctions, even small
and medium enterprises can now access
coal at market-determined prices.
Conclusion
While coal will continue to play a vital role
in India’s energy landscape in the near to
mid-term, a balanced and strategic
transition towards cleaner energy sources
is essential.
The Ministry of Coal is strengthening
domestic production to enhance energy
security and advance Viksit Bharat,
ensuring a self-reliant, sustainable energy
framework for long-term growth.
CCI Notifies New Definitions to Curb Predatory
Pricing
Syllabus :GS 3/Economy
In News
The Competition Commission of India
(CCI) has notified the “Determination of Cost
of Production Regulations, 2025”, replacing
its 2009 framework.
About
This regulatory shift aims to empower the
watchdog to better scrutinize predatory
pricing and deep discounting, especially in
the e-commerce and quick commerce
sectors.
Background: Predatory Pricing and Competition Law
Predatory pricing is defined under
the Competition Act, 2002 as “the sale of
goods or provision of services, at a price
below the cost of production with a view to
reduce competition or eliminate
competitors.”
Such practices are deemed abuse of
dominant position under Section 4 of the
Act.
145
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
capacity due to demand uncertainties,
regulatory hurdles, and infrastructure
delays.
India’s Green Commitments: Coal is the most
carbon-intensive fossil fuel. India’s
commitment to global climate goals (e.g.,
Paris Agreement, Net Zero by 2070) puts
pressure to reduce coal dependency.
Low Private Sector Participation: Despite
reforms, coal mining remains dominated by
PSUs (Coal India Ltd. and SCCL), limiting
competition and innovation.
Government Initiatives for Coal Sector in India
Commercial Coal Mining: Launched in 2020,
allowing private companies to mine coal for
commercial sale without any end-use
restrictions.
o Encourages competition, improves
supply efficiency, and aims to
reduce import dependency.
Single Window Clearance Portal: Launched
in 2021 to provide a centralized platform
for obtaining all approvals and clearances
(e.g., land, forest, environmental) for coal
mining projects.
o Aims to streamline project
execution and reduce delays.
Auction of Coal Blocks for Non-Regulated
Sectors: Coal blocks are regularly auctioned
for use in sectors like steel, cement, and
aluminum, promoting diversified usage.
Coal Gasification and Liquefaction
Promotion: The government aims to gasify
100 million tonnes of coal by 2030.
o Promotes cleaner usage of coal and
aligns with India’s energy transition
goals.
Technology & Automation Push: Use of
drone surveillance, GPS tracking, online coal
sale portals, and automated loading systems
in mines.
o Enhances transparency, safety, and
production tracking.
Coal Logistics Reforms: Development of coal
corridors, dedicated freight corridors, and
first-mile connectivity projects to improve
coal evacuation.
Coal Allocation to Small
Consumers: Through e-auctions, even small
and medium enterprises can now access
coal at market-determined prices.
Conclusion
While coal will continue to play a vital role
in India’s energy landscape in the near to
mid-term, a balanced and strategic
transition towards cleaner energy sources
is essential.
The Ministry of Coal is strengthening
domestic production to enhance energy
security and advance Viksit Bharat,
ensuring a self-reliant, sustainable energy
framework for long-term growth.
CCI Notifies New Definitions to Curb Predatory
Pricing
Syllabus :GS 3/Economy
In News
The Competition Commission of India
(CCI) has notified the “Determination of Cost
of Production Regulations, 2025”, replacing
its 2009 framework.
About
This regulatory shift aims to empower the
watchdog to better scrutinize predatory
pricing and deep discounting, especially in
the e-commerce and quick commerce
sectors.
Background: Predatory Pricing and Competition Law
Predatory pricing is defined under
the Competition Act, 2002 as “the sale of
goods or provision of services, at a price
below the cost of production with a view to
reduce competition or eliminate
competitors.”
Such practices are deemed abuse of
dominant position under Section 4 of the
Act.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
146
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
The earlier Cost Regulations (2009) were
increasingly seen as outdated amid the rise
of digital markets, which involve complex
pricing structures, cross-subsidies, and non-
monetary value exchanges.
Key Features of the 2025 Regulations
Flexible, Sector-Agnostic Framework: Moves
away from a one-size-fits-all model.
o Allows case-by-case assessment,
adapting to sector-specific
dynamics, including platform-based
digital businesses.
Focus on Measurable Production
Costs: Reaffirms that internal production
costs form the benchmark, not market value
(which can be influenced by consumer
perceptions, brand value, or subsidies).
Rejects stakeholder proposals to use market
value due to its subjectivity and external
dependencies.
Modernization & Global Alignment: Aligns
with international competition law
standards and best practices. Incorporates
insights from modern economic theories
and judicial interpretations relevant to
platform economies and dynamic pricing.
Significance
Legal Clarity: Provides a defined cost-
benchmark framework grounded in
economic rationale.
Digital Economy Readiness: Accounts for
cross-subsidisation, high fixed costs, and
non-traditional revenue models prevalent
in digital platforms.
Consumer and MSME Protection: Prevents
dominant firms from using price wars to
wipe out smaller players.
Ease of Regulation: Enhances CCI’s ability to
investigate, quantify, and adjudicate anti-
competitive pricing with consistency.
Supreme Court Flags Bitcoin Trading as a Way for
Hawala
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
The Supreme Court expressed concern over
the unregulated nature of Bitcoin trading in
India, likening it to a “refined way of Hawala
business.”
What is Bitcoin?
Bitcoin is a type of digital or virtual
currency that uses cryptography for
security, making it difficult to counterfeit or
double-spend.
It operates on decentralized networks based
on blockchain technology—a distributed
ledger enforced by a network of computers.
Cryptocurrencies are typically not
controlled by any central authority, which
makes them theoretically immune to
government interference or manipulation.
Blockchain technology
– Blockchain technology is a decentralized,
distributed ledger system that records transactions
across many computers in a way that ensures
security and transparency.
– Blockchain networks rely on consensus
algorithms to validate transactions and maintain
network integrity.
1. These mechanisms ensure that only legitimate
transactions are added to the chain.
Concerns of Bitcoin
Lack of Regulation: Despite repeated judicial
nudges, the government has not issued a
clear legal framework for virtual currency.
Potential for Misuse: Due to the absence of
KYC/AML enforcement and its cross-border
nature, cryptocurrency can be misused for
illicit activities, including a digital form of
Hawala.
Threat to Financial Integrity: The
unregulated market could jeopardize India’s
efforts to curb black money and maintain
capital controls.
India’s Cryptocurrency Landscape
At present, India does not have any Law or
provision which specifically deals with
146
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
The earlier Cost Regulations (2009) were
increasingly seen as outdated amid the rise
of digital markets, which involve complex
pricing structures, cross-subsidies, and non-
monetary value exchanges.
Key Features of the 2025 Regulations
Flexible, Sector-Agnostic Framework: Moves
away from a one-size-fits-all model.
o Allows case-by-case assessment,
adapting to sector-specific
dynamics, including platform-based
digital businesses.
Focus on Measurable Production
Costs: Reaffirms that internal production
costs form the benchmark, not market value
(which can be influenced by consumer
perceptions, brand value, or subsidies).
Rejects stakeholder proposals to use market
value due to its subjectivity and external
dependencies.
Modernization & Global Alignment: Aligns
with international competition law
standards and best practices. Incorporates
insights from modern economic theories
and judicial interpretations relevant to
platform economies and dynamic pricing.
Significance
Legal Clarity: Provides a defined cost-
benchmark framework grounded in
economic rationale.
Digital Economy Readiness: Accounts for
cross-subsidisation, high fixed costs, and
non-traditional revenue models prevalent
in digital platforms.
Consumer and MSME Protection: Prevents
dominant firms from using price wars to
wipe out smaller players.
Ease of Regulation: Enhances CCI’s ability to
investigate, quantify, and adjudicate anti-
competitive pricing with consistency.
Supreme Court Flags Bitcoin Trading as a Way for
Hawala
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
The Supreme Court expressed concern over
the unregulated nature of Bitcoin trading in
India, likening it to a “refined way of Hawala
business.”
What is Bitcoin?
Bitcoin is a type of digital or virtual
currency that uses cryptography for
security, making it difficult to counterfeit or
double-spend.
It operates on decentralized networks based
on blockchain technology—a distributed
ledger enforced by a network of computers.
Cryptocurrencies are typically not
controlled by any central authority, which
makes them theoretically immune to
government interference or manipulation.
Blockchain technology
– Blockchain technology is a decentralized,
distributed ledger system that records transactions
across many computers in a way that ensures
security and transparency.
– Blockchain networks rely on consensus
algorithms to validate transactions and maintain
network integrity.
1. These mechanisms ensure that only legitimate
transactions are added to the chain.
Concerns of Bitcoin
Lack of Regulation: Despite repeated judicial
nudges, the government has not issued a
clear legal framework for virtual currency.
Potential for Misuse: Due to the absence of
KYC/AML enforcement and its cross-border
nature, cryptocurrency can be misused for
illicit activities, including a digital form of
Hawala.
Threat to Financial Integrity: The
unregulated market could jeopardize India’s
efforts to curb black money and maintain
capital controls.
India’s Cryptocurrency Landscape
At present, India does not have any Law or
provision which specifically deals with
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
147
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Cryptocurrency. India has not officially
banned or allowed cryptocurrency trading.
Regulatory Uncertainty: In 2018, the Central
Board of Direct Taxes proposed a ban on
cryptocurrencies, and the Reserve Bank of
India (RBI) restricted banks from
facilitating cryptocurrency transactions
labeling it as a “macro-economic risk.”
o This decision was overturned by the
Supreme Court in 2020.
Taxation Policies: The Indian government
imposed a 30% tax on income from
transfers of virtual digital assets
in 2022, along with a 1% tax deducted at
source (TDS) on each transaction.
o These stringent measures have
dampened domestic enthusiasm for
cryptocurrency trading.
What is Hawala?
Hawala is an informal method of
transferring money without any physical
movement of cash.
It works outside traditional banking
channels and is often used for money
laundering, terror financing, and tax
evasion.
How Bitcoin can be in Hawala?
Anonymity: Traditional Hawala relies on
trust and secrecy.
o Bitcoin allows pseudonymous
transactions that are hard to trace,
mimicking Hawala’s secrecy.
Cross-Border Transfers: In traditional
Hawala, money doesn’t physically cross
borders; balances are settled informally.
o With Bitcoin, a person in one
country can send Bitcoin to a
counterpart in another country, who
can convert it into local currency
and deliver it to the intended
recipient—mirroring the Hawala
model.
Quick Transfers: Unlike traditional
remittances that take days and charge fees,
Bitcoin transactions can be near-
instantaneous and low-cost, making it
attractive for illicit transfers.
Way Ahead
Comprehensive Legislation: India must
enact a clear legal framework defining and
regulating cryptocurrencies, exchanges, and
wallets.
Strengthen Enforcement: Enhance
capabilities of financial intelligence units to
monitor crypto transactions.
International Cooperation: Work with FATF
and G20 to establish global norms on crypto
governance.
US & China have Agreed to Temporarily Slash Tariffs
Syllabus: GS3/Economy/Trade
Context
The U.S. and China agreed to suspend most
tariffs on each other’s goods.
Background
Why were Tariffs Levied?
Trade Imbalance: The U.S. Trade
Representative pointed to a $1.2 trillion
trade deficit with the rest of the world as
justification for tariffs.
o The Trump administration viewed
this as the U.S. being “ripped off” by
trading partners who protected and
subsidized their own industries
while benefiting from open U.S.
markets.
147
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Cryptocurrency. India has not officially
banned or allowed cryptocurrency trading.
Regulatory Uncertainty: In 2018, the Central
Board of Direct Taxes proposed a ban on
cryptocurrencies, and the Reserve Bank of
India (RBI) restricted banks from
facilitating cryptocurrency transactions
labeling it as a “macro-economic risk.”
o This decision was overturned by the
Supreme Court in 2020.
Taxation Policies: The Indian government
imposed a 30% tax on income from
transfers of virtual digital assets
in 2022, along with a 1% tax deducted at
source (TDS) on each transaction.
o These stringent measures have
dampened domestic enthusiasm for
cryptocurrency trading.
What is Hawala?
Hawala is an informal method of
transferring money without any physical
movement of cash.
It works outside traditional banking
channels and is often used for money
laundering, terror financing, and tax
evasion.
How Bitcoin can be in Hawala?
Anonymity: Traditional Hawala relies on
trust and secrecy.
o Bitcoin allows pseudonymous
transactions that are hard to trace,
mimicking Hawala’s secrecy.
Cross-Border Transfers: In traditional
Hawala, money doesn’t physically cross
borders; balances are settled informally.
o With Bitcoin, a person in one
country can send Bitcoin to a
counterpart in another country, who
can convert it into local currency
and deliver it to the intended
recipient—mirroring the Hawala
model.
Quick Transfers: Unlike traditional
remittances that take days and charge fees,
Bitcoin transactions can be near-
instantaneous and low-cost, making it
attractive for illicit transfers.
Way Ahead
Comprehensive Legislation: India must
enact a clear legal framework defining and
regulating cryptocurrencies, exchanges, and
wallets.
Strengthen Enforcement: Enhance
capabilities of financial intelligence units to
monitor crypto transactions.
International Cooperation: Work with FATF
and G20 to establish global norms on crypto
governance.
US & China have Agreed to Temporarily Slash Tariffs
Syllabus: GS3/Economy/Trade
Context
The U.S. and China agreed to suspend most
tariffs on each other’s goods.
Background
Why were Tariffs Levied?
Trade Imbalance: The U.S. Trade
Representative pointed to a $1.2 trillion
trade deficit with the rest of the world as
justification for tariffs.
o The Trump administration viewed
this as the U.S. being “ripped off” by
trading partners who protected and
subsidized their own industries
while benefiting from open U.S.
markets.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
148
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Strategic Protectionism: The administration
believed that talking had not helped change
global trade behavior, so high tariffs were
seen as a tool to force other countries to
open their markets.
Revised Tariffs After Geneva Talks
Both have reached an agreement on a 90-
day pause and substantially move down the
tariff levels.
The deal means “reciprocal” tariffs between
both countries will be cut from 125% to
10%.
The U.S.′ 20% duties on Chinese imports
relating to fentanyl will remain in place,
meaning total tariffs on China stand at 30%.
Why Was There a Truce?
China’s Retaliation: Unlike other countries,
China responded with its own counter-
tariffs and non-tariff barriers escalating the
trade conflict.
Economic Concerns in the U.S.: At peak
levels (U.S.: 145%, China: 125%), tariffs
became prohibitively expensive for
consumers and businesses.
o Example: A $100 Chinese product
became $245 in the U.S.
o The U.S. economy began contracting
in Q1 2025 — even before the full
impact of the tariffs had hit.
o Economists predicted a recession
and possibly stagflation (a rare
combo of economic stagnation and
inflation).
Consumer Pressure: U.S. consumers faced
rising prices and shrinking product
availability, especially at major retailers like
Walmart.
o Public and political pressure
mounted as economic conditions
worsened.
China’s Economic Resilience: While China’s
exports to the U.S. dropped 21%, its overall
exports rose 8%, and GDP grew 5.4% in the
same quarter.
o China’s global trade surplus
increased, indicating that it had
managed to diversify and offset the
U.S. losses.
Way Ahead
The current agreement is a truce, not a full
trade deal.
Market reactions have been positive —
stocks and the dollar rose, while gold and
bonds fell, indicating reduced risk
perception.
However, the talks that follow will be
complex, and no guarantees exist for a
comprehensive trade deal.
India’s Rising E-Waste and the Need to Recast Its
Management
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy; Environment
Context
India, now among the top global generators
of electronic waste (e-waste), faces a critical
challenge in managing the growing volume
of obsolete electronic devices.
E-Waste in India
E-waste refers to the discarded electronic
and electrical devices that have reached
the end of their lifespan or become obsolete
due to rapid technological changes,
including computers, phones, TVs, and
other equipment.
India ranks as the third-largest producer of
electronic waste globally, following China
and the United States.
Growth: India’s e-waste increased
by 151.03% over six years, from 7.08 lakh
metric tonnes in 2017-18 to 17.78 lakh
metric tonnes in 2023-24.
Impact of Improper E-Waste Management
Environmental Degradation:
o Water Pollution: Toxic discharge
from cyanide and sulphuric acid
affects water bodies.
148
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Strategic Protectionism: The administration
believed that talking had not helped change
global trade behavior, so high tariffs were
seen as a tool to force other countries to
open their markets.
Revised Tariffs After Geneva Talks
Both have reached an agreement on a 90-
day pause and substantially move down the
tariff levels.
The deal means “reciprocal” tariffs between
both countries will be cut from 125% to
10%.
The U.S.′ 20% duties on Chinese imports
relating to fentanyl will remain in place,
meaning total tariffs on China stand at 30%.
Why Was There a Truce?
China’s Retaliation: Unlike other countries,
China responded with its own counter-
tariffs and non-tariff barriers escalating the
trade conflict.
Economic Concerns in the U.S.: At peak
levels (U.S.: 145%, China: 125%), tariffs
became prohibitively expensive for
consumers and businesses.
o Example: A $100 Chinese product
became $245 in the U.S.
o The U.S. economy began contracting
in Q1 2025 — even before the full
impact of the tariffs had hit.
o Economists predicted a recession
and possibly stagflation (a rare
combo of economic stagnation and
inflation).
Consumer Pressure: U.S. consumers faced
rising prices and shrinking product
availability, especially at major retailers like
Walmart.
o Public and political pressure
mounted as economic conditions
worsened.
China’s Economic Resilience: While China’s
exports to the U.S. dropped 21%, its overall
exports rose 8%, and GDP grew 5.4% in the
same quarter.
o China’s global trade surplus
increased, indicating that it had
managed to diversify and offset the
U.S. losses.
Way Ahead
The current agreement is a truce, not a full
trade deal.
Market reactions have been positive —
stocks and the dollar rose, while gold and
bonds fell, indicating reduced risk
perception.
However, the talks that follow will be
complex, and no guarantees exist for a
comprehensive trade deal.
India’s Rising E-Waste and the Need to Recast Its
Management
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy; Environment
Context
India, now among the top global generators
of electronic waste (e-waste), faces a critical
challenge in managing the growing volume
of obsolete electronic devices.
E-Waste in India
E-waste refers to the discarded electronic
and electrical devices that have reached
the end of their lifespan or become obsolete
due to rapid technological changes,
including computers, phones, TVs, and
other equipment.
India ranks as the third-largest producer of
electronic waste globally, following China
and the United States.
Growth: India’s e-waste increased
by 151.03% over six years, from 7.08 lakh
metric tonnes in 2017-18 to 17.78 lakh
metric tonnes in 2023-24.
Impact of Improper E-Waste Management
Environmental Degradation:
o Water Pollution: Toxic discharge
from cyanide and sulphuric acid
affects water bodies.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
149
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Air Pollution: Emissions from lead
fumes and plastic burning are
severe.
o Soil Contamination: Hazardous
substances leach into the soil,
damaging agriculture and
biodiversity.
Social Costs:
o Informal Sector Dominance: 95% of
e-waste is recycled informally,
involving mostly women and
children.
o Health Hazards: Average lifespan in
informal e-waste workers is under
27 years due to toxic exposure.
Economic Loss:
o India is estimated to forfeit
over ₹80,000 crore worth of critical
metals each year, which could have
been recovered and re-used in
manufacturing.
o It is estimated that India loses
at least $20 billion annually in
potential tax revenue due to the
absence of formal accounting and
regulatory oversight in the e-waste
recycling sector.
Challenges in E-Waste Management
Lack of Consumer Incentives: Consumers
lack economic or logistical incentives to
dispose of e-waste responsibly.
Sparse Collection Infrastructure: There is a
dearth of authorised collection centres,
especially in Tier-II and Tier-III cities.
o Informal scrap dealers remain the
primary point of contact for most
consumers.
Unsafe Recycling Practices: Over 90–95% of
e-waste is handled by the informal sector,
which uses crude methods such as acid
leaching, open burning, and manual
dismantling without protective gear.
Grey Channel Imports: Used electronic
goods often enter India under the guise of
“donations” or “refurbished items,” which
eventually become waste.
E-Waste Management Framework
Extended Producer Responsibility
(EPR): Producers, importers, and brand
owners are made responsible for managing
their product’s end-of-life waste.
o An online EPR E-Waste portal has
been developed by Central Pollution
Control Board (CPCB) where
entities such as producers,
manufacturers, recyclers, and
refurbishers of the e-waste are
required to be registered.
The Ministry of Environment, Forest and
Climate Change has comprehensively
revised the E-Waste (Management) Rules,
2016 and notified the E-Waste
(Management) Rules, 2022.
India’s first e-waste clinic was inaugurated
in Bhopal, Madhya Pradesh.
o It’s a facility for segregating,
processing, and disposing of e-waste
from both households and
commercial units.
Basel Convention
– The Basel Convention is a global treaty aimed at
controlling the transboundary movement of
hazardous wastes and their disposal, ensuring that
such wastes are managed in an environmentally
sound manner.
– It was adopted in 1989 and entered into force
in 1992.
– India is a party to the Basel Convention
Concluding remarks
India’s e-waste challenge reflects a broader
conflict between technological
advancement and environmental
sustainability.
As the country climbs the digital ladder, it
must not let toxic waste undermine its
economic and ecological foundation.
The goal should not merely be to manage e-
waste, but to extract value, protect health,
and foster green economic growth—all of
149
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Air Pollution: Emissions from lead
fumes and plastic burning are
severe.
o Soil Contamination: Hazardous
substances leach into the soil,
damaging agriculture and
biodiversity.
Social Costs:
o Informal Sector Dominance: 95% of
e-waste is recycled informally,
involving mostly women and
children.
o Health Hazards: Average lifespan in
informal e-waste workers is under
27 years due to toxic exposure.
Economic Loss:
o India is estimated to forfeit
over ₹80,000 crore worth of critical
metals each year, which could have
been recovered and re-used in
manufacturing.
o It is estimated that India loses
at least $20 billion annually in
potential tax revenue due to the
absence of formal accounting and
regulatory oversight in the e-waste
recycling sector.
Challenges in E-Waste Management
Lack of Consumer Incentives: Consumers
lack economic or logistical incentives to
dispose of e-waste responsibly.
Sparse Collection Infrastructure: There is a
dearth of authorised collection centres,
especially in Tier-II and Tier-III cities.
o Informal scrap dealers remain the
primary point of contact for most
consumers.
Unsafe Recycling Practices: Over 90–95% of
e-waste is handled by the informal sector,
which uses crude methods such as acid
leaching, open burning, and manual
dismantling without protective gear.
Grey Channel Imports: Used electronic
goods often enter India under the guise of
“donations” or “refurbished items,” which
eventually become waste.
E-Waste Management Framework
Extended Producer Responsibility
(EPR): Producers, importers, and brand
owners are made responsible for managing
their product’s end-of-life waste.
o An online EPR E-Waste portal has
been developed by Central Pollution
Control Board (CPCB) where
entities such as producers,
manufacturers, recyclers, and
refurbishers of the e-waste are
required to be registered.
The Ministry of Environment, Forest and
Climate Change has comprehensively
revised the E-Waste (Management) Rules,
2016 and notified the E-Waste
(Management) Rules, 2022.
India’s first e-waste clinic was inaugurated
in Bhopal, Madhya Pradesh.
o It’s a facility for segregating,
processing, and disposing of e-waste
from both households and
commercial units.
Basel Convention
– The Basel Convention is a global treaty aimed at
controlling the transboundary movement of
hazardous wastes and their disposal, ensuring that
such wastes are managed in an environmentally
sound manner.
– It was adopted in 1989 and entered into force
in 1992.
– India is a party to the Basel Convention
Concluding remarks
India’s e-waste challenge reflects a broader
conflict between technological
advancement and environmental
sustainability.
As the country climbs the digital ladder, it
must not let toxic waste undermine its
economic and ecological foundation.
The goal should not merely be to manage e-
waste, but to extract value, protect health,
and foster green economic growth—all of
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
150
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
which are essential to India’s journey
toward Viksit Bharat.
India’s Major Ports Achieve Historic Milestones in FY
2024-25
Syllabus: GS3/Economy
Context
In FY 2024-25, Major Ports registered an
impressive annual growth rate of 4.3% in
cargo handling, increasing from 819 million
tonnes in FY 2023-24 to ~855 million
tonnes in FY 2024-25.
About
Average Turnaround Time (TRT) improved
by 48%, reducing from 96 hours in FY 2014-
15 to 49.5 hours in FY 2024-25.
Major Ports’ financial performance has been
equally impressive, with total income more
than doubling over the past decade,
registering a 7.5% CAGR over 10 years.
Operational efficiency also improved
significantly, with the operating ratio
declining from 64.7% in FY 2014-15 to
42.3% in FY 2024-25.
Private sector participation has been
instrumental in this transformation, with
investments in PPP projects at Major Ports
increasing threefold.
India’s Port Sector
India has major ports (central government
controlled) and minor ports (state
government controlled).
o 13 Major Ports
o 217 Non-major
(Minor/Intermediate) Ports
The ports are managed by the Ministry of
Ports, Shipping and Waterways.
Strategic Position: Located along the world’s
busiest shipping routes, India is a key
trading hub and a rising global power.
India’s Maritime Sector Overview: Handles
95% of India’s trade by volume and 70% by
value, with port infrastructure critical to the
economy.
Port Ranking Improvement: India’s port
ranking improved from 54th in 2014 to 38th
in 2023, with nine Indian ports now in the
top 100 globally.
Growth in Cargo-handling: Between 2014-
15 and 2023-24, major ports increased their
annual cargo-handling capacity by 87.01%.
Maritime Sector’s Importance: India is
the 16th-largest maritime nation, occupies a
key position in global shipping, with major
trade routes passing through its waters.
Future Goals: India has outlined
investments of US$ 82 billion in port
infrastructure projects by 2035 to bolster
the maritime sector.
o India plans to establish a new
shipping company to expand its fleet
by at least 1,000 ships within a
decade.
Challenges
Infrastructure Gaps: Inadequate port
infrastructure and outdated facilities at
some ports, limiting capacity and efficiency.
Congestion: High traffic volumes at major
ports leading to delays, increased
turnaround times, and reduced
productivity.
Environmental Concerns: Pollution and
sustainability issues, including emissions
from ships and port operations.
Logistics Bottlenecks: Inefficient transport
connectivity between ports, roads, and
railways, impacting smooth cargo
movement.
Global Competition: Rising competition
from other global maritime hubs,
necessitating continuous investment and
modernization.
Port Security: Ports are vulnerable to
smuggling, piracy, and terrorism. Security
infrastructure is often inadequate.
150
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
which are essential to India’s journey
toward Viksit Bharat.
India’s Major Ports Achieve Historic Milestones in FY
2024-25
Syllabus: GS3/Economy
Context
In FY 2024-25, Major Ports registered an
impressive annual growth rate of 4.3% in
cargo handling, increasing from 819 million
tonnes in FY 2023-24 to ~855 million
tonnes in FY 2024-25.
About
Average Turnaround Time (TRT) improved
by 48%, reducing from 96 hours in FY 2014-
15 to 49.5 hours in FY 2024-25.
Major Ports’ financial performance has been
equally impressive, with total income more
than doubling over the past decade,
registering a 7.5% CAGR over 10 years.
Operational efficiency also improved
significantly, with the operating ratio
declining from 64.7% in FY 2014-15 to
42.3% in FY 2024-25.
Private sector participation has been
instrumental in this transformation, with
investments in PPP projects at Major Ports
increasing threefold.
India’s Port Sector
India has major ports (central government
controlled) and minor ports (state
government controlled).
o 13 Major Ports
o 217 Non-major
(Minor/Intermediate) Ports
The ports are managed by the Ministry of
Ports, Shipping and Waterways.
Strategic Position: Located along the world’s
busiest shipping routes, India is a key
trading hub and a rising global power.
India’s Maritime Sector Overview: Handles
95% of India’s trade by volume and 70% by
value, with port infrastructure critical to the
economy.
Port Ranking Improvement: India’s port
ranking improved from 54th in 2014 to 38th
in 2023, with nine Indian ports now in the
top 100 globally.
Growth in Cargo-handling: Between 2014-
15 and 2023-24, major ports increased their
annual cargo-handling capacity by 87.01%.
Maritime Sector’s Importance: India is
the 16th-largest maritime nation, occupies a
key position in global shipping, with major
trade routes passing through its waters.
Future Goals: India has outlined
investments of US$ 82 billion in port
infrastructure projects by 2035 to bolster
the maritime sector.
o India plans to establish a new
shipping company to expand its fleet
by at least 1,000 ships within a
decade.
Challenges
Infrastructure Gaps: Inadequate port
infrastructure and outdated facilities at
some ports, limiting capacity and efficiency.
Congestion: High traffic volumes at major
ports leading to delays, increased
turnaround times, and reduced
productivity.
Environmental Concerns: Pollution and
sustainability issues, including emissions
from ships and port operations.
Logistics Bottlenecks: Inefficient transport
connectivity between ports, roads, and
railways, impacting smooth cargo
movement.
Global Competition: Rising competition
from other global maritime hubs,
necessitating continuous investment and
modernization.
Port Security: Ports are vulnerable to
smuggling, piracy, and terrorism. Security
infrastructure is often inadequate.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
151
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Cybersecurity: Increasing digitalization also
raises concerns about cyber threats to port
operations.
Initiatives by Government
Sagarmala Programme: Focuses on
leveraging India’s coastline and of navigable
waterways.
o Supports port infrastructure, coastal
development, and connectivity.
o Financial aid for projects like coastal
berths, rail/road connectivity, fish
harbours, cruise terminals.
Maritime India Vision 2030 (MIV
2030): Aiming for India to become a top 10
shipbuilding nation by 2030 and create a
world-class, efficient, and sustainable
maritime ecosystem.
o Includes 150+ initiatives across ten
key maritime sectors.
Inland Waterways Development: 26 new
national waterways identified by the Inland
Waterways Authority of India (IWAI).
o Provides alternative, sustainable
transport, easing road/rail
congestion.
Green Tug Transition Program (GTTP): Aims
to replace fuel-based harbour tugs with eco-
friendly, sustainable fuel-powered tugs.
o Transition to be completed by 2040
across major ports.
Sagarmanthan Dialogue: An annual
maritime strategic dialogue to position
India as a global center for maritime
conversations.
Maritime Development Fund: ₹25,000 crore
fund for long-term financing to modernize
ports and shipping infrastructure,
encouraging private investment.
Shipbuilding Financial Assistance Policy
(SBFAP 2.0): Modernized to help Indian
shipyards compete with global giants.
Way Ahead
India’s Major Ports are now poised to take
their competitiveness to the next level,
supported by continuous investment in
mechanisation, process reengineering, port
community systems, and multi-modal
logistics integration.
These initiatives have resulted in higher
cargo volumes, reduced vessel wait times,
optimized capacity utilization, and
increased investor confidence.
As India expands its global trade footprint
and modernises logistics infrastructure, FY
2024-25 stands as a testament to the
Ministry’s strategic vision and collaborative
efforts of public authorities and private
stakeholders.
Cabinet Approves Semiconductor Unit in Uttar
Pradesh
Syllabus: GS3/Economy
Context
The Union Cabinet approved the
establishment of a Semiconductor Unit in
Uttar Pradesh.
o It is the sixth project to receive
approval under the India
Semiconductor Mission.
About
The unit approved is a joint venture of HCL
and Foxconn and will attract investment of
Rs 3,700 crore.
o Together they will set up a plant
near Jewar airport in Yamuna
Expressway Industrial Development
Authority (YEIDA).
This plant will manufacture display driver
chips for mobile phones, laptops,
automobiles, PCs, and a myriad of other
devices that have displays.
The plant is designed for 20,000 wafers per
month. The design output capacity is 36
million units per month.
Plants Under India Semiconductor Mission
– Four plants – including a fab and three assembly
151
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Cybersecurity: Increasing digitalization also
raises concerns about cyber threats to port
operations.
Initiatives by Government
Sagarmala Programme: Focuses on
leveraging India’s coastline and of navigable
waterways.
o Supports port infrastructure, coastal
development, and connectivity.
o Financial aid for projects like coastal
berths, rail/road connectivity, fish
harbours, cruise terminals.
Maritime India Vision 2030 (MIV
2030): Aiming for India to become a top 10
shipbuilding nation by 2030 and create a
world-class, efficient, and sustainable
maritime ecosystem.
o Includes 150+ initiatives across ten
key maritime sectors.
Inland Waterways Development: 26 new
national waterways identified by the Inland
Waterways Authority of India (IWAI).
o Provides alternative, sustainable
transport, easing road/rail
congestion.
Green Tug Transition Program (GTTP): Aims
to replace fuel-based harbour tugs with eco-
friendly, sustainable fuel-powered tugs.
o Transition to be completed by 2040
across major ports.
Sagarmanthan Dialogue: An annual
maritime strategic dialogue to position
India as a global center for maritime
conversations.
Maritime Development Fund: ₹25,000 crore
fund for long-term financing to modernize
ports and shipping infrastructure,
encouraging private investment.
Shipbuilding Financial Assistance Policy
(SBFAP 2.0): Modernized to help Indian
shipyards compete with global giants.
Way Ahead
India’s Major Ports are now poised to take
their competitiveness to the next level,
supported by continuous investment in
mechanisation, process reengineering, port
community systems, and multi-modal
logistics integration.
These initiatives have resulted in higher
cargo volumes, reduced vessel wait times,
optimized capacity utilization, and
increased investor confidence.
As India expands its global trade footprint
and modernises logistics infrastructure, FY
2024-25 stands as a testament to the
Ministry’s strategic vision and collaborative
efforts of public authorities and private
stakeholders.
Cabinet Approves Semiconductor Unit in Uttar
Pradesh
Syllabus: GS3/Economy
Context
The Union Cabinet approved the
establishment of a Semiconductor Unit in
Uttar Pradesh.
o It is the sixth project to receive
approval under the India
Semiconductor Mission.
About
The unit approved is a joint venture of HCL
and Foxconn and will attract investment of
Rs 3,700 crore.
o Together they will set up a plant
near Jewar airport in Yamuna
Expressway Industrial Development
Authority (YEIDA).
This plant will manufacture display driver
chips for mobile phones, laptops,
automobiles, PCs, and a myriad of other
devices that have displays.
The plant is designed for 20,000 wafers per
month. The design output capacity is 36
million units per month.
Plants Under India Semiconductor Mission
– Four plants – including a fab and three assembly
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
152
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
units – are in Gujarat and one assembly and
packaging plant is under construction in Assam.
– India’s other five semiconductor development
projects are in;
1. Micron Technology – Sanand, Gujarat.
2. Tata Electronics Pvt. Ltd. with PSMC (Taiwan) –
Dholera, Gujarat
3. Tata Semiconductor Assembly and Test Pvt Ltd
(TSAT) – Morigaon, Assam.
4. CG Power, in partnership with Renesas
Electronics Corporation, Japan and Stars
Microelectronics, Thailand – Sanand, Gujarat.
5. Kaynes Semicon – Sanand, Gujarat.
What is a Semiconductor?
Semiconductors also referred to as ‘chips’
are highly complex products to design and
manufacture, providing the essential
functionality for electronic devices to
process, store and transmit data.
The chip comprises interconnections
of transistors, diodes,
capacitors and resistors, layered on a wafer
sheet of silicon.
Significance of the project
Job Creation: Semiconductor manufacturing
facilities in India create many direct and
indirect employment opportunities.
Reduced Dependence on
Imports: Establishing more domestic
semiconductor industries will enhance the
country’s self-reliance and resilience in
times of geopolitical tensions or disruptions
in global supply chains.
Import Dependency: India imported ₹1.71
lakh crore worth of semiconductors in
2024. Nearly 38% came from China.
Export Opportunities: India’s semiconductor
market is projected to grow from $22
billion (2019) to $110 billion by 2030.
o Expected to account for 10% of
global chip consumption, driven by
demand in smartphones, 5G, EVs, AI,
IoT.
Strategic Importance: Semiconductor chips
are critical components in various strategic
sectors such as defense, aerospace, and
telecommunications.
o Having a domestic semiconductor
industry ensures greater control
over the supply chain and reduces
vulnerabilities to disruptions or
external pressures.
India’s R&D Edge: India houses 20% of the
world’s semiconductor design engineers.
o Boosts skills and tech in AI, robotics,
EVs, precision tools, and advanced
electronics.
Challenges faced by India’s semiconductor industry
Countries like the US and EU, also sense the
semiconductor opportunity and have rolled
out more lucrative incentive schemes than
India.
High capital cost: A fab facility can cost
upwards of $5–10 billion.
Talent pool: While India is the biggest back
office for design engineers of all major chip
companies, skilled talent that can work on
factory floors of a fabrication plant is still
hard to come by.
Research and Development: India currently
lacks research in semiconductor design,
where the future of the chip is decided.
Power supply: An uninterrupted supply of
power is central to the process, with just
seconds of fluctuations or spikes causing
millions in losses.
Water intensive: Chip-making requires
gallons of ultrapure water in a single day.
Initiatives for Semiconductor Industry
– The India Semiconductor Mission (ISM) aims to
build a strong semiconductor and display
ecosystem, positioning India as a global hub for
electronics manufacturing and design, while
serving as the nodal agency for the efficient and
seamless implementation of semiconductor and
display schemes.
– Production Linked Incentive scheme: Incentives
are being provided for semiconductor design and
packaging.
– QUAD Semiconductor Supply Chain Initiatives: To
152
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
units – are in Gujarat and one assembly and
packaging plant is under construction in Assam.
– India’s other five semiconductor development
projects are in;
1. Micron Technology – Sanand, Gujarat.
2. Tata Electronics Pvt. Ltd. with PSMC (Taiwan) –
Dholera, Gujarat
3. Tata Semiconductor Assembly and Test Pvt Ltd
(TSAT) – Morigaon, Assam.
4. CG Power, in partnership with Renesas
Electronics Corporation, Japan and Stars
Microelectronics, Thailand – Sanand, Gujarat.
5. Kaynes Semicon – Sanand, Gujarat.
What is a Semiconductor?
Semiconductors also referred to as ‘chips’
are highly complex products to design and
manufacture, providing the essential
functionality for electronic devices to
process, store and transmit data.
The chip comprises interconnections
of transistors, diodes,
capacitors and resistors, layered on a wafer
sheet of silicon.
Significance of the project
Job Creation: Semiconductor manufacturing
facilities in India create many direct and
indirect employment opportunities.
Reduced Dependence on
Imports: Establishing more domestic
semiconductor industries will enhance the
country’s self-reliance and resilience in
times of geopolitical tensions or disruptions
in global supply chains.
Import Dependency: India imported ₹1.71
lakh crore worth of semiconductors in
2024. Nearly 38% came from China.
Export Opportunities: India’s semiconductor
market is projected to grow from $22
billion (2019) to $110 billion by 2030.
o Expected to account for 10% of
global chip consumption, driven by
demand in smartphones, 5G, EVs, AI,
IoT.
Strategic Importance: Semiconductor chips
are critical components in various strategic
sectors such as defense, aerospace, and
telecommunications.
o Having a domestic semiconductor
industry ensures greater control
over the supply chain and reduces
vulnerabilities to disruptions or
external pressures.
India’s R&D Edge: India houses 20% of the
world’s semiconductor design engineers.
o Boosts skills and tech in AI, robotics,
EVs, precision tools, and advanced
electronics.
Challenges faced by India’s semiconductor industry
Countries like the US and EU, also sense the
semiconductor opportunity and have rolled
out more lucrative incentive schemes than
India.
High capital cost: A fab facility can cost
upwards of $5–10 billion.
Talent pool: While India is the biggest back
office for design engineers of all major chip
companies, skilled talent that can work on
factory floors of a fabrication plant is still
hard to come by.
Research and Development: India currently
lacks research in semiconductor design,
where the future of the chip is decided.
Power supply: An uninterrupted supply of
power is central to the process, with just
seconds of fluctuations or spikes causing
millions in losses.
Water intensive: Chip-making requires
gallons of ultrapure water in a single day.
Initiatives for Semiconductor Industry
– The India Semiconductor Mission (ISM) aims to
build a strong semiconductor and display
ecosystem, positioning India as a global hub for
electronics manufacturing and design, while
serving as the nodal agency for the efficient and
seamless implementation of semiconductor and
display schemes.
– Production Linked Incentive scheme: Incentives
are being provided for semiconductor design and
packaging.
– QUAD Semiconductor Supply Chain Initiatives: To
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
153
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
assess the capacity, pinpoint vulnerabilities, and
enhance supply chain security for semiconductor
and its critical components.
Account Aggregators: Blueprint for Consent
Managers under India’s DPDP Act
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
With the Digital Personal Data Protection
(DPDP) Act, 2023 and Draft DPDP Rules,
2025, India aims to expand its consent-
based data-sharing system by building on
the Account Aggregator model.
What is an Account Aggregator (AA)?
Definition: An Account Aggregator is a type
of Non-Banking Financial Company (NBFC-
AA) regulated by the Reserve Bank of India
(RBI).
o It helps individuals securely and
digitally access and share
information from one financial
institution to another in a real-time,
consent-based, and secure manner.
o It acts as an intermediary between
Financial Information Providers
(FIPs) and Financial Information
Users (FIUs).
o The AA does not store or process
the data; it simply facilitates the
encrypted transfer of data.
o The system is based on a ‘consent
layer’, ensuring user control and
privacy.
Working: Users link their bank accounts to
an AA.
o Gives consent to share data (e.g.,
bank statement) with a Financial
Information User (FIU) like a bank
or NBFC.
o The AA fetches the data from the
Financial Information Provider
(FIP), like a bank, and shares it
securely with the FIU.
Examples of licensed Account Aggregators
(AAs):
o CAMS FinServ: A subsidiary of
Computer Age Management Services
(CAMS).
o PhonePe AA: A subsidiary of
PhonePe, leveraging its digital
reach.
Key Stakeholders of Account Aggregator
Financial Information Providers
(FIPs): Banks, mutual fund companies,
insurance companies, etc.
Financial Information Users (FIUs): Lenders,
wealth managers, insurers, etc.
Account Aggregators (AAs): Licensed
entities that facilitate data flow between
FIPs and FIUs.
The DPDP Act and Consent Managers (CMs)
The Digital Personal Data Protection Act,
2023 introduces Consent Managers (CMs) as
intermediaries to facilitate:
o Consent collection and withdrawal
o Consent lifecycle management
o Secure data sharing between Data
Principals (individuals) and Data
Fiduciaries (entities processing
personal data).
Draft DPDP Rules, 2025
The recently released Draft DPDP Rules, 2025
outline the registration process, obligations, and
permitted activities of consent managers.
Given the significant structural alignment between
the Account Aggregator (AA) and Consent Manager
(CM) frameworks, certain revisions have been
proposed to the Draft Rules. They are as;
Mandatory Registration with the Data Protection
Board (DPB): Entities seeking to operate as consent
managers under the DPDP regime must be
mandatorily registered with the DPB.
153
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
assess the capacity, pinpoint vulnerabilities, and
enhance supply chain security for semiconductor
and its critical components.
Account Aggregators: Blueprint for Consent
Managers under India’s DPDP Act
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
With the Digital Personal Data Protection
(DPDP) Act, 2023 and Draft DPDP Rules,
2025, India aims to expand its consent-
based data-sharing system by building on
the Account Aggregator model.
What is an Account Aggregator (AA)?
Definition: An Account Aggregator is a type
of Non-Banking Financial Company (NBFC-
AA) regulated by the Reserve Bank of India
(RBI).
o It helps individuals securely and
digitally access and share
information from one financial
institution to another in a real-time,
consent-based, and secure manner.
o It acts as an intermediary between
Financial Information Providers
(FIPs) and Financial Information
Users (FIUs).
o The AA does not store or process
the data; it simply facilitates the
encrypted transfer of data.
o The system is based on a ‘consent
layer’, ensuring user control and
privacy.
Working: Users link their bank accounts to
an AA.
o Gives consent to share data (e.g.,
bank statement) with a Financial
Information User (FIU) like a bank
or NBFC.
o The AA fetches the data from the
Financial Information Provider
(FIP), like a bank, and shares it
securely with the FIU.
Examples of licensed Account Aggregators
(AAs):
o CAMS FinServ: A subsidiary of
Computer Age Management Services
(CAMS).
o PhonePe AA: A subsidiary of
PhonePe, leveraging its digital
reach.
Key Stakeholders of Account Aggregator
Financial Information Providers
(FIPs): Banks, mutual fund companies,
insurance companies, etc.
Financial Information Users (FIUs): Lenders,
wealth managers, insurers, etc.
Account Aggregators (AAs): Licensed
entities that facilitate data flow between
FIPs and FIUs.
The DPDP Act and Consent Managers (CMs)
The Digital Personal Data Protection Act,
2023 introduces Consent Managers (CMs) as
intermediaries to facilitate:
o Consent collection and withdrawal
o Consent lifecycle management
o Secure data sharing between Data
Principals (individuals) and Data
Fiduciaries (entities processing
personal data).
Draft DPDP Rules, 2025
The recently released Draft DPDP Rules, 2025
outline the registration process, obligations, and
permitted activities of consent managers.
Given the significant structural alignment between
the Account Aggregator (AA) and Consent Manager
(CM) frameworks, certain revisions have been
proposed to the Draft Rules. They are as;
Mandatory Registration with the Data Protection
Board (DPB): Entities seeking to operate as consent
managers under the DPDP regime must be
mandatorily registered with the DPB.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
154
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Enable Sector-Specific Consent Managers: The DPB
should allow for the registration of sector-specific
consent managers, provided they operate on
common, interoperable APIs and technical
specifications as prescribed.
Allow Commercial Arrangements with Data
Fiduciaries: Consent managers should be allowed to
have business deals with data fiduciaries (like
banks or companies that use personal data).
Significance of a Unified Consent Infrastructure
Avoids duplication: Aligning AA and CM
frameworks reduces regulatory overlap.
Increases efficiency: Leveraging existing AA
insights accelerates CM implementation.
Promotes innovation: Encourages startups
and established entities to develop secure
data services.
Supports Digital Public Infrastructure
(DPI): Strengthens India’s ambition for a
holistic, interoperable data governance
regime.
Concluding remarks
India has an unprecedented opportunity to
become a global pioneer in citizen-centric
data governance.
By harmonising the Account Aggregator
framework with the emerging Consent
Manager regime under the DPDP Act, India
can move toward a secure, scalable, and
inclusive data economy.
Unemployment at 5.1%, Women Labour Force Rises:
PLFS Data
Syllabus: GS3/Economy; Employment
Context
The latest Periodic Labour Force Survey
(PLFS) data, released by the Ministry of
Statistics & Programme Implementation
(MoSPI), shows that India’s unemployment
rate stood at 5.1% in April 2025.
Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS)
About: It is conducted by the MoSPI to
assess employment and unemployment
trends in India.
o It provides key labour market
indicators, including the Labour
Force Participation Rate (LFPR),
Worker Population Ratio (WPR), and
Unemployment Rate (UR).
Features:
Revamped Sampling Design (2025): The survey now
includes monthly estimates for both rural and urban
areas, improving data accuracy.
Current Weekly Status (CWS) Approach: Measures
employment status based on activity in the last
seven days preceding the survey.
Expanded Coverage: The sample size has increased
to 22,692 First Stage Units (FSUs), covering both
rural and urban sectors.
Earlier, 12,800 FSUs surveyed in PLFS up to
December, 2024.
Annual Reports: PLFS results are now released
based on the calendar year, ensuring timely
updates.
Key Findings of the PLFS Report
Unemployment Rate: It is defined as the
percentage of persons unemployed among
the persons in the labour force.
o Overall (persons aged 15 years and
above): 5.1%
154
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Enable Sector-Specific Consent Managers: The DPB
should allow for the registration of sector-specific
consent managers, provided they operate on
common, interoperable APIs and technical
specifications as prescribed.
Allow Commercial Arrangements with Data
Fiduciaries: Consent managers should be allowed to
have business deals with data fiduciaries (like
banks or companies that use personal data).
Significance of a Unified Consent Infrastructure
Avoids duplication: Aligning AA and CM
frameworks reduces regulatory overlap.
Increases efficiency: Leveraging existing AA
insights accelerates CM implementation.
Promotes innovation: Encourages startups
and established entities to develop secure
data services.
Supports Digital Public Infrastructure
(DPI): Strengthens India’s ambition for a
holistic, interoperable data governance
regime.
Concluding remarks
India has an unprecedented opportunity to
become a global pioneer in citizen-centric
data governance.
By harmonising the Account Aggregator
framework with the emerging Consent
Manager regime under the DPDP Act, India
can move toward a secure, scalable, and
inclusive data economy.
Unemployment at 5.1%, Women Labour Force Rises:
PLFS Data
Syllabus: GS3/Economy; Employment
Context
The latest Periodic Labour Force Survey
(PLFS) data, released by the Ministry of
Statistics & Programme Implementation
(MoSPI), shows that India’s unemployment
rate stood at 5.1% in April 2025.
Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS)
About: It is conducted by the MoSPI to
assess employment and unemployment
trends in India.
o It provides key labour market
indicators, including the Labour
Force Participation Rate (LFPR),
Worker Population Ratio (WPR), and
Unemployment Rate (UR).
Features:
Revamped Sampling Design (2025): The survey now
includes monthly estimates for both rural and urban
areas, improving data accuracy.
Current Weekly Status (CWS) Approach: Measures
employment status based on activity in the last
seven days preceding the survey.
Expanded Coverage: The sample size has increased
to 22,692 First Stage Units (FSUs), covering both
rural and urban sectors.
Earlier, 12,800 FSUs surveyed in PLFS up to
December, 2024.
Annual Reports: PLFS results are now released
based on the calendar year, ensuring timely
updates.
Key Findings of the PLFS Report
Unemployment Rate: It is defined as the
percentage of persons unemployed among
the persons in the labour force.
o Overall (persons aged 15 years and
above): 5.1%
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
155
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Male: 5.2%; Female: 5.0%
o Rural: 4.5%; Urban: 6.5%
o Youth among urban females (15-29
years): 23.7%
Labour Force Participation Rate (LFPR): It is
defined as the percentage of persons in the
labour force (i.e. working or seeking or
available for work) in the population.
o For persons aged 15 years and
above: 55.6%
o Rural: 58.0%; Urban: 50.7%
o Male: 79.0% (rural areas); 75.3%
(urban areas)
o Female: 38.2% (rural areas); 25.7%
(urban areas)
Worker Population Ratio (WPR): It
measures employed persons as a
percentage of the total population.
o Overall: 52.8%
o Rural WPR: 55.4%; Urban WPR:
47.4%
o Female WPR: 36.8% (rural areas);
23.5% (urban areas)
Significance of the Findings
The rise in female labour force
participation, particularly in rural areas,
signifies increasing economic engagement.
However, high youth unemployment among
urban females raises concerns about gender
disparities, job availability, and skill gaps.
The revamped PLFS model provides
monthly employment estimates, but timely
implementation of corrective measures
remains a challenge.
India’s Trade Deficit Widens to $8.65 Billion
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
India’s total trade deficit, combining both
merchandise and services, widened to $8.65
billion in April 2025, compared to $5.77
billion in April 2024, as per data released by
the Ministry of Commerce and Industry.
About
Export Performance: India’s total exports
(merchandise + services) in FY 2024–25
touched an all-time high of $824.9
billion, registering a 6% year-on-year
growth.
Merchandise Trade (Goods):
o Exports rose 9% to $38.49 billion in
April 2025.
o Imports increased at a faster pace,
19.1%, reaching $64.91 billion.
o Merchandise trade deficit widened
to $26.4 billion (up from $19.19
billion in April 2024).
Services Trade:
o Services exports grew 17%
to $35.31 billion.
o Services imports rose 4.6%
to $17.54 billion.
o Services trade surplus thus stood
at $17.77 billion, which helped
moderate the overall deficit.
155
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Male: 5.2%; Female: 5.0%
o Rural: 4.5%; Urban: 6.5%
o Youth among urban females (15-29
years): 23.7%
Labour Force Participation Rate (LFPR): It is
defined as the percentage of persons in the
labour force (i.e. working or seeking or
available for work) in the population.
o For persons aged 15 years and
above: 55.6%
o Rural: 58.0%; Urban: 50.7%
o Male: 79.0% (rural areas); 75.3%
(urban areas)
o Female: 38.2% (rural areas); 25.7%
(urban areas)
Worker Population Ratio (WPR): It
measures employed persons as a
percentage of the total population.
o Overall: 52.8%
o Rural WPR: 55.4%; Urban WPR:
47.4%
o Female WPR: 36.8% (rural areas);
23.5% (urban areas)
Significance of the Findings
The rise in female labour force
participation, particularly in rural areas,
signifies increasing economic engagement.
However, high youth unemployment among
urban females raises concerns about gender
disparities, job availability, and skill gaps.
The revamped PLFS model provides
monthly employment estimates, but timely
implementation of corrective measures
remains a challenge.
India’s Trade Deficit Widens to $8.65 Billion
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
India’s total trade deficit, combining both
merchandise and services, widened to $8.65
billion in April 2025, compared to $5.77
billion in April 2024, as per data released by
the Ministry of Commerce and Industry.
About
Export Performance: India’s total exports
(merchandise + services) in FY 2024–25
touched an all-time high of $824.9
billion, registering a 6% year-on-year
growth.
Merchandise Trade (Goods):
o Exports rose 9% to $38.49 billion in
April 2025.
o Imports increased at a faster pace,
19.1%, reaching $64.91 billion.
o Merchandise trade deficit widened
to $26.4 billion (up from $19.19
billion in April 2024).
Services Trade:
o Services exports grew 17%
to $35.31 billion.
o Services imports rose 4.6%
to $17.54 billion.
o Services trade surplus thus stood
at $17.77 billion, which helped
moderate the overall deficit.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
156
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
What is Trade Deficit?
– If a country imports more goods and services
from other countries than it exports to them, it is
said to have a trade deficit.
– Trade Deficit weakens the domestic currency.
RBI Surplus Transfer to the Government
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
The central board of directors of the
Reserve Bank of India (RBI) reviewed the
Economic Capital Framework (ECF), to
assess risk provisioning and surplus
distribution.
o It is estimated that in FY 2024–25,
the RBI may transfer ₹2.5–₹3 lakh
crore to the central government, up
from ₹2.11 lakh crore in FY 2023–
24.
How Does RBI Make Profits?
Returns on foreign assets: Investments in
sovereign bonds, treasury bills, and
deposits with foreign central banks.
Interest income: From holdings of rupee-
denominated government securities, and
lending to banks (like repo operations).
Commission: For managing public debt
(central and state governments).
Policy on Surplus Distribution
The “surplus” is the net of income over
expenditure, and it is transferred to the
Central Government under Section 47 of the
RBI Act, 1934, after provisioning for: Bad
debts, Depreciation, Staff benefits and
Contingency reserves.
While there is no explicit policy on surplus,
recommendations have been made over the
years:
o Malegam Committee,
2013: Advocated higher transfer of
surplus to the government.
o Jalan Committee,
2019: Recommended maintaining a
Contingency Risk Buffer (CRB)
at 5.5–6.5% of RBI’s balance sheet,
with excess transferred as surplus.
India has Ambitious Expansion Plans in the Port
Sector Globally
Syllabus: GS3/Economy
Context
India is eyeing a strategic expansion of its
port infrastructure and management
capacities on a global scale.
African Outreach
Tanzania in Focus: India and Tanzania have
signed several MoUs on maritime
collaboration.
o Jawaharlal Nehru Port Authority
(JNPA) is developing an industrial
park in Tanzania.
o Cochin Shipyard has also partnered
with Marine Services Co Ltd, a
Tanzanian maritime firm.
Private Sector Role: Adani Ports (APSEZ)
already manages CT2 at Dar es Salaam Port
under a 30-year concession and is involved
in Tanzania International Container
Terminal Services (TICTS) via its JV, East
Africa Gateway Ltd.
o Adani Ports also has a joint venture
— named East Africa Gateway
Limited (EAGL) — with AD Ports
Group and East Harbour Terminals
156
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
What is Trade Deficit?
– If a country imports more goods and services
from other countries than it exports to them, it is
said to have a trade deficit.
– Trade Deficit weakens the domestic currency.
RBI Surplus Transfer to the Government
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
The central board of directors of the
Reserve Bank of India (RBI) reviewed the
Economic Capital Framework (ECF), to
assess risk provisioning and surplus
distribution.
o It is estimated that in FY 2024–25,
the RBI may transfer ₹2.5–₹3 lakh
crore to the central government, up
from ₹2.11 lakh crore in FY 2023–
24.
How Does RBI Make Profits?
Returns on foreign assets: Investments in
sovereign bonds, treasury bills, and
deposits with foreign central banks.
Interest income: From holdings of rupee-
denominated government securities, and
lending to banks (like repo operations).
Commission: For managing public debt
(central and state governments).
Policy on Surplus Distribution
The “surplus” is the net of income over
expenditure, and it is transferred to the
Central Government under Section 47 of the
RBI Act, 1934, after provisioning for: Bad
debts, Depreciation, Staff benefits and
Contingency reserves.
While there is no explicit policy on surplus,
recommendations have been made over the
years:
o Malegam Committee,
2013: Advocated higher transfer of
surplus to the government.
o Jalan Committee,
2019: Recommended maintaining a
Contingency Risk Buffer (CRB)
at 5.5–6.5% of RBI’s balance sheet,
with excess transferred as surplus.
India has Ambitious Expansion Plans in the Port
Sector Globally
Syllabus: GS3/Economy
Context
India is eyeing a strategic expansion of its
port infrastructure and management
capacities on a global scale.
African Outreach
Tanzania in Focus: India and Tanzania have
signed several MoUs on maritime
collaboration.
o Jawaharlal Nehru Port Authority
(JNPA) is developing an industrial
park in Tanzania.
o Cochin Shipyard has also partnered
with Marine Services Co Ltd, a
Tanzanian maritime firm.
Private Sector Role: Adani Ports (APSEZ)
already manages CT2 at Dar es Salaam Port
under a 30-year concession and is involved
in Tanzania International Container
Terminal Services (TICTS) via its JV, East
Africa Gateway Ltd.
o Adani Ports also has a joint venture
— named East Africa Gateway
Limited (EAGL) — with AD Ports
Group and East Harbour Terminals
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
157
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Limited (EHTL), which acquired a
95% stake in Tanzania International
Container Terminal Services
(TICTS).
Chabahar Port Progress
Rising Throughput: Operated by Indian
Ports Global Ltd (IPGL), Chabahar is
becoming a key gateway to Afghanistan and
Central Asia.
o Container handling surged to over
64,000 TEUs by Jan FY25 from just
over 9,000 in FY23, with projections
of 75,000 TEUs in FY25 and full
capacity of 100,000 TEUs by FY26.
Future Plans: A ₹4,000 crore capex-led
expansion aims to quintuple capacity to
500,000 TEUs over 10 years, with
additional infrastructure like mobile
harbour cranes and a second berth in the
pipeline.
Neighbourhood Engagement
Myanmar: India Ports Global Limited
(IPGL) now manages Sittwe Port, a part of
the Kaladan project that enhances India’s
linkages with Southeast Asia.
Sri Lanka: Development of Kankesanthurai
Port is underway, with ferry services to
India being restored.
o APSEZ also started operations at the
Colombo West International
Terminal (CWIT), a major
transshipment facility.
Repositioning India Ports Global Limited (IPGL)
The Shipping Ministry plans to transform
IPGL from a purely strategic asset to a
commercially active
operator, including domestic terminals.
A new umbrella entity, Bharat Global Ports,
will act as an integrated port infrastructure
provider, with IPGL as its operational wing.
The goal is to bolster IPGL’s credibility
globally through a stronger domestic
footprint.
India’s Port Sector
– India has major ports (central government
controlled) and minor ports (state government
controlled).
1. 13 Major Ports
2. 217 Non-major (Minor/Intermediate) Ports
– The ports are managed by the Ministry of Ports,
Shipping and Waterways.
– Strategic Position: Located along the world’s
busiest shipping routes, India is a key trading hub
and a rising global power.
– India’s Maritime Sector Overview: Handles 95% of
India’s trade by volume and 70% by value, with
port infrastructure critical to the economy.
– Port Ranking Improvement: India’s port ranking
improved from 54th in 2014 to 38th in
2023, with nine Indian ports now in the top 100
globally.
– Growth in Cargo-handling: Between 2014-15 and
2023-24, major ports increased their annual cargo-
handling capacity by 87.01%.
– Maritime Sector’s Importance: India is the 16th-
largest maritime nation, occupies a key position in
global shipping, with major trade routes passing
through its waters.
– Future Goals: India has outlined investments
of US$ 82 billion in port infrastructure projects by
2035 to bolster the maritime sector.
1. India plans to establish a new shipping company
to expand its fleet by at least 1,000 ships within a
decade.
Way Ahead
India’s proactive engagement in port
development — from Chabahar in Iran to
potential ventures in Africa and its
maritime neighbourhood — reflects
a deliberate shift towards building strategic
maritime depth and economic resilience.
Through Indian Ports Global Ltd (IPGL), the
country is not only strengthening its
presence along key trade corridors but
also asserting itself as a credible
infrastructure partner in the Indo-Pacific
and Africa.
The ongoing investments, MoUs, and
institutional restructuring signal
India’s intention to move from being a
reactive participant to a long-term, rule-
setting player in the global maritime arena.
157
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Limited (EHTL), which acquired a
95% stake in Tanzania International
Container Terminal Services
(TICTS).
Chabahar Port Progress
Rising Throughput: Operated by Indian
Ports Global Ltd (IPGL), Chabahar is
becoming a key gateway to Afghanistan and
Central Asia.
o Container handling surged to over
64,000 TEUs by Jan FY25 from just
over 9,000 in FY23, with projections
of 75,000 TEUs in FY25 and full
capacity of 100,000 TEUs by FY26.
Future Plans: A ₹4,000 crore capex-led
expansion aims to quintuple capacity to
500,000 TEUs over 10 years, with
additional infrastructure like mobile
harbour cranes and a second berth in the
pipeline.
Neighbourhood Engagement
Myanmar: India Ports Global Limited
(IPGL) now manages Sittwe Port, a part of
the Kaladan project that enhances India’s
linkages with Southeast Asia.
Sri Lanka: Development of Kankesanthurai
Port is underway, with ferry services to
India being restored.
o APSEZ also started operations at the
Colombo West International
Terminal (CWIT), a major
transshipment facility.
Repositioning India Ports Global Limited (IPGL)
The Shipping Ministry plans to transform
IPGL from a purely strategic asset to a
commercially active
operator, including domestic terminals.
A new umbrella entity, Bharat Global Ports,
will act as an integrated port infrastructure
provider, with IPGL as its operational wing.
The goal is to bolster IPGL’s credibility
globally through a stronger domestic
footprint.
India’s Port Sector
– India has major ports (central government
controlled) and minor ports (state government
controlled).
1. 13 Major Ports
2. 217 Non-major (Minor/Intermediate) Ports
– The ports are managed by the Ministry of Ports,
Shipping and Waterways.
– Strategic Position: Located along the world’s
busiest shipping routes, India is a key trading hub
and a rising global power.
– India’s Maritime Sector Overview: Handles 95% of
India’s trade by volume and 70% by value, with
port infrastructure critical to the economy.
– Port Ranking Improvement: India’s port ranking
improved from 54th in 2014 to 38th in
2023, with nine Indian ports now in the top 100
globally.
– Growth in Cargo-handling: Between 2014-15 and
2023-24, major ports increased their annual cargo-
handling capacity by 87.01%.
– Maritime Sector’s Importance: India is the 16th-
largest maritime nation, occupies a key position in
global shipping, with major trade routes passing
through its waters.
– Future Goals: India has outlined investments
of US$ 82 billion in port infrastructure projects by
2035 to bolster the maritime sector.
1. India plans to establish a new shipping company
to expand its fleet by at least 1,000 ships within a
decade.
Way Ahead
India’s proactive engagement in port
development — from Chabahar in Iran to
potential ventures in Africa and its
maritime neighbourhood — reflects
a deliberate shift towards building strategic
maritime depth and economic resilience.
Through Indian Ports Global Ltd (IPGL), the
country is not only strengthening its
presence along key trade corridors but
also asserting itself as a credible
infrastructure partner in the Indo-Pacific
and Africa.
The ongoing investments, MoUs, and
institutional restructuring signal
India’s intention to move from being a
reactive participant to a long-term, rule-
setting player in the global maritime arena.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
158
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
By expanding capacity, forging regional
partnerships, and repositioning IPGL as a
global operator, India is laying
the foundation for greater trade
connectivity, regional influence, and
geostrategic leverage in the years to come.
The New Oil Conflict
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
A new oil war is unfolding through
production and pricing strategies rather
than armed conflict, with far-reaching
global economic implications.
Background
Recently OPEC+ decided to increase crude
oil output by 411,000 barrels per day (bpd)
from June 2025.
This marks the third consecutive month of
production increase, reversing part of
the 2.2 million bpd voluntary cuts taken in
2023.
This move caused Brent crude prices to
drop sharply, indicating a highly sensitive
oil market.
Steps taken by Saudi Arabia
Saudi Arabia significantly reduced its crude
output in 2024, bringing it below 9 million
bpd, its lowest since 2011, in an attempt to
support falling oil prices.
Due to non-compliance from members
like Iraq, Kazakhstan, UAE, and Nigeria, it
now seeks to counter overproducers by
flooding the market, a strategy used in past
oil wars.
Reason for policy reversal
Post-COVID Demand Weakness: After COVID
the recovery of the economy was “K-
shaped” i.e. uneven and fragile and oil
demand did not bounce back strongly.
Rise of Non-OPEC+ Producers: Countries
like Brazil and Guyana, along with U.S. shale
oil producers, aggressively expanded
production to capture market share, adding
to the global supply glut.
Reasons for Decrease in Oil Prices
Oversupplied Market: Even as demand
stagnates, multiple producers are adding
supply, creating downward pressure on
prices.
Peak Oil Demand Theory: The International
Energy Agency (IEA) projects that global oil
demand may plateau or even decline by the
end of the decade, weakening long-term
price prospects.
Energy Transition: The global shift towards
electric vehicles and renewable energy,
especially in major markets like China and
Europe, reduces reliance on fossil fuels.
Impact on India
Short-term Gains: A $1 decrease in crude oil
price translates into an annual saving of
approximately $1.5 billion for India.
o Lower prices ease inflationary
pressure and reduce the import
bill, helping India’s current account
balance.
Long-term Risks: Prolonged low oil prices
can harm the economies of Gulf
countries, many of which are India’s key
trade and investment partners.
o Over nine million Indian expatriates
reside in the Gulf, and any economic
slowdown could lead to job losses
and reduce the $50 billion in annual
remittances India receives.
o India’s own refined petroleum
exports, among the top items in its
export basket, may suffer due to
falling global oil product prices.
o Investment from oil-rich sovereign
wealth funds might slow down,
affecting India’s infrastructure and
energy projects.
About OPEC
– The Organization of the Petroleum Exporting
Countries (OPEC) is an intergovernmental
158
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
By expanding capacity, forging regional
partnerships, and repositioning IPGL as a
global operator, India is laying
the foundation for greater trade
connectivity, regional influence, and
geostrategic leverage in the years to come.
The New Oil Conflict
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
A new oil war is unfolding through
production and pricing strategies rather
than armed conflict, with far-reaching
global economic implications.
Background
Recently OPEC+ decided to increase crude
oil output by 411,000 barrels per day (bpd)
from June 2025.
This marks the third consecutive month of
production increase, reversing part of
the 2.2 million bpd voluntary cuts taken in
2023.
This move caused Brent crude prices to
drop sharply, indicating a highly sensitive
oil market.
Steps taken by Saudi Arabia
Saudi Arabia significantly reduced its crude
output in 2024, bringing it below 9 million
bpd, its lowest since 2011, in an attempt to
support falling oil prices.
Due to non-compliance from members
like Iraq, Kazakhstan, UAE, and Nigeria, it
now seeks to counter overproducers by
flooding the market, a strategy used in past
oil wars.
Reason for policy reversal
Post-COVID Demand Weakness: After COVID
the recovery of the economy was “K-
shaped” i.e. uneven and fragile and oil
demand did not bounce back strongly.
Rise of Non-OPEC+ Producers: Countries
like Brazil and Guyana, along with U.S. shale
oil producers, aggressively expanded
production to capture market share, adding
to the global supply glut.
Reasons for Decrease in Oil Prices
Oversupplied Market: Even as demand
stagnates, multiple producers are adding
supply, creating downward pressure on
prices.
Peak Oil Demand Theory: The International
Energy Agency (IEA) projects that global oil
demand may plateau or even decline by the
end of the decade, weakening long-term
price prospects.
Energy Transition: The global shift towards
electric vehicles and renewable energy,
especially in major markets like China and
Europe, reduces reliance on fossil fuels.
Impact on India
Short-term Gains: A $1 decrease in crude oil
price translates into an annual saving of
approximately $1.5 billion for India.
o Lower prices ease inflationary
pressure and reduce the import
bill, helping India’s current account
balance.
Long-term Risks: Prolonged low oil prices
can harm the economies of Gulf
countries, many of which are India’s key
trade and investment partners.
o Over nine million Indian expatriates
reside in the Gulf, and any economic
slowdown could lead to job losses
and reduce the $50 billion in annual
remittances India receives.
o India’s own refined petroleum
exports, among the top items in its
export basket, may suffer due to
falling global oil product prices.
o Investment from oil-rich sovereign
wealth funds might slow down,
affecting India’s infrastructure and
energy projects.
About OPEC
– The Organization of the Petroleum Exporting
Countries (OPEC) is an intergovernmental
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
159
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
organisation established in 1960 at the Baghdad
Conference by Saudi Arabia, Iran, Venezuela, Kuwait
and Iraq.
– Currently, it has 12 members, viz. Algeria, Congo,
Equatorial Guinea, Gabon, Iran, Iraq, Kuwait, Libya,
Nigeria, Saudi Arabia, the United Arab Emirates
and Venezuela.
– Objective: To coordinate policies with respect to
petroleum demand and supply to ensure fair and
stable prices and ensure a steady income to oil
producing countries.It is headquartered in Vienna,
Austria.
OPEC+
– OPEC+ has 22 members, made up of 10 major oil
producing countries (Russia, Kazakhstan,
Azerbaijan, Brunei, Bahrain, Mexico, Oman, South
Sudan, Sudan and Malaysia), along with the 12
OPEC members.
– It was formed in 2016 after the adoption of
the ‘Algiers Accord’ by OPEC countries in
September 2016 and signing of the ‘Vienna
Agreement’ in November 2016 between OPEC and
other major oil exporting countries.
Net FDI slumps 96% in FY25 to $353 mn
Syllabus: GS3/Economy
Context
As per the RBI, the Net foreign direct
investment (FDI) into India crashed by more
than 96% to just $353 million in 2024-25 as
compared to the previous year.
About
The net FDI figure stood at $44 billion in
2020-21, it fell to $10.1 billion in 2023-24,
and finally to just $353 million ($0.4 billion)
in 2024-25.
While gross FDI inflows are healthy and
diversified, net FDI is falling due to:
o Higher repatriation by foreign
companies (profit-taking,
divestment).
o Increasing outward investment by
Indian companies (global
expansion).
o In 2024-25, Indian companies
invested a total of $29.2 billion in
other countries, 75% higher than the
previous year.
Gross Inflows: Gross FDI remained elevated in FY25,
with 13.7% year-on-year (Y-o-Y) growth to clock
$81 billion worth of flows.
More than 60% of gross FDI inflows in FY25 were
in manufacturing, financial services, electricity and
other energy, and communication services sectors.
Singapore, Mauritius, the UAE, the Netherlands, and
the United States (US) accounted for more
than 75% of the flows.
Net Foreign Direct Investment
Net FDI is gross FDI, which is the total money
coming in, minus the money being repatriated out
by foreign companies doing business in India and
the outward FDI by Indian companies.
Net FDI = Gross FDI Inflows − (Repatriation by
foreign firms + Outward FDI by Indian firms).
Key Components:
Gross FDI Inflows: Total new investments made by
foreign entities into the country. It includes setting
up factories, acquiring local companies, or
expanding operations.
Repatriation & Disinvestment: Profits or capital that
foreign companies send back to their home
countries. Includes sale of assets or shares in
domestic firms.
Outward FDI: Investments made by domestic
companies in foreign countries (e.g., acquisitions,
setting up subsidiaries).
Why Net FDI Matters?
Positive Net FDI: Indicates more foreign
investment is coming in than going out,
159
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
organisation established in 1960 at the Baghdad
Conference by Saudi Arabia, Iran, Venezuela, Kuwait
and Iraq.
– Currently, it has 12 members, viz. Algeria, Congo,
Equatorial Guinea, Gabon, Iran, Iraq, Kuwait, Libya,
Nigeria, Saudi Arabia, the United Arab Emirates
and Venezuela.
– Objective: To coordinate policies with respect to
petroleum demand and supply to ensure fair and
stable prices and ensure a steady income to oil
producing countries.It is headquartered in Vienna,
Austria.
OPEC+
– OPEC+ has 22 members, made up of 10 major oil
producing countries (Russia, Kazakhstan,
Azerbaijan, Brunei, Bahrain, Mexico, Oman, South
Sudan, Sudan and Malaysia), along with the 12
OPEC members.
– It was formed in 2016 after the adoption of
the ‘Algiers Accord’ by OPEC countries in
September 2016 and signing of the ‘Vienna
Agreement’ in November 2016 between OPEC and
other major oil exporting countries.
Net FDI slumps 96% in FY25 to $353 mn
Syllabus: GS3/Economy
Context
As per the RBI, the Net foreign direct
investment (FDI) into India crashed by more
than 96% to just $353 million in 2024-25 as
compared to the previous year.
About
The net FDI figure stood at $44 billion in
2020-21, it fell to $10.1 billion in 2023-24,
and finally to just $353 million ($0.4 billion)
in 2024-25.
While gross FDI inflows are healthy and
diversified, net FDI is falling due to:
o Higher repatriation by foreign
companies (profit-taking,
divestment).
o Increasing outward investment by
Indian companies (global
expansion).
o In 2024-25, Indian companies
invested a total of $29.2 billion in
other countries, 75% higher than the
previous year.
Gross Inflows: Gross FDI remained elevated in FY25,
with 13.7% year-on-year (Y-o-Y) growth to clock
$81 billion worth of flows.
More than 60% of gross FDI inflows in FY25 were
in manufacturing, financial services, electricity and
other energy, and communication services sectors.
Singapore, Mauritius, the UAE, the Netherlands, and
the United States (US) accounted for more
than 75% of the flows.
Net Foreign Direct Investment
Net FDI is gross FDI, which is the total money
coming in, minus the money being repatriated out
by foreign companies doing business in India and
the outward FDI by Indian companies.
Net FDI = Gross FDI Inflows − (Repatriation by
foreign firms + Outward FDI by Indian firms).
Key Components:
Gross FDI Inflows: Total new investments made by
foreign entities into the country. It includes setting
up factories, acquiring local companies, or
expanding operations.
Repatriation & Disinvestment: Profits or capital that
foreign companies send back to their home
countries. Includes sale of assets or shares in
domestic firms.
Outward FDI: Investments made by domestic
companies in foreign countries (e.g., acquisitions,
setting up subsidiaries).
Why Net FDI Matters?
Positive Net FDI: Indicates more foreign
investment is coming in than going out,
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
160
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
often seen as a sign of economic
attractiveness.
Low or Negative Net FDI: May suggest
capital is being withdrawn or domestic
firms are investing more abroad than
foreigners are investing locally.
o Not always negative but it may
reflect economic maturity or global
ambition.
Revised Economic Capital Framework of the Reserve
Bank of India
Syllabus: GS3/Economy
Context
The Board of Directors of Reserve Bank of
India (RBI) has approved a record transfer
of over 2.68 lakh crore rupees as surplus to
the Central government for the financial year
2024-25.
About
The surplus was calculated under
the revised Economic Capital
Framework, which now mandates
maintaining the Contingent Risk Buffer
(CRB) between 5.50 per cent and 7.50 per
cent of the central bank’s balance sheet.
o For 2024-25, the CRB has been
increased to 7.50 per cent.
o A higher risk buffer would mean a
lower amount of transferable surplus
and vice versa.
This marks the highest-ever dividend
transfer by the RBI, aimed at bolstering
government finances amid ongoing
economic challenges.
Economic Capital Framework
The Economic Capital Framework
(ECF) guides how the RBI manages its
capital reserves and determines the surplus
it can transfer to the Government of India.
It was originally formulated based
on recommendations from the Bimal Jalan
Committee (2019) and adopted in RBI’s
578th meeting in 2019.
The Bimal Jalan Committee had
recommended a 5-year periodic review of
the ECF.
The 2025 review is the first such
exercise since the framework’s adoption.
Key Features of the Revised ECF
Continuity in Core Principles: The broad principles
and risk assessment methodologies of the existing
ECF were retained.
The ECF continues to balance financial resilience
with optimal surplus transfer to the government.
Flexibility in Risk Buffer Maintenance: The revised
framework allows the RBI Central Board greater
flexibility to adjust risk buffers year-on-year.
This allows adaptation to prevailing
macroeconomic risks, such as inflation, global
instability, or exchange rate volatility.
Inter-Temporal Smoothening of Surplus
Transfer: The framework enables smoother and
more predictable surplus transfers to the
Government over time.
o This avoids abrupt increases or cuts
in transfer, aiding better fiscal
planning for the government.
Why ECF Matters?
Ensures the RBI retains adequate capital to
maintain its monetary and financial stability
mandate.
Supports fiscal planning by providing the
Government with a predictable
flow of surplus.
Protects the RBI from potential external
shocks or changes in asset risks, while
contributing to public finance health.
How RBI Earns Profit and Decides Dividend?
– Though RBI’s primary role is not to earn profit,
but to maintain economic stability.
– Its main functions include: Ensuring price
stability (controlling inflation), Managing currency
issuance, Handling foreign exchange reserves,
Regulating the banking system & managing
government debt.
160
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
often seen as a sign of economic
attractiveness.
Low or Negative Net FDI: May suggest
capital is being withdrawn or domestic
firms are investing more abroad than
foreigners are investing locally.
o Not always negative but it may
reflect economic maturity or global
ambition.
Revised Economic Capital Framework of the Reserve
Bank of India
Syllabus: GS3/Economy
Context
The Board of Directors of Reserve Bank of
India (RBI) has approved a record transfer
of over 2.68 lakh crore rupees as surplus to
the Central government for the financial year
2024-25.
About
The surplus was calculated under
the revised Economic Capital
Framework, which now mandates
maintaining the Contingent Risk Buffer
(CRB) between 5.50 per cent and 7.50 per
cent of the central bank’s balance sheet.
o For 2024-25, the CRB has been
increased to 7.50 per cent.
o A higher risk buffer would mean a
lower amount of transferable surplus
and vice versa.
This marks the highest-ever dividend
transfer by the RBI, aimed at bolstering
government finances amid ongoing
economic challenges.
Economic Capital Framework
The Economic Capital Framework
(ECF) guides how the RBI manages its
capital reserves and determines the surplus
it can transfer to the Government of India.
It was originally formulated based
on recommendations from the Bimal Jalan
Committee (2019) and adopted in RBI’s
578th meeting in 2019.
The Bimal Jalan Committee had
recommended a 5-year periodic review of
the ECF.
The 2025 review is the first such
exercise since the framework’s adoption.
Key Features of the Revised ECF
Continuity in Core Principles: The broad principles
and risk assessment methodologies of the existing
ECF were retained.
The ECF continues to balance financial resilience
with optimal surplus transfer to the government.
Flexibility in Risk Buffer Maintenance: The revised
framework allows the RBI Central Board greater
flexibility to adjust risk buffers year-on-year.
This allows adaptation to prevailing
macroeconomic risks, such as inflation, global
instability, or exchange rate volatility.
Inter-Temporal Smoothening of Surplus
Transfer: The framework enables smoother and
more predictable surplus transfers to the
Government over time.
o This avoids abrupt increases or cuts
in transfer, aiding better fiscal
planning for the government.
Why ECF Matters?
Ensures the RBI retains adequate capital to
maintain its monetary and financial stability
mandate.
Supports fiscal planning by providing the
Government with a predictable
flow of surplus.
Protects the RBI from potential external
shocks or changes in asset risks, while
contributing to public finance health.
How RBI Earns Profit and Decides Dividend?
– Though RBI’s primary role is not to earn profit,
but to maintain economic stability.
– Its main functions include: Ensuring price
stability (controlling inflation), Managing currency
issuance, Handling foreign exchange reserves,
Regulating the banking system & managing
government debt.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
161
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
– Despite these roles, profit can emerge as a
byproduct of RBI’s operations.
– RBI earns through:
1. Interest on government bonds it holds.
2. Lending to banks (like repo operations).
3. Foreign exchange operations (buying/selling
dollars).
4. Seigniorage – Profit from printing currency
(since printing cost < face value).
5. Market operations – It buys/sells assets to
control liquidity and earns interest or capital gains.
India Becomes the World’s 4th Largest Economy
Syllabus: GS3/Indian Economy
Context
Recently, NITI Aayog CEO B.V.R.
Subrahmanyam informed that India has
surpassed Japan to become the world’s
fourth-largest economy (nominal GDP), and
poised to displace Germany in the next 2.5
to 3 years.
India’s Economic Growth
India’s nominal GDP has now reached $4.19
trillion, overtaking Japan’s estimated $4.18
trillion.
The IMF’s World Economic Outlook report
predicts that India aims to continue to be
the fastest-growing major economy, with a
projected growth rate of 6.2% in 2025 and
6.3% in 2026.
o Over the past decade, India
has doubled its GDP from $2.1
trillion in 2015 to its current level.
Becoming the Third-Largest Economy
The IMF projects that India will become
the third-largest economy by 2028, with an
expected GDP of $5.5 trillion by
overtaking Germany.
o Germany’s projected GDP
growth: 0% (2025),
and 0.9% (2026) (due to ongoing
global trade tensions).
Key Determinants of India’s Economic Growth
Expanding Domestic Consumption: India’s
economic growth is largely fueled by
private consumption, particularly in rural
areas.
o Also, the urbanization and lifestyle
shifts have led to an increase in
consumption-led growth. India’s
urban population is expected to
touch 600 million by 2030.
o The demographic dividend is a
unique edge—India’s median age is
just 29 years, offering a productive
workforce for the coming decades.
Infrastructure Development & Digital
Transformation: India has invested heavily
in modernizing infrastructure, including
transportation, energy, and digital
connectivity.
o For example: India’s Digital Public
Infrastructure (DPI), emergence of
India as a global startup hub & boost
in the IT sector enhancing
innovative driven growth.
Manufacturing & Services Sector
Growth: India’s manufacturing sector has
seen significant growth due to initiatives
like Make in India and Production-Linked
Incentive (PLI) schemes.
o Additionally, the services sector,
particularly IT and financial
services, continues to be a major
contributor to GDP.
161
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
– Despite these roles, profit can emerge as a
byproduct of RBI’s operations.
– RBI earns through:
1. Interest on government bonds it holds.
2. Lending to banks (like repo operations).
3. Foreign exchange operations (buying/selling
dollars).
4. Seigniorage – Profit from printing currency
(since printing cost < face value).
5. Market operations – It buys/sells assets to
control liquidity and earns interest or capital gains.
India Becomes the World’s 4th Largest Economy
Syllabus: GS3/Indian Economy
Context
Recently, NITI Aayog CEO B.V.R.
Subrahmanyam informed that India has
surpassed Japan to become the world’s
fourth-largest economy (nominal GDP), and
poised to displace Germany in the next 2.5
to 3 years.
India’s Economic Growth
India’s nominal GDP has now reached $4.19
trillion, overtaking Japan’s estimated $4.18
trillion.
The IMF’s World Economic Outlook report
predicts that India aims to continue to be
the fastest-growing major economy, with a
projected growth rate of 6.2% in 2025 and
6.3% in 2026.
o Over the past decade, India
has doubled its GDP from $2.1
trillion in 2015 to its current level.
Becoming the Third-Largest Economy
The IMF projects that India will become
the third-largest economy by 2028, with an
expected GDP of $5.5 trillion by
overtaking Germany.
o Germany’s projected GDP
growth: 0% (2025),
and 0.9% (2026) (due to ongoing
global trade tensions).
Key Determinants of India’s Economic Growth
Expanding Domestic Consumption: India’s
economic growth is largely fueled by
private consumption, particularly in rural
areas.
o Also, the urbanization and lifestyle
shifts have led to an increase in
consumption-led growth. India’s
urban population is expected to
touch 600 million by 2030.
o The demographic dividend is a
unique edge—India’s median age is
just 29 years, offering a productive
workforce for the coming decades.
Infrastructure Development & Digital
Transformation: India has invested heavily
in modernizing infrastructure, including
transportation, energy, and digital
connectivity.
o For example: India’s Digital Public
Infrastructure (DPI), emergence of
India as a global startup hub & boost
in the IT sector enhancing
innovative driven growth.
Manufacturing & Services Sector
Growth: India’s manufacturing sector has
seen significant growth due to initiatives
like Make in India and Production-Linked
Incentive (PLI) schemes.
o Additionally, the services sector,
particularly IT and financial
services, continues to be a major
contributor to GDP.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
162
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
External and Global Realignment: Strategic
initiatives like “China Plus One” and Supply
Chain Resilience Initiative (SCRI) are
leading to increased FDI inflows into India.
o Global firms are diversifying their
manufacturing bases, turning to
India as an alternative to China amid
geopolitical tensions For
example: Apple has investors in
India for manufacturing units.
Reform-Driven Growth: Introduction of
Goods and Services Tax (GST) has created a
unified domestic market, Insolvency and
Bankruptcy Code (IBC) has improved the
ease of doing business, Corporate tax cuts &
initiatives like PM Gati Shakti, National
Infrastructure Pipeline (NIP), and
Atmanirbhar Bharat are boosting capital
formation.
Additional Information
– Real GDP: It measures the total value of goods
and services produced in an economy, adjusted for
inflation.
1. It reflects the actual growth in production by
using constant prices from a base year.
– Nominal GDP: It measures the total value of goods
and services produced at current market
prices, without adjusting for inflation.
1. It means that if prices rise due to inflation,
Nominal GDP may appear higher even if actual
production remains unchanged.
Challenges and Concerns
Global Geopolitical Uncertainty: India’s
economy is deeply connected to global
trade, and geopolitical tensions — including
conflicts, trade restrictions, and supply
chain disruptions — pose risks to its
growth.
o The Economic Survey
2025 highlights that ongoing
conflicts and trade policy risks could
create vulnerabilities for India’s
economic stability.
Inflation and Price Volatility: While
inflationary pressures have eased, services
inflation remains persistent.
o The rising cost of essential
commodities, including fuel and
food, continues to be a concern for
policymakers.
Employment and Workforce
Challenges: India’s workforce faces
disruptions due to automation and AI.
o The need for upskilling and
reskilling is critical to ensure that
workers remain competitive in a
rapidly evolving job market.
Trade Deficit and Export Challenges: India’s
current account deficit has been reduced to
1% of GDP, but weak global demand has
impacted exports.
o The government is focusing on
diversifying trade partnerships to
mitigate risks associated with
declining exports.
Infrastructure and Investment
Needs: India’s Capital Expenditure (Capex)
to GDP ratio has surged to 3.3%, reflecting
strong investment in infrastructure.
o However, sustained investment is
required to modernize
transportation, energy, and digital
connectivity.
Way Forward
Diversify its trade partnerships to reduce
dependency on volatile global markets.
Strengthen domestic manufacturing
through various initiatives and schemes.
Invest in digital transformation to enhance
financial inclusion and governance.
Focus on sustainable economic policies that
balance growth with environmental
concerns.
India’s Outward remittances Decreases under
Liberalised Remittance Scheme
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
India’s outward remittances under the
Liberalised Remittance Scheme (LRS)
162
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
External and Global Realignment: Strategic
initiatives like “China Plus One” and Supply
Chain Resilience Initiative (SCRI) are
leading to increased FDI inflows into India.
o Global firms are diversifying their
manufacturing bases, turning to
India as an alternative to China amid
geopolitical tensions For
example: Apple has investors in
India for manufacturing units.
Reform-Driven Growth: Introduction of
Goods and Services Tax (GST) has created a
unified domestic market, Insolvency and
Bankruptcy Code (IBC) has improved the
ease of doing business, Corporate tax cuts &
initiatives like PM Gati Shakti, National
Infrastructure Pipeline (NIP), and
Atmanirbhar Bharat are boosting capital
formation.
Additional Information
– Real GDP: It measures the total value of goods
and services produced in an economy, adjusted for
inflation.
1. It reflects the actual growth in production by
using constant prices from a base year.
– Nominal GDP: It measures the total value of goods
and services produced at current market
prices, without adjusting for inflation.
1. It means that if prices rise due to inflation,
Nominal GDP may appear higher even if actual
production remains unchanged.
Challenges and Concerns
Global Geopolitical Uncertainty: India’s
economy is deeply connected to global
trade, and geopolitical tensions — including
conflicts, trade restrictions, and supply
chain disruptions — pose risks to its
growth.
o The Economic Survey
2025 highlights that ongoing
conflicts and trade policy risks could
create vulnerabilities for India’s
economic stability.
Inflation and Price Volatility: While
inflationary pressures have eased, services
inflation remains persistent.
o The rising cost of essential
commodities, including fuel and
food, continues to be a concern for
policymakers.
Employment and Workforce
Challenges: India’s workforce faces
disruptions due to automation and AI.
o The need for upskilling and
reskilling is critical to ensure that
workers remain competitive in a
rapidly evolving job market.
Trade Deficit and Export Challenges: India’s
current account deficit has been reduced to
1% of GDP, but weak global demand has
impacted exports.
o The government is focusing on
diversifying trade partnerships to
mitigate risks associated with
declining exports.
Infrastructure and Investment
Needs: India’s Capital Expenditure (Capex)
to GDP ratio has surged to 3.3%, reflecting
strong investment in infrastructure.
o However, sustained investment is
required to modernize
transportation, energy, and digital
connectivity.
Way Forward
Diversify its trade partnerships to reduce
dependency on volatile global markets.
Strengthen domestic manufacturing
through various initiatives and schemes.
Invest in digital transformation to enhance
financial inclusion and governance.
Focus on sustainable economic policies that
balance growth with environmental
concerns.
India’s Outward remittances Decreases under
Liberalised Remittance Scheme
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
India’s outward remittances under the
Liberalised Remittance Scheme (LRS)
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
163
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
moderated by 6.85 percent year-on-year
(YoY) to $29.56 billion in FY25, after
reaching an all-time high of $31.73 billion in
FY24.
What is Outward Remittance?
Outward remittance refers to the transfer of
money in foreign currency by a resident of
India to a person or entity outside India, for
purposes such as education, travel, medical
treatment, investment, or gifting.
What is the Liberalised Remittance Scheme (LRS)?
LRS was introduced in 2004 by the Reserve
Bank of India (RBI).
It allows resident individuals (including
minors) to remit up to $250,000 per
financial year for permissible current or
capital account transactions.
Initially launched with a $25,000 limit, later
increased to current levels.
Remittances can be made for;
o Education and studies abroad,
o Travel and tourism,
o Medical treatment abroad,
o Purchase of property,
o Investment in foreign securities or
businesses.
LRS is governed under the Foreign Exchange
Management Act (FEMA), 1999.
Key Trends in FY25
Travel Remittances emerged as the largest
component, accounting for $16.96 billion, or
over 57% of total outflows.
o It indicates a growing preference for
international travel among Indian
residents despite a marginal dip
from FY24.
Education Remittances declined 16% year-
on-year, from $3.48 billion in FY24 to $2.92
billion in FY25.
Investment Abroad: The funds remitted by
Indians to invest in foreign equity and debt
rose by 12.51%, reaching $1.699 billion in
FY25 compared to $1.51 billion in FY24.
o It reflects growing interest in
diversifying portfolios and accessing
global financial markets.
Policy Changes & Tax Implications
Union Budget 2025, raised the Tax Collected
at Source (TCS) threshold on LRS
transactions from ₹7 lakh to ₹10 lakh,
providing relief to middle-class travellers
and students.
TCS on LRS:
o 20% TCS applies to overseas tour
packages above ₹10 lakh.
o TCS is not an extra tax, as it is
adjustable against final tax liability.
o Credit card spending abroad
is excluded from TCS under LRS.
Why did student remittances decline?
Global Visa Restrictions: Major destinations
like US, UK, Canada saw 25–31% declines in
Indian student visas.
Economic Uncertainty: Families postponed
study and travel plans due to global
financial volatility.
High Base Effect: Remittances were at peak
levels in FY24, making a decline statistically
likely.
Way Ahead
India’s outward remittances under LRS
reflect both the aspirations of a growing
middle class and the challenges posed by
global economic dynamics.
While travel and investment continue to
rise, falling student remittances highlight
the importance of immigration policies
abroad.
Policy responses, such as rationalising TCS
and easing compliance, aim to strike a
balance between enabling individual
freedom and maintaining macroeconomic
prudence.
163
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
moderated by 6.85 percent year-on-year
(YoY) to $29.56 billion in FY25, after
reaching an all-time high of $31.73 billion in
FY24.
What is Outward Remittance?
Outward remittance refers to the transfer of
money in foreign currency by a resident of
India to a person or entity outside India, for
purposes such as education, travel, medical
treatment, investment, or gifting.
What is the Liberalised Remittance Scheme (LRS)?
LRS was introduced in 2004 by the Reserve
Bank of India (RBI).
It allows resident individuals (including
minors) to remit up to $250,000 per
financial year for permissible current or
capital account transactions.
Initially launched with a $25,000 limit, later
increased to current levels.
Remittances can be made for;
o Education and studies abroad,
o Travel and tourism,
o Medical treatment abroad,
o Purchase of property,
o Investment in foreign securities or
businesses.
LRS is governed under the Foreign Exchange
Management Act (FEMA), 1999.
Key Trends in FY25
Travel Remittances emerged as the largest
component, accounting for $16.96 billion, or
over 57% of total outflows.
o It indicates a growing preference for
international travel among Indian
residents despite a marginal dip
from FY24.
Education Remittances declined 16% year-
on-year, from $3.48 billion in FY24 to $2.92
billion in FY25.
Investment Abroad: The funds remitted by
Indians to invest in foreign equity and debt
rose by 12.51%, reaching $1.699 billion in
FY25 compared to $1.51 billion in FY24.
o It reflects growing interest in
diversifying portfolios and accessing
global financial markets.
Policy Changes & Tax Implications
Union Budget 2025, raised the Tax Collected
at Source (TCS) threshold on LRS
transactions from ₹7 lakh to ₹10 lakh,
providing relief to middle-class travellers
and students.
TCS on LRS:
o 20% TCS applies to overseas tour
packages above ₹10 lakh.
o TCS is not an extra tax, as it is
adjustable against final tax liability.
o Credit card spending abroad
is excluded from TCS under LRS.
Why did student remittances decline?
Global Visa Restrictions: Major destinations
like US, UK, Canada saw 25–31% declines in
Indian student visas.
Economic Uncertainty: Families postponed
study and travel plans due to global
financial volatility.
High Base Effect: Remittances were at peak
levels in FY24, making a decline statistically
likely.
Way Ahead
India’s outward remittances under LRS
reflect both the aspirations of a growing
middle class and the challenges posed by
global economic dynamics.
While travel and investment continue to
rise, falling student remittances highlight
the importance of immigration policies
abroad.
Policy responses, such as rationalising TCS
and easing compliance, aim to strike a
balance between enabling individual
freedom and maintaining macroeconomic
prudence.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
164
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
India’s Farm Trade and Impact of FTAs with US, EU
and UK
Syllabus :GS 3/Economy
In News
India is negotiating trade agreements with
the United States and European Union,
which are both seeking tariff reductions and
greater market access for their agricultural
products.
Status of India’s farm trade
India’s agriculture exports rose by 6.4% to
$51.9 billion in 2024–25, while overall
goods exports remained nearly flat.
However, agriculture imports surged by
17.2% to $38.5 billion, widening the trade
gap.
Over the past decade, exports grew just
20%, while imports jumped 148%, causing
the agri-trade surplus to shrink from $27.7
billion in 2013–14 to $13.4 billion in 2024–
25.
Export Trends Productwise
Marine exports from India are largely to the
US (roughly 35% share), China (20%) and
the EU (15%).
o Shipments to the US, predominantly
frozen shrimps, now attract 17.7%
duty.
Rice (basmati and non-basmati) hit a record
$12.5 billion, driven by strong demand in
West Asia and Africa.
Spices, tobacco, coffee, fruits & vegetables
reached new highs.
Coffee and tobacco exports rose due to poor
global harvests.
Exports fell for wheat, sugar, and cotton due
to domestic supply issues and export
restrictions.
Cotton has seen a major decline, with India
turning into a net importer.
Buffalo meat exports exceeded $4 billion
but are still below past highs.
Import Trends
Vegetable oils and pulses are top import
items due to low yields and lack of MSP
support.
Pulses imports hit a record $5.5 billion.
Cotton and natural rubber imports rose as
domestic production fell.
Imports of fruits, spices (pepper,
cardamom), and alcoholic beverages are
also significant.
164
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
India’s Farm Trade and Impact of FTAs with US, EU
and UK
Syllabus :GS 3/Economy
In News
India is negotiating trade agreements with
the United States and European Union,
which are both seeking tariff reductions and
greater market access for their agricultural
products.
Status of India’s farm trade
India’s agriculture exports rose by 6.4% to
$51.9 billion in 2024–25, while overall
goods exports remained nearly flat.
However, agriculture imports surged by
17.2% to $38.5 billion, widening the trade
gap.
Over the past decade, exports grew just
20%, while imports jumped 148%, causing
the agri-trade surplus to shrink from $27.7
billion in 2013–14 to $13.4 billion in 2024–
25.
Export Trends Productwise
Marine exports from India are largely to the
US (roughly 35% share), China (20%) and
the EU (15%).
o Shipments to the US, predominantly
frozen shrimps, now attract 17.7%
duty.
Rice (basmati and non-basmati) hit a record
$12.5 billion, driven by strong demand in
West Asia and Africa.
Spices, tobacco, coffee, fruits & vegetables
reached new highs.
Coffee and tobacco exports rose due to poor
global harvests.
Exports fell for wheat, sugar, and cotton due
to domestic supply issues and export
restrictions.
Cotton has seen a major decline, with India
turning into a net importer.
Buffalo meat exports exceeded $4 billion
but are still below past highs.
Import Trends
Vegetable oils and pulses are top import
items due to low yields and lack of MSP
support.
Pulses imports hit a record $5.5 billion.
Cotton and natural rubber imports rose as
domestic production fell.
Imports of fruits, spices (pepper,
cardamom), and alcoholic beverages are
also significant.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
165
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Impacts of Trade Agreements
India’s upcoming trade agreements with
the US, EU, and UK are expected to see
increased imports of dry fruits, wines, and
spirits.
The Trump administration may also push
for lower import duties and relaxed non-
tariff barriers on GM crops like maize,
soyabean, and cotton.
These developments could impact India’s
agricultural trade balance, potentially
further shrinking the surplus.
Microfinance Loan Delinquencies Jump 163% in
FY2025
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
India’s microfinance sector has witnessed a
163% surge to Rs 43,075 crore in loan
delinquencies in FY2025.
What is Microfinance?
Microfinance refers to financial services
offered to low-income individuals or groups
who are typically excluded from traditional
banking.
It includes microloans, savings, insurance,
and remittance services, mostly extended
by NBFC-MFIs, Small Finance Banks (SFBs),
and banks.
Reserve Bank of India (RBI) defines a
microfinance loan as a collateral-free loan
provided to a household with an annual
income up to ₹3,00,000.
Key trends in Microfinance Sector
The gross loan portfolio of the microfinance
sector dropped by 13.9% year-on-year,
from ₹4.42 lakh crore in March 2024 to
₹3.81 lakh crore in March 2025.
There is a shift from low-ticket to high-
ticket loans. Loans above ₹1 lakh grew by
38.5% year-on-year, while those under
₹30,000 declined by 35.9% year-on-year.
The number of active microfinance
loans fell from 16.1 crore to 14 crore during
FY2025.
o Additionally, borrowers associated
with five or more lenders dropped
from 9.7% to 4.9%.
Reasons for Rising Delinquencies
Overleveraging by Borrowers: Borrowers,
especially in rural and semi-urban areas,
take loans from 5 or more institutions,
leading to unsustainable debt burdens.
Weak Credit Appraisal: Many microfinance
institutions (MFIs), especially smaller NBFC-
MFIs and banks under pressure to meet
loan targets, have relaxed credit norms and
lent without robust background checks.
Income Instability: The aftermath of the
pandemic, inflationary pressures, rural
distress, and lack of stable employment
have all reduced the repayment capacity of
borrowers.
Collection Inefficiencies: Lack of field-level
engagement post-COVID, digital migration,
and weak collection infrastructure in some
areas have hampered recovery efforts.
Loan Utilisation Issues: A significant portion
of microfinance loans are diverted from
income-generating activities to
consumption or social obligations (e.g.,
weddings, festivals, health emergencies).
Government Initiatives related to microfinance
Pradhan Mantri MUDRA Yojana: In 2015,
the Micro Units Development Finance
Agency (MUDRA) and Pradhan Mantri
Mudra Yojana (PMMY) were launched to
allow small businesses to borrow micro
credit up to Rs.10 lakhs without collateral.
165
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Impacts of Trade Agreements
India’s upcoming trade agreements with
the US, EU, and UK are expected to see
increased imports of dry fruits, wines, and
spirits.
The Trump administration may also push
for lower import duties and relaxed non-
tariff barriers on GM crops like maize,
soyabean, and cotton.
These developments could impact India’s
agricultural trade balance, potentially
further shrinking the surplus.
Microfinance Loan Delinquencies Jump 163% in
FY2025
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
India’s microfinance sector has witnessed a
163% surge to Rs 43,075 crore in loan
delinquencies in FY2025.
What is Microfinance?
Microfinance refers to financial services
offered to low-income individuals or groups
who are typically excluded from traditional
banking.
It includes microloans, savings, insurance,
and remittance services, mostly extended
by NBFC-MFIs, Small Finance Banks (SFBs),
and banks.
Reserve Bank of India (RBI) defines a
microfinance loan as a collateral-free loan
provided to a household with an annual
income up to ₹3,00,000.
Key trends in Microfinance Sector
The gross loan portfolio of the microfinance
sector dropped by 13.9% year-on-year,
from ₹4.42 lakh crore in March 2024 to
₹3.81 lakh crore in March 2025.
There is a shift from low-ticket to high-
ticket loans. Loans above ₹1 lakh grew by
38.5% year-on-year, while those under
₹30,000 declined by 35.9% year-on-year.
The number of active microfinance
loans fell from 16.1 crore to 14 crore during
FY2025.
o Additionally, borrowers associated
with five or more lenders dropped
from 9.7% to 4.9%.
Reasons for Rising Delinquencies
Overleveraging by Borrowers: Borrowers,
especially in rural and semi-urban areas,
take loans from 5 or more institutions,
leading to unsustainable debt burdens.
Weak Credit Appraisal: Many microfinance
institutions (MFIs), especially smaller NBFC-
MFIs and banks under pressure to meet
loan targets, have relaxed credit norms and
lent without robust background checks.
Income Instability: The aftermath of the
pandemic, inflationary pressures, rural
distress, and lack of stable employment
have all reduced the repayment capacity of
borrowers.
Collection Inefficiencies: Lack of field-level
engagement post-COVID, digital migration,
and weak collection infrastructure in some
areas have hampered recovery efforts.
Loan Utilisation Issues: A significant portion
of microfinance loans are diverted from
income-generating activities to
consumption or social obligations (e.g.,
weddings, festivals, health emergencies).
Government Initiatives related to microfinance
Pradhan Mantri MUDRA Yojana: In 2015,
the Micro Units Development Finance
Agency (MUDRA) and Pradhan Mantri
Mudra Yojana (PMMY) were launched to
allow small businesses to borrow micro
credit up to Rs.10 lakhs without collateral.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
166
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o These loans were given with the
help of MFIs and other member
institutions, which were refinanced
by MUDRA Ltd.
Udyam Assist Platform (UAP): The platform
helps informal micro-entrepreneurs (many
of whom are MFI clients) register as MSMEs
and avail benefits like priority sector
lending, subsidies, and credit guarantees
under different schemes.
Credit Information Sharing Mandate: RBI has
mandated all microfinance lenders to report
credit bureaus, such as CRIF High Mark and
CIBIL, ensuring that borrowers’ credit
histories are accessible for proper
assessment.
RBI’s Revised Regulatory Framework for
Microfinance Loans, 2022 provides a
uniform regulatory framework for all
regulated entities (banks, NBFCs, NBFC-
MFIs, SFBs) to ensure borrower protection
and promote responsible lending.
Way Ahead
Credit assessment tools: There is a need to
strengthen borrower evaluation to curb
over-indebtedness.
Role of Credit Bureaus: Data from agencies
like CRIF High Mark is essential in
identifying patterns of stress early.
Regulatory Oversight: RBI and state
governments need to ensure that collection
practices are fair, and lending norms are
responsibly followed.
Financial Literacy and Inclusion: There is a
need to ensure that borrowers are aware of
their credit obligations and rights is critical.
NITI Aayog Releases Report on “Designing a Policy
for Medium Enterprises”
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
In Context
The MSME sector is a cornerstone of India’s
economy, contributing nearly 29% to GDP,
40% to exports, and employing over 60% of
the workforce. However, it’s
overwhelmingly skewed in favour of micro
enterprises:
o Micro units form 97% of registered
MSMEs.
o Small enterprises account for 2.7%.
o Medium enterprises make up just
0.3%, yet medium enterprises
account for nearly 40% of MSME
exports, showcasing their potential
and strategic importance.
Why Such Tilt Towards Micro Enterprises?
Overdependence on informal and
subsistence-level micro firms.
A gross under-leveraging of medium
enterprises, which are better positioned to
scale, adopt innovation, and integrate with
global supply chains.
Challenges Faced by Medium Enterprises
Access to Finance is Limited: Only 37% of
medium enterprises can access formal
loans. Collateral-heavy procedures, poor
risk assessment, and lack of dedicated
credit lines are barriers.
Technology Gap: A whopping 82% of
Medium Enterprises don’t use advanced
tech like AI, IoT, or digital automation —
hindering their productivity and global
competitiveness.
Skill Mismatch: About 88% of medium
enterprises don’t benefit from any
government skill or training program.
Training modules are either outdated or
inaccessible.
166
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o These loans were given with the
help of MFIs and other member
institutions, which were refinanced
by MUDRA Ltd.
Udyam Assist Platform (UAP): The platform
helps informal micro-entrepreneurs (many
of whom are MFI clients) register as MSMEs
and avail benefits like priority sector
lending, subsidies, and credit guarantees
under different schemes.
Credit Information Sharing Mandate: RBI has
mandated all microfinance lenders to report
credit bureaus, such as CRIF High Mark and
CIBIL, ensuring that borrowers’ credit
histories are accessible for proper
assessment.
RBI’s Revised Regulatory Framework for
Microfinance Loans, 2022 provides a
uniform regulatory framework for all
regulated entities (banks, NBFCs, NBFC-
MFIs, SFBs) to ensure borrower protection
and promote responsible lending.
Way Ahead
Credit assessment tools: There is a need to
strengthen borrower evaluation to curb
over-indebtedness.
Role of Credit Bureaus: Data from agencies
like CRIF High Mark is essential in
identifying patterns of stress early.
Regulatory Oversight: RBI and state
governments need to ensure that collection
practices are fair, and lending norms are
responsibly followed.
Financial Literacy and Inclusion: There is a
need to ensure that borrowers are aware of
their credit obligations and rights is critical.
NITI Aayog Releases Report on “Designing a Policy
for Medium Enterprises”
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
In Context
The MSME sector is a cornerstone of India’s
economy, contributing nearly 29% to GDP,
40% to exports, and employing over 60% of
the workforce. However, it’s
overwhelmingly skewed in favour of micro
enterprises:
o Micro units form 97% of registered
MSMEs.
o Small enterprises account for 2.7%.
o Medium enterprises make up just
0.3%, yet medium enterprises
account for nearly 40% of MSME
exports, showcasing their potential
and strategic importance.
Why Such Tilt Towards Micro Enterprises?
Overdependence on informal and
subsistence-level micro firms.
A gross under-leveraging of medium
enterprises, which are better positioned to
scale, adopt innovation, and integrate with
global supply chains.
Challenges Faced by Medium Enterprises
Access to Finance is Limited: Only 37% of
medium enterprises can access formal
loans. Collateral-heavy procedures, poor
risk assessment, and lack of dedicated
credit lines are barriers.
Technology Gap: A whopping 82% of
Medium Enterprises don’t use advanced
tech like AI, IoT, or digital automation —
hindering their productivity and global
competitiveness.
Skill Mismatch: About 88% of medium
enterprises don’t benefit from any
government skill or training program.
Training modules are either outdated or
inaccessible.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
167
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Low Scheme Awareness: Over 90% are
unaware of key government portals or
schemes like RAMP, ZED, or GeM. Even
when aware, bureaucratic complexity
hampers usage.
Heavy Compliance Burden: Multiple
inspections from labour, health, and safety
departments increase transaction costs and
reduce ease of doing business.
Why Do Medium Enterprises Matter?
High Forex Yield: Each medium enterprise
generates ₹39.95 crore in forex income,
compared to ₹8.3 crore by small and just
₹1.39 crore by micro units.
Innovation Leaders: Medium enterprises
contribute 81% of total MSME R&D
expenditure, investing in automation, AI,
and process improvements.
Employment Generators: With an average of
89 employees per unit, medium firms create
far more jobs than micro (5.7) and small
(19.1) units.
Profitability and Scale: These firms benefit
from economies of scale, better
infrastructure, and investment capabilities,
ensuring higher return on capital and
sustained competitiveness.
Policy Recommendations
Tailored Finance Instruments: Launch a
working capital scheme tied to enterprise
turnover, with fast-track approvals.
o Introduce a ₹5 crore ME credit card
at market rates with minimal
collateral.
Technology Upgradation through
Competence Centres: Convert existing tech
centres into India ME 4.0 hubs, offering
access to Industry 4.0 tools for sectors like
ESDM, pharma, and sports.
Focused R&D Ecosystem: Establish a 3-tier
funding mechanism (Expert Committee →
Proposal Solicitation → Monitoring).
o Use Self-Reliant India Fund (SRI) to
finance sector-specific innovation
projects.
Cluster-Based Testing and
Certification: Expand MSE-CDP to include
medium enterprises.
o Set up testing labs in regional ME
clusters to ensure quality
compliance, especially in exports.
Customized Skill Development: Design
export-oriented, sector-specific training
curricula.
o Integrate ME modules into existing
ESDP programs with help from the
Ministry of Skill Development.
Centralized Digital Support Portal: Develop a
dedicated ME sub-portal under Udyam with
scheme discovery, compliance tracking, and
market intelligence modules.
India’s Cotton Area May Shrink Due to Low Yields
Syllabus :GS 3/Economy
In News
India’s cotton production is expected to
decline by 2% in the 2025–26 season,
according to the US Department of
Agriculture, due to a shift in farmer
preference toward more profitable crops
like maize and groundnut.
Cotton Industry in India
Cotton is a vital commercial crop in India,
contributing about 24% to global cotton
production and sustaining the livelihoods of
millions of farmers and workers.
It plays a crucial role in India’s foreign
exchange earnings through exports of raw
cotton, intermediate products, and finished
goods. India holds the largest cotton
acreage in the world.
India has the largest cotton acreage globally;
ranks 36th in productivity.
India is the 2nd largest producer and
consumer of cotton in the world.
167
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Low Scheme Awareness: Over 90% are
unaware of key government portals or
schemes like RAMP, ZED, or GeM. Even
when aware, bureaucratic complexity
hampers usage.
Heavy Compliance Burden: Multiple
inspections from labour, health, and safety
departments increase transaction costs and
reduce ease of doing business.
Why Do Medium Enterprises Matter?
High Forex Yield: Each medium enterprise
generates ₹39.95 crore in forex income,
compared to ₹8.3 crore by small and just
₹1.39 crore by micro units.
Innovation Leaders: Medium enterprises
contribute 81% of total MSME R&D
expenditure, investing in automation, AI,
and process improvements.
Employment Generators: With an average of
89 employees per unit, medium firms create
far more jobs than micro (5.7) and small
(19.1) units.
Profitability and Scale: These firms benefit
from economies of scale, better
infrastructure, and investment capabilities,
ensuring higher return on capital and
sustained competitiveness.
Policy Recommendations
Tailored Finance Instruments: Launch a
working capital scheme tied to enterprise
turnover, with fast-track approvals.
o Introduce a ₹5 crore ME credit card
at market rates with minimal
collateral.
Technology Upgradation through
Competence Centres: Convert existing tech
centres into India ME 4.0 hubs, offering
access to Industry 4.0 tools for sectors like
ESDM, pharma, and sports.
Focused R&D Ecosystem: Establish a 3-tier
funding mechanism (Expert Committee →
Proposal Solicitation → Monitoring).
o Use Self-Reliant India Fund (SRI) to
finance sector-specific innovation
projects.
Cluster-Based Testing and
Certification: Expand MSE-CDP to include
medium enterprises.
o Set up testing labs in regional ME
clusters to ensure quality
compliance, especially in exports.
Customized Skill Development: Design
export-oriented, sector-specific training
curricula.
o Integrate ME modules into existing
ESDP programs with help from the
Ministry of Skill Development.
Centralized Digital Support Portal: Develop a
dedicated ME sub-portal under Udyam with
scheme discovery, compliance tracking, and
market intelligence modules.
India’s Cotton Area May Shrink Due to Low Yields
Syllabus :GS 3/Economy
In News
India’s cotton production is expected to
decline by 2% in the 2025–26 season,
according to the US Department of
Agriculture, due to a shift in farmer
preference toward more profitable crops
like maize and groundnut.
Cotton Industry in India
Cotton is a vital commercial crop in India,
contributing about 24% to global cotton
production and sustaining the livelihoods of
millions of farmers and workers.
It plays a crucial role in India’s foreign
exchange earnings through exports of raw
cotton, intermediate products, and finished
goods. India holds the largest cotton
acreage in the world.
India has the largest cotton acreage globally;
ranks 36th in productivity.
India is the 2nd largest producer and
consumer of cotton in the world.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
168
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
India grows all four species of cotton: G.
Arboreum, G. Herbaceum (Asian cotton), G.
Barbadense (Egyptian cotton) and G.
Hirsutum (American Upland cotton).
Major Growing Zones: Cotton is primarily
grown in the Northern, Central, and
Southern zones of India.
Honey Production In India
Syllabus: GS3/Economy
In News
Over the last 11 years, India’s annual honey
production has increased from 70,000–
75,000 metric tonnes to 1.25 lakh metric
tonnes, marking a 60% growth.
Key Reason for Growth
Integration of beekeeping with horticulture
and farming, supported by schemes like
NBHM (National Beekeeping and Honey
Mission).
Rise in floral diversity, training programs,
and modern hive technologies.
India’s Honey Industry
India is the 7th largest honey producer
globally. China remains the top global
producer and exporter, dominating both
production volume and international trade.
Areas of Production: Uttar Pradesh (17%),
West Bengal (16%), Punjab (14%), Bihar
(12%) and Rajasthan (9%)
Major Export Destinations (2023-24) : U.S.A,
UAE, Saudi Arabia, Qatar and Libya.
ED Listed CPM in Money Laundering Case
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
The Enforcement Directorate (ED) has
listed the Communist Party of India
(Marxist) or CPM as an accused in the
Karuvannur Cooperative Bank money
laundering case.
About
The CPM is a political party registered
under Section 29A of The Representation of
the People Act, 1951.
o Under this section, only an
association or body of individuals
can apply to register as a political
party.
The ED has made CPM an accused in the
money laundering case under section 70 of
the Prevention of Money Laundering Act,
which deals with offences by companies.
o According to the section, a
‘company’ means any corporate body
and includes a firm or other
association of individuals.
The ED argued that as the CPM is identified
as an association of individuals under the
Representation of the People Act, it falls
within the definition of ‘company’ under the
PMLA.
What is Money Laundering?
Money laundering is the illegal process of
making large amounts of money generated
by criminal activity, such as drug trafficking
or terrorist funding, appear to have come
from a legitimate source.
o In terrorism financing the funds
were used to procure arms and
ammunition and for training the
cadres of the violent extremist
organization, among other
purposes.
The money from the criminal activity is
considered dirty, and the process
“launders” it to make it look clean.
168
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
India grows all four species of cotton: G.
Arboreum, G. Herbaceum (Asian cotton), G.
Barbadense (Egyptian cotton) and G.
Hirsutum (American Upland cotton).
Major Growing Zones: Cotton is primarily
grown in the Northern, Central, and
Southern zones of India.
Honey Production In India
Syllabus: GS3/Economy
In News
Over the last 11 years, India’s annual honey
production has increased from 70,000–
75,000 metric tonnes to 1.25 lakh metric
tonnes, marking a 60% growth.
Key Reason for Growth
Integration of beekeeping with horticulture
and farming, supported by schemes like
NBHM (National Beekeeping and Honey
Mission).
Rise in floral diversity, training programs,
and modern hive technologies.
India’s Honey Industry
India is the 7th largest honey producer
globally. China remains the top global
producer and exporter, dominating both
production volume and international trade.
Areas of Production: Uttar Pradesh (17%),
West Bengal (16%), Punjab (14%), Bihar
(12%) and Rajasthan (9%)
Major Export Destinations (2023-24) : U.S.A,
UAE, Saudi Arabia, Qatar and Libya.
ED Listed CPM in Money Laundering Case
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
The Enforcement Directorate (ED) has
listed the Communist Party of India
(Marxist) or CPM as an accused in the
Karuvannur Cooperative Bank money
laundering case.
About
The CPM is a political party registered
under Section 29A of The Representation of
the People Act, 1951.
o Under this section, only an
association or body of individuals
can apply to register as a political
party.
The ED has made CPM an accused in the
money laundering case under section 70 of
the Prevention of Money Laundering Act,
which deals with offences by companies.
o According to the section, a
‘company’ means any corporate body
and includes a firm or other
association of individuals.
The ED argued that as the CPM is identified
as an association of individuals under the
Representation of the People Act, it falls
within the definition of ‘company’ under the
PMLA.
What is Money Laundering?
Money laundering is the illegal process of
making large amounts of money generated
by criminal activity, such as drug trafficking
or terrorist funding, appear to have come
from a legitimate source.
o In terrorism financing the funds
were used to procure arms and
ammunition and for training the
cadres of the violent extremist
organization, among other
purposes.
The money from the criminal activity is
considered dirty, and the process
“launders” it to make it look clean.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
169
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Impact of Money Laundering
Reduces Tax Revenue: As illicit funds are
hidden from authorities, governments
suffer significant losses in tax collection,
weakening their ability to fund public
services.
Creates Asset Bubbles: Laundered money is
often invested in real estate, gold, or luxury
goods, leading to artificial inflation and
economic disparities.
Hampers Investment: Uncertainty and lack
of transparency caused by money
laundering deter foreign and domestic
investment.
Supports Criminal Networks: Money
laundering sustains organized crime,
including drug trafficking, terrorism, and
human trafficking.
International Repercussions: Countries
perceived to have weak anti-money
laundering measures face sanctions or
restrictions from global bodies such as
the Financial Action Task Force
(FATF), affecting international relations and
trade.
Measures taken by India
Key Initiatives:
o Jan Dhan-Aadhaar-Mobile
(JAM): Enhancing financial
transparency.
o GST E-Invoices and E-Bills: Promotes
transparency in the supply chain.
o Indian Cyber Crime Coordination
Centre: Strengthens cybercrime
enforcement.
o Central KYC Records Registry
(CKYCR): Repository for KYC data
and customer records.
Task Forces and Committees: Formed to
address corruption, black money, drug
trafficking, and fake currency.
Investigative Agencies: The National
Investigation Agency (NIA) and
Enforcement Directorate (ED) effectively
conducted probes.
Financial Intelligence Unit-India (FIU-
IND): The FIU-IND is the central national
agency responsible for receiving,
processing, analyzing, and disseminating
information relating to suspicious financial
transactions.
o It serves as the nodal agency for
coordinating action against money
laundering and related offenses.
Prevention of Money Laundering Act (PMLA) 2002
– It was enacted by Parliament of India
under Article 253 of Constitution in 2002 to prevent
money laundering and provide for the confiscation
of property derived from or involved in money
laundering.
– PMLA and the Rules notified there under came
into force with effect from 2005, and it was
further amended in 2009 and in 2012.
– Provisions:
1. Sec. 3 of PMLA defines the offense of money
laundering as any process or activity connected
with the proceeds of crime and projecting it as
untainted property.
2. Prescribe obligation: PMLA prescribes the
obligation of banking companies, financial
institutions and intermediaries for verification and
maintenance of records of the identity of all its
clients.
3. Empowerment of officers: PMLA
empowers Directorate of Enforcement to carry out
investigations in cases involving offense of money
169
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Impact of Money Laundering
Reduces Tax Revenue: As illicit funds are
hidden from authorities, governments
suffer significant losses in tax collection,
weakening their ability to fund public
services.
Creates Asset Bubbles: Laundered money is
often invested in real estate, gold, or luxury
goods, leading to artificial inflation and
economic disparities.
Hampers Investment: Uncertainty and lack
of transparency caused by money
laundering deter foreign and domestic
investment.
Supports Criminal Networks: Money
laundering sustains organized crime,
including drug trafficking, terrorism, and
human trafficking.
International Repercussions: Countries
perceived to have weak anti-money
laundering measures face sanctions or
restrictions from global bodies such as
the Financial Action Task Force
(FATF), affecting international relations and
trade.
Measures taken by India
Key Initiatives:
o Jan Dhan-Aadhaar-Mobile
(JAM): Enhancing financial
transparency.
o GST E-Invoices and E-Bills: Promotes
transparency in the supply chain.
o Indian Cyber Crime Coordination
Centre: Strengthens cybercrime
enforcement.
o Central KYC Records Registry
(CKYCR): Repository for KYC data
and customer records.
Task Forces and Committees: Formed to
address corruption, black money, drug
trafficking, and fake currency.
Investigative Agencies: The National
Investigation Agency (NIA) and
Enforcement Directorate (ED) effectively
conducted probes.
Financial Intelligence Unit-India (FIU-
IND): The FIU-IND is the central national
agency responsible for receiving,
processing, analyzing, and disseminating
information relating to suspicious financial
transactions.
o It serves as the nodal agency for
coordinating action against money
laundering and related offenses.
Prevention of Money Laundering Act (PMLA) 2002
– It was enacted by Parliament of India
under Article 253 of Constitution in 2002 to prevent
money laundering and provide for the confiscation
of property derived from or involved in money
laundering.
– PMLA and the Rules notified there under came
into force with effect from 2005, and it was
further amended in 2009 and in 2012.
– Provisions:
1. Sec. 3 of PMLA defines the offense of money
laundering as any process or activity connected
with the proceeds of crime and projecting it as
untainted property.
2. Prescribe obligation: PMLA prescribes the
obligation of banking companies, financial
institutions and intermediaries for verification and
maintenance of records of the identity of all its
clients.
3. Empowerment of officers: PMLA
empowers Directorate of Enforcement to carry out
investigations in cases involving offense of money
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
170
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
laundering and also to attach the property involved
in money laundering.
Way Ahead
Introduce clear legal provisions to regulate
the financial conduct of political parties
without compromising their democratic
functions.
Create an autonomous body or strengthen
the Election Commission’s mandate to audit
and monitor political party finances and
enforce compliance.
Ensure investigative bodies like the ED to
act transparently, independently, and
impartially, maintaining public trust and
avoiding perception of bias.
Poverty Fell Significantly Last Year
Syllabus: GS 3/Economy
In News
The latest Household Consumption
Expenditure Surveys by the NSO for 2022–
23 and 2023–24 show a sharp decline
in poverty and a modest reduction in
inequality in India.
What is Poverty?
Poverty refers to a condition where
individuals are unable to meet their basic
needs. Its definition and measurement vary
across countries.
In India, poverty is assessed by the number
of people living below the Poverty
Line, which represents a threshold income
level.
o Households with consumption
below this level are considered
poor.
The poverty line represents the minimum
income level necessary to meet basic needs,
and varies across countries depending on
their overall economic conditions.
Poverty measurement in India
India’s poverty estimation has evolved over
decades, starting with V N Dandekar and N
Rath in 1971 who defined the poverty line
based on calorie consumption (2,250
calories per person per day, based on
National Sample Survey data of 1960-61),
setting it at Rs 15 for rural and Rs 22.5 for
urban areas.
In 1979, the Y K Alagh Task Force set
poverty lines based on calorie needs of
2,400 calories (rural) and 2,100 calories
(urban), which remained the official
method until the 1990s.
o but this approach was criticized for
not accurately reflecting poverty.
In 1993, the Lakdawala
Committee introduced state-specific
poverty lines considering regional price
differences but faced criticism for moving
away from calorie standards.
In 2009, the Tendulkar
Committee recommended major changes,
including shifting focus from calorie-based
poverty lines to nutritional outcomes, using
a uniform basket for rural and urban areas,
adjusting price calculations, and including
health and education expenses in poverty
measurement.
o According to this method, the 2009–
10 poverty line was set at ₹673 per
month for rural areas and ₹860 for
urban areas.
o Individuals spending less than these
amounts were classified as living
below the poverty line.
o The last official poverty data from
2011-12, based on Tendulkar’s line,
showed 21.9% of Indians below
poverty.
In response, the Rangarajan Committee
(2012-14) reinstated separate rural and
urban poverty lines, raising poverty
thresholds significantly.
o However, the government did not
officially adopt this report.
170
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
laundering and also to attach the property involved
in money laundering.
Way Ahead
Introduce clear legal provisions to regulate
the financial conduct of political parties
without compromising their democratic
functions.
Create an autonomous body or strengthen
the Election Commission’s mandate to audit
and monitor political party finances and
enforce compliance.
Ensure investigative bodies like the ED to
act transparently, independently, and
impartially, maintaining public trust and
avoiding perception of bias.
Poverty Fell Significantly Last Year
Syllabus: GS 3/Economy
In News
The latest Household Consumption
Expenditure Surveys by the NSO for 2022–
23 and 2023–24 show a sharp decline
in poverty and a modest reduction in
inequality in India.
What is Poverty?
Poverty refers to a condition where
individuals are unable to meet their basic
needs. Its definition and measurement vary
across countries.
In India, poverty is assessed by the number
of people living below the Poverty
Line, which represents a threshold income
level.
o Households with consumption
below this level are considered
poor.
The poverty line represents the minimum
income level necessary to meet basic needs,
and varies across countries depending on
their overall economic conditions.
Poverty measurement in India
India’s poverty estimation has evolved over
decades, starting with V N Dandekar and N
Rath in 1971 who defined the poverty line
based on calorie consumption (2,250
calories per person per day, based on
National Sample Survey data of 1960-61),
setting it at Rs 15 for rural and Rs 22.5 for
urban areas.
In 1979, the Y K Alagh Task Force set
poverty lines based on calorie needs of
2,400 calories (rural) and 2,100 calories
(urban), which remained the official
method until the 1990s.
o but this approach was criticized for
not accurately reflecting poverty.
In 1993, the Lakdawala
Committee introduced state-specific
poverty lines considering regional price
differences but faced criticism for moving
away from calorie standards.
In 2009, the Tendulkar
Committee recommended major changes,
including shifting focus from calorie-based
poverty lines to nutritional outcomes, using
a uniform basket for rural and urban areas,
adjusting price calculations, and including
health and education expenses in poverty
measurement.
o According to this method, the 2009–
10 poverty line was set at ₹673 per
month for rural areas and ₹860 for
urban areas.
o Individuals spending less than these
amounts were classified as living
below the poverty line.
o The last official poverty data from
2011-12, based on Tendulkar’s line,
showed 21.9% of Indians below
poverty.
In response, the Rangarajan Committee
(2012-14) reinstated separate rural and
urban poverty lines, raising poverty
thresholds significantly.
o However, the government did not
officially adopt this report.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
171
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Do you know?
– The World Bank updated the global poverty line
in September 2022 to $2.15 per person per day,
replacing the 2017 poverty line of $1.90, based on
purchasing power parity (PPP).
Trends of poverty in India
The overall poverty rate dropped from
29.5% in 2011–12 to 9.5% in 2022–23 and
further to 4.9% in 2023–24.
This trend aligns with an increase in GDP
growth and a decline in general inflation,
although food inflation rose slightly.
Welfare programmes remained largely
unchanged, suggesting that economic
growth may be a key factor in recent
poverty reduction.
The World Bank recently released a Poverty
& Equity Brief for over 100 developing
countries.
o It reported a substantial decline in
extreme poverty, from 16.2% in
2011–12 to 2.3% in 2022–23.
o Analysis shows most of the poor are
clustered just below the poverty
line, while many non-poor are
slightly above it, indicating that
poverty is not deeply entrenched.
o Even when poverty lines are raised
to 125%, the decline remains
significant.
o Inequality, measured by the Gini
coefficient, fell from 0.310 in 2011–
12 to 0.253 in 2023–24, with an
unusually sharp decline between
2022–23 and 2023–24.
Governments Steps
The Government of India has made
significant strides in enhancing the quality
of life and reducing poverty in its many
forms.
The programme implemented by the
government to generate Employment and
alleviate poverty are – The Mahatma Gandhi
National Rural Employment Guarantee
Scheme (MGNREGS), Swarnjayanti Gram
Swarozgar Yojana (SGSY), and Swarna
Jayanti Sahari Rozgar Yojna (SJSRY).
Key initiatives such as Poshan Abhiyan and
Anemia Mukt Bharat have notably improved
access to healthcare, leading to a marked
reduction in deprivation.
The government also operates one of the
world’s largest food security programs—the
Targeted Public Distribution System under
the National Food Security Act.
Decisions, such as extending free food grain
distribution under Pradhan Mantri Garib
Kalyan Anna Yojana for another five years,
exemplify the Government’s commitment.
Various programs addressing maternal
health, clean cooking fuel distribution
through Ujjwala Yojana, improved
electricity coverage via Saubhagya, and
transformative campaigns like Swachh
Bharat Mission and Jal Jeevan Mission have
collectively elevated living conditions and
overall well-being of people.
Additionally, flagship programs
like Pradhan Mantri Jan Dhan Yojana and PM
Awas Yojana have played pivotal roles in
financial inclusion and providing safe
housing for the underprivileged.
Karnataka’s Platform-Based Gig Workers (Social
Security and Welfare) Ordinance, 2025
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
In News
Karnataka Platform-Based Gig Workers
(Social Security and Welfare) Ordinance,
2025 was passed for establishing a legal
framework for protecting and supporting
gig workers across the state.
Who are Gig workers?
Section 2(35) of the Code on Social Security,
2020 defines a gig worker as “a person who
participates in a work arrangement and
earns from such activities outside of a
traditional employer–employee
relationship.”
171
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Do you know?
– The World Bank updated the global poverty line
in September 2022 to $2.15 per person per day,
replacing the 2017 poverty line of $1.90, based on
purchasing power parity (PPP).
Trends of poverty in India
The overall poverty rate dropped from
29.5% in 2011–12 to 9.5% in 2022–23 and
further to 4.9% in 2023–24.
This trend aligns with an increase in GDP
growth and a decline in general inflation,
although food inflation rose slightly.
Welfare programmes remained largely
unchanged, suggesting that economic
growth may be a key factor in recent
poverty reduction.
The World Bank recently released a Poverty
& Equity Brief for over 100 developing
countries.
o It reported a substantial decline in
extreme poverty, from 16.2% in
2011–12 to 2.3% in 2022–23.
o Analysis shows most of the poor are
clustered just below the poverty
line, while many non-poor are
slightly above it, indicating that
poverty is not deeply entrenched.
o Even when poverty lines are raised
to 125%, the decline remains
significant.
o Inequality, measured by the Gini
coefficient, fell from 0.310 in 2011–
12 to 0.253 in 2023–24, with an
unusually sharp decline between
2022–23 and 2023–24.
Governments Steps
The Government of India has made
significant strides in enhancing the quality
of life and reducing poverty in its many
forms.
The programme implemented by the
government to generate Employment and
alleviate poverty are – The Mahatma Gandhi
National Rural Employment Guarantee
Scheme (MGNREGS), Swarnjayanti Gram
Swarozgar Yojana (SGSY), and Swarna
Jayanti Sahari Rozgar Yojna (SJSRY).
Key initiatives such as Poshan Abhiyan and
Anemia Mukt Bharat have notably improved
access to healthcare, leading to a marked
reduction in deprivation.
The government also operates one of the
world’s largest food security programs—the
Targeted Public Distribution System under
the National Food Security Act.
Decisions, such as extending free food grain
distribution under Pradhan Mantri Garib
Kalyan Anna Yojana for another five years,
exemplify the Government’s commitment.
Various programs addressing maternal
health, clean cooking fuel distribution
through Ujjwala Yojana, improved
electricity coverage via Saubhagya, and
transformative campaigns like Swachh
Bharat Mission and Jal Jeevan Mission have
collectively elevated living conditions and
overall well-being of people.
Additionally, flagship programs
like Pradhan Mantri Jan Dhan Yojana and PM
Awas Yojana have played pivotal roles in
financial inclusion and providing safe
housing for the underprivileged.
Karnataka’s Platform-Based Gig Workers (Social
Security and Welfare) Ordinance, 2025
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
In News
Karnataka Platform-Based Gig Workers
(Social Security and Welfare) Ordinance,
2025 was passed for establishing a legal
framework for protecting and supporting
gig workers across the state.
Who are Gig workers?
Section 2(35) of the Code on Social Security,
2020 defines a gig worker as “a person who
participates in a work arrangement and
earns from such activities outside of a
traditional employer–employee
relationship.”
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
172
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
In the recent report titled India’s Booming
Gig and Platform Economy, projected that
the number of gig workers in India may rise
to 23.5mn by 2030.
Background
The introduced labor codes in 2020,
including the Code on Social Security, 2020,
to extend welfare benefits to unorganized
and gig workers.
The code defines platform workers and
mandates the formation of a National Social
Security Board.
Key Provisions of the Law
Gig Workers Welfare Board: The board
would be established to implement the gig
workers’ welfare law. The Board will look
after all the issues of gig workers and
platforms.
Platform and Worker
Registration: Aggregator platforms like
Zomato, Ola, Swiggy, Amazon must register
with a state welfare board and enroll all
their gig workers, who will receive a unique
ID.
Welfare Contributions: Aggregator
platforms like Zomato, Ola, Swiggy, Amazon
must contribute 1% to 5% of their payout to
workers into a state-run welfare fund for
social security.
Disclosing Algorithmic Logic: Platforms need
to explain how their algorithms function for
task allocation, pay, ratings, and access,
ensuring no discrimination.
Written Agreements: Platforms are required
to provide clear, written contracts to
workers detailing earnings, payment
methods, and conditions for access
blocking.
Grievance Redressal and Working
Conditions: A two-tier grievance system is
established, starting with an Internal
Dispute Resolution Committee within the
platform, and escalating to the Welfare
Board.
Interest and Penalties for Non-
Compliance: Late payment of welfare fees
incurs a 12% annual interest. Non-
compliance can lead to fines of up to Rs
5,000 for the first violation and up to Rs 1
lakh for subsequent violations.
Challenges to Gig Workers
Job Insecurity and Lack of Social Protection
Low Wages and Income Inequality
Algorithms control task allocation, pay
rates, performance ratings, and even
deactivation, but their logic is often hidden
from workers.
The unclear employment status of gig
workers makes it difficult to apply existing
labor laws, which were designed for
traditional employment.
Steps Taken by India for Gig Workers
Social Security Code, 2020: This code
recognizes gig workers as a separate
category and aims to extend social security
benefits to them.
e-Shram Portal: This is a national database
for unorganized sector workers, including
gig and platform workers.
Union Budget 2025-26: Included provisions
of issuance of identity cards, and healthcare
coverage under the Ayushman Bharat
172
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
In the recent report titled India’s Booming
Gig and Platform Economy, projected that
the number of gig workers in India may rise
to 23.5mn by 2030.
Background
The introduced labor codes in 2020,
including the Code on Social Security, 2020,
to extend welfare benefits to unorganized
and gig workers.
The code defines platform workers and
mandates the formation of a National Social
Security Board.
Key Provisions of the Law
Gig Workers Welfare Board: The board
would be established to implement the gig
workers’ welfare law. The Board will look
after all the issues of gig workers and
platforms.
Platform and Worker
Registration: Aggregator platforms like
Zomato, Ola, Swiggy, Amazon must register
with a state welfare board and enroll all
their gig workers, who will receive a unique
ID.
Welfare Contributions: Aggregator
platforms like Zomato, Ola, Swiggy, Amazon
must contribute 1% to 5% of their payout to
workers into a state-run welfare fund for
social security.
Disclosing Algorithmic Logic: Platforms need
to explain how their algorithms function for
task allocation, pay, ratings, and access,
ensuring no discrimination.
Written Agreements: Platforms are required
to provide clear, written contracts to
workers detailing earnings, payment
methods, and conditions for access
blocking.
Grievance Redressal and Working
Conditions: A two-tier grievance system is
established, starting with an Internal
Dispute Resolution Committee within the
platform, and escalating to the Welfare
Board.
Interest and Penalties for Non-
Compliance: Late payment of welfare fees
incurs a 12% annual interest. Non-
compliance can lead to fines of up to Rs
5,000 for the first violation and up to Rs 1
lakh for subsequent violations.
Challenges to Gig Workers
Job Insecurity and Lack of Social Protection
Low Wages and Income Inequality
Algorithms control task allocation, pay
rates, performance ratings, and even
deactivation, but their logic is often hidden
from workers.
The unclear employment status of gig
workers makes it difficult to apply existing
labor laws, which were designed for
traditional employment.
Steps Taken by India for Gig Workers
Social Security Code, 2020: This code
recognizes gig workers as a separate
category and aims to extend social security
benefits to them.
e-Shram Portal: This is a national database
for unorganized sector workers, including
gig and platform workers.
Union Budget 2025-26: Included provisions
of issuance of identity cards, and healthcare
coverage under the Ayushman Bharat
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
173
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Pradhan Mantri Jan Arogya Yojana (AB-
PMJAY).
Rajasthan Platform-Based Gig Workers Act,
2023: This is India’s first state-level
legislation specifically addressing gig
worker rights.
Government Achieves Fiscal Deficit Target of 4.8%
for FY25
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
The Government of India has successfully
met its fiscal deficit target of 4.8% of GDP for
the financial year 2024-25, as per
provisional data released by the Controller
General of Accounts (CGA).
Key Highlights of the FY25 Fiscal Performance
In 2024–25, the Government of India
recorded a fiscal deficit of ₹15.77 lakh
crore, which amounted to 4.8% of the GDP,
in line with its revised estimates.
The central government’s total revenue
stood at ₹30.78 lakh crore.
o Net tax revenue amounted to ₹24.99
lakh crore, which was 97.7% of the
government’s target.
The government earned ₹10,131 crore from
disinvestment of public sector undertakings
in 2024–25.
o This contributed to the
miscellaneous capital receipts but
remained far below the target.
Total government expenditure stood at
₹46.55 lakh crore, which was 97.8% of the
revised estimate.
o Capital expenditure, which refers to
spending on long-term assets like
infrastructure, reached ₹10.52 lakh
crore.
o Revenue expenditure stood at
₹36.03 lakh crore.
What is the fiscal deficit?
Fiscal Deficit is defined as excess of total
budget expenditure (revenue and capital)
over total budget receipts (revenue and
capital) excluding borrowings during a
fiscal year.
Fiscal Deficit = Total Expenditure –
(Revenue Receipts + Non-Debt Creating
Capital Receipts).
Implications of fiscal deficit
Inflationary Pressure: Persistently high
fiscal deficits lead to inflation as
governments resort to central bank-issued
money to finance the deficit.
Crowding Out effect: When the government
borrows a large portion of available funds
from financial markets to finance its deficit,
it crowds out private investment with
reduced access to credit for businesses and
individuals.
Reduced Fiscal Space: A high fiscal deficit
limits the government’s ability to respond
to economic shocks or crises.
Difficulty in borrowing: As a government’s
finances worsen, demand for the
government’s bonds begins to drop, forcing
the government to offer to pay a higher
interest rate to lenders.
Benefits of lower fiscal deficit
Improved Credit Ratings: Consistent deficit
reduction enhances international credit
ratings, lowering borrowing costs in global
markets.
Reduced Debt Servicing: Less spending on
interest payments frees funds for
development projects like infrastructure,
education, and healthcare.
Improved Balance of Payments: Lower
reliance on foreign borrowing stabilizes the
exchange rate and current account.
Enhanced Investor Confidence: Signals fiscal
discipline, attracting greater foreign and
domestic investments.
NK Singh committee recommendation
– Debt to GDP ratio: The Committee suggested
173
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Pradhan Mantri Jan Arogya Yojana (AB-
PMJAY).
Rajasthan Platform-Based Gig Workers Act,
2023: This is India’s first state-level
legislation specifically addressing gig
worker rights.
Government Achieves Fiscal Deficit Target of 4.8%
for FY25
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
The Government of India has successfully
met its fiscal deficit target of 4.8% of GDP for
the financial year 2024-25, as per
provisional data released by the Controller
General of Accounts (CGA).
Key Highlights of the FY25 Fiscal Performance
In 2024–25, the Government of India
recorded a fiscal deficit of ₹15.77 lakh
crore, which amounted to 4.8% of the GDP,
in line with its revised estimates.
The central government’s total revenue
stood at ₹30.78 lakh crore.
o Net tax revenue amounted to ₹24.99
lakh crore, which was 97.7% of the
government’s target.
The government earned ₹10,131 crore from
disinvestment of public sector undertakings
in 2024–25.
o This contributed to the
miscellaneous capital receipts but
remained far below the target.
Total government expenditure stood at
₹46.55 lakh crore, which was 97.8% of the
revised estimate.
o Capital expenditure, which refers to
spending on long-term assets like
infrastructure, reached ₹10.52 lakh
crore.
o Revenue expenditure stood at
₹36.03 lakh crore.
What is the fiscal deficit?
Fiscal Deficit is defined as excess of total
budget expenditure (revenue and capital)
over total budget receipts (revenue and
capital) excluding borrowings during a
fiscal year.
Fiscal Deficit = Total Expenditure –
(Revenue Receipts + Non-Debt Creating
Capital Receipts).
Implications of fiscal deficit
Inflationary Pressure: Persistently high
fiscal deficits lead to inflation as
governments resort to central bank-issued
money to finance the deficit.
Crowding Out effect: When the government
borrows a large portion of available funds
from financial markets to finance its deficit,
it crowds out private investment with
reduced access to credit for businesses and
individuals.
Reduced Fiscal Space: A high fiscal deficit
limits the government’s ability to respond
to economic shocks or crises.
Difficulty in borrowing: As a government’s
finances worsen, demand for the
government’s bonds begins to drop, forcing
the government to offer to pay a higher
interest rate to lenders.
Benefits of lower fiscal deficit
Improved Credit Ratings: Consistent deficit
reduction enhances international credit
ratings, lowering borrowing costs in global
markets.
Reduced Debt Servicing: Less spending on
interest payments frees funds for
development projects like infrastructure,
education, and healthcare.
Improved Balance of Payments: Lower
reliance on foreign borrowing stabilizes the
exchange rate and current account.
Enhanced Investor Confidence: Signals fiscal
discipline, attracting greater foreign and
domestic investments.
NK Singh committee recommendation
– Debt to GDP ratio: The Committee suggested
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
174
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
using debt as the primary target for fiscal policy. A
debt to GDP ratio of 60% should be targeted with
a 40% limit for the center and 20% limit for the
states by FY23.
– The fiscal deficit to GDP ratio of 2.5% by FY23.
– Fiscal Council: The Committee proposed to create
an autonomous Fiscal Council with a Chairperson
and two members appointed by the center. The
role of the Council would include:
1. Preparing multi-year fiscal forecasts,
2. Recommending changes to the fiscal strategy,
3. Improving quality of fiscal data,
4. Advising the government if conditions exist to
deviate from the fiscal target.
– Deviations: The Committee suggested that
grounds in which the government can deviate from
the targets should be clearly specified, and the
government should not be allowed to notify other
circumstances.
INFRASTRUCTURE
Human Development Report 2025: UNDP
Syllabus: GS3/Inclusive Growth
Context
Recently, the United Nations Development
Programme (UNDP) released the Human
Development Report (HDR) for 2025,
highlighting India’s progress in life
expectancy, education, and income levels.
o It is titled as ‘A Matter of Choice:
People and Possibilities in the Age of
AI’, and explores AI’s role in shaping
future development.
Human Development Index: Current Status
Iceland (HDI value of 0.972), ranked at the
top of the Index, followed by Norway and
Switzerland.
o South Sudan was at the bottom at
193 with 0.388.
India improved its HDI value from 0.676 in
2022 (133th) to 0.685 in 2023
(130th), remaining in the medium human
development category.
o India’s HDI value has increased by
over 53% since 1990, growing
faster than both the global and
South Asian averages.
Among India’s neighbours, China (75th), Sri
Lanka (78th) and Bhutan (127th) are
ranked above India, while Bangladesh
(130th) is ranked at par.
o Nepal (145th), Myanmar (149th),
Pakistan (168th) are ranked below
India.
Highlights of India’s HDI Progress
Improved Life Expectancy: India’s life
expectancy has risen from 58.6 years in
1990 to 72 years in 2023, marking its
highest level since the index began.
o National health programs like
Ayushman Bharat, Janani Suraksha
Yojana, and Poshan Abhiyaan have
contributed to this growth.
174
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
using debt as the primary target for fiscal policy. A
debt to GDP ratio of 60% should be targeted with
a 40% limit for the center and 20% limit for the
states by FY23.
– The fiscal deficit to GDP ratio of 2.5% by FY23.
– Fiscal Council: The Committee proposed to create
an autonomous Fiscal Council with a Chairperson
and two members appointed by the center. The
role of the Council would include:
1. Preparing multi-year fiscal forecasts,
2. Recommending changes to the fiscal strategy,
3. Improving quality of fiscal data,
4. Advising the government if conditions exist to
deviate from the fiscal target.
– Deviations: The Committee suggested that
grounds in which the government can deviate from
the targets should be clearly specified, and the
government should not be allowed to notify other
circumstances.
INFRASTRUCTURE
Human Development Report 2025: UNDP
Syllabus: GS3/Inclusive Growth
Context
Recently, the United Nations Development
Programme (UNDP) released the Human
Development Report (HDR) for 2025,
highlighting India’s progress in life
expectancy, education, and income levels.
o It is titled as ‘A Matter of Choice:
People and Possibilities in the Age of
AI’, and explores AI’s role in shaping
future development.
Human Development Index: Current Status
Iceland (HDI value of 0.972), ranked at the
top of the Index, followed by Norway and
Switzerland.
o South Sudan was at the bottom at
193 with 0.388.
India improved its HDI value from 0.676 in
2022 (133th) to 0.685 in 2023
(130th), remaining in the medium human
development category.
o India’s HDI value has increased by
over 53% since 1990, growing
faster than both the global and
South Asian averages.
Among India’s neighbours, China (75th), Sri
Lanka (78th) and Bhutan (127th) are
ranked above India, while Bangladesh
(130th) is ranked at par.
o Nepal (145th), Myanmar (149th),
Pakistan (168th) are ranked below
India.
Highlights of India’s HDI Progress
Improved Life Expectancy: India’s life
expectancy has risen from 58.6 years in
1990 to 72 years in 2023, marking its
highest level since the index began.
o National health programs like
Ayushman Bharat, Janani Suraksha
Yojana, and Poshan Abhiyaan have
contributed to this growth.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
175
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Advancements in Education: The average
years of schooling have increased from 8.2
years in 1990 to 13 years in 2023.
o Policies like the Right to Education
Act, Samagra Shiksha Abhiyan, and
National Education Policy 2020
have played a crucial role.
Economic Growth and Poverty
Reduction: India’s Gross National Income
(GNI) per capita has risen over four times,
from $2,167 in 1990 to $9,046 in 2023.
o 135 million Indians escaped
multidimensional poverty between
2015-16 and 2019-21.
Key Challenges & Suggestions Made in Report
AI and Human Development: HDR 2025
argues that AI should enhance human
capabilities rather than replace them.
o It calls for bold policy decisions to
ensure AI-driven growth benefits all
communities.
Widening Inequalities: Global inequalities
are increasing, slowing human development
progress, despite technological
advancements.
o Income inequality reduces India’s
HDI by 30.7%, one of the highest
losses in the region.
o Gender disparities continue to affect
education, employment, and
healthcare access.
o The report urges inclusive AI
policies to bridge the gap between
developed and developing nations.
Three Key Action Areas:
o Building a complementarity
economy where humans and AI
work together.
o Driving innovation to expand
human capabilities.
o Investing in inclusive education,
healthcare, and social protection
systems.
Strengthening Inland Water Transport in India
Syllabus: GS3/Infrastructure
Context
The Inland Waterways Authority of India
(IWAI) has established a new regional office
in Srinagar, committed ₹100 crore to
improve three National Waterways in the
region — River Chenab (NW-26), River
Jhelum (NW-49), and River Ravi (NW-84).
Key Highlights
– A MoU was signed between IWAI and the J&K
Government to promote river cruise tourism.
1. Ten floating jetties aimed to be installed at key
locations, including Akhnoor, Reasi, Pantha Chowk,
Zero Bridge, Amira Kadal, and Safa Kadal.
– IWAI aims to construct floating jetties and
landside facilities to support passenger and cargo
movement.
1. Dredging operations will be conducted to
maintain navigational fairways for safe vessel
movement.
Inland Water Transport in India
National Waterways Act, 2016 has
declared 111 inland waterways as ‘National
Waterways’ (NWs) in the country to
promote shipping and navigation on them.
o The total length of NWs is 20,275
km spread across 24 States in the
country.
Currently, Indian operates to a few
stretches in the Ganga-Bhagirathi-
Hooghly rivers, the Brahmaputra, the Barak
river, the rivers in Goa, the backwaters in
Kerala, inland waters in Mumbai and the
deltaic regions of the Godavari –
Krishna rivers.
Inland Waterways Authority of India (IWAI)
– It is an autonomous organization constituted
in 1986 under the Inland Waterways Authority of
India Act, 1985, under the Ministry of Ports,
Shipping, and Waterways, based on
recommendations of the National Transport Policy
Committee (1980).
– Headquarter: Noida, Uttar Pradesh.
1. Regional Offices: Patna, Kolkata, Guwahati,
Varanasi, Bhubaneswar, and Kochi.
175
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Advancements in Education: The average
years of schooling have increased from 8.2
years in 1990 to 13 years in 2023.
o Policies like the Right to Education
Act, Samagra Shiksha Abhiyan, and
National Education Policy 2020
have played a crucial role.
Economic Growth and Poverty
Reduction: India’s Gross National Income
(GNI) per capita has risen over four times,
from $2,167 in 1990 to $9,046 in 2023.
o 135 million Indians escaped
multidimensional poverty between
2015-16 and 2019-21.
Key Challenges & Suggestions Made in Report
AI and Human Development: HDR 2025
argues that AI should enhance human
capabilities rather than replace them.
o It calls for bold policy decisions to
ensure AI-driven growth benefits all
communities.
Widening Inequalities: Global inequalities
are increasing, slowing human development
progress, despite technological
advancements.
o Income inequality reduces India’s
HDI by 30.7%, one of the highest
losses in the region.
o Gender disparities continue to affect
education, employment, and
healthcare access.
o The report urges inclusive AI
policies to bridge the gap between
developed and developing nations.
Three Key Action Areas:
o Building a complementarity
economy where humans and AI
work together.
o Driving innovation to expand
human capabilities.
o Investing in inclusive education,
healthcare, and social protection
systems.
Strengthening Inland Water Transport in India
Syllabus: GS3/Infrastructure
Context
The Inland Waterways Authority of India
(IWAI) has established a new regional office
in Srinagar, committed ₹100 crore to
improve three National Waterways in the
region — River Chenab (NW-26), River
Jhelum (NW-49), and River Ravi (NW-84).
Key Highlights
– A MoU was signed between IWAI and the J&K
Government to promote river cruise tourism.
1. Ten floating jetties aimed to be installed at key
locations, including Akhnoor, Reasi, Pantha Chowk,
Zero Bridge, Amira Kadal, and Safa Kadal.
– IWAI aims to construct floating jetties and
landside facilities to support passenger and cargo
movement.
1. Dredging operations will be conducted to
maintain navigational fairways for safe vessel
movement.
Inland Water Transport in India
National Waterways Act, 2016 has
declared 111 inland waterways as ‘National
Waterways’ (NWs) in the country to
promote shipping and navigation on them.
o The total length of NWs is 20,275
km spread across 24 States in the
country.
Currently, Indian operates to a few
stretches in the Ganga-Bhagirathi-
Hooghly rivers, the Brahmaputra, the Barak
river, the rivers in Goa, the backwaters in
Kerala, inland waters in Mumbai and the
deltaic regions of the Godavari –
Krishna rivers.
Inland Waterways Authority of India (IWAI)
– It is an autonomous organization constituted
in 1986 under the Inland Waterways Authority of
India Act, 1985, under the Ministry of Ports,
Shipping, and Waterways, based on
recommendations of the National Transport Policy
Committee (1980).
– Headquarter: Noida, Uttar Pradesh.
1. Regional Offices: Patna, Kolkata, Guwahati,
Varanasi, Bhubaneswar, and Kochi.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
176
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
2. Sub-Offices: Prayagraj, Farakka, Sahibganj,
Haldia, Swroopganj, Hemnagar, Dibrugarh, Dhubri,
Silchar, Kollam, and Vijayawada.
– It is primarily responsible for development,
maintenance and regulation of those waterways
which have been declared as National Waterways
(NWs) under National Waterways Act, 2016.
Key Functions of IWAI
– Development of National Waterways
– Regulation and Policy Implementation
– Hydrographic Surveys and Navigational Aids
– Promotion of River Cruise Tourism
Major National Waterways
– National Waterway 1 (NW-1): Ganga-Bhagirathi-
Hooghly River System (Haldia to Prayagraj, 1,620
km)National Waterway 2 (NW-2): Brahmaputra
River (Dhubri to Sadiya, 891 km)
– National Waterway 3 (NW-3): West Coast Canal,
Champakara & Udyogmandal Canals (Kottapuram
to Kollam, 205 km)
– National Waterway 4 (NW-4): Godavari, Krishna
Rivers & Buckingham Canal (Kakinada to
Puducherry, 1,095 km)
– National Waterway 5 (NW-5): Brahmani River,
Mahanadi Delta & East Coast Canal (Talcher to
Dhamra, 623 km)
– National Waterway 16 (NW-16): Barak River
(Lakhipur to Bhanga, 121 km)
Advantages of Inland Water Transport
Cost-Effective Logistics: Waterways offer
lower transportation costs compared to
road and rail.
o Fuel consumption per ton-km is
significantly less, reducing overall
logistics expenses.
o 1 Litre of fuel moves 24 tonne on
road, 95 tonne on rail and 215 tonne
on IWT (for a kilometer).
Reducing Pressure on Rail and Road
Networks: India’s railways and highways
are overburdened, leading to delays and
inefficiencies.
o IWT can supplement existing
transport modes, improving cargo
movement efficiency.
Environmentally Sustainable: IWT produces
lower carbon emissions, making it a greener
mode of transport.
o Reduces traffic congestion and air
pollution in urban areas.
Expanding IWT Beyond Cargo Transport
Roll-on/Roll-off (Ro-Ro) Services: Enables
vehicle transportation across waterways,
reducing road congestion.
Tourism Development: Promotes river
cruises, houseboats, and eco-tourism,
boosting local economies.
Passenger Ferry Services: Provides
affordable and efficient travel options,
especially in remote regions.
Key Government Initiatives
Jal Marg Vikas Project (JMVP): It focuses on
developing NW-1 (Ganga-Bhagirathi-
Hooghly river system) for cargo movement.
o Includes multi-modal terminals,
navigational locks, and fairway
development.
Jalvahak Scheme: It provides operating cost
incentives for cargo owners using IWT
routes.
o It aims to increase IWT’s modal
share from 2% to 5% by 2030.
Hybrid Electric and Hydrogen Vessels: It
promotes green technology for sustainable
inland navigation.
National Waterways (Construction of
Jetties/ Terminals) Regulations, 2025: The
Ministry of Ports, Shipping and Waterways
has introduced new regulations, formulated
by IWAI, to streamline processes and
promote efficient use of India’s vast
waterways network.
Government’s Vision for Inland Water Transport
The Shipping Ministry has set a goal to
complete 150 maritime projects by
September 2025, strengthening India’s
inland waterways sector.
176
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
2. Sub-Offices: Prayagraj, Farakka, Sahibganj,
Haldia, Swroopganj, Hemnagar, Dibrugarh, Dhubri,
Silchar, Kollam, and Vijayawada.
– It is primarily responsible for development,
maintenance and regulation of those waterways
which have been declared as National Waterways
(NWs) under National Waterways Act, 2016.
Key Functions of IWAI
– Development of National Waterways
– Regulation and Policy Implementation
– Hydrographic Surveys and Navigational Aids
– Promotion of River Cruise Tourism
Major National Waterways
– National Waterway 1 (NW-1): Ganga-Bhagirathi-
Hooghly River System (Haldia to Prayagraj, 1,620
km)National Waterway 2 (NW-2): Brahmaputra
River (Dhubri to Sadiya, 891 km)
– National Waterway 3 (NW-3): West Coast Canal,
Champakara & Udyogmandal Canals (Kottapuram
to Kollam, 205 km)
– National Waterway 4 (NW-4): Godavari, Krishna
Rivers & Buckingham Canal (Kakinada to
Puducherry, 1,095 km)
– National Waterway 5 (NW-5): Brahmani River,
Mahanadi Delta & East Coast Canal (Talcher to
Dhamra, 623 km)
– National Waterway 16 (NW-16): Barak River
(Lakhipur to Bhanga, 121 km)
Advantages of Inland Water Transport
Cost-Effective Logistics: Waterways offer
lower transportation costs compared to
road and rail.
o Fuel consumption per ton-km is
significantly less, reducing overall
logistics expenses.
o 1 Litre of fuel moves 24 tonne on
road, 95 tonne on rail and 215 tonne
on IWT (for a kilometer).
Reducing Pressure on Rail and Road
Networks: India’s railways and highways
are overburdened, leading to delays and
inefficiencies.
o IWT can supplement existing
transport modes, improving cargo
movement efficiency.
Environmentally Sustainable: IWT produces
lower carbon emissions, making it a greener
mode of transport.
o Reduces traffic congestion and air
pollution in urban areas.
Expanding IWT Beyond Cargo Transport
Roll-on/Roll-off (Ro-Ro) Services: Enables
vehicle transportation across waterways,
reducing road congestion.
Tourism Development: Promotes river
cruises, houseboats, and eco-tourism,
boosting local economies.
Passenger Ferry Services: Provides
affordable and efficient travel options,
especially in remote regions.
Key Government Initiatives
Jal Marg Vikas Project (JMVP): It focuses on
developing NW-1 (Ganga-Bhagirathi-
Hooghly river system) for cargo movement.
o Includes multi-modal terminals,
navigational locks, and fairway
development.
Jalvahak Scheme: It provides operating cost
incentives for cargo owners using IWT
routes.
o It aims to increase IWT’s modal
share from 2% to 5% by 2030.
Hybrid Electric and Hydrogen Vessels: It
promotes green technology for sustainable
inland navigation.
National Waterways (Construction of
Jetties/ Terminals) Regulations, 2025: The
Ministry of Ports, Shipping and Waterways
has introduced new regulations, formulated
by IWAI, to streamline processes and
promote efficient use of India’s vast
waterways network.
Government’s Vision for Inland Water Transport
The Shipping Ministry has set a goal to
complete 150 maritime projects by
September 2025, strengthening India’s
inland waterways sector.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
177
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
The Harbour Craft Green Transition
Programme aims to accelerate the adoption
of clean energy solutions across Indian
ports.
A Coastal Green Shipping Corridor is being
developed, with the Kandla-Tuticorin route
as the first corridor.
Challenges and Future Prospects
Limited Depth in Rivers: Seasonal variations
affect navigability, requiring dredging and
water management.
Infrastructure Gaps: Need for modern
terminals, jetties, and intermodal
connectivity.
Investment: Encouraging private sector
participation in IWT development.
Conclusion
India’s inland waterways can become a key
pillar of sustainable transport, reducing
logistics costs and environmental impact,
with continued policy support and
technological advancements.
By enhancing waterway connectivity,
tourism, and economic opportunities, the
initiative aligns with India’s broader Blue
Economy vision.
India’s Northeast – Kolkata Link via Myanmar
Syllabus: GS3/Infrastructure; Economy
Context
India’s decision to establish a direct link
between the Northeast and Kolkata via
Myanmar, bypassing Bangladesh, marks a
strategic shift in regional connectivity.
Key Aspects of India’s Northeast & Myanmar
India shares a 1,643 km land border with
Myanmar, connecting Arunachal Pradesh,
Nagaland, Manipur, and Mizoram.
o Myanmar serves as India’s gateway
to Southeast Asia, making it vital for
trade and connectivity.
Kaladan Multimodal Transit Transport Project
(KMTTP)
It aims to link Kolkata to Mizoram via Sittwe
Port (Myanmar) and Paletwa inland
waterways.
o It enables multi-modal cargo flow
(sea, river, road).
o It reduces distance and time
compared to the ‘Chicken’s Neck’
corridor (Siliguri).
o It connects with India’s East-West
industrial corridor plans.
Phases:
o Kolkata to Sittwe (Sea) – 539 km
(Completed)
o Sittwe to Paletwa (River) – 158 km
(Completed)
o Paletwa to Zorinpui (Road) –
108 km (Partially
completed, delayed due
to armed conflict in Rakhine
State).
o Zorinpui to Aizawl & Shillong (Road
Extension): Underway through the
Shillong-Silchar-Zorinpui corridor,
approved by MoRTH.
177
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
The Harbour Craft Green Transition
Programme aims to accelerate the adoption
of clean energy solutions across Indian
ports.
A Coastal Green Shipping Corridor is being
developed, with the Kandla-Tuticorin route
as the first corridor.
Challenges and Future Prospects
Limited Depth in Rivers: Seasonal variations
affect navigability, requiring dredging and
water management.
Infrastructure Gaps: Need for modern
terminals, jetties, and intermodal
connectivity.
Investment: Encouraging private sector
participation in IWT development.
Conclusion
India’s inland waterways can become a key
pillar of sustainable transport, reducing
logistics costs and environmental impact,
with continued policy support and
technological advancements.
By enhancing waterway connectivity,
tourism, and economic opportunities, the
initiative aligns with India’s broader Blue
Economy vision.
India’s Northeast – Kolkata Link via Myanmar
Syllabus: GS3/Infrastructure; Economy
Context
India’s decision to establish a direct link
between the Northeast and Kolkata via
Myanmar, bypassing Bangladesh, marks a
strategic shift in regional connectivity.
Key Aspects of India’s Northeast & Myanmar
India shares a 1,643 km land border with
Myanmar, connecting Arunachal Pradesh,
Nagaland, Manipur, and Mizoram.
o Myanmar serves as India’s gateway
to Southeast Asia, making it vital for
trade and connectivity.
Kaladan Multimodal Transit Transport Project
(KMTTP)
It aims to link Kolkata to Mizoram via Sittwe
Port (Myanmar) and Paletwa inland
waterways.
o It enables multi-modal cargo flow
(sea, river, road).
o It reduces distance and time
compared to the ‘Chicken’s Neck’
corridor (Siliguri).
o It connects with India’s East-West
industrial corridor plans.
Phases:
o Kolkata to Sittwe (Sea) – 539 km
(Completed)
o Sittwe to Paletwa (River) – 158 km
(Completed)
o Paletwa to Zorinpui (Road) –
108 km (Partially
completed, delayed due
to armed conflict in Rakhine
State).
o Zorinpui to Aizawl & Shillong (Road
Extension): Underway through the
Shillong-Silchar-Zorinpui corridor,
approved by MoRTH.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
178
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Why is the Northeast-Kolkata Link via Myanmar
significant?
Shift in Connectivity Strategy: Historically,
the Northeast has relied on Bangladesh for
transit access to Kolkata and other parts of
India.
o India has invested in major
connectivity projects like the India-
Myanmar-Thailand Trilateral
Highway and the Kaladan Multi-
Modal Transit Transport
Project (expected to be completed
by 2030).
o These projects aim to boost
trade, tourism, and regional
integration between India
and ASEAN nations.
Geopolitical Considerations: The decision to
bypass Bangladesh comes after
Bangladesh’s interim government remark
related to Northeast India as ‘landlocked’
and dependent on Dhaka for ocean access.
o India’s response was to strengthen
alternative routes, ensuring trade
independence.
Economic and Strategic Benefits:
o Reduced Dependency on
Bangladesh: The new route
eliminates transit fees and
bureaucratic hurdles associated
with Bangladesh.
o Boost to Northeast’s
Economy: Improved connectivity
will enhance trade, tourism, and
industrial growth in the region.
o Strengthening India’s Act East
Policy: The Myanmar route aligns
with India’s broader strategy to
deepen ties with Southeast Asia.
Security Implications:
o India’s investments in Myanmar
infrastructure also help counter
Chinese influence.
o Presence in western Myanmar
contributes to border stability,
especially in conflict-prone Chin and
Rakhine regions.
Challenges with Myanmar Route
Insurgency threats (e.g., Arakan Army
operations).
Slow construction progress due to terrain
and security issues.
Chinese infrastructure competition in the
same region (Kyaukpyu port, CMEC).
Curbing Bangladeshi Exports via Land Ports
Ban on Ready-Made Garments via Land
Ports: India has barred Bangladeshi ready-
made garments from entering through land
ports in Tripura, Assam, Meghalaya, and
Mizoram.
o These goods must now be shipped
via Kolkata and Mumbai sea ports,
where they will undergo mandated
inspections.
Retaliation Against Bangladesh’s
Restrictions: Bangladesh had earlier
stopped Indian yarn exports through land
ports, allowing imports only via sea routes.
o India’s response aims to
counterbalance trade policies that
disadvantage Indian exporters.
Impact on Trade & Economy: Around 93% of
Bangladesh’s garment exports to India
previously passed through land ports.
o The new restrictions will likely
increase costs for Bangladeshi
178
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Why is the Northeast-Kolkata Link via Myanmar
significant?
Shift in Connectivity Strategy: Historically,
the Northeast has relied on Bangladesh for
transit access to Kolkata and other parts of
India.
o India has invested in major
connectivity projects like the India-
Myanmar-Thailand Trilateral
Highway and the Kaladan Multi-
Modal Transit Transport
Project (expected to be completed
by 2030).
o These projects aim to boost
trade, tourism, and regional
integration between India
and ASEAN nations.
Geopolitical Considerations: The decision to
bypass Bangladesh comes after
Bangladesh’s interim government remark
related to Northeast India as ‘landlocked’
and dependent on Dhaka for ocean access.
o India’s response was to strengthen
alternative routes, ensuring trade
independence.
Economic and Strategic Benefits:
o Reduced Dependency on
Bangladesh: The new route
eliminates transit fees and
bureaucratic hurdles associated
with Bangladesh.
o Boost to Northeast’s
Economy: Improved connectivity
will enhance trade, tourism, and
industrial growth in the region.
o Strengthening India’s Act East
Policy: The Myanmar route aligns
with India’s broader strategy to
deepen ties with Southeast Asia.
Security Implications:
o India’s investments in Myanmar
infrastructure also help counter
Chinese influence.
o Presence in western Myanmar
contributes to border stability,
especially in conflict-prone Chin and
Rakhine regions.
Challenges with Myanmar Route
Insurgency threats (e.g., Arakan Army
operations).
Slow construction progress due to terrain
and security issues.
Chinese infrastructure competition in the
same region (Kyaukpyu port, CMEC).
Curbing Bangladeshi Exports via Land Ports
Ban on Ready-Made Garments via Land
Ports: India has barred Bangladeshi ready-
made garments from entering through land
ports in Tripura, Assam, Meghalaya, and
Mizoram.
o These goods must now be shipped
via Kolkata and Mumbai sea ports,
where they will undergo mandated
inspections.
Retaliation Against Bangladesh’s
Restrictions: Bangladesh had earlier
stopped Indian yarn exports through land
ports, allowing imports only via sea routes.
o India’s response aims to
counterbalance trade policies that
disadvantage Indian exporters.
Impact on Trade & Economy: Around 93% of
Bangladesh’s garment exports to India
previously passed through land ports.
o The new restrictions will likely
increase costs for Bangladeshi
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
179
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
exporters and shift trade dynamics
in the region.
Aizawl Joins National Railway Network
Syllabus: GS3/Infrastructure
Context
In a major boost for connectivity in the
North-East, Mizoram’s capital Aizawl is now
linked to the national railway network via
the Bairabi–Sairang line.
About the Bairabi–Sairang line
The 51.38-km railway project extends rail
services from Bairabi in Kolasib district—
Mizoram’s only previous railhead—up to
Sairang, a satellite town of Aizawl, around
20 km from the city.
This development makes Mizoram
the fourth North-Eastern state to have its
capital connected by rail, after Assam,
Tripura, and Arunachal Pradesh. Earlier,
trains could only reach up to 1.5 km inside
Mizoram.
The Bairabi–Sairang line is part of a larger
push by the Ministry of Railways to
connect all North-East state capitals and
improve regional infrastructure.
This milestone is expected to bring greater
economic opportunities, improve transport
access, and strengthen integration between
the North-East and the rest of India.
SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
S8 Tension and Clumpiness of Universe
Syllabus: GS3/Science and Technology
Context
The latest research that suggests the key to
revealing the fundamental nature of the
universe lies in finding out how clumpy it is.
Clumpiness of Universe
The universe was explosively born in a ‘Big
Bang’ in the void some 13.8 billion years
ago, it expanded, engendering galaxies, star
clusters, solar systems, and planets.
When scientists looked at the cosmic
microwave background (CMB) — the
radiation left over from the Big Bang itself
— they saw an absolutely smooth glow
across the sky.
o They concluded that the early
universe must have been remarkably
uniform with only small variations
in density.
The S8 Tension
The clumpiness of the universe refers to
the non-uniform distribution of
matter, where matter is concentrated in
regions like galaxies and galaxy clusters,
while other regions are relatively empty.
The “clumpiness” is measured by
the “clumpiness factor,” often denoted as S8,
which reflects how much matter is
clustered together compared to an evenly
distributed scenario.
o A higher value for S8 indicates more
clustering with a greater amount of
matter clumped together, while a
lower value indicates a more
uniform distribution of matter.
S8 tension: A problem arose when
cosmologists used different ways to
measure the value of S8 and came up with
different estimates.
o This lack of agreement has come to
be called the ‘S8 tension’ in
astrophysics.
Why Does It Matters?
If this tension cannot be explained by
observational uncertainties it could mean:
179
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
exporters and shift trade dynamics
in the region.
Aizawl Joins National Railway Network
Syllabus: GS3/Infrastructure
Context
In a major boost for connectivity in the
North-East, Mizoram’s capital Aizawl is now
linked to the national railway network via
the Bairabi–Sairang line.
About the Bairabi–Sairang line
The 51.38-km railway project extends rail
services from Bairabi in Kolasib district—
Mizoram’s only previous railhead—up to
Sairang, a satellite town of Aizawl, around
20 km from the city.
This development makes Mizoram
the fourth North-Eastern state to have its
capital connected by rail, after Assam,
Tripura, and Arunachal Pradesh. Earlier,
trains could only reach up to 1.5 km inside
Mizoram.
The Bairabi–Sairang line is part of a larger
push by the Ministry of Railways to
connect all North-East state capitals and
improve regional infrastructure.
This milestone is expected to bring greater
economic opportunities, improve transport
access, and strengthen integration between
the North-East and the rest of India.
SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
S8 Tension and Clumpiness of Universe
Syllabus: GS3/Science and Technology
Context
The latest research that suggests the key to
revealing the fundamental nature of the
universe lies in finding out how clumpy it is.
Clumpiness of Universe
The universe was explosively born in a ‘Big
Bang’ in the void some 13.8 billion years
ago, it expanded, engendering galaxies, star
clusters, solar systems, and planets.
When scientists looked at the cosmic
microwave background (CMB) — the
radiation left over from the Big Bang itself
— they saw an absolutely smooth glow
across the sky.
o They concluded that the early
universe must have been remarkably
uniform with only small variations
in density.
The S8 Tension
The clumpiness of the universe refers to
the non-uniform distribution of
matter, where matter is concentrated in
regions like galaxies and galaxy clusters,
while other regions are relatively empty.
The “clumpiness” is measured by
the “clumpiness factor,” often denoted as S8,
which reflects how much matter is
clustered together compared to an evenly
distributed scenario.
o A higher value for S8 indicates more
clustering with a greater amount of
matter clumped together, while a
lower value indicates a more
uniform distribution of matter.
S8 tension: A problem arose when
cosmologists used different ways to
measure the value of S8 and came up with
different estimates.
o This lack of agreement has come to
be called the ‘S8 tension’ in
astrophysics.
Why Does It Matters?
If this tension cannot be explained by
observational uncertainties it could mean:
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
180
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o The Lambda Cold Dark Matter
(ΛCDM) model is incomplete or
needs revision.
o Dark matter or dark energy may
behave differently than currently
assumed.
o New physics could be involved (e.g.,
interacting dark energy, modified
gravity, or even time-varying
fundamental constants).
The Lambda Cold Dark Matter (ΛCDM) Model
– Over the years, cosmologists have tried to map
the overall spread of matter through the early
universe.
– In the standard cosmological model, ΛCDM
model, dark matter and dark energy — the
mysterious force that drives the expansion of the
universe — comprise about 95% of the universe.
– The interplay between these components
influences how the primordial fluctuations evolved
into the large-scale structures that we observe
today.
Sun’s Subsurface Weather Tied to Its 11-Year
Activity Cycle
Syllabus: GS3/ Science and Technology
Context
A study led by astronomers from the Indian
Institute of Astrophysics (IIA) have probed
the dynamic “inner weather” of the Sun –
plasma currents just beneath its surface
that pulse in step with its 11-year sunspot
cycle.
About
The researchers have traced giant tides of
plasma beneath the Sun’s surface at a region
called near-surface shear layer (NSSL).
The plasma currents shift with the Sun’s
magnetic heartbeat and could have a far-
reaching influence on space weather and
Earth.
The methodology employed
was helioseismology, an advanced
technique that tracks sound waves as they
travel through the Sun, to observe changes
in the movement of solar material.
Near-surface shear layer (NSSL)
The NSSL extending to about 35,000 km in
depth is a critical region beneath the Sun’s
surface.
It is marked by distinct rotational
behaviours that vary with depth and by
changes, over space and time, that relate to
active region magnetic fields and the solar
cycle.
Patterns beneath the Sun’s surface
It was found that plasma on the Sun’s
surface moves toward areas where
sunspots appear (sunspots latitudes).
However the direction of the plasma flow
reverses midway through the NSSL, i.e.
instead of moving toward the sunspot
zones, the plasma starts moving outward,
away from them.
These changes in flow direction create
circular patterns called circulation
cells, which are strongly influenced by the
Sun’s rotation and the Coriolis force.
Way Ahead
The spinning flows change the way the Sun
rotates at different depths. This is
called rotational shear (the gradient of
rotation with depth).
180
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o The Lambda Cold Dark Matter
(ΛCDM) model is incomplete or
needs revision.
o Dark matter or dark energy may
behave differently than currently
assumed.
o New physics could be involved (e.g.,
interacting dark energy, modified
gravity, or even time-varying
fundamental constants).
The Lambda Cold Dark Matter (ΛCDM) Model
– Over the years, cosmologists have tried to map
the overall spread of matter through the early
universe.
– In the standard cosmological model, ΛCDM
model, dark matter and dark energy — the
mysterious force that drives the expansion of the
universe — comprise about 95% of the universe.
– The interplay between these components
influences how the primordial fluctuations evolved
into the large-scale structures that we observe
today.
Sun’s Subsurface Weather Tied to Its 11-Year
Activity Cycle
Syllabus: GS3/ Science and Technology
Context
A study led by astronomers from the Indian
Institute of Astrophysics (IIA) have probed
the dynamic “inner weather” of the Sun –
plasma currents just beneath its surface
that pulse in step with its 11-year sunspot
cycle.
About
The researchers have traced giant tides of
plasma beneath the Sun’s surface at a region
called near-surface shear layer (NSSL).
The plasma currents shift with the Sun’s
magnetic heartbeat and could have a far-
reaching influence on space weather and
Earth.
The methodology employed
was helioseismology, an advanced
technique that tracks sound waves as they
travel through the Sun, to observe changes
in the movement of solar material.
Near-surface shear layer (NSSL)
The NSSL extending to about 35,000 km in
depth is a critical region beneath the Sun’s
surface.
It is marked by distinct rotational
behaviours that vary with depth and by
changes, over space and time, that relate to
active region magnetic fields and the solar
cycle.
Patterns beneath the Sun’s surface
It was found that plasma on the Sun’s
surface moves toward areas where
sunspots appear (sunspots latitudes).
However the direction of the plasma flow
reverses midway through the NSSL, i.e.
instead of moving toward the sunspot
zones, the plasma starts moving outward,
away from them.
These changes in flow direction create
circular patterns called circulation
cells, which are strongly influenced by the
Sun’s rotation and the Coriolis force.
Way Ahead
The spinning flows change the way the Sun
rotates at different depths. This is
called rotational shear (the gradient of
rotation with depth).
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
181
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
However these local flows, near the surface,
don’t explain the Sun’s larger, deeper flows
also known as torsional oscillations.
Hence it suggests that these global flows,
which ripple through the Sun’s vast interior,
must be powered by something deeper and
more mysterious.
Concluding remarks
Solar activity directly affects space weather,
which can disrupt satellites, power grids,
and communication systems on Earth.
This study takes a step closer to building
accurate models that can predict the Sun’s
behaviour more reliably.
What is the solar cycle?
– The Sun, like a bar magnet, possesses a magnetic
field with north and south poles.
– This magnetic field is generated by the movement
of electrically charged particles within the Sun.
– Approximately every 11 years, the Sun’s magnetic
field completely flips, switching its north and south
poles—a phenomenon known as the solar cycle.
Solar Maximum and Solar Minimum
– Solar maximum is the peak phase of the Sun’s 11-
year cycle, characterized by heightened solar
activity.
1. During this period, the Sun emits more energy,
radiation, and light and experiences an increased
number of sunspots.
– Solar Minimum: The lowest point of the cycle,
when the Sun is relatively calm and there are fewer
sunspots, is called solar minimum.
World’s Largest Fusion Project Reaches Milestone
With India’s Help
Syllabus :GS 3/Science and Tech
In News
Scientists have completed the main magnet
system for ITER (International
Thermonuclear Experimental Reactor), with
India playing a significant role in building
critical infrastructure.
International Thermonuclear Experimental
Reactor(ITER)
The International Thermo-nuclear
Experimental Reactor (ITER) Project is
currently under construction in a 180-
hectare site in Southern France.
Over 30 countries, including India, China,
the US, Russia, Japan, South Korea, and the
EU are collaborating to build the world’s
largest tokamak, a magnetic fusion device to
prove the feasibility of nuclear fusion as a
large-scale and carbon-free source of
energy.
Do you know?
– Nuclear fusion generates energy through merging
of two light nuclei to form a single heavier
nucleus. Fusion reactions power the Sun and other
stars.
Objectives
It aims to demonstrate fusion energy as a
safe and carbon-free power source.
o Unlike fission, fusion does not
produce radioactive waste.
It will produce 500 megawatts of energy
from 50 megawatts of input, creating a self-
sustaining plasma state known as “burning
plasma”, crucial for unlocking fusion energy.
o ITER will not produce electricity but
will serve as a large research facility
to test fusion at scale, generating
data for future commercial fusion
plants.
Cost Sharing
Europe is bearing 45 per cent of the
construction cost.
o The other six members — India,
China, Japan, South Korea, Russia
and the US — are each contributing
about 9 per cent. But all members
will get full access to the research
results and patents.
Contributions by Countries
US Built the Central Solenoid, the core
component of the magnet system.
Russia provided the Poloidal Field magnet.
181
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
However these local flows, near the surface,
don’t explain the Sun’s larger, deeper flows
also known as torsional oscillations.
Hence it suggests that these global flows,
which ripple through the Sun’s vast interior,
must be powered by something deeper and
more mysterious.
Concluding remarks
Solar activity directly affects space weather,
which can disrupt satellites, power grids,
and communication systems on Earth.
This study takes a step closer to building
accurate models that can predict the Sun’s
behaviour more reliably.
What is the solar cycle?
– The Sun, like a bar magnet, possesses a magnetic
field with north and south poles.
– This magnetic field is generated by the movement
of electrically charged particles within the Sun.
– Approximately every 11 years, the Sun’s magnetic
field completely flips, switching its north and south
poles—a phenomenon known as the solar cycle.
Solar Maximum and Solar Minimum
– Solar maximum is the peak phase of the Sun’s 11-
year cycle, characterized by heightened solar
activity.
1. During this period, the Sun emits more energy,
radiation, and light and experiences an increased
number of sunspots.
– Solar Minimum: The lowest point of the cycle,
when the Sun is relatively calm and there are fewer
sunspots, is called solar minimum.
World’s Largest Fusion Project Reaches Milestone
With India’s Help
Syllabus :GS 3/Science and Tech
In News
Scientists have completed the main magnet
system for ITER (International
Thermonuclear Experimental Reactor), with
India playing a significant role in building
critical infrastructure.
International Thermonuclear Experimental
Reactor(ITER)
The International Thermo-nuclear
Experimental Reactor (ITER) Project is
currently under construction in a 180-
hectare site in Southern France.
Over 30 countries, including India, China,
the US, Russia, Japan, South Korea, and the
EU are collaborating to build the world’s
largest tokamak, a magnetic fusion device to
prove the feasibility of nuclear fusion as a
large-scale and carbon-free source of
energy.
Do you know?
– Nuclear fusion generates energy through merging
of two light nuclei to form a single heavier
nucleus. Fusion reactions power the Sun and other
stars.
Objectives
It aims to demonstrate fusion energy as a
safe and carbon-free power source.
o Unlike fission, fusion does not
produce radioactive waste.
It will produce 500 megawatts of energy
from 50 megawatts of input, creating a self-
sustaining plasma state known as “burning
plasma”, crucial for unlocking fusion energy.
o ITER will not produce electricity but
will serve as a large research facility
to test fusion at scale, generating
data for future commercial fusion
plants.
Cost Sharing
Europe is bearing 45 per cent of the
construction cost.
o The other six members — India,
China, Japan, South Korea, Russia
and the US — are each contributing
about 9 per cent. But all members
will get full access to the research
results and patents.
Contributions by Countries
US Built the Central Solenoid, the core
component of the magnet system.
Russia provided the Poloidal Field magnet.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
182
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Europe designed four large Poloidal Field
magnets.
China contributed Poloidal Field magnets
and superconducting Correction Coil
magnets.
Japan produced 43 kilometers of Nb3Sn
superconductor strand.
Korea created tooling for pre-assembling
large components.
India’s Role
India is one of the seven main members of
ITER and has contributed to key
infrastructure, including the cryostat
cooling systems, heating technologies, and
the cryolines that cool the magnets.
o India designed the cryostat, a 30-
meter tall chamber housing the
ITER Tokamak, and built systems to
cool the magnets to
superconducting temperatures of -
269°C.
India also delivered shielding, cooling water
systems, and heating components.
Progress
ITER completed its powerful pulsed
superconducting electromagnet system, a
crucial part of the Tokamak, which will
weigh nearly 3,000 tonnes.
o The system will help create a
plasma by ionizing hydrogen fuel
(deuterium and tritium), which will
then be heated to 150 million
degrees Celsius to facilitate nuclear
fusion, similar to the Sun’s process.
Future Outlook
ITER’s progress reflects international
cooperation and hope for a sustainable,
peaceful energy future.
ITER is expected to begin scientific
operations in 2034, with Deuterium-
Tritium operations starting in 2039.
o If successful, fusion could provide
nearly limitless, clean energy
without radioactive waste or carbon
emissions, addressing global energy
challenges.
Brain-Computer Interface (BCI) to Enable Movement
in People with Paralysis
Syllabus: GS3/ Science and Technology
Context
Researchers from the University of
California, have developed a new brain-
computer interface that enables movement
for people who are paralysed.
What is a Brain-Computer Interface (BCI)?
A Brain-Computer Interface is a direct
communication pathway between
the brain’s electrical activity and an external
device.
Typically, BCIs are used to assist, augment,
or repair human cognitive or sensory-motor
functions.
In this case, the BCI records signals from the
brain’s motor cortex—the area responsible
for movement—and decodes them using
artificial intelligence to operate robotic
limbs.
Types of BCIs
Invasive BCI: The devices are surgically
implanted into the brain to directly interact
with the nervous system, enabling
communication and control between the
brain and external devices.
o It offers the most accurate signals;
used in cases of paralysis or locked-
in syndrome.
o Example: Neuralink’s Blindsight
Partially Invasive BCI: The devices
are implanted within the skull but rest
outside the brain, typically on the dura
mater, a membrane surrounding the brain.
o They are used to record electrical
signals from the brain’s surface
using techniques
like electrocorticography (ECoG).
182
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Europe designed four large Poloidal Field
magnets.
China contributed Poloidal Field magnets
and superconducting Correction Coil
magnets.
Japan produced 43 kilometers of Nb3Sn
superconductor strand.
Korea created tooling for pre-assembling
large components.
India’s Role
India is one of the seven main members of
ITER and has contributed to key
infrastructure, including the cryostat
cooling systems, heating technologies, and
the cryolines that cool the magnets.
o India designed the cryostat, a 30-
meter tall chamber housing the
ITER Tokamak, and built systems to
cool the magnets to
superconducting temperatures of -
269°C.
India also delivered shielding, cooling water
systems, and heating components.
Progress
ITER completed its powerful pulsed
superconducting electromagnet system, a
crucial part of the Tokamak, which will
weigh nearly 3,000 tonnes.
o The system will help create a
plasma by ionizing hydrogen fuel
(deuterium and tritium), which will
then be heated to 150 million
degrees Celsius to facilitate nuclear
fusion, similar to the Sun’s process.
Future Outlook
ITER’s progress reflects international
cooperation and hope for a sustainable,
peaceful energy future.
ITER is expected to begin scientific
operations in 2034, with Deuterium-
Tritium operations starting in 2039.
o If successful, fusion could provide
nearly limitless, clean energy
without radioactive waste or carbon
emissions, addressing global energy
challenges.
Brain-Computer Interface (BCI) to Enable Movement
in People with Paralysis
Syllabus: GS3/ Science and Technology
Context
Researchers from the University of
California, have developed a new brain-
computer interface that enables movement
for people who are paralysed.
What is a Brain-Computer Interface (BCI)?
A Brain-Computer Interface is a direct
communication pathway between
the brain’s electrical activity and an external
device.
Typically, BCIs are used to assist, augment,
or repair human cognitive or sensory-motor
functions.
In this case, the BCI records signals from the
brain’s motor cortex—the area responsible
for movement—and decodes them using
artificial intelligence to operate robotic
limbs.
Types of BCIs
Invasive BCI: The devices are surgically
implanted into the brain to directly interact
with the nervous system, enabling
communication and control between the
brain and external devices.
o It offers the most accurate signals;
used in cases of paralysis or locked-
in syndrome.
o Example: Neuralink’s Blindsight
Partially Invasive BCI: The devices
are implanted within the skull but rest
outside the brain, typically on the dura
mater, a membrane surrounding the brain.
o They are used to record electrical
signals from the brain’s surface
using techniques
like electrocorticography (ECoG).
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
183
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Non-Invasive BCI: These are systems
that allow users to interact with external
devices (like computers or robots) using
their thoughts, without the need for
surgery.
o They typically use external sensors
like EEG electrodes to detect brain
signals, making them safer and more
accessible than invasive BCIs.
Applications of BCIs
Medical and Rehabilitation:
o Assistive Devices: Control of
wheelchairs, robotic arms, or
computer cursors by people with
paralysis.
o Neurorehabilitation: Post-stroke
motor recovery by training brain
pathways through BCIs.
o Prosthetic Control: Artificial limbs
operated via brain signals.
Education and Training:
Attention Monitoring: In classrooms to track
student engagement.
Skill Development: Feedback on focus or brain
activity while learning complex tasks.
Industry and Automation:
BCI in Human-Robot Interaction: Enhancing
collaborative robots in factories.
Hands-Free Control in Hazardous Work: For miners
or chemical plant workers where hands are
occupied.
Concerns Associated with BCIs
Privacy: There is a significant risk of misuse
of neural data collected through BCIs, as
these systems can potentially access
sensitive thoughts, intentions, or emotions
of individuals.
Digital Divide: High costs and technological
complexity of BCI systems could widen the
digital divide, leaving marginalized groups
without access to these life-changing
innovations.
Mental Autonomy: There are concerns that
prolonged use of BCIs might alter brain
function or reduce an individual’s sense of
agency, raising questions about mental
autonomy and identity.
Way Ahead
To ensure that BCIs benefit the masses,
especially people with disabilities, it is
essential to develop low-cost, scalable
solutions.
Public-private partnerships and startups
can help translate lab innovations into real-
world applications.
Further establishing educational programs
and professional certifications will help
build a skilled workforce in this emerging
field.
‘One Day One Genome’ Initiative to Harness the
Microbial Potential
Syllabus :GS 3/Science and Technology
In News
The Department of Biotechnology (DBT)
has released graphical summaries,
infographics, and detailed data on 100+
bacterial genomes as part of the ‘One Day
One Genome’ initiative.
About
The genome, or genetic material, of an
organism is made up of a unique DNA or
RNA sequence.
Each sequence is composed of chemical
building blocks known as nucleotide bases.
Determining the order of bases is
called “genomic sequencing” or, simply,
“sequencing.”
‘One Day One Genome’ initiative
It was launched by the Department of Biotechnology
(DBT) and Biotechnology Research and Innovation
Council (BRIC) in November , 2024, to showcase
India’s rich microbial diversity and its vital roles in
environmental sustainability, agriculture, and
human health.
183
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Non-Invasive BCI: These are systems
that allow users to interact with external
devices (like computers or robots) using
their thoughts, without the need for
surgery.
o They typically use external sensors
like EEG electrodes to detect brain
signals, making them safer and more
accessible than invasive BCIs.
Applications of BCIs
Medical and Rehabilitation:
o Assistive Devices: Control of
wheelchairs, robotic arms, or
computer cursors by people with
paralysis.
o Neurorehabilitation: Post-stroke
motor recovery by training brain
pathways through BCIs.
o Prosthetic Control: Artificial limbs
operated via brain signals.
Education and Training:
Attention Monitoring: In classrooms to track
student engagement.
Skill Development: Feedback on focus or brain
activity while learning complex tasks.
Industry and Automation:
BCI in Human-Robot Interaction: Enhancing
collaborative robots in factories.
Hands-Free Control in Hazardous Work: For miners
or chemical plant workers where hands are
occupied.
Concerns Associated with BCIs
Privacy: There is a significant risk of misuse
of neural data collected through BCIs, as
these systems can potentially access
sensitive thoughts, intentions, or emotions
of individuals.
Digital Divide: High costs and technological
complexity of BCI systems could widen the
digital divide, leaving marginalized groups
without access to these life-changing
innovations.
Mental Autonomy: There are concerns that
prolonged use of BCIs might alter brain
function or reduce an individual’s sense of
agency, raising questions about mental
autonomy and identity.
Way Ahead
To ensure that BCIs benefit the masses,
especially people with disabilities, it is
essential to develop low-cost, scalable
solutions.
Public-private partnerships and startups
can help translate lab innovations into real-
world applications.
Further establishing educational programs
and professional certifications will help
build a skilled workforce in this emerging
field.
‘One Day One Genome’ Initiative to Harness the
Microbial Potential
Syllabus :GS 3/Science and Technology
In News
The Department of Biotechnology (DBT)
has released graphical summaries,
infographics, and detailed data on 100+
bacterial genomes as part of the ‘One Day
One Genome’ initiative.
About
The genome, or genetic material, of an
organism is made up of a unique DNA or
RNA sequence.
Each sequence is composed of chemical
building blocks known as nucleotide bases.
Determining the order of bases is
called “genomic sequencing” or, simply,
“sequencing.”
‘One Day One Genome’ initiative
It was launched by the Department of Biotechnology
(DBT) and Biotechnology Research and Innovation
Council (BRIC) in November , 2024, to showcase
India’s rich microbial diversity and its vital roles in
environmental sustainability, agriculture, and
human health.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
184
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
The initiative is coordinated by BRIC-National
Institute of Biomedical Genomics (NIBMG), West
Bengal
Data is shared from 13 BRIC institutions and two
autonomous bodies:
International Centre for Genetic Engineering and
Biotechnology (ICGEB) New Delhi and Regional
Centre for Biotechnology (RCB) Faridabad.
It aims to harness India’s microbial potential and
make genome data accessible for scientific and
industrial use.
Importance
It emphasizes the importance of microorganisms in
biogeochemical cycles, soil fertility, nutrient
cycling, pest control, and human immunity and
digestion.
Genome sequencing will uncover microbial abilities
such as enzyme production, antimicrobial
resistance, and bioactive compound generation,
aiding environmental protection, agricultural
advancement, and public health.
Each genome release will include infographics,
annotation details, and industrial applications,
making microbial science more accessible and
impactful for both researchers and the general
public.
Do you know?
– GenomeIndia is a landmark genomics project
funded by the Department of
Biotechnology, Government of India, involving 20
academic and research institutions.
– Its main goal is to create a comprehensive
catalogue of genetic variations representing India’s
diverse population.
– So far, the project has collected 20,000 samples
from 83 populations across India and completed
whole genome sequencing for 10,000 of them.
– This data is archived at the Indian Biological Data
Centre and will be accessible under BIOTECH-
PRIDE guidelines via the FeED protocol.
1. The findings aim to enable affordable, genomics-
based diagnostics and precision medicine tailored
to the Indian population, supporting national
public health initiatives.
Hydrogen Versus Battery as Fuel Source
Syllabus: GS3/ Energy
Context
As the world moves towards sustainable
transportation, Hydrogen Fuel Cell Electric
Vehicles (FCEVs) present an alternative to
the battery electric vehicles (BEVs)
currently dominating the market.
Battery Electric Vehicles (BEVs)
BEVs are powered by electricity stored in
rechargeable batteries.
They require regular charging from external
power sources, typically through the electric
grid.
Fuel Cell Electric Vehicles (FCEVs)
FCEVs use hydrogen gas to generate
electricity through a chemical process in
fuel cells.
They emit only water vapor as a byproduct,
making them environmentally friendly.
Hydrogen Versus Battery as Fuel Source
Feature
Battery Electric
Vehicles
Hydrogen Fuel
Cell Vehicles
Refuelling
Time
Hours (depending
on charger)
5–15 minutes
Range Moderate Long
Weight
Heavier (due to
batteries)
Lighter
Terrain
Suitability
Limited for off-
road
Suitable for
rugged conditions
184
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
The initiative is coordinated by BRIC-National
Institute of Biomedical Genomics (NIBMG), West
Bengal
Data is shared from 13 BRIC institutions and two
autonomous bodies:
International Centre for Genetic Engineering and
Biotechnology (ICGEB) New Delhi and Regional
Centre for Biotechnology (RCB) Faridabad.
It aims to harness India’s microbial potential and
make genome data accessible for scientific and
industrial use.
Importance
It emphasizes the importance of microorganisms in
biogeochemical cycles, soil fertility, nutrient
cycling, pest control, and human immunity and
digestion.
Genome sequencing will uncover microbial abilities
such as enzyme production, antimicrobial
resistance, and bioactive compound generation,
aiding environmental protection, agricultural
advancement, and public health.
Each genome release will include infographics,
annotation details, and industrial applications,
making microbial science more accessible and
impactful for both researchers and the general
public.
Do you know?
– GenomeIndia is a landmark genomics project
funded by the Department of
Biotechnology, Government of India, involving 20
academic and research institutions.
– Its main goal is to create a comprehensive
catalogue of genetic variations representing India’s
diverse population.
– So far, the project has collected 20,000 samples
from 83 populations across India and completed
whole genome sequencing for 10,000 of them.
– This data is archived at the Indian Biological Data
Centre and will be accessible under BIOTECH-
PRIDE guidelines via the FeED protocol.
1. The findings aim to enable affordable, genomics-
based diagnostics and precision medicine tailored
to the Indian population, supporting national
public health initiatives.
Hydrogen Versus Battery as Fuel Source
Syllabus: GS3/ Energy
Context
As the world moves towards sustainable
transportation, Hydrogen Fuel Cell Electric
Vehicles (FCEVs) present an alternative to
the battery electric vehicles (BEVs)
currently dominating the market.
Battery Electric Vehicles (BEVs)
BEVs are powered by electricity stored in
rechargeable batteries.
They require regular charging from external
power sources, typically through the electric
grid.
Fuel Cell Electric Vehicles (FCEVs)
FCEVs use hydrogen gas to generate
electricity through a chemical process in
fuel cells.
They emit only water vapor as a byproduct,
making them environmentally friendly.
Hydrogen Versus Battery as Fuel Source
Feature
Battery Electric
Vehicles
Hydrogen Fuel
Cell Vehicles
Refuelling
Time
Hours (depending
on charger)
5–15 minutes
Range Moderate Long
Weight
Heavier (due to
batteries)
Lighter
Terrain
Suitability
Limited for off-
road
Suitable for
rugged conditions
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
185
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Feature
Battery Electric
Vehicles
Hydrogen Fuel
Cell Vehicles
Cold Climate
Suitability
Performance
drops
Performs better
India’s Electric Vehicle Landscape
EVs accounted for 5% of total vehicle sales
in 2023.
Electric 3-Wheelers: India became the
world’s largest market for electric three-
wheelers in 2023, overtaking China.
o India contributes to 60% of global
sales in this segment.
Electric 2-Wheelers: India is the second-
largest global market with 0.88 million units
sold in 2023. China remains far ahead with
6 million units sold.
o India, China, and ASEAN nations
lead in this domain; other regions
make up less than 5% of the global
two- and three-wheeler market.
Cloud-Seeding Trials Across National Capital Region
(NCR)
Syllabus: GS3/Science and Technology, Environment
Context
The Delhi Cabinet approved a Rs 3.21-crore
project for conducting five cloud-seeding
trials across the National Capital Region
(NCR) amid the fight against pollution.
What is Cloud Seeding?
Cloud seeding is a weather modification
technique aimed at enhancing precipitation
from clouds by introducing substances that
act as cloud condensation or ice nuclei.
Method: Aircraft or rockets disperse
seeding agents like silver iodide, potassium
iodide, or dry ice (solid carbon dioxide), or
liquid propane into the atmosphere.
Purpose: Stimulate rainfall, reduce dust,
suppress hailstorms, and improve air
quality by settling particulates.
Suitable Conditions for Cloud Seeding
Cloud seeding requires existing clouds; it
will not produce rain out of thin air.
Not all types of clouds are suitable for
seeding. Clouds must be deep enough and of
a suitable temperature (between -10 and -
12 degrees Celsius) to be seeded effectively.
The wind must be below a certain speed.
These conditions are most common in
mountainous areas.
Concerns with Cloud Seeding
Use of Chemicals: Some chemicals are
potentially harmful to the natural
environment. There is concern about soil
and water contamination, especially
affecting plants and crops that rely on
rainwater for nourishment.
Redistribution of Rainfall: Artificially
inducing rainfall in one area
may deprive adjacent areas of their natural
185
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Feature
Battery Electric
Vehicles
Hydrogen Fuel
Cell Vehicles
Cold Climate
Suitability
Performance
drops
Performs better
India’s Electric Vehicle Landscape
EVs accounted for 5% of total vehicle sales
in 2023.
Electric 3-Wheelers: India became the
world’s largest market for electric three-
wheelers in 2023, overtaking China.
o India contributes to 60% of global
sales in this segment.
Electric 2-Wheelers: India is the second-
largest global market with 0.88 million units
sold in 2023. China remains far ahead with
6 million units sold.
o India, China, and ASEAN nations
lead in this domain; other regions
make up less than 5% of the global
two- and three-wheeler market.
Cloud-Seeding Trials Across National Capital Region
(NCR)
Syllabus: GS3/Science and Technology, Environment
Context
The Delhi Cabinet approved a Rs 3.21-crore
project for conducting five cloud-seeding
trials across the National Capital Region
(NCR) amid the fight against pollution.
What is Cloud Seeding?
Cloud seeding is a weather modification
technique aimed at enhancing precipitation
from clouds by introducing substances that
act as cloud condensation or ice nuclei.
Method: Aircraft or rockets disperse
seeding agents like silver iodide, potassium
iodide, or dry ice (solid carbon dioxide), or
liquid propane into the atmosphere.
Purpose: Stimulate rainfall, reduce dust,
suppress hailstorms, and improve air
quality by settling particulates.
Suitable Conditions for Cloud Seeding
Cloud seeding requires existing clouds; it
will not produce rain out of thin air.
Not all types of clouds are suitable for
seeding. Clouds must be deep enough and of
a suitable temperature (between -10 and -
12 degrees Celsius) to be seeded effectively.
The wind must be below a certain speed.
These conditions are most common in
mountainous areas.
Concerns with Cloud Seeding
Use of Chemicals: Some chemicals are
potentially harmful to the natural
environment. There is concern about soil
and water contamination, especially
affecting plants and crops that rely on
rainwater for nourishment.
Redistribution of Rainfall: Artificially
inducing rainfall in one area
may deprive adjacent areas of their natural
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
186
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
precipitation, potentially triggering
drought-like conditions elsewhere.
High Cost: Cloud seeding
requires specialized aircraft, meteorological
expertise, and precision timing, making it a
cost-intensive initiative.
Concluding remarks
Cloud seeding offers a technological
solution to mitigate the immediate impact
of air pollution in NCR, especially during
critical months.
However, it should be part of a multi-
pronged approach involving emissions
control, green infrastructure, and public
health measures.
Air Defence Systems: India & World
Syllabus: GS3/Security; Science & Technology
Context
Recently, India thwarted Pakistani aerial
attacks along the western border through
its air defence systems, and successfully
neutralized an air defence system in Lahore,
Pakistan.
About the Air Defence Systems
These are critical components of a nation’s
security infrastructure, designed to detect,
track, and neutralize aerial threats such as
enemy aircraft, missiles, and drones.
These systems operate through layered
defense mechanisms, combining radars,
missile interceptors, electronic warfare
tools, and command centers to safeguard
airspace.
Key Components of Air Defence Systems
Detection and Surveillance:
Radar Systems: Air defence begins with high-
frequency radar waves that detect incoming threats
by bouncing signals off objects in the sky.
Satellite and Infrared Sensors: Advanced systems
use satellite imaging and infrared tracking to
identify stealth aircraft and hypersonic missiles.
Tracking and Target Identification: Once a threat is
detected, tracking systems analyze its speed,
altitude, and trajectory to determine its nature—
whether it’s a fighter jet, ballistic missile, or drone.
Command centers assess the threat level and decide
on the appropriate response.
Engagement and Neutralization:
Surface-to-Air Missiles (SAMs): These missiles
intercept enemy aircraft or incoming projectiles
before they reach their target.
Electronic Warfare (EW) Systems: Jammers disrupt
enemy communications and radar signals, reducing
their ability to coordinate attacks.
Anti-Aircraft Artillery: In close-range combat, high-
caliber guns provide an additional layer of defense.
Types of Air Defence Systems
Short-Range Air Defence
(SHORAD): Designed to counter low-
altitude threats, including drones and cruise
missiles.
o Example: Barak-8 Missile System.
Medium-Range Air Defence (MRAD): Covers
larger areas, intercepting fighter jets and
long-range missiles.
186
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
precipitation, potentially triggering
drought-like conditions elsewhere.
High Cost: Cloud seeding
requires specialized aircraft, meteorological
expertise, and precision timing, making it a
cost-intensive initiative.
Concluding remarks
Cloud seeding offers a technological
solution to mitigate the immediate impact
of air pollution in NCR, especially during
critical months.
However, it should be part of a multi-
pronged approach involving emissions
control, green infrastructure, and public
health measures.
Air Defence Systems: India & World
Syllabus: GS3/Security; Science & Technology
Context
Recently, India thwarted Pakistani aerial
attacks along the western border through
its air defence systems, and successfully
neutralized an air defence system in Lahore,
Pakistan.
About the Air Defence Systems
These are critical components of a nation’s
security infrastructure, designed to detect,
track, and neutralize aerial threats such as
enemy aircraft, missiles, and drones.
These systems operate through layered
defense mechanisms, combining radars,
missile interceptors, electronic warfare
tools, and command centers to safeguard
airspace.
Key Components of Air Defence Systems
Detection and Surveillance:
Radar Systems: Air defence begins with high-
frequency radar waves that detect incoming threats
by bouncing signals off objects in the sky.
Satellite and Infrared Sensors: Advanced systems
use satellite imaging and infrared tracking to
identify stealth aircraft and hypersonic missiles.
Tracking and Target Identification: Once a threat is
detected, tracking systems analyze its speed,
altitude, and trajectory to determine its nature—
whether it’s a fighter jet, ballistic missile, or drone.
Command centers assess the threat level and decide
on the appropriate response.
Engagement and Neutralization:
Surface-to-Air Missiles (SAMs): These missiles
intercept enemy aircraft or incoming projectiles
before they reach their target.
Electronic Warfare (EW) Systems: Jammers disrupt
enemy communications and radar signals, reducing
their ability to coordinate attacks.
Anti-Aircraft Artillery: In close-range combat, high-
caliber guns provide an additional layer of defense.
Types of Air Defence Systems
Short-Range Air Defence
(SHORAD): Designed to counter low-
altitude threats, including drones and cruise
missiles.
o Example: Barak-8 Missile System.
Medium-Range Air Defence (MRAD): Covers
larger areas, intercepting fighter jets and
long-range missiles.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
187
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Examples: Patriot Missile System, S-
400 Triumf.
Long-Range Air Defence (LRAD): Protects
entire regions, capable of neutralizing
intercontinental ballistic missiles (ICBMs).
o Examples: THAAD, Aegis Ballistic
Missile Defense.
Key Air Defence Systems in India
– Akash Missile System: It is a Surface-to-Air Missile
(SAM) system designed to neutralize multiple
airborne threats simultaneously, using command
guidance and phased array radar.
– S-400 Triumf Missile System: It is procured from
Russia, which enhances India’s air defence
capabilities.
1. It can detect and intercept ballistic missiles,
fighter jets, and drones at distances up to 400 km.
2. It is also used by China, and Turkey for ballistic
missile and aircraft defense.
– Integrated Counter-UAS Grid: India has
deployed counter-drone technology to neutralize
hostile UAVs along sensitive borders.
1. It integrates radar detection, electronic jamming,
and kinetic interception to prevent aerial
intrusions.
– Barak-8 Missile System: It is jointly developed
by India and Israel, and provides high-speed
interception against airborne threats.
1. It enhances naval and land-based air defence
capabilities.
Other Air Defence Systems in the World
– Patriot Missile System (United States): It is widely
deployed for missile interception and aerial threat
neutralization.
1. It is used by the U.S., Germany, Japan, and Saudi
Arabia for high-altitude defense.
– Iron Dome (Israel): It is designed for short-range
missile interception, particularly effective against
rocket attacks.
1. It is used extensively by Israel to protect urban
areas and military installations.
– Terminal High Altitude Area Defense (THAAD) –
United States: It is a high-altitude missile defense
system capable of intercepting ballistic missiles in
their terminal phase.
1. It is deployed by the U.S., South Korea, and Japan
for regional security.
National Technological Day
Syllabus: GS3/Science and Technology
Context
May 11 marked the 27th National Technological Day
of India.
This year’s theme is “YANTRA”, which signifies
transformation through advanced research and
technological acceleration.
About
Former Prime Minister Atal Bihari
Vajpayee designated May 11 as National
Technology Day in India to commemorate
the Pokhran nuclear tests conducted by the
Indian Army in 1998.
On May 11, 1998, two other special
technological advances were showcased by
India’s scientists and engineers.
o The successful test firing of Trishul
missile; and the first test flight of the
indigenously developed aircraft
Hansa.
This observance aims to cultivate a scientific
mindset and inspire the younger generation
to pursue careers in technology,
engineering, and mathematics.
Do You Know?
– India is currently among nine countries in the
world that have a publicly known nuclear weapons
programme.Homi Jehangir Bhabha is credited with
pioneering India’s nuclear programme.
Ancient India’s Contribution to Science
187
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Examples: Patriot Missile System, S-
400 Triumf.
Long-Range Air Defence (LRAD): Protects
entire regions, capable of neutralizing
intercontinental ballistic missiles (ICBMs).
o Examples: THAAD, Aegis Ballistic
Missile Defense.
Key Air Defence Systems in India
– Akash Missile System: It is a Surface-to-Air Missile
(SAM) system designed to neutralize multiple
airborne threats simultaneously, using command
guidance and phased array radar.
– S-400 Triumf Missile System: It is procured from
Russia, which enhances India’s air defence
capabilities.
1. It can detect and intercept ballistic missiles,
fighter jets, and drones at distances up to 400 km.
2. It is also used by China, and Turkey for ballistic
missile and aircraft defense.
– Integrated Counter-UAS Grid: India has
deployed counter-drone technology to neutralize
hostile UAVs along sensitive borders.
1. It integrates radar detection, electronic jamming,
and kinetic interception to prevent aerial
intrusions.
– Barak-8 Missile System: It is jointly developed
by India and Israel, and provides high-speed
interception against airborne threats.
1. It enhances naval and land-based air defence
capabilities.
Other Air Defence Systems in the World
– Patriot Missile System (United States): It is widely
deployed for missile interception and aerial threat
neutralization.
1. It is used by the U.S., Germany, Japan, and Saudi
Arabia for high-altitude defense.
– Iron Dome (Israel): It is designed for short-range
missile interception, particularly effective against
rocket attacks.
1. It is used extensively by Israel to protect urban
areas and military installations.
– Terminal High Altitude Area Defense (THAAD) –
United States: It is a high-altitude missile defense
system capable of intercepting ballistic missiles in
their terminal phase.
1. It is deployed by the U.S., South Korea, and Japan
for regional security.
National Technological Day
Syllabus: GS3/Science and Technology
Context
May 11 marked the 27th National Technological Day
of India.
This year’s theme is “YANTRA”, which signifies
transformation through advanced research and
technological acceleration.
About
Former Prime Minister Atal Bihari
Vajpayee designated May 11 as National
Technology Day in India to commemorate
the Pokhran nuclear tests conducted by the
Indian Army in 1998.
On May 11, 1998, two other special
technological advances were showcased by
India’s scientists and engineers.
o The successful test firing of Trishul
missile; and the first test flight of the
indigenously developed aircraft
Hansa.
This observance aims to cultivate a scientific
mindset and inspire the younger generation
to pursue careers in technology,
engineering, and mathematics.
Do You Know?
– India is currently among nine countries in the
world that have a publicly known nuclear weapons
programme.Homi Jehangir Bhabha is credited with
pioneering India’s nuclear programme.
Ancient India’s Contribution to Science
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
188
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
India’s Technological Achievements
India secured the 39th rank in the Global
Innovation Index 2024 and 6th position in
global Intellectual Property (IP) filings, as
per the WIPO report.
The Network Readiness Index (NRI)
2024 also marked India’s rise to 49th place
from 79th in 2019, showcasing
advancements in ICT infrastructure and
digital transformation.
India has also emerged as the third-largest
startup ecosystem in the world, fostering
entrepreneurship and technological
advancement.
India’s Agricultural Achievements:
Green Revolution (1960s–1970s): Introduction of
high-yielding varieties (HYVs) of wheat and rice.
White Revolution (1970s): India became the world’s
largest milk producer, ending milk imports.
India’s Indigenous Defence Technology
Achievements:
INS Kalvari (1967): India’s first indigenous naval
submarine, marked the beginning of ‘Made-in-India’
defence capabilities.
Agni Series: Long-range ballistic missiles for
strategic deterrence.
Prithvi Series: Surface-to-surface tactical missiles.
BrahMos: Co-developed with Russia, world’s fastest
supersonic cruise missile.
Tejas (LCA): India’s first indigenously developed
supersonic fighter jet.
INS Arihant: India’s first ballistic missile nuclear
submarine.
INS Vikrant (2022): First indigenous aircraft
carrier, a major naval milestone.
India’s Indigenous Space Technology Achievements:
Chandrayaan-1 (2008): India’s first lunar mission.
Became the 4th country to send a probe to the
moon.
Discovered water molecules on the lunar surface—
a groundbreaking scientific achievement.
Mars Orbiter Mission (Mangalyaan, 2013): India
became the first nation to reach Mars on its first
attempt.
104 Satellites in One Launch (2017): Set a world
record for the most satellites deployed in a single
mission.
Chandrayaan-3 (2023): Achieved a soft landing near
the Moon’s south pole, a global first.
Aditya-L1 (2023): India’s first solar mission,
studying the Sun’s outer layers.
Gaganyaan (2027): India’s first crewed spaceflight
mission.
Shukrayaan (2028): Venus orbiter mission, aiming
to explore the planet’s dense atmosphere.
Digital Infrastructure:
Aadhaar: World’s largest biometric ID system.
UPI (Unified Payments Interface): Revolutionized
digital payments and fintech.
India leads in real-time digital transactions globally.
Government Initiatives to Boost Technology
Advancements:
Make in India (2014): Boosts domestic
manufacturing, including in high-tech
sectors like defence, electronics,
semiconductors, and space technology.
Atal Innovation Mission (AIM): Launched by
NITI Aayog to promote a culture of
188
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
India’s Technological Achievements
India secured the 39th rank in the Global
Innovation Index 2024 and 6th position in
global Intellectual Property (IP) filings, as
per the WIPO report.
The Network Readiness Index (NRI)
2024 also marked India’s rise to 49th place
from 79th in 2019, showcasing
advancements in ICT infrastructure and
digital transformation.
India has also emerged as the third-largest
startup ecosystem in the world, fostering
entrepreneurship and technological
advancement.
India’s Agricultural Achievements:
Green Revolution (1960s–1970s): Introduction of
high-yielding varieties (HYVs) of wheat and rice.
White Revolution (1970s): India became the world’s
largest milk producer, ending milk imports.
India’s Indigenous Defence Technology
Achievements:
INS Kalvari (1967): India’s first indigenous naval
submarine, marked the beginning of ‘Made-in-India’
defence capabilities.
Agni Series: Long-range ballistic missiles for
strategic deterrence.
Prithvi Series: Surface-to-surface tactical missiles.
BrahMos: Co-developed with Russia, world’s fastest
supersonic cruise missile.
Tejas (LCA): India’s first indigenously developed
supersonic fighter jet.
INS Arihant: India’s first ballistic missile nuclear
submarine.
INS Vikrant (2022): First indigenous aircraft
carrier, a major naval milestone.
India’s Indigenous Space Technology Achievements:
Chandrayaan-1 (2008): India’s first lunar mission.
Became the 4th country to send a probe to the
moon.
Discovered water molecules on the lunar surface—
a groundbreaking scientific achievement.
Mars Orbiter Mission (Mangalyaan, 2013): India
became the first nation to reach Mars on its first
attempt.
104 Satellites in One Launch (2017): Set a world
record for the most satellites deployed in a single
mission.
Chandrayaan-3 (2023): Achieved a soft landing near
the Moon’s south pole, a global first.
Aditya-L1 (2023): India’s first solar mission,
studying the Sun’s outer layers.
Gaganyaan (2027): India’s first crewed spaceflight
mission.
Shukrayaan (2028): Venus orbiter mission, aiming
to explore the planet’s dense atmosphere.
Digital Infrastructure:
Aadhaar: World’s largest biometric ID system.
UPI (Unified Payments Interface): Revolutionized
digital payments and fintech.
India leads in real-time digital transactions globally.
Government Initiatives to Boost Technology
Advancements:
Make in India (2014): Boosts domestic
manufacturing, including in high-tech
sectors like defence, electronics,
semiconductors, and space technology.
Atal Innovation Mission (AIM): Launched by
NITI Aayog to promote a culture of
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
189
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
innovation via: Atal Tinkering Labs (ATLs)
in schools, Atal Incubation Centres (AICs)
for startups.
National Mission on Interdisciplinary Cyber-
Physical Systems (NM-ICPS): Promotes R&D
in AI, robotics, The Internet of Things (IoT),
quantum computing, and more through
dedicated Technology Innovation Hubs
(TIHs).
Technology Development Board
(TDB): Provides financial support to
commercialize indigenous technologies.
National Supercomputing Mission
(NSM): Aims to install a network of world-
class supercomputers across premier
institutions.
National Quantum Mission (NQM): With an
investment of ₹6003.65 crore over eight
years, it is positioning India as a leader in
quantum computing, communication,
sensing, and materials.
o A total of 152 researchers from 43
institutions across 17 states and 2
Union Territories are contributing
to this mission.
IN-SPACe and NSIL (NewSpace India
Ltd): Promote private sector participation
in India’s space programme.
Defence Acquisition Procedure (DAP) &
iDEX (Innovations for Defence
Excellence): Encourage indigenous defence
startups and MSMEs to build advanced
technologies.
INSPIRE Program (DST): Encourages
students to pursue science education and
careers in research through scholarships
and internships.
Budgetary Allocations and Growth:
o Budgetary allocations for Gross
Expenditure on Research and
Development (GERD) have more
than doubled, along with over a
100% increase in DST and DBT
budgets.
o The space sector budget has
nearly tripled, driven by the opening
up of the sector to private
participation—positioning India as
a future-ready technological power.
Conclusion
Government-led initiatives in India have
created an ecosystem of innovation, skill
development, and R&D that enables the
country to grow as a global technological
hub while ensuring inclusive benefits for its
citizens.
India & 6G Technology
Syllabus: GS3/Science & Technology
Context
Recently, the Union Minister of State for
Communications, at the Bharat 6G
International Conference, said that India has
emerged as one of the top six
nations globally in 6G patent filings.
India’s Leadership in 6G Patent Filings
– 111+ funded research projects worth over ₹300
crore.
– Global partnerships with Japan, Singapore, and
Finland to accelerate innovation.
– Breakthroughs in terahertz communication and
AI-native networks.
– The adoption of 6G is expected to create entirely
new industries and revolutionize existing ones,
potentially contributing US$ 1 trillion (Rs.
85,37,000 crore) to India’s economy by 2035.
Bharat 6G Vision
It aims to develop and deploy 6G
infrastructure, ensuring India’s leadership
in global digital connectivity by 2030.
It aligns with broader policy goals that
emphasize domestic innovation and
international collaboration, and ensures that
6G technology remains affordable, scalable,
and accessible, preventing digital exclusion
and accelerating national development.
Phased Approach to 6G Development:
o Research & Development (2023–
2025): Focuses on developing
189
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
innovation via: Atal Tinkering Labs (ATLs)
in schools, Atal Incubation Centres (AICs)
for startups.
National Mission on Interdisciplinary Cyber-
Physical Systems (NM-ICPS): Promotes R&D
in AI, robotics, The Internet of Things (IoT),
quantum computing, and more through
dedicated Technology Innovation Hubs
(TIHs).
Technology Development Board
(TDB): Provides financial support to
commercialize indigenous technologies.
National Supercomputing Mission
(NSM): Aims to install a network of world-
class supercomputers across premier
institutions.
National Quantum Mission (NQM): With an
investment of ₹6003.65 crore over eight
years, it is positioning India as a leader in
quantum computing, communication,
sensing, and materials.
o A total of 152 researchers from 43
institutions across 17 states and 2
Union Territories are contributing
to this mission.
IN-SPACe and NSIL (NewSpace India
Ltd): Promote private sector participation
in India’s space programme.
Defence Acquisition Procedure (DAP) &
iDEX (Innovations for Defence
Excellence): Encourage indigenous defence
startups and MSMEs to build advanced
technologies.
INSPIRE Program (DST): Encourages
students to pursue science education and
careers in research through scholarships
and internships.
Budgetary Allocations and Growth:
o Budgetary allocations for Gross
Expenditure on Research and
Development (GERD) have more
than doubled, along with over a
100% increase in DST and DBT
budgets.
o The space sector budget has
nearly tripled, driven by the opening
up of the sector to private
participation—positioning India as
a future-ready technological power.
Conclusion
Government-led initiatives in India have
created an ecosystem of innovation, skill
development, and R&D that enables the
country to grow as a global technological
hub while ensuring inclusive benefits for its
citizens.
India & 6G Technology
Syllabus: GS3/Science & Technology
Context
Recently, the Union Minister of State for
Communications, at the Bharat 6G
International Conference, said that India has
emerged as one of the top six
nations globally in 6G patent filings.
India’s Leadership in 6G Patent Filings
– 111+ funded research projects worth over ₹300
crore.
– Global partnerships with Japan, Singapore, and
Finland to accelerate innovation.
– Breakthroughs in terahertz communication and
AI-native networks.
– The adoption of 6G is expected to create entirely
new industries and revolutionize existing ones,
potentially contributing US$ 1 trillion (Rs.
85,37,000 crore) to India’s economy by 2035.
Bharat 6G Vision
It aims to develop and deploy 6G
infrastructure, ensuring India’s leadership
in global digital connectivity by 2030.
It aligns with broader policy goals that
emphasize domestic innovation and
international collaboration, and ensures that
6G technology remains affordable, scalable,
and accessible, preventing digital exclusion
and accelerating national development.
Phased Approach to 6G Development:
o Research & Development (2023–
2025): Focuses on developing
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
190
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
foundational technologies,
conducting pilot programs, and
innovating new network
architectures.
o Infrastructure Rollout (2025–
2030): Supports large-scale
deployment, ensuring seamless
integration of advanced telecom
solutions into India’s digital
ecosystem.
Promise of 6G Technology
Sub-millisecond latency for ultra-fast
connectivity.
Intelligent self-healing networks to enhance
reliability.
Volumetric connectivity, extending from
underwater to aerospace applications.
AI-native networks to enhance automation
and efficiency.
Terahertz communication breakthroughs
for ultra-fast data transmission.
Technology Innovation Group on 6G (TIG-6G)
It is a collaboration between industry
leaders, academic institutions, and research
organizations, established by DoT to drive
innovation.
It is responsible for drafting India’s 6G
roadmap and shaping policies that aim
to define India’s future telecom landscape.
Spectrum Allocation for 6G (IMT2030)
India is actively engaged in global spectrum
discussions, with the International
Telecommunication Union (ITU) studying
key frequency bands for IMT2030 (6G):
o 4400-4800 MHz
o 7125-8400 MHz
o 14.8-15.35 GHz
The World Radiocommunication Conference
2027 will determine whether these bands
will be formally identified for 6G
deployment.
o India has already identified multiple
frequency bands for IMT-based
telecom services, including:
o 600 MHz, 700 MHz, 800 MHz, 900
MHz, 1800 MHz, 2100 MHz, 2300
MHz, 2500 MHz, 3300 MHz & 26
GHz
Oversight & Industry Collaboration
A proposed Bharat 6G Alliance (B6GA) aims
to further strengthen coordination among
Indian industry leaders, researchers, and
academic institutions, fostering a robust
innovation ecosystem.
Breakthrough in Making 2D Metals
Syllabus: GS3/Science and Technology
Context
A team of Chinese scientists reported a new
method to create true 2D sheets of
metals like bismuth, gallium, indium, tin,
and lead.
o This could pave the way for next-
generation quantum and electronic
technologies, including topological
insulators.
Quantum Dot and Quantum Confinement
– Quantum Dot: A semiconductor particle only a
few nanometers in size; behaves like a “giant atom”
due to restricted electron movement.
– Quantum Confinement: When electron movement
is restricted to a small space, energy levels become
quantized, like in atoms.
Low-Dimensional Materials
A material is described as 1D or
2D depending on how much it confines its
electrons.
190
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
foundational technologies,
conducting pilot programs, and
innovating new network
architectures.
o Infrastructure Rollout (2025–
2030): Supports large-scale
deployment, ensuring seamless
integration of advanced telecom
solutions into India’s digital
ecosystem.
Promise of 6G Technology
Sub-millisecond latency for ultra-fast
connectivity.
Intelligent self-healing networks to enhance
reliability.
Volumetric connectivity, extending from
underwater to aerospace applications.
AI-native networks to enhance automation
and efficiency.
Terahertz communication breakthroughs
for ultra-fast data transmission.
Technology Innovation Group on 6G (TIG-6G)
It is a collaboration between industry
leaders, academic institutions, and research
organizations, established by DoT to drive
innovation.
It is responsible for drafting India’s 6G
roadmap and shaping policies that aim
to define India’s future telecom landscape.
Spectrum Allocation for 6G (IMT2030)
India is actively engaged in global spectrum
discussions, with the International
Telecommunication Union (ITU) studying
key frequency bands for IMT2030 (6G):
o 4400-4800 MHz
o 7125-8400 MHz
o 14.8-15.35 GHz
The World Radiocommunication Conference
2027 will determine whether these bands
will be formally identified for 6G
deployment.
o India has already identified multiple
frequency bands for IMT-based
telecom services, including:
o 600 MHz, 700 MHz, 800 MHz, 900
MHz, 1800 MHz, 2100 MHz, 2300
MHz, 2500 MHz, 3300 MHz & 26
GHz
Oversight & Industry Collaboration
A proposed Bharat 6G Alliance (B6GA) aims
to further strengthen coordination among
Indian industry leaders, researchers, and
academic institutions, fostering a robust
innovation ecosystem.
Breakthrough in Making 2D Metals
Syllabus: GS3/Science and Technology
Context
A team of Chinese scientists reported a new
method to create true 2D sheets of
metals like bismuth, gallium, indium, tin,
and lead.
o This could pave the way for next-
generation quantum and electronic
technologies, including topological
insulators.
Quantum Dot and Quantum Confinement
– Quantum Dot: A semiconductor particle only a
few nanometers in size; behaves like a “giant atom”
due to restricted electron movement.
– Quantum Confinement: When electron movement
is restricted to a small space, energy levels become
quantized, like in atoms.
Low-Dimensional Materials
A material is described as 1D or
2D depending on how much it confines its
electrons.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
191
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
2D metals are ultra-thin layers of metal
atoms, usually just 1–2 atoms thick, where
electrons are confined to move only in two
dimensions.
Graphene is a famous 2D material: It
consists of a single sheet of carbon atoms
bonded to each other in a hexagonal
pattern.
o The electrons in this sheet can only
move around in two dimensions,
thus 2D.
o As a result they behave as if they
don’t have mass, for example, giving
rise to properties not seen in other
materials.
Challenges in Making 2D Metals
Unlike carbon, which easily forms 2D sheets
(graphene), metal atoms prefer bonding in
3D.
Attempts to make atom-thin metal sheets
have largely failed or produced sheets only
a few nanometers thick — too thick for true
quantum confinement.
Breakthrough Method: The 2D Sandwich Technique
Metal powder is melted between MoS₂-
coated sapphire plates and compressed
under 200 million Pa pressure, forming
ultra-thin sheets — like bismuth, just 6.3 Å
thick (about two atoms deep).
Why Do 2D Metals Matter?
Expected Properties:
o Topological Insulation: Conducts
electricity only along edges, not
across the surface.
o Nonlinear Hall Effect: Generates
perpendicular voltage under electric
field.
o Field Effect Tunability: Electrical
conductivity controlled via external
fields.
Applications:
o Ultra-sensitive sensors
(medical/military).
o High-efficiency quantum computing.
o Next-gen electronic and photonic
devices.
Put Pakistan Nuclear Arsenal under Watch: India
Syllabus: GS3/Science and Technology/GS2/IR
Context
The Union Defence Minister questioned the
security of Pakistan’s nuclear arsenal and
called for its supervision by
the International Atomic Energy Agency
(IAEA).
About
Pakistan has tried to leverage its nuclear
status against India.
While India follows a no-first-use
policy when it comes to nuclear weapons,
Pakistan doesn’t have any such stated policy
of restraint.
Pakistan’s Nuclear Arsenal
Pakistan first tested nuclear weapons
in 1998 in response to nuclear tests by
India.
Pakistan has vastly expanded its nuclear
forces and remains outside the Nuclear Non-
Proliferation Treaty (NPT) regime; the
country is also a major source
of proliferation concern.
It is believed to possess an arsenal of
about 170 nuclear warheads.
Treaty on the Non-Proliferation of Nuclear Weapons
(NPT)
– Signed in 1968 and entered into force in 1970, the
NPT aims to prevent the spread of nuclear weapons
and promote disarmament.
1. It divides the world into nuclear-weapon states
(NWS), recognized as possessing nuclear weapons
at the time of the treaty’s signing, and non-nuclear-
weapon states (NNWS), which agree not to develop
or acquire nuclear weapons.
2. The treaty also requires NWS to pursue
disarmament negotiations in good faith.
– India, Israel, North Korea and Pakistan have not
signed the NPT.
191
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
2D metals are ultra-thin layers of metal
atoms, usually just 1–2 atoms thick, where
electrons are confined to move only in two
dimensions.
Graphene is a famous 2D material: It
consists of a single sheet of carbon atoms
bonded to each other in a hexagonal
pattern.
o The electrons in this sheet can only
move around in two dimensions,
thus 2D.
o As a result they behave as if they
don’t have mass, for example, giving
rise to properties not seen in other
materials.
Challenges in Making 2D Metals
Unlike carbon, which easily forms 2D sheets
(graphene), metal atoms prefer bonding in
3D.
Attempts to make atom-thin metal sheets
have largely failed or produced sheets only
a few nanometers thick — too thick for true
quantum confinement.
Breakthrough Method: The 2D Sandwich Technique
Metal powder is melted between MoS₂-
coated sapphire plates and compressed
under 200 million Pa pressure, forming
ultra-thin sheets — like bismuth, just 6.3 Å
thick (about two atoms deep).
Why Do 2D Metals Matter?
Expected Properties:
o Topological Insulation: Conducts
electricity only along edges, not
across the surface.
o Nonlinear Hall Effect: Generates
perpendicular voltage under electric
field.
o Field Effect Tunability: Electrical
conductivity controlled via external
fields.
Applications:
o Ultra-sensitive sensors
(medical/military).
o High-efficiency quantum computing.
o Next-gen electronic and photonic
devices.
Put Pakistan Nuclear Arsenal under Watch: India
Syllabus: GS3/Science and Technology/GS2/IR
Context
The Union Defence Minister questioned the
security of Pakistan’s nuclear arsenal and
called for its supervision by
the International Atomic Energy Agency
(IAEA).
About
Pakistan has tried to leverage its nuclear
status against India.
While India follows a no-first-use
policy when it comes to nuclear weapons,
Pakistan doesn’t have any such stated policy
of restraint.
Pakistan’s Nuclear Arsenal
Pakistan first tested nuclear weapons
in 1998 in response to nuclear tests by
India.
Pakistan has vastly expanded its nuclear
forces and remains outside the Nuclear Non-
Proliferation Treaty (NPT) regime; the
country is also a major source
of proliferation concern.
It is believed to possess an arsenal of
about 170 nuclear warheads.
Treaty on the Non-Proliferation of Nuclear Weapons
(NPT)
– Signed in 1968 and entered into force in 1970, the
NPT aims to prevent the spread of nuclear weapons
and promote disarmament.
1. It divides the world into nuclear-weapon states
(NWS), recognized as possessing nuclear weapons
at the time of the treaty’s signing, and non-nuclear-
weapon states (NNWS), which agree not to develop
or acquire nuclear weapons.
2. The treaty also requires NWS to pursue
disarmament negotiations in good faith.
– India, Israel, North Korea and Pakistan have not
signed the NPT.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
192
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA)
It is an international organization
that promotes the peaceful use of nuclear
energy while working to prevent its use for
military purposes, including nuclear
weapons.
It was established in 1957.
Headquarters: Vienna, Austria.
Membership: 180 (as of 15 November
2024).
Motto: “Atoms for Peace and Development”.
Main Objective: Promote Peaceful Uses of
Nuclear Energy.
IAEA Safeguards are embedded in legally
binding agreements.
o These safeguards are accepted by
the states after the conclusion of
such agreements with the agency.
In 2005, the IAEA and its Director General,
Mohamed ElBaradei, were awarded
the Nobel Peace Prize for their work for a
safer and more peaceful world.
Role:
Nuclear Safeguards and Verification: Monitors
nuclear programs of member states to ensure they
are not diverted to weapons programs, especially
under the Non-Proliferation Treaty (NPT).
Nuclear Safety and Security: Assists countries in
strengthening nuclear safety standards, responding
to emergencies, and preventing nuclear terrorism.
Technical Cooperation: Provides technical
assistance to developing countries to use nuclear
technology for sustainable development.
Role in Global Affairs: Works closely with the United
Nations (UN) (it reports to the UN General
Assembly and Security Council).
Plays a critical role in non-proliferation diplomacy,
such as inspecting Iran’s nuclear program.
India and Its Nuclear Safety Commitments
In 2014, India ratified the Additional
Protocol (AP), which granted the IAEA
greater access to India’s civil nuclear
programme.
India has signed an item-specific
safeguards agreement under the IAEA along
with Pakistan and Israel.
o They are nuclear-power states that
are not a member of the Nuclear
Suppliers Group (NSG).
India also changed its export laws to line up
with the NSG, MTCR, Wassenaar
Arrangement, and Australia Group — the
four key nuclear control regimes.
Key Nuclear Control Regimes
– Missile Technology Control Regime
(MTCR): Established in 1987, MTCR is an “informal
political understanding among states that seek to
limit the proliferation of missiles and missile
technology”.
1. It has 35 members. India was admitted in 2016.
China is not a member.
– Australia Group: It is “an informal forum of
countries which, through the harmonisation of
export controls, seeks to ensure that exports do not
contribute to the development of chemical or
biological weapons.”
2. In 2018, India formally became the 43rd
member of the Australia Group.
– Wassenaar Arrangement (WA): The WA, formally
established in 1996, aims to promote
“transparency and greater responsibility in
transfers of conventional arms and dual-use goods
and technologies”, so there are no “destabilising
accumulations”, and terrorists do not acquire
them.
1. In 2017, India joined WA as the 42nd
Participating State.
India-Pakistan Nuclear Installation Agreement
Signed in 1988 and brought into force
in 1991, Non-nuclear aggression agreement
(NAA) commits the two countries to abstain
from attacking each other’s civilian nuclear
facilities.
It requires an annual exchange of the exact
locations by latitude and longitude of power
plants, enrichment labs, isotope separation
units, and any site holding a significant
quantity of radioactive material.
192
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA)
It is an international organization
that promotes the peaceful use of nuclear
energy while working to prevent its use for
military purposes, including nuclear
weapons.
It was established in 1957.
Headquarters: Vienna, Austria.
Membership: 180 (as of 15 November
2024).
Motto: “Atoms for Peace and Development”.
Main Objective: Promote Peaceful Uses of
Nuclear Energy.
IAEA Safeguards are embedded in legally
binding agreements.
o These safeguards are accepted by
the states after the conclusion of
such agreements with the agency.
In 2005, the IAEA and its Director General,
Mohamed ElBaradei, were awarded
the Nobel Peace Prize for their work for a
safer and more peaceful world.
Role:
Nuclear Safeguards and Verification: Monitors
nuclear programs of member states to ensure they
are not diverted to weapons programs, especially
under the Non-Proliferation Treaty (NPT).
Nuclear Safety and Security: Assists countries in
strengthening nuclear safety standards, responding
to emergencies, and preventing nuclear terrorism.
Technical Cooperation: Provides technical
assistance to developing countries to use nuclear
technology for sustainable development.
Role in Global Affairs: Works closely with the United
Nations (UN) (it reports to the UN General
Assembly and Security Council).
Plays a critical role in non-proliferation diplomacy,
such as inspecting Iran’s nuclear program.
India and Its Nuclear Safety Commitments
In 2014, India ratified the Additional
Protocol (AP), which granted the IAEA
greater access to India’s civil nuclear
programme.
India has signed an item-specific
safeguards agreement under the IAEA along
with Pakistan and Israel.
o They are nuclear-power states that
are not a member of the Nuclear
Suppliers Group (NSG).
India also changed its export laws to line up
with the NSG, MTCR, Wassenaar
Arrangement, and Australia Group — the
four key nuclear control regimes.
Key Nuclear Control Regimes
– Missile Technology Control Regime
(MTCR): Established in 1987, MTCR is an “informal
political understanding among states that seek to
limit the proliferation of missiles and missile
technology”.
1. It has 35 members. India was admitted in 2016.
China is not a member.
– Australia Group: It is “an informal forum of
countries which, through the harmonisation of
export controls, seeks to ensure that exports do not
contribute to the development of chemical or
biological weapons.”
2. In 2018, India formally became the 43rd
member of the Australia Group.
– Wassenaar Arrangement (WA): The WA, formally
established in 1996, aims to promote
“transparency and greater responsibility in
transfers of conventional arms and dual-use goods
and technologies”, so there are no “destabilising
accumulations”, and terrorists do not acquire
them.
1. In 2017, India joined WA as the 42nd
Participating State.
India-Pakistan Nuclear Installation Agreement
Signed in 1988 and brought into force
in 1991, Non-nuclear aggression agreement
(NAA) commits the two countries to abstain
from attacking each other’s civilian nuclear
facilities.
It requires an annual exchange of the exact
locations by latitude and longitude of power
plants, enrichment labs, isotope separation
units, and any site holding a significant
quantity of radioactive material.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
193
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
The goal is to avoid triggering a nuclear
catastrophe. However, the agreement does
not mandate detailed disclosures about the
nature or activities of these facilities.
India has repeatedly proposed expanding the
agreement to include a pledge not to target
civilian and economic infrastructure, but
Pakistan has consistently rejected such
proposals.
Conclusion
Pakistan’s lack of a declared no-first-use
nuclear policy, in contrast to India’s
commitment to such a doctrine, contributes
to strategic instability in South Asia, raising
the risk of escalation in the event of a
conflict.
Pakistan uses its nuclear capability to
counter India’s conventional military edge,
but its unrestrained doctrine highlights the
need for confidence-building, dialogue, and
regional arms control to maintain long-term
peace and stability.
‘Samudrayaan’: India’s First Manned Deep Ocean
Mission To Be Launched by 2026
Syllabus: GS3/ S&T
In News
India is set to launch its first manned deep-
ocean mission, ‘Samudrayaan’, by 2026,
aiming to explore marine resources at
a depth of 6,000 metres using the
indigenously developed submersible
‘Matsya’.
About Samudrayaan Mission
The Samudrayaan Mission is part of
the manned Deep Ocean Mission.
It would have MATSYA 6000, a
indigenously designed 4th generation
manned submersible vehicle capable of
carrying three people to a depth of 6,000
meters.
It is being developed by National Institute of
Ocean Technology (Chennai).
MATSYA 6000 has an operational
endurance of 12 hours and an emergency
endurance of 96 hours.
India’s research vessel Sagar Nidhi will be
used to deploy and recover the MATSYA
6000.
Significance of the Mission
Scientific Research: Enables collection of
deep-sea samples, critical for understanding
marine biodiversity, geology, and chemistry.
Resource Exploration: Potential for
assessment of living (marine biodiversity)
and non-living resources (minerals,
polymetallic nodules).
Technology Demonstration: Showcases
indigenous capability in high-pressure
deep-sea engineering.
Tourism Potential: May lay foundation for
future deep-sea tourism.
Strategic Capability: Enhances India’s
presence in global ocean research and
resource diplomacy.
League of Nations: With this mission, India
will join a select group of nations (the US,
Russia, France, Japan, and China) that have
the technology and capabilities for manned
deep-sea exploration.
About Deep Ocean Mission (DOM)
The Deep Ocean Mission (DOM) was
launched by the Ministry of Earth Sciences in
2021, and aims to explore and harness
deep-sea resources in a sustainable and
technologically advanced manner.
With a ₹4,077 crore outlay over five years,
DOM supports India’s Blue Economy and
aligns with SDG-14 (Life Below Water).
The mission is being spearheaded by
the National Institute of Ocean Technology
(NIOT) and comprises six components:
o Manned Submersible Development
(Samudrayaan).
o Deep-sea Biodiversity Exploration
o Mining Polymetallic Nodules
193
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
The goal is to avoid triggering a nuclear
catastrophe. However, the agreement does
not mandate detailed disclosures about the
nature or activities of these facilities.
India has repeatedly proposed expanding the
agreement to include a pledge not to target
civilian and economic infrastructure, but
Pakistan has consistently rejected such
proposals.
Conclusion
Pakistan’s lack of a declared no-first-use
nuclear policy, in contrast to India’s
commitment to such a doctrine, contributes
to strategic instability in South Asia, raising
the risk of escalation in the event of a
conflict.
Pakistan uses its nuclear capability to
counter India’s conventional military edge,
but its unrestrained doctrine highlights the
need for confidence-building, dialogue, and
regional arms control to maintain long-term
peace and stability.
‘Samudrayaan’: India’s First Manned Deep Ocean
Mission To Be Launched by 2026
Syllabus: GS3/ S&T
In News
India is set to launch its first manned deep-
ocean mission, ‘Samudrayaan’, by 2026,
aiming to explore marine resources at
a depth of 6,000 metres using the
indigenously developed submersible
‘Matsya’.
About Samudrayaan Mission
The Samudrayaan Mission is part of
the manned Deep Ocean Mission.
It would have MATSYA 6000, a
indigenously designed 4th generation
manned submersible vehicle capable of
carrying three people to a depth of 6,000
meters.
It is being developed by National Institute of
Ocean Technology (Chennai).
MATSYA 6000 has an operational
endurance of 12 hours and an emergency
endurance of 96 hours.
India’s research vessel Sagar Nidhi will be
used to deploy and recover the MATSYA
6000.
Significance of the Mission
Scientific Research: Enables collection of
deep-sea samples, critical for understanding
marine biodiversity, geology, and chemistry.
Resource Exploration: Potential for
assessment of living (marine biodiversity)
and non-living resources (minerals,
polymetallic nodules).
Technology Demonstration: Showcases
indigenous capability in high-pressure
deep-sea engineering.
Tourism Potential: May lay foundation for
future deep-sea tourism.
Strategic Capability: Enhances India’s
presence in global ocean research and
resource diplomacy.
League of Nations: With this mission, India
will join a select group of nations (the US,
Russia, France, Japan, and China) that have
the technology and capabilities for manned
deep-sea exploration.
About Deep Ocean Mission (DOM)
The Deep Ocean Mission (DOM) was
launched by the Ministry of Earth Sciences in
2021, and aims to explore and harness
deep-sea resources in a sustainable and
technologically advanced manner.
With a ₹4,077 crore outlay over five years,
DOM supports India’s Blue Economy and
aligns with SDG-14 (Life Below Water).
The mission is being spearheaded by
the National Institute of Ocean Technology
(NIOT) and comprises six components:
o Manned Submersible Development
(Samudrayaan).
o Deep-sea Biodiversity Exploration
o Mining Polymetallic Nodules
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
194
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Ocean Climate Advisory Services
o Marine Station for Ocean Biology to
promote research
o Advanced Ocean Observation
Systems using underwater sensors
and AI.
Gene Editing Therapy Used to Cure a Rare Disease
Syllabus: GS3/ Science & Technology
In News
In a historic medical breakthrough,
scientists in the United States have, for the
first time, successfully used a
personalized CRISPR-based gene-editing
therapy to treat a rare genetic
disorder Carbamoyl Phosphate Synthetase 1
(CPS1) deficiency in an infant.
o CPS-1 Deficiency is a rare genetic
metabolic disorder where the liver
lacks an enzyme to convert toxic
ammonia into urea, which is usually
excreted through urine.
What is Gene Editing Therapy?
Definition:
o Gene editing therapy refers to the
deliberate alteration of DNA
sequences within the cells of an
individual to treat or cure genetic
diseases.
o It involves modifying, deleting, or
inserting specific genes at targeted
locations in the genome to correct
mutations or enhance cellular
functions.
Types of Gene Editing Techniques:
o CRISPR-Cas9: Most widely used tool;
cuts DNA at specific sites using
guide RNA and Cas9 enzyme
o Zinc Finger Nucleases (ZFNs): Uses
engineered proteins to bind and cut
DNA
o Base Editing: Alters a single
nucleotide without breaking DNA
strands
o Prime Editing: Acts like a ‘word
processor’ to insert, delete, or
replace DNA sequences
Mechanism:
Applications of Gene Editing Therapy
Medicine: Treating genetic disorders like
Sickle Cell Anaemia, Beta-Thalassemia, CPS-
1 Deficiency.
Engineering immune cells (CAR-T therapy)
to target cancer
Agriculture: Developing disease-resistant,
high-yield crops
Veterinary Science: Enhancing livestock
traits
India’s Progress in Gene Editing
CSIR-Institute of Genomics and Integrative
Biology (IGIB) is developing
indigenous CRISPR platform (IndiCRISPR).
The Department of Biotechnology (DBT) is
funding genome-editing research under the
National Biopharma Mission.
Gene Therapy Guidelines (2020): Issued to
streamline ethical clinical application.
Challenges
Safety issues: Off-target effects, immune
reactions, unintended mutations.
Ethical concerns: Germline editing
(heritable changes), designer babies
Limited access: High cost, availability
limited to developed nations
194
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Ocean Climate Advisory Services
o Marine Station for Ocean Biology to
promote research
o Advanced Ocean Observation
Systems using underwater sensors
and AI.
Gene Editing Therapy Used to Cure a Rare Disease
Syllabus: GS3/ Science & Technology
In News
In a historic medical breakthrough,
scientists in the United States have, for the
first time, successfully used a
personalized CRISPR-based gene-editing
therapy to treat a rare genetic
disorder Carbamoyl Phosphate Synthetase 1
(CPS1) deficiency in an infant.
o CPS-1 Deficiency is a rare genetic
metabolic disorder where the liver
lacks an enzyme to convert toxic
ammonia into urea, which is usually
excreted through urine.
What is Gene Editing Therapy?
Definition:
o Gene editing therapy refers to the
deliberate alteration of DNA
sequences within the cells of an
individual to treat or cure genetic
diseases.
o It involves modifying, deleting, or
inserting specific genes at targeted
locations in the genome to correct
mutations or enhance cellular
functions.
Types of Gene Editing Techniques:
o CRISPR-Cas9: Most widely used tool;
cuts DNA at specific sites using
guide RNA and Cas9 enzyme
o Zinc Finger Nucleases (ZFNs): Uses
engineered proteins to bind and cut
DNA
o Base Editing: Alters a single
nucleotide without breaking DNA
strands
o Prime Editing: Acts like a ‘word
processor’ to insert, delete, or
replace DNA sequences
Mechanism:
Applications of Gene Editing Therapy
Medicine: Treating genetic disorders like
Sickle Cell Anaemia, Beta-Thalassemia, CPS-
1 Deficiency.
Engineering immune cells (CAR-T therapy)
to target cancer
Agriculture: Developing disease-resistant,
high-yield crops
Veterinary Science: Enhancing livestock
traits
India’s Progress in Gene Editing
CSIR-Institute of Genomics and Integrative
Biology (IGIB) is developing
indigenous CRISPR platform (IndiCRISPR).
The Department of Biotechnology (DBT) is
funding genome-editing research under the
National Biopharma Mission.
Gene Therapy Guidelines (2020): Issued to
streamline ethical clinical application.
Challenges
Safety issues: Off-target effects, immune
reactions, unintended mutations.
Ethical concerns: Germline editing
(heritable changes), designer babies
Limited access: High cost, availability
limited to developed nations
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
195
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
70 Applications Received for Scheme to Produce
Electronic Components
Syllabus: GS3/ Science and Technology
Context
The Government of India has received 70
applications, 80% from small and medium
enterprises (SMEs), for its Electronics
Component Manufacturing Scheme.
Electronics Component Manufacturing Scheme
It is a Rs.22,919 crore scheme, aims to
develop a robust component ecosystem by;
o Attracting large
investments (global/domestic) in
the electronics component
manufacturing ecosystem,
o Increasing Domestic Value
Addition (DVA) by developing
capacity and capabilities, and
o Integrating Indian companies with
Global Value Chains (GVCs).
Salient Features of the Scheme:
o The scheme provides differentiated
incentives to Indian manufacturers
tailored to overcome specific
disabilities for various categories of
components and sub-assemblies so
that they can acquire technological
capabilities and achieve economies
of scale.
o The tenure of the scheme is six
years with one year of gestation
period.
o Payout of a part of the incentive is
linked with employment targets
achievement.
Component Classification under the Scheme
Category A: Display modules, camera
module sub-assemblies.
Category B: Bare components like non-
surface mount devices, multi-layered PCBs,
lithium-ion cells, IT hardware products.
Category C: Flexible PCBs, SMD passive
components.
Category D: Capital goods and components
used in manufacturing of A, B, and C.
Progress in India’s electronics sector
The domestic production of electronic goods
has increased from Rs.1.90 lakh crore in FY
2014-15 to Rs.9.52 lakh crore in FY 2023-
24 at a CAGR of more than 17%.
The exports of electronic goods have also
increased from Rs.0.38 lakh crore in FY
2014-15 to Rs.2.41 lakh crore in FY 2023-
24 at a CAGR of more than 20%.
Challenges in electronics sector
Market Competition: The global electronics
market is dominated by countries
like China, Taiwan, USA, South Korea,
Vietnam and Malaysia.
Technical Skills: There is a lack of
adequately trained technical personnel for
advanced manufacturing processes.
Capital Intensive industry: Electronic
manufacturing is a complex and technology-
intensive sector with huge capital
investments, high risk, long gestation and
payback periods, requiring significant and
sustained investments.
Government initiatives
Make in India, Digital India, and Startup
India are promoting domestic
manufacturing and technological
innovation.
Production Linked Incentive Scheme
(PLI): The scheme aims to attract large
investments in the mobile phone
manufacturing and specified electronic
components, including Assembly, Testing,
Marking and Packaging (ATMP) units.
National Policy on Electronics 2019 (NPE
2019): It is a comprehensive framework to
develop India as a global hub for electronics
manufacturing.
Modified Electronics Manufacturing Clusters
(EMC 2.0) develops infrastructure with
195
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
70 Applications Received for Scheme to Produce
Electronic Components
Syllabus: GS3/ Science and Technology
Context
The Government of India has received 70
applications, 80% from small and medium
enterprises (SMEs), for its Electronics
Component Manufacturing Scheme.
Electronics Component Manufacturing Scheme
It is a Rs.22,919 crore scheme, aims to
develop a robust component ecosystem by;
o Attracting large
investments (global/domestic) in
the electronics component
manufacturing ecosystem,
o Increasing Domestic Value
Addition (DVA) by developing
capacity and capabilities, and
o Integrating Indian companies with
Global Value Chains (GVCs).
Salient Features of the Scheme:
o The scheme provides differentiated
incentives to Indian manufacturers
tailored to overcome specific
disabilities for various categories of
components and sub-assemblies so
that they can acquire technological
capabilities and achieve economies
of scale.
o The tenure of the scheme is six
years with one year of gestation
period.
o Payout of a part of the incentive is
linked with employment targets
achievement.
Component Classification under the Scheme
Category A: Display modules, camera
module sub-assemblies.
Category B: Bare components like non-
surface mount devices, multi-layered PCBs,
lithium-ion cells, IT hardware products.
Category C: Flexible PCBs, SMD passive
components.
Category D: Capital goods and components
used in manufacturing of A, B, and C.
Progress in India’s electronics sector
The domestic production of electronic goods
has increased from Rs.1.90 lakh crore in FY
2014-15 to Rs.9.52 lakh crore in FY 2023-
24 at a CAGR of more than 17%.
The exports of electronic goods have also
increased from Rs.0.38 lakh crore in FY
2014-15 to Rs.2.41 lakh crore in FY 2023-
24 at a CAGR of more than 20%.
Challenges in electronics sector
Market Competition: The global electronics
market is dominated by countries
like China, Taiwan, USA, South Korea,
Vietnam and Malaysia.
Technical Skills: There is a lack of
adequately trained technical personnel for
advanced manufacturing processes.
Capital Intensive industry: Electronic
manufacturing is a complex and technology-
intensive sector with huge capital
investments, high risk, long gestation and
payback periods, requiring significant and
sustained investments.
Government initiatives
Make in India, Digital India, and Startup
India are promoting domestic
manufacturing and technological
innovation.
Production Linked Incentive Scheme
(PLI): The scheme aims to attract large
investments in the mobile phone
manufacturing and specified electronic
components, including Assembly, Testing,
Marking and Packaging (ATMP) units.
National Policy on Electronics 2019 (NPE
2019): It is a comprehensive framework to
develop India as a global hub for electronics
manufacturing.
Modified Electronics Manufacturing Clusters
(EMC 2.0) develops infrastructure with
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
196
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
common amenities and industrial clusters
for electronics production.
Way Ahead
India has set a target to achieve 500 billion
USD in electronics manufacturing in value
terms by 2030.
To enhance competitiveness, India needs to
localize high-tech components, strengthen
design capabilities through R&D
investments, and forge strategic
partnerships with global technology
leaders.
Fatigue of Li Metal Anode in Solid-State Batteries
Syllabus: GS3/Science and Technology
Context
A recent study identifies mechanical fatigue
of the lithium metal anode, rather than
current density alone, as the key cause
behind dendrite-induced short circuits and
failure of Solid-State Batteries (SSBs).
What are Solid-State Batteries (SSBs)?
(SSB) is an advanced type of battery that
uses a solid electrolyte instead of the liquid
or gel-like electrolyte found in conventional
lithium-ion batteries.
Working Mechanism:
o Charging Phase: Lithium ions move
from the cathode to the anode
through the solid electrolyte, storing
energy.
o Discharging Phase: Lithium ions
travel back from the anode to the
cathode, generating an electric
current that powers devices or
vehicles.
Difference between Conventional Li-ion Batteries
and SSBs
Feature
Traditional Li-ion
Battery
Solid-State Battery
Electrolyte
Liquid
(flammable)
Solid (non-
flammable)
Energy
Density
Moderate Higher (up to 2x)
Safety
Risk of leakage
and fire
Safer due to solid
electrolyte
Charging
Speed
Limited Faster potential
Thermal
Stability
Lower Higher
Challenges in Solid-State Batteries (SSBs)
Lithium Dendrite Formation: Dendrites are
hair-like metallic lithium structures that
grow on the anode during repeated charge
cycles.
These structures form when lithium ions
(Li⁺) unevenly deposit during charging.
These dendrites can:
o Pierce the solid electrolyte,
o Reach the cathode, and
o Cause a short circuit, rendering the
battery unsafe and unusable.
Even at low current densities, dendrites can
form due to cyclic mechanical fatigue of the
lithium metal anode.
The Coffin-Manson law of material fatigue, a
well-known principle in materials science,
was found applicable to lithium metal
degradation.
Applications of Solid-State Batteries
Electric Vehicles (EVs): Toyota and BMW
are developing SSB-powered EVs with
extended range and rapid charging.
Consumer Electronics: Companies like Apple
and Samsung are investing in SSBs for safer
196
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
common amenities and industrial clusters
for electronics production.
Way Ahead
India has set a target to achieve 500 billion
USD in electronics manufacturing in value
terms by 2030.
To enhance competitiveness, India needs to
localize high-tech components, strengthen
design capabilities through R&D
investments, and forge strategic
partnerships with global technology
leaders.
Fatigue of Li Metal Anode in Solid-State Batteries
Syllabus: GS3/Science and Technology
Context
A recent study identifies mechanical fatigue
of the lithium metal anode, rather than
current density alone, as the key cause
behind dendrite-induced short circuits and
failure of Solid-State Batteries (SSBs).
What are Solid-State Batteries (SSBs)?
(SSB) is an advanced type of battery that
uses a solid electrolyte instead of the liquid
or gel-like electrolyte found in conventional
lithium-ion batteries.
Working Mechanism:
o Charging Phase: Lithium ions move
from the cathode to the anode
through the solid electrolyte, storing
energy.
o Discharging Phase: Lithium ions
travel back from the anode to the
cathode, generating an electric
current that powers devices or
vehicles.
Difference between Conventional Li-ion Batteries
and SSBs
Feature
Traditional Li-ion
Battery
Solid-State Battery
Electrolyte
Liquid
(flammable)
Solid (non-
flammable)
Energy
Density
Moderate Higher (up to 2x)
Safety
Risk of leakage
and fire
Safer due to solid
electrolyte
Charging
Speed
Limited Faster potential
Thermal
Stability
Lower Higher
Challenges in Solid-State Batteries (SSBs)
Lithium Dendrite Formation: Dendrites are
hair-like metallic lithium structures that
grow on the anode during repeated charge
cycles.
These structures form when lithium ions
(Li⁺) unevenly deposit during charging.
These dendrites can:
o Pierce the solid electrolyte,
o Reach the cathode, and
o Cause a short circuit, rendering the
battery unsafe and unusable.
Even at low current densities, dendrites can
form due to cyclic mechanical fatigue of the
lithium metal anode.
The Coffin-Manson law of material fatigue, a
well-known principle in materials science,
was found applicable to lithium metal
degradation.
Applications of Solid-State Batteries
Electric Vehicles (EVs): Toyota and BMW
are developing SSB-powered EVs with
extended range and rapid charging.
Consumer Electronics: Companies like Apple
and Samsung are investing in SSBs for safer
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
197
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
and longer-lasting smartphones and
laptops.
Grid Storage: Tesla and other energy giants
are investigating SSBs for renewable energy
storage solutions.
MR Srinivasan: A Key Architect of India’s Nuclear
Programme
Syllabus: GS3/Science & Technology
Context
Recently, Dr. M.R. Srinivasan, renowned
nuclear scientist and former Atomic Energy
Commission (AEC) chairman passed away.
About Dr. M.R. Srinivasan
– Born: 5th January 1930
– Career and Contributions:
1. 1955: Joined the Department of Atomic Energy
(DAE), working alongside Dr. Homi
Bhabha on India’s first nuclear research reactor,
Apsara.
2. 1959: Appointed as Principal Project
Engineer for India’s first atomic power station.
3. 1967: Chief Project Engineer of the Madras
Atomic Power Station
4. 1974: In-Charge of the Power Projects
Engineering Division
5. 1984: Appointed as Chairman of the Nuclear
Power Board
6. 1987: Appointed Chairman of the Atomic Energy
Commission and Secretary of the Department of
Atomic Energy
(6.1) Founder-Chairman of the Nuclear Power
Corporation of India Limited (NPCIL), under which
18 nuclear power units were developed.
– Recognition and Legacy:
1. Member of the Planning Commission (1996-98);
2. Padma Shri (1984); Padma Bhushan (1990);
Padma Vibhushan (2015)
3. National Security Advisory Board (2002-04,
2006-08).
India’s Nuclear Programme
It has been a cornerstone of its energy
strategy, balancing self-reliance,
technological advancement, and global
cooperation, with the focus on clean energy
and strategic security.
Historical Development
The Atomic Energy Commission (AEC) was
established in 1948 under Dr. Homi
Bhabha. It was structured into a three-stage
plan:
o Stage I: Utilization of Pressurized
Heavy Water Reactors (PHWRs)
using natural uranium.
o Stage II: Development of Fast
Breeder Reactors (FBRs) to
generate plutonium.
o Stage III: Deployment of Advanced
Thorium Reactors, leveraging
India’s vast thorium reserves.
o India holds 21% of the
world’s thorium
reserves, with indigenous
projects like Bhavani aiming
to harness this resource.
Current Status
Installed Capacity: India operates 23 nuclear
reactors across seven power
plants, contributing to 8,180 MW (2024
data) of electricity (4,780 MW in 2014).
o It is projected to reach 22,480 MW
by 2031-32.
Energy Mix and Role of Nuclear Power
Renewable Shift: India is transitioning
towards clean energy, with nuclear power
playing a crucial role in reducing
dependence on fossil fuels.
Grid Distribution: The revised framework
allocates 50% of nuclear-generated
electricity to home states, 35% to
neighboring states, and 15% to the national
grid.
Recent Advancements
Prototype Fast Breeder Reactor
(PFBR): India has entered Stage II of its
nuclear programme with the core-loading of
the PFBR at Kalpakkam.
Expansion Plans: 10 new reactors are
approved and exploring private sector
participation to accelerate growth,
197
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
and longer-lasting smartphones and
laptops.
Grid Storage: Tesla and other energy giants
are investigating SSBs for renewable energy
storage solutions.
MR Srinivasan: A Key Architect of India’s Nuclear
Programme
Syllabus: GS3/Science & Technology
Context
Recently, Dr. M.R. Srinivasan, renowned
nuclear scientist and former Atomic Energy
Commission (AEC) chairman passed away.
About Dr. M.R. Srinivasan
– Born: 5th January 1930
– Career and Contributions:
1. 1955: Joined the Department of Atomic Energy
(DAE), working alongside Dr. Homi
Bhabha on India’s first nuclear research reactor,
Apsara.
2. 1959: Appointed as Principal Project
Engineer for India’s first atomic power station.
3. 1967: Chief Project Engineer of the Madras
Atomic Power Station
4. 1974: In-Charge of the Power Projects
Engineering Division
5. 1984: Appointed as Chairman of the Nuclear
Power Board
6. 1987: Appointed Chairman of the Atomic Energy
Commission and Secretary of the Department of
Atomic Energy
(6.1) Founder-Chairman of the Nuclear Power
Corporation of India Limited (NPCIL), under which
18 nuclear power units were developed.
– Recognition and Legacy:
1. Member of the Planning Commission (1996-98);
2. Padma Shri (1984); Padma Bhushan (1990);
Padma Vibhushan (2015)
3. National Security Advisory Board (2002-04,
2006-08).
India’s Nuclear Programme
It has been a cornerstone of its energy
strategy, balancing self-reliance,
technological advancement, and global
cooperation, with the focus on clean energy
and strategic security.
Historical Development
The Atomic Energy Commission (AEC) was
established in 1948 under Dr. Homi
Bhabha. It was structured into a three-stage
plan:
o Stage I: Utilization of Pressurized
Heavy Water Reactors (PHWRs)
using natural uranium.
o Stage II: Development of Fast
Breeder Reactors (FBRs) to
generate plutonium.
o Stage III: Deployment of Advanced
Thorium Reactors, leveraging
India’s vast thorium reserves.
o India holds 21% of the
world’s thorium
reserves, with indigenous
projects like Bhavani aiming
to harness this resource.
Current Status
Installed Capacity: India operates 23 nuclear
reactors across seven power
plants, contributing to 8,180 MW (2024
data) of electricity (4,780 MW in 2014).
o It is projected to reach 22,480 MW
by 2031-32.
Energy Mix and Role of Nuclear Power
Renewable Shift: India is transitioning
towards clean energy, with nuclear power
playing a crucial role in reducing
dependence on fossil fuels.
Grid Distribution: The revised framework
allocates 50% of nuclear-generated
electricity to home states, 35% to
neighboring states, and 15% to the national
grid.
Recent Advancements
Prototype Fast Breeder Reactor
(PFBR): India has entered Stage II of its
nuclear programme with the core-loading of
the PFBR at Kalpakkam.
Expansion Plans: 10 new reactors are
approved and exploring private sector
participation to accelerate growth,
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
198
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
including Bharat Small Modular Reactors
(BSMRs).
International Collaborations: India has
signed agreements with Russia, France, and
the U.S. for nuclear technology exchange.
Coal Sector in India: A Strategic Engine for
Sustainable Growth and Global Leadership
Syllabus: GS3/Energy
Context
Coal has long been the backbone of India’s
energy sector, fueling industries, power
plants, and economic growth. However, the
global shift towards sustainability has
necessitated a transformation in how coal is
utilized.
Brief about the India’s Coal Sector
India is the 5th largest in coal
reserves and 2nd largest coal consumer
globally.
o Per capita coal energy
consumption remains lower than
China, the USA, or OECD nations.
o Coal’s share in installed capacity has
decreased from 60% in 2014–15 to
47% today.
It has crossed the 1 Billion Tonne, both
production and dispatch in FY25.
o It reinforces India’s energy security,
ensures a reliable and cost-effective
power supply.
The coal industry has contributed
significantly to employment,
supporting over 5 lakh workers across more
than 350 coal mines.
Significance of Coal Sector in India
Backbone of India’s Energy Security: Coal
powers 46.88% of India’s total installed
power capacity (as of Nov 2024), making it
the single largest contributor to electricity
generation.
o Despite the rise of solar and wind
energy, coal is projected to retain
55% share of power generation by
2030.
Strategic Role in Core Industries: Coal
dependent steel industry uses coking coal in
blast furnaces — India aims to produce 140
MT of domestic coking coal by 2029–30
under Mission Coking Coal.
Economic Engine of Mineral-Rich
Regions: Coal production contributes over
₹70,000 crore annually through royalties,
GST, and District Mineral Foundation (DMF)
funds.
Major Employment Provider: The coal sector
employs around 5 lakh workers across
350+ mines.
Railway Revenue Pillar: Coal is the single
largest source of freight revenue for Indian
Railways, contributing 49% of total freight
earnings (FY 2022–23).
Corporate Social Responsibility and Nation
Building: Coal PSUs spend over ₹600 crore
annually on CSR — funding schools,
hospitals, skill centers, and community
welfare in backward regions.
Geographical Distribution of Coal in India
– Gondwana Coals: About 98% of total coal in India
is based on Gondwana time;
1. Majorly found in Chhattisgarh, Jharkhand,
Odisha, Madhya Pradesh, Andhra Pradesh etc.
2. Major Gondwana Coal Mining Centres:
(a). Damodar Valley: Daktonganj, Bokaro, Jharia,
Dhanbad, Raniganj, Durgapur
(b). Son Valley: Associated with North Koel river,
Singrauli
(c). Mahanadi Valley: Associated with rivers like
Hasdeo, Ib, South Koel etc, Korba, Jhilmil, Talcher
(d). Godavari and Wardha Valley: Singreni,
Kotagundam (Telangana), Kamptee Valley
(Nagpur, Maharashtra)
Types of Coal in India
– Anthracite: Highest carbon content, rare in India.
– Bituminous: Most abundant and commonly used
for power generation.
– Sub-bituminous: Higher heating value than
lignite.
198
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
including Bharat Small Modular Reactors
(BSMRs).
International Collaborations: India has
signed agreements with Russia, France, and
the U.S. for nuclear technology exchange.
Coal Sector in India: A Strategic Engine for
Sustainable Growth and Global Leadership
Syllabus: GS3/Energy
Context
Coal has long been the backbone of India’s
energy sector, fueling industries, power
plants, and economic growth. However, the
global shift towards sustainability has
necessitated a transformation in how coal is
utilized.
Brief about the India’s Coal Sector
India is the 5th largest in coal
reserves and 2nd largest coal consumer
globally.
o Per capita coal energy
consumption remains lower than
China, the USA, or OECD nations.
o Coal’s share in installed capacity has
decreased from 60% in 2014–15 to
47% today.
It has crossed the 1 Billion Tonne, both
production and dispatch in FY25.
o It reinforces India’s energy security,
ensures a reliable and cost-effective
power supply.
The coal industry has contributed
significantly to employment,
supporting over 5 lakh workers across more
than 350 coal mines.
Significance of Coal Sector in India
Backbone of India’s Energy Security: Coal
powers 46.88% of India’s total installed
power capacity (as of Nov 2024), making it
the single largest contributor to electricity
generation.
o Despite the rise of solar and wind
energy, coal is projected to retain
55% share of power generation by
2030.
Strategic Role in Core Industries: Coal
dependent steel industry uses coking coal in
blast furnaces — India aims to produce 140
MT of domestic coking coal by 2029–30
under Mission Coking Coal.
Economic Engine of Mineral-Rich
Regions: Coal production contributes over
₹70,000 crore annually through royalties,
GST, and District Mineral Foundation (DMF)
funds.
Major Employment Provider: The coal sector
employs around 5 lakh workers across
350+ mines.
Railway Revenue Pillar: Coal is the single
largest source of freight revenue for Indian
Railways, contributing 49% of total freight
earnings (FY 2022–23).
Corporate Social Responsibility and Nation
Building: Coal PSUs spend over ₹600 crore
annually on CSR — funding schools,
hospitals, skill centers, and community
welfare in backward regions.
Geographical Distribution of Coal in India
– Gondwana Coals: About 98% of total coal in India
is based on Gondwana time;
1. Majorly found in Chhattisgarh, Jharkhand,
Odisha, Madhya Pradesh, Andhra Pradesh etc.
2. Major Gondwana Coal Mining Centres:
(a). Damodar Valley: Daktonganj, Bokaro, Jharia,
Dhanbad, Raniganj, Durgapur
(b). Son Valley: Associated with North Koel river,
Singrauli
(c). Mahanadi Valley: Associated with rivers like
Hasdeo, Ib, South Koel etc, Korba, Jhilmil, Talcher
(d). Godavari and Wardha Valley: Singreni,
Kotagundam (Telangana), Kamptee Valley
(Nagpur, Maharashtra)
Types of Coal in India
– Anthracite: Highest carbon content, rare in India.
– Bituminous: Most abundant and commonly used
for power generation.
– Sub-bituminous: Higher heating value than
lignite.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
199
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
– Lignite: Low-grade coal, used mainly in power
plants near mining sites.
Important Coal Fields
Coal Fields & Location Importance
Jharia Coalfield,
Jharkhand
Known for high-quality
coking coal.
Raniganj Coalfield,
West Bengal
India’s oldest coalfield,
primarily producing non-
coking coal.
Talcher Coalfield,
Odisha
One of the largest coal
reserves in India.
Korba Coalfield,
Chhattisgarh
A major source of thermal
coal.
Singrauli Coalfield,
Madhya Pradesh &
Uttar Pradesh
Important for power
generation.
Bokaro Coalfield,
Jharkhand
Produces both coking and
non-coking coal.
Singareni Coalfield,
Telangana
Major coal field in South
India
Wardha Valley
Coalfield, Maharashtra
Significant for industrial
use.
Challenges India’s Coal Sector Facing
Coal Supply Shortages: India has
experienced periodic coal shortages, leading
to power crises.
o Factors such as stagnating domestic
production, transportation
bottlenecks, and reduced imports
have contributed to supply
constraints.
Environmental and Sustainability
Issues: These include deforestation, air
pollution, and carbon emissions.
o While India is pushing for coal
gasification and cleaner mining
technologies, the transition remains
slow.
Dependence on Coal Imports: Despite having
the fifth-largest coal reserves, India still
imports coal to meet demand.
o High import costs and global price
fluctuations pose economic
challenges.
Infrastructure and Transportation
Bottlenecks: Coal transportation relies
heavily on railways, which often face
congestion and delays.
o Improving logistics and
infrastructure is crucial for ensuring
timely coal supply.
Social and Labor Concerns: Coal mining
employs over 5 lakh workers, but safety
concerns, displacement of communities, and
inadequate rehabilitation programs remain
pressing issues.
Recent Key Reforms in the Coal Sector
Commercial Coal Mining (2020): It allows
private players to participate in coal
auctions. It increased competition,
improved efficiency, and attracted
investments, leading to higher production
and employment generation.
o The Coal Bearing Areas Act of
1957 signaled state control but
lacked trust in private innovation.
Coal Mines Special Provisions Act (CMSP Act
2015): It was enacted to address the
cancellation of coal block allocations by the
Supreme Court.
o It introduced a transparent auction
process, encouraging private sector
involvement and generating
revenue for the government.
SHAKTI (Scheme for Harnessing and
Allocating Koyala Transparently in India)
Policy for Coal Allocation (revised in
2025): It ensures greater flexibility, wider
eligibility, and better accessibility to coal,
supporting India’s energy needs.
Single Window E-Auction Mechanism: It
removes market distortions, increases
199
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
– Lignite: Low-grade coal, used mainly in power
plants near mining sites.
Important Coal Fields
Coal Fields & Location Importance
Jharia Coalfield,
Jharkhand
Known for high-quality
coking coal.
Raniganj Coalfield,
West Bengal
India’s oldest coalfield,
primarily producing non-
coking coal.
Talcher Coalfield,
Odisha
One of the largest coal
reserves in India.
Korba Coalfield,
Chhattisgarh
A major source of thermal
coal.
Singrauli Coalfield,
Madhya Pradesh &
Uttar Pradesh
Important for power
generation.
Bokaro Coalfield,
Jharkhand
Produces both coking and
non-coking coal.
Singareni Coalfield,
Telangana
Major coal field in South
India
Wardha Valley
Coalfield, Maharashtra
Significant for industrial
use.
Challenges India’s Coal Sector Facing
Coal Supply Shortages: India has
experienced periodic coal shortages, leading
to power crises.
o Factors such as stagnating domestic
production, transportation
bottlenecks, and reduced imports
have contributed to supply
constraints.
Environmental and Sustainability
Issues: These include deforestation, air
pollution, and carbon emissions.
o While India is pushing for coal
gasification and cleaner mining
technologies, the transition remains
slow.
Dependence on Coal Imports: Despite having
the fifth-largest coal reserves, India still
imports coal to meet demand.
o High import costs and global price
fluctuations pose economic
challenges.
Infrastructure and Transportation
Bottlenecks: Coal transportation relies
heavily on railways, which often face
congestion and delays.
o Improving logistics and
infrastructure is crucial for ensuring
timely coal supply.
Social and Labor Concerns: Coal mining
employs over 5 lakh workers, but safety
concerns, displacement of communities, and
inadequate rehabilitation programs remain
pressing issues.
Recent Key Reforms in the Coal Sector
Commercial Coal Mining (2020): It allows
private players to participate in coal
auctions. It increased competition,
improved efficiency, and attracted
investments, leading to higher production
and employment generation.
o The Coal Bearing Areas Act of
1957 signaled state control but
lacked trust in private innovation.
Coal Mines Special Provisions Act (CMSP Act
2015): It was enacted to address the
cancellation of coal block allocations by the
Supreme Court.
o It introduced a transparent auction
process, encouraging private sector
involvement and generating
revenue for the government.
SHAKTI (Scheme for Harnessing and
Allocating Koyala Transparently in India)
Policy for Coal Allocation (revised in
2025): It ensures greater flexibility, wider
eligibility, and better accessibility to coal,
supporting India’s energy needs.
Single Window E-Auction Mechanism: It
removes market distortions, increases
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
200
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
operational efficiency, and ensures fair
pricing for all sectors.
Revival of Abandoned Coal Mines: India has
initiated policies to reopen abandoned and
discontinued coal mines through private
sector participation.
o It aims to optimize coal resources
while ensuring environmental
sustainability.
Push for Underground Coal
Mining: Incentives like waiving upfront
payments and reducing revenue share
requirements, to encourage private
investment and adoption of advanced
mining technologies.
Coal Gasification and Sustainable
Mining: India has set a target to gasify 100
million tonnes of coal by 2030, reducing
carbon emissions and fostering cleaner
energy solutions.
o Financial support and tax incentives
have been introduced to accelerate
coal gasification projects.
Tech-Driven Revolution: Coal Exchange and DigiCoal
India to launch its first coal trading
exchange for seamless, transparent access
and pricing.
DigiCoal initiative to digitize coal mines:
o 5G, AI monitoring, GPS
tracking, drone surveys
o Digital twins for operational safety
and efficiency.
Future Vision: Viksit Bharat 2047
From 1.10 MWh per capita electricity
consumption today to matching or
exceeding global averages.
India’s journey to a $5 trillion economy by
2030 and $35 trillion by 2047 depends on
reliable energy access.
o Coal will remain pivotal,
complemented by renewables.
Mendel’s Work with Laws of Inheritance
Syllabus: GS3/Science and Technology
Context
A global team mapped pea genomic
diversity, advancing breeding research,
revisiting Mendel’s traits, and boosting
sustainable agriculture.
About
The research, which appears in the journal
Nature, is built on a collaboration between
the John Innes Centre (JIC) and the Chinese
Academy of Agricultural Sciences (CAAS),
together with other research groups in
China, the UK, USA, and France.
The research has connected more than 70
agronomic traits to corresponding genomic
locations.
o The many different genetic
markers at each of these locations
can be used to accelerate pea
improvement.
Their work has uncovered new insights into
the traits that Mendel famously studied and
revealed valuable genetic diversity.
Significance of the Study
The expanded gene bank and genomic
resources now available to researchers and
breeders worldwide have the potential to
transform pea breeding and advance
research into this environmentally vital
legume.
The study comes at a time when peas and
other legumes are being called upon as a
source of plant protein, and as sustainable
crops which can fix their own nitrogen.
It will pave the way for more predictive
breeding – such as using AI models which
can select combinations of genes to deliver
better yielding, disease resistant,
agronomically viable pea plants.
Mendel’s Experiments
Mendel is known as the father of
genetics because of his ground-breaking
work on inheritance in pea plants 150 years
ago.
200
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
operational efficiency, and ensures fair
pricing for all sectors.
Revival of Abandoned Coal Mines: India has
initiated policies to reopen abandoned and
discontinued coal mines through private
sector participation.
o It aims to optimize coal resources
while ensuring environmental
sustainability.
Push for Underground Coal
Mining: Incentives like waiving upfront
payments and reducing revenue share
requirements, to encourage private
investment and adoption of advanced
mining technologies.
Coal Gasification and Sustainable
Mining: India has set a target to gasify 100
million tonnes of coal by 2030, reducing
carbon emissions and fostering cleaner
energy solutions.
o Financial support and tax incentives
have been introduced to accelerate
coal gasification projects.
Tech-Driven Revolution: Coal Exchange and DigiCoal
India to launch its first coal trading
exchange for seamless, transparent access
and pricing.
DigiCoal initiative to digitize coal mines:
o 5G, AI monitoring, GPS
tracking, drone surveys
o Digital twins for operational safety
and efficiency.
Future Vision: Viksit Bharat 2047
From 1.10 MWh per capita electricity
consumption today to matching or
exceeding global averages.
India’s journey to a $5 trillion economy by
2030 and $35 trillion by 2047 depends on
reliable energy access.
o Coal will remain pivotal,
complemented by renewables.
Mendel’s Work with Laws of Inheritance
Syllabus: GS3/Science and Technology
Context
A global team mapped pea genomic
diversity, advancing breeding research,
revisiting Mendel’s traits, and boosting
sustainable agriculture.
About
The research, which appears in the journal
Nature, is built on a collaboration between
the John Innes Centre (JIC) and the Chinese
Academy of Agricultural Sciences (CAAS),
together with other research groups in
China, the UK, USA, and France.
The research has connected more than 70
agronomic traits to corresponding genomic
locations.
o The many different genetic
markers at each of these locations
can be used to accelerate pea
improvement.
Their work has uncovered new insights into
the traits that Mendel famously studied and
revealed valuable genetic diversity.
Significance of the Study
The expanded gene bank and genomic
resources now available to researchers and
breeders worldwide have the potential to
transform pea breeding and advance
research into this environmentally vital
legume.
The study comes at a time when peas and
other legumes are being called upon as a
source of plant protein, and as sustainable
crops which can fix their own nitrogen.
It will pave the way for more predictive
breeding – such as using AI models which
can select combinations of genes to deliver
better yielding, disease resistant,
agronomically viable pea plants.
Mendel’s Experiments
Mendel is known as the father of
genetics because of his ground-breaking
work on inheritance in pea plants 150 years
ago.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
201
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
He focused on seven traits: pea seed shape
(round or wrinkled), pea seed colour (green
or yellow), pod shape (constricted or
inflated), pod colour (green or yellow),
flower colour (purple or white), plant size
(tall or dwarf) and position of flowers (axial
or terminal).
Mendel chose pea plants because they have
easily observable traits (e.g., flower color,
seed shape), grow quickly, and can be self-
or cross-pollinated.
Over many years of experiments, involving
thousands of plants, he
established fundamental rules of
inheritance, how characteristics are passed
down through the generations, and single-
handedly laid the groundwork for the
science of genetics.
Mendel’s Laws of Inheritance
Law of Segregation: Each individual has two
alleles for a trait, but only one allele is
passed on to the offspring during gamete
formation.
o Traits are determined by pairs of
alleles.
o During meiosis, the two alleles
segregate (separate), so each
gamete receives only one allele.
Law of Independent Assortment: Genes for
different traits assort independently of one
another during gamete formation.
o The inheritance of one trait (e.g.,
plant height) does not affect the
inheritance of another trait (e.g.,
seed color), assuming the genes are
on different chromosomes.
o This explains the variety in traits
among offspring.
Law of Dominance: When two different
alleles are present in a pair, one (the
dominant allele) masks the expression of
the other (the recessive allele).
o In a heterozygous condition (e.g.,
Tt), the dominant trait (tallness) is
expressed, and the recessive trait
(shortness) is hidden.
Conclusion
Mendel’s work remained unnoticed until it
was rediscovered in 1900.
Today, his principles are the basis for
classical genetics, helping us understand
how traits are passed from one generation
to another.
Biostimulants
Syllabus: GS3/ S&T
In News
In a move to boost India’s agri-input
industry, the Government has registered 34
new biostimulants.
About Biostimulants
Biostimulants are substances or
microorganisms that enhance plant growth,
yield, and stress tolerance, but do not
directly provide nutrients like traditional
fertilisers.
Various types of biostimulants are seaweed
extracts, humic and fulvic acids, amino acids
& certain beneficial fungi and bacteria.
They are incorporated under the Fertiliser
Control Order (FCO) in 2021 as a distinct
category of fertilisers.
Indian Space Situational Assessment Report (ISSAR)
for 2024
201
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
He focused on seven traits: pea seed shape
(round or wrinkled), pea seed colour (green
or yellow), pod shape (constricted or
inflated), pod colour (green or yellow),
flower colour (purple or white), plant size
(tall or dwarf) and position of flowers (axial
or terminal).
Mendel chose pea plants because they have
easily observable traits (e.g., flower color,
seed shape), grow quickly, and can be self-
or cross-pollinated.
Over many years of experiments, involving
thousands of plants, he
established fundamental rules of
inheritance, how characteristics are passed
down through the generations, and single-
handedly laid the groundwork for the
science of genetics.
Mendel’s Laws of Inheritance
Law of Segregation: Each individual has two
alleles for a trait, but only one allele is
passed on to the offspring during gamete
formation.
o Traits are determined by pairs of
alleles.
o During meiosis, the two alleles
segregate (separate), so each
gamete receives only one allele.
Law of Independent Assortment: Genes for
different traits assort independently of one
another during gamete formation.
o The inheritance of one trait (e.g.,
plant height) does not affect the
inheritance of another trait (e.g.,
seed color), assuming the genes are
on different chromosomes.
o This explains the variety in traits
among offspring.
Law of Dominance: When two different
alleles are present in a pair, one (the
dominant allele) masks the expression of
the other (the recessive allele).
o In a heterozygous condition (e.g.,
Tt), the dominant trait (tallness) is
expressed, and the recessive trait
(shortness) is hidden.
Conclusion
Mendel’s work remained unnoticed until it
was rediscovered in 1900.
Today, his principles are the basis for
classical genetics, helping us understand
how traits are passed from one generation
to another.
Biostimulants
Syllabus: GS3/ S&T
In News
In a move to boost India’s agri-input
industry, the Government has registered 34
new biostimulants.
About Biostimulants
Biostimulants are substances or
microorganisms that enhance plant growth,
yield, and stress tolerance, but do not
directly provide nutrients like traditional
fertilisers.
Various types of biostimulants are seaweed
extracts, humic and fulvic acids, amino acids
& certain beneficial fungi and bacteria.
They are incorporated under the Fertiliser
Control Order (FCO) in 2021 as a distinct
category of fertilisers.
Indian Space Situational Assessment Report (ISSAR)
for 2024
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
202
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Syllabus: GS3/ Science and Technology
Context
The Indian Space Research Organisation
(ISRO) released the Indian Space Situational
Assessment Report (ISSAR) for 2024
compiled by ISRO System for Safe and
Sustainable Space Operations Management
(IS4OM).
Global Scenario
Record Number of Launches: 2024 recorded
261 launch attempts globally — the highest
since the space age began — with 254
successful launches that placed 2,963
objects in orbit, including 2,578 operational
satellites.
Lunar Ambitions Resurface: Five lunar
missions were launched in 2024, indicating
renewed global interest in lunar
exploration.
Space Debris from Break-ups: Three major
on-orbit break-up events occurred in 2024.
o A major incident involving China’s
Long March rocket (CZ-
6A) contributed ~650 catalogued
debris.
o Net addition of 702 fragmented
objects, significantly higher than the
69 in 2023.
Record Re-entries and Impact of Solar
Activity: 2,095 catalogued objects re-
entered Earth’s atmosphere.
Indian Scenario
Total Launched: 136 Indian spacecraft in
Earth orbit till 2024, including those from
private and academic institutions.
Operational Satellites: 22 in Low Earth Orbit
(LEO) and 31 in Geostationary Orbit (GEO).
Active deep space missions: Chandrayaan-2
Orbiter (CH2O)
o Aditya-L1 at Sun-Earth Lagrange
point.
o Chandrayaan-3 Propulsion Module,
relocated to a high Earth orbit.
Historical Debris: The PSLV-C3 upper stage,
which broke up in 2001, created 371 debris,
with 41 pieces still in orbit.
Satellite Re-entries: 31 Indian satellites have
decayed so far and 9 re-entered in 2024.
SECURITY AGENCIES IN INDIA
Terror Financing
Syllabus: GS3/ Security
In News
India has intensified its efforts to combat
terror financing and actively engage with
international financial institutions to curb
the misuse of such funds in supporting
terrorist activities.
More about the News
India is urging institutions like
the International Monetary Fund (IMF),
World Bank, and Asian Development Bank
(ADB) to review their financial aid to
Pakistan to ensure that development funds
are not diverted towards financing
terrorism.
India is advocating for Pakistan’s re-entry
into the Financial Action Task Force (FATF)
grey list, emphasizing the need for stringent
monitoring of its financial systems to
prevent terror financing.
Terror Financing
Definition: Terror financing involves the
provision of funds or financial support to
individual terrorists or terrorist
organizations. These funds can originate
from both legitimate and illegitimate
sources and are used to sustain terrorist
operations, including recruitment, training,
and execution of attacks.
Major Sources of Terror Financing:
o Hawala Transactions: An informal
method of transferring money
without physical movement, often
exploited to fund terrorist activities.
202
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Syllabus: GS3/ Science and Technology
Context
The Indian Space Research Organisation
(ISRO) released the Indian Space Situational
Assessment Report (ISSAR) for 2024
compiled by ISRO System for Safe and
Sustainable Space Operations Management
(IS4OM).
Global Scenario
Record Number of Launches: 2024 recorded
261 launch attempts globally — the highest
since the space age began — with 254
successful launches that placed 2,963
objects in orbit, including 2,578 operational
satellites.
Lunar Ambitions Resurface: Five lunar
missions were launched in 2024, indicating
renewed global interest in lunar
exploration.
Space Debris from Break-ups: Three major
on-orbit break-up events occurred in 2024.
o A major incident involving China’s
Long March rocket (CZ-
6A) contributed ~650 catalogued
debris.
o Net addition of 702 fragmented
objects, significantly higher than the
69 in 2023.
Record Re-entries and Impact of Solar
Activity: 2,095 catalogued objects re-
entered Earth’s atmosphere.
Indian Scenario
Total Launched: 136 Indian spacecraft in
Earth orbit till 2024, including those from
private and academic institutions.
Operational Satellites: 22 in Low Earth Orbit
(LEO) and 31 in Geostationary Orbit (GEO).
Active deep space missions: Chandrayaan-2
Orbiter (CH2O)
o Aditya-L1 at Sun-Earth Lagrange
point.
o Chandrayaan-3 Propulsion Module,
relocated to a high Earth orbit.
Historical Debris: The PSLV-C3 upper stage,
which broke up in 2001, created 371 debris,
with 41 pieces still in orbit.
Satellite Re-entries: 31 Indian satellites have
decayed so far and 9 re-entered in 2024.
SECURITY AGENCIES IN INDIA
Terror Financing
Syllabus: GS3/ Security
In News
India has intensified its efforts to combat
terror financing and actively engage with
international financial institutions to curb
the misuse of such funds in supporting
terrorist activities.
More about the News
India is urging institutions like
the International Monetary Fund (IMF),
World Bank, and Asian Development Bank
(ADB) to review their financial aid to
Pakistan to ensure that development funds
are not diverted towards financing
terrorism.
India is advocating for Pakistan’s re-entry
into the Financial Action Task Force (FATF)
grey list, emphasizing the need for stringent
monitoring of its financial systems to
prevent terror financing.
Terror Financing
Definition: Terror financing involves the
provision of funds or financial support to
individual terrorists or terrorist
organizations. These funds can originate
from both legitimate and illegitimate
sources and are used to sustain terrorist
operations, including recruitment, training,
and execution of attacks.
Major Sources of Terror Financing:
o Hawala Transactions: An informal
method of transferring money
without physical movement, often
exploited to fund terrorist activities.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
203
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Fake Currency: Circulation of
counterfeit currency undermines
the economy and provides
untraceable funds for terrorist
operations.
o Drug Trafficking: Illicit drug trade
serves as a significant revenue
stream for terrorist groups.
o Extortion and Kidnappings: Terrorist
organizations engage in extortion
and abductions to extract funds
from individuals and businesses.
o Charitable Organizations and
NGOs: Some entities are misused as
fronts to collect and channel funds
towards terrorist activities.
Challenges in Combating Terror Financing
Complex Financial Networks: Terrorist
groups utilize sophisticated and
decentralized financial systems, making
detection and disruption challenging.
Lack of International
Cooperation: Inadequate collaboration
among nations hampers the global fight
against terror financing.
Legal and Regulatory Gaps: Variations in
legal frameworks and enforcement
capabilities across countries create
loopholes exploited by terrorists.
Misuse of Technology: The rise of
cryptocurrencies and digital payment
systems offers anonymity, facilitating
untraceable transactions.
India’s Measures to Counter Terror Financing
Legislative Framework:
Unlawful Activities (Prevention) Act
(UAPA): Empowers authorities to designate
individuals and organizations as terrorists and
seize their assets.
Prevention of Money Laundering Act
(PMLA): Provides for the confiscation of property
derived from or involved in money laundering.
Institutional Mechanisms:
Financial Intelligence Unit (FIU-IND): Analyzes
suspicious financial transactions and disseminates
information to enforcement agencies.
National Investigation Agency (NIA): Investigates
and prosecutes offenses related to terrorism and its
financing.
International Collaboration:
Active participation in global forums like FATF and
the “No Money for Terror” (NMFT) conference to
enhance international cooperation.
Technological Advancements:
Implementation of the National Intelligence Grid
(NATGRID) to facilitate real-time information
sharing among security agencies.
Supreme Court Reviews PMLA Ruling, 2022
Syllabus: GS3/Challenges to Internal Security
Context
Recently, the Supreme Court of India has initiated a
review of its 2022 ruling on the Prevention of Money
Laundering Act (PMLA), which granted extensive
powers to the Directorate of Enforcement (ED).
About the PMLA 2002
It is India’s primary legislation to combat
money laundering and financial crimes,
enforced since July 1, 2005.
It empowers authorities to investigate,
prosecute, and confiscate assets linked to
illicit financial activities.
It aligns with global anti-money laundering
frameworks, including recommendations
from the Financial Action Task Force
(FATF).
Key Provisions of PMLA
Definition of Money Laundering: Money
laundering involves concealing, acquiring,
or using proceeds from criminal activities.
o The Act criminalizes direct or
indirect involvement in laundering
illicit funds.
203
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Fake Currency: Circulation of
counterfeit currency undermines
the economy and provides
untraceable funds for terrorist
operations.
o Drug Trafficking: Illicit drug trade
serves as a significant revenue
stream for terrorist groups.
o Extortion and Kidnappings: Terrorist
organizations engage in extortion
and abductions to extract funds
from individuals and businesses.
o Charitable Organizations and
NGOs: Some entities are misused as
fronts to collect and channel funds
towards terrorist activities.
Challenges in Combating Terror Financing
Complex Financial Networks: Terrorist
groups utilize sophisticated and
decentralized financial systems, making
detection and disruption challenging.
Lack of International
Cooperation: Inadequate collaboration
among nations hampers the global fight
against terror financing.
Legal and Regulatory Gaps: Variations in
legal frameworks and enforcement
capabilities across countries create
loopholes exploited by terrorists.
Misuse of Technology: The rise of
cryptocurrencies and digital payment
systems offers anonymity, facilitating
untraceable transactions.
India’s Measures to Counter Terror Financing
Legislative Framework:
Unlawful Activities (Prevention) Act
(UAPA): Empowers authorities to designate
individuals and organizations as terrorists and
seize their assets.
Prevention of Money Laundering Act
(PMLA): Provides for the confiscation of property
derived from or involved in money laundering.
Institutional Mechanisms:
Financial Intelligence Unit (FIU-IND): Analyzes
suspicious financial transactions and disseminates
information to enforcement agencies.
National Investigation Agency (NIA): Investigates
and prosecutes offenses related to terrorism and its
financing.
International Collaboration:
Active participation in global forums like FATF and
the “No Money for Terror” (NMFT) conference to
enhance international cooperation.
Technological Advancements:
Implementation of the National Intelligence Grid
(NATGRID) to facilitate real-time information
sharing among security agencies.
Supreme Court Reviews PMLA Ruling, 2022
Syllabus: GS3/Challenges to Internal Security
Context
Recently, the Supreme Court of India has initiated a
review of its 2022 ruling on the Prevention of Money
Laundering Act (PMLA), which granted extensive
powers to the Directorate of Enforcement (ED).
About the PMLA 2002
It is India’s primary legislation to combat
money laundering and financial crimes,
enforced since July 1, 2005.
It empowers authorities to investigate,
prosecute, and confiscate assets linked to
illicit financial activities.
It aligns with global anti-money laundering
frameworks, including recommendations
from the Financial Action Task Force
(FATF).
Key Provisions of PMLA
Definition of Money Laundering: Money
laundering involves concealing, acquiring,
or using proceeds from criminal activities.
o The Act criminalizes direct or
indirect involvement in laundering
illicit funds.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
204
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Enforcement and Investigative Powers:ED is
the primary agency responsible for
investigating and prosecuting money
laundering cases.
o Authorities can attach, freeze, and
confiscate assets linked to financial
crimes.
Obligations for Financial Institutions: Banks,
financial institutions, and intermediaries
must verify client identities, maintain
transaction records, and report suspicious
activities.
o Non-compliance can lead to
penalties and legal action.
Special Courts and Appeals: The Act
establishes Special Courts to handle money
laundering cases.
o Appeals can be filed before
the Appellate Tribunal and High
Court.
Key Issues Under Judicial Review
Access to Enforcement Case Information
Report (ECIR): The ECIR functions like an
FIR in money laundering cases but is not
shared with the accused, limiting
transparency.
o The Supreme Court’s 2022
ruling upheld the ED’s discretion to
withhold ECIR copies.
o A recent Supreme Court
judgment contradicts this stance,
stating that ECIR copies must be
shared, prompting reconsideration.
o It is argued that denying access to
ECIR violates fundamental rights,
making legal defense difficult.
Burden of Proof on the Accused: The burden
of proof shifts to the accused under PMLA,
requiring them to prove their innocence
rather than the prosecution establishing
guilt.
o It was argued that this undermines
due process and fair trial rights.
o The Supreme Court’s review may
reconsider this provision to align
with constitutional safeguards.
Expanding Scope of PMLA: Amendments
have broadened the definition of money
laundering, raising concerns about potential
misuse.
o The Act now covers predicate
offenses under various laws,
increasing compliance burdens.
Conclusion
While the PMLA strengthens financial crime
enforcement, concerns over ECIR access
and burden of proof highlight the need for
judicial scrutiny and legal reforms. Ensuring
transparency, fair trial rights, and
procedural safeguards will be crucial in
balancing enforcement powers with
constitutional protections.
Hybrid & Proxy Warfare
Syllabus: GS3/Security
Context
Recently, the Union Defence Minister
emphasized that India’s fight against
terrorism is now part of its National Defence
Doctrine, reinforcing its commitment to
eliminating hybrid and proxy threats.
Understanding Hybrid Warfare
It is designed to destabilize adversaries
without direct military confrontation. It
involves a mix of kinetic (traditional
military operations) and non-
kinetic (extends beyond usual military
operations) tactics, including:
o Cyber warfare: Attacks on critical
infrastructure, financial systems,
and government networks.
o Disinformation
campaigns: Manipulating public
perception through fake news and
propaganda.
o Economic coercion: Trade
restrictions, sanctions, and financial
manipulation.
204
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Enforcement and Investigative Powers:ED is
the primary agency responsible for
investigating and prosecuting money
laundering cases.
o Authorities can attach, freeze, and
confiscate assets linked to financial
crimes.
Obligations for Financial Institutions: Banks,
financial institutions, and intermediaries
must verify client identities, maintain
transaction records, and report suspicious
activities.
o Non-compliance can lead to
penalties and legal action.
Special Courts and Appeals: The Act
establishes Special Courts to handle money
laundering cases.
o Appeals can be filed before
the Appellate Tribunal and High
Court.
Key Issues Under Judicial Review
Access to Enforcement Case Information
Report (ECIR): The ECIR functions like an
FIR in money laundering cases but is not
shared with the accused, limiting
transparency.
o The Supreme Court’s 2022
ruling upheld the ED’s discretion to
withhold ECIR copies.
o A recent Supreme Court
judgment contradicts this stance,
stating that ECIR copies must be
shared, prompting reconsideration.
o It is argued that denying access to
ECIR violates fundamental rights,
making legal defense difficult.
Burden of Proof on the Accused: The burden
of proof shifts to the accused under PMLA,
requiring them to prove their innocence
rather than the prosecution establishing
guilt.
o It was argued that this undermines
due process and fair trial rights.
o The Supreme Court’s review may
reconsider this provision to align
with constitutional safeguards.
Expanding Scope of PMLA: Amendments
have broadened the definition of money
laundering, raising concerns about potential
misuse.
o The Act now covers predicate
offenses under various laws,
increasing compliance burdens.
Conclusion
While the PMLA strengthens financial crime
enforcement, concerns over ECIR access
and burden of proof highlight the need for
judicial scrutiny and legal reforms. Ensuring
transparency, fair trial rights, and
procedural safeguards will be crucial in
balancing enforcement powers with
constitutional protections.
Hybrid & Proxy Warfare
Syllabus: GS3/Security
Context
Recently, the Union Defence Minister
emphasized that India’s fight against
terrorism is now part of its National Defence
Doctrine, reinforcing its commitment to
eliminating hybrid and proxy threats.
Understanding Hybrid Warfare
It is designed to destabilize adversaries
without direct military confrontation. It
involves a mix of kinetic (traditional
military operations) and non-
kinetic (extends beyond usual military
operations) tactics, including:
o Cyber warfare: Attacks on critical
infrastructure, financial systems,
and government networks.
o Disinformation
campaigns: Manipulating public
perception through fake news and
propaganda.
o Economic coercion: Trade
restrictions, sanctions, and financial
manipulation.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
205
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Proxy conflicts: Supporting
insurgent groups or non-state actors
to destabilize adversaries.
The Russia-Ukraine conflict is a prime
example, where cyberattacks, drone
warfare, and economic sanctions have
played a crucial role.
Understanding Proxy Warfare: Indirect Conflict
Through Third Parties
Proxy warfare involves state or non-state
actors supporting armed groups or
insurgencies to achieve strategic objectives
without direct involvement.
India has consistently faced cross-border
terrorism, with Pakistan-backed groups
engaging in proxy conflicts.
Pakistan’s Proxy War Against India:
o Cross-Border Terrorism targeting
Indian security forces and civilians.
o Drug and Weapon Smuggling into
Punjab, aiming to create internal
disturbances.
India’s Response to Hybrid & Proxy Warfare
Key Insights on India’s Hybrid Warfare Strategy
Aspect Current Threats
Preparedness
Measures
Cyber Warfare
State-sponsored
attacks (e.g.,
Chinese
malware,
Pegasus)
CERT-In,
Defence Cyber
Agency, Cyber
Security Policy
Information
Warfare
Fake news,
disinfo
campaigns, deep
fakes
PIB fact-check
unit, Draft
Digital India
Bill (2023)
Terrorism / Proxy
Warfare
Cross-border
terrorism,
insurgent
funding
NIA, UAPA
strengthening,
FATF
compliance
Military Doctrine
Gray zone ops,
maritime salami
slicing
Theatre
commands, tri-
service
exercises, DSA
Legal/Institutional
Gaps
No unified
hybrid warfare
law or body
Need for
national hybrid
warfare policy
Strengthening Cyber Defenses: Enhancing
cybersecurity infrastructure to prevent
cyber espionage and attacks.
Military Modernization: Investing and
Strengthening cyber defenses, AI-based
warfare, electromagnetic warfare, and
space-based security.
Institutional Reforms: Like Chief of Defence
Staff (CDS), Integrated Battle Groups (IBGs)
and Military Theaterisation etc.
Intelligence Agencies: Research and Analysis
Wing (RAW), Intelligence Bureau (IB), and
National Technical Research Organisation
(NTRO).
Strategic Partnerships: Collaborating with
global allies to counter misinformation and
economic coercion.
o Example: Quadrilateral Security
Dialogue (QUAD)
Disinformation Concerns in India
Syllabus: GS3/Cybersecurity
Context
During the recent India-Pakistan
crisis, misinformation was spread in social
media platforms.
About
Lokniti-CSDS on ‘Media in India: Access,
Practices, Concerns and Effects’ (2022)
indicated that misinformation on social
media platforms significantly affects public
perception, trust, and behaviour.
o It revealed widespread
concern about the spread of fake
news and inaccurate information
online.
205
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Proxy conflicts: Supporting
insurgent groups or non-state actors
to destabilize adversaries.
The Russia-Ukraine conflict is a prime
example, where cyberattacks, drone
warfare, and economic sanctions have
played a crucial role.
Understanding Proxy Warfare: Indirect Conflict
Through Third Parties
Proxy warfare involves state or non-state
actors supporting armed groups or
insurgencies to achieve strategic objectives
without direct involvement.
India has consistently faced cross-border
terrorism, with Pakistan-backed groups
engaging in proxy conflicts.
Pakistan’s Proxy War Against India:
o Cross-Border Terrorism targeting
Indian security forces and civilians.
o Drug and Weapon Smuggling into
Punjab, aiming to create internal
disturbances.
India’s Response to Hybrid & Proxy Warfare
Key Insights on India’s Hybrid Warfare Strategy
Aspect Current Threats
Preparedness
Measures
Cyber Warfare
State-sponsored
attacks (e.g.,
Chinese
malware,
Pegasus)
CERT-In,
Defence Cyber
Agency, Cyber
Security Policy
Information
Warfare
Fake news,
disinfo
campaigns, deep
fakes
PIB fact-check
unit, Draft
Digital India
Bill (2023)
Terrorism / Proxy
Warfare
Cross-border
terrorism,
insurgent
funding
NIA, UAPA
strengthening,
FATF
compliance
Military Doctrine
Gray zone ops,
maritime salami
slicing
Theatre
commands, tri-
service
exercises, DSA
Legal/Institutional
Gaps
No unified
hybrid warfare
law or body
Need for
national hybrid
warfare policy
Strengthening Cyber Defenses: Enhancing
cybersecurity infrastructure to prevent
cyber espionage and attacks.
Military Modernization: Investing and
Strengthening cyber defenses, AI-based
warfare, electromagnetic warfare, and
space-based security.
Institutional Reforms: Like Chief of Defence
Staff (CDS), Integrated Battle Groups (IBGs)
and Military Theaterisation etc.
Intelligence Agencies: Research and Analysis
Wing (RAW), Intelligence Bureau (IB), and
National Technical Research Organisation
(NTRO).
Strategic Partnerships: Collaborating with
global allies to counter misinformation and
economic coercion.
o Example: Quadrilateral Security
Dialogue (QUAD)
Disinformation Concerns in India
Syllabus: GS3/Cybersecurity
Context
During the recent India-Pakistan
crisis, misinformation was spread in social
media platforms.
About
Lokniti-CSDS on ‘Media in India: Access,
Practices, Concerns and Effects’ (2022)
indicated that misinformation on social
media platforms significantly affects public
perception, trust, and behaviour.
o It revealed widespread
concern about the spread of fake
news and inaccurate information
online.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
206
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
The Reuters Institute’s 2024 Digital News
Report reveals a significant shift in how
Indians access news.
o Over 70% of respondents are
preferring online media and nearly
half are relying on social media
platforms such as YouTube (54%)
and WhatsApp (48%).
The WEF Global Risks Report
2024 identifies India as highly vulnerable to
misinformation.
o Key drivers: AI-generated content,
unregulated influencer content and
algorithm-driven social media
platforms.
India’s Disinformation Challenge:
Growing Internet Penetration: India is on
track to surpass 900 million internet users,
making it highly vulnerable to
disinformation without appropriate
regulations.
Diverse Landscape, High Risk: India’s
political, social, and linguistic diversity
creates fertile ground for manipulated
narratives, voter influence, and social
unrest.
Beyond Politics: Disinformation contributes
to consumer boycotts, economic conflicts,
international tensions.
Decline of Legacy Media Trust: Public trust
in traditional news sources is eroding.
o Citizens increasingly rely on social
media for news.
o Unverified information spreads
rapidly, often trusted because it
comes from friends or family.
Youth at Risk: India’s youth demographic is
increasingly exposed to misinformation.
o Many lack digital literacy and media
consumption skills.
Gaps in Content Regulation: Despite
Ministry of Consumer Affairs’ guidelines,
health and fitness reels often blur the line
between paid and organic content.
o Influencers frequently use shock
tactics, half-truths, and emotional
manipulation for virality.
Legal and Regulatory Landscape
Constitutional Limits: Article 19(1)(a)
guarantees freedom of speech.
o Article 19(2) allows restrictions for
defamation, morality, and public
order.
o The need to balance free
speech (Article 19(1)(a))
with reasonable restrictions (Article
19(2)) is challenging.
Existing Legal Tools: Consumer Protection
Act, 2019 bans misleading ads, holds
influencers accountable.
o The IT Act (Sections 66 &
67) penalizes harmful digital
content.
o Intermediary Guidelines, 2021 and
e-commerce rules reinforce
transparency and accountability.
o Defamation laws protect individuals
and brands from false or
exaggerated content.
o Self-Regulation: Advertising
Standards Council of India (ASCI)
guidelines set advertising ethics but
lack legal force; non-compliance
leads to blacklisting/public
reprimand.
o SEBI and RBI regulate influencers
and financial content online.
Recommended Measures to Combat Disinformation
in India (Global Risks Report 2025)
Strengthening Technical Capacity &
Oversight: Upskill algorithm developers
to reduce bias and manipulation in AI
systems.
o Establish AI supervisory boards and
councils to monitor and regulate
generative AI practices.
206
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
The Reuters Institute’s 2024 Digital News
Report reveals a significant shift in how
Indians access news.
o Over 70% of respondents are
preferring online media and nearly
half are relying on social media
platforms such as YouTube (54%)
and WhatsApp (48%).
The WEF Global Risks Report
2024 identifies India as highly vulnerable to
misinformation.
o Key drivers: AI-generated content,
unregulated influencer content and
algorithm-driven social media
platforms.
India’s Disinformation Challenge:
Growing Internet Penetration: India is on
track to surpass 900 million internet users,
making it highly vulnerable to
disinformation without appropriate
regulations.
Diverse Landscape, High Risk: India’s
political, social, and linguistic diversity
creates fertile ground for manipulated
narratives, voter influence, and social
unrest.
Beyond Politics: Disinformation contributes
to consumer boycotts, economic conflicts,
international tensions.
Decline of Legacy Media Trust: Public trust
in traditional news sources is eroding.
o Citizens increasingly rely on social
media for news.
o Unverified information spreads
rapidly, often trusted because it
comes from friends or family.
Youth at Risk: India’s youth demographic is
increasingly exposed to misinformation.
o Many lack digital literacy and media
consumption skills.
Gaps in Content Regulation: Despite
Ministry of Consumer Affairs’ guidelines,
health and fitness reels often blur the line
between paid and organic content.
o Influencers frequently use shock
tactics, half-truths, and emotional
manipulation for virality.
Legal and Regulatory Landscape
Constitutional Limits: Article 19(1)(a)
guarantees freedom of speech.
o Article 19(2) allows restrictions for
defamation, morality, and public
order.
o The need to balance free
speech (Article 19(1)(a))
with reasonable restrictions (Article
19(2)) is challenging.
Existing Legal Tools: Consumer Protection
Act, 2019 bans misleading ads, holds
influencers accountable.
o The IT Act (Sections 66 &
67) penalizes harmful digital
content.
o Intermediary Guidelines, 2021 and
e-commerce rules reinforce
transparency and accountability.
o Defamation laws protect individuals
and brands from false or
exaggerated content.
o Self-Regulation: Advertising
Standards Council of India (ASCI)
guidelines set advertising ethics but
lack legal force; non-compliance
leads to blacklisting/public
reprimand.
o SEBI and RBI regulate influencers
and financial content online.
Recommended Measures to Combat Disinformation
in India (Global Risks Report 2025)
Strengthening Technical Capacity &
Oversight: Upskill algorithm developers
to reduce bias and manipulation in AI
systems.
o Establish AI supervisory boards and
councils to monitor and regulate
generative AI practices.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
207
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Mandate regular risk assessments
by digital platforms, especially those
using AI.
Boosting Public Awareness & Digital
Literacy: Expand digital literacy campaigns
to help citizens identify and resist
disinformation.
o Promote critical thinking through
educational reforms and public
outreach.
Regulating Big Tech Platforms: Leverage
India’s status as the largest market for
platforms like Facebook and WhatsApp to
demand accountability.
Protecting Press Freedom: Pass stronger
laws to protect journalists and
whistleblowers from intimidation and
digital harassment.
Building Global and Regional
Alliances: Promote cross-border coalitions
to respond to the global nature of
disinformation.
o Share best practices, threat
intelligence, and regulatory
frameworks with allies and
international bodies.
Conclusion
Disinformation isn’t just a tech issue—it’s
a threat to democracy, diversity, and truth.
Without public awareness and strong policy
measures, disinformation will deepen
political and societal divisions.
This trend underscores the pivotal role that
social media platforms play, and the urgent
need to promote media literacy, critical
thinking, and accountability to help people
identify reliable information.
SPACE
Lupex Mission
Syllabus: GS3/Space
Context
India and Japan are set to enter the design
phase of the Lunar Polar Exploration
(LUPEX) mission, also referred to
as Chandrayaan-5.
About the Mission
Objective: To conduct detailed exploration
of the Moon’s south polar region, especially
focusing on water ice deposits.
Mission life: Approved by the Cabinet in
March this year, the mission is proposed to
be for 3.5 months (100 days).
Lander and Rover: ISRO is developing the
lander, while JAXA is building and
programming the 350-kg rover to traverse
the lunar surface and climb slopes up to 25
degrees.
Tamil Nadu Adopted a Space Sector Policy
Syllabus: GS3/Space
Context
Tamil Nadu Cabinet approved the Space
Industrial Policy, thereby following
Karnataka and Gujarat in formulating a
State-specific document.
About
Aim: To stimulate development and attract
investments in the space sector.
In 2023, the Union government came out
with the Indian Space Policy 2023 to provide
a framework to support the space
ecosystem.
The Indian National Space Promotion and
Authorisation Centre (IN-SPACe) had
207
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
o Mandate regular risk assessments
by digital platforms, especially those
using AI.
Boosting Public Awareness & Digital
Literacy: Expand digital literacy campaigns
to help citizens identify and resist
disinformation.
o Promote critical thinking through
educational reforms and public
outreach.
Regulating Big Tech Platforms: Leverage
India’s status as the largest market for
platforms like Facebook and WhatsApp to
demand accountability.
Protecting Press Freedom: Pass stronger
laws to protect journalists and
whistleblowers from intimidation and
digital harassment.
Building Global and Regional
Alliances: Promote cross-border coalitions
to respond to the global nature of
disinformation.
o Share best practices, threat
intelligence, and regulatory
frameworks with allies and
international bodies.
Conclusion
Disinformation isn’t just a tech issue—it’s
a threat to democracy, diversity, and truth.
Without public awareness and strong policy
measures, disinformation will deepen
political and societal divisions.
This trend underscores the pivotal role that
social media platforms play, and the urgent
need to promote media literacy, critical
thinking, and accountability to help people
identify reliable information.
SPACE
Lupex Mission
Syllabus: GS3/Space
Context
India and Japan are set to enter the design
phase of the Lunar Polar Exploration
(LUPEX) mission, also referred to
as Chandrayaan-5.
About the Mission
Objective: To conduct detailed exploration
of the Moon’s south polar region, especially
focusing on water ice deposits.
Mission life: Approved by the Cabinet in
March this year, the mission is proposed to
be for 3.5 months (100 days).
Lander and Rover: ISRO is developing the
lander, while JAXA is building and
programming the 350-kg rover to traverse
the lunar surface and climb slopes up to 25
degrees.
Tamil Nadu Adopted a Space Sector Policy
Syllabus: GS3/Space
Context
Tamil Nadu Cabinet approved the Space
Industrial Policy, thereby following
Karnataka and Gujarat in formulating a
State-specific document.
About
Aim: To stimulate development and attract
investments in the space sector.
In 2023, the Union government came out
with the Indian Space Policy 2023 to provide
a framework to support the space
ecosystem.
The Indian National Space Promotion and
Authorisation Centre (IN-SPACe) had
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
208
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
suggested to the State government to come
out with a document.
o IN-SPACe is created by the
Department of Space at the Centre
for promoting, authorising and
overseeing the activities of Non-
Government Entities (NGEs) in the
sector.
Key Highlights of the TN Policy
Aim: Aimed at attracting ₹10,000 crore
investments in the next five years and
generation of direct and indirect
employment for nearly 10,000 persons in
the given period.
The State government would provide
a payroll subsidy for companies that
are involved in R&D or that would
establish global capability centres in the
space sector.
The government will also notify select
regions as Space Bays for offering structured
packages of incentives to firms that plan to
do investments below ₹300 crore.
Space industrial park developers will be
eligible for an industrial housing incentive
of 10% on the cost of developing residential
facilities within the industrial park over 10
years, subject to a ceiling of ₹10 crore.
o Those undertaking green and
sustainable initiatives will be eligible
for a 25% subsidy on the cost of
capital for such initiatives, subject to
a ceiling of ₹5 crore.
The Indian Space Policy – 2023
Vision: To enhance India’s space
capabilities, enable a robust commercial
presence, promote international
cooperation, and leverage space technology
for Socio-economic development, National
security, Environmental protection and
Scientific advancement.
Applicability:
o Covers all space activities
originating from or involving Indian
territory or jurisdiction.
o Implementation will be governed by
detailed directives issued by DoS.
Strategy: Encourage full-spectrum private
sector participation in the space economy
(satellites, ground systems, services, etc.).
o Allow public and private users to
procure space services freely.
Role of Non-Governmental Entities (NGEs): NGEs
are permitted to:
Design, launch, and operate satellites and launch
vehicles.
Provide communication, remote sensing, navigation
services.
Build and operate ground stations.
Develop space transportation, space situational
awareness, and recovery systems.
Conduct asteroid/space resource mining and
commercialize it.
Collaborate internationally and engage in human
spaceflight.
Must comply with IN-SPACe regulations.
Roles and responsibilities of Various Organizations
Under the Policy:
IN-SPACe (Indian National Space Promotion and
Authorization Center): It is an autonomous single-
window agency responsible for:
Authorizing all government and private space
activities.
Issuing operational guidelines.
Promoting industry clusters, incubation centers,
and accelerators.
Ensuring fair access to public infrastructure.
Enabling NGE participation in space exploration.
Handling safety, liability, and dispute resolution.
Facilitating technology transfer from ISRO to
private players.
Approving remote sensing data dissemination and
launch manifests.
208
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
suggested to the State government to come
out with a document.
o IN-SPACe is created by the
Department of Space at the Centre
for promoting, authorising and
overseeing the activities of Non-
Government Entities (NGEs) in the
sector.
Key Highlights of the TN Policy
Aim: Aimed at attracting ₹10,000 crore
investments in the next five years and
generation of direct and indirect
employment for nearly 10,000 persons in
the given period.
The State government would provide
a payroll subsidy for companies that
are involved in R&D or that would
establish global capability centres in the
space sector.
The government will also notify select
regions as Space Bays for offering structured
packages of incentives to firms that plan to
do investments below ₹300 crore.
Space industrial park developers will be
eligible for an industrial housing incentive
of 10% on the cost of developing residential
facilities within the industrial park over 10
years, subject to a ceiling of ₹10 crore.
o Those undertaking green and
sustainable initiatives will be eligible
for a 25% subsidy on the cost of
capital for such initiatives, subject to
a ceiling of ₹5 crore.
The Indian Space Policy – 2023
Vision: To enhance India’s space
capabilities, enable a robust commercial
presence, promote international
cooperation, and leverage space technology
for Socio-economic development, National
security, Environmental protection and
Scientific advancement.
Applicability:
o Covers all space activities
originating from or involving Indian
territory or jurisdiction.
o Implementation will be governed by
detailed directives issued by DoS.
Strategy: Encourage full-spectrum private
sector participation in the space economy
(satellites, ground systems, services, etc.).
o Allow public and private users to
procure space services freely.
Role of Non-Governmental Entities (NGEs): NGEs
are permitted to:
Design, launch, and operate satellites and launch
vehicles.
Provide communication, remote sensing, navigation
services.
Build and operate ground stations.
Develop space transportation, space situational
awareness, and recovery systems.
Conduct asteroid/space resource mining and
commercialize it.
Collaborate internationally and engage in human
spaceflight.
Must comply with IN-SPACe regulations.
Roles and responsibilities of Various Organizations
Under the Policy:
IN-SPACe (Indian National Space Promotion and
Authorization Center): It is an autonomous single-
window agency responsible for:
Authorizing all government and private space
activities.
Issuing operational guidelines.
Promoting industry clusters, incubation centers,
and accelerators.
Ensuring fair access to public infrastructure.
Enabling NGE participation in space exploration.
Handling safety, liability, and dispute resolution.
Facilitating technology transfer from ISRO to
private players.
Approving remote sensing data dissemination and
launch manifests.
PM IAS ACADEMY MAY CA Compilation 2025
209
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO)
refocused on:
R&D in new space technologies, human spaceflight,
and scientific exploration.
Transitioning operational space systems to
industry.
Providing open access to remote sensing data.
Supporting academia and industry collaboration.
Enabling long-term human presence in space.
NewSpace India Limited (NSIL): Acts as
the commercial arm of the Department of Space:
o Commercializes space technologies
developed by ISRO.
o Manufactures and procures space
assets.
o Serves both government and private
sector clients on commercial terms.
Department of Space (DoS): Acts as
the policy coordinator:
o Ensures smooth role distribution
among stakeholders.
o Oversees implementation of the
policy.
o Coordinates international
cooperation and compliance.
o Ensures safe operations and
resolves disputes.
o Maintains global standards and
interoperability in navigation
systems.
Significance
It redefined ISRO’s role to focus on
innovation and R&D.
Empowering private industry with end-to-
end operational rights.
Establishing a transparent and
structured regulatory regime.
Aligning with international best
practices and sustainability.
209
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO)
refocused on:
R&D in new space technologies, human spaceflight,
and scientific exploration.
Transitioning operational space systems to
industry.
Providing open access to remote sensing data.
Supporting academia and industry collaboration.
Enabling long-term human presence in space.
NewSpace India Limited (NSIL): Acts as
the commercial arm of the Department of Space:
o Commercializes space technologies
developed by ISRO.
o Manufactures and procures space
assets.
o Serves both government and private
sector clients on commercial terms.
Department of Space (DoS): Acts as
the policy coordinator:
o Ensures smooth role distribution
among stakeholders.
o Oversees implementation of the
policy.
o Coordinates international
cooperation and compliance.
o Ensures safe operations and
resolves disputes.
o Maintains global standards and
interoperability in navigation
systems.
Significance
It redefined ISRO’s role to focus on
innovation and R&D.
Empowering private industry with end-to-
end operational rights.
Establishing a transparent and
structured regulatory regime.
Aligning with international best
practices and sustainability.
Download
Download Slideshow Get the original presentation fileQuick Actions
Statistics
- Views 2
- Slides 184
- Age 72 days
Related Slideshows
11
8-top-ai-courses-for-customer-support-representatives-in-2025.pptx
JeroenErne2
50 views
10
7-essential-ai-courses-for-call-center-supervisors-in-2025.pptx
JeroenErne2
49 views
13
25-essential-ai-courses-for-user-support-specialists-in-2025.pptx
JeroenErne2
38 views
11
8-essential-ai-courses-for-insurance-customer-service-representatives-in-2025.pptx
JeroenErne2
38 views
21
Know for Certain
DaveSinNM
24 views
17
PPT OPD LES 3ertt4t4tqqqe23e3e3rq2qq232.pptx
novasedanayoga46
27 views